me | | tae ded Vay pent” ne ee von ne S ae ot >| Ait ty TS MS ee mal ui ne ’ wiy be bhp Pol | Pe A Te: S, segs Cat ll | pie rT 1 ae Wes | ovwe y ai RA wel bien cat Sei TLL PALE | notre ma aivamon ernedlnseewaetevPecan WPNIUUUSUE Tere 3 ee, fo “! wv bah | Tob dtlih a errs: fa ee al BD ee peat eel To bi Taparey' er es Mi aed lives ¥. i. SASEd Me 3: te | ] sara TM Werte were meettncrn ety jee) aude Nia Sd e as Se ge) ntl aes ee Oe ee PT ler “ ee er ae —-_ . we - _) -_— # = ae | le ae - a ee le a ae 2 na Be tye ie? shee T. | a ek GaP 14 hee hd | WhAsee so. agge ry beet BELT TET a ao BERET LHL Dy Piha a ean tT Lie ee by | et WT HT wot" CUUEN UV fyi (dood bel De Das ¥gu “Ay Nyy ; ml PeLHEEELLEL AA ’ \e | | int eb bob pegges*Wuure : Waid v~ wait» SY Ted V7 ¥ 4 y v s : Nf 4u os et ee >. us wt Orne ns ) eee eres ~ T > ro « ad be 4 ' ; ‘ debe ia.t 4 tht" eae oD =e nen geewee be HATTA yy CET C ND ge Tithe jamweree.” ~a@ vw i ee OB is nN - 6 ity, vn \ L ‘ ‘ S mn Vy) rai! Ni ewe EIEN C mm Vu Vuuren, BUTS yreysy oy oe ¢, 5 J »” ; 1 he wae Cee ‘ WM hh : PAY ATT Neha PAL vcd lt iS bed x bbb Sa ‘ Nee rere tll nal “\ é Snell WA ts Ses AA hae ” a OY vray rover! vay, bSUIGY SA bX call envi! £ Heel) MAU TP LUT Tt a Wate Tet fe de Werte ee ~~ SI eS ees te. §0 so, ~~ Ye) ss et es | : iow trey VE | mbt Sh lbbahe | swt UTs ne | ; why APM Le ( is 1; ae. eC eC ek MN crtysc ccc MmMNE SSC GOTT U | cacesteee | Dim LULA) McLee see A ea RMU Ef « oH . ¥ Ge : HARA ~ ye Pun vvawe é | a i? 1g wel SS we | Serene y #; Tinie ay NA w wd aS meets. | a ad Se Se o‘Wwerne a vs MY alddd ! 4 Tes a i es paler et tli Wee _ ‘ AS kim AAs is Nravsrvtury ait eee: nese SSPRN TD) eT ge v 4 | wf a ad Oe ces ~~. owe I Wie nantes : a fflitean IN A OL Toute : Metal reuy acount se cat | iy , wu’ Mis outs SRA OI meV ~ @ : & Vie Dette wn bore ¥ CW =e Cwatt t bl | MMs TTT] MOA inet Oh. TT Seas PASS AA we Yi Geap ‘vi +h Or) | } 3 Nay Ces at 4 see > Vs ue > eee MWe eis Tie, ed Ld Lh! | | | , Th We Sy Wn tee PENT “eel pee ess 1} We bo gg ee “4 v . % My ALi Son teres. vretttyay | ea ad aa wt Cee ne S SeeMee > mae eSGE rey A 3 Tey : uY fe wee Diy ie vEGs The ieUuy mh 4 he sree ' Vyuev we Oe hn Mi As | LAAN ~ reetyeettt nin, Se romaine aetna) HP recur, Rise ETT ™~ weber teen IT ayy 4 Wes wm OH Ge i SS! CR Vee nee rae oe, » aren a aie Ade et Sag ee , q > +7 iia , e ) ar i t - 9 yan foyiignee. i ‘ X - 7 ‘ ae. | | 1 thee lt ih " 4 J : a A A) 4 oc we ee ee. io a ~ - oe , ul 5 ‘ re ere rif * < oe , . eae b _ r 2 -s t : a “OF ae - AOYAL SOCIETY of SOUTH AUSTRALIA (INCORPORATED). 3 NE KO Ey ee ik ed ine [Winn FRONTISPIECE, ee Paces; AND FIFTEEN . Renae IN THE TEXT. | __ EDITED BY PROFESSOR WALTER HOWCHIN, EGS. _ \ oe > Astisten ny ARTHUR M, LEAD EES. os PRICE, Pint REN OHTLLINGS: Adelarwe : DECEMBER, 24, 1919. ee > | Prinrep 3 BY Hussay & Gin~tineHAm Limirep, 106 anp 108, Currixz on 7 Ri SrREer, ADELAIDE, Sourn AusTRALta. Parcels for ‘transmission to the Royal Society of South Aue- tralia from the United States of America can be forwarded aereovet the Smithsonian institution, Washington, D.C. ae oY TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINGS OF THE ROVAL SOCIETY of SOUTH AUSTRALIA (INCORPORATED). 2 > ——— Vi Ges fe exes eT [Wits Frontispiece, Forty-two PuatEs, AND FIFTEEN Figures 1n THE TEXT. | EDITED BY PROFESSOR WALTER HOWCHIN, F.G.S., | Assistep sy ARTHUR M. LEA, F.E:S. iG oP be Ne Sis LN GS: Adelame : PUBLISHED BY THE Society, Royau Society Rooms, NortH TERRACE. DECEMBER 24, 1919. PrinteD BY Hussry & GinuineHam Limitrep, 106 anp 108, CurRix STREET, ADELAIDE, SoutTH AUSTRALIA. > Parcels for transmission to the Royal Society of South Aue- tralia from the United States of America can be forwarded through the Smithsonian institution, Washington, D.C. \ Vi. Ropal Society ot South. Australia (INCORPORATED). Patron: HIS EXCELLENCY SIR HENRY LIONEL GALWAY, K.C.M.G., D.S.O. OFFICERS FOR 1914-20. President: SIR JOSEPH C. VERCO, M.D., F.R.C:S. WVice=Presidents: EH. ASHBY, F.1.S57 Mian: MAJOR R. H. PULLEINHE, M.B. 7 bon. Treasurer: i W. B. POOLE. ‘bon. Secretary: WALTER RUTT, C.E. Members of Council: PROF. T. G. B. OSBORN, M.Sc. PROF. R. W. CHAPMAN, M.A.,.:B:C_E., F Bigs PROF. WALTER HOWCHIN, F.G.S. (Editor and Representative ; Governor). PROF. E. H. RENNIE, M.A., D.Sc., F.C.S. LIEUT.-COLONEL R. S. ROGERS, M.A.. M.D. CAPT. S. A. WHITE, C:M.B Oar bon. Auditors: W. L. WARE, J.P. H. WHITBREAD. Vil. ; CO NT Eo Ne S: DESCRIPTION OF PLATE XI. Fig. 1. Portion of shell and girdle of Kopionella, n. gen., matthewsi, Iredale, x25, showing oar-headed spicules mmerrdle |p. 71. la. Girdle of same, %x100, showing oar-headed spicules, sutural spicules, and fringe spicules. 2. Shell of Zostericola, n. gen., pilsbryanus, Bednall, x9, p. 66. 2a. Anterior valve of same. », 2b. Median valve of same. ,, 2c. Inside of median valve of same. » 93 Shell of Rhyssopplax torrianus, H. and H., var. klemi, Miva ete x 42, oy oe 3) NotEe.—The enlargements are only approximate. 74 A NEW SPECIES OF AGANIPPE FROM KANGAROO ISLAND By R. H. PuLieine, M.B. [Read July 11, 1919.] PuatTE XII. AGANIPPE RAINBOWI, 0. sp. Q. Described from living specimen. Cephalo-thorax, 5 mm. long, 455 mm. broad. Cephalo-thorax :—Obovate, nearly as broad as long, black or very dark brown, shining, entirely devoid of hairs except two or three stiff ones between the eyes. . Pars cephalica:—Elevated, arched, distinct segmental groove. Ocular area:—Twice as broad as long, raised, arched, and provided with bristles. Clypeus:—Narrow, sinuate, sloping forward, weakly indented at middle. Pars thoracica:—Broad, fully curved at sides, sloping backwards, well-marked radial grooves. Fovea:—Deep, short, procurved. Marginal band :—Wardly sinuate, bare of hairs. EHyes:—Front row very slightly recurved, the laterals equal in size or slightly larger than medians, are elevated on black bases, looking forwards and outwards. The medians, separated by rather more than their diameter from the laterals, are not elevated, and are separated from each other by one-half the diameter of a median eye. Posterior row procurved. The laterals are the larger, nearly equal in size to the antero laterals. They also are raised on elevated bases, looking backwards and outwards. The medians are small and not elevated, their inner border is convex, and their flat outer border is in contact with the base of the corresponding postero lateral. The distance between the postero medians is exactly that of the extreme outward limit of the antero medians. ; Legs:—Similar in colour to thorax; relative lengths, 4, 1, 2, 3; the two anterior pairs armed with long black spines, 5 metatarsi, and tarsi of 1 and 2 scopulate. Tarsal claws well developed. Two posterior pairs less robust, clothed with long stiff hairs and an occasional spine. Palpi :—Concolourous with legs, robust, clothed- with stiff hairs and bristles, tarsal joint scopulate. 75 Falces :—Black, shining, well domed, forward. Teeth of rastellum minute, shining, brown. Fang long, curved. Maadlae:—Warm, yellowish-brown, _ furnished over greater part with regularly-set short dark spines, and sparsi thin black hairs. Jnner-margin clothed with dense long silky hairs or reddish-brown colour. Labium :—About as broad as long, beset with about 20 short stout black spines in its central area. Sternum:—Pale yellowish- brown, slightly arched, sparsely clothed with black hairs; broadly pyriform with well-marked margin. Posterior sigilla, circular away from margin. Abdomen :—Dark brown, short, as broad as long, densely clothed with dark hairs, raised on papillary bases, giving the surface a markedly shagreened appearance. No dorsal design apparent. There are two well-marked circular lateral pits near the anterior margin of the dorsum, which slightly over- hangs the cephalo-thorax. Under-surface lighter towards centre, clothed as on upper-surface with hairs arranged more or less in transverse lines. Posterior lung sacs large, trans- versely ovate, sparsely clothed with fine curved black hairs. Spinnerets :—Concolourous, superior pair slightly longer than inferior pair and about half as broad at the base. do. Described from dried specimen. Cephalo-thorax, 4 mm. broad, 4 mm. long; abdomen, 4 mm. long. Cephalo-thorax:—More circular than in the female, flatter, less elevated in front. Fovea:—Short, procurved, radial markings indistinct. Hye:—Formula identical with that of female, but eye area not bristled. Whole surface of thorax finely granular instead of polished, well-marked sinuate marginal border. Legs:—More slender, lengths 4, 1, 2, 3; armature of strong spines, clothing less marked, no tibial mypophysis. Palpi :—Brownish-black, no tibial apophysis, tibial joint large and inflated, unarmed, and sparsely clothed. Bulb concolourous, highly polished, stigma narrow, twisted, termin- ating in filiform style. _._ This is much the smallest species of Aganippe yet dis- covered. Several females and one male were collected in May, 1919, at American River, Kangaroo Island, South Australia. American River, so called, is really a deep bay nearly dividing Kangaroo Island in two. The species was found close to the main settlement in rubbly clay banks, just above high-water mark, and at high tides the nests must be very close to, if not in actual contact, with the salt water. The nests are abundant and in places 76 crowded together, so that a few cubic inches of clay will con- tain several nests. The male, which unfortunately became dried, was in a nest like the females. | The largest nest taken is 6 cm. in total depth, straight, and densely lined. The aperture, which has a lumen of 8 mm., is closed by a stout, circular door with an attachment of one-fourth its circumference to the tube. The door is flat on the under-surface and roughly heaped up on the outer- surface. The total width of door 15 mm. wide, 11 mm. from hinge to front. In one nest twenty young were found with the female, but in none were egg-cases found. Another nest contained the complete cocoon of a leaf-cutting hymenopter. Apart from its small size, the characteristics of this species are the dense spiny armature of the anterior two pairs of ambulatory legs and the palpi. Types 1 (male) and 2 (female) in Australian Museum, Sydney; 2 (female), co-type in South Australian Museum, Adelaide. DESCRIPTION OF PLATE XII. Agamppe rainbowt, n. sp. Fig. 1. Female, dorsal view. 2. Female, ventral view. », o& Male, palpus, lateral view. 4, Nest, closed. 5. Nest, open. 17 NOTES ON THE OCCURRENCE OF ABORIGINAL REMAINS BELOW MARINE DEPOSITS AT THE REEDBEDS, FULHAM, NEAR ADELAIDE. By S. A. Waite, C.M.B.0.U. [Read July 11, 1919.] In 1893 Mr. William White, of the Reedbeds, conceived _ the idea of forming a small lake as a sanctuary for water-fowl and other birds. For this purpose he leased a piece of ground from his younger brother (now deceased) situated close to what “was once a large swamp, and only a few hundreds of yards from the sand-dunes near Henley Beach South. This part of the country has been in the possession of the family from the first, my grandfather, the late John White, having settled there prior to the proclamation of the Colony in 1836. The excavation required in the formation of the artificial lake was carried out entirely by hand labour and hand tools, and the excavated materials were carted to one side and tipped, making a considerable mound around the lake. The cost of labour alone amounted to over £1,500, in addition to the personal costs and years of hard work done by the owner. The locality where the work was carried out was swampy, being in the channel of the flood waters which sometimes came that way from the River Torrens, and yielded a swamp vegeta- tion, especially the “cutting grass” (Cladium filum) that was used in the olden days for thatching. The following is a statement of the various beds passed through in making the excavation : — Kes ine ie Alluvial ‘soil’... ie 36 2. Blue clay, very slimy and difficult to remove. At the bottom of this clay there were pockets of seaweed, some of which were quite decayed while other parts were well preserved ee te AG, 3. Hard, rusty-coloured sand, sometimes cemented together with sea shells... ... oO) 4. Hard black clay on fairly level bed . 0 10-16 5. A peculiar formation of ““swamp-stone,”’ occur- ing in denticulated or stalactitic concretions, in yellow sand .. ore oy 70 6. Pure white sand (not bottomed) MORI oy BY TA0 0 As soon as the white sand was reached several clay-lined . basins were exposed. The-clay was from half an inch in thick- ness at the rim to 2-inches, or more, towards the bottom of the depression. Close to one of these basins was a length of black ~ Vy . . ° * Scans . - Slama aie: . yy y i A *. > Derare . “see . . Abia p ha ones is W Wh ; ; 4 FS —, . . ans = SY Pe ee Seo A eee Pass Se a ae . = « . eo Se = a Ss . —— - . ——_ + ——__ a eee et ra ese et =a ee ees eae SARS CI, ue TT Ss 28 Sane . ee OPED a Ack ees -e Se A a an y Soul. EUR Gal ere Seo kc i ae = oe as > - peas —~— . : . : es 2 - oe ee : SSS SSS SS SS : 5 ——— = ee Ere 3 i 5 y ete <)) Sle ony. CCOR rails ines ee mG : 1 ft. 6 in. — —_ ee . = ———_—— es . Z =—— ‘i Z = - = a ————— wie . > 6 3 a ite SS SS Sa oS SS ee Se Blue Clay. L ft. 162m: Estuarine Sand and Shells. a Black Clay, with | | Freshwater Shells. | | Varies from 10 in.to1l6in.) | | River Sand, with Calcareous Concretions Sit. White Sand. 10 ft. (not bottomed). References. X, Xa, Xb, Clay Basins, seen in section. la, 1b, le, 1d, position of four of the cores, or Pounding Stones. 2. Circular Hammer stone. 3. Position of Oval Fab- ricator. 4. Beach Stone. un: worked. 6. Carbonized Stick. 79 carbonized wood, that was inclined towards the basin. This was probably the remains of a spear handle or pointed stick of hardwood that had been thrust into the sand alongside what, I believe, to have been a dipping-place for water by the aborigines. Close to these dipping-places, and but slightly embedded in the surface of the white sand, were five cores of quartzite, that gave evidence of having been flaked by human hands. Four of these lay in pairs, quite close together, just as if the owners had laid them down after using them, probably for grinding their food. The excavation was carried down another 10 feet, through the white sand, but as this bed was of the nature of a quicksand, great difficulties were met. with in its removal, for when left for a few hours the sand would cave in and reach its former level, so that after a depth of 10 feet was reached in this bed the work was stopped without reaching its bottom. It may be said that the benevolent intentions of the owner of the ground were to some extent realized. The surroundings were planted with a variety of native shrubs and trees which afforded both shelter and food for the birds, and these soon took advantage of this sanctuary, where they nested and be- came exceedingly tame, as did also the land and water snakes, which made friends with their human protector, whom they came to recognize. In the course of time the proximity of population and frequent raids of trespassers nullified the main objects for which the lake had been established. The clay basins, which I suppose to be dipping-places of the aboriginals, were all on the same level, two were fairly close together, while the third was further apart. I closely examined the hard clay to discover, if possible, finger-prints, but without success. Anyone seeing these basins could form no other idea but that. they were made by man. I have never seen anything resembling this. kind of con- struction by the aboriginals of Australia, but strange to say, at a place called Kisimayu on the East Coast of Africa near the Somali Land border and right on the coast, I found some years ago natives making mud-lined basins in the sand to hold water. These were very like the ones described in this paper, only for shape, the African basin being much longer than they were wide, while two of the Australian ones were almost circular in shape, the third being a little depressed on the sides. The clay which composed these basins was dark in colour and very hard, the sand had drifted into all three, and it was only when a workman cut through one that their pres- ence was made known. On discovering a second one the sand was cleared away, but the basin evidently had cracks in it, 80 and would not stand its own weight, and fell to pieces. The carbonized. wood was very distinct, and the outline of the spear or pointed piece of wood could be followed quite easily, but as soon as an attempt was made to remove it from its bed in the sand it fell to pieces. The large round hammer-stone and the smaller one with chipped sides and ends were found in the white sand and were elevated some 6 or 8 inches above the level of the clay basins and the chipped cores, or grinding-stones, but in a line with them and on. the extreme right of the sketch- -plan. I think it is quite possible that this raised position upon which the two stones worked by the natives rested was due to the sand being forced up from below, for, as I have already said, when the water level in this sand bed was reached, in spite of 2 or 3 feet of sand having been taken out, in a few hours it had risen to its original level. There were no shells seen in this white - sandy bottom, ge ouee sea-shells were met with in numbers higher up. In the early ays; when the blacks were numerous on the Adelaide Plains, they pulled up the roots of flags and pounded them between stones prior to cooking. One strangely-shaped stone which may have been used by the aborigines, added to the objects already described, were all that remained to indi- cate the occupation of the eround by a tribe of blackfellows that must have long since disappeared. I have to thank Prof. Howchin, F.G.S., for his advice and interest in this subject. The Professor was good enough to accompany.me and view the site of the excavation, and I am pleased that he will add his valuable scientific views upon the subject. The section shown in the accompanying diagram is based on particulars entered in my note-book at the time of the excavation, and is drawn to scale. 81 SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES ON THE OCCURRENCE OF ABORIGINAL REMAINS DISCOVERED BY CAPTAIN S. A. WHITE AT FULHAM (DESCRIBED IN THE PRECEDING PAPER), WITH REMARKS ON THE GEOLOGICAL SECTION. By Pror. WALTER Howc8iIn. [Read July 11, 1919. | REMARKS ON THE BEDS PASSED THROUGH IN THE SINKING. The particulars supplied by Capt. S. A. White relate to a vertical section of over 20 feet. Samples of several of the beds passed through have been kindly placed at my disposal for examination by the author of the paper, and the following remarks have reference to their geological features. The num- bers prefixed to the paragraphs correspond to the respective beds in Capt. White’s descriptions. Bed No. 2.—The blue tenaceous clay, underlying the surface soil, probably represents the settlement of fine clay in the flood waters of the River Torrens when the ground was shghtly above sea level, or the stage when the salt and fresh waters commingled; the pockets of sea-weed in the lowest portions of this clay give evidence of this. Bed No. 3.—This bed, 3 feet in thickness, represents the characteristic marine sands and estuarine fauna which form the banks of the Patawalonga, in the nature of a raised sea bed. In the sample submitted to me I observed the following mollusca:—Ampullarina quoyana, Trochoconchlea constricta, Risella melanostoma, and Nassa pauperata, all of which are common estuarine forms in the adjacent waters. The matrix is a slightly-cemented, somewhat coarse sand, mottled with iron stains. This bed gives evidence that the estuary of the Patawalonga Creek formerly reached this far north, about half a mile beyond its present limits. Its upper surface has been rucked by two channels of erosion subsequently to its deposition. Bed No. 4.—Beneath the raised sea bed, as described above, is an indurated black clay with its upper surface show- ing a plane of erosion, varying in thickness from 10 inches to 16 inches. This is evidently a freshwater deposit, laid down in marshy ground that carried an extensive vegetation of some kind. No plant remains can be detected in the main body of the clay, but near the top of the deposit a somewhat lighter- coloured clay occurs in which are seen the shells of the fresh- water snail, Zimnaea. When a portion of the black clay was _ placed in water it passed down to an impalpable black mud, and after washing, left a residue of exceedingly fine white sand, mixed with black granules of a carbonaceous kind. 82 Bed No. 5.—-Only the stalactitic concretions were avail- able for examination from this geological horizon. The particular example shown me by Capt. White is 8 inches in length and numerously branched, reticulated and denticu- lated. Its composition is that of a fine sand calcareously cemented. Nodules and variously-shaped concretions of this kind commonly occur in deposits of fine alluvial sand, and can be found under such conditions in the banks of the River Torrens near Adelaide. They were also present in the alluvial bed, exposed under marine deposits, in the excavation made for Fletcher’s Graving Dock.“) The bed containing these nodules at the reedbeds is undoubtedly of freshwater origin, probably laid down as river wash. Bed No. 6.—The white sand which formed the lowest bed in the section, and was not bottomed, has all the appear- ance of a wind-blown sand. It contains no organic remains, is of uniform grain, and is practically free from any cementing agent. In the excavation it had the character of a running sand which flowed in as fast as it was shovelled out and stopped all further sinking. It was probably formed as an ancient sand dune, the base of which is below the present sea level. THE STONE IMPLEMENTS. .The stones showing aboriginal workmanship were of three kinds: pounding-stones or cores, a hammer-stone, and a fabricator. 1. Pounding-stones.—There are five belonging to this class, and these exhibit certain features in common, having a flat base and are roughly chipped in a way that might make them convenient for handling. The general form is very like the cores that are left after flakes have been struck off for mak- ing knives or scrapers, but the chippings have been too irregular and ill-shaped for such a purpose. Capt. White's suggestion that they may have been used for crushing, or pounding, is therefore probable, although the flat faces give no sign of wear. Lithologically these pounding-stones belong to two kinds of siliceous rocks. Four of these have been obtained from boulders of quartzite washed down from the hills in the vicinity of Adelaide. The fifth is a siliceous rock, of coarser grain, and the cement consists of colloid silica. The four first- mentioned are of Cambrian age and are of metamorphic origin, while the last-named is of Recent age and formed part of the consolidated sands of the older drainage system of South (1) Howchin: ‘‘Remarks on a Geological Section at the new Graving Dock, Glanville, with special reference to a supposed Old Land Surface now below Sea Level’? (Trans. Roy. Soe. S. Austr.,) vol. x: (1887), p. 31). 83 Australia. One of the quartzite specimens, the smallest of the four, shows conchoidal fracture in the flat face and has been carefully chipped into an almost circular outline at the base. 2. Hammer-stone.—This is a very siliceous quartzite, 34 inches in diameter, circular in outline, thick, and flattened on two sides. Weathering has removed what was probably small granules of kaolin that were interspersed with the quartz grains, leaving the stone somewhat open. It is also bleached to a white colour, probably the result of deoxidation through contact with vegetable matter in the beds. It gives evidence of extensive use on the edge which has been worn back to a flat face about an inch in width. 3. Fabricator.—This tool is an oval-shaped, flattish pebble, 23% inches in the greater diameter, the parent rock being the very fine-grained quartzites that make a prominent feature at Sellick Hill. This class of stone, on account of its fine grain and conchoidal fracture, was a favourite stone with the aborigines of the Adelaide tribe for making their implements. It occurs on the beach and in the paddocks along the coast between Sellick Hill and Marino. The example found in the Reedbeds section is perfectly typical in its evidence of wear. The edge is much worn, especially a little aside from the obtuse ends of the stone, arising from the manner of its use in striking off flakes, and there is also considerable wear on the two flat faces at right angles to the former. After extensive use these fabricators assume a cruciform outline. No stone flakes, knives, or other worked stones were found where these implements occurred, but the presence of this fabricator proves that such definitely shaped stones were in use at the time to which the remains belong. 4. Casual Stones.—Two stones of an indefinite character were found at the same place. One a rough chip of weathered quartzite, circular in outline and having a diameter of 24 inches. The other, a flat, water-worn, elongated stone, about 6 inches in length and 1# inches in breadth, belonging to the purple-slates series of the Upper Cambrian. Stones of this kind are common as beach stones on the local shores; it gives no signs of having been used in any way, but it could only have occurred in the position in which it was found except by human agency. THE AGE OF THE ABORIGINAL REMAINS. The mean level of the site on which the excavation was made, according to official figures, is at or about high-water level. The situation is near the western margin of the flood waters of the River Torrens over the area known as the Reed- beds, and about half or three-quarters of a mile to the 84 northward of the highest position of the Patawalonga Creek. From Capt. White’s section it is seen that at present there is three feet of blue-clay and alluvium at the site covering the estuarine deposits. It is probable that the silt laid down by the flood waters of the Torrens is responsible for damming back the tidal waters of the Patawalonga to the extent mentioned above. The position in which the aboriginal remains were found, viz., 10 feet from the surface, places them either at or a little below low-water mark, while immediately above them is a fluviatile bed, 3 feet or more in thickness, capped by a fresh- water lagoon deposit. Following these river and swamp conditions we find an incursion of the sea over the area which resulted in the laying down of 3 feet of estuarine sediments. At the time of the human occupation of the site, neither the river nor the sea had covered the locality, which was occupied by sand drifts, and it was on these sand hills that the aboriginals were camped. As the ground was excavated by Mr. White, sen., in these blown sands to a depth of 10 feet below present low-water mark, there seems very clear evidence of a sinking of the land to the extent of several feet, at least, since the aboriginal camp was occupied. Evidences of alternations of level on the coast are supplied at other places. The interbedding of marine and freshwater beds at Glanville (loc. cit.) may be compared with the section now described, both of which show that, within recent times, the land has stood higher than it does at present. No evidence of aboriginal remains have been noted, hitherto, in South Australia other than in the most super- ficial deposits. The case before us appears to have a higher antiquity than any previously noted. The suggestive points are:—/(a) The sand hills in which the aboriginals formed their camp are now below sea level; (0) in the interval separating that time from the present there have been several important changes in the physical condition of the neighbour- hood, the sand hills gave place to a river course, the sediments of which have since developed stalactitic concretions; after which, the river stage passed into that of a swamp; then followed an incursion from the sea; and, in more recent times, the area has been covered with mud laid down by the stagnant waters of the Torrens. These successive changes require a considerable length of time for their accomplishment and an undoubted antiquity for the human remains. At the same time it must be noted that the materials used by the aborigines of that day, as well as the types of implements and the methods of manufacture, are identical with those adopted by the latest representatives of the race. 85 - - A CONTRIBUTION TO THE STUDY OF HABRONEMIASIS: A CLINICAL, PATHOLOGICAL, AND EXPERIMENTAL IN- VESTIGATION OF A GRANULOMATOUS CONDITION OF THE HORSE—HABRONEMIC GRANULOMA. By Lionet B. Buti, D.V.Sc., S.A. Government Laboratory of Pathology and Bacteriology, Adelaide Hospital. [Read August 15, 1919.] PrAris XG Trop 2aVv™ ContTENTS. A. INTRODUCTION. B. GRANULOMATA AS FOUND IN SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA. Q ye Clinical :—Distribution ; Occurrence; Site; Duration; Examination. Pathological :—Microscopic examination; Macroscopic examination. The larval Nematode. Observations on the Life-histories of the Three Species of Habronema:—Habronema muscae, H. megastoma, H. microstoma. Animal Experimentation. 1. Habronema microstoma— (a) Feeding experiments with Stomozys calcitrans. (b) Larvae placed in the skin of the horse. (c) Larvae placed on scarified skin. 2. Habronema muscae— (a) Larvae placed in the skin of the horse. (b) Larvae added to the conjunctival sac. (c) Larvae placed on scarified skin. (d) Larvae placed on moistened skin. 3. Habronema megastoma— (a) Larvae placed in the skin of the horse. (b) Larvae added to the conjunctival sac. (c) Larvae placed on scarified skin. (d) Larvae placed on moistened skin. 4. Experiments with Embryos. ; 5. Summary and Discussion of Experiments. Discussion. . GRANULOMATA AS FOUND IN NORTHERN AUSTRALIA. General ; Pathological; Discussion. . SIMILAR GRANULOMATA AS FOUND, OUTSIDE AUSTRALIA. 1. ‘‘Summer Sores.’’ 2. “Swamp Cancer’ in the Solomon Islands. 3. ‘‘Leeches’’? and ‘‘Bursattee.’’ . NOMENCLATURE. . GENERAL SUMMARY. . PROPHYLAXIS AND_TREATMENT. REFERENCES TO LITERATURE. DESCRIPTION OF FIGURES. a 86 A.—INTRODUCTION. In 1916 the present writer recorded the occurrence in Australia of a granuloma which, in his experience, was most frequently found affecting the external genitalia of the horse. The condition was found to be of rather infrequent occurrence. ‘It was first observed in 1912, and from this time onwards an occasional specimen was obtained. It was not until the early part of 1914 that the granuloma was found to be due to a larval Nematode. These preliminary observations were recorded, and up till that time no record of the occurrence of the condition in Australia had been made. The condition was described under the name of hab- ronemic granuloma, and the opinion was expressed that it was none other than the granulomatous affection found com- monly in the horse and ass in various parts of the world, and known usually as ‘“‘summer sores,’’ or ‘‘granular dermatitis.’’ An hypothesis was advanced that a biting fly was 1n some way responsible for the introduction of the larvae into or beneath the skin of the animal, and as a larval Habronema had been described as occurring in Stomoxys calcitrans, it was thought that this fly was incriminated. The present communication recapitulates the original observations, and records further observations and experi- ments. After an investigation into the life-histories of the three species of Habronema found in the stomach of the horse, and after an experimental investigation of the cause and nature of the tumours, the original hypothesis has now to be considerably modified. ‘Since the disease was first recorded as occurring in Aus- tralia, Lewis and Seddon (1918) have recorded the occurrence of the condition in the region of the conjunctiva of horses in Victoria. Place (1915) in a previous publication had attempted to prove that the occurrence of malignant neoplasms in the orbit of the horse was commonly associated with the presence of larval Nematodes in this situation, and although he incrimin- ated a larval Habronema, there was no record of the worm having been isolated and identified. A further macroscopic and microscopic study of the granuloma occurring in horses in the northern parts of Aus- tralia, and commonly called ‘‘swamp cancer,’’ has been made, and the observations are outlined below. The literature bearing on the subject of ‘‘summer sores’’ and other similar conditions is reviewed and discussed in the following paper. : 87 Macroscopic and microscopic examinations of a granuloma found affecting horses in the Solomon Islands are also recorded below. B.—GRANULOMATA AS FOUND IN SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA. Distribution.—Up to the present these granulomata have only been met with by the present writer in the northern parts of Victoria and in South Australia (the only parts of Australia in which the writer has worked). On the whole they appear to be more common in South Australia than Victoria. There is no reason to believe that they do not occur elsewhere in Australia, but it is probable that they are to be found more commonly in the warmer parts. Occurrence.—These tumours have only been met with during the summer and autumn months of the year. They occurred in stable-fed animals, and a large proportion of the cases have been stallions which have been kept in the stable for longer periods than ordinary working horses. Site.—The tumours are found most frequently upon the glans penis at the urethral orifice, but also quite commonly on the sheath. When they occur elsewhere they are found most commonly on the limbs. Only two cases where the lesions have occurred in parts other than the penis and sheath have come directly under the writer’s notice. In these cases the tumours were situated in the metacarpal region and in the region of the hock, respectively, and were. accompanied by lesions in the usual site. In February, 1917, through the courtesy of Mr. H. R. Seddon, Melbourne University Veterinary School, the writer had an opportunity of examining a specimen of similar char- acter taken from the membrana mctitans and lower eyelid of a horse. Mr. Seddon was informed by the sender that lesions were fairly frequently observed in this situation. Lewis and Seddon (1918) have recorded the occurrence of similar lesions in the conjunctiva of the horse. There seems to be no doubt that, as the knowledge of the characteristics of these granulomata becomes more wide- spread, they will be found to occur quite frequently in situations other than the external genitalia. Duration.—The tumours appear fairly suddenly, and grow rapidly for the first two or three weeks. From this time onward they gradually enlarge, and they usually show no tendency to disappear, although there is some evidence to show that occasionally the lesion may be quite transient. Most of the tumours met with have been removed surgically, so that there has been little opportunity of observing the 88 duration under natural conditions. In one case, however, the tumours persisted for several months, and, although decreas- ing in size, did not completely disappear even during the winter. Clinical examination.—Typical tumours of several weeks’ duration are recognized by their situation, their tough fibromatous nature, and by the appearance of small yellowish points lying beneath the mucous membrane or the unpig- mented epithelium or, if ulceration is present, in the floor of the ulcer. They are found to be attached to and involving the skin. Lesions of only several days to two or three weeks’ duration are more difficult of recognition, for they have not developed the characteristic yellowish points. Ulceration has rarely occurred at this stage. A history of a more or less sudden appearance, without any evidence of injury or bacterial infection, may help one in making a diagnosis. Macroscopic examination.—The tumours may be single or multiple, and those of some weeks’ duration are usually ulcerated on the surface. | When situated on the glans penis they vary in size from that of a pea to larger than that of a walnut. The largest specimen examined measures 5 cm. in length, 2°5 cm. across the broadest portion, and 2 cm. in depth. The tumours on the sheath attain a greater size, one specimen measuring 6°5 cm. across the larger diameter, 4°5 cm. across the smaller diameter, and 2 cm. in depth. Much smaller tumours, vary- ing in size from that of a lentil to that of a pea, and showing a single yellowish caseous area in the centre, are sometimes seen, and are usually multiple. On section of a typical tumour of several weeks’ duration it is seen that the tissue is tough, firm, and fibrous, greyish to pinkish in colour, and contains scattered throughout the mass irregular, yellowish, caseous areas varying in size from points just visible to the naked eye to areas about 1 mm. in breadth by 4 or 5 mm. in length, or even larger. In tumours from the penis these caseous areas lie closer to the urethral than the external surface. At times these caseous areas may contain some calcareous deposit. They may be situated closely together or scattered sparsely throughout the tumour and, in the older lesions, may be fairly easily enucleated. On enucleation it is seen that in each individual lesion they have much the same con- sistence and colour, but vary in form. Those from an older lesion are irregular in shape, yellow in colour, and hard, often presenting a branching appearance. The points of caseous tissue seen on a cross section are found to be parts of a larger area. No transition between an 89 early, small, and an old, large caseous area is to be found, nor is there any evidence of a young bud or extension. On section of an early lesion, one of two to four weeks’ duration, it is seen that the tissue is less tough and pinker in colour. On careful examination small, pale-yellowish, caseous areas are seen scattered throughout, These are much smaller, paler, and softer than the areas seen in older lesions, and are enucleated with difficulty. The rather denser nature of the tissues in the glans penis apparently prevents the tumours reaching the size they attain in the looser tissues of the sheath, and, likewise, the tissue reaction is greater in the tumours from the latter situation. The appearances of the lesion removed from the meta- carpal region of the case mentioned above vary somewhat from those found in lesions from the penis and sheath. Beneath the ulcerated surface there is dense, sclerosing, fibrous tissue extending 5 mm. in depth, which has probably resulted from treatment with antiseptics. Beneath this is looser fibrous tissue containing translucent, greyish areas, somewhat circular in shape, and containing sometimes a yellowish point. The lesions observed by Lewis and Seddon were of the nature of a granuloma, involving the inner canthus of the eye and the membrane associated as a rule with irritation of the cornea and lacrymation. Yellowish necrotic areas were seen in the submucous, and sometimes the subcutaneous tissues. They were found on both surfaces of the membrana and in the skin of the lower lid and palpebral portion of the conjunctiva. Microscopic examination.—The microscopic picture is typical, but varies with the age of the lesion. In the older lesions, where it may be impossible to demonstrate any casual organism, the tumours nevertheless present quite a character- istic histological picture. In a section of a tumour from the glans penis it is seen that the epithelium is usually ulcerated about the summit of the growth. The ulcerated surface consists of ordinary granu- lation tissue, in which are many capillary blood vessels and a marked infiltration of the tissues with eosinophile leucocytes. At times caseous areas are seen on the ulcerated surface. At the edge of the ulceration the stratum cornewm is seen to be slightly thickened, while the rete mucoswm shows hypertrophic changes, anastomising processes dipping deeply into the cutis vera. The rete mucoswm at this point is usually slightly infiltrated with eosinophile leucocytes. The epithelium cover- ing the tumour in the other situations sometimes shows slight hypertrophic changes, but it is otherwise normal in appear- ance. The cutis vera is normal in these situations, except for 90 a slight invasion with eosinophiles. Immediately under the cutis vera the eosinophilic infiltration is seen to be very marked. The eosinophiles may be so numerous as to fill all the lymph spaces, leaving only a more or less fine connective tissue stroma supporting them. There is an increase in the small blood vessels with well-defined walls. There is hyper- plasia of the fixed connective tissue cells. Roughly circular areas, consisting of embryonic connective tissue cells with some mononuclear leucocytes, but with few or no eosinophiles, are seen. The caseous areas vary slightly in size; they have well- defined margins and take acid stains intensely. Tissue reaction round these areas appears to depend on their age. There is a proliferation of the fixed cells and commonly a marked epitheloid cell reaction with the formation of multi- nucleated cells. Sometimes there is a well-defined fibrous capsule. The nuclei of the cells within the areas show some pyknosis, and the chromatim remains for some considerable time. The protoplasm of the cells is apparently fused. All tissues are included in this necrosis, and the in- distinct forms of blood vessels and connective tissue strands can be detected. In some of the areas a calcerous deposit may be seen. More or less in the centre of the necrotic areas are seen either circular or ovoid spaces containing débris and a few leucocytes. These represent the spaces at one time occupied by, and the remains of, a larval Nematode, and may appropriately be termed ‘‘worm canals.’’ Larvae or débris are not found in all sections. This may be due either to the fact that the section does not necessarily cut that portion of the necrotic foci containing the larvae or to the complete disintegration of larvae or débris. In some of the earlier lesions the larva is often to be seen distinctly. It is easy to demonstrate the clear, homogenous, ~ finely-ridged cuticle, the musculature lying beneath, and the primitive alimentary canal. The section may be transverse, oblique, or longitudinal, and there may be more than one section of the larvae in a necrotic area. In one area seven tramsverse or oblique sections were seen. These probably represent’ as many individual larvae. For the most part, however, only one worm is seen in each necrotic area, and it is always more or less twisted and curved. In other parts of the section the worm is found sur- rounded by only a small necrotic area. Often oblique and transverse sections of the worm are seen extending in a more or less regular line across the field of the microscope, repre- senting the twisting and curving of one organism. 91 In some lesions examined many larvae have shown marked degeneration with a well-developed necrosis of the surrounding tissues, while other forms have been well preserved, and have caused little or no necrosis of the tissues. This suggests that, in some cases, the larvae have made their appearance in the tissues not by one massive invasion, but by smaller invasions repeated over a certain period of time. For the most part, however, all larvae in a given lesion appear to be in approxim- ately the same state of preservation or disintegration. All the larvae seen in the different lesions examined have appar- ently been dead, but the retrogressive processes vary markedly in extent in different tumours. In the older lesions it is not possible to determine the exact nature of the material contained in the circular or ovoid spaces in the necrotic areas, but in the light of the knowledge gained from examining earlier lesions, there can be no doubt that the ‘material is the débris of. a larval Nematode. It must be insisted here that in the older lesions one may be unable to detect any degenerated larvae, or even the spaces which they at one time occupied. This fact renders it important that the histopathological picture in all its vari- ations should be thoroughly studied and understood. If this is done a diagnosis can usually be made, in spite of the fact that no casual organism can be demonstrated. The foregoing descriptions of the microscopic appearances apply equally to tumours from the penis and from the sheath, except that in the latter situation the tissue reaction is far more marked and the necrotic areas more diffusely scattered throughout the tumour. In both situations there may be marked endothelial proliferation in the intima of the arterioles. This is often seen in the deeper parts of the tumour. Sometimes there is thrombosis of the vessels. The necrotic areas, however, are in no way associated with the vascular changes, but are apparently due entirely to decom- position products originating in the degenerating larva. The microscopic appearances of the lesion from the meta- carpus vary somewhat from those described above. The tumour consists throughout of dense fibrous tissue, in which areas of embryonic connective tissue cells with an infiltration of mononuclear leucocytes appear as islands. These areas are usually somewhat circumscribed, and in some of them are found degenerated larvae with slight surrounding tissue necrosis and the formation of multinucleated cells. There is a diffuse infiltration of all the tissues with eosinophile leucocytes. There is little formation of new tissue apart from 92 the areas of hyperplastic connective tissue cells and some thickening of the dense subcutaneous connective tissue. The following is the description of the microscopic appearances of the conjunctival lesions observed by Lewis and Seddon :—‘“‘From a study of the earliest lesions examined, viz., those of Case I., the parasites appear to occur primarily in lymph spaces. Only odd parasites or portions (in section) are found apart from the necrotic material. The presence of the parasites gives rise to small-celled infiltration as a tissue reaction, followed by an aggregation of neutrophile leucocytes and eosinophiles followed by necrosis of cells. While necrosis is In progress around the parasites one finds at the periphery of the mass large fibrous tissue cells massing together along with giant cells. The tissue between the areas is composed of typical granulation tissue, with eosinophiles and proliferation of endothelial cells and fibroblasts. There is also in one section some ulceration of the epidermis and some warty condition of the epithelium similar to what is met with in other ulcer- ative conditions.”’ It will be seen from this description that the change is essentially the same as that described above, varying mainly in the degree of tissue reaction. The larval Nematode.—-On account of the difficulty of obtaining early lesions, few opportunities of minutely exam- ining larvae have arisen. However, larvae have been separated out from the tissues, and most of the important characteristics have been determined. The method has been to separate the small necrotic areas from the tissues of an early lesion. These have been softened with pepsin or trypsin, washed, then lightly crushed between two glass slides, dehydrated and cleared with carbol-absolute alcohol. By gently moving and pressing the cover-slip placed over the portion of crushed tissue, one has been successful in forcing the larva out of the canal it occupies. The larva has never been removed unbroken, but by piecing the broken portions together the main external characteristics have been clearly defined. As far as can be judged the larva is approximately 3 mm. long by 40 » to 53 » broad. The anterior extremity tapers slightly at the head, which is rounded. The mouth is sur- rounded by thin prominent lips. The posterior extremity tapers and terminates in a pointed tail, which is rounded at the tip to form a small bulb furnished with minute spines. The anus opens at about 83 pw from the point of the tail. The tail is curved rather sharply backwards. There are apparently no transverse striations of the cuticle, but in sections fine longitudinal ridges are seen. These longitudinal ridges are 93 only seen in transverse sections of the larva. The internal anatomy of the larva has not been accurately determined. The oesophagus is long, and the intestine occupies the main part of the body cavity. The description of the larva as found by Lewis and Seddon agrees closely with the above. They do not mention the occurrence of fine longitudinal ridges in the cuticle, but in the specimen shown the present writer by Mr. Seddon these longitudinal ridges were plainly to be seen. Their presence, as will be shown later, is of importance in the identification of the larva. From the foregoing it will be seen that the worm is an immature Nematode, and that it closely resembles the sixth larval stage of Habronema muscae as described by Ransom 1913). There is little or no direct evidence as to the mode of entry of the larvae. As Habronema muscae was the only species the life-history of which had been determined, it became necessary to determine the life-histories and morph- ology of the other two species of Habronema before it was possible to attempt to identify the species of larva responsible for the production of the lesions. Observations on the life-histories of the three species of Habronema were therefore made, and these will be outlined before the mode of entry and specific identification of the larva are discussed. OBSRVATIONS ON THE LIFE-HISTORIES OF THE THREE SPECIES oF Habronema. Since Carter first described the presence of a Nematode worm in the head of a house-fly in 1861, many other workers have observed and recorded a similar occurrence. Ransom (1913) has shown that the embryos of Habronema muscae are taken up by the larvae of Musca domestica, that they develop through larval stages in the fly larvae and pupae, and that the final larval stage of the worm is reached in the adult fly, and is usually found situated in the head and proboscis. Linstow, in 1875, described a Nematode larva in the head of Stomoxys calcitrans which resembled the larvae found in Musca domestica, but which he named Filaria stomozeos. Harvey Johnston (1912) recorded the finding of a larva resembling that of H. muscae in Stomoxys calcitrans, and a similar larva in Musca vetustissima. Ransom expressed the opinion that the larvae found by Linstow and others in Stomoxys calcitrans might possibly be the larva of Habronema microstoma. 94 At the time of starting these experiments nothing more than the above was known of the life-histories of the three species of Habronema found commonly in the stomach of the horse. In attempting to determine the species of the larva found in habronemic granulomata it became necessary to learn more of the life-histories of the three species of Habronema. In the latter part of 1916 experiments were started with this end in view, and also to obtain material for animal experi- mentation. The experiments had gone to show that under artificial conditions both Habronema muscae and H. megas- toma develop through their larval stages in Musca domestica. At that time it was not possible to take the experiments any further. Towards the end of 1917 the work was taken up again, when it was found impossible to pass H. megastoma through Stomozys calcitrans. 'The work was proceeding when it was learned that Hill, working at the Melbourne University Veter- inary School, had confirmed the above findings, and had found, further, that Habronema microstoma developed through its larval stages in Stomoxys calcitrans and rarely in Musca domestica, while Habronema muscae showed no development in S. calcitrans. Nothing further of Hill’s work has been learned, and up to the time of writing (March, 1919) his work has not been published. The experiments were continued during 1918 and the early part of 1919. Method.—For the purpose of obtaining embryos, stomachs taken from horses killed at the Zoological Gardens, Adelaide, were examined. In all, considerably over one hundred stomachs were examined. In the preliminary experiments carried out in 1916 stomach contents showing numerous embryos of Habronema muscae, and in which no other species were found, were mixed with horse-dung and exposed in the stables for about two hours to allow flies to deposit their eggs thereon. The dung used in the experiments was previously found to be free from embryos capable of developing in Musca domestica. Dung from the same animal was used in experiments with Habronema megastoma, and the contents of the submucous tumours were used to supply the embryos. In the later experiments sterilized dung was used, and the embryos were obtained from the’ gravid female after ‘specific identification. In the case of experiments with Habronema megastoma, embryos were also obtained by col- lecting the contents of the submucous tumours after these had been thoroughly scraped and washed in running water for 95 several hours, only the contents from the deeper portions. of the tumours being used. For the purposes of the experiments both Musca domestica and Stomozys calcitrans were bred artificially and the cultures kept going in the laboratory. The culture of Stomoxys calcitrans was kept going for twelve months, when it was allowed to die out. The flies maintained their vigour and size throughout this period. They were fed daily on a rabbit, and were allowed to deposit their eggs on fermenting lawn clippings taken from a lawn where contamination by horse-dung was excluded. Musca domestica was fed on a mixture of horse serum, sugar, and water, and was allowed to deposit its eggs on sterilized horse-dung. It was found most convenient to use these artificial cultures of the flies, for in this way experiments could be made during that time of the year when specimens are dificult to obtain in the field, and also, the number of fly larvae developing in a given culture could be more easily regulated. As in most of the experiments an attempt was made to obtain flies heavily infested with larvae, it was important to regulate the number of fly larvae developing in a culture. The stomachs were sometimes examined a few hours after removal, but for the most part not until twenty-four hours, and sometimes as long as forty-eight hours, after removal. The worms were always found to be alive and active, although in those collected from stomachs examined from twenty-four to forty-eight hours after removal, activity had considerably decreased. This loss of activity was an advantage when specimens had to be examined microscopically. Only on one or two occasions was a stomach found in which no worms could be detected. A complete examination for the presence of all possible species was not made, but a rough idea was usually obtained of the number of species present. Only in one case was Habronema microstoma found to be present in very large numbers without any other species. It was found to be more commonly present than was at first expected, and in most of the stomachs examined could be found, although often only very few specimens were present. Habronema muscae was found to be present in most of the stomachs examined, and usually in large numbers. This worm was found to be more closely associated with the mucous membrane than Habronema microstoma, and quite commonly the head of the parasite was buried in the gastric glands. This parasite is usually orange- coloured, and sometimes more red, suggesting the presence of blood in the body of the worm. Chemical tests for blood were obtained with extracts from these worms. 96 Habronema megastoma was found to be of infrequent occurrence, and less commonly met with than the other species. Sometimes one would obtain two or three stomachs consecu- tively which contained H. megastoma, and then many stomachs would be examined before obtaining another speci- men. It was not until after a large number of stomachs had . been examined that it became obvious that H. megastoma was more rarely met with than H. microstoma, H. muscae being the most common, and usually found in each stomach examined. For the purposes of the subject under investigation it was considered that any detailed study of the adult forms was unlikely to give any useful information. No detailed study of the development of the worm larvae in the fly larvae, pupae, and adults was made, as, of neces- sity, a limit had to be placed on the scope of the investigation. The following is a brief outline of the observations made on the embryos and larvae of the three species of Habronema and examination of adult flies :— Tue Lire-nistory or Habronema muscae (Carter, 1861). Ransom has already shown that embryos of Habronema muscae, passed along with the faeces of the horse, gain entrance to the larvae of Jfusca domestica, probably through being swallowed by the fly larvae. The embryos gain the body cavity, where they pass through their larval stages, and have usually reached the final larval stage (sixth stage of Ransom) at or soon after the hatching of the adult fly. This final larval stage was the first stage to be observed in the stomach of the horse. Ransom’s work consisted mainly in the examination of adult flies, pupae, and larvae for the presence of larvae of Habronema. He assumed that all larvae found in the head and proboscis of adult flies were larvae of Habronema muscae. It 1s possible, however, that some of the specimens he observed may have been larvae of Habronema megastoma. The experiments undertaken in 1916 under artificial con- ditions confirmed Ransom’s conclusions. Embryos of H. muscae.—Embryos that have been passed out from the female have been found to be enclosed in a thin shell which is closely applied to the body except at the posterior end, where it is distinctly seen held away by the curved tail. The embryos are only slightly motile. They measure from 80 wp in length by 12 uw in width to 110 p» in length by 6°6 » in width. When these embryos are collected from the stomach contents or from the gravid female and placed in saline they live for many days, depending on 97 light, temperature, and bacterial growth. They rarely show any tendency to leave the shells. When placed in tap water the majority of the embryos are found to be free in twenty- four hours. Adult flies.—At first the observations were confined to the study of the development of AH. muscae in Musca domestica. In the preliminary experiments it was found that approximately 100 per cent. of the flies hatching out showed larvae situated, almost invariably, in the head and proboscis. These larvae were found to resemble the sixth larval stage of H. muscae, as described by Ransom. As many as eight larvae were found in the head and proboscis of one fly. In the later experiments the examination of flies that had just hatched often showed the presence of larvae in an early stage of development, measuring approximately 400 pw long, and being situated in the abdomen, and usually encysted. In from five to seven days these larvae were found to have developed into the final larval stage, and to have migrated to the head and proboscis. As many as from thirty to forty larvae have been found in the head and proboscis of these flies. For the most part larvae found in the head and proboscis have been of the final larval stage of development, but occa- sionally larvae of an earlier stage of development have been found along with those in the final stage. The flies often showed a marked paralysis of the proboscis, although they were still able to feed. The time occupied in development from the deposit of the eggs to the hatching of the adult flies was usually from fourteen to eighteen days. Flies bred in sterilized horse-dung, with which had been mixed an emulsion of embryos in normal saline solution, usually showed the presence of larvae in the great majority of those hatching out. On three occasions, however, no larvae were present in any of the flies hatching out. On two of these occasions the emulsion of embryos was made in tap water, and on one occasion in saline solution. On each of these occasions the eggs were obtained from flies caught in the laboratory. There was never any failure of development of larvae in the strain of Musca domestica kept going by artificial cultivation. All attempts to obtain any development of embryos of H. muscae in Stomozys calcitrans failed. Larvae of H. muscae.—Attention was practically confined to the study of the final larval stage. These larvae obtained © from the head and proboscis of flies were found to measure from 2°58 mm. to 2:87 mm. long, the majority measuring 27mm. The maximum width was found to vary from 50 p to 66°6 w. The head was rounded and the body tapered slightly E 98 from about the posterior part of the oesophagus. The tail was pointed and possessed a small rounded tip furnished with minute spines. The anus was open and situated 83°3 » from the point of the tail. The pharynx was 43°3 p» long; the nerve ring 130 » from the anterior end of the body, and the anterior portion of the oesophagus 133 p to 140 pw long. The larvae were embedded in paraffin and sectioned. On transverse section the cuticle was found to be traversed by fine longitudinal ridges. These numbered from forty to forty- two, as near as could be determined; started ramnsire <| - behind the head and ended near the tail. Experiments were undertaken to determine the power of the larvae to leave the proboscis of the fly. Flies were placed in an inverted wide-mouthed Florence flask. The mouth of the flask was surrounded by gauze, which also surrounded the mouth of a test tube situated several inches below and con- taining sugar dissolved in water. This test tube was kept filled with the solution, which was examined from time to time for the presence of larvae. The flies drank freely of the solution, but at no time were any larvae found to have escaped into the solution. In one case two flies kept overnight in a test tube contain- ing a small amount of sugar solution were found to be dead the following morning. Two active larvae were found in the solution. It is not possible ‘to say whether the larvae left the proboscis during the life of the fly or after its death. Dead flies have been placed in saline solution, and later larvae have been found in the solution. In making a careful removal of the proboscis from the head it has sometimes been observed that the larvae will escape through the lips of the proboscis. This is probably due to rupture of the proboscis during handling rendering it possible for the larvae to escape from their situation in the muscular portion into the food canal. Experiments were made to determine whether larvae are capable of penetrating filter paper. A short test tube was © filled with saline solution, or a mixture of saline and horse serum, and a folded filter paper (very small size) was fitted _ into the mouth of the tube. Larvae were placed in the fluid contained in the cup formed by the folded’ paper. This preparation was kept at room temperature or 37° C. for twenty-four hours in a moist chamber, and the fluid in the test tube examined for the presence of larvae. On one occasion two larvae were found in the fluid. This finding could not be confirmed after repeated experiments. The larvae were found to remain alive in saline solution or horse serum for forty-eight hours, and sometimes up to seventy-two hours. . 99 Larvae were found to remain alive in the bodies of dead flies for several days if loss of moisture was prevented. THE LiFrE-History or Habronema megastoma (Rudolphi, 1819). The methods adopted in this investigation have already been mentioned. The embryos were sometimes obtained from the contents of the submucous tumours and sometimes from the gravid female. Embryos of H. megastoma.—The embryos are enclosed in a thin shell or membrane. They are doubled on themselves in the shape of the letter U, the tail coming to he close to the head. The shell measures from 43°3 pw to 53°3 pw long by 11°6 » to 13°3 pw wide. The widest portion of the embryo measures 6°6 2. ; The embryos when placed in saline solution and tap water behave in the same way as those of H. muscae. When they do break away from the shell they remain bent in the shape of the letter V or the letter L. They are only very slightly motile. When taken from the gravid female the shell is less resistant than in those born under natural conditions. This has been found true of the embryos of all three species. Adult Flies.—In the main the results of the observations were the same as in the case of flies infested with the larvae of Habronema muscae. The rate of development of the larvae appeared to depend upon the temperature at which the culture was kept. During.the warmer weather flies hatching out often showed larvae at or near the final stage of development. At other times larvae were found in a very early stage of develop- ment. In one case flies hatching out in seventeen days showed larvae measuring from 272°7 p» to 409 p in length. These larvae were present in the abdomen, and the majority were encysted. From four to five days later these larvae had developed into the final larval stage. The atmospheric temperature was high during this latter period. When the final larval stage was reached few or no larvae remained in the abdomen, but migrated to the head and proboscis. Many of the flies died suddenly, probably through injury to the central nervous system by the migrating larvae. The parasitism was very heavy, from fifty to sixty larvae being present in a single fly. The proboscides of many of the flies were seen to be paralyzed. When these flies were examined some days later the larvae were found to be less active than when first making their appearance in the head and proboscis. It has been observed that if flies die when the larvae are in an early stage of development these larvae quickly die, but if the final larval stage has been reached the larvae live for E2 100 two or three days, provided that desiccation is prevented. Larvae in an earlier stage of development have at times been found in the proboscis along with larvae in the final stage of development. Failure to produce an infestation es flies occurred, in exactly parallel circumstances as in the case of the expert- ments with Habronema muscae. All attempts to obtain any development of embryos of Habronema megastoma in Stomoxys calcitrans failed. Larvae of H. megastoma.—lLarvae obtained from the head and proboscis of flies were found to measure from 2°07 mm. to 2.5 mm. long by 60 p to 66°6 w wide. The larvae had the same general appearance as those of H. muscae, but in a few specimens a circular ridge posterior to the lips was observed. The pharynx was 60 pw long; the nerve ring 116°6 » to 126°6 » from the anterior end of the body, and the anterior portion of the oesophagus 80 w to 90 p long. The anus was open and situated from 80 » to 90 pw from the tip of the tail, which was pointed, and possessed a small rounded tip furnished with minute spines. On transverse section the cuticle was found to possess fine longitudinal ridges to the number of 40 or 42, as near as could be determined. Observations on the power of the larvae to leave the proboscis of the fly gave the same results as those given in the case of H. muscae. Experiments made to determine the power of the larvae to penetrate filter paper gave negative results. THE LIFE-HISTORY OF Habronema microstoma (Schneider, 1866). The methods adopted at this investigation have already been mentioned. The embryos were obtained from the gravid female. Fermenting lawn clippings were used as a breeding ground for Stomoxys calcitrans, and an emulsion of the embryos in saline solution was added to this material. Embryos of H. microstoma.—The embryos when taken from the gravid female are usually very active, and they remain active for some days in normal saline solution. They measure from 90°9 » to 122°8 p in length, and are enclosed in a thin shell or membrane. When placed in saline solution and tap water, respectively, they behave in the same way as those of H. muscae. The embryos may live for some days when passed out naturally with the faeces of a horse. The faeces of a horse were previously examined, and found to contain embryos of H. microstoma. These faeces were kept for ten days, and then Stomozys calcitrans allowed to deposit its eggs on the Fg ee OT or 101 material. Flies hatching out from eighteen to nineteen days later contained larvae. Adult flves.—The rate of development of the worm larvae within the developing larvae and pupae of Stomozys calcitrans appears to depend largely upon temperature. Flies bred at a low temperature, 20° to 22° C., and taking about thirty days to hatch out, show larvae in the earlier stages of develop- ment situated usually in the abdomen. Flies bred at a higher temperature, 25° to 26° C., develop more quickly, from seventeen to twenty days, and when hatching out show larvae in the final stage of development, mostly situated in the head and proboscis, with only a few in the abdomen. Those larvae situated in the abdomen are usually in an earlier stage of development. If larvae in the final stage of development are found in the proboscis of newly-hatched flies, when flies of the same batch are examined a week to ten days later the larvae pre- sent are often dead. If the development of the fly larvae has been delayed it is noticed that when the adult fly hatches out many dead and degenerating worm larvae are present. This was noticed, for example, in a culture in which the fly larvae developed quickly and the adult flies hatched out in from seventeen to twenty days. Some of the fly larvae, however, developed more slowly, and the adult flies hatched out in from thirty to thirty-four days. It was in these flies hatching out later that dead and degenerating worm larvae were found. For the most part, newly-hatched flies showed larvae in the earlier stages of development situated in the abdomen. These larvae developed into the final stage in from five to seven days, and migrated to the head and proboscis. Larvae in an earlier stage of development have at times been found in the proboscis along with larvae in the final stage of develop- ment. The larvae were situated in the muscular portion of the bulb of the proboscis, and numbered from thirty to forty. At no time did one fail to produce an infestation of Stomoxzys calcitrans with larvae of H. microstoma. Attempts to produce an infestation in Musca domestica usually gave negative results, but in one case there was an aberrant development of larvae of H. microstoma in M. domestica. In this case many of the flies examined showed embryos and larvae in varying stages of development. The development was distinctly aberrant, the larvae presenting appearances very different from those seen in Stomozys cal- citrans. Many of the forms present resembled embryos just escaped from the egg-membrane, only were somewhat longer. None of the embryos developed into the thick, nucleated larvae as seen in the normal development. The longer forms were 102 all dead and degenerating. The measurements of some of these longer forms were 151'5 p, 318 p, and 424 p long respec- tively. Unfortunately, the preparations were lost through an accident before a more complete examination could be made. The subject was not pursued any further, for at the time it was thought that it had little bearing on the matter under investigation. | Larvae of H. microstoma.—Larvae obtained from the head and proboscis of Stomozys calcitrans were found to be distinctly shorter than the larvae of the other two species. ‘They measured from 15 mm. to 2 mm. in length by 41 p to 58 » wide. The larvae had the same general appearances ~ as those of the other two species. The pharynx was 433 p long; the nerve ring was 110 pw from the anterior end of the body, and the anterior portion of the oesophagus was 1166 p long. The anus was open and situated 66°6 » from the tip of the tail, which was pointed, and possessed a small rounded tip furnished with minute spines. On transverse section the cuticle was found to be homogenous and smooth, lacking all appearance of longitudinal ridges. Observations on the power of the larvae to leave the: proboscis of the fly gave the same results as those obtained in the case of the other two species. The following observation made during the winter is of interest.—Proboscides were removed at the bend just posterior to the bulb. These were placed in saline solution in sealed chambers. One set was left at room temperature, 20° C., for one hour, and when examined no larvae had left the proboscis. Another set was placed in the incubator at 37° C. for one hour. When examined the saline solution contained many extremely active larvae. The first set which had been left at room temperature was then placed in the incubator at 37° C. for one hour. On examination the saline solution was found to contain extremely active larvae. The proboscides were then examined, and only an occasional larvae was found to have been unable to leave the proboscis. Experiments made to determine the power of the larvae to penetrate filter paper gave negative results. SUMMARY AND DISCUSSION OF THE SALIENT OBSERVATIONS. Habronema muscae was found to pass through its larval stages in Musca domestica, but showed no development in Stomoxys calcitrans. H. megastoma was found to possess a similar life-history. H. microstoma was found to pass through its larval stages in S. calcitrans, and show sometimes an aberrant development in M. domestica. i 103 The larvae of H. muscae and H. megastoma were found to possess very similar appearances. HH. megastoma was usually slightly shorter than H. muscae, possessed a louger pharynx and a shorter anterior oesophagus, and the nerve ring was situated nearer the anterior end than in 17. muscae. Both species of larvae possessed longitudinal ridges in the cuticle. It is doubtful if these small differences in the appearances of the two larvae would prove sufficient for the purpose of differentiating larvae taken from granulomata, as in this case the larvae usually show some retrogressive changes and exam- ination is more difficult. Larvae of H. microstoma were found to be shorter than the larvae of the other two species, and the absence of longitudinal ridges in the cuticle offers a means for absolute differentiation between this larvae and those of the other two species. Escape of the larvae from the proboscis of flies was found to depend upon rupture of some portion of the organ, probably the thinner citinous membrane on the interior surface of the labium. When this rupture was produced artificially the larvae rapidly made their escape into any moisture at hand, provided the temperature was sufficient to produce activity in the larvae. The escape of larvae from the proboscis under natural conditions was not demonstrated. The larvae when developed into the final stage migrated to the head and proboscis. This may suggest that the larvae abandon the intermediate host in somewhat the same manner as Filaria larva do, but observations do not lend support to this suggestion. The migration to and situation in the proboscis of flies seems to be a common feature in the develop- ment of Nematodes. For example, Patton and Cragg (1913) have observed the development of the embryos of a species of Oxyuris in Musca nebulo. The embryos are ingested by the fly larvae, and the worms undergo their evolution in the pupae. When the flies hatch out they are infested with adult parasites, which cause paralysis of the proboscis on account of their accumulation in this situation. The larvae apparently do not possess the power of penetrating the structures in the proboscis of flies. Rupture of the proboscis appears to depend upon the pressure exerted by the larvae, which pressure would be in direct proportion to the number of larvae present and their activity. Nor do the larvae appear to be capable of penetrating other objects such as filter paper. ~ Larvae do not appear to live in ealine solution, horse serum, or water for longer than two or three days, and rarely as long as seven days. The longevity of the larvae outside the 104 body of the fly may depend to some extent on the period of time elapsing between their development into the final stage and their escape or removal from the proboscis. Observations on the worm embryos suggest that these normally. do not leave the egg-membrane, and their réle is a passive one. ANIMAL EXPERIMENTATION. Preliminary experiments carried out in 1916 and 1917 with the final larval stage of both Habronema musca and H. megastoma had proved somewhat disappointing. The object of the experiment was to determine if possible which species of larva was responsible for the production of the granulomata. As the escape of the larvae from the proboscis of the fly appeared to be largely a matter of chance, it was decided to inoculate the larvae into the subcutaneous tissues of an animal. The larvae were obtained by dissection of the heads and proboscides of flies, and placed in a sealed pipette held vertically and filled with normal saline solution. When the larvae had gravitated to the end of the column of saline at the capillary end of the pipette the saline was removed, except for a small drop which contained the larvae. An incision was made through the skin of a horse and the larvae inoculated into the subcutaneous tissues. In each case a very small granuloma resulted, which on microscopic examination showed an infiltration of the tissues with eosinophiles, some hyperplasia of the fixed cells, and the formation of multi- nucleated cells. No necrotic areas were produced. It was conceivable that keeping the larvae in saline solution for one or two hours before inoculation had rendered them more vulnerable to the activity of the tissue cells and fluids, and that their more rapid destruction in the body had prevented the occurrence of necrosis. In later experiments larvae were either allowed to escape from the proboscis directly © into the tissues of experimental animals, or a mixture of equal parts of normal serum and saline was used as a medium of inoculation. The larvae were only allowed to remain in this fluid for about thirty minutes before being used. The preliminary experiments made in the latter part of 1916 and the early part of 1917 were seven in number, and the animal used was the one designated as pony in the later experiments outlined below. These preliminary experiments were made as follows : — Experiments with Habronema muscae :— -(1) Embryos of H. muscae were placed i in moist sawdust and the mass applied to the shaved skin of a horse. (2) Six larvae from the proboscis of a fly were placed on the shaved skin of the animal, the site being moistened with saline solution. 105 (3) Four larvae were placed in the conjunctival sac. (4) Seven or eight larvae were placed beneath the skin of the animal. (5) Experiment (4) repeated. (6) Experiment (4) repeated on a rabbit. Results.—No evidence was obtained suggesting that the embryos or larvae were capable of penetrating the skin. There was no evidence of any change in the tissues of the conjunctival sac following the instillation of the larvae. A slight induration was produced at the site of inoculation of the larvae. One area was removed, and the microscopic examination revealed the changes in the tissues mentioned above. No change was produced in the tissues of the rabbit following inoculation. Experiments with Habronema megastoma:— Only one experiment was made. In this larvae were placed beneath the skin, as in experiments with H. muscae. The tissue reaction was the same in this case as with H. muscae. In the following experiments two animals were used throughout. For the purpose of identification one will be called pony and the other mare. 1. Experiments with H. microstoma :— (a) Feeding experiments with Stomoxys calcitrans— Flies heavily infested with larvae were placed in a flask, the mouth of which was covered with gauze. These flies were placed on a Shaved area of the skin of the mare, and held in position for about one hour. These experiments were made in the month of June, 1918, the weather being cool. The flies did not bite very readily. After the feeding operations the site was seen to be somewhat swollen, which swelling had increased slightly by the following morning, but rapidly disappeared during the day. Another site was selected, and the experiment repeated on the following day with the same results. The experiment was repeated on the pony with the same results. Some months later, December, flies were placed in a cage which was placed over a shaved area of the skin of the mare and kept in apposition for two hours by means of bandages. This experiment gave the same result as the previous experiments. The result of the experiments was a complete failure to pro- duce a granuloma by this method. It was observed that the proboscides of many of the flies were paralyzed, and that the flies had to a great extent lost their desire and ability to bite. They fed more readily on a rabbit, but not so readily as the normal flies. (6) Larvae placed in the skin of the horse— It was observed that when the proboscis was removed from a fly and placed in normal saline solution kept at 37° C., the larvae rapidly left the proboscis. | It was decided to determine the ability of the larvae to penetrate the subcutaneous tissues of the horse. Two small incisions were made in_the skin of the mare. The incision was not. so deep as to pass right through the cori1wm. Two proboscides were placed in each wound. The edges of the wound were drawn together by means of adhesive plaster. The following morning, 106 about twenty hours later, the proboscides were removed and the wound again protected by a covering of adhesive plaster. There was a marked swelling around each wound and a collection of pus in the wound. The purulent discharge completely disappeared twenty-four hours after the removal of the proboscides, but the tumefaction of the tissues persisted. In seven days’ time a hard granuloma about twice the size of a pea was present at each site. One site was removed for microscopic examination, and the other left for further observation. Microscopic examination showed marked infiltration of the tissues with eosinophiles, hyperplasia of the fixed cells, and the formation of multi-nucleated cells. Only one necrotic area was detected, but no larvae could be seen associ- ated with this. No larvae could be found in any of the sections. made. The other area left for further observation gradually disappeared. This experiment was repeated in every detail on the pony. Two small granulomata resulted. One removed twelve days after inoculation showed the same histological picture as the one from the mare, but no necrotic areas or larvae were detected in any of the sections. These experiments were carried out during September, when the weather had become warmer. As the leaving of the proboscides in the wound for twenty hours had produced a purulent discharge, it was decided to con- siderably reduce this time in future experiments. About six weeks later four proboscides were placed in a wound in the skin of the mare. These were removed from five to six hours later. There was a marked swelling present, the area hav- ing a diameter of 4 cm. The tissues were very tense, and there was some blood-stained exudation from the wound. The swelling increased during the next twenty-four hours, but in another twenty-four hours it was much reduced. Seventy-two hours after inoculation only a slght thickening was detected. The site was removed for microscopic examination. In sections the larvae were found to have penetrated the tissues for some distance from the line of incision in the skin. They were surrounded by leucocytes, the nuclei of which showed fragmentation and pyknosis. There was oedema of the tissues, accumulation of leucocytes in small areas and around the blood vessels. There was infiltration of the tissues with eosinophiles. During December the same experiment was repeated on the pony. Two wounds were each inoculated with three proboscides, which were removed six hours later. One site was removed six hours after inoculation. Microscopic examination showed that there was dilatation of the vessels. with oedema of the tissues. The tissues were infiltrated with polymorphs and eosinophiles. Larvae were found some distance from the site of inoculation and surrounded by leucocytes. The other area was removed ten days after inoculation. There was present a hard nodule about the size of a Barcelona nut. Microscopic examination showed the usual inflammatory reaction with giant-cell formation. There were a few necrotic areas pre- sent, with which were associated degenerating larvae. (c) Larvae placed on a scarified area of skin— An area of the skin of the pony was lightly scarified, and two proboscides placed on the moist surface. The experiment gave a completely negative result, healing taking place without any tume- faction of the tissues. PO a te 107 Several attempts were made to inoculate the larvae beneath the skin by means of a hypodermic needle and syringe. It was found to be difficult or impossible to determine whether the larvae had been successfully inoculated, and as only a fleeting infiltration of the tissues occurred after inoculation, the method was abandoned. ; 2. Experiments with H. muscae:— (a) Larvae placed in the skin of the horse— Six proboscides of Musca domestica heavily infested with larvae were placed in an incision in the skin of the mare, and removed five to six hours later. Tumefaction of the tissues was produced, which increased during the twenty-four hours after inoculation, and then gradually subsided. About a week later a swelling about the size of a Barcelona nut was present. This rapidly reduced in size and completely disappeared. The day following the first inoculation another inoculation was made with the same results as the first. Some days later three more inoculations were made. After the primary tumefaction of the tissues had disappeared in from twenty-four to forty-eight hours no abnormality could be detected. These experiments were repeated on the pony. In all, three inoculations were made. Only a slight primary tumefaction of the tissues resulted which disappeared in about thirty-six hours, leaving only a very slight thickening, which completely dis- appeared in from fourteen to twenty-one days. (b) Larvae added to the conjunctival sac— About the same time as the above experiments were made larvae were placed in a pipette containing a mixture of equal parts of normal horse serum and normal saline solution. The larvae were then added along with a small quantity of the mix- ture to the conjunctival sac (off side) of the mare. The conjunc- tiva remained normal in appearance, and no excessive lacrymation was produced. The experiment was repeated on the pony. The following morning a slightly excessive lacrymation was present, which, however, disappeared during the next twenty-four hours. The conjunctiva remained normal in appearance. (c) Larvae placed on a scarified area of skin— An area of the skin of the mare was lightly scarified, and the proboscides placed on the moist surface, and kept in place by the aid of adhesive plaster. The tissues showed very slight tumefaction twenty-four hours later, which rapidly disappeared. This experiment was repeated ‘with the same result. It was also repeated on the pony, and no reaction was produced. (d) Larvae placed on a moistened area of skin— A shaved area of the skin of the mare was moistened with the serum and saline mixture, and a proboscis containing larvae placed on this. The following morning there was the merest suggestion of an elevation in the skin, but it was not observed the following evening. This experiment was repeated with the same result. There was no reaction produced in the tissues to suggest that the larvae has penetrated the skin. 108 3. Experiments with H. megastoma:— (a) Larvae placed in the skin of the horse— Proboscides of Musca domestica heavily infested with larvae were placed in three incisions in the skin of the mare and removed from five to six hours later, when there was present a marked inflammatory oedema of the tissues. One area was removed five hours after inoculation for the purpose of microscopic examination. Larvae were found to have made their way into the subcutaneous tissues, where leucocytes had commenced to surround ‘them. The other two sites were left for further observation. After inoculation the primary tumefaction reached a maximum in about forty-eight hours, and had a diameter of from 6 to 7 cm. This gradually subsided, and in nine days’ time one site was removed, when there was present a granuloma about the size of a small walnut. Microscopic examination showed an intense infiltration of the tissues with eosinophiles, hyperplasia of the fixed cells, the formation of multinucleated cells, and the presence of necrotic areas containing degenerating larvae. The other granuloma persisted for about three weeks, when it gradually disappeared. The experiments were repeated on the pony. Proboscides were placed in three incisions in the skin and removed from five to six hours later, when there was marked inflammatory oedema of the tissues. This increased during the next twenty-four hours, but had very much decreased in forty-eight hours after inoculation. One area was removed six hours after inoculation. Micro- scopic examination showed that the larvae had made their way into the subcutaneous tissues, where they were surrounded by leucocytes. The other two areas were left for further observation. In forty-eight hours after inoculation the swelling had almost dis- appeared, and in three or four days’ time there was little or no thickening of the tissues. (6) Larvae added to the conjunctival sac— Larvae were added to the conjunctival sac (near side) of the mare. Twenty-four hours later no reaction had been produced. In three or four days’ time excessive lacrymation was present. In a further three days the conjunctiva was injected and somewhat swollen. Small yellowish ‘‘tubercles’’ were to be seen on the membrana. These persisted for over a week, but in a fortnight’s- time had entirely disappeared. Epiphora continued, however, for about six weeks. The experiment was repeated on the pony with exactly the same results. (c) Larvae placed on a scarified area of skin— Larvae were placed on three scarified areas of the skin of the mare. Larvae were added to one of the scarified areas on three consecutive days. In no case was any reaction produced. This experiment was repeated on the pony, two scarified areas being made. No reaction was produced. (d) Larvae placed on a moistened area of skin— Larvae were placed on two moistened areas of the skin of the mare. No reaction was produced. The experiment was repeated on two areas of the skin of the pony with the same result. 109 4, Experiments with embryos : — Embryos of the three species kept in saline and tap water, respectively, were added to sterilized horse-dung or sawdust and placed on shaved areas of the skin of the two horses. In no case was any reaction produced in the skin of the animals. 5. Summary and discussion of the experiments : — Experiments have shown that larvae of H. microstoma are capable of making their way into the subcutaneous tissues of the horse through an incised wound in the skin. A certain number of these larvae appear to be rapidly destroyed and removed by phagocytes. Others are not so rapidly destroyed, when they produce a necrosis of the surrounding tissue and cells. As the larvae disappear they do not appear to leave any worm canals in the necrotic areas. In the experiments a tissue reaction was produced which is essentially the same as that seen in granulomata occurring under natural condi- tions. No granulomata were produced after allowing flies to bite the horse. When larvae were added to a lightly scarified area of skin they appeared to be incapable of penetrating the tissues ; at least no tissue reaction which might suggest such a penetration was produced. Larvae of //. muscae possessed the power of making their way into the subcutaneous tissues, but only a very slight tissue reaction was produced, and this quickly disappeared. When they were added to the conjunctival sac they produced no reaction. The larvae did not appear to be capable of penetrating the lightly scarified skin, nor the moistened, uninjured skin. Larvae of H. megastoma produced a typical granuloma in one animal, but failed to produce the same reaction in the other animal. The microscopic appearances of the granu- lomata produced were exactly similar to those seen in lesions occurring under natural conditions. Those larvae that were not rapidly destroyed and removed produced typical necrotic areas in which the degenerating larvae persisted for some time, and after their disappearance very definite worm canals were produced. The lesion, however, did not possess a marked chronicity. The larvae produced a conjunctivitis in both animals. They did not appear to be capable of penetrating the moistened or scarified skin. The granulomata produced with larvae of both H. micro- stoma and H. megastoma were comparatively small, and showed little chronicity. Likewise, the conjunctivitis produced by the larvae of H. megastoma was not of a very severe character. The larvae of H. megastoma, when they produced a granuloma, appeared to be better preserved than those of 110 4 . microstoma found in the granulomata produced by the atter. Under the conditions of the experiment the embryos of all three species appeared to be incapable of penetrating the skin of the horse. In these later experiments the results obtained in the preliminary experiments were confirmed, v2z., larvae of H. muscae produced no conjunctivitis and no typical granuloma in the skin, and the larvae of H. megastoma produced no typical granuloma in the skin of the pony. The experiments have shown that the larvae of all three species are capable of making their way into the subcutaneous tissues when the injury in the skin has been deep enough to include the corxwm. This migration in the tissues is probably assisted by the oedema present. The larvae, however, do not migrate for any great distance from the point of entry, in the experiments only up to about 1 cm. The larvae do not appear to be able to penetrate the tissues when the injury is confined to the superficial epithelium. Considering the number of larvae inoculated, the number of necrotic areas produced was small. This appears to be explained by the probable escape of some of the larvae, but more particularly by the early destruction of some of the larvae. Tissues removed from five to six hours after inocula- tion with larvae have shown the larvae surrounded by neutrophile leucocytes, which attack and apparently quickly remove them. Some of the larvae, however, appear to offer more resistance or attract few or no neutrophile leucocytes. These neutrophile leucocytes are not found in the tissues removed from five to seven days after inoculation. The fact that certain larvae of the same species appear to offer more resistance to the attack of neutrophile leucocytes, or show less — positive chemotaxis, leads one to expect that certain strains or varieties of the same species would be more likely to produce granulomata under natural conditions. DISCUSSION. That these larval Nematodes are the cause of the granu- lomatous reaction there appears to be no possible doubt. Microscopical examination demonstrates that the larvae soon after their introduction undergo degenerative changes. There results an infiltration of the tissues with eosinophile leucocytes and some proliferation of the fixed cells. Mono- nuclear leucocytes are also attracted to the site. These changes cause a tumefaction of the tissues which later usually gives rise to a pressure necrosis in the skin or mucous membrane. As the degenerative changes in the larvae progress ia there results a necrosis of the tissues in their immediate vicinity, giving rise to the typical caseous areas. These changes represent the characteristic appearances of the granuloma, and, apart from bacterial infection of the ulcerated surface, there is no reaction present which would not be produced by the presence and degeneration of the larval: Nematode. This evidence is almost sufficient to prove that the larvae are the essential cause of the granuloma, and that they cannot be regarded as an epi-phenomenon. Added to this evidence is the failure to demonstrate by any conceivable method the presence of any bacterium, mould, or protozoon, except a mixed variety of bacteria on the ulcerated surface. Experimentally it has been shown that larvae of Habronema are capable of producing a granuloma very similar to that found under natural conditions. This fact, taken with the above evidence, is sufficient to prove that the presence of the larvae in the cutaneous, subcutaneous, or submucous tissues is the essential cause of the lesion. It is interesting to note that there is no essential difference between the tissue reactions seen in these tumours and those seen about many of the caseous areas to be found commonly in the internal organs of most herbiverous animals. The fact that, although the larvae die out soon after the first appearance of the lesion, the tumour goes on enlarging, and may exist for some considerable time, is of extreme interest. This gradual enlargement of the tumour consists of an enlargement of the necrotic areas and an increased tissue production. There is no increase in the number of foci as, for example, occurs in actinomycotic granulomata, except in the case of re-infection or super-infection. The growth of the tumour is due mainly to the fact that the substances which originate in the degenerating or autolys- ing larvae, and which apparently causes the death of the tissue cells, very slowly penetrate to the outside of the necrotic tissue, and thus cause a slow but gradual enlargement or extension of the necrosis. This, of course, is limited, and the maximum amount of necrosis is produced in a certain time; according to various conditions which are difficult to measure. “Once the larva becomes surrounded by necrotic tissue, the diffusion outwards of the autolytic products is impeded. The autolytic products would, therefore, become concentrated towards the centre of the necrotic area, and their slow diffu- sion to the outside would tend to produce a gradual extension of the necrosis, evett after the complete disappearance of the larva. The continued presence and enlargement of the 112 necrotic areas would produce a corresponding tissue reaction, and so the tumour would continue to enlarge or grow. The chronicity of the tumour is due mainly to three factors, whilst in some cases there is a fourth. In the first place the slow diffusion of the necrosis-producing substance, which probably has its origin in the degenerating or autolysing larva, tends to produce a slow development of the necrosis, and to maintain it for some time. Secondly, the type of necrosis 1s that which is not readily absorbed or removed. The types of necrosis, or the characteristic changes of necrosis, depend mainly upon the intracellular enzymes. The necrosis- producing substance in this case must lead to an early destruc- tion of the autolytic enzymes of the cells, thus preventing further degenerative changes in the dead cells.© Thirdly, because of the lack of chemotactic substances no neutrophile leucocytes enter to remove the dead tissue. Fourthly, there is the possibility of a super-infection. If a tumour has resulted from an infection of a wound, or after ulceration of a tumour has taken place, the possibility of the entry of fresh larvae must be considered. This super-infection has been very dis- tinctly observed in tumours examined from cases occurring in the British Solomon Islands. There seems to be no doubt that the presence of the larvae in the subepithelial tissues is accidental. The larvae apparently have no power of completing their life-history, for even in the earlier lesions they always show retrogressive changes, while in the older lesions one may be unable to detect anything but a few worm canals, empty or contaiming a granular débris. However, soon after their introduction the larvae must exhibit some progressive movement, for they penetrate to some depth into the subepithelial tissues, and, in the looser tissues, such as are found in the sheath, they become more dispersed. But this power of penetration is distinctly limited, and the larva is soon unable to maintain its life, probably on account of an inability to obtain a suitable food supply. The larva cannot correctly be called a parasite, for a parasite may be defined as a living organism which takes up its abode on or within other living organisms for the purpose of obtaining food. (1) That absorption of dead tissue depends mainly upon the completeness or incompleteness of the destruction of the intra- cellular enzymes is illustrated by the following experiment :—Two pieces of fresh normal tissue, one heated to 100° C., and the other untreated, when placed in the abdominal cavity of the same species undergo very different changes. The unheated tissue soon under- - goes autolytic changes and is absorbed, whereas the heated tissue, pense dead, undergoes no autolytic changes, and is very slowly absorbed. 113 There seems to be little doubt that the larva present in the lesions belongs to the genus Habronema. In tracing the evolution of these tumours from the earliest recognizable lesion, and taking into consideration their situa- tion in or just beneath the skin or external mucous mem- branes, it seems reasonable to assume that the larvae are introduced from without and are not carried to the surface from within. A point to be decided is whether larvae of Habronema can enter the submucosa of the external mucous membranes or the subcutaneous tissues, and so make their way to the alimentary canal, or not. If the larvae are capable of doing this, as larvae of A nkylostoma are, then it is remarkable that they should so often be held up in the submucous or subcutaneous tissues. There is nothing to suggest that this is a common or even probable mode of invasion. Experimental observations have shown that, although larvae are capable of migrating in the subcutaneous tissues for some little distance from the point of entry, this migration is very limited, and the larvae are soon surrounded by leuco- cytes. It would appear, therefore, that the presence of the larvae in the submucosa of the conjunctiva, and of, the urethra or the subcutaneous tissues, is an accidental phenomenon. All the larvae found in the tumours have presented the same appearances, and must be regarded as being of the same stage of development. There is nothing to suggest that the larvae have passed through any developmental stages in the tissues of the horse. As the larvae found in the granulomata are in the same stage of development as those found in the head and proboscis of adult flies, it would appear that flies are in some way respon- sible for the production of the lesions. This is also suggested by the fact that the granulomata only occur at that time of the year when flies are present in abundance. Observations on the life-histories of the three species of Habronema have shown that H. muscae develops through its larval stages in Musca domestica, but 1t is not capable of such development in Stomozys calcitrans, at least under experi- mental conditions; H. megastoma has the same life-history as H. muscae; H. microstoma develops through its larval stages in Stomoxys calcitrans, and shows, sometimes at least, an aberrant development in Musca domestica. Harvey Johnston (1912) has recorded the finding of a larva somewhat resembling that of H. muscae in Musca vetustissma in Queensland, so it seems possible that these species may be capable of developing through their larval stages in other flies, particularly Muscids. Nothing, however, 114 is at present known about the possible development of these species 1n other flies, and as it would appear that the usual mode of development is as outlined above, the possible association of Musca domestica and Stomozxys calcitrans with the production of the lesions must be considered. The affection, as it has been observed by the present writer and by Lewis and Seddon, is most commonly situated in or about mucous membranes, v7z., the mucous membrane of the urethra and that of the eye. Lesions are found, nevertheless, in other situations as on the sheath or the limbs. Why should these lesions be more commonly found in mucous membranes? The first explanation which suggests itself is that Musca domestica is attracted to these situations in search of moisture and food. Should larvae escape from the proboscis during feeding operations, there would be sufficient moisture present on the mucous membrane to prevent desicca- tion. Under these conditions it is possible for the larvae to penetrate the mucous membrane should they desire to and be capable of so doing. Larvae found in the lesions resemble those of Habronema muscae and H. megastoma, the cuticle of both these forms possessing longitudinal ridges, but not those of H. microstoma, the cuticle of this form showing no longitudinal ridges. Hf. megastoma is found in tumours situated in the sub- mucosa of the stomach of the horse. It is generally believed that it perforates the gastric mucous membrane, probably when in the larval stage. In its normal situation the parasite would live on the products of the tissues rather than on the semi-digested material in the alimentary canal. It is, there- fore, a parasite of tissues rather than of the contents of the alimentary canal. From a theoretical consideration one would expect the larva of H. megastoma to possess the instinctive desire to penetrate mucous membranes, and, further, to be able to maintain its life in the submucous tissues of the urethra and conjunctiva or the subcutaneous tissues longer than the larvae of the other two species. This suggests that the larva of H. megastoma is more likely to produce a habronemic granu- loma than the larvae of the other two species. Experimental evidence also suggests that the larva of H. megastoma more readily penetrates the conjunctiva of the horse and sets up a granulomatous reaction, and also that it more readily sets up a granulomatous condition in the subcutaneous tissues than the larvae of H. muscae. | Although the experimental evidence suggests that the larva of H. muscae does not readily penetrate the conjunctiva or produce a granulomatous reaction in the subcutaneous 115 tissues, it is not possible to say that it is never responsible for the production of a habronemic granuloma. Clinical and experimental observations suggest that the production of a habronemic granuloma depends in some degree upon the susceptibility of the animal. It seems possible that the presence in the subcutaneous tissues of larvae of any of the three species of Habronema may set up a typical granuloma, provided the animal possesses a susceptibility to the particular species present. Experimentally it has been shown, for example, that the presence of larvae of 1. microstoma in the subcutaneous tissues may set up a granuloma with typical caseous areas, whereas, in the same animal, the presence of larvae of //. megastoma or H. muscae may produce nothing more than an acute inflammatory oedema, which quickly disappears, and is followed by no subacute or chronic changes. It seems possible, further, that certain tissues may react in such a way as to produce a habronemic granuloma, while other tissues in the same animal show no such reaction. The larvae of 7. megastoma, for example, may set up a habronemic conjunctivitis, but when present in the subcutaneous tissues of the same animal little or no reaction is produced (wide experiments). Assuming that larvae of H. megastoma are responsible for the production of habronemic granulomata, it seems possible that certain varieties of the same species are more likely to produce these lesions than other varieties. Certain varieties, for example, may possess more vigour in penetrating mucous membranes or moist surfaces, or they may possess greater powers of adaptation. The same may be true for the larvae of the other two species. Tt is possible that habronemic granulomata may be due to the larvae of some unrecorded species of Habronema, though it does not seem very probable. The fact that habronemic granulomata are to be found in situations other than external mucous membranes led to the advancement by the present writer of an hypothesis that Stomoxys calcitrans was probably responsible for the inocula- tion of the larvae into the tissues of the horse. It has now been shown that S. calcitrans is the intermediate host of ZH. microstoma, and that in the final larval stage the larvae of this species show no longitudinal ridges in the cuticle. This larva cannot, then, be responsible for the granulomata observed by the present writer in Southern Australia. It is possible that S. calcitrans may be the intermediate host of some other species of Habronema, the larva of which shows longitudinal ridges in the cuticle; but there is probably no 116 necessity to fall back on such an hypothesis as this. It seems possible that S. calcitrans infested with larvae of H. micro- stoma may inoculate these larvae into the skin of a horse with the production of a granuloma. It has been shown experi- mentally that larvae of H. microstoma are capable of produc- ing a typical granuloma in the subcutaneous tissues. The occurrence of such a granuloma under natural conditions, however, has not been definitely observed in Southern Australia by the present writer, although the lesion taken from the metacarpus may possibly have been due to these larvae. As far as can be ascertained the granulomata observed on the sheath and limbs have not resulted from infection of a wound. In no case has there been a history of a previous wound. It is possible that small wounds may have been over- looked, but it must be conceded that the sheath is a very uncommon site for wounds. These granulomata appear about the sheath and limbs, sites commonly attacked by Stomozxys calcitrans. When one - or more of these flies bite they often produce some swelling in the skin, and an exudation of blood or serum occurs through the puncture wound. It seems possible that Musca domestica when coming to feed upon this exudate may contaminate the site with larvae of Habronema. The larvae would find sufficient moisture to prevent their desiccation, and would probably be able to make their way through the puncture wounds into the skin and subcutaneous tissues. Wounds would often present ideal conditions for contam- ination by larvae and their subsequent. penetration into the deeper tissues. It is probable that this method of infection does occur, but there seems to be no doubt that it is not the only method of infection. Habronemiasis is so common in horses that it is rare to find a stomach free from one or other of the three species. This being so, it is remarkable that habronemic granulomata should be of such infrequent occurrence in Southern Australia and other temperate countries. There are several possible reasons for this: —(1) H. megastoma is not as common as the other species. It has been suggested that larvae of H. mega- stoma are probably the commonest cause of habronemic granulomata. In the experience of the present writer H. megastoma is the least common of the three species to be found in the stomach of the horse. This fact would tend to lessen the frequency of the occurrence of the granulomata if larvae of H. megastoma are the causal organisms. (2) The escape of larvae from the proboscis of flies is not a common occurrence. It would appear that the larvae may escape from 117 the proboscis of Musca domestica when that fly comes to feed on moist surfaces. The escape of the larvae from the proboscis appears to depend upon the rupture of certain structures in the proboscis. This rupture appears to depend directly upon the number of larvae present and their activity. Unless conditions are such as to allow of the development of a large number of larvae in the fly, and the temperature is high enough to produce marked activity in the larvae, then it~ would appear that the escape of larvae from the proboscis is not very likely to occur. Experimental observations have shown that the escape of larvae from the proboscis is not of frequent occurrence. (3) All animals do not appear to be susceptible. (4) It seems possible that certain strains or varieties of the same species are more likely to produce lesions than others. In each granuloma examined there have been a large number of larvae or necrotic areas present. This indicates that there is usually a massive infection at one point. Super- infection has not been found to be of common occurrence. Only in one tumour examined was this suggested by the fact that larvae showing marked retrogressive changes were present along with others showing very early retrogressive changes. Massive infection at one point, therefore, does occur, and is probably explained by the fact that the larger the number of larvae present in the proboscis of a fly the more likelihood of rupture of the proboscis and the escape of the larvae. , Tumours on the glans penis have always been found at the urethral orifice. This suggests that flies are attracted to the moisture about the meatus, and that the larvae after escaping from the proboscis make their way through the mucous membrane of the urethra, and not through the modi- fied skin covering the glans penis. This is supported also by the fact that the necrotic foci are found close to or involving the urethral mucosa while they may be relatively a considerable distance from the external surface. C. GRANULOMATA AS FOUND IN NORTHERN AUSTRALIA. General.—A granulomatous affection of horses, commonly known as “swamp cancer,’ and described by Lewis (1914) under the name of equine granuloma, is found in the northern or tropical portions of Australia. The condition has been thoroughly described by Lewis, who studied it in the field, and also conducted some experimental work in an attempt to artificially produce the disease. The present writer was impressed with the great similarity between this condition and the granulomata observed in Southern Australia. On request, specimens of “swamp 118 cancer’? were kindly supphed by Mr. J. F. McKchran and Mr. C. G. Dickinson. Macroscopic examination.—Macroscopic examination shows the tumours to vary very little from the granulomata already described. The most marked variation is in the very large size these tumours attain in the north of Australia and their great chronicity. A point to be emphasized is that in the early lesions the necrotic areas are small, pale in colour, and soft, while in the older lesions they are larger, darker in colour usually, and harder. It is evident that the growth of the tumour depends upon an enlargement of the necrotic areas and an increased tissue reaction, z.e., the number of necrotic areas does not increase as the tumour grows. The necrotic areas when separated out from the surround- ing tissues are seen to have an irregular, bosselated surface with some marked irregularities or “branchings.” These necrotic areas are typical of “swamp cancer’”’ as of the granu- lomata described above. Ulceration of the surface is much more extensive in “swamp cancer’ than in the granulomata observed in Southern Australia. Microscopie examination.—The histological picture is essentially that of a granuloma. There is an increased produc- tion of fibrous tissue, which varies with the age and size of the lesion. The tumour is extensively invaded with eosinophile leucocytes. There are collections of mononuclear cells, and an epitheloid (endothelial) cell reaction with, at times, the forma- tion of many multinucleated cells. | Necrotic areas occur throughout the tumour, and in the older lesions they are more or less encapsulated. When ulceration of the surface is extensive, neutrophile leucocytes are attracted to the part. This histological picture is almost identical with that described in the present communication for habronemic granu- lomata occurring in Southern Australia. The only variation is due to the earlier and more extensive ulceration and secondary infection of the superficial parts of the tumour. This gives rise to an infiltration of the tissues with neutrophile leucocytes, which are found mainly in the more superficial parts of the lesion, but are not seen attacking the caseous areas. The tissue reaction is very marked, being greater the larger the tumour. The caseous areas have the same microscopic appearance as those already described, but calcification has not been ~ observed in “swamp cancer.” No very early lesion has been examined, so that it has not been possible to demonstrate any larval Nematode: In some cases spaces resembling worm canals have been observed. eu) Possibly, however, these are blood vascular spaces that have been included in the necrotic area. The smallest lesion examined was one with a diameter approximately 2 cm. and a depth of about 6 mm. It was raised and had an ulcerated surface. Microscopically there was an extensive invasion of the tissues by eosinophile and neutrophile leucocytes, which were more crowded together in some areas, towards the centre of which typical necrosis had occurred. There were only very few necrotic areas present. The tissues were oedematous and haemorrhagic. The epidermis was in parts oedematous, and invaded by leucocytes. This change had led to ulceration with the formation of a vascular granulation tissue. Towards the edge of the lesion the epidermis showed considerable hypertrophic changes, the epithelium dipping deeply into the subcutaneous tissues, and showing numerous small processes. This hypertrophic change in the epithelium indicates an irritation of some standing. The necrotic areas were sometimes ill-defined and diffuse, and there was no attempt at encapsulation. Multinucleated cells were seen in several parts of the section. The whole lesion was examined in serial section and no larvae were discovered. The lesion, although a very small one, was probably of several weeks’ standing, and not as - early as might be assumed from its size. A consideration of the hypertrophic changes in the epithelium, which must have been of several weeks’ duration, led to this conclusion. It may be mentioned here that there is a granulomatous condition affecting horses in the Solomon Islands known under the name of “swamp cancer.” This condition is discussed else- where, and must not be confused with the “swamp cancer’’ of Northern Australia. DISCUSSION. There is a great similarity between the macroscopic and microscopic pathology of “swamp cancer” and habronemic granuloma as observed in Southern Australia. The condition is undoubtedly a granuloma, and is due to a reaction on the part of the tissues to an invasion by some organism. It belongs to that type of reaction most commonly seen in animal tissues that have become invaded by some larval or adult verminous parasite. The reaction is so similar to that seen in some habronemic granulomata as to suggest that the condition is due to asimilar cause. No larvae have been found in the tissues, but this is not proof that they have not been there at some time, and that the tumour is not the result of the invasion. At the same time there is no proof that. larvae are responsible for the reaction. 120 Attention has already been drawn to the fact that the tissue reaction and necrosis found in habronemic granulomata are essentially the same as those found quite commonly in the internal organs of herbiverous animals following the death in the tissues of migrating parasites. Experience leads one to believe that a granuloma containing necrotic foci, showing a marked eosinophilic invasion and the formation of multi- nucleated cells, is due to the reaction of the tissues against an invasion by a larval or adult metazoan parasite, usually a Nematode. There seems to be no reason to suggest that “swamp cancer’’ offers an exception. It is now known that these lesions in the skin and external mucous membranes of the horse are most commonly due to a larval Habronema, and there is strong presumptive evidence that “swamp cancer’ is due to a similar larva. It has already been shown that in older lesions larval Habronema cannot be demonstrated. It is difficult in a country like the Northern Territory of Australia to obtain early lesions, for the animals are not under constant super- vision. Lesions that have been sent to the present writer and described as early lesions have been found on examination to be small lesions, but of some standing. Jt seems almost certain that many of these small lesions would never develop into the large, chronic lesions. Their small size appears to depend upon the few necrotic areas present and a resistance on the part of the animal which is apparently absent in those animals which develop large, chronic lesions. Experimentally it has been shown that larvae belonging to all three species of Habronema are capable of penetrating the tissues for some distance from the point of entry. At least two of these can set up a chronic irritation which leads to the formation of a granuloma containing necrotic foci. Experiment- ally it has also been shown that apparently the tissues of some animals offer a strong resistance to the presence of these larvae, and are capable of quickly destroying them before they are able to produce much reaction. It will be seen, therefore, that the possibility is that “swamp cancer’? may be due to any one of the three species of Habronema. Evidence is not in favour, however, of the probability of “swamp cancer” being due to larvae of either H. muscae or H. megastoma. These two forms pass through their larval stages in Musca domestica, and as this fly is not usually to be found far afield, it seems probable that it is in no way associated with the occurrence of “swamp cancer.’’ Jt seems more probable that H. microstoma may be the species responsible for the lesion. As this species passes through its larval stage in Stomoxys calcitrans there is more chance of horses in the field becoming inoculated with these 121 larvae than with those of the other two species. It has been shown experimentally that larvae of H. microstoma, although being able to set up a typical reaction with necrosis, quickly disappear in the tissues. If “‘swamp cancer’’ be due to the larval form of 7. microstoma, iti seems possible that this is one of the reasons for the failure so far to demonstrate the pres- ence of any larvae in the tissues. Also, as the presence in the skin of larvae of H. microstoma would apparently depend upon their inoculation by Stomozys calcitrans, a super-infection would at least be uncommon ; therefore, one would not expect to find larvae only a few days old in an ulcerated lesion, as is possible in those due to the larvae of other species of Habronema. If “swamp cancer’’ is due to the final larval stage of H. microstoma as seen in Stomoxys calcitrans, then the probability of its demonstration in the lesions would appear to be somewhat remote. It seems possible also that “swamp cancer” may be due to other species of Habronema carried by some other form of muscid such as Musca vetustissima, which may be found further afield than Musca domestica. If M. vetustissima were responsible one would expect to find lesions in the conjunctiva. As far as one is aware these have not been observed, nor have the lesions been observed on other external mucous membranes. Lesions have, however, been observed on the sheath and limbs, sites commonly attacked by Stomozys calcitrans, so that the suggestion that this fly may be responsible seems more likely to be true than the latter suggestion. The observations and experiments made by Lewis are of importance. He has shown that “swamp cancer’’ occurs on those parts of the body commonly attacked by Stomoxys caleitrans. He has discussed the possibility of “swamp cancer” being due to a verminous infection, but has come to the conclusion that it is improbable. He believes that the eosinophilia observed in the lesions is due to the reaction of the breaking-down epithelium, and calls the reaction a local eosinophilia. General eosinophilia may or may not be demonstrable, but in any case the eosinophile leucocytes found in the lesion have to be brought there by the circulating blood. Lewis is not very clear on the distinction he wishes to draw between a general and a local eosinophilia. Apparentiy he claims never to have found eosinophile leucocytes in the vicinity of verminous parasites. This is contrary to the experience of the present writer. It may be granted, however, that the presence of eosinophile leucocytes in a tissue is not always indicative of the presence of a verminous parasite, 122 Lewis is also of the opinion that the evidence is strongly opposed to the possibility of flies acting as the carrier of the infection. This conclusion is based on the fact that the number of biting flies in the Territory is considerable, but he has observed no preference on the part of the flies as to the portion of the horse to be attacked, whereas “swamp cancer’’ lesions occur mainly about the legs and abdomen. He states, however, that the biting flies present are chiefly Tabanidae, and it is on observation of the presence and habits of these flies that he draws his conclusions. Lewis concludes that the probability is that the virus which causes the lesions “is normally a habitant of the swamps.” There seems to be some evidence to suggest that in swampy districts horses are more prone to the affection. This may possibly be explained, however, by the fact that in such areas horse dung is liable to remain longer in a moist state and be more attractive as a breeding ground for Stomoxys calcitrans. He has demonstrated that the condition is not contagious. His attempts to obtain micro-organisms by cultural methods failed, and all attempts to reproduce the lesions artificially by inoculation of portions of tumours from horse to horse gave negative results. These results are impor- tant, and are not incompatible with the hypothesis that the lesions are due to some verminous infection. Lewis himself admits that “the inability to reproduce the disease artificially from horse. to horse suggests one of two things—either the presence of an intermediate host or carrier is necessary, or the appearance of the causative agent in the horse is an accidental phenomenon. . .?’ These conclu- sions actively support the above hypothesis, for if the lesions are due to a larval Habronema, the presence of an intermediate host or carrier is necessary, and, moreover, the appearance of the causative agent in the horse is, as far as we know, an accidental phenomenon. “Swamp cancer’ occurs in horses in the field, but when these animals are brought in and placed on “hard food,’’ Lewis informs us, the tumours gradually disappear. If the granu- lomata are due to a larval Habronema, this result is not very surprising, for in this case there is present no virus or micro- organism capable of multiplication in the tissues and of causing a progressive infection. If ‘‘swamp cancer’’ is due to a mould parasite, or some virus that is capable of multiplication in the tissues, this result is remarkable. If this be the case, it is also remarkable that necrotic areas do not increase in number and occur in all stages of development. Further, the failure of Lewis to transmit the disease from horse to horse can be taken as very strong evidence against the probability 123 of the condition being due to some micro-organism or virus capable of multiplication in the tissues. “Swamp cancer’ certainly shows a variation in non- essential characteristics from habronemic granulomata as seen in Southern Australia, but this is possibly due to several factors. In the first place, it is unlikely that “swamp cancer” is due to an invasion of larvae of either H. muscae or H. megastoma. In the second place, horses running in the field, where the natural grasses are not always very nutritious, are likely to react differently from those kept on a highly nutri- tious diet (“hard food’’). In the third place, the climatic conditions would have a decided effect on the nature of the reaction to an invasion by a larval Habronema. In a previous publication the opinion was expressed that “swamp cancer” is almost certainly a variation of the affection observed in Southern Australia. After a more extensive experience in the examination of specimens, and after certain experimental studies, this opinion is still held. In conclusion, it may be said that there is strong pre- sumptive evidence to suggest that ‘swamp cancer’’ as observed in the northern parts of Australia is due to the invasion of the tissues by a larval Habronema, and that the species responsible is possibly H. microstoma, in which case it would most probably be introduced into the tissues by Stomoxys calcitrans. D. SimitaR GRANULOMATA AS FOUND OUTSIDE AUSTRALIA. 1. “Summer Sores.’’ This affection was first described, in 1850, by Bouley. Rivolta, in 1868, isolated a worm from the sores, and called it Dermofilaria irritans. Uaulanié confirmed this discovery in 1884. Since that time many observations on “‘summer sores’”’ have been published. The literature bearing on the subject has been reviewed by Railliet (1915). The affection has been variously named “summer sores,”’ “granular dermatitis,’’ “‘estival sores,” “granular sores,” and “esponja.” A typical lesion shows a granulomatous sore possessing ' small caseous nodules varying in size from that of a grain of millet to that of a pea. The lesions show variations in char- acter according to the country in which they occur, climate and other conditions, but the presence of the caseous nodules is characteristic. Resistance to treatment, chronicity, and an accompanying pruritus are also characteristic features of the affection. The parts most commonly affected are the ¢xtrem- ities, but the head and chest, and also the conjunctiva, are frequently the sites of lesions. 124 The condition has been described as occurring mainly in India, Africa, and tropical America. For the most part the descriptions both of the pathology and the associated larvae have been neither very accurate nor full. Railliet in his report deals extensively with the researches of Descazeaux, who studied the condition in Brazil. Des- cazeaux conducted some careful observations, and his contribu- tion has considerably advanced our knowledge of the affection. The following is a brief summary of the description as given by Descazeaux : — ‘‘Summer sores’’ appear during the summer; during the winter these tumours disappear totally or in part, tc reappear on the first return of heat. Three to 4 per cent. of horses and mules were found affected. The parts of the body most affected are the external surfaces of the extremities, the canon, the knee, and the lateral and superior parts of the neck. The condition is found in two stages. In the first stage the tumour is only inflammatory. Old lesions will again become active. The tumours are circular, non-adherent, and 1 to 1°5 cm. in thickness. In the second stage (15 to 20 days) the circular tumour varies in extent up to 30 cm. in diameter and 2 to 5 cm. in thickness; it is very fibrous and adherent to subjacent tissues, the superior part of the tumour being ulcerated. The tumour presents a tendency to enlarge. The surrounding skin is thickened, indurated, and elevated by a number of nodules, which soon ulcerate and become confluent. The ulcerated surface becomes covered by granulations. Pruritus is intense. The sores last six to nine months, and resist all treat- ment. Cold acts favourably upon them, and in the first months of the winter, if they are not very extensive, they may completely heal. If the sore is only in the first stage it will disappear in from four to six days. Pathological Anatomy.—At first the ‘‘EHsponja’’ has the characteristics of an inflammatory tumour; it is very vascular and easily excised. Later the tumour becomes hard, fibrous, and infiltrated with calcareous ‘‘grains.’? On the cut surface these ‘‘orains’’ are seen to vary in size from that of a pin’s head to that of a pea, and they enucleate very easily. Microscopical.—The tumour in the first stage shows roughly three layers or areas—a deep layer formed by loose fibrous tissue and vascular spaces; a middle layer with little fibrous tissue but a considerable infiltration of leucocytes and eosinophiles; a superior layer formed chiefly of thickened fibrous tissue. In the middle, parasitic caseous areas are seen. These are oblong or round, measuring from 800 yz to 900 4 in Iength by 300 « to 400 uw in breadth. The worms are found in these necrotic areas, and vary from two to five in number. Some areas present a central cavity which was primarily occupied by the parasite. In tumours of the second stage it is difficult to find typical parasitic ‘‘tubercles.’?’ The tumours consist mainly of dense fibrous tissue. Sometimes the débris of a parasite is seen. Descazeaux also gives a description of the ‘“‘parasite’’ which as Railliet has shown, he wrongly considered to be a mature female. This parasite he calls the “constant parasite,” 125 and describes it as being from 2°4 to 2°8 mm. long by 45 to 50 p broad, body filiform, terminating posteriorly in a blunt point furnished with bristles; cuticle striated longitudinally. In one sore he found, on dissecting the superficial part, five examples of a larva which he calls the “inconstant parasite.”’ This is described as being 900 p» long by 25 p broad, cuticle smooth, anus at the base of the tail, and vulva at the posterior third of the body. Railliet draws attention to the occurrence of cutaneous lesions in which larvae have been found, but which differ from the “‘constant parasite’’ of Descazeaux. He recalls that Ercolani met with embryos of a Nematode in a horse on which were found “umbilicated crusts’ about 1 cm. broad and very adherent. The crusts implicated the entire thickness of the skin, and were localized at the lower surface of the body along the linea alba, where there were also many bare patches. In these crusts Ercolani found a small Nematode, which was characterized by keeping its caudal extremity doubled under ‘the body and making frequent movements of abduction. He called the worm Trichina uncinata. Unfortunately no dimen- sions were given. Railliet remarks that Haubner described this condition under the name of “placoregma,” and that the affection, which has also been described by Cadeac, presents a very marked resemblance to “summer sores.’ Railliet mentions that Buffard found embryos in oedematous plaques which somewhat resembled the lesions of dourine. These embryos measured 80 to 90 pw long by 3°5 to 4 » broad. Buffard believed these to be the embryos of Filaria papillosa (Setaria equina), but Railliet shows that he was mistaken. Railliet believes that the embryos found by Ercolani and Buffard are embryos of Habronema. Further, Railliet believes that the “inconstant parasite” of Descazeaux is an early larval stage of Habronema, resem- bling stage 2 of H. muscae, as described by Ransom. Fayet and Moreau described a larva measuring 2'5 to 3°5 mm. long by 50 to 90 » broad, which possessed longitudinal striations, but spines on the caudal extremity were not mentioned. Railliet believes that if the larva really lacked the covering spines at the tip of the tail it would fall into one of the stages between 3 and 5 of H. muscae, as described by Ransom. The main part of Railliet’s paper deals with the classifica- tion of the larval Nematode found in “summer sores.’’ The fact that the larva possesses a spinous tip at the end of the tail has enabled Railliet to definitely place it in the super- family Spiruroidea. The larva corresponds closely to the sixth 126 larval stage of Habronema muscae, as observed by Ransom in Musca domestica. After discussing the findings of the various authors, Railliet comes to the conclusion that the Nematode of “‘sum- mer sores” is none other than a larva of Spiroptera of the genus Habronema. His general conclusions are as follows : — 1. The parasite of verminous dermatitis is an embryo or a larva of Habronema, which it is rational to ascribe to one of the three species of the genus living in the stomach of the horse. 2. The clinical forms of the affection vary in a certain measure with the stage of evolution of the parasite and with the climate. 3. It is probable that the infection of the horse occurs from without inwards by contact with manure, which harbours the embryos of Habronema rejected with the excrements, and that these embryos evolve in the skin as they do normally in the body of the fly. 4. It is possible also that the larvae escape from the proboscis of the fly in contact with the sores. More recently van Saceghem (1917) published a summary of some observations he had made on “granular dermatitis”’ as it occurs in equines at Zambi, Lower Congo. He found that the condition occurs only in animals kept in stables. The bedding was changed and the dung removed regularly from these stables. The disease is never localized in the hindquarters, but always in the fore quarters, on the legs, and the inner canthus of the eye. Lesions in other situations are rare. Hquines which are allowed to live at liberty never present the disease. In a stable where several horses were affected with “summer sores’ he found that 20 per cent. of Musca domestica were infested with a Nematode larva 2 mm. long by 65 p broad. The larva possessed an elongated, pointed, anterior extremity, and a blunt posterior end studded with bristles. The larvae showed no longitudinal striations. The larvae found in the sores were 50 p broad, and showed marked longitudinal striations. The lesions usually show a large number of calcified larvae and a few living ones. He says that there is thus a massive infection at a single point, and it is not very probable that these larvae are all conveyed | during one short period of time to the same point. in a later communication, van Saceghem (1918) records the results of some experiments, and concludes that flies are the vectors of the Habronema larvae, and that the larva found 127 in the verminous nodules is an aberrant larva of H. muscae. In his earlier communication he says that in a few post- mortem. examinations made at Zambi no specimens of H. megastoma were found. His conclusion was that H. megastoma was either absent or very rare at Zambi. In his experiment he, therefore, deposited larvae of Musca domestica on a freshly voided mass of dung from a horse “known to be infected with H. muscae.”’ When the adult flies hatched out they were found to be infected with larvae in a proportion of 70 per cent. Larvae isolated from some of these flies and transferred on to the hair or shaved skin of a horse were found to die off rapidly and show no tendency to pierce the skin. When deposited on wounded surfaces covered with serous fluid they executed movements, and showed a marked tendency to become lodged in small crevices. He also deposited larvae in the inner canthus of the right eye of a horse which was kept isolated within an enclosure surrounded by fine mosquito netting. The animal subsequently became affected with conjunctivitis, and verminous nodules developed on the membrana nictitans. The left eye, which served as a control, showed no change. A further experiment was conducted in which two wounds were made in the skin of a horse; one wound was protected against flies and the other was left uncovered. The animal was placed in a stable in which 20 per cent. of the flies were infested with Habronema larvae. The unprotected wound became the seat of intense irritation, which caused the horse to bite itself. The wound became transformed into a char- acteristic “summer sore.”’ DISCUSSION. There can be no doubt that the etiology of the tumours found in Southern Australia and of those found elsewhere, and usually called “summer sores,” is the same. The larvae found in “summer sores’’ appear to be identical with those found in Southern Australia. Fayet and Moreau, Descazeaux and van Saceghem have all described the presence of longitudinal ridges in the cuticle, which also characterizes the larvae found here. Unfortunately the descriptions of the larvae have been very inaccurate, and in many cases they have been regarded as adult forms. It was not until recently that the etiology of the condition was established by Railliet in his interpretation of the work of Descazeaux. Although there are certain variations in the characters of the lesions, for the most part they are fairly constant. Those lesions in which embryos have been found do not appear to resemble a typical “summer sore“ very closely. Railliet 128 believes that the clinical form of the malady may be in agree- ment with the stage of evolution of the parasite. There appears to be very little evidence to support Railliet’s theory, viz., that the lesions are due to the penetra- tion of the skin by embryos which develop as erratic parasites in an abnormal situation in undergoing an analagous develop- ment to that which they accomplish normally in the body of the fly. It has been shown experimentally that the final larval stage can produce a typical reaction, so, at least, this aberrant development does not appear to be necessary. _ It is possible that embryos may either penetrate the skin or become lodged in sores, where they may set up a tissue reaction, but there is no experimental evidence to support this assumption. Even if we assume the possibility of embryos of Habronema setting up a certain type of lesion in the skin, there appears to be little or no evidence to suggest that such embryos are capable of developing through their larval stages in this situation. Further, there is no proof that the embryos found by Ercolani in the one case, and by Buffard in the other, are embryos of Habronema. Embryos of Habronema are to be found in the faeces at all times of the year. If these embryos leave the faeces, and in penetrating the skin and their subsequent evolution they set up a typical “summer sore,’’ it is difficult to explain (1) the seasonal occurrence of the tumours and (2) the massive infec- tion at one point. The life-history of the three species of Habronema is of that type which involves a simple alternation between two hosts—one a vertebrate harbouring the adult and the other an invertebrate harbouring the larval stage. From a theoretical consideration it seems reasonable to assume that it is improb- able, should this alternation be broken, that the worm would be able to carry on its development. Before Railliet’s theory can be accepted it will require the support of more clinical and experimental evidence. The “inconstant parasite’ of Descazeaux, believed by Railliet to be an early larval form of Habronema resembling stage 2 of H. muscae as described by Ransom, is not definitely a larval Habronema. It was described by Descazeaux as a “larve strongyloide.’’ He described the anus as being open and situated at the base of the tail and a vulva situated at the posterior third of the body. The larva is 900 to 950 pw long by 25 » broad. It will be seen that the larva is approxi- mately only half the width of a Habronema larva. From an early stage resembling that of stage 1 of Ransom the growth of Habronema larvae is mainly in length, the width or 129 diameter remaining approximately constant throughout. The presence of an open anus at the base of the tail is against its being a Habronema larva. A larval Habronema has a closed ~ anus with a very prominent anal operculum in the early stages, and only in the final larval stage is the anus open. It seems possible that the form may be an aberrant larva of 7. microstoma, as 1s sometimes seen in Musca domestica. It is also possible that the larva does not belong to the genus Habronema. Railliet has taken the presence of this larva in one sore examined by Descazeaux as evidence in favour of his theory that embryos of Habronema are capable of developing through their larval stages in the skin of the horse. If the form is a larval Habronema it is certainly aberrant, but there is no proof that it has developed from an embryo in the skin of the horse. There is no proof, moreover, that the form is a larval Habronema. It is doubtful, then, that this finding really can be taken as supporting Railliet’s theory. Further, there is little support for Railliet’s theory to be found in the fact that Fayet and Moreau did not describe the presence of a spinous tip to the tail of the larva they found. In all other respects their larva resembles that usually found in “summer sores,’ and it is probable that they failed in common with others to detect the spinous tip. The fact that larvae at an earlier stage than the final are sometimes present in the proboscis of a fly must not be overlooked. Should these earlier larvae be present in the proboscis along with larvae in the final stage, and should the larvae escape from the proboscis, it is possible that these earlier larval stages may be present in a lesion along with the later stages. Therefore, the finding of larvae of an earlier stage could not be taken as proof of development of the larvae in the tissues of the horse. Van Saceghem’s observations and experiments strongly suggest that flies play an important réle in the production of the lesions. His experiments have shown that the larvae of Habronema when placed in the inner canthus of the eye are capable of setting up a typical habronemic conjunctivitis. He showed, further, that an open. wound may develop into a typical “summer sore” if the animal is placed in an environ- ment where flies are heavily infested with larvae. This is strong presumptive evidence in support of his conclusion that the larvae in the wound escaped from the proboscis of the fly when the latter came to feed upon the raw surface. Larvae found by him in “summer sores” were 50 p in diameter, and showed marked longitudinal striations in the cuticle, whereas those found in flies caught in a stable were 65 » in diameter and showed no longitudinal striations. He i 130 does not mention what means were taken to determine the presence or absence of longitudinal striations. In sections of a lesion a transverse section of the larva would clearly reveal the presence of the longitudinal striations in the cuticle. Unless transverse sections were made of the larvae isolated from the flies longitudinal striations could not have been demonstrated. If all means were taken to determine the presence or absence of these striations then, one may assert with confidence, that the larvae isolated from the flies by van Saceghem. were neither larvae of H. muscae nor H. megastoma, but the larvae of some other species probably not yet described, although there is a possibility that they may have been the larvae of H. microstoma. There is no proof that the larvae used by van Saceghem in his experiments were the larvae of 7. muscae, as he claims. His experiments are valuable in demonstrating that the final larval stage of //abronema is capable of producing a typical lesion, but they do not help in the specific determination of the larva responsible. It is interesting to note that Descazeaux records the fact that a typical “summer sore’ may develop without any pre- existing wound or sore in the skin (“dans certains cas on observe des tumeurs parasitaires sans qu’il soit possible de déceler la moindre lésion cutanée’’). Railliet mentions that Lingard in studying “bursati” in India observed the presence of the characteristic kunkur in some cases before the formation of any ulcer. Van Saceghem observed that on parts of the body where “summer sores” were subsequently set up an intense pruritus was manifested before the appearance of the visible lesion (“‘J’ai pu observer trés souvent qu’au niveau des régions ou va se déclarer une plaie d’été, avant l’apparition des lésions visibles, l’animal souffre d’un prurit intense qu’il manifeste en se mordant j jusqu’au sang’’). It is possible that these observations may show that em “summer sore’ does not always result: from the infection of an ordinar wound. The conclusions already reached with regard to the probable mode of infection are, therefore, not inconsistent with the facts as gathered from other parts of the world. It seems probable that the larvae responsible for the production of a ‘‘summer sore’’ are either that of Habronema megastoma or H. muscae, although there is a possibility that some unrecorded species may also be responsible. “Swamp cancer’ in the Solomon Islands. Through the courtesy of Mr. John Scott, the present writer has had an opportunity of examining specimens of a 131 granuloma that is commonly found affecting horses in the Solomon Islands. The following information has also been kindly sup- plied: —About 75 per cent. of horses in the Solomon Islands suffer from a form of “swamp cancer,’ which attacks the pasterns only. The tumours vary in shape and size from those showing a flat, raised surface with a diameter of about 1 inch to those showing a rounded surface and a size somewhat larger than a cricket ball. The lesions do not appear to cause the animals any pain. They are very chronic and may last for years. They do not appear to occur at one time of the year more than another. The animals, for the most part, are grass fed, worked through the day and turned out in the horse- paddock at night. Horses running at pasture appear to be affected in about the same proportion as those at work. The horses are mostly used for saddle work. The district 1s com- paratively dry, but is subject to very heavy dews. The area is threaded with tidal lagoons, usually closed at the mouth. Horses having no access to swamps or waterholes are commonly affected. The animals are never more distant than a mile from habitations. The macroscopic appearance of the tumours is very similar to that of habronemic granulomata. The surface is usually ulcerated. The tumour is very dense and tough, and on section is seen to contain numerous yellowish, caseo-calcareous nodules, not usually larger than a millet seed. These necrotic areas are more numerous than seen in tumours occurring in Aus- tralia. A vertical section of one tumour, with an area of approximately 10 sq. cm., contained approximately 140 necrotic areas, some more or less sclerosed. | The microscopic picture is very similar to that described as found in habronemic granulomata in Australia. The differ- ences are due to the more chronic nature of these tumours. The fibrous tissue is dense and sclerosed. The tissues are infiltrated with eosinophile leucocytes. Many o!.the necrotic areas have been absorbed and their place taken by fibrous tissue. This process is seen in various stages. , There is a marked tendency for the occurrence of a deposit of calcareous material in the necrotic areas. Larvae showing a cuticle with fine longitudinal ridges are seen in various stages of degeneration. It is apparent that the larvae present are not all of the same age. Many appear to be well preserved and of recent advent, while others have completely disappeared, leaving only the worm canals in the necrotic areas. The necrotic areas are also in various stages of absorption. It appears, therefore, that F2 132 the chronicity of the tumour depends upon a repeated invasion of the tissue by larvae. Portions of larvae have been obtained from lesions, and in the better preserved specimens the characteristic spinous tip at the caudal extremity has been observed. It appears, there- fore, that the tumour is a habronemic granuloma. DISCUSSION. It is remarkable that such a large percentage of horses becomes affected. As far as is known to the present writer there is no previous record of animals becoming affected to anything approaching the extent of 75 per cent. Another point of interest is the fact that lesions occur in animals that are not at any time confined to the stable. This is contrary to the usual experience. The animals, however, are not at any time far distant from habitations, so that one would: expect to find Musca domestica in numbers in their surroundings. The fact that the tumours occur only in the one situation is of extreme interest. It is not possible, at present, to determine the exact reason for this. It is possible, however, that the animals may be subject to injuries about the pastern, probably due to some rough, cutting grass. It is remarkable, nevertheless, that wounds in other parts of the body do not develop into habronemic granulomata. The occurrence of lesions in one situation only does not suggest that biting flies are in any way responsible. The larvae bear the same characteristics as those found in Australia and elsewhere. 3. “Leeches’”’ and “Bursattee.” “‘Leeches.”—In North America there exists a granuloma- tous affection of equines commonly known as “‘leeches.”’ According to many writers the lesions are to be found on the limbs and those parts of the body which are liable to come in contact with water when animals are standing in swamps. The disease has’ been little investigated, and a considerable confusion has existed as to the pathology of the condition, with the result that it has been described as cancer, and numerous other pathological conditions have been included under this name. There seems to be no doubt that the older writers were wrong in classifying this condition as a malignant neoplasm. It is now generally recognized that the condition is a granu- loma, though so little is known of its pathology that many lesions of different etiology are probably still classified 133 under this popular name “‘leeches.’’ Hutyra and Marek (1913) classify the condition as a malignant hyphomycosis, although the evidence upon which the classification rests seems to be of rather an insecure nature. No conclusive evidence has been produced demonstrating the condition to be a mycosis. Fish (1897) came to the conclusion that the condition was duetoafungus. His report deals with a histological investiga- tion of two cases, and a historical account of a supposed similar disease (Bursattee) occurring in India. He describes a granuloma containing characteristic hard caseous areas with an irregular or bosselated surface. He describes the nodules or caseous areas as being generally irregularly cone-shaped and variable in size, revealing on section a very dense structure the framework of which forms a close reticulum. Within the meshes of the reticulum are what appear to be leucocytes in various stages of disintegration, and free nuclei. He says that it would appear, therefore, as if the framework of the nodule were composed of a mycelial net, which in the course of development has become more or less calcified. He describes and figures the mycelium. The tissue surrounding the nodule shows the presence of numerous leucocytes. These he speaks of as being “spore-laden,” but his figures are more helpful than his interpretations, and leave no doubt that he is describing nothing but an eosinophile leucocyte. He also mentions the finding of giant cells in many of the sections. The interpretations of Fish cannot be accepted without considerable reservation. From his figures one has no difficulty in recognizing his ‘‘spore-laden leucocyte” as an eosinophile leucocyte, and likewise his “mycelial threads’ appear to be nothing but strands of fibrous tissue in varying stages of degeneration. The granuloma Fish describes is similar in all essential characteristics to “swamp cancer’ and the more chronic granuloma observed in Southern Australia. Lewis has already agreed that ‘‘leeches’’ and “‘swamp cancer” are probably the same disease. It seems reasonable to conclude, therefore, that under the term “‘leeches’’ is described a granuloma closely resembling “swamp cancer” in its macroscopic and microscopic appear- ances, and that it is probably a habronemic granuloma. ““Bursattee’”’.—‘‘Bursattee,” or “Bursati,’ is the name applied to a granulomatous condition affecting horses in India. This condition is classified by Hutyra and Marek as a hyphomycosis and described along with ‘‘leeches.’’ ; - The morbid symptoms are said to consist in the appearance of very firm nodules under the skin of the lips, the nasal alae, 134 neck, the body and limbs, and, finally, also in the nasal cavities. The characteristic areas, or Kunkur, are present in the granulation tissue. It is extremely difficult to discuss the condition, for most of the descriptions were given in the early or middle part of the nineteenth century, when any knowledge of pathology was not general. De Haan and Hoogkamer (1903) have described a similar disease occurring in the Sunda Islands. This article is referred to by Hutyra and Marek. Unfortunately the present writer has had no opportunity of consulting the original article. These authors have claimed that the condition is due to a fungus, but appear to have produced no experimental evidence in support of their conclusions. Several of the older writers have described lesions as occurring on the mucous membrane of the mouth, but it would appear that they are describing lesions of different char- acter from those occurring on the external surfaces of the body. Also, lesions are described as occurring in the internal organs. Since caseo-calcareous masses are not uncommon in the internal organs of all herbiverous animals, there seems to be no justification in the conclusion of many writers that these masses are “internal lesions” of “Bursattee.” One is forced to the conclusion that under the name of “Bursattee”’ lesions due to may causes have been described. Nevertheless, there appears to be no doubt that the majority of the lesions described as occurring on the external surface of the body possess characteristics closely resembling those of habronemic granulomata as seen mainly in tropical regions. Hayes (1906) mentions some very interesting points in connection with the occurrence of the disease. He says, “Although bursattee was very prevalent in Indian stables, say, thirty years ago, it is now comparatively rare; owing, appar- ently to improved sanitary arrangements, of which the supply of purer water has been the most important factor in the prevention of this disease. It is practically unknown among horses whose stable management, feeding, and watering are properly attended to.” This statement is one of some impor- tance, for the association of dirty stables with the appearance of habronemic granulomata is now well recognized. A further observation by Hayes also supports this interpretation. He says, ‘““Horses that have had this disease and remain in the condition under which they have contracted it, are almost certain to suffer from its recurrence. . . .’’ This is also the case in the occurrence of habronemic granulomata, and is ‘explained by the fact that the animal carries the potential cause of the disease, v?z., adult forms of Habronema. 135 Hayes says that’ the fetlock joints (especially), yard, sheath, front of chest, face, lips, and tongue are the usual points of attack. In this connection it is interesting to note that the penis and sheath are commonly affected, as is found to be the case in Southern Australia. Argyle (1910) described the occurrence of bursattee lesions on the corners of the mouth, sheath, and in two cases on the penis at the urethral orifice. In the same year (1910) Hodgkins described a case of bursattee showing lesions on the sheath, breast, fetlocks, internal canthus of both eyes, and the urethral orifice. Holmes (1915) has come to the conclusion that the disease is probably a mycosis somewhat resembling sporothrichosis of the horse and mule described by Carougeau in Madagascar. He admits that he is unaware of recorded cases of trans- mission of the sore from horse to horse. He says that there is not sufficient evidence to prove that Nematode embryos are present in bursati lesions, or that bursati sores or tumours are caused by such embryos. There may be no evidence to prove that Nematode embryos or larvae are present in the lesions, but this negative evidence is not proof that the lesions are not due to the presence of larvae at some time. It has already been shown that it may be impossible to demonstrate larvae in habronemic granulomata of more than three or four weeks’ standing, providing there is no reinfection. In the majority of the lesions collected from animals in Southern Australia examined by the present writer, no larvae have been found. In many of them it has been difficult to demonstrate even any worm canals, but in a series of tumours from early to late one can trace the gradual dis- appearance of the larvae. Therefore, one is not justified in claiming that a granuloma possessing the macroscopic and microscopic appearances of a chronic habronemic granuloma is not due to a larval Habronema, simply because the larva can- not be demonstrated. Experimental evidence suggests that the larvae of Habronema microstoma, although setting up a typical granuloma, disappear very rapidly. It seems possible that many of the granulomata in which no larvae can be found may be due to larvae of H. microstoma. The bursattee lesions described by Argyle and by Hodgkins, however, appear to be very similar to the habronemic granulomata, as seen in Southern Australia, and to ‘‘summer sores.”’ The lesions were found on the mucous membranes of the eye and penis, respect- ively. This suggests that they, at least, would not be due to larvae of H. microstoma, but to the same species as the larvae 136 responsible for “summer sores” and the lesions found in Southern Australia. A review of the literature bearing upon these two diseases reveals the fact that these granulomata possess characteristics that are common to habronemic granulomata. They possess such a striking resemblance to habronemic granulomata that it is probable they possess a similar etiology. E. NoMENCLATURE. These granulomata have been known for many years under various local names. The cause of the affection having been determined, it became necessary to introduce a more specific designation. Railliet introduced the term cutaneous habronemiasis. He says, “Le parasite de la dermatite granu- leuse vermineuse est un embryon ou une larve d’Habronema, qu’il est rationnel de rapporter a |’une des trois espéces de ce genre vivant dans l’estomac du cheval. L’affection mérite done d’étre désignée sous le nom d’habronémose cutanée.”’ The disease Habronemiasia is an infection of the stomach of the horse by one or all three species of the genus Habronema. The infection consists of the development of larvae into adults which become associated with the mucous lining of the stomach or with the submucosa, and this term would include any other phenonema incidental to the infection. By analogy, the term cutaneous habronemiasis should mean the development of larvae into adults in the cutaneous or subcutaneous tissues where a true parasitism would develop. An infection of this nature does not appear to occur, and certainly it does not occur in the granulomatous conditions that have been discussed. If Railliet’s theory that the embryos of Habronema develop through larval stages in the cutaneous tissues be proved, it is doubtful even then that the designation cutaneous habron- emiasis would be correct. Ankyostomiasis is the disease caused by species of the genus Ankylostoma. The disease is a toxaemia resulting in a progressive anaemia, and is due to an infection of the intestine by the worm. When the larvae of these worms enter the skin they may give rise to a dermatitis. It would not appear to be correct to name this dermatitis cutaneous anky- lostomiasis. Following the same lines of reasoning it does not appear to be correct to give the designation cutaneous habronemiasis to the granulomatous condition produced in the external mucous membranes and cutaneous tissues by the larvae of the genus Habronema. The term habronemic granuloma has been used by the present writer as the designation of the granulomatous 137 condition arising after the invasion of the external mucous membranes or cutaneous tissues by larvae of the genus Habronema. It is believed that this term is more likely to be correct than the term introduced by Railliet.. F. GENERAL SUMMARY. A granulomatous condition found most frequently affect- ing the external mucous membranes of the horse in Southern Australia has been found to be due to the presence of a larval Nematode of the genus Habronema. These granulomata are found less frequently on the sheath, limbs, and probably other situations. The tissue reaction following the introduction of the larva gives rise to a tumour presenting a characteristic macroscopic and microscopic appearance. The larva is often very difficult to demonstrate, and is only to be found in lesions of up to about three weeks’ duration. In lesions of longer standing there is usually no evidence whatsoever of the presence of the larva, but occasionally the spaces it once occu- pied are to be seen. The larva is incapable of living in the submucous, cutaneous, or subcutaneous tissues, and, therefore, its presence in these tissues appears to be quite accidental. Evidence suggests that these larvae are introduced from without, and that they are deposited on moist surfaces during the feeding operations of Musca domestica, which fly acts as the intermediate host of both Habronema muscae and FH. megastoma. When deposited on the external mucous mem- branes the larvae appear to be capable of pushing their way through the membrane and of entering the submucosa. When lesions occur on parts other than the external mucous mem- branes, the moisture necessary to prevent desiccation of the larvae appears to be most usually supplied by an exudation of blood or serum. This would follow some injury to the skin of the animal, either in the form of ordinary wounds or in the form of small puncture wounds made by ess flies such as Stomozys calcitrans. After a consideration of the life-histories of the three species of Habronema, it appears that the larva responsible for the production of these lesions is most commonly that of ZH. megastoma. It seems possible that the larvae of the other two species may also cause similar lesions. The results obtained by animal experimentation go to support these conclusions. The macroscopic and microscopic appearances of a granu- loma commonly called “swamp cancer” which affects horses in Northern Australia-are essentially the same as those found in the granulomata occurring in Southern Australia. Evidence suggests that this granuloma is possibly due to the larva of 138 Habronema microstoma, which would probably be inoculated by Stomoxys calcitrans. A granulomatous condition found commonly in the horse and ass in various parts of the world, and known as “summer sores,’ or ‘granular dermatitis,’’ has the same etiology as the granulomata observed in Southern Australia. Examinations have been made of a granuloma which affects the region of the pastern of the horse in the Solomon Islands, and it has been found to be a habronemic granuloma. _ Under the names ‘“‘Leeches’”’ in North America and “Bursattee’’ in India are described granulomata affecting equines. These granulomata possess characteristics that are common to habronemic granulomata. No larvae have been found in the tumours, and the etiology still remains somewhat obscure. They possess, nevertheless, such a striking resem- blance to habronemic granulomata that it seems probable that they possess a similar etiology. G. PROPHYLAXIS AND TREATMENT. Prophylaxis should be in the direction of (1) ridding horses of the adult forms of the genus Habronema which are located in the stomach, and (2) in the destruction of horse dung or its use in agriculture. Of these two methods the second is more likely to bring success than the first, and in time should accomplish what is aimed at in the first. Excision of the lesion will usually be found the best method of treatment. Should the lesion be ulcerated and of such a size as to be inoperable it is advisable to keep the surface covered by some application-which will protect it against flies and possible super-infection. The lesion may reduce in size under this treatment and become amenable to surgical treatment. ADDENDUM. Since this paper was submitted an opportunity has arisen of examining the published record of the work performed by Hill (1918), of which work reference has already been made. In so far as they deal with the lfe-histories of Habronema muscae, H. microstoma, and H. megastoma the present writer’s results, in the main, agree with and confirm those obtained by Hill. Hull, however, concludes definitely that Musca domestica “‘occasionally (possibly only accidentally) acts as an intermediary’’ host of H. microstoma (p. 44). His records of experiments 7 to 11, 13 and 14, where larvae of Musca domestica were allowed to develop in sterilized faeces to which larvae of H. microstoma had been added, show that 139 of 28 fly larvae, approximately 193 pupae and approximately 196 adults examined, only two larvae were found to contain one worm embryo each (experiments 7 and 8), and one adult one malformed larva (experiment 14). In further experiments (Nos. 15 and 16) larvae of H. domestica were allowed to develop in sterilized faeces to which larvae of both H. muscae and H. microstoma had been added. In experiment 15, of 28 flies examined 15 were found infested with worm larvae. In Table 5 particulars are given of 6 larvae obtained from these flies. Hill believes that 4 of these larvae, specimens 3-6, are larvae of H. microstoma. The evidence in favour of these larvae being those of H. microstoma is not entirely convincing, particularly as the final larval stage was not observed, and the present writer doubts the correctness of Hill’s conclusion. Nevertheless, one does not doubt the possibility of I. domestica acting as an intermediary host of M. microstoma, but more evidence is required before proof of such is estab- lished. In commenting on the present writer’s preliminary observations, Hill (p. 62) casts doubts upon the results obtained in the experiments with larvae of H. megastoma. In these preliminary observations the opinion was expressed that it would be difficult or impossible to differentiate with absolute certainty between the final larval stage of H. muscae and that of H. megastoma. Hill, unfortunately, failed to appreciate the fact that this opinion was expressed from the point of view of the possibility of differentiating larvae obtained from habronemic granu- lomata, and he further missed altogether the reference to the fact that differences had been observed, particularly with regard to the length of the oesophagus. Haus inference, there- fore, that the present writer was not dealing with pure cultures cannot be held to be correct. The fact that Hill (p. 64) failed to satisfy himself as to the specific determination of larvae obtained from conjunctival lesions, but considered they resembled those of H. megastoma more closely than those of 1. muscae, seems to support the conclusions outlined in the present communication, vzz., that it would be difficult or impossible to differentiate between the final larval stage of H. muscae and H. megastoma, except under the best conditions of preservation, etc., and that evi- dence is in favour of the probability that larvae of H. megastoma are more often responsible for the production of habronemic granulomata than the larvae of the other two species. 140 Reference. Hitt, G. F. (1918)—“‘Relationship of Insects to the Parasitic Diseases in Stock.’’ Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 31 (N.S.), part 1, 1918. REFERENCES TO LITERATURE. ARGYLE, E. P. (1910)—‘‘Some Notes of Equine Filariasis.” Jour. Trop. Vet. Sc., vol. v., p. 96. Butt, L. B. (1916)—“A Granulomatous Affection of the - Horse: Habronemic Granulomata.” . Jour. Comp. Path. and Thera., vol. xxix., part 3, pp. 187-199. Fisu, Pierre A. (1897)—“ ‘Leeches’: A Histological Investi- gation of two cases of Equine Mycosis, with a Historical account of a supposed similar disease called Bursattee occurring in India.” 12th and 13th Ann. Reports Bureau of Animal Industry. Hutyra AND Marex (1913)—‘‘Bosartige Schimmelkrankheit der Pferde (Hypomykosis destruens equi).’’ Pathologie u. Therapie de Haustiere, Erster Band, Vierte Auflage, p- 680. DE Haan AND HoGHamMeR (1903)—-Quoted by Hutyra and Marek (l.c.) I. Hayes, M. H. (1906)—Veterinary Notes for Horse Owners, 7th ed., revised, p. 145. Hopexins, J. R. (1910)—-‘A bad case of Bursattee.”” Jour. Trop. Vet. Sc., vol.-v., p. 357. Houtmes, J. D. (1915)—“Conclusions on ‘Bursati.’” Vet. Jour., vol 71, No. 486, p. 591. Jounston, T. Harvey (1912)—‘‘Notes on some Entozoa.”’ Proc. Roy. Soc. Q’land, vol. xxiv., pp. 63-91. Lewis, J. C. (1914)—‘‘Equine Granuloma in the Northern Territory of Australia.” Jour. Comp. Path. and Thera., wol-soqaie No. 1, p.:1. Lewis, J. C., anp Seppon, H. R. (1918)—‘‘Habronemic Con- junctivitis.’? Jour. Comp. Path. and Thera., vol. xxi., No. 2, pp. 87-92. Puace, F. E. (1915)—‘‘Fles, a Factor in a Phrase of Filariasis in the Horse.”’ Vet. Record, vol. 28, No. 1418, p- 120. PaTToN AND Crace (1913)—A Text-book of Medical Ento- mology. Ransom, B. H. (1913)—‘The Life-history of Habronema muscae (Carter) a Parasite of the Horse transmitted by the House-fly.”” Bull. 163, Bureau of Animal Industry. 141 Raituiet, A. (1915)—Rapport de Comission. ‘Contribution a l’étude de |’ ‘esponja’ ou plaies d’été de Equides du Brésil.’” par J. Descazaeux. Recueil de Med. Vét., T. xci., Nos. 19-20, pp. 468-486. van SacecHemM, R. (1917)—‘“Contribution a etude de la dermite granuleuse des Equidés.’’ Bull. Soc. Path, Exot., vol. £0, No. 3) pp. (26-728: van SacecHem, R. (1918)—“‘Cause étiologique et traitment de la dermite granuleuse.’’ Bull. Soc. Path. Exot., vol. 11, No. 7, pp. 575-578. DESCRIPTION OF PLATES. Pruate XIII. Fig. 1. Photo-micrograph of a section from a lesion produced under artificial conditions by larvae of Habronema megastoma. A typical necrotic area is seen with a worm canal in the centre con- taining a degenerating larva. Tumour removed nine days after inoculation. Fig. 2. Photo-micrograph of another portion of the section used for Fig. 1. The formation of multinucleated cells is well illustrated. Fig. 3. Photo-micrograph of another portion of the section used for Fig. 1. A degenerating larva with no surrounding necrosis of the tissues is illustrated. PruatTE XIV. Fig. 4. Photo-micrograph of another portion of the section used for Fig. 1. A small necrotic area is seen, and close to it a degenerating larva with only slight necrosis of the surrounding cells. Fig. 5. Photo-micrograph of a section from a lesion pro- duced under artificial conditions by larvae of Habronema microstoma. A necrotic area is seen with a degenerating larva at its lower edge. Tumour removed ten days after inoculation. Fig. 6.—Photo-micrograph of a section removed six hours after inoculation with larvae of Habronema microstoma. Larvae are seen surrounded by leucocytes. PuaTE XV. Fig. 7. Photo-micrograph of a transverse section of the bulb of the proboscis of Stomoxys calcitrans showing the situation of the larvae. Fig. 8. ‘“‘Swamp cancer’’ in the Solomon Islands. Lesions on both forelegs of the animal are well shown. Photo by John Scott. 142 THE PHAESTOS DISK: ITS CYPRIOTE ORIGIN. By A. Rows, Author of “An Ancient Egyptian Coffin in the Australian Museum,” etc. [Read August 15, 1919. ] Puiates XVI. tro XXII. The Phaestos Disk has been an enigma to archaeologists and philologists ever since it was found in Crete in 1909, for a good many attempts have been made to determine the country of its origin and to unravel the meaning of the pictorial char- acters appearing on it, without success. However, the present writer believes that he has at last discovered the real provenance of the Disk, and this brochure contains the results of his provisional investigations. By far the most satisfactory paper that has yet been com- piled on the matter is that which was published by Professor R. A. S. Macalister in the “Proceedings of the Royal Irish Academy,” ® and I unhesitatingly accept most of this savant’s identifications of the objects represented by the signs. Since Professor Macalister’s paper was written references to the Disk have appeared in various other publications, but none of them can be said to have thrown much new light upon the problem. For the convenience of those not intimately acquainted with it, it may be mentioned that the Disk was brought to light by Dr. Pernier, of the Italian* Mission, who discovered it in a part of the palace at Phaestos under circumstances which led him to believe that it was made no later than the seventeenth century B.c. It is a disk of refined clay, about 2 in. in thickness and 64 in..in diameter, and is covered with hieroglyphs on both faces, the words (which are separated by vertical lines) running in a continuous spiral from the edge to the centre. The characters are not inscribed on the Disk, but impressed by means of specially engraved stamps, so that each individual hieroglyph is always exactly similar to others of its kind in detail and appearance. Attention must be drawn to the important fact that the clay used is not Cretan ; this was (1) Vol. xxx., sec. C, p. 342. A copy of this paper has kindly been sent to me by its author. : ae 143 estiablished beyond all doubt by Dr. McKenzie, the well-known authority on remains of Minoan Crete. (2) It has been generally postulated in the past that our Disk text contains a language akin to Lykian, but Professor Hempl) thinks it contains a form of early Greek. At the present stage of my investigations I am unable to prove whether or not the script is in either of these languages; but however, as we shall see presently, it seems more probable that the speech it represents was that of the autochthones of Cyprus, and that it may even possess a few Ionian or Assyrian words. There is another point on which agreement has not been reached, and that concerns the direction in which the inscrip- tion is actually to be read. With the exception of Macalister and Hempl, scholars have asserted that the text was written from the centre outwards, but the reason for their statements is not at all clear, since the general rule to be followed in translating hieroglyphical writings is to read towards the direction in which the characters, such as men, animals, birds, etc., face. There is no evidence in the Disk to justify a departure from this rule. In accordance with the procedure adopted by previous: writers on the subject, I first tried to decipher the inscription with the aid of some Anatolian language, but made no head- way. Knowing, of course, that the text was not Minoan, LI looked among various other early Mediterranean writings for help, with the result that when I came to examine the linear’ characters of Cyprus I was at once struck with the great: similarity which exists between certain of these and certain of the Disk pictorial characters. IT immediately followed up the clue thus afforded me, and in the accompanying plates, as well as in my detailed descrip- tions of certain signs to be given hereafter, will be seen analogies which, I think it must be allowed, prove beyond all doubt that the home of the Phaestos Disk is in Cyprus, and also that the pictographs on it are but archetypes of not a few characters of the later syllabary of the island. Now as the object is said to have been found in the Cretan Middle Minoan III.) strata, this means that if its date is the (2) All remains of the pre-Homeric period of Crete (i.¢., the era before the advent of the iron-using Indo-Europeans in s.c. 1200) are termed ‘‘Minoan,’’ after the name of the mythical king Minos, who is supposed to have once ruled in that island. The Minoan Age is really the Bronze Age of Crete, and is divided into three eras, v1z., Early Minoan, Middle Minoan, and Late Minoan. See Table A. (3) “The Solving of an Ancient Riddle—Ionic Greek before Homer.’’ Harper’s Magazine, January, 1911. (4)See Table A. 144 same as that of the remains discovered with it, it was made, as Dr. Pernier thought, somewhere about B.c. 1600. We shall, however, have to forego all ideas of such an early antiquity for the Disk, as many of the signs it contains are but portraits of various animate and inanimate objects of the period of Assyrian predominance in Cyprus, 7.e., from about B.c. 700 to 650, when the island was governed by rulers mainly from Greece, doubtless Ionians.©) In view of the fact that it has always been regarded as being at least a thousand years older than this era, my assertion might at first perhaps be taken to be a rash one, but I feel confident that after the reader has made a careful study of the comparisons given in this brochure, he will agree with me both as to the dating of the Disk and as to the country of its origin. How it came to Crete we shall probably never know. Nor shall we know how it came to be interred among pottery and other remains of the last era of the Middle Minoan period. That the interment. was not accidental is quite evident, but the circumstance is really one that has been lost in the mists of antiquity. In passing, it might be as well to mention that the burial of objects of a given period in tombs, dwellings, etc., of an older date was not unusual among various nations of the past; one calls to mind the vases of Chinese manufacture found in the sepulchres of Ancient Egypt. Mr. M. Markides, the Curator of the Cyprus Museum, has kindly forwarded me particulars of the earlier and later forms of Cypriote scripts. The earlier form, termed Cypro-Minoan, from the fact that it was imported into the island by the Minoans of Crete, was in use in the Late Bronze Age (B.c. 1500 to 1200). Shortly afterwards, probably in the Period of Transition from Bronze to Iron (B.c. 1200 to 1000), Greek- speaking settlers from Greece proper, especially from Arcadia, introduced the Greek language into the island; but it seems that no inscriptions were made by them until about the eighth century B.c., when, according to Mr. Markides, the old Cypro-Minoan signs, which had been adapted for writing the new tongue, were used. This system of writing is known as Later Cypriote, and was in vogue, in the later centuries, side by side with the Greek alphabet, down to the Middle Hellenic Age. So far there have been recovered only about 32 Cypro- Minoan signs, and I must point out that by no means all of them can be traced in the 60 linear characters of the Later Cypriote script ; this circumstance certainly indicates that the (5) For details of Cypriote history, see Table B. 145 Graeco-Cypriote islanders of the eighth century before our era had more than one source to draw from when compiling their syllabary, and one of these sources must have been Assyria, in certain aspects of its culture, as no inscription in the Later Cypriote script can be dated, I suppose, earlier than about the commencement of the period of Assyrian influence. I do not mean to postulate, however, that some of the new signs actually were taken from the cuneiform characters, but that the later script was pictorial in origin ; certain of the older Cypro-Minoan signs (such as the building-sign, No. 1, pl. xviii.) being identi- fied and written in their original hieroglyphical forms, and others (such as the pointed helmet-sign, No. 37, pl. xxi.) being made under Assyrian influence. This is, I believe, the way in which the new script, of which that on our Disk is a typical copy, came to be evolved; but it evidently very quickly fell into the debased style, which we know so well from the remains of the later periods of the history of Cyprus, mainly, I suppose, as a result of the more simple linear systems of writing which were spreading over the Mediterranean basin at the time. We may perhaps gather from the peculiarity that the Disk text was “printed” by means of specially engraved stamps, that the use of the new hieroglyphical script was confined to objects of clay. From what Professor Myres states we learn that, although the majority of the inscriptions written in the Later Cypriote script can be read with the aid of Greek, not all of them can, and it is just possible that the ones we cannot decipher contain the speech of the indigenous inhabitants of the island. The chances are that if the Phaestos Disk had never left Cyprus it would have vanished long ago, for according to Professor Sayce,(® the fact that ‘no written tablets have been, found by excavators in Cyprus is not surprising. In an island climate where heavy rains occur the unbaked tablet soon becomes hardly distinguishable from the earth in which it is embedded.” | Particular attention is directed to the following Disk signs, the characteristics of some of which show an evident connection with those of certain objects of admitted Cypriote origin : — : Building.—(1) This is undoubtedly the equivalent of the Cypriote linear sign, “Si.” Professor H. Darnley Naylor, of the Adelaide University, has suggested to me that the pictorial character represents either a dwelling of the terra-mare type or perhaps a treasure-house. The Greek language shows the (6) ‘‘Archaeology~of the Cuneiform Inscriptions,’’ London, 1908, p. 183 146 “Si” of the Cypriote in such words as oipBdos (beehive), which might be used metaphorically for “‘treasure-house’’); and in giros (corn), and its compounds, which could readily suggest a barn. As we have to consider the possibility of some of the Disk signs being developed on the acrophonic principle from, among others, Ionian words, we must not, at this juncture, altogether reject any help from Greek sources. In Assyrian the word for treasure was ‘‘NISIRTU,” and that for treasure- house ‘‘BIT-NISIRTI.”’ The later linear sign is inscribed on a thick, heavy slab of copper, figured on p. 15 in “Excavations in’ Cyprus’ (Murray and others, Brit. Mus., 1900), so, as it is in this case, evidently a kind of treasury or foundry mark, the identification of the character with a treasure-house cannot be far wrong. On the other hand, however, it is certainly possible: that houses of the lake-village type were erected in Cyprus in early times, in view of the fact that the island con- tains many marshes, notably those formed by the waters of the river Pedia. Y oke.—(2) This identification was suggested to me by the President of the Society, Sir Joseph Verco, and I have every reason for believing it to be the true one. Crested Head.—(3) As an ideograph, or even as a deter- minative, this sign must equal “Head,’’ “Chief,” and the like; the hieroglyph of a man’s head is used in this sense in ancient Egyptian writing. The Assyrian for “head” was “KAKKADU.” The value of this crested head in helping us to ascertain the age and home of the Phaestos Disk is all important. In the British Museum publication, “Excavations in Cyprus,” there is depicted a beautiful ivory casket of the period of Assyrian influence in Cyprus.) On one side of this is sculptured a debased form of a typical Assyrian frieze, show- ing a king riding in a two-horse chariot, driven by a charioteer. The monarch is engaged in the pastime of slaughtering wild bulls with his bow and arrow. But what is of special interest to us is the attendant on foot who is following behind the chariot, and who is armed with an axe. ‘This man has a crested head-dress similar in every respect to that portrayed on (7) Compare the ‘“Treasuries’’? of Mycenae and Orchomenos. (8) Dr. Murray says that its weight is 81 lb. 10 oz., and that an analysis made by Professor Church shows 98°05 per cent. of copper. Cyprus, of course, was the home of the copper-working industry in ancient times. (9) See Table B of my paper. It is evident that Mr. Hall (‘‘Ancient History Near East,’’ Ist ed., 66, note 3), in dating the casket to about three centuries before this time, has overlooked the fact that the object must belong to the Assyrian era. 147 the Disk. Dr. Murray says of him (op. cit., p. 13):—“‘It is noticeable that) on our ivory the attendant wears a helmet identical in shape with that worn by the enemies of the Egyptians in the sea-fight figured by Rameses on the temple at Medinet Abou.” These are, of course, the Philistines and the Zakkala, and the resemblance between the crested helmets of these races and the crested helmet on the Disk has led other scholars to believe that there is a Philistine element in the ‘inscription. With this, however, one cannot now agree. Attention may also be directed to another relic of the Assyrian period of the island, and this is the magnificent silver patera from Amathus.“° Here are seen warriors with crested helmets like those of the Disk, and round shields, attacking a fortress, one or two of the defenders of which also wear the same sort of helmet.@) Now the head and shield signs are at the commencement of 13 words in the inscription on the Disk, but, subtracting instances where some of these words have been written more than once, we get ten individual words prefixed by the hieroglyphs in question. . There is no doubt that these two signs are ideographic determinatives, and indicate that the characters following them in the same word contain the proper name of a “Chief of the Shield,” 7.e. (probably), a commander-in-chief of an army, whose office was something like that held by the “SHUPARSHAKU” (military commandant) appointed over districts conquered by Assyria. In Assyrian cuneiform it was the custom in the majority of instances to place a determin- ative at the commencement of the word to which it referred, and not at the end of it, as in the case of ancient Egyptian. The scribes who made up the Phaestos Disk text seem then to have followed the methods of their cuneiform-using colleagues, and as a matter of fact it appears to me that the whole of the pictorial text was made mainly under Assyrian direction, although, as we have already seen, the words it contains are evidently not, so far as most of them are concerned, Semitic ones. Sargon II., King of Assyria, received tribute in B.c. 715 from the seven Jonian Kings of Cyprus, who set up in their island a figure of the Assyrian king as an emblem of their vassalage; and his grandson, Esarhaddon, had homage paid to him in B.c. 673 by ten Cypriote princes, nine Greeks, and (10) Figured in ‘‘Cyprus,’’ di Cesnola, London, 1877, pl. xix. - (11) See also the helmet worn by the sphinx on the ivory object (No. 1126), illustrated in pl. ii., ‘‘Excavations in Cyprus.”’ 148 one Phoenician. The names of these latter rulers are as under — GREEK RULERS.(2) Assyrian form of Greek Form of City ruled Names. Names. over. 1. E-KI-IS-TU-SU AIGISTHOS IDALION 2. PI-LA-GU-RA-A PYTHAGORAS CHYTROI 3. KI-I-SU KEISOS (orn, KISSOS) Satamts 4. I-TU-U-AN-DA-AR ETEWANDROS PapHos 5. E-RE-E-SU HERAIOS SoLo1 6. DA-MA-SU DAMASOS KovuRION 7. AD-ME-ZU ADMETOS TAMASSOS 9. GAN AZSA2EUzSU ONESAGORAS LEDRA 9. PU-SU-ZUi PYTHEAS NURE (APHRODISION) PHOENICIAN RULER. 10. DAMUSI, of the city of Kartrxnapasti (Kirton). The question now arises: Can we identify these ten princes ~ with the ten ‘“‘Chiefs of the Shield’? whose names are given on the Disk? It is quite possible that we can. We know for certain that the former lived towards the end of the Assyrian era on the island of Cyprus, and we have every reason for believing that the men mentioned on the Disk lived at some part of thesame era. This being the case, it is hardly probable, I take it, that in such a short space of time, and in the same island, there were two different lots of men to the same number whose names were important enough to be placed on record. As the princes of Cyprus at this time were mostly Ionians, it may well be that the crested head-dress shown on the Phaestos Disk and other Cypriote remains of the Assyrian period is a typically Ionian one. It does not follow, however, that when we can decipher the names of the ten “‘Chiefs of Shields” we shall find them Greek ones. As the inscription doubtless contains, in the main, the indigenous speech of Cyprus, it may just as well possess the native names which we must assume would be given to their rulers by the autoch- thones of the island, much in the same way as the Ptolemies had native prenomens bestowed upon them by their Egyptian subjects. Woman.—(5) There is no doubt whatever that this sign is the equivalent of one of the symbols employed for the Later Cypriote “E.’’ The linear character has preserved only the pendant breasts and skirts of the original sign. In words 24 and 47 the character is used as a determinative prefix indi- cating the name either of a queen or of a goddess, and.in (12) See Hall, ‘‘Ancient History Near East,’’ p. 496. 149 word 59 it appears that we are tio read the first two signs as “Chief Woman.” fosette.—(8) This is clearly the archetype of the later 8-pointed star-shaped sign. In two words, 28 and 31, it is associated with a pictograph of an uncovered head possessing either a brand or mark on the cheek, or perhaps an ear-ring ; a head similar to this is seen on the wall of the fortress men- tioned above ; in which case it probably typifies that of a slain captive. Now in the “Handbook of the Cesnola Collection of Antiquities from Cyprus’ 5) is figured the beardless head of a male votary wearing a frontlet decorated with rosettes, the figure being of the Assyrian period of the island.“4) Are, therefore, the uncovered head and rosette on the Disk asso- ciated with the word for “‘votary”? On the lid of the ivory casket already referred to there are several 8-petalled rosettes. The sign is probably a direct importation from Assyria. Boat.—(9) This may be compared with the models of Cypriote boats figured in di Cesnola’s work. Skin.—(12) This is something like the coverings placed over the horses in the chariot illustrated on the casket. Glove.—(13) Some scholars have called this sign a cestus, but I believe it to be a glove. I communicated this sug- gestion to Professor W. J. Woodhouse, of Sydney University, who subsequently informed me that the character probably represented an archer’s glove with a loose thumb, such as was worn by Hittite warriors. A close examination of the sign as shown in the photograph of the Disk at the end of “Scripta Minoa,” vol. 1., will show that Professor Woodhouse’s iden- tification doubtless is correct, for the loose thumb is there quite clearly depicted. The Later Cypriote sign, ‘Ke’ (said _ by Evans to be an outline picture of a hand), may have been taken from this glove sign, for the “‘thumb’’ in the linear character is shown at right angles to the “fingers,” as if to indicate that it was loose. The Assyrian for “‘hand” was “KATU.” It might be of interest to add that the old Persian for glove was ‘““KARBUUL’’; the latter word occurs in the inscription of Darius the Great at Nakshi Rustam, where we read of ‘‘Cimmerians who wear gloves on their hands.’’ 5) (13) J. L. Myres, Metropolitan Museum of Art, N.Y., 1914, p. 194. (14) Myres, op. cit., p. 193, mentions that rosette frontlets were worn by Assyrian courtiers of the early seventh century B.c. Disks in the form of rosettes were also a feature of Assyrian planet gods in the same century. Cf. the ‘‘Relief of Molthai from the Age of Sennacherib,’’ son_of Sargon II., who ruled from B.c. 705-682, figured in ‘“‘The Civilization of the East,’’ Dr. Hommell (Temple Primers, J. M. Dent & Co., 1900). (15) ‘‘Records of the Past,’’ vol. v., pp. 151, 152. 150 Sheep’s Head.—(19) This is remarkably like the porcelain rhyton in the form of a ram’s head depicted on p. 33 and pl. iii. of “Excavations in Cyprus.” Lotus.—(26) This plant was quite commonly painted on Cypriote objects, and seems to have had a religious signi- ficance. Compare the sacred lotus tree shown on p. 95 of ‘‘Handbook of Cesnola Collection.” Cypress Tree.—(29) Professor Macalister’s identification of this sign as the picture of a cypress tree is a very good one, for conventional trees of this descrip- tion were a special feature of ancient Cypriote art, and in certain mould-pressed terracottas they are de- picted in the centre of a ring dance in which votaries, both male and female, take part. It would appear, therefore, that the cypress was a sacred tree ; in some terracottas it is degener- ated into a mere club-shaped column “6) very much like the sign on the Disk. In words 1, 26, 30, 38, and 39 on the Disk it is associated with the ‘‘man”’ sign. Pointed Helmet.—(37) In this sign we have another striking proof of the Cypriote origin of the Disk. Professor Myres (‘‘Handbook,” pp. 143 and 195) shows us two figures of the period of Assyrian influence, both wearing helmets of this description ; the first figure is a votary, and the other a bearded male, evidently a warrior. Myres mentions that this par- ticular head-dress is peculiar to Cyprus, and has not been found elsewhere. Virama Mark (see pl. xxi.).—In words 1, 3, 15, 16, 19, 21, 22, 27, 34, 37, 49, 51, 52, 55, and 57 there will be observed a scratch or mark placed against the last sign; this scratch, according to Hempl (op. czt.), is in form and position identical with the virama mark of Sanskrit, Venetic, and early Runic writing. It was used, in the three latter scripts, to eliminate the vowel sound from the last syllable in a word, thus reducing the syllable to a simple consonantal character. So far, with some few exceptions, I have made no real attempt to decipher any of the words printed in the inscription on the Disk; but if we can regard the signs in words 15 and 21 as pure ideographs they may be read ‘‘horse-man,”’ ¢.e. (pro- bably), “‘charioteer.’’ Similarly, in word 30, the first sign on account of the compact nature of the tree 1t represents, 7.€., a (16) ‘‘Cyprus Mus. Cat.,’’ p. 151 (Nos. 5805-5314). See also reference on p. 86 (No. 1656) to the bearded man with long hair dancing in front of a cypress or large thyrsos, represented on an Attic red-figured lekythos of the Hellenic period of Cyprus. 151 cypress, doubtless indicates ‘‘close,’’ and the like; hence the group in question might equal ‘‘closeeman,”’ or ‘‘confidential- man.’’ These renderings, although purely conjectural, will be appreciated by those who have a knowledge of the hieroglyphical writings of ancient Egypt. On looking at the “Catalogue of the Cyprus Museum,” 7) I was at once struck with the great resemblance which exists between the arrangement of the Later Cypriote signs in graffiti marked on two black-glazed vases (Nos. 1,952 and 1,954), and the arrangement of similar-shaped signs to be found in words 14, 20, 53, and 60 on the Disk; the two graffiti are figured in pl. xxii. of this paper. In these instances the linear signs read from left to right, and must be trans- literated, according to the details of Cypriote script forwarded to me by Mr. Markides, as ‘‘NA-O-TE.”’ No classical scholar could fail to notice that this is hike the Greek word vavrns “sailor,” or one cognate thereto. The last sign in the group is the debased form of the “ship” hieroglyph. The chief drawback the present writer has had to suffer from is the lack, in the Commonwealth, of books bearing on or giving complete information on the phases of Cypriote archaeology, and he has perforce had to make the best use he could of the undermentioned works, all of which, with the exception of di Cesnola’s, which is in some respects out of date, are, of course, to be relied oninthe main. Most of them have already been referred to in the text:— (1) “‘Cyprus: its Ancient Cities, Tombs, and Temples.’’ di Cesnola, London, 1877. (2) A reference to Cypriote language in the article on “Alphabet,” in Encyclopaedia Britannica, 11th ed. (plate facing p. 729). (3) “‘Handbook of the Cesnola Collection of Antiquities from Cyprus.” J. L. Myres, Metropolitan Museum of Art, New York, 1914. (4) “A Catalogue of the Cyprus Museum.” J. L. Myres, Oxford, 1899. (5) ‘““Formation of the Alphabet’’ (Petrie), British School of Archaeology in Egypt, Studies Series, vol. in., London, 1912. (6) “Scripta Minoa,’’ vol. 1. A. J. Evans, Oxford, 1909. (17) J. L. Myres, Oxford, 1899, p. 90. The graffiti figured in pls. xvill., x1x., xx., and xxi. of my paper are also taken from the page referred to. 152 (7) “Excavations in Cyprus.”” Dr. Murray and others, British Mugeum, London, 1900. (8) “Annual Report of the Curator of Antiquities of Cyprus, 1916.” M. Markides, Nicosia, 1917.(8) Some of the authorities mentioned are by no means in agreement as to the values of certain Later Cypriote signs, as will be quite evident from an examination of the examples given in my plates, and it must be understood that so far as the values given by di Cesnola are concerned, these are in- correct in a few cases, which is not surprising when we remember that his work was compiled nearly half a century ago. At some date in the future I hope to be in a position to attempt a transliteration, if not a translation, of the whole of the text on the Disk, but I am satisfied for the present in being able to show that, apart from the testimony ‘afforded by my equations of the Disk signs with the Later Cypriote signs, the evidence I have quoted from sources other than that of the linear writings of Cyprus is sufficient in itself to prove that the Phaestos Disk was made there during the period of Assyrian predominance. My thanks are due to Professor H. Darnley Naylor, of the University of Adelaide (who brought the Disk under my notice), and to Professor W. J. Woodhouse, of the University of Sydney, for the kind help and assistance afforded me during my investigations into the problem of the Disk. J must also express my gratitude to Mr. Markides, the Director of the Cyprus Museum, for the great trouble he has been put to in making for my use a copy of his list of the Later Cypriote signs, and for forwarding much valuable information on all the types of ancient writings used in Cyprus. The encouragement given me by my. close friend and fellow-archaeologist, Mr. T. D. Campbell, has been of no little aid to me in the compilation of this Paper. Except where otherwise indicated, I alone am — responsible for the opinions set out herein. (18) A copy of this Report was kindly sent to me by Mr. Markides. 153 APPENDIX. ConTENTS. Taste A.—The Prehistoric Ages of Crete, The Cyclades, and Greece. Taste B.—The Prehistoric and Early Historic Ages of Cyprus. Tasle A. THE PREHISTORIC AGES OF CRETE, THE CYCLADES, AND GREECE. PERIOD OF NON-ARYAN CULTURE. —— pS a a aes CRETE. | CYCLADES. GREECE. Earty Bronze AGE. South. (Central date c. B.c. 3000.) Early Minoan Ti; Early Cycladic I. | EKarly Minoan II. | Early Cycladic II. Early Minoan III. | Early Cycladic III. STONE MippLE Bronze AGE. (Central date c. B.c. 2000.) AGE. Middle Minoan I. | Middle Cy aca iI Middle Minoan II.| MiddleCycladic II. Bronze AGE. Middle Minoan III.| Middle Cycladic III.| Mycenaean I. LatE BRonzE AGE. (From c. B.c. 1600-1200.) Late Minoan I. | (Cyeladic culture now absorbed in that “Kate, }Milnova me, accordingly.) Late Minoan II. Late Minoan III. es Mycenaean III. PrErRiop oF ARYAN CULTURE. of Crete, and termed | Mycenaean II. North. STonE AGE. In Thessaly, Boe- otia, and Phokis, which may have been inhabited by Aryan. - speakers, the use of stone existed longer than in South Greece. The later era of North Greece is chalco- lithic (2.e., bronze and stone were used side by side), and continued so until the Early Iron Age. (See ‘Aegean Arch.’’) Harty [Ron AGE. (Commencement ec. B.c. 1200.) With the advent of the iron-using Indo--European speakers from the North the Bronze Age culture of Crete, the Cyclades, and Greece concludes, and the Homeric period commences. The Phaestos Disk was discovered among Middle Minoan III. objects. [This table, which is entirely original in form, is compiled solely from particulars given in ‘‘Scripta Minoa,’’ A. and ‘‘Aegean Archaeology,’’ H. R. Hall, London, J. Evans, 1915. For the’ sake of convenience | have omitted the Stone "Age periods of Crete and the Cyclades. ] 154 TABLE B. PREHISTORIC AND EARLY HISTORIC AGES OF CYPRUS. DATES, B.C. ? STONE AGE. (Left few traces in Cyprus.) Bronze AGE. 3000-2000. Early Bronze Age. 2000-1500. Middle Bronze Age. 1500-1200. Late Bronze Age. (Parallel to XVIII. Dyn. of Egypt). Iron AGE. 1200-1000. Early Iron Age. (Transitional from Bronze to Tron.) 1000- 750.° Middle Iron Age. (Geometrical, with iron weapons.) 750- 500. Late Iron Age. (Graeco-Phoenician. The period of Assyrian predominance, artistic and polit- ical, was from c. 700-650 B.c.; but the influence of Assyria ‘‘may have begun a little in advance of the Assyrian protectorate. It may have lasted from 750-650 B.c.’’ [Myres, ‘‘Hand- . book of Cesnola Collection’’ ]). HELLENIC AGE. 500-300. Early Hellenic Period. 300- 50. Middle Hellenic Period. 50 B.c.-400a.p. Late, or Graeco-Roman Period. BYZANTINE AGE. 400 a.p.-1200 (Under the Byzantine Emperors Cyprus became A.D. the seat of an Archbishopric.) [This table is compiled solely from particulars given in the ‘‘Handbook of the Cesnola Collection of Antiquities from Cyprus,”’ J. L. Myres, Metropolitan Museum of Art, New York. The Phaestos Disk belongs, I believe, to the period of Assyrian predominance. | 155 DESCRIPTION OF PLATES. PuateE XVI. THe Puarstos Disk—F ace ‘‘A.’’ Date c. 700 B.c. Provenance—Cyprus. PLATE XVII. Tue Puarestos Disk—F ack ‘‘B.”’ Pirate XVIII. Later Cypriote Signs similar to Phaestos Disk Signs. Puate XIX. Later Cypriote Signs similar to Phaestos Disk Signs (contin. ). PuaTtE XX. Later Cypriote Signs similar to Phaestos Disk Signs (contin. ). PuatTeE XXI. (a) Later Cypriote Signs similar to Phaestos Disk Signs (concluded ). (b) Phaestos Disk Signs unlike Later Cypriote Signs. Prate XXII. (a) Equations of miscellaneous Cypriote Drawings, etc., with Phaestos Disk Signs (b) A typical inscription in Later Cypriote Characters, with transliteration, etc. } 156 THE OCCURRENCE AND ORIGIN OF CERTAIN QUARTZ- TOURMALINE NODULES IN THE GRANITE OF CAPE WILLOUGHBY. By C. E. Trutey, B.Sc., A.I.C., Demonstrator in Geology and Mineralogy, University of Sydney. (Communicated by Professor Walter Howchin.) [Read July 11, 1919.] PuatTes XXIII. anp XXIV. CONTENTS. Page. I. INTRODUCTION Bae aie me Re <0) II. GENERAL DESCRIPTION ... Sat oe i ee Ill. THe Quartz-TouRMALINE NopULES ... 2. IV. SUMMARY ... a ae, oe Ae 2) Soe I. INTRODUCTION. The present paper is devoted to a short description of an occurrence of some remarkable aggregates composed essenti- ally of quartz and tourmaline with felspar, which are developed in a mass of aplite intrusive into the granitic headland of Cape Willoughby, Kangaroo Island. The paper really forms part of a more extensive study of the petrology of the Cape Willoughby granite and its allied intrusions. The publication of these data is reserved for a later date. After a review of the occurrence, and reference to pre- viously published descriptions of similar aggregates at other’ localities, the probable mode of origin of the nodules is outlined. II. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE OCCURRENCE. Cape Willoughby consists of a large mass of granite intruded into a series of quartzites, quartz-mica-schists, and mica-schists of probably Cambrian Age. The granite is an even-grained rock consisting of quartz, microcline, plagioclase (oligoclase-andesine), and biotite. Under the microscope the accessories are seen to be muscovite, apatite, and zircon. The most striking feature of the rock is the presence of sub- idiomorphic crystals of quartz showing a remarkable blue opalescence. This granite occupies an area of approximately two square miles, and has a coastline length of about’ five miles. Into this granitic mass are intruded a highly interesting series of aplitic and pegmatitic rocks which are obviously 157 genetically related to the granite. The series comprises microcline aplites and a number of albite pegmatites (albitites), vz., quartz and muscovite albitites. These rocks traverse the granite in the form of dykes, and also as irregular masses, and represent the later stages of the crystallization of the granitic magma. The microcline aplite intrusive mass is the home of the quartz-tourmaline nodules now under discussion. This aplite, known as the ‘‘Pink Aplite,’’ occurs as a large intrusive mass along the coast adjacent to the Cape Willoughby Light- house. Its intrusive nature is well marked, the junction with the granite being well defined. The mass shows a rather variable texture throughout its extent. The greater part is of very fine grain, but in part this grades into a coarser variety, in which are developed phenocrysts of blue quartz, and the ferromagnesian mineral biotite also makes its appearance. The aplite has been fissured, and along these fissures quartz veins have been intruded. Associated with these veins occurs a zone of altered aplite consisting essentially of quartz and a light-greenish mica. This is a greisen. A further pneumatolytic change is the production along fissures of white kaolin. At the south end of the mass there are developed, in the very fine-grained variety, numerous patches, in cross section roughly hexagonal to elliptical. On examination these patches, or nodules, are seen to consist mainly of quartz and tourmaline. The minerals recognized in the aplite are quartz and felspar. Microscopically the minerals present are quartz, microcline, plagioclase (albite), and, as accessories, biotite, much chloritized, and muscovite. Kaolin and secondary mica accompany the felspars as alteration products. In the fine-grained varieties of aplite, biotite and muscovite are usually absent, the development of these minerals being relegated to the coarser varieties. The aplite is remarkable for the presence of occasional granophyric phenocrysts of quartz and microcline, and micro- graphic intergrowth of these two minerals is displayed, more especially in the coarser varieties. In parts of the finer- grained types the fabric approaches the type ‘‘granulitic,’’ characteristic of some aplites. III. THe Quartz-TOURMALINE NODULES. These nodules, on account of their mineralogical com- position, resist the attack of the normal agents of weathering 158 and, as a consequence, stand out in relief from the aplite in which they are enclosed. They occur apparently quite irregularly arranged in the mass, but appear with few excep-- tions to be confined to the finer-textured variety of the aplite. In section, as seen on the rock face, they appear more or less elliptical, although some are really hexagonal. The form taken by the majority of the nodules is, however, an ellipsoid. In size they are slightly variable, but the greater number have diameters, approximately, of 2 in., or slightly less. . A number of thin sections of these nodules was cut, and microscopical examination showed them to consist, essenti- ally, of quartz, felspar, and tourmaline. The nodules show the general texture of the surrounding aplite. Tourmaline is abundant, and is characteristically developed in the act of replacing the microcline and albite felspar. All stages of replacement can be traced, from the initial stages to complete replacement. Minute arms of tourmaline stretch, at intervals, through the felspar, isolating portions of the one felspar from each other, in just such a way as to prove the development of tourmaline from the felspar. The tourmaline shows strong pleochroism, and is of blue colour of varying shades, tending to brownish-green. This is the blue aluminous tourmaline characteristic of felspar derivation.2’ Minute amounts of muscovite may be associated with the tourmaline. The process of replacement described is well shown in the microphotos which accompany this paper. Quartz is pre- sent in clear grains with minute inclusions, and the felspar still unreplaced is heavily dusted with kaolin. Some quartz, especially towards the centres of the nodules, is probably secondarily produced during pneumatolysis. In some nodules the amount of replacement of felspar grains by tourmaline becomes more complete as the centre is approached. At the centre the remnant of a felspar grain may only be represented ~ by a shred at the periphery, or a shred in the interior of the tourmaline grain. The proportion of quartz in such cases may increase at the centre, suggestive of silica being derived from the felspar interaction. Nodules somewhat similar to those just described have been previously noted by investigators of the Tasmanian Geological Survey. Waller?) noted their occurrence in an aplite from Mount Heemskirk, Tasmania. More recently L. L. Waterhouse has also described similar nodules in the (1) Cf. Mem. Geol. Surv. Eng. and Wales, 1909, p. 69; Scrivenor: Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., vol. lix., 1903, p. 161. (2) Waller: Report on the Tin Ore Deposits of Mount Heems- kirk, Geol. Surv. Tas., Sept., 1902, p. 4. 159 Stanley River District,“ and has examined in more detail those occurring in the Mount Heemskirk acid intrusives.() The descriptions given by these two investigators agree, fairly closely, with the nature of the occurrence at Cape Willoughby. The presence of small amounts of cassiterite, the absence of felspar from the centre, and the frequent presence of a central cavity, seem to be the principal points of distinction between the Tasmanian and Willoughby examples. In discussing the origin of these nodules, both writers reach the conclusion that the nodules represent segregations of quartz and tourmaline. To quote Waterhouse, ) ‘‘They are due to the operation of magmatic differentiation in the original magma, the minerals now forming these nodules having gradually segregated and solidified as cooling pro- ceeded.”’ Apparently, similar nodules are developed in aplites associated with the granitic batholith of the Elkhorn District, Montana, as described by Barrell.“ Knopf also describes nodules from aplite in the same region, but south of Montana city. These aplites are regarded as differentiates of the same batholith of quartz-monzonitic type, common to the Elkhorn and Helena Districts. The nodules contain quartz, orthoclase, and tourmaline; but in neither case is the rela- tionship of the tourmaline to the felspar clearly indicated. Both Barrell and Knopf evidently regard them as segrega- tions from the liquid aplitic magma; e.g., Knopf states, ‘The tourmaline-quartz-orthoclase segregations are regarded as imprisoned and congealed globules of this final differentiate.’’ In the case of the Cape Willoughby nodules, the view that they are segregation products of earlier crystallization cannot be accepted. Microscopic and other evidence tends to show that they are, indeed, strictly pneumatolytic products. In the slides is to be seen the very act of replacement of felspar by tourmaline. The texture and composition of the nodule, apart from the presence of the tourmaline, suggests that the nodule has developed an situ. It has been mentioned above that the nodules are almost entirely relegated to the finer-textured variety of the main aplite. Similar circum- stances surround the Tasmanian occurrences, where Water- house, in referring to their occurrence, says,®) “‘In the field 3) L. L. Waterhouse: Bull. No. 15, Geol. Surv. Tas., 1914, (4) L. L. Waterhouse: Bull. No. 21, Geol. Surv. Tas., 1916, (5) Loc. cit., p. 28. (6) J. Barrell: 22nd Ann. Report U.S.G.S., 1901, pp. 542, 543. (7) A. Knopf: Bull. 527, U.S.G.S., 1913, pp. 34, 35, 53. (8) Loc. cit., p. 29. p. 28 pa v1 160 these nodules were not observe] in the coarser-grained granite ; they appear to be confined to the finer-grained varieties” ; and again,(9) ““Their home is in the fine-grained tourmaline granite and the white granite, and it is in the former that they undoubtedly reach their maximum development.’’ The author, after consideration of the occurrence at Cape Willoughby, suggests that the following processes have co-operated in their production :— The crystallization of the main mass of granite was followed by the production of fissures and joints as a result of contraction through cooling. Into these fissures was in- jected the still lquid residue of the magma enriched in mineralizers, and forming what are now the aplites. The sudden injection of a highly fluid mass charged with volatile products, primarily water with other mineralizers, would, the fissure being spacious enough, provide an avenue of temporary escape for the more volatile products. A magma of this nature is thus characterized by a remarkable mobility of equilibrium. It is possible that, at this stage, the principal mineralizer, water, was present, partly as a gas, below its critical temperature. (0) The increased magma space thus originating through fissuring, the resultant effects are :— (1) A reduction of pressure due to expansion of the gas phase; concurrently a reduction of the con- centration of the volatile components in the liquid magma. : (2) An increase in the viscosity of the silicate liquid due to reduction of the active mass of the mineral- ‘izers in the liquid. (3) Increasing the crystallization temperatures or freezing points of the silicates in solution. [It is to be noted here that a lowering of freezing point generally accompanies a reduction of pressure, but this effect must be enormously outweighed by the decreased fusibility (solubility) consequent on diminished concentration of vola- tile components. This latter effect apears to have been ignored or denied by some petrologists, e.g., Schweig 7) even (9) Loc. Git., No, 21, p. Wa: (10) It does not follow from this that the temperature was below 370° C.—the critical temperature for pure water. A gas dissolved in a mixture of non-volatile components has a higher critical temperature than it possesses in the pure state. This elevation of the critical temperature is analogous to the elevation of boiling point by dissolved substances. ' (11) M. Schweig: Neues Jahrbuch Beil., Bd. 17, 1903, p. 516, - et. seq. 4 6d develops an hypothesis of differentiation of volcanic rocks in large part based on the lowering of freezing point accom- panying reduction of pressure due to ejection of magmas. The phenomenon of resorption, common in phenocrysts of hypabyssal and volcanic rocks, has also been attributed by some writers to a reduction in pressure consequent on injec- tion or eruption. There can be little doubt that this lowering, which never exceeds a few degrees per 1,000 atmospheres, (12) is enormously overweighed by the decreased fusibility conse- quent on removal of volatile components. (5) | Owing to the loss of volatile constituents and to a minor degree of changing temperature, equilibrium would be violently disturbed, and the residual magma conditions would become unstable. Some of the components of the fluid pre- viously near or at their freezing point would then become undercooled,“*) and with a magma of aplitic composition the spontaneous crystallization of quartz and felspar would ensue. (12) Uniform pressure, of course, 1s postulated here. The differential effects of uniform and non-uniform pressure are dis- cussed in detail by Johnston and Adams. Amer. Jour. Sci., 35, 1913, 205. (13)G. Morey: Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc., pt. i., 36, 1914, 215. The influence of water at a high temperature on the melting point of silicates is well exemplified in the work of Morey on ‘‘New Crystalline Silicates of Potassium and Sodium, their preparation and general properties.’?’ The case is ‘instanced of potassium silicate which when dry melts at 1015° C., yet yields in the pre- sence of water in a closed vessel at temperatures of 500° C. to 400° C. perfectly fluid (liquid) solutions containing 8-25% water. The results of these experiments at high oT eae and pressures are definite, and in full agreement with the existing physico-chemical theory as apple to solutions at ordinary temperatures and pressures. ere can be little doubt, therefore, -that the melting depression is dependent on the concentr ation of the volatile component. (14)This undercooling is clearly shown diagrammatically in the | y temperature-concentration freezing siuigare point curve of a binary solution water -silicate, where P = original composition of the magma and changed composition of the magma. P* represents the magma of com- position P starting to crystallize, or near the point of crystallization. The point Q* represents the temper- ature and composition of the magma which is thus undercooled, with respect to the silicate, although the temperature has but _ slightly changed. The illustration is, of course, purely diagrammatic, and is not complete for the solution in question (water-silicate). ee SO NES lal G 162 On account of the viscosity the actual size of the crystals would be small, for diffusion currents would not move sufficiently rapidly to supply the growing crystal. The conditions above described probably represent the “‘Jabile’’ state of undercooling, as described by Ostwald and Miers.(15) The micropegmatite, on this view, represents the composition of the hypertectic rather than the eutectic point. Near the summit of the fissure chamber, crystallization would be initiated, as this is the point of maximum under- cooling due to the combined effects of cooling and of diminished volatile components in the liquid magma. Concurrently with the initiation of crystallization, at the top of the fissure chamber, the reduction in pressure of the volatile phase would initiate the formation of bubbles of gas or vapour, predominantly, water dissolved in the liquid magma and other volatile mineralizers, among which were compounds of boron (boric acid). These would originate throughout the depth of the fissure chamber and, viscosity permitting, would gradually rise in the magma chamber, enlarging both by reduction in pressure during upward move- ment and, possibly, by coalescence of two or more bubbles. At this stage the magma chamber is pictured as filled with a more or less viscous silicate liquid, crystallization having developed at its summit and, forming a network of crystals, gradually extending downwards, and, at the same time, ascending bubbles of gases (mineralizers) present in its lower layers. With the removal of anhydrous minerals at the crystallization level, additional gases would probably be set free. The bubbles, in ascension, on reaching the network of solid crystals of quartz and felspar would attach themselves to these in the form of bubbles. The gases released on crystallization would do likewise. The fissure magma is now pictured as a partially fluid mass containing a network of crystal silicates, some of which are enveloped in bubbles of the gas phase. It is probable that these might occupy definite restricted horizons of the fissure chamber. The volatile. components present in the gas phase are assumed to have been, predominantly, water and boric acid. With a further reduction in temperature these mineral- izers take up an active rdle and enter upon a destructive stage. The felspar becomes unstable, and in an interaction with boron compounds tourmaline is produced im situ, the felspar being partially or completely replaced, according to (15) Vide the numerous papers by Miers and his co-workers. References to these are quoted by A. Harker, Natural History of Igneous Rocks, p. 208 163 the concentration of the active gases. Quartz would, of course, be unattacked ; but silica would probably be released in the interaction with felspar. With a still further reduc- tion, the remaining gases would be dissolved or condensed. The process would have initiated before final and complete consolidation took place, and the accompanying excess of alkalies, from the felspar interaction, would diffuse into the still liquid residue, partly surrounding the gaseous bubble. For the Cape Willoughby quartz-tourmaline nodules the following data are in accord with the hypothesis outlined in the previous pages for their manner of origin :— (1) The pneumatolytic origin of the tourmaline. (2) The development of the nodules in, and their practical relegation to, the finer-grained variety of the red aplite. (3) The composition and texture of the nodule in which the tourmaline is replacing the felspar is identical with that of the associated aplite. (4) The general ellipsoidal character of the nodules. As denoting their manner of origin, it 1s suggested that the name ‘“‘Pneumatolith’ be attached to such pseudo- segregations occurring in rocks, and which owe their existence primarily to pneumatolytic processes. From the published descriptions of the Montana nodules previously noted, the exact relationship of the tourmaline to the orthoclase felspar associated with it is not clear, but the description of Barrell 0 is suggestive of the tourmaline being of pneumatolytic origin. A study of the literature on the mode of occurrence of tourmaline indicates that this mineral does, occasionally, ‘appear pyrogenetically. This is especially so where it is present as an accessory uniformly distributed through granites or aplites. It is, therefore, possible that segregations of quartz and pyrogenetic tourmaline can occur. Through the kindness of Mr. W. H. Twelvetrees, Govern- ment Geologist of Tasmania, I have been able to obtain a number of nodules from the Heemskirk District for micro- scopical examination. A number of these have already been described by Waller and Hogg.“ The sections examined by the writer consist essentially of quartz and tourmaline, felspar being absent. Macro- scopically it has been recognized in one nodule, and is represented by kaolin. (16) Loc. cit., Sup., p. 543. (17) Waller and Hogg: Papers Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1902, pp. 143-156. e2 164 On slicing the nodules a number of empty cavities occur on the face and are distributed throughout the nodule. Whether these represent the spaces originally occupied by felspar is not clear. Under the microscope, the quartz is seen to have crystallized in well-developed crystals. Numerous sections are shown as hexagonal or rhombic. This idiomorphism of the quartz is the most striking characteristic of the slides. Consequently the tourmaline is present as _grains moulded on the quartz. In some cases the moulding is developed as to yield a rude type of poikilitic fabric. Occasionally the tourmaline may also be developed in prism- atic idiomorphs. The pleochroism of the tourmaline is strong, the characteristic variation being from bluish-green to light-brown yellow. In any one grain the colour varia- tion may be considerable; this variation is, usually, irregu- larly developed in patches. The colour may also vary zonally. ' The origin of these Tasmanian nodules is not as clearly demonstrable as of those already described from Cape Willoughby, in which the process of pneumatolysis 1s actually seen in progress. The evidence so far revealed, however, is that the Tasmanian nodules are essentially of miarole origin. On this view come into line :— (1) The striking idomorphism of the constituent quartz. (2) The presence of a central cavity in many of the nodules. (3) The very general occurrence of cassiterite, either as a trace or in appreciable amount, and, in some nodules, of fluorite. The nodules are thus referable to a comparatively late stage in the crystallization of the aplitic magma, rather than ‘representing early segregation products. The associations (2) and (3), noted above, are regarded as strong evidence of their late miarole-pneumatolytic origin. The origin thus out- lined, while not identical with that described for the Cape Willoughby examples, is closely analogous to it. SUMMARY. I. The quartz-tourmaline nodules are developed in a mass of aplite intruding the Cape Willoughby granite. II. The nodules consist essentially of quartz, tourmaline, and felspar (microcline and albite). The tourmaline is in | process of replacing the felspar, and is evidently of pneumato- lytic origin. III. The mode of origin of the nodules is discussed, and it is shown that they cannot represent segregations of earlier formed crystals from the aplitic magma. - —— 165 IV. A mode of origin, in sttu, is suggested which is in harmony with the evident pneumatolytic replacement that has occurred. . V. As denoting their manner of origin, it is suggested that the name ‘‘Pneumatolith’”’ be attached to such pseudo- segregations occurring in igneous rocks and which owe their existence, primarily, to pneumatolytic processes. VI. The evidence of the Tasmanian nodules, while not as clearly delineated as in the Cape Willoughby examples, is strongly suggestive of miarole origin. Their formation is then referable to a late stage in the crystallization of the magma. The origin is distinct from the hypothesis of “segre- gation,’’ and is closely related to the origin described for the Cape Willoughby nodules. The author is indebted to Mr. W. R. Browne, B.Sc., for helpful discussion during the preparation of this paper. DESCRIPTION OF PLATES. PuateE XXIII. Fig. 1. Photograph of a typical quartz-tourmaline nodule. The general ellipsoid shape of the nodule is apparent. A portion of the aplite is attached to its upper rear surface. Natural size. Fig. 2. Section of a quartz-tourmaline nodule showing the replacement of felspar by tourmaline. The tourmaline can be seen as a network through the felspar, isolating sections of the one felspar from each other. Magn. x 45 diameters. Prats XXIV. Fig. 1. Another section. The clear areas are quartz. Maen. x 45 diameters. Fig. 2. A portion of fig. 1 enlarged to show the replacement of the felspar by the strings of tourmaline. Magn. x 80 diameters. 166 NOTES ON SOME MISCELLANEOUS COLEOPTERA, WITH DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES.—PART V. By ArtTHuR M. Lea, ae Museum Entomologist. [Contribution from the South Australian Macca [Read September, 12, 1919. ] Puates XXV. to XXVIT. Many interesting ants’-nest species are recorded in the present part, this being especially due to the efforts of Mr. J. S. Clark, in Western Australia, and Mr. F. Erasmus Wilson, in Victoria; others were also received from Messrs. W. and E. F. du Boulay (sons of the late F. du Boulay), from New South Wales and Western Australia; E. H. Zeck, New South Wales ; H. W. Brown, Western Australia; R. J. Burton, A. H. Elston, and B. A. Feuerheerdt, South Australia; and F. P. Dodd and H. Hacker, Queensland. Mr. Clark paid much attention to nests of the common _twig-mount ant, Iridomyrmex conifera, Forel,™ which builds mounds of small leaves and twigs that may often be fired. Shortly after he began the examination of the nests he wrote of them:—‘“To date IJ have taken home fourteen nests, ants and all, and have very carefully sieved the lot. I cannot tell you all I have found, but I have 16 specimens of Cryptodus, 28 Articerus, 7 Scydmaenidae, 2 Ptinidae, 2 (?). I feel very pleased so far, as all the specimens, except Crypto- dus, are quite new to me. I have also examined carefully six deserted nests of the same ants, but, except the Cryptodus, have found nothing. With this nest I find little m the top, or mound part of the twigs; I lift it right off, and drop it into a bag, then dig the ground out a foot deep into other bags, and number all the same, and I find that most of the beetles, etc., are on the top of the ground just under the twigs, and extending not more than three inches underground.” Mr. Clark subsequently examined many other nests of the species, and found in them many other true inquilines, some of which are here recorded; but he also obtained other specimens that are certainly not true inquilines, his thorough method of search rendering it probable that some of the specimens taken in the nests were victims of the ants; nevertheless, it is desir- able to put on record the names of such specimens. Recently he wrote:—‘‘I was sieving twig-mound nests most of the (1) Name received from Prof. Wheeler. 167 holidays, and from two nests took 13 Chlamydopsis inquilina, 4 Hnasiba tristis, 10 Scydmaenus, but I have not tried to count the various Articerus, Hctrephes, and Staphylinidae.’’ Many of his takings of the Staphylinidae I hope to record at a later date ; he also took some remarkable small flies and bugs. Having recent occasion to examine many of the large wheat-stacks in New South Wales, Victoria, and South Aus- tralia, several introduced species of beetles, not previously recorded from Australia, were found in greater or less abund- ance; for the names of several of these I am indebted to Mr. G. J. Arrow, of the British Museum. HYDROPHILIDAE. PSEUDOHYDROBIUS FLAVUS, Di. sp. Flavous, some parts tinged with red. Upper-surface polished, under-surface subopaque, and very finely pubescent. Head with small and rather dense punctures, clypeus with still smaller punctures, its suture distinct only at sides ; labrum very small. Apical joint of maxillary palpi shghtly longer than the subapical. Prothorax with slightly larger punctures than on head. “/ytra with slightly larger punctures than on head, and with series of somewhat larger ones. Length, 3-4°5 mm. Hab.—New South Wales: Blue Mountains (Blackburn’s Collection), Wentworth Falls (A. Simson), Mount Victoria, ~ Wollongong, Sydney, National Park (A. M. Lea), Richmond River (A. J. Coates) ; Queensland: Stradbroke Island (J. H. Boreham and H. Hacker), Mapleton (Hacker), Cairns (F. P. Dodd and Lea). Type, I. 8214. Much smaller and paler than floricola, but with similar outlines; and, like that species, it may be taken from flowers (especially of the genus Leptospermum) producing nectar in abundance. The seriate punctures on the elytra are close together and moderately distinct, but not in striae, but there is a distinct sutural stria from the middle to the apex. PSELAPHIDAE. LEANYMUS MIRUS, N. sp. Pi... xxv. most siear 3d. Light castaneous, antennae (eleventh joint excepted) somewhat darker. Moderately clothed with short, pale pubescence. 7 Head with three small foveae or large punctures triangu- larly placed: two between eyes and one in front. Antennae long, first joint cylindrical, about as long as three following combined, second—tenth subequal in length, the ninth and 168 tenth slightly increasing in width, eleventh about as long as ninth and tenth combined and much wider. Palpi with two spiniform processes on apical joint, one on the penultimate, and two on the antepenultimate. A spiniform process also on the cardo of the maxillae. Prothoraz strongly and evenly convex; punctures very minute. JSlytra strongly convex; with a deep stria on each from middle of base to middle of disk, where it abruptly terminates ; punctures sparse and small. Metasternum with a conspicuous oblique process on each side of middle. Abdomen with apical segment encroached upon by pygidium, this with a small fovea and “several feeble nodes. Front /egs with a spine on coxa and trochanter, femora rather stout, tibiae thin and bisinuate; middle tibiae thin, the hind ones thin and with a deep apical notch. Length 18-2 mm. Q. Differs in having somewhat shorter antennae, metas- ternum unarmed, under-surface of abdomen not encroached upon by pygidium and legs somewhat shorter, with the front tibiae no more sinuous than the middle ones, and the hind ones not notched. Hab.—Queensland: Cairns district (A. M. Lea). Type, I. 10650. The processes on the metasternum are joined together at the base, at the apex each is obtusely bifid, although the cleft is very feeble on some specimens. From some directions the terminal joint of the antennae of the male appears to be regularly ovate, from others it‘is seen to be somewhat produced on one side of the base. The figures of Z. palpalis 2 will give a good general idea of this remarkable insect, but it differs from that species in being smaller, apical joint of antennae paler than the preceding ones, and none black, armature of the metasternum notched, front tibiae bisinuate and hind ones notched. As on that species both sexes have the front coxae and trochanters armed. The notched hind tibiae even more clearly indicate the affinity of the genus with Palimbolus (Didimoprora), near which, despite the very different palpi, it was referred from the only other known species by Raffray ; the spiniform process is so near the other part, however, that the notch could be easily overlooked. Five specimens were obtained by sieving fallen leaves at Malanda, of which one is a female, 94 other specimens, all males, were obtained at hghts. ARTICERUS SUBCYLINDRICORNIS, Nn. sp. Pl. xxv fie 2: 3. Dark castaneous, dise of elytra paler. Moderately clothed with short, pale pubescence, denser on metasternum | (2)Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, 1900, pl. x., figs. 5 and 6. 169 than elsewhere; a few hairs on abdomen, and a conspicuous fascicle on each side of base of its upper-surface, its excavated portion glabrous. Head rather stout and finely granulate, with a vague median line; with a short subtriangular projection from mouth. Antennae not much longer than head, feebly dilated from near base to apex, circular in transverse section. Prothorax subquadrate, front angles rounded off, with a fairly large top-shaped fovea, surface. granulate as head. LHlytra densely and finely punctate; subsutural striae distinct. Abdomen with a wide and deep excavation at base of upper-surface, the excavation widely and shallowly. encroach- - ing on middle of convex portion; its under-surface incurved from apex to base, apex strongly encroached upon by pygidium, which is foveate. Prosternum with a conspicuous median keel between apex and coxae. Metasternum unarmed. Femora moderately stout, unarmed; front trochanters feebly dentate ; tibiae thickened at apex, the middle ones feebly produced at inner apex. Length, 2-2°25 mm. | Q. Differs in having slightly shorter antennae, under- surface of abdomen evenly convex, the pygidium non-foveate, metasternum less depressed posteriorly, its clothing no denser than elsewhere, and the legs unarmed. Hab.—Western Australia: Swan River, many specimens from nests of Iridomyrmex conifera (J. 8S. Clark). Type, T. 10626. In size and general appearance somewhat resembling A. cylindricornis, but there are many differences of the head, under-surface, and legs, the antennae are shorter and stouter, and are feebly dilated from the base to the apex. The meta- sternum of the male is flattened and somewhat depressed posteriorly, its dense clothing causes the flat space to appear conspicuously triangular, and at each corner of the base of the triangle there is a feeble fascicle that has the appearance of a small tooth. The feeble armature of the legs (confined to the middle tibiae and front trochanters) is very unusual in the males of Articerus. ARTICERUS WILSONI, N. sp. Pi xxv., fies; 5 Janda6, dg. Castaneous, some parts slightly darker than others, basal half of antennae darker than apical half. Clothing as described in preceding species. Head very short, part in front of eyes slightly wider than long, a shallow depression in middle between eyes, on each side ef which is a minute black elevation ; surface finely granulate. Antennae circular in transverse-section, basal half narrow and 170 lightly curved, then strongly dilated with the apex truncate. Prothorax subquadrate, front angles rounded off; with a large median fovea from base to near apex; basal half granulate, apical half punctate. Hlytra with dense and moderately strong punctures, becoming smaller posteriorly; subsutural striae distinct. Abdomen with a wide and deep excavation at base of upper-surface, the excavation semicircularly encroaching upon middle of convex portion; its under-surface strongly incurved from apex to base. Metasternum ridged along middle, the ridge terminating near apex in a small acute tooth. Front tibiae with a feeble tooth near inner apex; middle femora stouter than the others; trochanters strongly dentate, tibiae with a small outer tooth near middle, and a narrow flange at the outer apex, inner apex with an acute tooth almost in line with the flange; hind legs thinner than the others and unarmed. Length 2-2°25 mm. @. Differs in having the under-surface of abdomen convex, and the metasternum and legs unarmed. Hab.—Victoria: Eltham, in nests of ants under stones, July and August, 1918 (F. E. Wilson). Type, I. 10627. One of the most distinct species in the genus. In my table it would be associated with 4. hamatipes, on account of the middle tibiae, but the armature is very different: on that species it consists of a conspicuous dentiform flange about the middle, on this species there is a small median tooth, but the apex is armed both internally and externally; the tooth of the front tibiae is feeble and invisible from most directions, it is also partly concealed by clothing. The fascicles on the upper-surface of the abdomen are rather larger than usual, and on its under-surface there are some small, median ones that from some directions look like small teeth. The two minute black spots between the eyes are fairly distinct; similar spots may be traced on most species of the genus. The only female examined has been returned to Mr. Wilson, together with one of the males. ARTICERUS MESOSTERNALIS, Nn. sp. Pl, xxvjhieseeeandas co. Rather dark castavenen disk of elytra somewhat paler. Clothing as described in subeylindricornis. Head moderately long and (except for eyes) almost parallel-sided, densely granulate. Antennae rather thin and cylindrical, circular in transverse section, apical portion slightly dilated and truncate. Prothorar subquadrate, front angles rounded off; with a comparatively small and narrow medio-basal fovea; granules as on head, but punctate about apex. Hlytra densely punctate; subsutural striae distinct. bi Abdomen with a large deep excavation at base of upper- surface, its middle semicircularly encroaching upon middle of convex portion; under-surface slightly incurved from apex to base, apex encroached upon by pygidium, the latter with a subtriangular fovea. Mesosternum with an acute subconical process between coxae. Metasternum convex along middle, but unarmed. Middle tebiae with a small subtriangular pro- cess at inner apex, legs otherwise unarmed. Length, 175 mm. Hab.—Western Australia: Beverley, from a nest of a small black Zridomyrmex (HK. F. du Boulay). Type (unique), I. 10644. Somewhat lke A. femorals on an enlarged scale, or A. subcylindricornis on a reduced one; from both readily distinguished by the armed mesosternum. From some direc- tions there appears to be a feeble shining median line on the head. ARTICERUS DUBOULAYI, Waterh. BY xxv,’ fiosaeoerenel2: Mr. KE. F. du Boulay has recently taken at Beverley specimens of a species that appears to be duboulayi; they differ in some respects, however, from the original description and figure (it is to be noted also that the figure differs in some respects from the description). In the figure the fovea on the pronotum only represents its deepest part, it really occupies about half the width, and more than half the length of that segment. The antennae and front legs agree from some direc- tions with the figure; but, as noted by Waterhouse, the former look very different from other points of view. The femora of the male were described as “‘much incrassated in the middle and somewhat compressed’’ but they are not so figured, and on the males before me it is only the middle femora that are much incrassated, and they are also bidentate. The hind tibiae from some directions agree with the description, but from others they are seen to be armed with a tooth behind the insertion of the tarsi, as a result, from some directions, the apex appears bifid; the apical portion is also clothed with golden hairs. The front and hind trochanters are briefly dentate, the middle ones are unarmed. The metasternum is ridged along the middle, the ridge becoming acute posteriorly, and shortly before its apex armed with a small tooth, on each side of the ridge the surface is strongly depressed. The under- surface of the abdomen has a depression on each side of the base, with a ridge between; between the apex of the ridge and the pygidium is another depression ; there are also a few small fascicles. The female differs from the male in having antennae shorter, straighter, and without subapical notch, metasternum and under-surface of abdomen evenly convex, 172 and the upper-surface of the latter less conspicuously notched at the sides, legs unarmed and middle femora no stouter than the others. The strongly-inflated middle femora of the male associates the species with twmzdus in my table, but the two species are otherwise very dissimilar. ARTICERUS CONSTRICTIVENTRIS, Lea. Specimens of this species have recently been taken by Mr. R. J. Burton in South Australia (Murray River) and by Mr. W. W. Froggatt in New South Wales (Hay). The male, hitherto unknown, differs from the female in having the pygidium encroaching upon the under-surface of the abdomen, ‘and this is widely, shallowly, and somewhat irregularly de- pressed along the middle; the metasternum is convex along the middle, the convexity abruptly declivous posteriorly, and marked at its summit by a short process that is almost con- cealed by golden pubescence, the front tibiae are armed by a minute apical tooth, and the hind ones have a long apical bristle (both middle tibiae are missing from the only male before me). ARTICERUS PASCOEUS, Sharp. Mr. E. F. du Boulay has taken several specimens of this species in ants’ nest at Beverley (Western Australia). In my table the male is noted as having ‘‘front tibiae conspicuously armed at apex.” This is the case when both tibiae and tarsi may be seen clearly, but when the tarsi are pressed close to the apical tooth the latter might easily be mistaken for the former. Mr. Clark also took a specimen from the nest of a species of Cremastogaster near the Swan River. ARTICERUS CURVICORNIS, Westw. Specimens taken by Mr. F. P. Spry at Coburg and by Mr. H. W. Davey at Ararat (both in Victoria) differ from the normal form of curvicornis in having the antennae noticeably thinner, the prothorax somewhat wider, with the fovea some- what shorter, and the oral seta of the male shorter, the clothing in general has also a more sericeous appearance; but I can find no positive characters of the legs that would warrant their specific separation. ARTICERUS FOVEICOLLIS, Rafir. Mr. J. S. Clark has taken specimens in abundance in nests of Jridomyrmex conifera about the Swan River, that probably belong to this species, despite some apparent dis- crepancies. In the description the antennae are noted as ‘‘capite plus duplo longiores,’’ and they are so figured; but on the specimens before me, on careful measurement, 173 they are seen to be less than twice as long as the head; they are also less conspicuously narrowed to the base than i the figure; the head is of peculiar shape, but the figure rather exaggerates the basal enlargement. In both sexes the four front femora are moderately angulate, the hind ones | feebly so. The male differs from the female in having the antennae slightly longer, the prothoracic hump slightly more pronounced, the under-surface of abdomen incurved from apex to base (instead of strongly and evenly convex) with the pygidium encroaching upon it; the middle trochanters have an acute spine, and the middle tibiae have a short pro- duced spur at the inner apex. In my table it would be associated with fortnum, which is a much smaller and other- wise very different species. ARTICERUS NITIDICOLLIS, Rafir. Mr. F. EH. Wilson has taken two females of this species in Victoria (Lorne) in October, in nests of Wctatomma metal- licum, and of a small black species of /ridomyrmex. A. FoRTNUMI, Hope. /Hab.—Parachilna, Mount Lofty Ranges. A. DILATICORNIS, Westw. Hab.—Fern Tree Gully, Coburg. A. DENTIPES, Lea. Mab.—Parachilna. A. IRREGULARIS, Lea. Hab.—Coburg. Now knowing duboulayi, fovercollis, and the male of constrictiventris additions to my table) of males may be given as follows :— a. r. Pronotum highly polished Ree KUELOTCOMDS ee Pronotum subopaque te Pees ee CONSUTICULVE MEETS s. Eyes on widest portion of head ... fortnumr ss. Eyes on narrowest portion (excluding P neck) of head . sk ol eat eens OUVCECOLLES t. Antennae gradually increasing in width from near base ... hamatipes tt. Apical half of antennae suddenly becom- mormuch thicker... 3. 2s --28..) wnlsone gg. ggg. Metasternum unarmed posteriorly. w. Mesosternum with an acute projection between middle coxae ... ... ... .... mesosternalis uu. Mesosternum not so armed ... ... ... subeylindricornis ». Antennae no longer than head _... tumidus vv. Antennae as long as head and pr othorax ECiTn oT Ch Ret a ae Se nee UMUC WLaYt (3) Ante, 1918, pp. 242, 243. 174 TRICHOPTERYGIDAE. RODWAYIA INTERCOXALIS, n. sp. Pl, xxv.,, ne) 3t2: Dark castaneous, apical portion of elytra, abdomen, antennae, and legs much paler. Length, ‘6 mm. Hab.—Queensland: Cairns district, from nests of ants (F. P: Dodd), Type, I. 10682: The outlines and punctures of this species are practic- ally the same as in all others of the genus, and in agreement with the comments on ovata, and the clothing consists of very short depressed pubescence, giving the upper-surface a finely sericeous appearance as on most of them; but it is darker than any other species; the abdomen is not entirely covered by the elytra, and the apical parts of the latter in “consequence appear considerably paler than those parts that cover the former, but the colour of the elytra, apart from this, seems to gradually become paler from the base to the apex. The intercoxal process of the prosternum, which at first glance appears to be black, is wider than in any other described species of the genus, and its front end (the sides of which, however, I have been unable to see clearly on any of the specimens examined under the microscope) appears to be without the flange-like processes of the other species; its hind end is more obtusely notched than in any other species, except ovata, and each side is finely margined. The host ant is a reddish stinging species of the genus 4 mblyopone or near thereto. RopWAYIA ORIENTALIS, Lea. I recently took this species at Glen Innes (in abundance from nests of Camponotus nigriceps and of ('. aeneopilosus), Peak Hill (from nests of Camponotus novae-hollandiae and of a small black hairy Jridomyrmez), in New South Wales; and at Brisbane (from a nest of C. aeneopilosus), Mungar Junction (form a nest of Metatomma metallicum), and Mount Tambourine (from nests of H. metallicum and Polyrhachis ammon), in Queensland. RopWAYIA MINUTA, Lea. Mr. E. L. Savage took a specimen of this species from an ants’ nest on Mount Lofty in April, 1917; this being the only specimen of the genus I have seen from South Australia, although it has been repeatedly searched for in nests of species of Polyrhachis, Ectatomma, and Iridomyrmex, in which specimens may be obtained in abundance in New South (4) Tas. Nat., 1907, p. 16. 175 Wales, Victoria, and Tasmania. I also took many specimens. of minuta from the nest of a small variety of Hctatomma: metallicum, on Mount Tambourine in Queensland. HISTERIDAE. CHLAMYDOPSIS INQUILINA, Lewis. Many specimens taken by Mr. J. 8. Clark about the Swan River from the nests of /ridomyrmex conifera appear to belong to this species; they agree well with the original description, but differ from the figure subsequently given in having the elytra across the epaulettes wider than any other part, instead of (as in the figure) narrower than across the middle; the difference may be sexual or due to inaccuracy of the figure. The deep notch in each epaulette, combined with the inconspicuous punctures and striae on most of the upper-surface, and the strongly and evenly elevated sides of prothorax, render the species extremely distinct. In a note on the species a letter from Mr. Lewis was quoted recording the type as from Liverpool, in New South Wales; in the original description it was noted as from ‘‘Aus- tralia,’ and taken by du Boulay. Liverpoo! was probably noted in error, for, so far as I am aware, the late Mr. F. H. du Boulay was never there, whereas he did a lot of collecting from ants’ nests in Western Australia. CHLAMYDOPSIS coMATA, Blackb. ‘Mr. Elston has presented to the Museum a specimen of this fine species; he obtained it from a nest of Hctatomma metallicum (adjacent to a termite’s nest) on the Mount Lofty Ranges. CHLAMYDOPSIS EXCAVATA, Lea. Mr. W. du Boulay took two specimens of this species (now first recorded from the mainland) from a nest of Hcetatomma at Hunter Hill (near Sydney) in October. | CHLAMYDOPSIS TUBERCULATA, Lea. Three specimens of this species were taken at Lorne (Vic- toria) by Mr. F. E. Wilson, from nests of a small black species of Iridomyrmex; one specimen was presented to the South Australian Museum, and another to the National Museum. CHLAMYDOPSIS. AGILIS, Lea. A specimen of this species was taken at Nairne (South Australia) by Mr. W. L. Burton, from a nest of Ectatomma metallicum. (6) Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 1912, p. 72. 176 CHLAMYDOPSIS LATIPES, Nl. sp. Pl xxv eee Dark castaneous-brown, some parts (the metasternum and abdomen quite) black. Head immersed in prothorax when at rest, face with shallow reticulate punctures. Antennae moderately long; scape curved at base, greatly dilated towards apex, outer portion with punctures as on face; funicle short, apparently six-jointed ; club long and subcylindrical. Prothorax strongly transverse, front margin lightly elevated behind head, then with a strong oblique elevation to each side, sides scarcely elevated and somewhat sinuous, with a subconical tubercle in middle; with dense reticulate punctures; a narrow sub- marginal line at base. Hlytra about as wide as long; most of surface shining and with minute (scarcely visible) punctures ; epaulettes strongly raised and with punctures somewhat as on prothorax, a strongly elevated process between each epaulette and the suture, the process wide at the base, pointed at the apex, and with a conspicuous fascicle of golden red bristles, meeting a similar fascicle on a strong median elevation, the fascicles crossing a deep transverse subbasal impression, but between it and base a less depressed space with rounded outlines; outer walls with strong striae. Prosternwm and mesosternum with punctures as on .pronotum; metaster- num shining, with a narrow median line; with small and not very dense punctures. Abdomen with punctures as on metasternum, pygidium and propygidium subopaque, and with much denser punctures. Legs long; femora densely punctate, grooved on one side throughout their length ; tibiae wide and compressed, grooved on lower edge to fit into femora, with a shallow groove on inner side on the upper half for reception of tarsi, the grooves with an irregular fringe of setiferous granules, front ones dilating to about basal third, where there is a small tooth, then slightly diminishing to apex; the other tibiae wider and without the tooth, but otherwise somewhat similar. Length, 3°6 mm. Hab.—Western Australia: Mount Henry, from a nest of ants (Dolichoderes (Hypoclinea) scabridus, Mayr.®), J. S. Clark. Type (unique), I. 10675. With the reticulated pronotum and polished parts of elytra as in the Tasmanian excavata, to which it is closer than to any other known species, but much larger, and basal parts of elytra, including the epaulettes and their clothing, very different, tibiae even more dilated, etc. The tubercle on the pronotum is quite distinct when viewed from the side, (6) Name reerived from Prof. Wheeler. WT but is much smaller and otherwise different to that of tuberculata. When the head is extracted from the prothorax it may be seen that the latter has a large excavation or fovea, partially invisible from above, for the reception of each antenna. At first glance the elytra appear to have two large, round, deep foveae, but this is due to the crossing of the fascicles over the subbasal excavation, and to the sinuation of the epaulettes at the sides of this, where also there are membranes with stiff bristles, these somewhat shorter than the fascicles; the excavation is without lateral openings, but there is a shallow depression (representing them) on each side, to which the striae are directed. CHLAMYDOPSIS STRIATIPENNIS, nl. sp. Plo xxy 5 sheen Black; elevated front margins of prothorax, antennae (club infuscated), and legs reddish-castaneous. Head immersed in prothorax when at rest; face with shallow reticulate punctures. Antennae not very long; scape - curved at base, thickened to apex, with punctures as on face; funicle short, apparently six-jointed; club moderately long and subcylindrical. Prothorax« strongly transverse, front margin narrowly elevated behind head, then more strongly elevated and curved to margins, narrowest at base; with dense reticulate punctures, in places becoming substriate. Elytra about as wide as long, closely but sharply striated ; base much and suddenly wider than prothorax; epaulettes strongly raised, and crowned with stiff reddish bristles; subbasal impression not very large (in comparison with other species), its deepest part highly polished, not indicated on the sides; tips with numerous short setae. Prosternum, mesos- ternum, and parts of metasternum and abdomen with dense subreticulate punctures, elsewhere with small ones. Pygidium and propygidium with dense reticulate punctures, and numerous short setae. Legs long; femora thin, grooved for partial reception of tibiae; front tibiae rather thin at. base, then strongly thickened, a small tooth marking the termina- tion of the tarsal groove; middle tibiae slightly longer, rather less stout, and with the dentiform projection almost obsolete; hind tibiae longer, still less stout (but with the apical half still fairly thick), and without a dentiform projec- tion. Length, 2°75 mm. | Hab.—Victoria: Lorne, from a nest of a small black Iridomyrmex in October (F. E. Wilson). Type (unique), I. 10676. A strongly striated species, readily distinguished from all others of the genus by (in combination) great width across 178 the shoulders, compared to the prothorax, epaulettes crowned with stiff reddish setae (not attached to a membrane), and by the greatly thickened front and middle tibiae. In my table it would be associated with ectatommae, which is a much smaller species, with very different legs. The elytra are strongly striated throughout, except at the bottom of the subbasal depression, the striae are mostly longitudinal, but many are oblique or sinuous, and a few near the base are transverse; on the outer walls they are not all directed towards a central point. CHLAMYDOPSIS CARINICOLLIS, Nl. Sp. . Black, antennae and legs castaneous. Head immersed in prothorax when at rest; face with . shallow reticulate punctures, and with two short longitudinal carinae, each ending in a small subconical tubercle. Antennae rather short; scape curved, strongly thickened, with punc- tures as on face; funicle short, apparently six-jointed; club long .and subcylindrical. Prothorax strongly transverse, front margin lightly elevated and bilobed behind head, thence to sides strongly elevated and curved, sides behind where the margins join almost parallel, a narrow carina from apex to middle, a small tubercle on each side of and in line with its end, between each tubercle and the basal angles a short trans- verse carina, two small medio-basal tubercles; with dense, reticulate punctures. /lytra not much wider than prothorax, slightly wider than long; epaulettes moderately elevated ; with a fairly large subbasal depression, extending almost to but not opening on to outer walls, and with a golden membrane overhanging it from the inner end of each epaulette, a narrow transverse carina on each at the apical third, extending to the outer wall but not to the suture; punctures, almost throughout, much as on pronotum. Middle parts of meta- sternum and of abdomen shining and with rather small but distinct punctures, rest of under-surface reticulate and sub- opaque. Propygidium with a short longitudnal carina, and with a transverse one at its junction with pygidium. /emora rather long and thin; tibiae strongly compressed, front ones with a strong tooth in middle, thence rapidly diminishing to each end, middle ones somewhat similar but the tooth less projecting, hind ones with greatest width slightly beyond the middle, the space between it and base quite straight (on the other tibiae it is distinctly curved), tarsal grooves on oblique outer edge. Length, 2 mm. Hab.—Victoria: Beaconsfield, from a nest of A phaeno- gaster longiceps, in July (F. E. Wilson). Type (unique), EAA067 TE a ee ee a ee 179 A suboblong black species, with a median carina on the pronotum as in serricollis and pygidialis, to which it 1s allied, but from both of which it differs in many respects. Seen obliquely from behind the middle portion of the basal depression appears to have some coarse punctures, the parts beyond the membranes appear to be almost circular and highly polished. CHLAMYDOPSIS COMPRESSIPES, N. sp. Castaneous. Head immersed in prothorax; face with shallow reticu- late punctures. Antennae rather short; scape curved, its apical half thick, with punctures as on face; funicle short, apparently six-jointed; club subelliptic. Prothorax strongly transverse, front margin slightly elevated behind head, thence to sides strongly elevated and hghtly curved, sides feebly elevated and slightly curved, middle gently elevated and with a short feeble transverse carina; with shallow, reticulate punctures. Hlytra slightly but distinctly wider than long, suddenly much wider than prothorax; epaulettes raised and rounded, with punctures as on pronotum, close to the inner side of each epaulette a narrow ridge conspicuously elevated above it, a small upright fascicle between its hind end and the margin; basal depression wide, deep, and semidouble, its ends partly concealed in places; with elongate, subreticu- late punctures in middle, changing to simple striae; outer walls with numerous striae, all converging to a rather large but shallow fovea. Most of metasternum and of abdomen shining and with small punctures, rest of under-surface, pygidium, and propygidium opaque and with punctures as on pronotum. Legs long, thin, and compressed. Length, 2°25 mm. Hab.— Queensland: Mount Tambourine, taken from a nest of ants in December (H. Hacker). Type (unique) in Queensland Museum. _ At first glance fairly close to epplewralis, with which it would be associated in my table of the genus, but readily distinguished therefrom by the epaulettes and tibiae; on the present species each epaulette is conspicuously raised, and at its greatest elevation is not disconnected with the part behind it, and its side has a round fovea not connected with the basal depression, although in line with it; the inner process near each epaulette 1s also terminated by a narrow ridge elevated above it; the tibiae have the outer outline gently rounded off, instead of angulate in middle; pallida, with somewhat similar tibiae, has very different epaulettes. The elytra are distinctly wider than long, and at the base are 180 much and suddenly wider than the prothorax; the legs, and especially the tibiae, are strongly compressed, so that although fairly wide they are thin, with the outer part of each tibia semi-transparent. From the species, atra, previously recorded from Mount Tambourine, it is distinct by its pale colour, and very different epaulettes and legs. COLYDIIDAE. EUCLARKIA, 0. g. _ Head irregular, about as long as wide. Eyes small and lateral. Antennae short, stout, three-jointed, first joint small and almost concealed, second very short, third cylindrical, its apex truncated. Palpi small, only apical joint of each ex- posed. Prothorax subquadrate, strongly costate. Seutellum small. Hlytra closely applied to prothorax, strongly costate ; epipleurae rather wide and parallel-sided to base of abdomen, thence narrowed to apex. /etasternum elongate; episterna rather narrow and parallel-sided. 4bdomen composed of five segments, first and fifth subequal in length, second much shorter, third slightly shorter than second, and fourth than third. Legs short and fairly stout; front and middle coxae moderately separated, the hind ones more widely so; femora edentate; tibiae angularly dilated to beyond the middle, and then strongly narrowed to apex; tarsi with claw-joint almost as long as the rest combined, claws simple. This remarkable genus is clearly allied to Aershawia, and in general appearance the species described below quite strongly resembles A’. rugiceps on a small scale; with antennae removed there is no strong distinguishing feature. The antennae at first glance appear to be but one-jointed, but a very small basal joint (invisible from above) may be seen, and a second one applied like a thin disk to the base of the third, the latter has its apex slightly concave, and filled with sensitised pubescence as in so many inquilines. The mandibles are tightly clenched on all the specimens before me. Only four distinct tarsal joints are visible. The elytral episterna and base of abdomen on each side are somewhat depressed for the partial reception of the hind legs when at rest. Wings are present. EUCLARKIA COSTATA, 0. sp. Plo xxyeeedie LG: Rather narrow, depressed, opaque, with dense punctures all over. Brown or black. Head truncated in front, sides incurved from between antennae to eyes, beyond each of these a subconical projection, 181 and then narrowed to base; surface with about eight small elevations. Prothorax with six narrow costae from base to apex, the two median ones somewhat incurved at middle, the outer one on each side marginal. H#lytra with narrow costae on prothorax; with geminate rows of rather strong punctures. Length, 3-3°75 mm. Hab. — Western Australia: Swan River, from nests of the twig-mound ant, Jridomyrmez (J. ©. Clark). Type, I. 10651. About half of the specimens are of a dingy black, the others vary to a rather light brown, but the apical half of the antennae is usually paler than the basal half, the two shades of colour being frequently rather sharply Euclarkia costata, Lea, defined. On the elytra (counting the sutural thickening as the first) the second costa is continuous from base to apex, but near the apex is joimed by another representing the third and fourth, these joined together slightly beyond the middle, the fifth is joined to the third at the base, but its apex is free and subapical, the marginal costa is strongly curved at about the basal third; the sutural costae appear as one, except near the base, where they narrowly diverge. A very slow-moving species, of which Mr. Clark obtained numerous specimens by sieving. It is one of the most interesting of the many curious species recently taken by him from nests of the twig-mound ant. MYCETOPHAGIDAE. ATARGUS BALTEATUS, Lec., Proc. Ac. Phil., 1856, p. 14. Mr. Froggatt and I obtained numerous specimens of this species In some damp wheat bags at Enfield, near Sydney. I am indebted to Mr. G. J. Arrow for the name of the species, now first recorded as occurring in Australia. SCARABAEIDAE. BoLBOCERAS QUADRIFOVEATUM, ND. sp. Pleiexexyn,« fio: 17. sopnleapxexcegles nee Ae dg. Castaneous, tips of some processes black. Underparts densely pilose. Head with a strong, erect, densely punctate central horn ; front face of clypeus semicircular and vertical, each side narrowly carinate, and just before the canthus appearing as 182 a small subconical tubercle ; mandibles not notched near apex. Prothoraz with four strong processes projecting forwards, and almost equi-distant at their tips, front margin with a narrow impression across middle, becoming foveate at each side, front angles acutely produced; with a large deep fovea close to each submedian horn; with a few large punctures about middle, becoming crowded towards and on sides; basal gutter with punctures throughout. Scutellum impunctate. LElytra with small punctures in striae, of these the thirteenth and fourteenth very close together near base. Front tibiae with six teeth, hind pair with two wide carinae. Length, 20-21 mm. Hab.—Queensland: Chillagoe (J. S. Clark). Type, T. 10659. The apex of the prothorax is bifoveate, the foveae, however, lateral, but as the hind tibiae are not multicarinate Blackburn no doubt would have referred it to the first sub- group of group two, and it would there be associated with froggatt: and armigerum, from the description of the former it differs in being smaller, and with the median processes of the pronotum closer together than in tenar, instead of more distant; from armigerum it differs in having the lateral processes of the head much shorter and the median horn much longer, the discal foveae of the prothorax are also considerably larger, but the horns are somewhat the same; with the heads removed specimens of the two species would probably be thought to belong to but one species; teraz, also with four transversely placed horns, has them more widely separated, the foveae smaller and deeper, and the cephalic horn bifid. The cephalic horn is about as long as the distance across the canthi; the prothoracic horns are somewhat compressed laterally, and rather obtusely pointed, the median ones are shorter than the one on the head, and somewhat longer than the lateral ones; in addition to the large punctures on the prothorax there are numerous minute indistinct ones. A second specimen is considerably darker than the type; its head and prothorax being dark brown. BOLBOCERAS BISPINICOLLE, 0. sp. Pl. xxv., figs. 18 and 19; pl. xxvi., figs. 45 and 46. d. Pale castaneous, tips of some projections black. Under-parts densely pilose. Head gently concave in middle, with two feeble sub- nodular elevations near base, in front with two strong spines projecting forwards and upwards, a narrow carina connecting the spines, and another connecting each with the canthus; mandibles gently incurved near apex, the right one notched. foie ane oben a a ve 183 Prothorax widely declivious but not excavated in front; about one third from base with two strong curved spines or thin horns, at the outer base of each a large fovea shallowly connected with the small sublateral one; sides finely and acutely serrated; a few punctures obliquely placed behind each eye near apex, some at sides and others in basal gutter, elsewhere impunctate. Scutellum impunctate. EHlytra with narrow punctures in striae. Front tzbiae with five teeth, hind ones with two wide carinae. Length, 19 mm. Q. Differs in having the head with more numerous punctures and granules, front face of clypeus crowned with four equi-distant subtriangular elevations; prothorax unarmed, with coarse irregularly distributed punctures, sublateral foveae smaller and the median ones absent, and with a rather short (not the width of the head) transverse bisinuate carina about one-third from apex. Hab.—Western Australia: Geraldton (J. 8S. Clark). ype. 010660. Allied to frontale, and with the head of the male some- what similarly armed, but the spines of the prothorax are thinner and more divergent, and the large foveae or excavations are differently placed: on the present species each is subbasal and encroaches upon the hind part of a submedian spine, its néarest part to the margin being about twice its width; on frontale the excavations are considerably larger, some distance trom the median armature, and each opens out on to a front angle; the females of the two species are very similar. The head of the male before and behind the frontal spines has numerous small subobsolete granules, elsewhere it is smooth and almost or quite impunctate. BOLBOCERAS TRIUNUM, 0. sp. By xv, fics 2015, oliexexavaiye oA 3. Pale castaneous, tips of some projections infuscated or black. Under-parts densely pilose. Head mostly flat, smooth near base, rather densely granulate elsewhere, front face of carina short, its middle crowned with a small tooth, this connected by a carina with a smaller tooth just above each antennal notch; each mandible with an almost rectangular notch, the front edge truncated. Prothorax with three rather small elevations arising froma fairly large common base, the median one carinated in front, a curved carina feeble but well defined and close to base in middle, and obscurely ending on each side between the elevations and the small sublateral fovea; sides finely and rather obtusely serrated; punctures crowded towards sides, irregular in front and sparse elsewhere. 184 Scutellum with minute punctures. Hlytra with small round punctures in striae, of the latter the thirteenth and fourteenth conjoined near base. Front tibiae with six teeth; hind ones with two wide carinae. Length, 16-17 mm. Hab.—Western Australia (J. S.Clark). Type, I. 10658. _ Allied to trituberculatum, and with the head very - similar, but the three prothoracic elevations much smaller, closer together, in line with each other (instead of the median one considerably in advance of the others) and arising from a common base. | RHOPAEA. The species of this genus, although of large size, are very difficult to separate on superficial examination, and this difficulty is increased by the considerable variation that appears to be common in the individuals of several species. Thus verreduxt varies in a fashion that is almost exactly paralleled by magnicornis and assimilis (with the antennae missing it would be difficult, I believe often impossible, to be sure of the identity of specimens of these species) ; morbillosa is closely resembled by mussoni, rugulosa, and polita; hirtuosa by decipiens, etc. But the table given by Blackburn (7) readily permits of the genus being split up into distinct and easily recognizable groups. . RHOPAEA NIGRICOLLIS, Nn. sp. Pi xxv., fie? 22 pls exci alee oe 3. Of a dingy and rather pale castaneous-brown, sterna and parts of legs darker, head, prothorax, and scutellum black, antennae flavous. Closely covered with short, depressed, ashen pubescence, mixed with a few longer hairs, - these fairly numerous on prothorax; sterna densely pilose. Head rather strongly convex and with crowded punctures between eyes, becoming much larger and sparser on clypeus. Antennae ten-, flabellum seven-jointed, first joint of the latter very little shorter than the others. Prothorax apparently about twice as wide as long, sides strongly rounded and obtusely serrated, all angles rounded off, median line shallow and incomplete; with crowded but not very large punctures, and with some larger ones scattered about. Scwtellwm with crowded punctures. JLlytra with vague remnants of discal costae; with small dense punctures, often finely wrinkled or transversely confluent, and with numerous considerably larger and deeper ones. Pygidiwm densely punctate and shagreened. Front tibiae strongly tridentate, the second tooth much nearer the first than third. Length, 18-20 mm. | (7) Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1911, p., LSo: 185 Hab.—Western Australia: Beverley (E. F. du Boulay). Type, I. 10792. The sides of the prothorax are obscurely diluted with red. There is a rather dense fringe of hairs overlapping the base of the scutellum. The prothorax measures 8x5 mm., but to the eye it appears twice as wide as long. Of the species referred to AA, in Blackburn’s table, it differs from soror in being much smaller and darker, prothorax with larger punc- tures, and third joint of the antennae of different shape; heterodactyla is a larger and paler species, and its third antennal joint has a spiniform process; in hirtwosa, glosa, and australis the clothing of the head and prothorax is very different; in assimilis the third joint of the antennae is much longer, and the fourth of very different shape; from the description of Jaticollis it differs in having the prothorax no wider than in pilosa, the smaller elytral punctures not more strongly impressed than the smaller ones of that species, the size is smaller, colour darker, and clothing different. In general appearance it is lke a small dark verreauxi, but its flabellum has one more joint than in that species. It is the first true species of the genus to be recorded from Western Australia. RHOPAEA DECIPIENS, 0. sp. Pi xexy .,) flo: 21 ip leeexoxangtep ie 48. o. Of a uniform and rather pale castaneous, some mar- ginal parts and the tibial teeth darker. Clothed with fine, depressed, pale pubescence, some longer hairs scattered about on elytra, and becoming dense on parts of head and pro- thorax; sterna densely pilose. Head strongly convex and with crowded punctures between eyes, becoming much larger and sparser on clypei's. Antennae ten-, flabellum six-jointed. Apical joint of ma: il- lary palpi long, and with a narrow opaque furrow. Prothorax moderately long (55-75 mm.), sides strongly rounded and obtusely serrated, hind angles obtuse but not rounded off, base hghtly bisinuate; median line short and feeble; punctures crowded but sharply defined. Scwtellum with crowded punc- tures. Hlytra with dense punctures of two kinds: small, shallow, and often transversely confluent ones, and consider- ably larger and deeper ones. Pygidiuwm shagreened and with dense punctures. Front tvbrae strongly tridentate, the second tooth slightly nearer the first than third. Length, 20-23 mm. Hab.—New South Wales: Forest Reefs (A. M. Lea). Type, I. 4535. Oni one of the specimens the sides of the prothorax and the pygidium are infuscated, but this appears to have been caused by partial decomposition. There is a dense fringe 186 of hairs, similar to those on the sterna, overlapping the base of the scutellum. The flabellum at first glance appears to be but five-jointed, as the produced part of its basal joint is much shorter than that of the following one, and from some directions is concealed. To the naked eye the elytra appear to have vague remnants of discal costae, but these disappear under a lens. One of the specimens before me bears Black- burn’s name label ‘‘Rhopaea hirtwosa, Blackb.’’ and in fact it strikingly resembles that species, but it belongs to a different section of the genus, as the flabellum, including the first short one, consists of but six joints, instead of seven. Of the males of the group AAA, it is distinguished from verreauat by the shorter third joint of antennae, with the produced part of the fifth longer and more acute, the apical joint of the palpi is also much narrower; mussoni has the ramus of the fifth joint considerably longer and wider, and the palpi different; rugu- losa has the upper-surface almost glabrous; from the descrip- tion of dubitans it differs by the sides of the prothorax not being angular in the middle; by the table the third joint not ‘considerably longer than wide’” should distinguish it from consanguined. PARALEPIDIOTA CAVIFRONS, N. sp. Pl. xxv he. ou: 3d. Pale Bevo castneoee elytra and antennae paler, tibial teeth blackish. Head, prothorax, and scutellum with snowy-white, rounded or elliptic, depressed scales, becoming thinner and more or less setiform on elytra, abdomen, and parts of legs ; sterna and parts of legs with dense, whitish hair. Head strongly convex, and with rather large and dense punctures, becoming smaller and sparser in middle of base. Clypeus bilobed, margins strongly elevated. Antennae ten-, flabellum seven-jointed, first joint of the latter about one-fifth shorter than the others. Apical joint of maxillary palpi wide, with a wide shallow median depression. /rothorax strongly convex, sides widely rounded and finely serrated, all angles obtuse; punctures sparser than on head, and much sparser about middle. L/ytra slightly dilated to beyond the middle, apices obliquely truncated ; punctures fairly dense and moder- ately large, becoming smaller and sparser in parts, discal costae lightly defined. Pygidium rather strongly margined, apex feebly bilobed; punctures rather numerous. Front tibiae strongly tridentate, hind tibiae with unequal spurs at apex, the larger one dilated to beyond the middle, ale then narrowed to apex. Length, 20-21 mm. Hab.—Queensland: Chillagoe (J. S. Clark). Type, Ai 10783. ie a 187 Smaller and duller than lepidoptera and with two more joints to the flabellum. The white scales are fairly dense, but nowhere overlapping on parts of the head and prothorax, and many of them do not arise above their containing punctures. There is a dense fringe of long pale hairs over the base of the scutellum. The sides of the clypeus are strongly but not suddenly elevated, leaving a flat portion a little more than one-third of the median width, and about two-thirds of the length, the flat part with larger but sparser punctures than on the sloping ones. LEPIDIOTA FROGGATTI, Macl. PY, xxyva.) shies vole Large specimens of this species are larger (up to 42 mm.) than any other specimens I have seen of the allied genera, such specimens have the femora and tibiae entirely black, and the hind femora have the-setiferous punctures nowhere dense, and there is a compdratively wide space (about the median third) from which they are quite absent. The whole of the upper-surface is densely covered with short depressed setae, and there is a fringe of long hairs at the apex of the pro- thorax. Some specimens from the Coen River are smaller (29-34 mm.), clothing of the upper-surface somewhat sparser (not altogether due to abrasion), hairs of the metasternum of a rusty red, and with the antennae, palpi, and legs (tibial teeth excepted), more or less reddish ; the setiferous punctures of the hind femora are more numerous but not dense. var. STRADBROKENSIS, Nn. var. Pl xxi, hess A specimen from Stradbroke Island (taken by Mr. Hacker in October, 1911) in the Queensland Museum, probably repre- sents a variety of the species; it is much smaller (26 mm.), no parti (except the tibial teeth) is quite black, and the hind femora are densely covered with setiferous punctures, and their lower edge is finely serrated; the preapical callosities of the elytra are rather more pronounced; there is also no fringe of long hairs at the apex of the prothorax, and this is certainly not due to abrasion, as the clothing is in perfect order. SYSTELLOPUS ATER, Nl. sp. Pl xxva) howmoor Black and shining. Under-surface and legs with black or blackish hairs. Head convex and almost impunctate at base, flat and with crowded punctures elsewhere. Clypeus semicircular in 188 front, with margins lightly upturned; hind suture con- spicuous, outcurved in front, incurved at sides. Labrum on _ the same plane as clypeus and rather more strongly upceurved in front; with an irregular row of strong punctures in front. Prothorax strongly convex, sides strongly rounded, hind angles widely rounded off; along middle and across a fairly wide space near base impunctate, elsewhere with rather small but: sharply-defined punctures, irregularly distributed and nowhere crowded. Scwtellum semicircular, with rather numerous punctures. H/ytra with shoulders, sides, and apex rounded; sutural stria distinct, with several feeble geminate striae; much of the surface finely wrinkled, and with small scattered punctures. Pygidium impunctate along middle, finely asperate elsewhere. Legs short and thick; front tibiae strongly bidentate, hind pair about as long as the apical width. Length, 25 mm. Hab.—Australia (J. 8. Clark). Type (unique), I. 10791. The species has the robust build of many female Dynas- tides, to which subfamily at first glance it appears to belong; but the clypeus, labrum, tibiae, etc., are in exact agreement with Systellopus obtusus; from which it differs in its high polish and much greater size, characters which also distinguish it from the description of validus. Both antennae and five of the tarsi have been broken, but the species is so distinct that I have not hesitated to describe the type. It was sent by Mr. Clark as from Chillagoe in Queensland, but as he had an accident with a box and some labels were mixed, the locality may be doubtful, and the specimen may have really been taken in Western Australia. HAPLONYCHA MARGINIPENNIS, N. sp. Pl. xxvi., fig. 54. Dark castaneous-brown with an opalescent gloss; head and parts of legs black. Head with fairly numerous long hairs between eyes, and very numerous on two basal joints of antennae, prothorax completely fringed with long hairs, narrowly on sides and base, widely in front; sterna densely clothed with dark hair, in parts almost sooty, pygidium sparsely clothed and with a thin marginal fringe; elytra with two. fringes. Head smooth at base, with crowded and coarse punctures elsewhere. Clypeus with sides strongly narrowed to the front, which is strongly upturned ; front face with dense punctures. Antennae nine-, club three-jointed; fourth joint slightly longer than third and fifth. Penultimate joint of maxillary palpi distinctly longer than antepenultimate, and slightly longer than apical. /Prothorax widely transverse, sides 189 strongly rounded, front angles produced and acute, hind ones rounded off; punctures rather small and not very dense, but becoming denser in front and on parts of base. Sewtellwm punctate on basal half. Hlytra slightly dilated to beyond the middle; discal costae fairly well defined and bounded by geminate rows of punctures, the interstices with punctures much as on prothorax; suture briefly mucronate. Pygidiwm with dense punctures at base, small and sparse elsewhere. Front tibiae strongly tridentate. Length, 22 mm. Hab.—Western Australia: Eradu (J. S. Clark). Type (unique), I. 10787. Commencing near the base of each elytron there is a dense even fringe projecting downwards; from the base itself there is another fringe, but of longer and sparser hairs or setae mostly projecting outwards. The basal joint of the hind tarsi is fully as long as the second, but from most directions it appears to be slightly shorter. It is much the build of solida, of Blackburn’s Group 4, whose elytra have similar double fringes, but the prothorax is rather densely clothed in front, and at the base has the long hairs characteristic of Group 2; in the table of that group it would be associated with latebricola, from which, as from all others of the group, it may be distinguished by its clothing. HAPLONYCHA SUAVIS, Nl. sp. Pl, xxvii), fener Flavous and brightly iridescent, head, some marginal parts, and teeth of front tibiae reddish. Sterna moderately densely clothed with whitish hair. Head smooth at extreme base, but with crowded punc- tures elsewhere. Clypeus widely rounded and strongly up- turned in front. Antennae nine-, club three-jointed; fourth joint the length of third and slightly shorter than fifth. Penultimate joint of maxillary palpi slightly shorter than the adjacent ones. Prothorar widely transverse, sides strongly rounded in middle, front angles produced and not very acute, hind ones obtuse, but not rounded off ; punctures very minute. Scutellum impunctate at apex. Llytra slightly dilated pos- teriorly; with rather small and not very dense punctures, geminate rows and discal costae ill-defined; suture not mucronate. Pygidiwm with fairly numerous punctures, except at apex. Front tbiae strongly bidentate; two basal joints of hind tibiae subequal. Length, 17 mm. | Hab.—Western Australia: Geraldton (J. S. Clark). Type (unique), I. 10789. The upper-surface at first appears to be glabrous, but on the pronotum there is some very short evenly-distributed 190 pubescence (continued on to the base of the elytra), that is scarcely visible from above, but fairly distinct from the sides; the pygidium has somewhat larger (but still very short) pubescence, and a weak marginal fringe; the elytral fringe is long at the base but very short at the apex. The punctures on the head, although crowded, are nearly all sharply defined, they are just as dense in front of as behind the clypeal suture, but become sparser and smaller on the front of the clypeus; on the prothorax they are very indistinct, unless the surface is wet, but from some directions they appear like minute reddish dots. From the sides, in certain lights, the elytra appear to have faint vermiculate impressions, connecting two or more punctures, but sometimes traceable almost from base to apex; from most directions, however, they are invisible. There is a median remnant of a longitudinal carina on the pygidium. Between the second tooth and the base of the front tibia there is a feeble undulation, but it could not fairly be regarded as a tooth. As the penultimate joint of the palpi is slightly shorter than the antepenultimate, the species can- not be referred to Blackburn’s Group 4, and failing that it can only be referred to Group 7; in the table of that group it would be associated with testacerpennis, from which, as from all others of the group, it is distinguished by the very fine pubescence of the pronotum; the punctures between the eyes are also very much denser and coarser than on that species. In general appearance it is like neglecta, or a very small specimen of ruficeps (of Group 1), marginata (of Group 3), and griffith: (of Group 5). HAPLONYCHA NIGRA, 0. sp. Ply xxvag elie Joo. Black and shining, antennae (basal joint excepted), palpi and parts of tarsi more or less reddish. Upper-surface glabrous, except for a few hairs at sides of prothorax, and for a fringe of long hairs at sides of elytra; under-surface with long rusty-red hair, dense on sterna, sparser elsewhere. Head smooth at base; with crowded punctures elsewhere but becoming sparser and sharply defined towards apex of clypeus. Clypeus with rather strongly elevated margins. Antennae nine-, club three-jointed; fourth joint slightly longer than the adjacent ones. Penultimate joint of maxillary palpi slightly longer than the antepenultimate, but’ distinctly shorter than the apical one. Prothorax widely transverse, sides strongly rounded, front angles strongly produced and acute, hind ones rounded off; with dense and fairly large sharply defined punctures, becoming crowded in_ places. Elytra slightly dilated to beyond the middle, suture not 191 mucronate; punctures fairly large and dense, becoming crowded posteriorly, geminate rows and discal costae well defined. Pygidiwm with dense subasperate punctures, becoming crowded in corners, and sparse at apex. Front tibiae strongly tridentate ; basal joint of hind tarsi longer than second . Length, 185 mm. Hab.—Western Australia: Kuminin (E. F. du Boulay). Type (unique), I. 10793. The punctures between the eyes are so crowded that part of the surface has a vermiculate appearance ; the clypeus from behind appears to be truncated in front, but from directly above it is seen to be gently rounded. The penultimate joint of the palpi from some directions appears slightly longer, but from others no longer than the antepenultimate, hence, as the pronotum and pygidium are black, there need be no hesitation in referring this species to Blackburn’s Group 8; from the species of that group he somewhat doubtfully identified as gagatina, Burm., it differs in being much larger, prothorax shining, with strong well-defined punctures, and the pygidium also with stronger punctures; from funerea it differs in the much coarser punctures of the entire upper- surface and pygidium, and the elytra without a conspicuous margining membrane; they have, however, an extremely short fringe projecting downwards that could be easily overlooked. GLOSSOCHEILIFER BIDENTATUS, N. Sp. Pi xxvi., figs. o(@amdaass Reddish-castaneous; club of antennae and elytra flavous, suture base and margins of the latter darker. Upper-surface glabrous, except for a few long hairs in latteral gutters of prothorax ; elytra with a short dense fringe of golden setae projecting downwards, and with a straggling fringe of long reddish hairs projecting outwards; sterna with dense whitish hair, rest of under-surface more sparsely clothed, the hairs darker, stiffer, and many arising from minute granules. HTead with fairly dense and not very large, but sharply defined punctures, coarser on basal half of clypeus than else- where. Clypeus gently rounded in front, margins moderately upturned. Labrum conspicuously produced and upturned in front. Antennae nine-, club three-jointed. Penultimate joint of maxillary palpi shorter than the adjacent ones. Prothorax strongly transverse, sides strongly rounded, front angles produced and acute, hind ones completely rounded off ; punctures small and not very dense. JHlytra slightly dilated to beyond the middle; punctures not very dense or large but sharply defined, geminate rows and discal costae feeble ; suture not produced at apex. Pygidiuwm strongly convex, punctures 192 dense in places, not very large but more or less asperate. Front tibiae very strongly and acutely bidentate; basal joint of hind tarsi slightly shorter than second. Length 16-19 mm. Hab.—Western Australia; Swan River and Geraldton (J. S. Clark). Type, I. 10790. On the Swan River specimen, the’ larger of the two under examination, there are tufts on the front tarsal joints, probably indicating that it is a male; the shape of the labrum of the Geraldton specimen is not exactly the same as on the other, but it has the appearance as of being slightly malformed. At first glance the species appears to be quite an ordinary Haplonycha, like testaceipennis, yungi, gracilis, etc. ; but with the produced labrum considered by Blackburn as sufficient to found the genus Glossocheiifer; its bidentate front tibiae readily distinguish it from addendus and /abialis; in appear- ance it is fairly close to the former. Disregarding the labrum and associating it with Haplonycha, it would be referred to Group 6 or 7, probably the former. GLOSSOCHEILIFER ADDENDUS, Blackb. Recorded by Blackburn. as probably from Western Australia. Mr. J. S. Clark has taken specimens at Geraldton, and both of us from near the Swan River. STETHASPIS SQUAMOSUS, Hh. sp. Pl. xxvi.; figs: fo9sand Gi) Coppery-green or coppery-purple, elytra, antennae, palpi, and legs more or less reddish. Irregularly clothed with white scales ; tip of pygidium and parts of under-surface and of legs with long white hairs. Head rather wide, rather lightly convex, with not very numerous but sharply-defined punctures of moderate size. Clypeus with hind suture strongly triangularly produced backwards, middle strongly convex, margins moderately elevated, front truncate; punctures denser and larger than on rest of head. Antennae nine-, club four-jointed and rather small, second joint almost as long as three following combined, fifth acutely produced on one side. Prothorax apparently twice as wide as long, sides finely margined, subparallel on basal half, thence oblique to apex, base with a conspicuous median lobe, the hind angles almost rectangular, apex gently arcuate, the front angles subarcuate, with an obtuse i1mpunc- tate median line on basal. half, elsewhere with punctures slightly smaller and usually sparser than between eyes. Elytra gently dilated to beyond the middle, apex widely trun- cate; each with fourteen deep striae, containing rather small 193 punctures; interstices regular, strongly convex and impunc- tate; a fine marginal membrane not extending to base. Pygdium and propygidium with small, dense, sublaminate punctures. J/esosternum with a strong process produced to front of front coxae, flat on lower-surface, arcuate above, and truncate at apex. Legs rather short, front tibiae strongly bidentate. Length, 14-16 mm. Hab.—Queensland: Cairns district (F. P. Dodd, H. H. D. Griffith, and A. M. Lea). Type, I. 4840. One specimen bears a note by the late Rev. T. Blackburn, “Not Xylonychus, probably female of gen. nov. very near Colymbomorpha,’’ but as there appear to be only females of the species before me, I think it desirable to refer them to Stethaspis (= Xylonychus), from all the species of which they may be distinguished by the dense scales at the sides of the under-surface ; the intercoxal process of the mesosternum is more produced than in eucalypti, being almost as in Phyllo- cocerus purpurascens. The elytra have a slight metallic gloss, but their margins are conspicuously metallic. The scales are wide, and conspicuously dense, white, and overlapping at the sides of the under-surface, and on the middle of the pro- pygidium, they are almost as dense on the sides of the pro- notum, but individually narrower; on the rest of the upper- surface they are sparser and subsetose in character; on the elytra they are confined to the striae, on the pygidium and the rest of the propygidium they are fairly dense; there are usually three long hairs on each side of the prothorax. On the type there are seven punctures on the scutellum, but on the other specimens they are more numerous. In a recent letter Mr. G. J. Arrow remarked, “It seems to me quite unnecessary to make a new genus for S. sguamosus ; we have four specimens of it, from Kuranda; they include both sexes, but the antennae of the male scarcely differ from those of the female.’’ CoLYMBOMORPHA SPLENDIDA, 0. sp. $. Brilliant purplish-green with a coppery gloss; front of head, sides of prothorax, propygidium, pygidium, under- surface, and legs (hind tibiae and parts of tarsi excepted) flavous, with a coppery-green gloss. Upper-surface glabrous, under-surface almost so. _ Head with sparse and small, but sharply-defined pune- tures. Clypeus about twice as wide as long, front truncated, disc rather strongly convex; punctures at apex and sides denser and stronger than between eyes: Labrum on the same plane as clypeus, narrow, apex gently incurved. Antennae nine-, flabellum six-jointed, the rami each about as long as H 194 the clypeus is wide. Vrothorax not twice as wide as long, base much wider than apex, front angles produced and almost equilaterally triangular; hind ones strongly produced, sharply angular and slightly embracing shoulders, base strongly bisinuate; punctures sparse and minute, becoming larger, although still sparse, on sides. Scwtellum highly polished and impunctate. Hlytra each ebliquely truncated at apex, out- lines continuous with those of prothorax; with rather strong, regular striae, containing shallow punctures, but these becoming more distinct towards base; interstices 1mpunctate. Metasternwm and hind coxae with rather large sparse punc- tures; intercoxal process of mesosternum obtuse and vertical in front. Front tibiae tridentate, apical tooth acute and moderately long, second small but acute, third very feeble. Length (3, @), 9-11 mm. Q. Differs in being slightly wider, abdomen more convex, legs shorter, antennal rami much shorter, and the fourth joint without one, so that the flabellum consists of but five joints, and the hind tibiae not entirely dark. Hab.—New South Wales: ss (W. Heron and Ss J. Carter from R. J. Tillyard). Type, I. 4851. Differs from lineata in colour, in the polished and glabrous surface (the only clothing consists of a few stiff bristles on parts of the under-surface and legs) in the clypeus, etc.; the intercoxal process of the mesosternum is strong and well produced, but its front face.is thick and rounded off; in lineata it is produced to an almost knife-like edge between the front coxae. In Phyllococerus purpurascens, which Black- burn considered (8) should be referred to Colymbomorpha, the intercoxal process is not produced with a knife-like edge between the front coxae, but as a truncated process above them. In C. lineata the front of the clypeus is evenly rounded and conspicuously upturned, so that, when viewed from behind, the labrum is almost concealed, but on the present species it appears to be attached to the clypeus as in the Systellopides. By the characters noted by Blackburn, in dividing the Melolonthides into subtribes, this species would be referred to the Systellopides, in this agreeing with Phyllotocus, although both genera differ in many particulars from the members of that anomalous group. SERICESTHIS suTURALIS, Macl., formerly Scrraza. Scitala prunosella, Brenske. Blackburn (who also associated it with prunosella) has commented upon the bad condition of the type of swtwralis (it (8) Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1911, p. 175. (9) Z.c., 1905, p. 276. 195 has lost five of its tarsi, both antennae, and all the palpi) ; but there is a specimen of the species in the South Australian Museum from Mackay, it has nine-jointed antennae, but the fifth and sixth joints are so thin and closely applied to the three-jointed club that it is difficult to see them clearly, the rami of the club are about the combined length of the two apical joints of the palpi, the basal joint of the hind tarsi is not much, but distinctly, longer than the second. PHYLLOTOCUS RUFICOLLIS, Macl. P. sericeus, Macl. There are three specimens in the Austrahan Museum standing as types of sericews, and all are of the species tabled by Blackburn 9 as ruficollis, although he was dubious as to his identification of that species; the type of ruficollis was badly stained, but was partially cleaned for description. It is certainly not the species Blackburn identified and tabled as australis,2) and which he thought might be sericeus. PHYLLOTOCUS VARIICOLLIS, Mael. Correctly identified and tabled by Blackburn.(2) PHYLLOTOCUS BIMACULATUS, Er. On the typical form of this species each elytron has a pale, completely-enclosed spot of variable size, on the basal half; on Tasmanian specimens the spots are usually smaller than on mainland ones. var. NIGRIPENNIS, hh. var. Mr. H. J. Carter and I recently obtained at Strahan (Tasmania) numerous specimens that differ from the typicai form in having the elytra entirely black; the paler parts are also of a brighter red. Val. BASALIS, ne var Mr. Aug. Simson obtained at Wentworth Falls (New South Wales), in company with typical specimens, numerous others in which two-fifths of the base of the elytra are pale, the dark part is usually, but not always, advanced along the suture to the base. (10) Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1898, p. 24. - (il) Ee¢., pen 23% . (12) Z.c., pp. 23 and 24. H2 196 ‘Var. INSULARIS, . var. Mr. H. Hacker obtained on Bribie Island (Queensland) three specimens that are more highly polished than usual, they have only the apical two-fifths of the elytra infuscated (and not very déeply so) and a slight infuscation about the pies they are also smaller (5'5-6 mm.) than the typical orm PHYLLOTOCUS MACLEAYI, Fisch. This species occurs in abundance on eucalyptus and other blossoms in New South Wales, Victoria, and Tasmania. var. ASSIMILIS, Macl. This was considered by Blackburn as a variety only of macleayi, and such is my own opinion. var. PALLIDUS, nN. var. Six specimens taken between Karoonda and Peebinga (by Mr. G. E. H. Wright), one from Murray Bridge (by Mr. H. H. D. Griffith), and one from Lyndoch (by Mr. J. G. O. Tepper), differ from the typical form in being entirely pale. PHYLLOTOcUS LURIDUS, Macl. (formerly CHEIRAGRA). As the claws to the four hind legs of this species are long, thin, and simple the species by Blackburn’s generic table of the Sociales must be referred to Phyllotocus. Although Macleay said “‘The male and female differ very little,” both specimens (presumably the types) standing under the name in the Macleay Museum are males, each having three long antennal rami. The species occurs in Queensland (Mapleton and Blackall Range) as well as in New South Wales, and all those before me are more or less brightly iridescent, the elytra are flavous with the suture, and a variable amount on ~ each side infuscated or black, each of the hind femora has a wide tooth or subtriangular flange at the middle. PHYLLOTOCUS OCCIDENTALIS, Blackb. This species occurs in South Australia (Karoonda to Peebinga) as well as in Western Australia; in commenting upon the types Blackburn remarked that the apices of the elytra were “almost devoid of fuscous shading” ; some of the specimens in the museum are entirely devoid of it; such specimens may be readily distinguished from the variety pallidus, of macleayi, by the completely rounded off hind angles of the prothorax, and by the bidentate, instead of tridentate, front.tibiae. a ITE var. APICIFUSCUS, Nn. var. Two specimens from Karoonda to Peebinga (G. HE. H. Wright), and one from Mindarie (South Australia), have the apical fourth of the elytra deeply infuscated (almost black), they may be readily distinguished from the typical form of macleayt by the basal angles of prothorax and by the front tibiae. PHYLLOTOCUS, Sp. An entirely pale specimen (from Edithburgh in the Blackburn collection) combines characters of two species, as the hind angles of the prothorax are rectangular as in macleayi, and the front tibiae bidentate as in occidentalis. PHYLLOTOCUS MARGINATUS, Macl. Specimens of this species. taken on Stradbroke Island (Queensland) by Mr. Hacker are smaller (5 mm.), than usual, with part of the apex of the elytra black, and the pale marking on the sides of the prothorax of the female smaller than usual. | PHYLLOTOCUS AUSTRALIS, Bol. Specimens of this species taken on Stradbroke Island by Mr. H. Hacker, and at Cairns by Mr. F. P. Dodd, are smaller (575 mm.) than usual, and with the pronotum, scutellum, and elytra (except for a slight infuscation of the latero-apical margins of the latter) entirely pale. PHYLLOTOCUS UsTULATUS, Blanch. The prothorax of this common Western Australian species varies from entirely black (as on the type) to entirely reddish ; several specimens before me have the prothorax reddish, with three infuscated spots: a moderately long median one and a small one towards each side. PHYLLOTOCUS NAVICULARIS, Blanch. In his table of the species of this genus Blackburn placed navicularis in the first section “A. Hlytra glabrous (or nearly so) except along their lateral margin.” But on many specimens before me the hairs are quite as numerous about the suture and base as on specimens of species he referred to “AA. Hlytra clothed with hairs (at any rate along the suture and base).” | The typical form has the head, prothorax, and a large spot on each elytron black, the spots frequently have a greenish or bluish iridescence, on the sides they occupy about half the length ; along the suture they are conjoined for about half their own length, being divided in front by a i] 198 sutural extension of the reddish basal portion. The species is common in parts of Queensland and of northern New South Wales; in addition to the varieties noted below there are others in the Museum. var. RUFIBASIS, n. var. Four specimens from Cape York (H. Elgner), differ from the typical form in having only about one-fourth of the elytra reddish, the black being widely subtriangularly advanced in front, so that it almost extends to the scutellum. Var. ERYTHRODERES, Nn. Var. Three specimens from the Coen River (W. D. Dodd), differ in having the prothorax entirely reddish; on two of them the apical half of the elytra is dark, but the suture is pale for portion of the distance; on the third specimen the spots are as on the typical form. “ var. APICALIS, Macl. Three specimens from the Coen and Stewart Rivers (W. D. Dodd), and Cairns (E. Allen), differ in having the prothorax and four basal segments of abdomen reddish, but elytra with the apical markings typical; this form appears to be the one described from Port Denison by Macleay as apicalis. Three other specimens from Cape York (H. Elgner) agree with these, except that the black portion is advanced to cover slightly more than half of the elytra. PHYLLOTOCUS LATEROFUSCUS, 0. sp. Flavous; an infuscate vitta occupying about one-third the length of each elytron near the side, abdomen slightly darker than metasternum. Glabrous except for a few stiff setae on sides of prothorax and of elytra, and on the legs. Head flattened, and with scarcely visible punctures. Clypeus not distinctly separated from labrum in middle, their combined length about two-thirds of the basal width. Antennae nine-, club three-jointed, the lamellae rather short. Prothorax about once and one-half as wide as long, sides rather strongly rounded, front angles produced and acute, hind ones rounded off; punctures fairly dense, but small and inconspicuous. L/ytra with rows of fairly large punctures in conspicuous striae, interstices gently convex, “and of almost even widths, except that they become narrower towards the sides. Hind corae at sides much longer than metasternum ; front tibiae bidentate; front claws uneven, the larger one moderately thick, but not appendiculate. Length, 55 mm. 199 Hab.—Queensland: Endeavour River (Dr. A. R. Pulleine, and National Museum from C. French). Type, ie LO0775. In Blackburn’s table of the genus this species would be placed beside occrdentalis, from which it differs in the elytra being more strongly striated, with larger punctures,in the striae, and,by the dark lateral markings; it is not very close to any other species before me. The elytral vittae are rather narrow, and are quite distinct, but their outlines are not sharply defined. The clypeus in front is slightly upturned on each side, but not in the middle, the uplifted parts being almost concealed by the rather strongly elevated labrum, which appears to be pressed close to them. The upper-surface is only slightly polished, but it could hardly be called opaque. The abdomen is small and curved to the tip, so the specimens are probably males, despite the non-appendiculate front tarsi. PHYLLOTOCUS BASICOLLIS, N. sp. Q. Head and metasternum reddish-brown, prothorax and scutellum reddish-flavous, elytra black and brightly iridescent, but margins (except at base) pale, abdomen and club of antennae black, legs flavous, the hind tibiae infuscated at apex. Front and sides of prothorax, sides and apex of elytra and pygidium with flavous or reddish setae. Head with small and crowded but distinct punctures. Clypeus not quite the length of an eye, and more than thrice as wide as long; labrum slightly more than half the length of clypeus, its margins lightly upcurved and the front one gently incurved to middle. Antennae nine-, club three- jointed. Prothorax not much wider than the greatest length, basal half parallel-sided, front and hind angles produced and acute, the latter embracing shoulders; without punctures except for those containing the margining setae. Hlytra with well-defined striae containing shallow punctures; interstices gently convex, moderately wide near suture, narrower towards the sides. Abdomen strongly convex, each of four segments with a conspicuous row of setiferous punctures. Hind cozae at sides almost twice the length of metasternum, and with sharply-defined but not very dense punctures; front tibiae tridentate ; front claws equal and simple. Length, 5-55 mm. Hab.—Queensland: Brisbane, November, 1912, and November, 1916 (H. Hacker). Type, in Queensland Museum ; cotype, I. 10777, in South Australian Museum. The hind angles of the prothorax embracing the shoulders are without parallel in the genus; the claws are all thin, simple, and long, but not of the great length that is usual in Phyllotocus, and in other respects it is not close to any 200 other before me. The comparatively large, evenly-convex abdomen, with simple front claws, are indicative that the specimens taken by Mr. Hacker are females; one of them has beautiful golden depressed pubescence margining the base of the prothorax, of the elytra and scutellum, and forming a patch on each side of the pygidium; it is absent from the other, probably due to abrasion. The elytral, striae are almost absent posteriorly and about the shoulders. PHYLLOTOCUS DECIPIENS, N. sp. 3. Black; elytra with two conspicuous flavous vitae. Sides of prothorax and of elytra fringed with dark setae. Head gently convex and with small punctures between eyes. Clypeus about thrice as wide as the median length; punctures denser and coarser than between eyes, sides moder- ately elevated, front not elevated in middle; labrum short, distinctly separated from clypeus, moderately upturned in front. Antennae eight-, club three-jointed. Prothoraz scarcely one-fourth wider than long, sides gently rounded, front angles produced and acute, the hind ones almost rect- angular; punctures as between eyes. Hlytra with well- defined but not even striae, mostly containing distinct but not very large punctures; interstices gently convex, narrower towards sides than towards suture, with small but fairly dis- tinct punctures. Hind cozae at sides scarcely one-fourth longer than metasternum; front tibiae tridentate; front claws unequal. Length (d, 9), 5-65 mm. Q. Differs in having the club of the antennae somewhat smaller, abdomen larger, legs shorter, and front claws even. Hab.—Victoria : Melbourne, eating grass, in October, 1911 (C. French, sen.), Oakleigh (C. French, jun.) ; South Australia: (F. Secker) ; Tasmania mons collection). Type, I. 10839. In general appearance strikingly like meyricki, from ~ Western Australia, with which I had it confused, but the front part of the head is very different; on that species the clypeus and labrum are soldered together without a con- spicuous suture, the front strongly upcurved, and a wide and feebly-punctate elevation occupying most of the base; on the present species the suture between the clypeus and labrum is well defined, the labrum is shorter, wider, and less elevated in front, and the subtubercular elevation of the clypeus is lower (although quite as wide) and with more. conspicuous punctures. In Blackburn’s table of the genus it would also be distinguished from meyricki by the tridentate, instead of bidentate, front tibiae; in that table it would be associated with macleayi, which is a larger and very differently-coloured See ee 201 species with head and legs different. The dark part of the elytral suture is wide and almost parallel-sided, but from each side the dark part is absent, or almost so, at the shoulder, and gradually dilates till near the apex it curves round to join in with the sutural part; the claws and parts of the tibiae, sometimes also other parts of the legs, are more or less reddish. Parts of the upper-surface and of the sterna have a pruinose bloom. From above the basal angles of the prothorax appear to be quite right angles, but from the sides they are seen to be slightly obtuse; most of the specimens have a vague median line. The front claws of the male are of even length, but the larger one increases much in thickness to the base, although it is not appendiculate. PHYLLOTOCUS CRIBRICEPS, nN. sp. 3. Black, elytra usually with some parts paler, and with a bright bluish iridescence; front legs mostly flavous, parts of the other legs obscurely diluted with red. Prothorax and elytra fringed with long and mostly pale setae, a few on head and many on under-surface and legs. Head with dense, sharply defined, and rather small punctures. Clypeus obliquely flattened, sides slightly elevated ; punctures as between eyes; hind suture distinct only at sides, the front one throughout; labrum short, sharply defined, rounded and gently elevated in front. Antennae eight-, club three-jointed. Prothorax about once and one- half as wide as long, sides evenly rounded, apex evenly incurved with the front angles acute but scarcely separately produced, hind ones rounded off; punctures sharply defined, about as large as on head but not so dense. Hlytra with strong striae containing rather large punctures, except posteriorly; interstices rather strongly convex, narrower towards sides than suture. Hind covae at sides scarcely longer than metasternum, and both with distinct punctures; all femora stout, the hind ones especially so; hind tibiae shorter and stouter than usual, the front ones tridentate; front claws unequal, the larger one scarcely longer than the other, but more strongly curved, and with a large basal appendix. Length, 45-5 mm. Hab.—Queensland: Mapleton, in October. Type, in Queensland Museum; cotype, I. 10837, in South Australian Museum. : As the antennal lamellae are long, the abdomen curved to its tip, and the front claws unequal, on each of the eight specimens from Mapleton, they are evidently all males. In general appearance the species is close to luridus, but is smaller, narrower, hind femora unarmed, and a smaller 202 amount of elytra pale. The basal half of the elytra (except the suture and margins) is more or less obscurely flavous or reddish, but the markings, although usually distinct to the naked eye, are not sharply defined; one specimen has the elytra, except for their brilliant iridescence, entirely black. The front of the head seems slightly concave, owing to the obliquely flattened clypeus, with its edges and the front of the labrum elevated: the cephalic punctures, although small, are decidedly larger than usual in the genus. Each of the antennal lamellae is almost as long as the five basal joints combined, the fifth joint is very short, and can scarcely be seen except under a compound power. PHYLLOTOCUS ANTENNALIS, n. sp. 3d. Flavo-testaceous, some parts more or less deeply infuscated. Prothorax and elytra fringed with white or brownish hairs; similar hairs on under-surface and legs. Head with dense and sharply-defined, but not large punctures. Clypeus about four times as wide as long, sutures well defined, punctures as between eyes; labrum about half the length of clypeus, apex gently curved and moderately uplifted. Antennae nine-, club five-jointed, each lamella as long as the four basal joints combined. Prothoraxr about once and two-thirds as wide as long, sides moderately rounded, front rather strongly incurved to middle, front angles acute, the hind ones rounded off; punctures not very dense, and small but sharply defined. Hlytra comparatively short; striae strong and containing well-defined punctures, interstices gently convex and with minute punctures. Sides of hind corae slightly longer than metasternum; hind femora stout and edentate; front tibiae acutely tridentate; front claws unequal, the larger one with a large isosceles-triangle-like basal appendix. Length, 5-5°25 mm. H1ab.—New South*® Wales: Dorrigo (W. Heron). Type, T. 4279. The three specimens taken by Mr. Heron are males, and as the middle claws are without long quill-like appendages, the species cannot be referred to Phyllotocidium, to which at first it appears to belong. The front of the head is much as in a female cotype of Phyllotocidium macleayi and so much more abrupt than in Phiyllotocus,; the antennal club composed of five joints is also greatly aberrant, but Blackburn has frequently commented on the fact that the number of joints composing the antennae or the club in Australian Melolon- thides, cannot be relied upon generically; the third joint of the antennae is of considerable length, but the fourth is so small and closely applied to the club that it cannot be 203 distinguished from most directions. Seen from behind the greater portion of the head appears gently concave, owing to the flattening of the middle parts and the slight elevation of the sides of clypeus and front of labrum. The elytral striae and punctures are confused about the tips, but regular elsewhere. The three are (except for slight variations) similarly coloured, so presumably are not immature; the head is more deeply infuscated than other parts, some of its margins being blackish, the antennal club is also blackish; the scutellum, suture, and sides of elytra, parts of sterna (some- times the whole under-surface), and parts of legs are more or less deeply infuscated, and there are two large but vague discal blotches on the prothorax. CHEIRRHAMPHICA. Blackburn proposed this genus for species possessing the enormous front claws of the males of Chewragra, but with the others long and simple; in his table it was distinguished by “basal four joints of front tarsi together shorter than apical process of tibia,’’ but this holds good only for the male; in the female the joints of the front tarsi are longer and much thinner, the fourth conspicuously passes the tibiae, and the fifth is smaller with uniform claws. CHEIRRHAMPHICA PUBESCENS, Blackb. The common form of the male was the one described by Blackburn, but the female is usually larger, and varies from a form having the upper-surface entirely dark to one in which it is entirely pale. The front tibial teeth are two in number, acute and fairly long, characters sufficient to distinguish the species from all the known Queensland members of the genus. It may be taken in abundance, from flowering wattles, from Geraldton to Beverley in Western Australia. CHEIRRHAMPHICA INSULARIS, N. sp. Black; front femora and tibiae, and antennae, except club, flavous. Upper-surface with numerous more or less upright pale hairs or setae, parts of under-surface and of legs with somewhat longer ones. Head smooth and with minute punctures about base, and crowded, with some larger ones between eyes. Clypeus semi- circular, with crowded punctures, its sides gently upturned ; labrum appearing as an upturned front margin to the clypeus. Antennae eight-, club three-jointed, lamellae scarcely longer than apical joint of palpi. Prothorar scarcely one-fourth wider than its greatest length, sides evenly rounded, front angles produced and acute, the hind ones gently rounded off ; punctures fairly dense and sharply defined. Scutellum with 204 a few basal punctures. /H#lytra rather narrow, basal half about the width of prothorax, thence strongly narrowed to apex, where each is almost pointed ; with rows of rather large, asperate punctures, in shallow striae; odd interstices very feebly, in places not at all, elevated above the even ones. Abdomen small, curved to tip. Sides of hind cozae much longer than metasternum; hind femora and tibiae stout; front tibiae unidentate; front claws unequal, the others very long and thin. Length, 5-5°5 mm. Hab.—Queensland: Stradbroke Island (H. Hacker and Dr. A.\J. Turner). - Type, I. 10776: The specimens from the island are evidently of one sex, and are probably males, as the front tarsi. are moderately thick (thinner than in males of pubescens, coxalis, and tuber- culata) and passing the tips of the tibiae, but decidedly thicker than in the females of pubescens and tuberculata, and the front claws are decidedly uneven, one being quite small, and the other much larger, although much smaller than in known males of the genus, its abdomen also curves to the point as in undoubted males. If they are males the specimens before me are certainly distinct from interstitialis, described as from Northern Queensland; I examined the type of that species prior to its being sent to the British Museum, and noted that it was a peculiar-looking insect with somewhat similar colour and clothing to the present one, but opaque, the pro- thoracic punctures less conspicuous, and the head longer, with much smaller punctures; the specimens differ from the description also in having the elytra rugose, and without four obsolete costae, so that even if females they are unlikely to belong to that sex of interstitialis. The upper-surface is shin- ing; but that is not always a feminine character in the allied genera. On two specimens the middle tibiae and parts of the hind legs are partly pale, but obscurely so. The tooth of each front tibia, including the curve at its commencing point, is fully half the length of the tibia itself; the claws of the middle tarsi are slightly uneven and one is slightly less curved than the other. The larger punctures between the eyes are about as large as the ones on the prothorax. On some of the specimens the clothing on the upper-surface is almost upright, on others it slopes at about 45°, the difference being probably due to treatment after capture. CHEIRRHAMPHICA COXALIS, nN. sp. ¢. Flavous, some parts deeply infuscated or black. Upper-surface more or less opaque and with a pruinose gloss, more pronounced on the elytra than elsewhere. Clothing much as on preceding species, except that on the disk of the elytra it is somewhat shorter. ee eee a os een. Meee ae 205 Head with very small punctures at base, dense and of moderate size between eyes. Clypeus semicircular, front margin gently upturned throughout, punctures as between eyes; labrum closely applied to clypeus. Prothorav moder- ately transverse, sides evenly rounded, front angles produced and acute, the hind ones moderately rounded off; punctures fairly numerous. Hlytra with outlines and punctures much as on preceding species, except that the punctures are some- what smaller. Abdomen small, curved to its tip. Hind coxae very large, their sides fully twice the length of the metasternum; hind femora and tibiae stout; front tibiae unidentate ; front tarsi stout, fourth joint not passing tibiae, claw joint stout, claws very unequal, other claws very long and thin. Length, 5-5°25 mm. Hab.—Queensland: Cairns (E. Allen). ‘Type, T. 4290, Distinguished from the preceding species by the less rugose elytra and absence of larger inter-ocular punctures, in addition to the very different colour and claws; the five speci- mens taken by Mr. Allen are all males, they differ from the description of interstitialis in colour and by the sculpture of the prothorax and elytra. The hind coxae seem to project almost as the drums of many species of cicadas; the longer claw of the front tarsus is almost as long as those of the others, but is irregularly widened towards its base, the smaller claw is scarcely half its length, and is much thinner, the middle claws although both long and thin are unequal, one being” distinctly shorter, thinner, and less curved than the other. The elytra are black, or almost so, except for a transverse space on each side of the base, each space sometimes continued for a short distance near the suture, the hind tibiae are deeply and the hind tarsi and the head slightly infuscated; the abdomen is usually darker than the metasternum; the antennae are entirely pale. On one specimen the scuteilum is rather dark, and there are two large smoky blotches on the prothorax. Four of the specimens have the prothorax and elytra entirely opaque, but the fifth is shining, evidently owing to abrasion, as many of its hairs are missing, its punctures in . consequence are much more distinct, especially on the prothorax. . CHEIRRHAMPHICA TUBERCULATA, Nl. sp. 3. Flavous, parts of legs tinged with red, sides of elytra partly infuscated. Clothed with numerous conspicuous pale upright setae, longer on sides of prothorax and elytra than on their disks, legs and parts of under-surface with moderately long hairs. Head with fairly dense and small punctures, but inter- spersed with some fairly large ones between the eyes. 206 Clypeus semicircular, sides moderately uplifted; punctures, except that there are no large ones, as between the eyes; labrum, except at sides, not distinctly separated from clypeus, and apparently forming its uplifted front edge. Antennae eight-, club three-jointed. Prothorax moderately transverse, sides evenly rounded, front angles produced and acute, the hind ones rounded off; punctures fairly numerous. lytra scarcely wider than head, parallel-sided to beyond the middle and then strongly narrowed to apex, with fairly dis- tinct punctures in shallow striae. Abdomen small, curved to its tip. Hind covae at sides much longer than metasternum ; hind femora and tibiae stout; front tibiae short, stout, and unidentate, front tarsi thick, the fourth joint not passing the tibia, claw joint stout with very uneven claws; middle and hind claws long and thin. Length (d, 9), 5-5°25 mm. Q. Differs in having the prothorax more narrowed in front, and with more distinct punctures, elytra less parallel- sided, with more distinct striae and punctures, and a con- spicuous elongated tubercle on the middle of each side, abdomen larger and evenly convex along middle, legs some- what shorter, front tarsi much thinner, fourth joint passing _ the tibia, and the claw joint thin with small equal claws. Hab.—Queensland: Endeavour River (C. French). Type, in National Museum; cotype, I. 10838, in South Aus- tralian Museum. A narrow pale species with peculiar tubercles on the elytra of the female; each tubercle is elongated, about one- fifth the length of the elytron, and whilst scarcely elevated above the general convexity of the surface, is rendered very distinct by the cutting away, as 1t were, of the adjacent parts. On the female the prothorax is shining and its punctures are rather large and very distinct, with numerous minute ones interspersed; on the male the surface is opaque, and the larger punctures are partly obscured, the minute ones dis- appearing. The infuscation of the sides of the elytra is rather narrow and varies in intensity, being more pronounced on the males than on the females. On the front tarsi of the male the three median joints are all much wider than long, the larger claw is quite as large as its supporting joint, and is considerably dilated to the base, the smaller claw is less than half its length°and very thin; the claws on the middle legs are both long and thin, but one is distinctly longer and thicker than the other, on the hind legs the claws are almost even. CHEIRAGRA. This genus was proposed by Macleay to receive a number of small species allied to Phyllotocus, but with a membranous 207 appendage to each claw, the front claws of uneven size, and the larger one enormously developed. To it he referred Phyllotocus pusillus, Blanch., and six species which he sup- posed to be new—ruficollis, pallida, aphodioides, atra, pygmaea, and lurida, but the last-named species it is neces- sary to transfer to Phyllotocus. Subsequently he described another species, vittatus, referring it, however, to Phyllotocus. Blackburn also referred a new species, macleayi, to the genus, - but subsequently made it the type of a new one, Phylloto- _ crdium. With long series of most species before me it seems pro- bable that all the species of the genus are very variable in colour, and that perfect males have the prothorax and elytra sericeous, but that those parts are shining in the females. The females of several species may be readily distinguished inter sé by the latero-posterior margins of the elytra being notched or flanged. By the courtesy of Mr. Shewan I have been able to examine all the specimens of the genus in the Macleay Museum. CHEIRAGRA PUSILLA, Blanch. (not Macl.). C. pygmaea, Macl., oc. C. aphodioides, Macl., Q. From examination of the named specimens in the Macleay Museum I am satisfied that Macleay wrongly identi- fied pusilla (which presumably he regarded as the type of the genus), and that the species he named pygmaea is the real pusilla. The type was certainly a male, as its prothorax was described as “‘nigro, opaco, haud punctato’’ (punctures are present but could be easily overlooked). Two specimens were labelled with a query as pusilla, these are 4 mm. in length, and have the prothorax entirely pale, they belong to forms 2 and 3 of ruficollis; three others were labelled without a query as pusilla, and are still larger, two are males and have the prothorax darker than the smaller ones, they belong to forms 2 and 4 of ruficollus; the other is a badly-damaged female close to form 7 of ruficollis. Four specimens standing under the name of aphodioides in the Macleay Museum are all females of the real puszlla, not one of them has the elytra black, or even much darker than any of the others, the colour being of the same shade as the base of the prothorax; they all have conspicuous punc- tures on the prothorax, and the front claws not enormously . developed. The species is the smallest of the genus; in the common form of the male the head and prothorax are black and the elytra pale, but with the sides widely infuscated or black 208 (the infuscation occasionally extends over most of the sur- face) ; in the common form of the female (including the types of aphodioides) the head and prothorax are infuscated, but the base of the latter is pale, the elytra are also entirely pale. The sides of the elytra of the female are not notched or flanged, and by this feature alone it may be readily dis- tinguished from small females of rwficollis and sericeipennis. * CHEIRAGRA RUFICOLLIS, Macl. C’. pusilla, Macl., in error. C. pallida, Macl., Q. Pl xy. fee The original description of this species (which appears to be confined to New South Wales and Victoria) is unsatisfac- tory, and of the specimens standing as rw/ficollis in the Macleay Museum, not one agrees exactly with it; of the five specimens so standing two are males and three are females. One of each sex has the elytra entirely dark (whereas the description implies that the whole upper-surface is testaceous) and the head and prothorax of a rather bright reddish-flavous ; to the male I have attached a label that it is probably the : type; the second male has the head and prothorax of an obscure reddish-brown, the elytra testaceous with the suture darker (much the colour of the prothorax), and the sides widely margined with black; of the other females one has the prothorax as dark as in the second male, but with all its margins and a narrow line down the middle paler, it has also an obscure pale vitta extending from the base to about the middle of each elytron; the third female has a wider and longer vitta passing the middle of each elytron, and agreeing with ‘“‘The female . . . sometimes a light patch on the disc of each elytron.’’ These specimens vary from 14 to 2 lines in the males, and from 2} to 24 in the females, but were described as 2 lines. The species is the most variable of the genus, but the females may be at once distinguished by the sides of the elytra, as near the apex of each there is a conspicuous notch (pl. xxv., fig, 23); the female, as in others of the genus, also differs from the male in having the prothorax shining and with conspicuous punctures. The specimens described by Macleay as pusilla belong to this species, whilst the types of pallida (Macleay) also belong to it. The following colour forms may be noted :— | Males. Form 1. Head and prothorax of a clear reddish-flavous, entire elytra and parts of under-surface and of legs blackish, 209 or at least blackish-brown. The typical and fairly common form. Form 2. As 1, except that the elytra are coloured as the prothorax, but with the sides more or less widely infus- cated or black (a specimen of this species is standing, with others, as pusilla in the Macleay Museum, and another is the type male of pallida). This is the most common form of the male; on some specimens the head is darker than the pro- thorax; the latter may have some slight infuscations, or be even darker than the elytra, and the elytral suture is also sometimes slightly infuscated (thus approaching Form 3). Form 3. As 1, but with a pale oblique fascia on each elytron. A fairly common form, but the vittae vary in ex- tent, and the head and prothorax are sometimes as dark as im Horm 4, ° | Form 4. Coloured as described for the second male of the original specimens, one of which was identified by Macleay as pusilla. A rare form. Form 5. As 1, but with two infuscated blotches on the prothorax; the head is also sometimes infuscated. A rather rare form. Females. Form 6. As 1, except that the abdomen is paler than the metasternum. A rather rare form, one of which is a cotype of the species. Form 7. As 6, except that the elytra are bivittate. A cotype female belongs to this form, which is variable and not ~ very common; the other cotype female might also be regarded . as belonging to it; one of the females identified by Macleay as pusilla could also be referred to it, although its head and prothorax are dark, but not black. Form 8. Entirely pale, except that the tips of some of the tarsal joints and the club of the antennae are more or less infuscated. This is the most common form of the female, and includes the type female of pallida. A rather dark speci- men of it was In error labelled as aphodioides in the Black- burn collection. There is also a female from the Blackburn collection that has the elytra pale, but with the margins infuscated: nar- rowly at the base, rather widely at the apex; much as on Form 2; but as there is but one specimen before me it has not been given a number. CHEIRAGRA ATRA, Macl. In describing this species Macleay said he had only seen a male of it; but two specimens were pinned through the name label in the Macleay Museum; the type male, and a 210 female, the latter in error, as it is an unusually dark speci- men of pusilla. 'Two other males before me agree with the type; one is from Sydney, the other, from the Blackburn collection, is without locality, but labelled ‘‘atra.”’ They all have the prothorax with a somewhat sericeous appearance, but also with sharply-defined punctures; the elytra also have sharply-defined punctures, and by the punctures alone the species may be distinguished from black males of other species. The female is at present unknown. _ Cuerracra virrata, Macl. (formerly PHyLLorocus). This species, as yet known only from the Cairns district, was referred by Macleay to Phyllotocus, but the generic table by Blackburn indicates that it belongs to Cheiragra,’ as although the front claws of the male are less enormously developed than is usual in the genus, the four hind ones are much shorter than is usual in Phyllotocus, and each has a conspicuous membranous appendage. The sharply-defined pale vitta on each elytron of the male usually passes the middle, and occasionally includes the preapical callus, but it is sometimes much shorter; one specimen has the elytra entirely black. The female differs from the male in being rather more robust, the whole of the upper-surface shining, and the front claws no larger than the others, but the elytral margins are of the same shape. Of the six females before me one has the upper-surface entirely dark, the second is - almost as dark but has the prothorax obscurely diluted with red near the base, and the bases of the elytral vittae ‘ obscurely indicated; the third has more of the base of the prothorax pale, and the elytral vittae larger and almost con- joined to form a triangle (the scutellum at the middle of its base being dark); the fourth and fifth each have the pro- thorax of a rather bright red, except for an apical and two small lateral infuscations; the elytra have the apical third (more at the sides) infuscated, the basal parts and the scutellum being of the same shade of red as the prothorax; the sixth specimen is in the National Museum and has the upper-surface entirely red. Lengths: ¢, 4-65 mm.; @, 55-7 mm. CHEIRAGRA VARIABILIS, N. sp. Pl. xxv., figs. 24 and 25. g. Colours variable. Prothorax, elytra, sterna, and abdomen opaque, owing to a conspicuous sericeous or pruinose bloom. Prothorax and elytra with a thin fringe of pale hairs or long setae, similar hairs on under-surface and legs. Head shining; with fairly dense and sharply-defined punctures. Clypeus with slightly coarser punctures than 211 between the eyes, hind suture moderately distinct, not distinctly separated from labrum, sides and apex slightly elevated. Antennae eight-, club three-jointed, lamellae small. Prothorax not much wider than the great- est length, sides evenly rounded, front angles produced and acute, hind ones somewhat rounded off; pune turers vaguely defined. Hlytra rather ; strongly separ- Cheiragra variabilis, Lea. ately rounded at apex, sides gently rounded ; striae and their contained punctures obscured by bloom; odd interstices slightly raised above and wider than the even ones. Abdomen small and curved to apex. Sides of hind corae about one-third shorter than meta- sternum; tibiae stout, the front ones each with two large acute teeth and a very small one; front tarsi with four basal joints rather wide, the claw joint strongly notched near apex, and with very unequal claws, the larger one very large, strongly curved, and with a large basal appendix, the smaller one shghtly larger than those on the other tarsi, and with its basal appendage simi- lar but without a quill. Length(<¢, 9), 3°75-4°5 mm. @. Differs in hav- ing the upper-surface and part of the meta- as cage sternum polished, pro- Cheiragra variabilis, Lea. thorax slightly shorter, its punctures sharply defined, elytra with striae and their con- tained punctures sharply defined, and the interstices with distinct punctures; abdomen larger and more evenly convex, 212 legs shorter, the front claws even and no larger than the others, the basal appendix and quill as on the others. - Hab.-—Queensland: Wide Bay (Macleay Museum), Brisbane (Queensland Museum from H. Hacker). Type, I. 10836. A very variable species, of which there are at least. two specimens of each colour form described below before me, and of which five forms have been taken in company by Mr. Hacker in October; they all have the basal joints of the antennae pale and the club dark. - Formi1, ¢. Black, head and scutellum somewhat paler, claws and front tibial teeth reddish. A specimen of this form has been made the type of the species. Form 2, ¢. Ofa dingy flavous or testaceous, head with base ceed, prothorax with infuscated blotches, elytra with suture narrowly and sides and apex more or less widely infuscated or black, most of under-surface and of legs black or blackish. The blotches on the prothorax of this form vary from two small and obscure spots to four large longitudinal ones, covering most of the surface ; occasionally the two median ones are conjoined so that there are but three blotches. Form 3, ¢. Head, prothorax, scutellum, and parts of legs more or less brightly flavous (but not shining), elytra and most of under-surface and of legs black. On this form the head is infuscated from the base to the clypeal suture, and there are some vague infuscations on the prothorax. Form 4, 9. Head, prothorax, scutellum, front legs, and parts of the others of a bright flavous, elsewhere black. On this form the elytra are usually of a deep polished black, but on one small specimen parts near the suture are obscurely paler. Form 5, @. Bright flavous, head and prothorax with vague infuscations, metasternum and parts of middle and of hind legs dark, abdomen partly or entirely pale. One Brisbane specimen has the vague infuscations of the head and prothorax as on this form, but with the elytra obscurely infuscated at the sides, approaching the following one; another in the Macleay Museum, from Wide Bay, has the upper-surface uniformly pale. Form 6, 9. Bright flavous, head more reddish, elytra with the wes and apex widely reeked, metasternum, most of abdomen, and parts of legs blackish. The only two speci- mens of this form I have seen are in the Macleay Museum, from Wide Bay, and one of them has the infuscation of ine elytra much more extended than on the other. It is very difficult to distinguish some males of this species from some males of ruficollis, but the females may be readily 213 distinguished by the tips of the elytra (pl. xxv., figs. 23 and 25), these not being notched on the present one. Black males may be distinguished from males of atra, by the inconspicuous punctures of the upper-surface. From the real pusilla, of Blanchard, it is distinguished by its larger size; the outlines of the female elytra are somewhat similar, but the longer front portion of the front tarsi of the male is considerably longer and otherwise different. So far as the specimens before me indicate, however, the present species is confined to Queens- land, and the others mentioned to New South Wales and Victoria. On fig. 24 the apical portion of the larger front claw of the male is shown as long and thin, as it appears from one direction, but from another it is seen to be strongly dilated to its base ; and in fact the claw varies in appearance from every point of view. - CHEIRAGRA SERICEIPENNIS, Nn. sp. Pl. xxv.,’ figs26, te ole 3. Colours variable. Prothorax, elytra, and parts of under-surface opaque owing to a sericeous or pruinose bloom. Prothorax and elytra with a few fringing setae. Sculpture as described in preceding species except that the hind suture of the clypeus is better defined, that its suture with the labrum is marked by a series of conspicuous punc- tures, that the elytra are less distinctly separately rounded at apex, and that the front claw-joint with its claws are somewhat different. Length (dc, @), 3°25-3°9 mm. @. Differs in having the prothorax and elytra polished, with more distinct punctures, the elytra wider and each side hear apex with a flange-like elevation, the abdomen larger, more convex, aid the front claw-joint with its claws, much as the others. Hab.—Queensland: Cairns district (Macleay Museum and F. P. Dodd), South Johnstone River (H. W. Brown), Stradbroke Island (J. H. Boreham). Type, I. 4288. A small species with the sericeous appearance of the elytra of the males very pronounced. The female may be distin- guished from females of other species by the sides of the elytra, each of these near the apex has a somewhat convex flange, causing the apex to appear rather abrupt ; from some directions and in certain lights each side appears to be notched (some- what as on the females of ruficollis), but this is due to the part at the apparent notch being very thin, allowing light to show through. The average size of specimens is slightly more than that of pusilla, and distinctly less than that of ruficollis. On the male the fringe on each side consists of a few 214 widely-separated hairs or setae, on the female they are more numerous, but by no means dense. The front claw-joint of the male is deeply notched twice on the inner-side, leaving a thin truncated projection between the notches; the larger claw is strongly curved, from some directions appearing thin and acutely pointed, from others triangular and from others four- sided; its basal appendix is large, and also varies with the point of view; the smaller claw is very much smaller than the other, but its basal appendix is much as those on the other tarsi. The antennae usually have the club distinctly darker than the basal joints. There are at least five specimens of each of the following colour forms before me. Form 1, ¢. Flavo-testaceous; elytra black, with a con- spicuous bloom, abdomen blackish, metasternum more or less deeply infuscated, four hind tibiae, except at base, and tarsi blackish, or at least deeply infuscated. Includes the type. Form 2, do. Flavo-testaceous; elytra black, with sericeous bloom very conspicuous and almost golden, an obscure reddish spot, sometimes extended into a short vitta, on each side of the scutellum; metasternum, abdomen, hind legs, and middle tibiae (except at base) and tarsi black or infuscated. On this form there are usually two large infus- cated blotches on the prothorax. Form 3, ¢. Flavo-testaceous; elytra of a lurid reddish- brown, abdomen and parts of four hind legs black or deeply infuscated. The bloom of the elytra is rather less conspicuous than on the other forms, and their lurid-red colour is some- times partly extended on to the prothorax. Three males have the elytra of the same shade as in this form, except that the sides are infuscated; but of these two have the prothorax deeply infuscated, and of these again one (the only specimen examined from Stradbroke Island) has the base of the head infuscated. There are only three females before me, all without bloom ; they all have the under-surface entirely pale, and the dark parts of the legs confined to the four hind tibiae and tarsi; two have the upper-surface entirely pale, but on the third the elytra are black. TELURA. In Blackburn’s table of the subtribe Sericoides (5) Telura is distinguished by ‘‘femora glabrous and very slender and elongate.”’ But the femora of the only then known species, vitticollis, although elongate, are certainly not glabrous, as some bristles are present on each of them. (13) Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1897, p. 32. 215 TELURA VITTICOLLIS, Er. This species is fairly common at night on eucalyptus foliage in Tasmania, and it occurs also in New South Wales (Mount Kosciusko), Victoria (Mounts Bufialo and Hotham), and South Australia (Mount Lofty). Specimens vary from having the upper-surface entirely flavous, to the prothorax bivittate, and the elytra quadrivittate. Hrichson described the club of the antennae as three-jointed, but this is true only of the female, and Waterhouse has already pointed out that in the male it is five-jointed. . TELURA CLYPEALIS, Ni. Sp. Flavous, basal two-thirds of head deeply infuscated (almost black), prothorax narrowly infuscated in middle of apex, and obscurely along middle to base, elytra with a sharply-defined and almost black vitta from base to near apex. Prothorax with four long hairs on each side, rest of upper- surface glabrous; under-surface and legs sparsely clothed, four segments of abdomen each with a transverse row of setiferous granules. Head moderately convex, and with rather small punc- tures. Clypeus with apex conspicuously produced in middle, margins rather strongly upturned; punctures larger than between eyes but still small. Antennae nine-, club three- jointed. Prothorax moderately transverse, sides strongly and evenly rounded, front angles rather strongly produced and acute, hind ones rounded off ; punctures small, varying slightly in size and density, but nowhere crowded. J/lytra narrow, sides slightly dilated in middle; with regular striae, the sutural one with distinct but shallow punctures ; interstices with fairly numerous, small, but sharply-defined punctures, becoming larger about base. Pygidium with minute and rather dense subasperate punctures. Legs long and thin; front tibiae strongly tridentate; basal joint of hind tarsi shghtly shorter than second. Length, 11 mm. Hab.—Western Australia: Beverley (EK. F. du Boulay). Type (unique), I. 4835. The narrow body, long and thin legs, tridentate front tibiae, eyes large and scarcely visibly faceted, and elytral striae not geminately arranged, indicate that this species, if not a Telura is extremely close to it, and provisionally, at least, may be referred to it; the clypeus is certainly very different to that of vitticollis, but in many allied genera it varies considerably. The vitta of the elytra is sharply defined, at the base it extends across four interstices on each, but it rapidly narrows till it only covers two, thence being parallel-sided almost to 216 its apex ; on the prothorax the markings are obscurely defined ; but it is probable that they are not constant. The three- jointed club may be indicative that the type is a female; each ramus is about the length of the apical spur of the front tibiae. ODONTOTONYX RUFICEPS, DN. sp. Black; head, legs, antennae and palpi red, parts of under- surface obscurely diluted with red. Upper-surface glabrous, except for marginal fringes ; under-surface, pygidium, and legs with long pale hair, denser on metasternum than elsewhere. Head with moderately dense, sharply-defined punctures, rather small at base, larger in front. Clypeus semicircular, slightly concave, margins lightly upturned at sides, more strongly in front, hind suture curved backwards to middle; punctures near suture much as behind it, but sparser in front. Antennae nine-, club three-jointed and small. Prothoraz about once and one-half as wide as long, sides strongly rounded and narrower at apex than at base, front angles produced and subacute, hind ones gently rounded off and slightly more than right angles; punctures much as on head but less crowded. Scutellum impunctate posteriorly. Llytra feebly dilated posteriorly, apex widely rounded; strongly striate, with shallow punctures in the striae, the interstices with scattered punctures, about as large as those on prothorax. Pygidium with dense and minute punctures. Front tibiae with two strong teeth and a very small one; basal joint of hind tarsi shorter than second, of the others longer than second ; each claw with a fairly large basal appendix, and a whitish membrane. Length, 10} mm. Hab.—New South Wales: Hunter River. Type (unique), in Macleay Museum. Distinguished from brunneipennis by being more robust, the prothorax and elytra black, apical tooth of front tibiae more curved, the second larger, and the third smaller (almost vanishing), the appendix to each claw (the sole character distinguishing Odontotonyx from Nosphisthis) is rather large but less sharply defined than in brunnezpennis, and the mem- brane is somewhat smaller. There is a vague remnant of a median line on the pronotum. PLATYDESMUS CASTANEUS, N. sp. ¢. Bright castaneous with a slight iridescence, head slightly darker than prothorax. Upper-surface glabrous, except for conspicuous prothoracic and elytral fringes; under- _ surface with rather sparse, irregularly distributed, golden hairs. atid dees: ao ee ty 217 Head with numerous but not dense, and rather small sharply-defined punctures. Clypeus with sides rather hghtly upturned, the front more strongly, hind suture gently curved backwards to middle; punctures somewhat larger and more crowded than between eyes. Antennae ten-, club four-jointed, rami of the latter curved, and about the length of the front tibiae. Prothorax not twice as wide as lofig, sides moderately rounded, front angles produced and acute, hind ones obtuse but sharply defined; punctures about as large but sparser than on head between eyes. Scutellum impunctate except at base. Hlytra feebly dilated to beyond the middle, apex widely rounded; strongly striate, with distinct punctures in the striae, second, fourth, sixth, and eighth interstices slightly wider than the others, and with more numerous punctures. Pygidiuwm with rather dense punctures, except along middle. Front tibiae strongly tridentate; basal joint of hind tarsi shorter than second. Length, 10°5-11°5 mm. Hab.—New South Wales: Richmond River, in November (W. W. Froggatt). Type, I. 10785. May be readily distinguished from inusitatus, the only other species having the club of the antennae four-jointed, by its larger size, less convex form, prothorax no darker than elytra, and with much smaller punctures, etc. I have seen specimens of this species in the Macleay Museum, from Port Denison. ANODONTONYX INSULARIS, Nn. sp. Of a pale dingy red, some parts darker. Upper-surface with some long hairs scattered about, and forming a fringe on each side of prothorax and elytra, a row of setiferous granules across most abdominal segments. . Head with dense punctures of moderate size, and a ‘s, larger ones scattered about. Clypeus with front margin rounded and rather strongly upturned. Antennae eight-, club three-jointed, second joint globular and distinctly wider than second, club small. '-Prothorar not twice as wide as long, sides subparallel on basal half, front angles hghtly pro- duced and subacute, hind ones rectangular and flat; punctures sparser and shallower than on head, but scarcely smaller ; median line absent or very vague. Scutelluwm 1mpunctate ex- cept at base. Hlytra with fairly numerous, but not dense punctures, slightly larger than on prothorax; with feeble longitudinal elevations. Pygidiwm with fairly dense and rather small punctures. Basal joint of hind tarsi slightly longer than second. Length, 7-8 mm. Hab.—Queensland: Stradbroke Island, October, 1911 (H. Hacker). Type, I. 4687. 218 The flattening out of the hind angles of the prothorax, and the clothing of the head associate this species with nigro- lineata, from which it may be distinguished by its much smaller size, and by the granules of the prothorax and elytra; before the type of antennalis was sent to the Britsh Museum I noted that in appearance it was close to some specimens of the present species, but the second joint of its antennae was described as ‘‘not at all thicker than the third joint,” a character at once distinguishing it from the present and the two following species. They are referred to Anodontonyz on account of the small club, Blackburn somewhat unwillingly having recognized that as a valid distinction from Sceitala. The smaller specimens (mostly males) usually have the pro- thorax and basal half of head darker than the elytra, some- times almost black, the elytra usually have the suture and sides lightly infuscated, and sometimes each elytron has in addition three very vaguely infuscated discal lines (these being the feebly-elevated parts) ; the sterna are usually darker than the rest of the under-surface. From some directions the prothorax and elytra appear to be slightly iridescent, but from a few to have a conspicuous pruinose bloom; the head, however, is noniridescent from all points of view. The long hairs of the upper-surface each arise from a minute granule, they are fairly numerous, but not dense, between the eyes and on the front third of prothorax, on the elytra they appear to be sparsely scattered at random, but from directly in front or behind they are seen to be in rows on the feebly- elevated parts ; on the abdomen the hairs are shorter, but the lineate arrangement is more distinct. The front tibiae have a large apical tooth and a much smaller subapical one; some- times a feeble third tooth is indicated towards the base, but it is usually absent. Mr. Hacker obtained many specimens. » ANODONTONYX OPALESCENS, Nl. Sp. Dark piceous-brown obscurely mottled with red, but brilliantly opalescent. A few long hairs between eyes and across apex of prothorax, sides of prothorax and elytra. fringed, rest of upper-surface glabrous; under-surface and legs very sparsely clothed. Head with fairly dense punctures of moderate size, but sparse in middle. Clypeus almost truncate in front, margins - rather strongly upturned. Antennae nine-, club three- jointed, second joint distinctly thicker than third and sub- globular, club small. Prothoraxz about twice as wide as long, sides dilated in middle but narrowed to both base and apex, front angles produced and acute, hind ones rectangular, median line very feeble; punctures somewhat larger than on 219 head but sparser. SHlytra rather long and thin, vaguely striated ; with fairly large punctures. Pygidiwm with fairly dense punctures. Front tebiae tridentate, the two front teeth large, the other small; basal joint of hind tarsi slightly shorter and thicker than second. Length, 65-8 mm. Hab.—New South Wales: Barrington Tops, January, 1916 (H. J: Carter). Type, Turia: The hind angles of the prothorax are not so flattened as in nigrolineata, but as the head has some long hairs it possibly would have been associated with that species by Blackburn ; it is certainly allied to it, differing in being much smaller and narrower, hind angles of prothorax sharper, etc. From some directions most of the upper-surface appears to be black, but from others much of the elytra of a dingy red, it is diffi- cult, however, to see their true colours on account of the brilliant opalescence (this obscures the margins of the punc- tures, so that it is not easy to be sure of their exact size) ; from some directions even this changes to a pruinose gloss. One specimen, with much the same opalescence, has the elytra of a rather dingy red, with obscure darker lines. Three specimens from Kurrajong (C. T. Musson) and Mittagong (H. J. Carter and A. M. Lea) possibly belong to this species, and are probably females; they differ in being much paler (almost uniformly castaneous), without opalescent gloss, with denser and larger punctures, especially on the elytra, where they are rather crowded and moderately large, and shorter legs. ANODONTONYX NIGER, 0. sp. Black, shining; antennae, palpi, and legs dull red, pro- sternum and front of clypeus sometimes obscurely diluted with red. Prothorax and elytra with a thin fringe of red- dish hairs, and a few hairs across apex of prothorax, rest of upper-surface glabrous; under-surface and legs sparsely clothed. F Head with fairly dense punctures at sides, but somewhat sparser in middle. Clypeus with margin rather strongly upturned in front but less strongly on sides, each side of base lightly produced, hind suture rather strongly drawn backwards to middle; punctures near base more crowded than between eyes, but becoming sparser in front. Antennae eight-, club three-jointed, second joint subglobular, distinctly wider than third; club small. Prothorax about twice as wide as long, front angles produced and subacute, hind ones gently rounded off; punctures rather small but sharply defined, nowhere crowded. #lytra rather short; with geminate rows or rather shallow punctures, the interstices with rather 220 numerous punctures. Pygidiwm with fairly dense punc- tures, a depression in each basal angle. Front tzbiae wide and strongly tridentate; basal joint of hind tarsi longer and stouter than second. Length, 8-9 mm. Hab.—Tasmania: Kempton, Parattah, Hobart (A. M. Lea), Brighton (Aug. Simson’s No. 2850). Type, I. 819. The male has longer and thicker legs than the female, and the sexes differ to a slight extent in the prothorax, its greatest width in the male being postmedian, in the female antemedian, in the male also it is less transverse than in the female, hence the characters used in Blackburn’s table are unsatisfactory; but of the species known to Blackburn it seems closest to tetrzcus, from which it differs in its smaller size, much smaller elytral punctures, less convex elytral inter- stices and red legs; it is without the metallic gloss of micans, and differs in other respects from that species. The median line of the prothorax is either absent or vaguely impressed for a short distance near the base. Countless thousands of specimens of this species are sometimes washed up on the beaches near Hobart, after sultry nights. ; PSEUDOHETERONYX SETICOLLIS, Nl. sp. Pl) xxvii ole Black; antennae, palpi, and parts of tarsi obscurely red- dish. Head and prothorax with dense and extremely short suberect setae; abdomen and pygidium with longer and sparser setae, parts of legs, front wall of clypeus, angles of prosternum, and margins of elytra with still longer setae, or stiff hairs. Head smooth and impunctate at base, elsewhere with crowded (but not confluent) and rather shallow punctures of moderate size. Clypeus with punctures as on rest of head, front margin feebly incurved to middle, hind suture appear- ing as a narrow sinuous elevation. Antennae eight-, club three-jointed. /Prothorax widely transverse, sides gently rounded, base very feebly bisinuate, front angles produced and acute, hind ones lightly rounded off, median line feeble; punctures somewhat smaller than on head, but quite as dense. Elytra with sides gently and apex widely rounded; with rather feeble relics of striatien; punctures slightly larger, sparser, and more sharply defined than on _ prothorax. Pygidium with irregularly distributed, asperate punctures. Front tibiae strongly tridentate; basal joint of hind tarsi slightly longer than second, each claw with a strong basal appendix. Length, 11°5-15 mm. (14) Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1907, p. 258. f ‘ 221 Hab.—New South Wales: Mount Kosciusko (B. Ingleby, — lucas, and — Guerand, 7,000 ft., in Howitt’s collection). Type, I Werk | A strongly-convex dull species, but with shining elytra. Specimens vary somewhat in the punctures of the elytra and one has a few fairly well-defined striae, but all agree in having the prothorax with very dense punctures, with a minute seta arising from each; on many of them the setae have caused mud to adhere uniformly to the surface, giving it a curious appearance ; the setae on the upper-surface of the head are just as dense, but from several specimens have been completely abraded; the elytra have a few extremely minute setae towards the sides, but from most directions they are invisible. The apex of the scutellum is without punctures, the apparent base has a few large ones, and the real base (normally con- cealed by the overlapping base of the prothorax) has dense ones. I have been unable to find external indications of sex in the eleven specimens under examination. The eight- jointed antennae and general appearance associate the species with baldiensis and creber, from which it may be readily distinguished by the prothoracic clothing. PSEUDOHETERONYX BASICOLLIS, n. Sp. Pix, Wes, 32 alld. dda oleexvlyy flor 62) Black ; parts of antennae, of palpi, and of tarsi obscurely reddish. Upper-surface sparsely clothed with short, depressed setae, more numerous (but still not very dense) on head than elsewhere; prothorax and elytra fringed with stiff blackish setae, similar setae on parts of under-surface and of legs. _ Head with numerous, but not very dense or large, and ‘rather shallow punctures, becoming crowded on clypeus; front margin of the latter gently incurved to middle, hind suture lightly impressed and sinuous. Antennae nine-, club three-jointed. Prothorax scarcely twice as wide as long, sides strongly and evenly rounded, base evenly incurved to middle, front angles produced and subacute, hind ones rounded off, median line absent; punctures similar to those on head but sparser, a few very small ones scattered about. Scutellum with numerous punctures. Hlytra with sides gently rounded and apex almost truncate; punctures slightly larger than on prothorax. Pygidium and metasternum with rather coarse punctures. Front t:biae strongly tridentate; two basal joints of hind tarsi subequal ; claws strongly appendiculate. flab.— Australia: (Blackburn’s collection) ; Queensland : Toowoomba (Hamlyn Harris in Queensland Museum); New South Wales (National Museum). Type, I. 4847. 222 The majority of the punctures on the upper-surface are so impressed that there appears to be a minute granule (often semicircular) at the back of each, but the granules are invisible from in front, they are decidedly coarser on some specimens than on others; in some specimens faint indications of elytral striae may be seen, but from others these are entirely absent; the lateral bristles each arise from a small granule. The front claws (fig. 32) are of very different shape to the others (fig. 33), and the difference is apparently not sexual (at least I have been unable to find external indications of sex in the nine specimens under examination) ; its upper-surface is subopaque owing to very fine shagreening. The nine-jointed antennae associate the species with laticollis and helaeoides in Black- burn’s table; from which, as from all other described species of the genus, it may be distinguished by the base of the prothorax, this being gently and evenly incurved from each side to the middle; on all other species the base is gently bisinuate, with the part adjacent to the scutellum in the form of a wide feeble lobe. It is rather more convex than the preceding or following species. PSEUDOHETERONYX PUNCTICOLLIS, n. sp. Pl. xxyv1ecube- Black; antennae, palpi, and parts of tarsi more or less reddish. Upper-surface almost glabrous; under-surface and legs sparsely setose. Head with large and rather deep, but not crowded, punc- tures, suddenly becoming crowded on clypeus; the latter with apex gently incurved to middle. Antennae nine-, club three- . jointed. Prothorax about thrice as wide'as the median length, _ sides strongly rounded, base very feebly bisinuate, front angles rather strongly produced and acute, hind ones slightly rounded off ; median line absent; with large deep punctures, becoming smaller towards sides, somewhat irregularly distributed but nowhere crowded. JLlytra with sides gently rounded, apices very feebly rounded (almost truncate) ; with irregular rows of rather large punctures, in wide, shallow striae. Pygidium with very shallow punctures. Front tibiae strongly tridentate ; basal joint of hind tarsi slightly longer than second; all claws acutely appendiculate. Length, 11 mm. ' Hab.—Queensland: Camooweal. Type (unique), in Queensland Museum. The head and prothorax are opaque, the elytra moderately shining ; the whole of the body and even parts of the legs are very finely shagreened. There is a short seta in most of the punctures of the upper-surface, but they are very inconspicu- ous, as they seldom rise to the general level. The hind suture 223 of the clypeus is not very distinct by itself, but is rendered very distinct by the difference in the density of the punctures before and behind it; there are about ten distinct striae on each elytron, the punctures in each do not form a regular row at the deepest part, but many are on the sloping parts, although they could scarcely be regarded as geminately arranged; each of them, when viewed from behind, appears to have a small basal granule. The nine-jointed antennae associate this species with Jaticollis and helaecides, in Black- burn’s table, from which it may be distinguished by the longer basal joint of the hind tarsi; the punctures of the head and prothorax approach those of laticollis, but the elytral sculpture is very different; the hind tarsi were not mentioned in the description of Jaticollis, but two specimens (received from Mr. Carter and taken by Judge Docker at Walgett, as was the type) of that species before me have the basal joint decidedly shorter and thicker than the second. ByRRHOMORPHA RUDIS, N. sp. Black; antennae, palpi, and parts of tarsi reddish. Metasternum with fairly numerous blackish hairs, rest of under-surface and legs sparsely clothed. Head with crowded but sharply-defined punctures of moderate size. Clypeus widely excavated in front, sides rather strongly elevated, hind suture in the form of a narrow carina ; punctures as between eyes, but becoming smaller on sides. Labrum: conspicuously elevated in front, deeply impressed along middle, the impression continued on to mentum, but much shallower there. Antennae nine-, club three-jointed. Prothorax scarcely twice as wide as long, sides decreasing in width from near base to apex, front angles rather strongly produced and acute, hind ones somewhat obtuse; median line rather feeble at base, but rather wide and deep in front; punctures much as on head, but becoming smaller (although not sparser) towards all margins. Scutellum with dense . punctures, but tip polished and impunctate. EHlytra feebly dilated to beyond the middle, each obliquely truncate at apex ; striae deep and wide, with coarse, irregular punctures, the interstices irregular, and with sharply-defined punctures. Pygidium with crowded asperate punctures, and a distinct median line. Front tibiae strongly tridentate. Length, 8-115 mm. Hab. —- Western. Australia: King George Sound (Macleay Museum), Warren River (W. D. Dodd). Type, He 4836. A rough-looking species close to verres, but club with only three joints, prothorax with more crowded punctures, 224 and with a conspicuous enlargement of the median line; the largest is less than the length noted for ponderosa. The coarse punctures are often confluent on the sides near the shoulders. The elytra of this and of the following species (except for marginal fringes) at first glance appear to be glabrous, but they have sparse and exceedingly short pubes- cence, that even under a strong lens appears hardly more than dust. | VaRIETY. One specimen has the front tibiae bidentate ; but agrees in other respects with the type and seven other specimens. ByRRHOMORPHA BASICOLLIS, n. sp. Black; most of under-surface, and of legs, labrum, and sides of clypeus, obscurely reddish-brown, antennae paler. Parts of under-surface and of legs with rather long, yellowish hairs or bristles. Head with crowded and small but sharply-defined punc- tures. Prothorax with crowded, small, and rather shallow, but sharply-defined punctures, frequently transversely or obliquely confluent. Hlytra with punctures of moderate size, but (except at the apex where they are smaller and denser) not crowded or confluent. Pygidium with very dense and small asperate punctures, with a very feeble median line. Front tibiae tridentate, the two front teeth large and acute, the other very small. Length, 9-10 mm. Hab.—South Australia: Lucindale (B. A. Feuerheerdt and F. Secker), Sandy Creek (J. G. O. Tepper). Type, I 4837. The under-surface is sometimes uniformly dull reddish- brown; on two specimens the abdomen is almost black, and darker than the sterna, on another it is considerably paler than the sterna. On the head of one specimen there is a very conspicuous, narrow, impunctate line near the base; but this appears to be due to less of its back part being con- | cealed by the apex of the prothorax than in the others. The subsutural and sublateral striae of the elytra are in parts fairly well defined, but there are no distinct discal striae, their places being taken by obscure and subgeminate rows of punc- tures, scarcely differing in size from. those in their vicinity. There is an enlargement of the median line of the pronotum, as in the preceding species, but the punctures of the prothorax and elytra are very much finer than on that species; the clypeus (except that its punctures are smaller), labrum, mentum, outlines of prothorax and of elytra, and the scutel- lum are as described in that species. From verres it is readily distinguished by the much denser and finer punctures of the prothorax, which are also frequently confluent ; the sculpture 225 of the elytra is also much finer, and the subgeminate arrange- ment of punctures, although feeble, is more regular. FRENCHELLA GAGATINA, Nn. Sp. Pl. xxvi., fig. 64. Black, highly polished; parts of antennae and of palpi reddish. Upper-surface glabrous, except for fringes of dark hairs on the prothorax and elytra; under-surface and legs with blackish hairs, denser on metasternum than elsewhere. Head with dense (but not crowded) and sharply-defined punctures of moderate size between eyes. Clypeus with suture gently sinuous; punctures (except in front) crowded and slightly larger than those between eyes. Antennae nine-, club three-jointed and rather small. Prothorax about twice as wide as long, sides strongly rounded in middle, front angles produced and acute, hind ones obtuse but not rounded off; punctures about as large as those between eyes, but sparser and becoming smaller on sides. Scutellwm impunctate on apical half. Hlytra slightly dilated to beyond the middle, apex gently rounded; each with ten well-defined striae containing numerous punctures, these of varying sizes but. mostly fairly large; interstices with a few distinct punctures. Pygidium in’ parts with sharply-defined punctures. Front trbiae tridentate, the two front teeth large, the other very small. Length, 12°5 mm. Hab.-—-Western Australia: Cue (H. W. Brown). Type (unique), I. 4780. As the club is rather small the type is probably a female ; the median line of its pronotum is vaguely impressed on the _ apical third, and represented by an impunctate line from there to the base. The hind angles of the prothorax are sharply defined, although they are rather more than right angles, but this is the case with other species that Blackburn referred to B of his table, “Hind angles of prothorax sharply defined,” from some directions, however, they appear to be quite sharply acute; by that table the species would be associated with sparsiceps, which is a narrower and paler species, with much sparser punctures between eyes, etc. It is darker and more strongly convex than any previously-described species, in appearance closer to some dark specimens of Jubrica than to any other, but differing by the absence of punctures from the greater portion of the elytral interstices, clypeus much less upturned in front, and front tibiae apparently bidentate at first glance, the third tooth being very feeble and nearer the base than in other species. I 226 FRENCHELLA FIMBRIATA, N. sp. Pl, %kviggpiezsess Dark reddish-castaneous and highly polished; under- surface, legs, antennae, and palpi paler. Upper-surface glabrous, except for fringes of reddish bristles on the pro- thorax and elytra, a similar fringe on pygidium; under- surface moderately clothed in places. Head with sharply defined but not very large punc- tures, sparser between eyes than elsewhere. Clypeus convex in middle, its hind suture almost straight; punctures crowded and slightly larger than those behind suture. Antennae nine-, club three-jointed. Prothorax not twice as wide as long, sides moderately rounded in middle, oblique to apex, with front angles produced and acute; feebly decreasing to base, with hind angles rectangular; base feebly bisinuate; punctures sharply defined and nowhere dense. Scutellum impunctate at apex. Ulytra gently and evenly dilated to beyond the middle, apex widely rounded; strongly striate, with rather small punctures in striae near suture, becoming rather large towards sides, the interstices with few but sharply- defined punctures. Pygidiwm with shghtly larger punctures than on prothorax. Front tbrae tridentate. Length, 11 mm. Hab.—Queensland: Bowen (Simson’s collection, No. 2007). Type (unique), I. 10782. ; A less convex species than usual; the type appears to be a male, as the rami of the club are longer than the other joints of the antennae combined; the apical tooth of the front tibiae is long and acute, the second one is acute but small, and the third is very small; the basal joint of the hind tarsi is thick, and its full length is greater than that of the second, but from some directions it appears to be slightly shorter. Regarding the species as belonging to AA, B, of Blackburn’s table, it would be associated with sparsi- ceps, from which it differs in its much darker colour, prothorax with sparser and more sharply-defined punctures, rather denser punctures between eyes, elytra more dilated posteriorly, pygidium with much larger punctures, etc. ; if it was regarded as belonging to AA, BB, it would be associated with /ubrica, which has much denser punctures, including many on the elytral interstices, and differs in other particulars. FRENCHELLA CRIBRICEPS, Nn. Sp. Pl). xvi: dip See Black and highly polished; palpi and parts of antennae and of front legs more or less reddish. Upper-surface sparsely clothed, but with distinct reddish fringes, pygidium with 220 rather long pubescence and a distinct fringe, sterna densely pilose. Head rather convex, and with rather large, crowded punctures. Clypeus with margins rather strongly upturned, hind suture curved backwards to middle; punctures much as between eyes, but becoming smaller in front. Antennae eight-, club three-jointed. Prothorax distinctly less than twice as wide as long, sides subangularly produced-in middle, rather strongly narrowed to apex, with front angles produced and acute, less strongly narrowed to base, with hind angles sharply defined and almost rectangular; punctures almost evenly distributed, sparser, and smaller than on head. Sceutellum with rather sparse punctures. Hlytra almost parallel-sided to near apex, which is almost truncate; striae well defined, but with irregular punctures; interstices with rather large, irregularly-distributed punctures. Pygidiuwm with dense, subasperate punctures about base, becoming sparser elsewhere. Front tibiae strongly tridentate; basal joint of hind tarsi shorter than second. Length, 11°5 mm. Hab.—South Australia: Lucindale (F. Secker). Type (unique), I. 4700. As the club is small the type is probably a female. There are fairly numerous erect hairs between the eyes, and sparse ones on the elytra; but the type has probably been partly abraded. There is a feeble remnant of a median line on the pronotum. By Blackburn’s table the species would be associated with hispida, from which it differs in being black, clothing of upper-surface much sparser, clypeus longer, etc. In general appearance it is fairly close to dark specimens of lubrica, but that species has denser prothoracic and elytral punctures, antennae nine-jointed, etc. ENGYOPS FLAVUS, Nn. sp. Flavous, front of head and parts of legs castaneous. A few long hairs between eyes, and a fringe of similar Lairs on each side of the prothorax and elytra, rest of upper-surface glabrous; pygidium moderately densely clothed at apex; under-surface and legs very sparsely clothed. Head with fairly numerous and small but sharply- defined punctures. Clypeus with semicircular and rather strongly upturned margins, middle rather strongly convex and with denser and coarser punctures than between eyes ; hind suture sharply defined. Antennae nine-, club three- jointed. Prothoraxz about twice as wide as long, side sub- parallel on basal two-thirds, and then strongly rounded to apex, front angles produced and acute, hind ones almost rectangular; punctures somewhat larger and denser than 12 228 between eyes. Sewte//i1m with punctures as on prothorax. Elytra slightly dilated to beyond the middle, and then nar- rowed to apex, where each is obliquely truncated but with a fine membrane; with regular impunctate striae, interstices with slightly larger punctures than on prothorax, but not quite so dense. Pygidium with crowded punctures. Under- surface with rather dense and strong punctures, sparser and smaller on parts of abdomen than elsewhere. Front trbiae tridentate, the two apical teeth large, the other feeble; basal joint of hind tarsi as long as the second and third combined. Length, 8°5-9 mm. Hab.—Queensland: South Johnstone River (H. W. Brown), Innisfail (Mrs. McArthur), Mackay (National Museum, from R. E. Turner). Type, I. 10781. An elongate species, at first glance resembling some species of Phyllotocus (é.g., occidentalis, and the variety pallidus of macleayi), but with very different front parts of head, etc. The very large eyes with the space between them not much wider than long, simple claws (they are, however, thickened at the base), and general appearance are as in #. spectans, from which it differs in. being much larger, clypeus shorter, punctures (especially on elytra) denser, etc., the elytra are also truncated at apex; the mentum is granulate but much less densely clothed than in spectans. From above the hind angles of the prothorax appear to be acute, and to slightly embrace the elytra, but from the side each is seen to be almost rectangular. The sparse hairs on the head are partly in front of and partly behind the clypeal suture. Each ramus of the club is about as long as the inner spur of the front tibiae. The four specimens under examination appear to be all males. HAPLOPSIS SERRICOLLIS, N. sp. Black with a slight bronzy gloss, antennae (except club) and palpi red, tips and part of sides of elytra and parts of legs obscurely diluted with red. Rather densely clothed with long white hair. Head with coarse and dense punctures. Clypeus with margins moderately upturned, front truncate but with corners rounded off, the sides oblique. Antennae nine-, club three- jointed, rami about the length of the claw-joint without the claws. Prothorax not twice as wide as long, sides strongly rounded and finely serrated, front angles produced and acute, hind ones obtuse but not rounded off; punctures large and asperate; the interspaces with dense small punctures. Hlytra with subgeminate rows of close-set, asperate punctures, the wider interstices with numerous gaps on each side due to — | | : | | 229 punctures. Pygidiwm with crowded punctures. Front tebiae tridentate, the two first teeth large and acute, the third small, acute, and subbasal; basal joint of hind tarsi much shorter than second. Length, 6-6°25 mm. _ Hab.—Western Australia: Cunderdin, July-August, 1913 (Western Australian Museum, No. 7813). ‘Type, I. LOMOT. In size and structure close to olliffi, with which it would be associated in Blackburn’s table, but the elytra have much longer clothing, and with scarcely a trace of metallic gloss; debilis has the clypeus somewhat different, the metallic gloss of elytra more conspicuous, and the clothing shorter; the tips of the elytra are obscurely reddish as in grisea, but the cloth- ing of that species 1s much shorter and the clypeus is very different. On the upper-surface there are fairly dense sub- depressed hairs, each about the length of a claw, and mixed with these (and very distinct from the sides) are longer erect ones, fairly dense on the head to base of elytra, but disap- pearing before the apex of the latter. From some directions the prothorax appears to be covered with small granules, much as In many small weevils (¢.g., Hssolithna, Polyphrades, etc.). The semidouble rows of elytral punctures are very irregular, and are in shallow longitudinal impressions, but these could scarcely be regarded as striae; on each elytron there are three interstices that are conspicuously wider than the others, but all have jagged edges due to punctures. The clothing some- what obscures it, but the whole of the derm appears to be very finely shagreened. MarcHIDIUS HACKERI, Nh. Sp. _ Castaneous, some marginal parts darker, club paler. Moderately densely clothed with long, erect, golden or light- brown hairs; parts of under-surface with rather sparse, sub- depressed pubescence. Head with coarse and rather crowded punctures. Clypeus deeply notched in front, each side conspicuously trilobed. Antennae with the club three-jointed. Prothorax about twice as wide as long, sides moderately rounded and finely serrated, front angles produced and moderately acute, hind ones obtuse and entire; punctures as large as on head, but less crowded. Hlytra feebly dilated to beyond the middle, with double rows of large punctures. Pygidiwm convex, with asperate, setiferous granules. Front tibiae tridentate; each claw with a conspicuous basal quill. Length, 8 mm. Hab.—Queensland: Buderim Mountain, in April (H. Hacker). Type (unique), in Queensland Museum. 230 The hairs are more conspicuously golden and denser on the pygidium than elsewhere. In Blackburn’s table the species would be associated with macleayanus, from which, as from all other species except variolosus and pilosus, 1t may be readily distinguished by the long erect clothing of the upper- surface; from the two latter species it may be distinguished by the quilled claws; in general appearance it is strikingly close to variolosus. MAECHIDIUS STRADBROKENSIS, n. sp. Blackish, some parts obscurely paler, antennae and palpi reddish. Head and prothorax with rather long, stiff, erect, rusty-red bristles, somewhat similar but shorter and paler ones on pygidium, elytra with subdepressed whitish setae, and a few suberect bristles; under-surface and legs with moderately dense, short, curved setae. Head with large dense punctures between eyes. Clypeus strongly convex and with crowded punctures in middle, widely emarginate in front, each side with two triangular teeth, and a longer and more obtuse one extending to base. Antennae with club three-jointed. Prothorax about twice as wide as long, sides obtusely serrated, front angles produced, base strongly notched on each side; punctures large, round, and shallow. Hlytra almost parallel-sided to near apex; with rows of large, elliptic, ring punctures. Pygidiwm with a large median fovea. Front tibiae strongly tridentate; each claw with a conspicuous basal quill. Length, 9-11°5 mm. Hab.—Queensland: Stradbroke Island, in December (H. Hacker). Type, in Queensland Museum; cotype, I. 10795, in South Australian Museum. In general appearance somewhat close to a species doubt- fully identified by Blackburn as emarginatus, with which it would be associated in his table, but readily distinguished by the stiff bristles of the head and’ prothorax ; on excisicollis the © prothorax has much thinner setae, and the basal excavations and elytral sculpture are different : insularis is much smaller and otherwise very different. MAECHIDIUS HOPEANUS, Westw. M. obscurus, Macel. The types of obscurus agree with specimens identifiea (correctly I think) by Blackburn as hopeanus. Macleay described the prothorax as ‘‘shallowly bifoveate near the sides with the median line lightly marked.’’ One of the specimens certainly appears to be bifoveate, but the other has vague depressions only (much as on typical specimens of “tes * Sa A a ie il aac 231 hopeanus); the lightly-marked specimen is also without a median line. | MAECHIDINUS, n. g. Head rather small. Eyes small and lateral. Clypeus entire in front, its basal angles slightly exterior to eyes. Maxillary palpi small, the labial ones very small. Antennae nine-, club three-jointed and rather small. Prothorax not much wider than greatest length; hind angles semicircularly excised. Scutellum semicircular. Hlytra not covering the propygidium and pygidium. Prosternum with a W-shaped excavation in front for reception of antennae, one of which rests on each side of a triangular intercoxal process. Legs rather stout; front tibiae tridentate, the third tooth small and close to the base; claws long, thin, and simple. This genus appears to be allied to Cawlobius, and its front tibiae are much as in that genus and Awtomolus, but the prosternal sutures are widely open, allowing the antennae to be concealed when at rest, as in Maechidius; a notch on each side of the base of the prothorax is often present in Maechidius, near which the genus should be placed in cata- logues; but it is readily distinguished therefrom by the entire clypeus, exposed propygidium, and great distance between the second and third teeth of the front tibiae. MAECHIDINUS LATERICOLLIS, Nn. sp. Black; palpi, claws, and parts of antennae reddish. Upper-surface with stout depressed setae, or lanceolate scales, dense and mostly black on head, dense and white on sides of prothorax, and black in middle, irregularly distributed and sparser on elytra; under-surface, pygidium, propygidium, and parts of legs closely plated with snowy-white scales, legs in addition with numerous iong whitish hairs, tips of abdomen and of pygidium with golden setae. Head with dense, partially concealed punctures. Clypeus widely transverse, front truncate, sides gently rounded, hind suture normally concealed. Prothorax strongly convex, sides strongly rounded, at about the basal third with a small tooth marking the outer end of a strong basal notch, front angles produced and acutely triangular ; median line shallow; punc- tures crowded and moderately large. Hlytra with irregular rows of punctures, many of which are separated by small transverse shining granules, interstices of uneven width and obtusely serrated. Basal joint of hind tars: conspicuously shorter and thicker than second. Length, 7-95 mm. Hab.—Western Australia: Beverley (E. F. du Boulay). Type, I. 4583. 232, To see the W-shaped excavation of the prosternum clearly it is necessary to remove the head; from most directions it is difficult to see the line dividing the front face of the clypeus from the labrum. The clothing is remarkable, especially on the elytra, where the setae or scales on perfect specimens seem to be in geminate rows, with the white ones stouter than the black ones, and either lanceolate in shape, or elongate-elliptic ; on the upper-surface even where dense the derm may usually be seen from an oblique direction, but on the hind-parts and the under-surface the scales are so dense and flat that most of the derm is hidden. MAECHIDINUS MARGINALIS, nN. sp., or var. Ten specimens differ from latericollis in having the pro- thorax wider, its clothing longer and more upright, the pale setae continued across both base and apex (on all the specimens of latericollis the pale clothing is confined to the sides), clothing of head longer and almost entirely pale, under-surface with clothing more setose in character, even on the abdomen (where the scales are all distinctly longer than wide, and many ~ are longitudinally ribbed) and the hairs on the legs longer and denser. Length, 8-9 mm. Hab. — Western Australia: King George Sound (Macleay Museum). Type, I. 10796. There are ten specimens of the present form before me, all from King George Sound; and six of latericoliis, all from Beverley, so that the differences noted are unlikely to be sexual; the curious front tibiae and lateral notches of prothorax are exactly alike on the two forms, but the distinctly wider prothorax of the present form is unlikely to be of varietal importance only. A specimen of this form was standing in the Blackburn collection at the end of Awtomolus, but it was damaged and the head was so mouldy that the antennae were concealed, hence he probably regarded them as broken off, and so refrained from describing it. CRYPTODUS. It is difficult and in many instances impossible, unless they are dissected out, to count the joints of the antennae of species of this genus, owing to the greatly dilated basal joint concealing some of the following ones, and to the brevity of the joint preceding the club, the latter I have presumed in every instance to be three-jointed. Probably Fairmaire dissected them out to make certain of them, as I have had to do in many instances, thus making certain that his counts of the antennae of variolosus and piceus as being nine-jointed i gp lamin gy 5 233 were correct. Of the species described by him the following comments are offered :— + grossipes. A very distinct species, eth the base of the mentum much as in caviceps, but the two species otherwise very different. creberrimus. I cannot find that Blackburn has anywhere published a note as to creberrimus being a synonym of paradozus, but at the side of his copy of the description of creberrimus he wrote “= paradoxus Macl.” and the description agrees so well with ordinary specimens of that species that I also regard it as paradoxus. It is probable that some of Fairmaire’s other names are bestowed upon forms of the same variable species. fraternus. Although placed in A, species noted as having “antennae novem-articulatae. Mentum emarginatum,”’’ this species was said to have ten-jointed antennae, and the mentum was not even mentioned. Probably it was accidentally referred to A, and as the species of B were divided into three groups, dependent on the form of the mentum, it would be unsafe to identify any specimens as fraternus, without additional particulars to those given in the description (which is simply a brief comparison with cycnorum ). CRYPTODUS PARADOXUS, W. S. Macl. C. subcostatus, Macl. C. obscurus, Macl. The types of swbcostatus are quite ordinary specimens of paradozus; the types of obscurus differ from those of subcostatus in the particulars mentioned by Macleay, but the differences are individual rather than specific. The life the insects lead naturally causes older specimens to lose much of their gloss; the antennae of the four specimens are almost or quite buried within their ENTE. but appear to be quite as in paradoxus. CRYPTODUS INCORNUTUS, Macl. The type of incornutus is certainly very close to paradoxus, the general outlines of the head, prothorax, and elytra (and the subapical tuberosities of the elytra) are very much the same; the deeply-notched mentum, the antennae, and legs are also very similar, but the complete absence of cephalic tubercles (they are, however, often very feeble on paradoxus ), the decidedly coarser prothoracic, and the generally coarser punctures, may be distinctive. A smaller and even rougher specimen also with nontuber- culate head was sent to me some years ago by Mrs. Hobler of Dalby; and has been considered a possible variety of paradoxus. 234 CRYPTODUS VARIOLOSUS, White. Mr. Clark and I. have taken specimens of this species in abundance from nests of Iridomyrmex conifera, in many parts of Western Australia. CRYPTODUS PASSALOIDES, Germ. Mr. Clark and I have taken specimens of this species from nests of several species of ants in Western Australia, including Ponera lutea, and a small black Iridomyrmex. CRYPTODUS FOVEATUS, ll. sp. Pl, scevii., fig.- 85; Dark brown, sometimes almost black, moderately shining. Upper-surface with very short, and rather sparse, golden setae. Head with crowded reticulate punctures, a feeble median depression and two feeble tubercles. Clypeus with margins rather strongly upcurved, middle feebly incurved. Mentum with base deeply semicircularly notched, and with two rather acute processes; with dense, reticulate sculpture, becoming sub-obliterated in front. Antennae ten-jointed; basal joint strongly dilated to apex. Prothorar with fairly large, and rather dense, shallow punctures, each with a central pit, but becoming crowded and irregular on the sides in front, median line rather lightly defined, but with slightly larger punctures than on the adjacent surface. /#/ytra with rather large elliptic or round punctures, each with an elevated median line, the interstices with numerous sharply-defined punctures; costae distinct. Pygidium with a large median depression, with dense, reticulate sculpture, reduced to simple punctures at apex. Front tvbiae quadridentate, the subbasal tooth small, the others large. Length, 20-23 mm. Hab.—Northern Territory (Blackburn’s collection), Daly River (H. Wesselman), Darwin (N. Davies); Queensland, Charters Towers (Biackburn’s collection). Type, I. 2259. Very distinct from all other known species by the large depression or fovea on the pygidium, which is distinct to the naked eye and gives that organ a bituberculate appearance (thinking this was possibly a masculine character one specimen was dissected, without an aedeagus being found); the quadri- dentate front tibiae is also a useful, but not unique, distinguishing feature. The five specimens before me have all simple front tarsi. CRYPTODUS ANTENNALIS, 0. sp. Pl. xxv., figs. 34 and 35; pl. xxvii., fig. 86. Dark brown and moderately shining. Upper-surface with sparse and very minute setae. 235 Head with dense, reticulate sculpture, becoming laminate in front ; with a scarcely traceable median depression. Clypeus rather strongly elevated in front, less so on sides, the hind suture marked by a finely-elevated line, but not traceable across middle. Mentum with base deeply notched and bidentate; densely reticulate, but the sculpture subobsolete in front. Antennae ten-jointed, basal joint strongly dilated and lop-sided in front, the following joint inserted slightly nearer its base than apex. Prothorax with rather large and dense ring punctures, each with a central pit; median line feebly defined or absent. /Hlytra with rather large, elliptic, ring punctures, becoming smaller, denser, and rounder on sides; costae well defined. Pygidium with numerous ring punctures, each with a central pit, becoming crowded in corners, and almost simple at apex. Front tibiae strongly tridentate. Length, 16-21 mm. Hab.—New’ South Wales: Mulwala, Coonabarabran (Blackburn’s collection from T. G. Sloane); Queensland: Bowen (Aug. Simson’s No. 4294). Type, I. 2266. The general sculpture is somewhat as in paradoxus, but the surface is more polished, and the antennae are ten-jointed ; the basal joint is so wide, with its tip overhanging the base of the club, that it is impossible to count the joints before dissection. The head has two very feeble elevations, and these are sometimes so ill-defined that they might fairly be regarded as absent. The punctures on the front sides of the prothorax are larger than elsewhere, and do not degenerate into crowded scratches. There are seven specimens before me, all with simple front claws. CRYPTODUS ANGUSTUS, DN. sp. Pl, sexe eerie Dark brown and shining. Upper-surface with sparse and extremely short setae. Head with coarsely reticulate sculpture, becoming finer in front; with a shallow median depression, on each side of which is a feeble elevation. Clypeus moderately elevated in front, rather feebly on sides. Mentum with base deeply notched and strongly bidentate; with coarse reticulate sculp- ture, becoming finer in front. Antennae ten-jointed, basal joint strongly dilated to apex. /Prothorax with fairly dense shallow punctures, each with a central pit, becoming crowded on the sides in front; median line feeble. Hlytra with large, shallow, elliptic, ring punctures, becoming smaller and rounder towards sides, interstices with rather sparse and small but sharply-defined punctures; costae rather feeble. Pygidiwm 236 with more or less crowded ring punctures. Front tibiae quadridentate, the subbasal tooth small, the others strong. Length, 16-22 mm. Hab.—Northern Territory: Darwin (Sir E. C. Stirling, N. Davies, W. K. Hunt, and Blackburn’s collection) ; Queens- land: Stewart River (Ww. D. Dodd). Type, I. 136. An oblong, flat species, decidedly narrower than usual. Three of the specimens before me were doubtfully identified by Blackburn as oblongoporus, but that species was the first to be referred to Fairmaire’s first section of the genus distinguished by having nine-jointed antennae, the front tibiae were also described as tridentate. The description of fairmairer was simply a comparison with variolosus, without the size, mentum, or antennae being mentioned; such as it is the present species differs from it in having the variolose elytral punctures deeper and sparser than on variolosus, the small ones on the interstices much sparser and not smaller. One specimen has some of the elliptic ring punctures, adjacent to the suture and the first discal costa, conjoined, so that they are prolonged from three to five times the normal length, without increase in width. Of the eight specimens before me seven have simple front tarsi, and from the other they are missing. Novapus opscurus, Macl. (formerly Orycrzs). The type of this species was probably picked up dead; it is opaque and entirely covered with very minute reticulation that may often be seen on beetles that have partially rotted in damp situations; all its tarsi and one antennae are broken. It is a Vovapus, and structurally is extremely close to the Western Australian simplex, but differs in the apex of clypeus, scutellum, and prothoracic excavation. There are in the Australian Museum two specimens (sexes) from Queensland that probably belong to the species, ~ and are in much better condition ; they are both shining, with the punctures more distinct and the minute reticulation absent; the male (from Duaringa) is slightly larger than the type, with the tubercles at the apex of the clypeus rather more prominent, the cephalic horn slightly longer and thicker, and the median carina of the scutellum absent. There is an obtuse swelling at the posterior end of the prothoracic excavation on both the type and the Duaringa males, and I have seen no similar swelling on any other male of the genus. The female (from Hidsvold, and there is an almost identical speci- men in the South Australian Museum from Brisbane) in (15) Ginbe this was orien I have seen a jaa in the National Museum from Cairns. 237 general appearance is much like the females of laticollus and adelaidae, but differs from them by the tip of the clypeus being bituberculate as in the male. By the removal of this species from Oryctes that genus must now be expunged from Australian. lists, as barbarossa has been transferred to Haploscapanes, and mullerianus to Pseudoryctes. NOVAPUS RUGOSICOLLIS, Blackb. Pl. xxvul., figs. 88 and 89. There are numerous specimens of this species in the National Museum from the King River, Northern Territory, all marked as taken from termite mounds. The male, hitherto undescribed (the type was noted as a male, but this was subsequently corrected) in general appearance is very close to the male of V. bifidus (the types of which were also taken from termite mounds) but differs.in having the cephalic horn much less conspicuously bifid, the extent of the prothoracic excavation is much the same, but its walls are more acutely carinated and in front (but not at the apex) and posteriorly (but not at the base) each carina from some directions appears to terminate as a subconical tubercle; by the males alone, however, it would probably have been considered that bifidus was only a varietal form; but the females are very distinct, on bifidus the cephalic horn is distinctly bifid; on rugosicollis it is briefly conical. ANEURYSTYPUS CARINATICEPS, n. sp. Plo xxvii plea. 3. Bright castaneous, some marginal parts narrowly infuscated. Under-surface, legs, base of antennae, and ocular canthi, with long rusty-red hair; elytra with a dense fringe of short pale hair, projecting downwards, and a longer fringe of stiffer redder bristles, projecting outwards, pygidium with a loose fringe of long hairs at the apex, but base glabrous. Head with fairly dense punctures on a semicircular space behind the clypeus, base with sparse and small ones. Clypeus with semicircular, strongly-elevated margins; punctures larger than on rest of head, its hind suture marked by a strong transverse carina, subangularly elevated in its middle, and curved on each side so as not to touch the margin. Antennae ten-, club three-jointed; club very long and almost parallel-sided. Prothorax not twice as wide as long, a narrowly impressed line across front margin; with small scattered punctures, becoming more numerous, but not crowded towards sides in front. Sewtellum almost impunctate. Elytra with a rather deep subsutural stria, elsewhere striation very ill-defined, but the punctures in subgeminate rows. 238 Pygidium with fairly dense punctures about base, but sparse elsewhere. Front t2bzae strongly tridentate; claws long, thin, and equal. Length, 14-15 mm. Hab.—Queensland: Capella (Relton collection). Type in Queensland Museum, cotype, I. 10768, in South Australian Museum. In general appearance like inermucollis, but the clypeus is more semicircular, and the transverse carina is subangularly elevated in the middle; pachypus has the clypeus transverse, carina and legs very different; pe/osicollis is much smaller, head very different, and prothorax conspicuously clothed; Jaevis is much smaller, with the carina not elevated in middle, etc.; the males of all the other described species have the prothorax armed in front. The club of the antennae is distinctly longer than the front tibiae; the elytral punctures are rather small and are rather distantly placed in rows, the gemination of these being very feeble. Under a fairly high power the whole upper-surface and the pygidium appear to be very finely shagreened, and as a result less shining than on other species of the genus. Both specimens appear to have feeble remnants of a wide median line on the prothorax, but these are possibly due to irregular contraction. CORYNOPHYLLUS CURVICORNIS, 0. sp. Pl. xxvii, ie eke ¢. Bright castaneous, parts of head and tibiae, and margins of prothorax of scutellum and of elytra more or less infuscated. Under-surface, legs, basal joint of antennae, and ocular canthi with long, rusty-red hair, elytra with a rather dense fringe of short pale hair projecting downwards, and a somewhat longer fringe of sparser and darker hairs projecting outwards; pygidium fringed with hairs, at the base rather short and irregular, at the apex longer and regular. Head with a strong and acute recurved horn between eyes, with sharply-defined but not very large punctures. Clypeus semicircular, margins rather strongly and equally upcurved. Ocular canthi wide, rather flat; with shallow and dense, sub- asperate punctures. Antennae ten-, club three-jointed; club widely subelliptic-ovate, about as long as width of head at base. Prothorax with a wide and deep excavation, front angles acutely produced, the hind ones widely obtuse; with rather small and sparse but sharply-defined punctures, becom- ing somewhat larger and denser on parts of sides. Scutellum impunctate. Hlytra not much longer than wide; with subgeminate, but more or less irregular rows of fairly large ring punctures, usually in very feeble striae. Pygidiwm with sparse but distinct punctures, becoming crowded and shallow 239 in corners. Front tebiae strongly tridentate ; claws long, thin, and equal. Length, 16 mm. Hab.—Queensland: Maryborough (HH. J. Carter from A. Steven). Type (unique), I. 10766. The raised margin of the clypeus forms an almost true semicircle, as on several. species of ) 2) Giese antenna as seen when ge Lea, bP) front claw. hind claw. at rest. under-surface of basal joint of antenna. Anoplognathus multiseriatus, joint and claws. Enasiba tristis, Oll., Diphobia longicornis, Ectrephes tormicarum, Pasc., 9) Lea, antenna from above. antenna from the side. Polyplocotes carinaticeps, Lea, antenna. Lea, antenna. Thorictosoma tibiale, Lea. PuaTteE XXVI. Bolboceras quadrifoveatum, Lea. bispinicolle, Lea. 33 triunum, Lea. Rhopaea decipiens, Lea. JP) nigricollis, Lea. Paralepidiota cavifrons, Lea. Lepidiota froggatti, I~ 5) 5) Systellopus ater, Haplonycha marginipennis, Lea. a) 2} 2) Macl. 99 Lea. migra, Lea, suavis, Lea. Glossocheilifer bidentatus, Lea. Stethaspis squamosus, Tea: Pseudoheteronyx seticollis, basicollis, puncticollis, En: enchella gagatina, Lea. fimbriata, Lea. cribriceps, Lea. 33 9) Anoplognathus multiseriatus, prasinus, smaragdinus, 9) Pruate XXVITI. Calloodes nitidissimus, Lea. Schizognathus burmeisteri, viridiaeneus, Mimador etus niveosquamosus, Lea. leucothyreus, Adoretus melvillensis, Lea. Saulostomus mimicus, Lea. Corynophyllus curvicorns, Lea. Aneurystypus carinaticeps, Lea. Metanastes bicorns, Lea. Cryptodus foveatus, antennalis, angustus, > 9) Lea. Lea. Lea. Lea. Lea. Lea. views of antenna. ar. stradbrokensis, Lea. Lea. Cast. Ohaus. Ohaus. Ohaus. Lea. Novapus rugosicollis, Blackb. Chlorobapta frontalis, Parandra frenchi, Blackb. Don., Var. front claw- AUSTRALIAN FUNGI: NOTES AND DESCRIPTIONS. No. =o By J. Burton Cietanp, M.D., and Epwin Cueet, Botanical Assistant, Botanic. Gardens, Sydney. [Read September 11, 1919.] Puates XXVIII. anp X XIX. The following paper is a continuation of our two pre- vious ones in this series, and contains a number of notes on, and records of, the larger Australian fungi. ‘The serial numbers are for future reference to the species concerned. The references under ‘‘colour tints noted’’ are to the plates in Henri Dauthenay’s ‘‘Répertoire de Couleurs ; unless Ridgway’s ‘“‘Colour Standards and Colour Nomen- clature’’ is specifically mentioned. We would once more emphasize the difficulty attendant on the identification of the fleshy agarics. When referring these. to known species, we have in most cases given our description of the Australian plants so determined, so that if we are in error, the mistake can later be rectified. We would again express our gratitude for being enabled to reproduce coloured plates of most of the new species described, and would offer our congratulations to our artist, Miss Phyllis Clarke, of Chatswood, Sydney, for her admirable delineations of these. We also owe much to the kindness of Mr. C. G. Lloyd, of Cincinatti, for identifying for us so many polypores and other more permanent species. Without his help, our task in these groups would have been very heavy, and errors doubtless numerous. Miss E. Wakefield, of Kew ~ Gardens, has also kindly helped us on several occasions, whilst we are indebted to various Australian friends, whose assist- ance is acknowledged in the text, for a number of specimens. SUMMARY OF CONTENTS. WHITE-SPORED AGARICACEAE. AMANITA: 90—A. grossa, Berk. AMANITOPSIS: 91—A. punctata, n. sp. ARMILLARIA: 92—A. mellea, Vahl. 938—A. mucida, Schrad., var. exannulata, var. nov. TRICHOLOMA : 94_T. muculenta, Berk. 95—T. colossa, Fr. CuitocyBE: 96—C. media, Peck. 97—O. pinophila, Peck. 98— C. dealbata, var. minor, Cooke. 99—C. cyathiformis, var. cinerascens, Fr. 100—C. paraditopa, n. sp. 263 CaNTHARELLUS: 101—C. lilacinus, n. sp. 102—C. imperatae, n. sp. 103—C. nigripedes, n. sp. 104—C. corrugatus, n. sp. 105—C. foliolum, Kalch. Lactarius: 106—L. stenophyllus, Berk. 107—D. subtomen- tosus, B. and Rav. 108—D. serifiuus; Fr. Russuta: 109—R. adusta, Fr. 110—R. Flocktonae, n. sp. 111—R. Mariae, Peck. 112—R. xerampelina, Fr. 113—R. azurea, Bres. 114—R. granulosa, Cooke. 115—R. pec- tinatoides, Peck. 116—R. emetya, Fr. 117—R. fragilis, Fr. 118—R. erumpens, n. sp. Gormverd: 119°—-C) “radicata, Relh. > 1200. velutipes, Er. 121—C. confiuens, Pers... 122—C. angrata, Schum. 123— C. stipitaria, Fr. Hyerornorus: 124—H. miniatus, Fr. 125—H. conicus, Fr. 126—H. psittacinus, Schaeff. Marasmius: 127—M. porreus, Fr. 128—M., alliatus (Schaeff.). 129—M. calopus, Fr. 1380—M. equi-crims, F. v. M. Mycrena: 131—M. banksiae, n. sp. 1382—M. coccineus, n. sp. 133—M. sanguinolenta, Alb. and Schw. Puievrotus: 134—P. lampas, Berk. 1385—P. ostreatus, Jacq. 1Ss6——P. subostreatus, n. sp. 1387-=P. Cheetu, Mass. 138— P. striatulus, Fr. LEnTINUS: 1389—Z. tuber-regium, Rumph. 140—Z. strigosus, Hee t4t— f dealbatus, Kr. \ 1422 fe jasciatus, Wr: 143— L. radicatus, Cooke and Mass. 144—Z. ursinus, Fr. Panus: 145—P. stypticus, Fr. 146—P. viscidulus, B. and Br. Xerotus: 147—Y. fuliginosus. Lenzites: 148—2Z. abietina, Fr. 149—L. wngulaformis, Berk. iii striata, Swartz. lol Wersaemana., hr. Voli. Becklem, Berk. 153—L. repanda, Mont. 154—D. Muelleri, ‘Berk. 155—JZ. bicolor. POLY PORACEAE. Botercus: 156—B. romanus, Ottav. 157—B. scarlatinus, n. sp. StropitoMyces: 158—S. pallescens, Cooke and Mass. 159—S. floccopus, Rost. Potystictus: 160—P. elongatus, Berk. 161—P. meleagris, Berk. 162—P. badius, Berk. 163—P. ochraceo-stuppeus, Lloyd. 164—P. occidentalis, Klotzsch. 165—P. (Trametes) Per- soonu, Mont. 166—-P. subfulvus, Berk. 167—P. flavus, Klotz. 168—P. versicolor, L. 169—P. sanguineus, L. 170—P. cinnabarinus, Jacq. 171—P. cervino-gilvus, Jungh. Potyporus: 172—P. Clemensiae, Murr. Wa LantnTraco= pilus, Cooke. 174—P. sulphwreus, Fr. 175—P. rosettus, Lloyd. 176—P. rufescens. Pers. 177—P. Albertini, Mueller. 178—P. eucalyptorum, Fr. 179—P. gilows, Schw. 180— P. gilvus, var. scruposus, Fr. 181—P. (Trametes) pertusus, Pr. 182——P. Patowllardu, Rick. 183—P. fruticum, Berk. 184—_P. sessilis, Murr. Fomes: 185—F'. robustus, Karsten. 186—F. conchatus, Pers. 187—F. densus, Oleson. 188—F. roburneus, Fr. 189— F. rimosus, Berk. 190—F. badius, Berk. 191—F. pseudo- senex, Murr.(?) 192—F. yucatensis, Murr. Porra: 193—P. callosa, Fr. 194—P. vaporaria, Fr. TRAMETES: 195—T. lactinea, Berk. 196— T. protea, Berk. 197—-T. semitosta, Berk. 264 HYDNACEAE. Hypnum: 198—H. rufescens, Pers. 199—H. coralloides, Scop. 200—H. ochracewm, Pers. 201—H. Muelleri, Berk. 202— H. zonatum, Batsch. 203—H. alutaceum, Fr. TREMELLODON: 204—T'. gelatinosum, Scop. Raputum: 205—R. Neilgherrense, Berk. Irpex: 206—IJ. consors, Berk. 207—IJ. cingulatum, Lloyd. 208—I. saepiaria, Lloyd. THELEPHORACEAE. THELEPHORA: 209—T'. terrestris, Ehrenb. 210—T. myriomera, Fr. STEREUM: 211—S. caperatum, Berk. and M. 212—S. elegans, Fr. 213—S. semilugens, Kalchb. 214—S. hirsutum, Willd. 215—S. zonarium, Lloyd. 216—S. vellerewm, Berk. 217—S. lobatum, Fr. 218—S. illudens, Berk. 219—S. mem- branaceum, Fr. 220—S. (Lloydella) cinerascens, Schw. 221—S. (Hymenochaete) adustum, Lev. Corticium: 222—C. coeruleum, Pers. GASTEROMYCETES. CHLAMyYDoPUS: 223—C. Meyenianus, Berk. BartargA: 224—B. phalloides, var. Stevenii. GrasTER: 225—G. Clelandu, Lloyd. 226—G. floriformis, Vitt. 227—G. simulans, Lloyd. 228—G. Berkeleyi. 229—G. minimus, Schw. 230—G. saccatus, Fr. MyYcrenastrumM: 231—M. corium (Guers.). LycoprErpon: 232—L. gemmatum, Batsch. CatvaTia: 233—C. lilacina (Berk.). ASCOMYCETALES. Enpogone: 234—H. tuberculosa, Lloyd. MorcHELLA: 235—M. esculenta, ie 236—M. conica, Bow Lerot1a: 237—L. marcida, Pers. : GroGLOSsuM: 238—G. Muelleri, Cooke. 239—G. glabrum, Pers. PHILLIPSTA: 240——P. polyporoides, Berk. Urnoura: 241—U. campylospora, Berk. Hypomyces: 242—H. aurantius, Tul. XyLARIA: 243—YX. anisopleura, Mont. 244—X. phosphorea, Berk. (?) 245—X. myosurus, Mont.(?) 246—X. faveolis. 247—X. hypoxylon, Grev. SARCOXYLON: 248—S. Le Rati (Hennings). Poronta: 249—P. punctata, L. 250—P. oedipus, Mont. NummMvnaria: 251—N. Baileyr, B. and Br: Datpinta: 252— D. concentrica, Bolt. WHITE-SPORED AGARICACEAE. AMANITA. 90. Amanita grossa, Berk. Agaricus (Amamtopsis) grossus, Berk.: Fl. Tasm., ii:, 242; Sace.: Sylli> aes Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 10 (Tasm.). Agarzeus (Amamta) ananaeceps, Berk. (?): Hook, Lond. Journ., viii., 572; Sacc.: Syll., 36; and Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 8 (Tasm.).—We sent specimens of our plants to Miss E. M. Wakefield at Kew, asking if they were A. solitaria. She 265 has replied that tney do not seem to be so, as A. solitaria has floccose and easily removed warts; their smell seems to ex- clude A. strobiliformis. She suggested that they might be A. grossa or A. ananaeceps. On referring to the brief descrip- tions of these two, it seems probable that they may refer to different stages of the one species. As the specimens of one of our collections agree very well with the description of A. grossa, we place our plants under this name, though if only one species is concerned 41. ananaeceps has priority. A com- posite description of our specimens is as follows:—Pileus 44 to 7 inches in diameter, globose then convex, white some- times with a silvery tinge, shining, covered with scattered warts which have a broad base of puckered membrane and a projecting ragged apex as if a piece of tissue paper had been twisted round with the fingers, with large soft ragged fragments of the veil attached to the edge. Gills just reach- ing the stem, moderately close, of a dirty creamy-white colour, drying to a darker tint. Stem up to 6 inches high, up to 1? inch thick at the bulbous base and 1 inch in the upper part, solid (in one a little hollowed out above, probably from insects), mealy-white, above sometimes with narrow ragged irregular rings from the veil, sometimes with no ring, the upper part of the bulb smooth, the lower with concentric rings of small warts. Spores 8°5 to 10°4x68 to 72 p, not thick walled. A strong sour smell as of rancid butter. In one specimen the gills showed frequent anastomoses by cross- veins forming elongated cells. Narrabeen, March, 1916; Kendall, December, 1917. AMANITOPSIS. . 91. Amanitopsis punctata, n. sp.—Pileus up to 34 inches in diameter, at first globose, then convex, sometimes gibbous, then plane or slightly depressed, smooth, slightly sticky when moist, edge markedly striate or even sulcate, with occasional patches of the volva especially near the edge when young, very dark grey, greyish-brown or smoky-grey, darker in the centre. Gills just free, showing lines on the adjacent part of the stem, close, greyish-white to very pale smoky-grey, edges darker and finely serrate. Stem 4 to 54 inches high, stout, 4 inch thick below, slightly attenuated upwards, finely striate, hollow below with pith, finely spotted with greyish fibrous scales forming striae below, or with fine dark cobweb- like fibrils. Volva sheathing, ample, greyish-lead colour. Spores spherical, thick-walled, 10°4 to 14, occasionally 17 or 18 ». After heavy rain, Bradley Head, Sydney, March to May; Mosman, April (D. I. C., Watercolour 62; Herb., J. B. C., Formalin Sp. 165) 266 Colour tints noted :—Pileus smoke-grey (pl. 313, Ton 4). Stem flecked with smoke-grey (pl. 313, Ton 4). Gills very pale smoke-grey or greyish-white. Pileus ad 87 cm. latus, primo globosus, deinde convexus, interdum gibbosus, deinde planus aut depressus, glaber, margine striata, fumoso-cinereus. Lamellae _ subdis- junctae, confertae, cinereo-albidae, marginibus percinereo- albidis et subserratis. Stipes 10 ad 13 cm. altus, crassus, sursum subattenuatus, substriatus, deorsum cavus, fumoso-cinereus et punctatus. Volva vaginata, ampla, fumoso-cinerea. Sporae sphericae, 10°4-18 yp. This species is clearly closely related to, but quite dis- tinct from, A. vaginata, Roze, which we have also collected. We have come upon our species on several occasions, and it has always presented the same characters. The colour of the gills, punctate grey stem, and size and shape of the spores are distinctive features. We have designated it ‘“‘punctata’’ from the appearance of the stem. (Pl. xxviii.) ARMILLARIA. 92. Armillaria mellea, Vahl; Cooke: Illustrs., pl. 32; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 47; Clel. and Cheel: Agr. Gaz., N.S. Wales, xxvil., 1916, p. 104, pl. 4.—Arrarat, Vict., May, 1917 (E. J. Semmens, No. 24); National Park, S. Austr., April and June, 1917; Kendall, N.S. Wales, May, 1917; near banana (J/usa, sp.), Botanic Gardens, Sydney, July eestor: In May, 1917, an interesting form was found at Mosman, Sydney, growing in a dense caespitose mass at the base of a stump. The cap was almost black with dense short fibres. There were definite remains of a pale-brownish ring § inch below the cap, whilst just below the cap itself was a flimsy veil rupturing to form a very definite second ring. 93. Armillaria mucida, Schrad., var. exannulata, var. — nov.—Cap up to 4 inches in diameter, slightly convex, then plane, glutinous, edge a little striate, whitish to pale stone- brown, cuticle peels. Gills very slightly sinuate, slhghtly ventricose, moderately distant to distant, white. Stem 34 inches high, slender to quite stout, bulbous below, attenu- ated upwards, slightly fibrously streaked, fibrous, tough, white to whitish, solid. Spores spherical, granular, thick- walled with a ‘‘nucleus,’’ white, 15°5 to 24 p, basidia and hyphae large in proportion. On rotting fallen trunk, Mum- mulgum Brush, near Casino, December, 1916. Even in young specimens we can find no sign of a ring. The plants are obviously like a large ringless Armillarza 267 mucida, and on comparison with dried English specimens received from Miss Wakefield, the spores of the latter are found to be similar to those of our plants but smaller (15:5 to 17°3 w). Obviously the Australian plants are very close relatives to 4. mucida, probably being the Australian repre- sentatives, and, in spite of the complete absence of a ring, we place them under A. mucida as a variety rather than transfer them as a new species to another genus, and so lose their obvious affinity. Pileus ad 10 cm. latus, subconvexus, deinde planus, glutinosus, substriatus, albidus ad subfusco-albidus, cuticulo decor- ticante. Lamellae subsinuatae, subventricosae, subdis- tantes ad distantes, albae. Stipes ad 8 cm. altus, tenuis ad robustus, ad basem bulbosus, albus ad _ albidus, solidus. Sporae sphericae, granulatae, 15°5-24 wp. TRICHOLOMA. 94. Tricholoma muculenta, Berk.: Hook. J., 1845, p. 43; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 50 (W.A.).—The following agaric we are provisionally placing under this specific name, but are not quite sure of its identity with the species :— Pileus 2 inches in diameter, glutinous, white with a tinge of brown at the apex, umbonate (conical), convex then ex- panded. Gills white (drying to a light brown), moderately distant, just adnexed. Stem white, glutinous, solid, faintly striate (?). Caespitose on bare ground. Taste (dry speci- men) mild. Spores white, spherical, 4 to 4°5 p, warty with an apiculus at one end. Milson Island, Hawkesbury River, May 5, 1913. This agrees with the original description, save that the spores are a little smaller (5 to 6 » in Berkeley’s species). No mention is made of the spores being warty. No British species of Tricholoma agrees with our specimen. There is some resemblance between our fungus and the description of Russula virginica, Cooke and Massee. The spores correspond exactly, but our specimen is caespitose, and has not decurrent, crowded gills, and is clearly not a Aussula. 95. Tricholoma colossa, Fr.: Epicr., p. 38; Cooke: Tilustrs., p. 87; Massee: Brit. Fung. Flora, in., p. 182.— A large agaric, usually half buried in the sandy soil, fre- quently occurring after autumn rain in the coastal district near Sydney, seems referable to this species. The description of Tricholoma coarciata given by Cooke and Massee (Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 51) also seems like that of our species, but fig. 5, given by Cooke, is quite different. If this figure is one reconstructed from a rough sketch, and not ’ 268 a true representation of the original, then it may still happen that our species is that given by Cooke, but until this is settled we leave it under 7. colossa. The following is the description of our specimens :—Caespitose. Pileus 3 inches in diameter, convex, brownish-tan, somewhat squamulose and cracking, edge turned in when young. Gills crowded, straw- coloured, becoming discoloured rufous, adnate. Stem stout, 24 inches x 14 inch thick, somewhat bulbous, discoloured reddish-brown, white above. Flesh showing pink at the base of the stem and under the.cap. Spores pear-shaped, white, 7x52 p. Newcastle (Miss Clarke), April, 1915. Other specimens show a cap convex to plane, and finally often up- turned, up to 44 inches in diameter, shining, fawn to reddish- brown, when old often very dark reddish-brown and slimy, broken up more or less into scales; flesh thick; gills adnate or sinuately adnexed, spores 5°5 to 6°8 x 3°8 to 4°2 w, in some specimens apparently of this species 7 to 85x52 to 7 p. Narrabeen, April; Sydney, April and May; Hawkesbury River, April. CLITOCYBE. { SECT. I.—DISCIFORMES. 96. Clitocybe media, Peck.—Peck’s description (N. York State Mus., Mus. Bull. 157, p. 61) is as follows:—“‘‘Pileus fleshy, convex, becoming plane or slightly depressed in the centre, often wavy or irregular on the margin, not polished, greyish-brown or blackish-brown, flesh white, taste mild; lamellae broad, subdistant, adnate or decurrent, whitish, the interspaces often venose ; stem equal or nearly so, solid, elastic. coloured like or a little paler than the pileus; spores ellip- soid, 8x5 -p.- Pileus 5 to 19 cm. broad; stem 2°5 to 5 em, long, 8 to 16 mm. thick. Gregarious or scattered. Mossy ground in woods.”’ We have not had access to his plates of the species. The following South Australian plants approximate to the descrip- tion of C. media, though differing in some details, e.g., the pallid-whitish stem. They differ from C. nebularis, Batsch, in their larger spores, and from C. clavipes, Pers., in the non-clavate stem and non-decurrent gills. There seems justi- fication for the present in placing them under C. media. Pileus up to 6 inches across, convex, then plane or a little upturned, somewhat irregular and wavy, subgibbous, matt, centre smoky-brown, the rest moist-looking yellowish- stony-brown. Flesh whitish, moist-looking in places. Gills adnate, close; whitish, then rather pallid or creamy. Stem up to 1? inch high, slender to stout (un to ? inch thick), rather attenuated in the middle, slightly fibrillose or fibrously 269 streaked, solid, pallid whitish. Hardly any smell. Spores 85 to 104x5 pw. In a garden amongst grass, Beaumont, Adelaide, and on the Mount Lofty Range above Beaumont amongst grass under a tree, June, 1917. (Miss Rennie, Watercolour No. 3.) | ec 97. Clitocybe jonophila, Peck.—Peck’s description (N. York State Mus., Mus. Bull. 157, p. 63) is as follows:— “Pileus fleshy, thin, convex becoming umbilicate or centrally depressed, glabrous, pale-tan colour when moist, paler when dry, odour and taste farinaceous; lamellae moderately close, subarcuate, adnate or slightly decurrent, whitish; stem equal, glabrous or slightly pruinose, coloured like the pileus; spores broadly ellipsoid or subglobose, 5 to 6x4 to 5 pw. Pileus about 2°5 cm. broad; stem 2°5 to 5 cm. long, 2 to 4 mm. thick. Gregarious. Under or near pine trees. Sometimes the pileus becomes striate on the margin in drying.” Though the spores of the following Australian plants growing under pines are slightly narrower and the gills seem to have a greyish tint, 1t seems probable from Peck’s descrip- tion that they may be his species. Possibly they are better referred to the Sect. Orbiformes. Pileus up to 2 inches across, convex or plane, sometimes slightly depressed, thin, surface matt, when moist greyish-brown and translucent, when dry pallid brownish and opaque, edge turned in when young. Gills adnate to slightly decurrent, close, pallid whitish then pallid greyish. Stem up to 2 inches high, moderately slender, shightly attenuated downwards, slightly striate, often flat- tened, pallid brownish or pallid greyish-brown, hollow. Very sight fragrant mealy odour. Spores 5°2 to 7x2°5 to 3 wp. Amongst grass, apparently usually (always[?]) under Pinus. Beaumont, near Adelaide, and National Park, S. Austr., June, 1917; amongst pine needles under Pinus, Craigie, Ararat (EK. J. Semmens, No. 146). aoe 98. Clitocybe dealbata, var. minor, Cooke: Handb., p. 50; Cooke: Illustrs., pl. 173.—Small plants, growing on the ground or attached to grass or fern roots at Milson Island, Hawkesbury River, in April and November, seem to be var. minor of this species. They were pure white, sometimes with a yellowish tinge when old, convex and somewhat irregular, with moderately distant gills. Occasional specimens were truncate above, descending conically with deeply decurrent gills. Spores elliptical, 5°5 to 66x34 up. SECT. IV.—-CYATHIFORMES. 99. Chitocybe cyathiformis, var. cinerascens, Fr.— We have collected specimens of this variety at Mosman, Sydney, 270 in March, May, and June, and at Lisarow in May. Reticu- lations have not been noted on the stems. The description of our plants is as. follows:—Pileus up to 14 inch in diameter, very thin, translucent, pale greyish-brown, striate, sometimes somewhat rugose, umbilicate to infundibuliform. Gills moder- ately crowded, deeply decurrent, branching and anastomosing. Stem up to 2} inches high, tubular, and the hollow centre sometimes apparently communicating with the funnel-shaped cap, base slightly bulbous, of the same colour as the cap but browner below. Spores pear-shaped with a large vesicle, 7 to 85x42 to 5 p. Under trees, sometimes on rotten wood. (D. I. C., Watercolour 38.) 3 SECT. V.—ORBIFORMES. 100. Clitocybe paraditopa, n. sp.—We have met with the following species of Clitocybe on several occasions in New South Wales and South Australia. It has usually been found on or in the neighbourhood of cow-dung, and, if this habit is a necessity, is evidently an introduced species. From the descriptions and from Cooke’s illustrations of C. ditopa, Fr., it seems close to this species but, from comparison with dried plants kindly forwarded to us from England by Miss EK. M. Wakefield; is clearly not identical with it. It also seems, from the description, to be close to C. subditopoda, Peck. Its outstanding feature, is a strong scent of wattle blossom, noticeable even at a distance as when walking near. Pileus 14 to 24 inches in diameter, slightly convex and irregular, the centre sometimes slightly depressed or almost infundibuliform, sometimes obscurely gibbous, smooth, when moist shining moist-looking pallid stony-grey to brownish, drying from the centre, which become pallid fawn, and finally pallid white and shining, sometimes when dry dingy greyish- white, edge incurved when young. Gills moderately crowded to moderately distant, adnate, sometimes somewhat decur- rent, rather thick, narrow, French grey, dark grey or violet- grey, becoming dark greyish-brown. Stem 14 to 2 inches high, moderately stout or slender, often compressed and deformed, slightly fibrously streaked, rigid, usually markedly hollow, occasionally when young nearly stuffed, whitish. Often densely caespitose and deformed, on bare rich soil or under Casuarina twigs, etc., in or near cow-dung or in pas- tures. Strong scent of wattle blossom (Acacia pycnantha or suaveolens). Spores with one end a little pointed, 5:2 to 6°8 x 2°6 to 3°6 p. Milson Island, Hawkesbury River, April to July; The Oaks, N.S. Wales, June, 1914; Adelaide, July, 1914 (spores 7x3°8 pw). (Miss Clarke, Watercolour 79; D. I. C., Watercolours 50 and 51.) 271 Pileus 3°7 ad 6-2 cm. latus, subconvexus et irregularis, mcdo depressus, modo subgibbosus, glaber, hygrophanus, pallido-cinereo-fuscus, siccatus pallidus et mitidus. Lamellae adnatae, interdum subdecurrentes, angustae, pallido-cinereae aut violaceo-cinereae, deinde cinereo- fuscae. Stipes 3°7 ad 5 cm. latus, saepe distortus, cavus, albidus. Habitus saepe caespitosus. _ Odor fragrans. Spores 5°2-6°8 x 2°6-3'6. p. Coloured figures of this new species were Pree ared by the Government Printer of New South Wales several years ago for publication in the Agricultural Gazette of N.S. Wales. Owing to the war such publication has had to be postponed, but it is hoped that the plate may appear in that journal during 1920. CANTHARELLUS. 101. Cantharellus lilacinus, n. sp.—Pileus up to 1 inch in diameter, convex and edge turned in when young, then slightly convex or even depressed, often deformed, surface matt or almost floccose, of a brilliant artificial-looking pinky- lilac. Gills markedly decurrent from the first, very distant, often branching, many short, edge rather thick, white or with a lilac tint. Stem up to 14 inch long, 3/16ths inch thick, moderately stout, equal, iting above, a pale dull-yellow below. Flesh thick, lilac above, that. of the stem white. Spores pear-shaped, 7 to 85x45 to 55 pw. Under Kuzzea bushes, Gladesville, Sydney, June, 1916. (Miss Clarke, Watercolour 115.) | Pileus ad 2°5 cm. latus, convexus, deinde subconvexus aut depressus, saepe distortus, subfloccosus, rosaceo-lilacinus. Lamellae decurrentes, distantes, saepe furcatae, margin- ibus crassis, albae vel sublilacino-albae. Stipes ad 377 em. altus, 5 cm. crassus, equalis, sursum lhilacinus, deorsum pallido-croceus. Caro crassa, sursum lilacina, in stipite alba. Sporae pyriformes, 7-8°5 x 4°5-5'5 wp. GE xedx:; fig...1.) 102. Cantharellus imperatae, n. sp.—The following species, which we refer to the genus Cantharellus, though it approaches Clitocybe, has occurred during successive years on a patch of the grass Imperata arundinacea growing at Neutral Bay, Sydney. It especially occurs after heavy rains when the grass has been burnt and is attached in small gregarious masses to the bases of the stems near the ground. Pileus up to 3 inch or more in diameter, convex, subgibbous, then plane or a little depressed, somewhat irregular, edge turned in especially when young, surface matt, pale fawny-white in centre with the periphery paler or nearly pure white, later 272 with a brownish tint. Gills adnate, then decurrent, edges rather thick and entire, moderately distant, sometimes branch- ing and connected by irregular cross-veins, white with an orange tint when dry. Stem up to 1# inches high, markedly attenuated downwards, slightly hollow, white and somewhat mealy above, mouldy greenish-grey and mealy below. Spores obliquely pear-shaped or flask-shaped, one end acute, with a central globule, 9 to 13°83 x 5°2 to 7 wp. Neutral Bay, Sydney, February, March, and almost at any time after heavy rain. Pileus ad 1°5 cm. aut plus latus, convexus, subgibbosus, deinde planus vel subdepressus, paulo irregularis, margine _ inverto, subcervino-albidus vel albus, deinde subfusco- albidus. Lamellae adnatae, deinde decurrentes, margin- ibus crassis, subdistantes, interdum furcatae et venis connectantibus, albae. Stipes ad 2 cm. altus, deorsum attenuatus, subcavum, sursum albus et subfarinaceus, deorsum sub-viride-glaucus et farinaceus. Sporae obliquae, pyriformes, 9-13°8x 52-7 wp. As indicated under Clitocybe paraditopa (No. 100), it is hoped that a coloured figure of this species, the plate of which has been prepared for some years, may be published in the Agricultural Gazette of N.S. Wales in 1920. 103. Cantharellus nigripedes, n. sp.—Pileus 2 inch in diameter, slightly convex to nearly plane, centre sometimes depressed, very thin, distantly ribbed, rather fragile, white with a pale-brownish tint, darker in the centre, edge turned in when young. Gulls adnate, pure white, moderately dis- tant, many short, sometimes with irregular branching veins, edges a little thick. Stem up to 14 inch high, very slender, slightly attenuated downwards, tough, black except near the apex which is white, nearly wholly white when very young, slightly greyish-mealy. Spores(?) 4x2°5 »p. Attached by a very small disk to fallen trees, etc., near brush. Murwill- umbah, N.S. Wales, April, 1916. (Herb., J. B. C., Form. Sp. 204.) Pileus ad 2 cm. latus, subconvexus ad subplanus, tenuis, costatus, subfragilis, albidus sed pallido-fusco tinctus. Lamellae adnatae, albae, subdistantes, interdum venis irregularibus et ramosis, marginibus crassis. Stipes ad 3°75 cm. altus, pertenuis, deorsum attenuatus, lentus, niger sed apice albo. Sporae(?) 4x 2°5 up. 104. Cantharellus corrugatus, n. sp.—Pileus 1 inch in diameter, irregularly convex, then expanded with the edge a little flattened, the edge turned in when young, when moist semitranslucent greyish-white and striate, drying from the centre to become pure white and scarcely striate. Gills 273 distant, many short, sometimes forked and connected by numerous transverse wrinkles, white. Stem 24 inches high, a little wavy, becoming attenuated at the base, hollow, rather cartilaginous, white with a slight brown tint below. Spores 7 to 85x3°8 p. Subcaespitose amongst dead wood at the base of a log. Kendall, May, 1917. (Miss Clarke, Water- eqlounmetou; EHierb.. J. B. C., Forms Sp, 282.) Pileus 2°5 cm. latus, irregulariter convexus, deinde expansus, primum margine incurvato, substriatus, semitranslucidus et subcinereo-albidus, siccatus albus. Lamellae distantes, interdum furcatae, venis frequentibus connectantibus, albae. Stipes 6°2 cm. altus, deorsum attenuatus, cavus, albus, deorsum subfusco-albidus. Sporae 7-8°5 x 3°8 p. Plantae subcaespitosae. We have given the specific name “‘corrugatus’’ to the species on account of the wrinkled appearance presented by the intercommunicating veins. (PI. xxix., fig. 2.) 105. Cantharellus foliolum, Kalch.: Grev., ix., 134; Nace: Syll., v., 1956; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi., No. 414 (Q.)—We have specimens, apparently of this species, taken on fallen sticks and twigs at Mosman, Sydney, in April and November. The plants are small and pure white, show- ing a greyish tinge in drying. The gills are very irregular. Sporesmpeat-csnaped, 12 to 13:8x72%n.) (elerb., J. B. C., Form Sp. 88.) LAcTARIUS. SUBGENUS I.—PIPERITES. 106. Lactarius (Piperites) stenophyllus, Berk.: FI. Hasmei., p. 248 t. 181, fig. 8; Cooke: andb, Austr. Fungi, No. 388.—A comparison of the following specimens with Berkeley’s rather crude figure of this species leaves no doubt in our minds that they are one and the same. Before referring to Berkeley’s description, we had noted the re- - semblance to L. insulsus. Our plants we describe as follows :— Pileus up to 3 inches across, convex, often irregular, usually markedly infundibuliform, pale yellowish-brown, often some- what zoned, slightly viscid when moist, edge markedly incurved when young. Gills very crowded, adnate to slightly decurrent, creamy-yellow becoming dirty yellowish-brown, apparently not pruinose from the spores. Stem up to 14 inches high, moderately slender to stout, slightly expanded above, white, rather mealy. Exuding copious white milk from the gills on the slightest injury and juice from the stem. Instantly peppery. Spores warty, spherical, 5 wp. Under trees, Ryde, Sydney, May, 1916. (Miss Clarke, Watercolour 105.) 274 SUBGENUS III.—RUSSULARIA. 107. Lactarius (Russularia) subtomentosus, B. and Rav. : Ann. Nat. Hist., Oct., 1869; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 391 (Vict., N.S. Wales)—Specimens which we refer to this species have been obtained at the Hawkesbury River and at Lisarow, both in May. Their description is as follows :—Pileus 44 inches in diameter, convex to irregularly infundibuliform (funnel-shaped), brownish-umber, villous looking, rigid. Gills pale cream, distant, many short, deep, decurrent. Milk abundant, white, mild. Stem up to 2 inches long, usually rather eccentric, double in one speci- men, matt, pale brownish to brown, becoming hollow. Spores spherical, warted, 7 to 9 uw. Under trees. 108. Lactarwus (Russularia) serifluus, Fr.: Epicr., p. 345; Cooke: Illustrs., 1012; Massee: Brit. Fung. Flora, i1., p. 32.—Our specimens may be described as follows:—Pileus when small convex and slightly umbonate, later expanded with centre depressed and sometimes infundibuliform, rich reddish-tan to dark velvety reddish-brown. Gills adnate, some forked near the stem or near the edge, some very short ones interposed near the edge between long ones, very pale brown to salmon or tawny-white. Stem central or eccentric from distortion, reddish-brown lke the cap, whitish at the base, finally hollow. Slghtly caespitose under trees. Spores very rough, spherical to oval, 6°5 to 7, 8x65 p. Neutral Bay, Sydney, May, June, November; Lane Cove River, June; Bulli Pass, November. RUSSULA. 109. Russula adusta, Fr.: -Epicr., p. 350; Cooke: Illustrs., pl. 1051; Massee: Brit. Fung. Flora, 1n., p. 52.— We have collected this species on three occasions. The follow- ing is the description of specimens from the Blue Mountains obtained in May, 1914:—-Pileus convex, deeply depressed, pallid becoming tinged darker brown, not viscid, rigid, edge ~ turned in. Flesh becoming dark grey. Gills crowded, fading off towards the stem, pure white becoming dark greyish-black. Stem 1 inch high, 2 inch thick, white becoming sooty, finely pruinose. Taste mild. Spores warty, slightly oval, 85x8 p (in the other collections, the spores are spherical to irregular, 7 to 9 »). In specimens collected at Lane Cove River, Sydney, in May, fine woolly scales were noted on the cap. 110. Russula Flocktonae, n. sp.—Pileus up to 4 inches in diameter, irregularly convex, then depressed, pale pinkish- fawn, pale yellowish-brown, dull reddish-orange or brilliant velvety buff-orange. Gills adnate, moderately to widely separate, occasionally bifurcating, interspersed with short 275 ones, pure white, becoming darker and pruinose from the spores. Stem 1 to 14 inch high, stout, sometimes attenu- ated downwards, solid, reddish-brown to pinkish-buff. Sub- stance white. Taste mild, occasionally slightly peppery. Spores elliptical, warty, 8°5 to 108x7 to 85 p, occasionally more spherical. Elongated cystidia, 26 w long, seen in two collections. On the ground under trees, Ryde, Sydney, May; The Spit and Bradley Head, Sydney, June; Lane Cove River, Sydney, May; Hawkesbury River, April, June; Terrigal, June. (Miss Margaret L. Flockton, Watercolour A.) We have been unable to find any figure or description agreeing with this species, and so describe it as new. We have named it in honour of Miss Flockton, who has admirably delineated it, and who for many years has taken a special interest in fungi. Pileus ad 10 cm. latus, irregulariter convexus, deinde depressus, pallido-rosaceo-cervinus ad luteo-aurantiacus. Lamellae adnatae, subdistantes ad distantes, interdum bifurcatae, albae deinde pallidae et pruinosae. Stipes 25 ad 4 cm. altus, robustus, interdum deorsum attenu- atus, solidus, rubro-subfuscus ad rosaceo-cervinus. Caro alba. Insipidus, interdum subpiperatus. Sporae ellip- ticae, verrucosae, 8'5-10°8 x 7-8°5 ». Interdum cystidiis. As indicated under Clitocybe paraditopa (No. 100), it is hoped that coloured plates of this species, with others, may be published in the Agricultural Gazette of N.S. Wales te ROO.) 2 111. Russula Mariae, Peck.—Peck’s description (N. York State Mus., Bull. 75, 1903 (1904), p. 29, pl. 85, figs. 1-8) of this species is as follows: —‘‘Pileus at first nearly hemispheric, soon broadly convex, nearly plane or centrally depressed, pruinose and minutely pulverulent, dark crimson or purplish, sometimes darker in the centre than on the margin, rarely striate on the margin when old, flesh white, pinkish under the cuticle, taste mild; lamellae moderately close, adnate, white when young, pale yellow when old; stem equal, solid or slightly spongy in the centre, coloured like or a little paler than the pileus, usually white at the top and bottom, rarely entirely white; spores pale yellow, globose, ‘003 of an inch broad.”’ From this description and from the coloured figures given by Peck, we think there is little doubt that the common mild-tasted purple-capped Mussula with a rosy-pink stem found in the Sydney district is R. Mariae. Perhaps the specimens of R. purpurea, Gill. (FR. Queletu, var. purpurea, vide Massee), recorded by Cooke (No. 395) for Victoria are also this species, but R. purpwrea is an acrid species. 276 We describe our specimens as follows:—Pileus up to 21 inches in diameter, convex, centre depressed, edge some- times turned up, of various tints of dark purple, purplish-red, rosy-purple, or pallid yellow, the general tone being purplish, edge slightly striate, cuticle occasionally apparently slightly sticky when moist. Flesh white, perhaps faintly purple under the thick cuticle. Gulls moderately close, white, becoming pale yellowish, fading away at the stem to adnate. Stem moderately stout, a little swollen below or sometimes attenu- ated downwards, tinged with rosy-pink, rarely whitish only, hollow, pithy, base rooting. Spores warty; spherical to slightly oval, 72 to9 pw. Taste mild. Sydney, May; Milson Island, Hawkesbury River, March, April, May, November ; Mount Lofty, S. Austr., July (gills yellow). Portions fed to a pig and to a rabbit produced no ill-effects. (Muss Clarke, Watercolour 65.) The following are in the National Collection at the Botanic Gardens, Sydney:—Helensburgh (W. Craigie) ; Leura (A. A. Hamilton), April, 1908; Mosman (E. Cheel), May, 1912; Gladesville (Miss M. Flockton), April, 12205 Hawkesbury River (J. B. Cleland), April, 1910; Brownsville (E. Cheel), April, 1910. 112. Russula xerampelina, Fr.: Epicr., p. 356; Cooke: Illustrs., pls. 1053 and 1074; Massee: Brit. Fung. Flora, Bia Oe 60. —We refer the following to this species. It agrees well with the illustrations given “by Cooke:—Pileus up to 34 inches across, irregular, rather depressed in the centre, splitting and cracking, pallid whitish blotched with bright- brownish vermilion. Gulls adnate, moderately close, some- times forking, occasionally in deformed specimens forming irregular pores near the stem, pale buffy-white. Stem 24 inches high, 14 inch thick above, stout, attenuated down- wards, root rather conical, fibrously striate, white with tinges of pinkish. Flesh solid, white. Shght smell. Rather rigid. Taste mild. Spores pale-tinted microscopically, warty, 85 to — 105 p. Partly buried in the ground. Mount Lofty, SeoAusueyopril, Lod7: 113. Russula azwrea, Bres.: Fungi Trident., t. 24; Cooke: Illustrs., pl. 1088; Massee: Brit. Fung. Flora, 111., p. 57.—The following resembles Cooke’s illustrations of &. cyanoxantha, Schaeff., but cystidia have not been found. For the present at least we refer it to R. az urea, Which resembles R. cyanoxantha, and has no cystidia: —Pileus 1 inch across, convex and dimpled atop, finally 3 inches across and depressed, definitely sticky when moist, not striate, when small the colour usually blotchy purplish with stone tints between, sometimes with distinct greenish tinges; tending to crack into small 277 purplish-brown scales or to become blotchy bluish-green and brownish-yellow in the centre, when old pale brownish with shades of dull bluish-green, cuticle separable. Gills adnate, close, all equal, sometimes forked, sometimes slightly anas- tomosing at the stem, diminishing towards the stem and rounded externally, white or creamy. Stem up to 1? inch high and up to 3 inch thick, slightly attenuated downwards, mealy, very slightly striate, solid, white. Taste mild. Shed spores white, spherical, warty, 7 to 85 wp. Neutral Bay, Sydney, March and May, 1917; Narrabeen, March, 1916; North Bridge, Sydney, July, 1916. (Miss Clarke, Water- colour 147.) A similar plant obtained at Sydney in March, 1916, had a very slightly peppery taste. Probably the same species, with the cap pallid brownish-white with dull greyish- green blotches, was collected at Mount Lofty, S. Austr., in April, 1917 (spores 6 to 7 p). 114. Russula granulosa, Cooke: Handb., p. 332; Cooke: Illustrs., pl. 1038; Massee: Brit. Fung. Flora, 11., p. 69.— The punctate brown spots on the stem, the cystidia, and the acrid taste seem to indicate with reasonable certainty that the following is this species:—Pileus when young somewhat dome-shaped and irregular with the edge sharply turned in, then irregularly convex, finally expanding up to 4 inches in diameter, smooth but sometimes with a few wrinkles, or slightly fibrously streaked, edge plicate, somewhat viscid when moist, cuticle not separable, yellowish-brown. Flesh thick, becoming attenuated towards the edge, white. Gulls adnate to adnexed, moderately close, edges darker and very slightly serrate, creamy, when bruised becoming brownish. Stem 1$ to 24 inches high, attenuated downwards, mealy-white with a tinge of ochre or with fine scattered punctate brown spots. Taste intensely peppery and somewhat bitter. Spores warty, 7 to 9 pw; a few projecting acuminate cystidia, A2x12 p. Narrabeen, March, 1916, and February, 1917; Kew, January, 1917; Neutral Bay, Sydney, March, 1917. (Miss Clarke, Watercolour 90.) 115. Russula pectinatoides, Peck.—Peck’s description (N. York State Mus., Bull. 116, p. 90) of this species is as fol- lows :—‘‘Pileus thin, broadly convex, becoming nearly plane or centrally depressed, viscid when moist, widely tuberculose striate on the margin, dingy straw colour, brownish, yellowish- brown or cinerous brown, sometimes darker in the centre, flesh white, greyish-white under the separable pellicle, taste mild or slightly and tardily acrid; lamellae thin, equal or with an occasional short one, some forked at the base, adnate, white becoming pallid ; stem equal or nearly so, even, glabrous, spongy within, white; spores whitish, subglobose ; ‘00025--0003 278 of an inch long, nearly or quite as broad. Pileus 1-3 inches broad; stem 1-2 inches long, 3-4 lines thick.’’ From this description and from Peck’s figures, we believe the following to be this species. The stem is, however, usually attenuated downwards and-grey under the cap has not been noted:—Pileus up to 3 inches in diameter, slightly convex to infundibuliform, periphery more or less striate, the striae sometimes showing small rounded warts on the ridges, smooth, viscid when moist, edge thin and not turned in, yellowish-brown and paler in the centre, or a brownish centre with a pale-fawn periphery or olive-brown or paleolive. Gills sinuately adnexed or adnato-decurrent, usually fading away near the stem, moderately close, thick, cream becoming spotted with brown or becoming pallid brownish-white. Stem 14 inch high, about 2 inch across above, usually attenuated down- wards to 2 inch below, sometimes equal, slightly streaky, solid, white or white with a faint greyish tinge. Flesh white, thick in the centre, very thin towards the edge. Taste mild. Spores with a pale-yellow tint, spherical to subspherical, warty, 7to 10. Under trees, Neutral Bay, Sydney, March, April, May, June; Bulli Pass, April; Hawkesbury River, June; Manly, April. 116. Russula emetica, Fr.: Epicr., p. 357; Cooke: Illustrs., pl. 1030; Massee: Brit. Fung. Flora, i1., p. 73; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 399 (N.S. Wales, Vic- toria, Tasm.).—An acrid species with a red cap and a tinge of pink on the stem, though in stature more resembling #. fragilis, we believe to be R. emetica, as the former is not stated to possess a pink tinge to the stem. Other acrid speci- mens, very similar but with pure white stems, may be the same species as the ones with pink tinges to the stems, but as the stature and general appearance resemble so closely R. fragilis, we at present leave them under that species. Our pink-stemmed specimens have a bitter pungent taste and — a purplish to purplish-pink cap. Spores warty, 85 to 10°4x52 to 85 p. Sydney, June. 117. Russula fragilis, Fr:; Epicr., p. 359; Cooke; Illustrs., pl. 1091; Massee: Brit. Fung. Flora, i., p. 755 Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 400 (Q’land, Vict., S. Austr.).—Specimens, with the stature and general appear- ance of this species, have been found at Neutral Bay, Sydney, in June, and at The Spit, Sydney, in July. These may be described as follows:—Pileus 1 inch in diameter, depressed in the centre, deep crimson, edge slightly striate. Flesh reddish under the cuticle. Gills close, adnate, white. Stem 14 inch thick, slightly fibrously striate, solid. Taste acrid. Spores warty, spherical to oval, 8°5 to 105 yp. 279 118. Russula erumpens, n. sp.—FPileus up to 3 inches in diameter, depressed to infundibuliform, pure white or with a dirty-brown tint, surface dull, not polished. Flesh white. Gills adnate, from depression of the pileus with rather a decurrent tooth, crowded, creamy-white, when old rufescent. Stem 1+ to 2 inches high, 4 to # inch thick, sometimes a little excentric, white or slightly brown-tinted below, stout, equal, solid, dull, not polished. Spores pale rusty, spherical to slightly oval, verrucose, 7 p, 85x77 p. Taste mild. Emerg- ing covered with soil. Neutral Bay, Sydney, January to May (after heavy rain), October and November; Mailson Island, Hawkesbury River, April; Eagle on the Hill, Mount Lofty Ranges, S. Austr., April, 1917 (pileus up to 44 inches across; spores 85 to 10°4x7 to 78 p, microscopically appar- ently white). (Miss Clarke, Watercolour 63.) Pileus ad 7°5 cm. latus, depressus ad infundibuliformis, albus vel subfusco-albidus, non nitidus. Caro alba. lLamellae adnatae, confertae, subluteo-albidae, deinde subochraceae. Stipes 3 to 5 cm. altus, 1°25 ad 1°8 cm. crassus, interdum subexcentricus, crassus, solidus, non nitidus, albus. Sapor non piperatus. Sporae subochraceae, sphericae ad sub- ellipticae, verrucosae, 7 p, 85x7 uw. At one time we thought our species might be Mussula periglypta, B. and Br., of Ceylon. Through the kindness of Mr. T. Petch, of Peradeniya Gardens, Ceylon, we have received coloured drawings and dried specimens of the Ceylon species which show that the two are clearly distinct. As indicated under Clitocybe paraditopa (No. 100), it is hoped that a coloured figure of this species, the plate of which has been prepared for several years, will be published in the Agricultural Gazette of N.S. Wales in 1920. CoLLyYBIA. SECT. I.—-STRIAEPEDES. 119. Coliybta radicata, Relh. (Syn. C. eradicata, Kalch. ; C. olivaceo-alba, Cke. and Mass.).—The typical form is recorded by Cooke (No. 78) for Victoria, Queensland, Tas- mania, and Western Australia. C. eradicata (Cooke, No. 79) is recorded for New South Wales and Victoria; as it differs from C. radicata only in the stem not being rooting and not being thickened at the base, we adopt Cooke’s suggestion that it may be possibly only an accidental variety of the latter, and so sink ('. eradicata as a synonym. C. olivaceo- alba is recorded in Cooke (No. 82), and for Kogarah, New South Wales, by R. T. Baker (Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, . xxiv. (1899), p. 446) for Victoria and South Australia. From 280 the description and from Cooke’s plate, it is apparent that C’. olivaceo-alba closely resembles C’. radicata, the chief point of difference being the black base of the stem of the former. In May, 1915, we found specimens of (. radicata in the Sydney district with whitish bases to the stems and growing near these, plants with the abrupt black bases of C. olivaceo-’ alba. Obviously both were the same species, and both showed the large spores—in this case 12 to 13°8 x 104 p—character- istic of C. radicata and of C. olivaceo-alba. Apparently, therefore, the black-based plants are only a form of C. radicata not yet breeding true, and so not entitled to be established as a variety or species. We consider that a variety is a departure from the type due to some innate change and breeding true, whilst a form is a departure from type not necessarily breeding true, sometimes being merely a recog- nizable or an extreme variation in a variable species, some-— times being the result merely of environment, as in de- pauperate examples. On these grounds we sink C. olwvaceo- alba to the level of a synonym of C. radicata. SECT. II.—VESTIPEDES. 120. Collybia velutipes, Fr. Cooke: loc. cit., No. 85(Vict.). —On a fallen log near Wauchope, N.S. Wales, in February, 1917, a number of dried specimens of a Collybia were found almost identical with dried specimens of C. velutipes kindly forwarded by Miss E. M. Wakefield from England. They revived perfectly on being placed in water, but were not then viscid; the edge of the cap was also tuberculo-striate, which is not mentioned in the description of C. velutipes. Spores 7 to, usually, 85x52; of the English specimens 8 to 85x34 p. 121. Collybia confluens, Pers. Massee: Brit. Fung. Flora, iii., p. 130.—Plants collected: by E. J. Semmens (No. 40) amongst pine needles ut Craigie, near Ararat, Victoria, in June, 1917, seem indistinguishable from dried English specimens of this species Bee from Miss E. M. Wakefield. Spores 5 to 7x3 wp. 122. Collybia ingrata, Schum. Massee: Brit. Fung. Flora, ii., p. 131.—Pileus up to 24 inches across, convex, gibbous, the thin edge rather upturned, edge frayed, some- what striate, pale to dark brown, sometimes chestnut. Gills adnate, moderately to very crowded, rather thick, edges finely serrate, livid or pallid brown. Stem up to 3 inches long, wavy, slender, clad with a dense velvetty-greyish bloom, stem brown: when this is rubbed off, when moist brownish with a white bloom, cartilaginow, rather stringy. Spores with one 281 end more pointed, 7 to 9x3°4 to 4 p. Under bushes, Mos- man, Sydney, April, May. 123. Collybia stuprtaria, Fr. Massee: Brit. Fung. Flora, ii., p. 129.—We have collected this species on one occasion on Milson Island, Hawkesbury River, in March. As men- tioned by C. G. Lloyd (Mycolog. Notes, No. 100), it revives on moistening like a Marasmius. The description of our speci- mens is as follows:—Pileus # inch in diameter, convex, thin, tough, reddish-tan. Gulls moderately crowded, pale brown, slightly decurrent. Stem up to # inch high, base slightly swollen, hollow, villous, dark brown. Spores elliptical, 44 to 52x25 to 34 p. Attached to the bases of living grass stems. (D. I. C., Watercolour 33.) HyGROPHORUS. SUBGENUS HyGROCYBE. 124. Hygrophorus miniatus, Fr. Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 383 (Q’land, Vict.) —Our specimens approach H. coccineus in having a tendency to decurrence in the gills and occasionally a trace of yellow at the base of the stem. The spores are also a little smaller than those given for H. miniatus or H. coccineus. Our specimens may be dsecribed as follows:—Pileus $ to 1 inch in diameter, convex, some- times a little dimple in the centre or umbilicate, sometimes irregular, sometimes upturned, sometimes slightly rugose and sometimes slightly squamulose, crimson, sometimes orangey- crimson or reddish-orange or pinky-scarlet. Flesh reddish. Gills distant, yellowish or rosy-pink or pallid, edge rather thick, adnate, becoming decurrent from depression of the puleus or with a decurrent tooth. Stem 11 to 24 inches high, dilated upwards, solid, sometimes hollow, crimson, with base sometimes slightly yellowish or the buried part whitish and fluffy. Spores elliptical 7 to 8°5 pw, occasionally 10°4 x 3°6 to 68 p. Amongst moss or under trees. Neutral Bay, Sydney, May; Lisarow, May; Mount Wilson, Blue Moun- tains, June; Leura, June; Blue Mountains, July; National Park, July; Oxford Falls, Narrabeen (Darnell-Smith), October; Tuggerah, October; Hawkesbury River, November. 125. Hygrophorus conicus, Fr. Cooke: loc. cit., No. 384 (Vict.).—Our collections of this species may be described as follows :—Pileus # inch in diameter, elongated globular, then convex with an. acute umbo, fibrillosely streaked, yellowish- green or dark greyish-brown, turning black with black fibrils. Gills just free or just smuately adnexed, triangular, yellowish becoming grey or dark grey. Stem 24 to 34 inches high, rather fibrillose and twisted, the fibrils later becoming 282 blackish, pallid brownish, with scattered black cobweb-like lines, or yellowish-green, becoming hollow. Spores ellip- tical, almost colourless, often with apparently a watery blackish tint, 9 to 1046 to 7 w. Under shrubs. Lisarow, May; Neutral Bay, Sydney, May; Mosman, Sydney, June; Mount Lofty Ranges, S. Austr., June, 1917. 126. Hygrophorus psittacinus, Schaeff. Massee: Brit. Fung. Flora, 11., p. 341.—The following specimen seems to be best referred to this species:—Pileus up to 1 inch in diameter, somewhat conical, then convex, then expanded, dark green, browner on top, later pale olive-green, not appar- ently viscid, silky shining, rigid. Gills sinuate, thick, moderately distant, greyish flesh in colour. Stem 14 inch high, attenuated upwards, reddish- brown, becoming paler, hollow. Spores pear-shaped, 7°2 to 8-5 x 52 pw. On the ground, Blue Mountains, May, 1914. MaRASMIUS. SECT. I.—COLLYBIARII. 127. Marasmius porreus, Fr. Massee: Brit. Fung. Flora, llil., p. 155.—Pileus ? inch in diameter, plane or slightly depressed, striate, brown. Gills ainate, then seceding, close, dirty white. Stem slightly striate, base downy, brown. Shght foetid smell. Complete revival in ‘water. Spores 52x 2'5, 44x2 wp, one end more pointed. Amongst leaves, Manly, April, 1915. (Herb... J. B. C.,- Form spies Though our plants resemble more Cooke’s illustrations of M. erythropus than those of M. porreus, on account of the smell we place them provisionally under the latter. 128. Marasmius alliatus, (Schaeff.) Schrot. (Jf. scoro- domus, Fr. Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 424; Massee: Brit. Fung. Flora, i., p. 162.—Pileus 4 inch or larger, shghtly umbilicate, coarsely but flatly grooved, dirty brownish-white to reddish-brown, paler periphery. Gills adnate, moderately crowded, many short, slightly toothed, pale cream. Stem ? inch high, slender, hollow, smooth, dark reddish-brown. Slight smell of garlic. Attached to fallen leaves, sometimes apparently on the ground, by a slightly bulbous base. Shed spores elongated, pear-shaped or pip- shaped, one end narrower, 87 to 103x36to4p. (D.C, Watercolour 32.) Neutral Bay, Sydney, February, March (spores 10°4 to 12°4x5°3), May; Murwillumbah, April, 1916 ([{?]this species, stem finely mealy, pallid brown, spores 8x 2°5 »); Wiseman’s Ferry, June, 1915. The plate of JM. scorodonius given by Cooke (Illustrs., 1125a) shows plants stouter and with caps and stems brighter rufous than our specimens. 283 129. Marasmius calopus, Fr. Massee: Brit. Fung. Flora, ii., p. 163; Cooke: Illustrs., 11258, and Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 425 (Q’land). — Specimens collected at Mosman, Sydney, in November, 1914, and at Manly in April, 1915, and found growing on fallen twigs, agree with Cooke’s illus- trations. They differ slightly from the description given by Massee in the stem being dark below and paler gpexe, We describe our plants as follows:—Pileus up to 4 inch in diameter, convex, then plane or umbilicate, creamy-white - sometimes with a smoky centre, somewhat sulcate-rugose, edge turned in when young. Gills adnate or adnexed, moderately distant, finely toothed, white. Stem 4 inch or more long, very slender, blackish below, then dark brown suddenly becoming whitish, sometimes almost throughout pale or dark brown, mealy tuberculose below, mealy above, attached by a minute disc. No smell (slight garlicky smell noticed in one collection). Spores rather elongated, one end more pointed, 52 to 7x 2°5 to 34 p. (Miss Clarke, Watercolour 56; Herb., J. B. C., Form. Sps. 49. and unnumbered.) . 130. Marasmius equi-crims, F. v. M.: Grev., vii., 153; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 441 (Vict., N.S. Wales, Qland). (Syn. Thamnomyces hippotrichoides, C. E. Broome ; Alectoria australiensis, Knight. Records in Ann. Rep. Bot. -Gdns., Sydney, 1909 (1910), 10).—The sterile horse-hair-like mycelium is common in the Big Scrub on the Richmond River and in the Dorrigo Scrub, and also in Queensland, specimens having been collected at Enoggera, Coomera, Mount Mistake, Allumbah, Taylor Range, Kerang Creek, and Dalrymple Creek. We have'also specimens collected at Futuma, in the New Hebrides. The mycelium has a superficial resemblance to certain lichens, and has been recorded under the name Alectoria australiensis, Knight, in Bailey’s and Shirley’s works, as pointed out by one of us (Cheel: Proc. Linn. Soc. NS. Wales, xxxu., 1907, p. 475). The following we believe to be a pileate specimen :— Pileus ;', to $ inch in diameter, convex, with about 8 coarse rugae, brown, apex smooth and a little depressed, paler with a dark central knob. Gills adnate and attached to a collar but free from the stem, distant, about 9 or 10 in number, pallid. Stem up to 4 or 5 inches long, smooth, hair-lhke, dark brown or black, abruptly piercing the matrix. Under shrubs on fallen wood or leaves. Mount Wilson, Blue Mountains, June, 1915 (Herb., J. B. C., Formalin Sp. 145). Extensive hair-like light-brownish mycelial threads, found covering fallen leaves, etc., in the neighbourhood of these specimens, may have been the sterile mycelium of this species, though the colour was not the dark brown or black of the stems of the cap-bearing portions. 284 Mycena. SECT. II1.—BASIPEDES. 131. Mycena banksiae, n. sp.—Pileus up to 4 inch in diameter, convex, then nearly plane, viscid, sulcate-striate to near the centre, which may be depressed, covered with a pruinose downiness except in the centre, greyish-white becoming brownish, centre darker. Gills not or scarcely reach- ing the stem to adnate, moderately close, edges not serrate, greyish-white. Stem short, less than 4 to #? inch high, shining, smooth, not definitely viscid, whitish with a slight greyish tint, attached by a small disk to the base of Banksia trunks, dead or hving; we have also found it on dead wood other than Banksia. No smell. Spores subspherical, often with a large “‘nucleus,’’ 68 to 9, 85x17, 8xD, 6xD py ete. No. cystidia. Mosman, April, 1915; Neutral Bay, April, 1915 (pileus conico-convex, pileus and stem with a glaucous bloom, lavender-grey, pileus widely sulcate; gills few, adnate, widely separate, greyish-white; stem swollen below); Neutral Bay, April, May; National Park, N.S. Wales, July, 1916; Bradley Head, Sydney, May, 1917. (Miss Clarke, . Water- colour 52; Herb., J. B. C., Form. Sps. 55 and 63.) Pileus ad 1°25 cm. latus, convexus, deinde subplanus, viscidus, sulcato-striatus, pruinosus, subcinereo-albidus, deinde sub- fusco tinctus. Lamellae subadnatae ad adnatae, subcon- fertae, marginibus non serratis, cubcinereo-albidae. Stipes brevis, 1°25 (minus) cm. altus, nitidus, glaber, subcinereo- albidus, disco parvo. Sporae subsphericae, 68-8, 85 x7, ODA yt. We have named the species banksiae from having frequently found it growing on the trunks of various Bankgiases Geli xxix. ; figs Si) SECT. III.—GLUTINIPEDES. 132. Mycena coccineus, n. sp.—The following beautiful little species seems referable to the genus Mycena. Speci- mens exhibit a tendency to revive when moistened, though this feature is not so definite as in the typical M/arasmius. The gills, adnate when young, also tend to be definitely though slightly decurrent when old, suggesting Clitocybe, whilst their edges are rather thick, thus approaching Cantharellus. In Cooke’s illustrations we can find no species at all resembling it. By its darker denticulate edge to the gills it is probably related to Iycena strobilina and M. rosella, though on account of the glutinous stem when moist we place it in Mycena under Glutinipedes :—Pileus 2 inch in diameter, hemispherical to convex, occasionally dimpled or with a slight 285 obtuse umbo, faintly striate, when moist definitely viscid, of a dark blood-red or rich reddish-crimson colour. Gills adnate, then slightly decurrent, rather thick, moderately close, rose colour or slightly paler than the pileus, edge very slightly darker and finely denticulate. Stem 1 inch high, slender, coloured like the cap, glutinous when moist, hollow, usually attached by a small fluffy disc. On bruising the gills or stem, a little dark-red moisture appears. The colour rapidly disappears in formalin solution. Spores elongated, one end more pointed, very hard to see, 7 to 8°5 x 2'5 to 3'5 wp. Attached to small sticks and leaves in damp shady places. Mosman, Sydney, April, May, and June; Tuggerah, October ; Hawkesbury River; Mount Kembla, November. Colour tints noted:—-Pileus dull carmine-lake (pl. 106, Ton 4); old blood-red (pi. 103, Ton 2). Pileus ad 1 cm. latus, hemisphericus ad convexus, interdum mmbilicatus vel subgibbosus, substriatus, viscidus, sanguineo-coccineus. Lamellae adnate, deinde sub- decurrentes, subcrassae, subconfertae, rosaceo-coccineae, marginibus sanguineo-coccinels et subdenticulatis. Stipes 25 cm. altus, tenuis, cavus, glutinosus, sanguineo- coccineus, ad basem disco. Sporae elongatae, 7-8°5 x Peep (rie xXxix., fig: 4. )yiges SECT. IV.——-LACTIPEDES. _ 133. Mycena sanguinolenta, Alb. and Schw. Massee: Brit. Fung. Flora, iii., p. 89; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fung1, No. 116 (Vict.).—Cooke has recorded this species for Victoria agdesbaker (Proc. Lann. Soc. N.S: Wales, xxxi., p. 720 [1906]) for New South Wales. On several occasions in New South Wales and South Austraha we have met with a Mycena which combines some of the characters of J/. sanguinolenta with some of those of I/. haematopa, Pers. It agrees with the latter in the margin of the pileus being minutely toothed and the juice being prune coloured. It grows amongst leaves or grass on the ground, however, and not on trees or stumps. In size it resembles the former, and also has a dark-red edge to the gills, which in addition are finely toothed. The colour of the juice is darker than that of MM. sangwnolenta given in Cooke’s illustration. At pre- sent we place it, under J/. sanguinolenta, as being probably the Australian species hitherto recorded as such, but it is possible that it may not be either of the two species above mentioned. The description of our specimens is as follows:—Pileus up to 2 inch broad and 4 inch high, submembranaceous conico-campanulate, sometimes finally irregularly upturned; 286 sometimes umbonate, striate, edge of cap very finely toothed, pale brown to reddish-brown, drying paler. Gills adnate, moderately close, often irregular with connecting veins, whitish with g faint pink tinge or pallid, edges dark red or dark purple, and finely toothed. Stem up to 3 inches high, slender, shining, slightly attenuated upwards, hollow, pale to reddish-brown. A prune-coloured watery juice exudes on section or from the broken gills. Spores elongated, white, coarsely granular internally, 7 to 9 or even 12x5 to 7 p. The colour may dissolve in formalin specimens. Amongst leaves under trees, grass, etc. Neutral Bay, Sydney, June, 1913; Mosman, May, 1914; Manly, May, 1915; Mount Lofty, S. Austr., July, 1914; National Park, S. Austr., June, 1917 (unusually large, the maximum sizes given above); amongst fallen bark and twigs, Craigie, Victoria, June, 1917 (EH. J. Semmens, No. 39; probably this species). | PLEUROTUS. 134. Pleurotus lampas, Berk.—Agaricus (Pleurotus) lampas, Berk.: Hook. J., iv., 1845, p. 44; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 155. Synonyms:—dAgaricus noctilucus, Berk. (vide Cooke, No. 155). Agaricus (Pleurotus) phos- phoreus, Berk.: Hook. J., vii., 1848, p. 572; Cooke: No. 157. Agaricus (Pleurotus) illuminans, Muell.: Linn. J., xii., 1873, p. 157; Cooke: No. 150. Agaricus. (Plearoriag candescens, Muell.: Linn. J., xili., 1873, p. 157; Cooke: No. 158; McAlpine: Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, 1900, p. 553, pls. XXX1. and xxxiil. Panus incandescens, B. and Br.: Linn: Trans., 1., p. 5; Cooke: No. 498; Bailey: Comp. Cat. Q’land Plants, p. 725 (=A. Gardnert). Agaricus (Plewrotus) Gardneri, as identified by Berk. and Br.: Linn. Trans., 1878, p. 399; Cooke: No. 149. (?)Agaricus (Pleurotus) nidi- formis, Berk.: Hook. J., ui., 1844, p. 185; Cooke: No. 154. In our opinion all of the above supposed species recorded © for Australia represent examples of but one variable and very common form, of which by priority the name should be P. lampas (or P. nidiformis, if this also is the same species). Our common luminous species is undoubtedly the species described so accurately by McAlpine (Joc. cit.). Our reasons for considering that there are so many synonyms are as follows :—First of all, the specimens we have ourselves examined are very variable as to texture, size, and colour. Some examples are very firm, approaching Panus, whilst others, usually growing in shady places, are very soft and watery. The colour of the cap varies from a creamy- -white in shaded examples to purplish-black and occasionally 287 bright fulvous-brown. Various collections might thus quite well be classified as separate species. Then, with the excep- tion of Baron von Mueller—who only incidentally collected fungi—none of the authors quoted had, apparently, access to fresh material, and so were dependent on the notes (if any) of the collectors. In the paper in which P. Gardneri is recorded by Berkeley and Broome for Queensland, it is in fact definitely stated that all the species recorded by them were “‘unaccompanied by notes or sketches of any kind.” In this paper there is no reference, as suggested by Cooke, to the fungus growing on “‘petioles and half-putrid fronds of palms,’’? which obviously is taken by Cooke from the original description of the species from Brazil. There is no reference even to the species being phosphorescent. Bailey (Compr. Cat. of Q’land Plants, p. 775), evidently on higher authority, states that Panus incandescens=Agaricus Gardneri, “‘the large luminous fungus.’’ As regards P. nidiformis, though the original description does not mention any phosphorescence, Berkeley in speaking of P. lampas later says it is allied to P. mdiformis, which is also phosphorescent. The gills in the latter are described as “‘ochraceous,’’ which term might per- haps be applied to old specimens of our common species. In the original description of P. ilwminans there seems no reason for it to have been classed by Cooke in the section with an annulate veil. Taking everything together, therefore, we feel quite justified in this apparent “‘lumping,’’ and a reference to the original descriptions will show how imperfect these are for purposes of separation. We have written to Kew to ask whether specimens of Pleurotus lampas, phosphoreus, wdluminans, and candescens and Panus incandescens exist there, and whether the dried plants could be distinguished from each other. Through the Director of the Royal Botanic Gardens, Miss E. M. Wakefield has replied as follows :— “Specimens exist only of Pleurotus lampas, P. candescens, and Panus incandescens. To a person familiar with the fresh plants it might be possible to make a comparison, but the dried specimens alone are practically useless. The habit of all is very similar, but the spores found vary slightly in size, as follows:—P. lampas (type), 6 to 7x3 to 4 w; P. candes- cens (type), 7 to 75 x4 w; (Melbourne specimen) 7. to 10 x5 to 6 4; Panus incandescens (type), 7x5 w. These are in all cases the spores obtained by scraping the gills, so that young ones would probably be included amongst them.’’ This reply strongly supports our attitude. As regards P. nidiformis, Miss Wakefield, in answer to a later enquiry, said that no specimens of this species were in Kew Herbarium. 288 New South Wales.—We have a number of collections from the Sydney district, April to November; also specimens from Mount Wilson and Kendall, May. Spore mass sometimes pale ochraceous. Edge of pileus sometimes in- curved. Spores oval, with a large ‘“‘nucleus,’’ 7 to 9x5 to 6 p, usually 75x55 p. In one collection made at Milson Island, Hawkesbury River, in April, the pileus was of a brilliant rufous-brown, the gills being also. rufous coloured. We have collected this ‘‘bronzed’’ form also at Mosman in December, 1916, spores 6°2 x 4°2 (Miss Clarke, Watercolour 142; Herb., J. B. C., Form: Sp. 280), and im: Mayo eee at Mosman, Sydney, April, 1918, we found this species and Armillaria mellea growing together at the base of a stump. . Victoria.—Ararat (E. J. Semmens, No. 25), May, 1917. Colour tints noted:—Pileus, in the centre tints of purplish-black (pl. 345, Ton 1), grading into, but greyer than, Parma violet (pl. 200, Ton 4); grades of colour between dark chocolate-brown (pl. 342, Ton 3), buff (pl. 309, Ton 4), mostly browner than Mars yellow (pl. 316, Ton 4), with some yel- lowish-tan colour (pl. 315, Tons 1 to 4) but browner ; mineral- brown (pl. 339, Ton 2), the centre darker than Ton 4; Kaiser brown (Ridgway, pl. xiv.), light ochre-buff (pl. xv.), light buff (pl. xv.), and tints of light Payne’s grey (pl. xlix.); shades of Payne’s grey (pl. 356, Ton 4); grey (pl. 359) with a violet tint. Stem, tints of Mars yellow (pl. 316, Ton 1) at the base; tints of light Payne’s grey (Ridgway, pl. xlix.). 135. Pleurotus ostreatus, Jacq. Cooke: LIllustrs., pls. 195 and 953; Massee: Brit.-Fung. Flora, u., p. 371.—We refer the following to this species:—Pileus up to 6 inches broad and 44 inches from before backwards, convex but nearly plane, pale smoky-brown, surface dull, edge slightly turned in. Gulls close, creamy-white, anastomosing below on the short stout lateral almost obsolete stem. Spores elongated, © in the mass with a slight pinkish tinge, 85 to 105x3°5 p. Attached one above the other at the base of a stem of sassafras (Doryphora sassafras, Endl.). Hawkesbury River, Novem- ber, 1916. The following is probably also this species, having been found two years previously near the same spot. These latter plants grew singly on a fallen trunk:—Pileus up to 24 inches in diameter, convex and indented on the side nearest the stem, of a pallid stone-colour or greyish-brown, smooth but finely-punctate looking, slightly sticky, edge turned in. Stem nearly lateral, short (4 inch or under), stout, whitish to somewhat smoky. Gills moderately close, creamy-coloured, tendency to fork, some short, deeply decurrent on to the stem, where they reticulate. Flesh thick, white, rather 289 tough, not phosphorescent. Spore elongated, 85 to 88x 3°4 p, no cystidia. On upper surface of fallen trunk. Hawkesbury River, December, 1914. (Herb., J. B. C., Form. Sp. 18.) 136. Pleurotus swbostreatus, n. sp.—Pileus up to 7 inches broad and 4 inches from before backwards, convex, becoming depressed towards its attachment, pallid whitish, matt. Gulls thick, creamy-white, anastomosing near the base to form a network. Laterally attached by a short broad pallid to brown matt stem, # inch long and 3 inch thick. Spores pear- shaped, 4x2°5 ». On a fallen log, Wauchope, N.S. Wales, February, 1917. This species seems to approach Panuws in texture. It differs from 7’. ostreatus in the definite brownish stem and in the small spores. Pileus ad 17°5x10 cm., convexus, albidus, subtomentosus. Lamellae crassae, subflavo-albidae, ad basem anastomosae. Stipes ad 2 cm. longus, lateralis, brevis, crassus, pallidus ad fuscus, subtomentosus. Sporae pyriformes, 4 x 2°5 p. 137. Pleuwrotus Cheelu, Mass.: Kew Bull., 1907, p. 122; Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, xxxu. (1907), p. 202.—Small, white. Pileus thickly hairy, attached by the vertex. Gills radiating from the centre, moderately close, rather thick. Spores thick-walled, subspherical, 6 to 8, 75x58, 85x7 wp. On branches, Eden, Twofold Bay (portion of the type) ; National Park, N.S. Wales, July, 1916. 138. Pleurotus striatulus, Fr.: Icon., t. 89, f. 5; Sacc.: Syll., 1518; Cooke: Illustrs., 2128; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 184 (Q’land).—Our specimens, which have been identified by Lloyd, may be described as follows:—At first minute and cup-shaped, finally more open, sometimes fan- shaped, sessile by the edge or excentrically, light grey to dark grey, slightly striate, powdery looking. Gills moderately dis- tant, darker grey than the pileus, sometimes with a brownish tint, radiating from the downy base. At once reviving on moistening (hence really a Panus). On decaying branches of a living cultivated mulberry (Morus alba, L.), Milson Island, Hawkesbury River, June, 1913 (spores 55x36 w); on a twig (spores 68x42 yw); on dead wood (spores 3°5 to 7x2); Manly, April; Sydney, May; Lisarow, June; Mount Wilson, June—all the latter with subspherical spores, 48 to 5°5 pw (hence some doubt exists as to there being two species, with oval and subspherical spores respectively). | LENTINUS. 139. Lentinus tuber-regium, Rumph. Lloyd: Mycol. Notes, No. 47, 1917, p. 666, fig. 959 (this collection).— Pileus up to 6 inches across, deeply infundibuliform, slightly K 290 obscurely striate, with a lens minutely scaly, light brown to light smoky-brown. Gills close, deeply decurrent, white then with a brownish tint. Total height up to 9 inches; stem alone, above ground, 4 inches. Stem more or less equal, inch thick, brownish, with darker fibrillose scales. Sclero- tium on section pure white, 2 inches in diameter. Spores pear-shaped, 5 to 6x2°5 to 3 w. On the ground amongst fallen branches of Araucaria Cunninghamu, Ait., Mummul- gum Brush, near Casino, December, 1916. Identified by C. G. Lloyd. We have recently received from Mr. C. T. White, Government Botanist, Queensland, some undeveloped sporo- phores obtained by Mr. Munro Hull at Eumundi in Novem- ber, 1918, on an old hickory (Tarrietia) stump in a banana plantation. 140. Lentinus strigosus, Fr. Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 454.—We have made several collections in New South Wales, two of which have been identified by Lloyd. The pileus is up to 24 inches in diameter, moderately depressed, of a brownish-fawn colour, densely strigosely hairy. The decurrent gills are moderately close, entire, pallid ochraceous. The stem is short, up to 4 inch long, swollen, contracted above where the gills join, and densely strigosely hairy. Spores 45 to 5x22 to 25 pw; cystidia thick-walled, blunt to club-shaped or irregular, 26 to 52x85 to 13°8 p. New South Wales, locality not noted; Mummulgum, near Casino, December, 1916; Wingham, November, 1916; Com- boyne, September, 1918. See Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, Kxxl1., p. 202 (1907), for previous records. 141. Lentinus dealbatus, Fr. Cooke: loc. cit., No. 459 (W. Austr.)—We have specimens, obtained at Manildra, N.S. Wales, on a fallen Callitris log in October, 1916, which have been identified by C. G. Lloyd. The gills when young were purple-viclet, bnt when old pallid yellowish without voilet. A few spores, 5 to 7 x 3°4 yp, seen. 142. Lentinus fasciatus, Berk.: Hook. J., 1840, p. 146; Sacc.: Syll., 2317; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 458 (Q’land, N.S. Wales, W. Austr., 'Tasm.); Lloyd: Mycol. - Notes, No. 55, August, 1918, p. 796.—Our specimens, which have been identified by Lloyd (No. 412, described in his Mycol. Notes) were, found growing at Malanganee, near Casino, in August, 1917, in rotten wood, the mycelium being effused over the wood for several inches. as a thick brown velvety layer; a few spores seen, 5 to 75x34 to 45 p. We have also the following:—New South Wales, locality not noted; Milson Island, Hawkesbury River, April, 1915, iden- tified by Lloyd (spores 7 x 3°4 », when moist the pileus straw- brown, the gills buffy-brown, adnato-decurrent, and the stem 291° dark brown); Stockton, October, 1915, bleached specimens (identified by Lloyd). 143. Lentinus radicatus, Cooke and Mass.: Grev., xiv., 118; Sace.: Syll., 2395; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 474 (Q’land).—A specimen collected on burnt soil at Milson Island, Hawkesbury River, in March, 1914, appears to be this species. This opinion has been confirmed by C. G. Lloyd. Its description is as follows:—Pileus 3 inches in diameter, upturned, reddish-tan, villous. Gulls pale cream, erowded, decurrent, edge a little toothed in places. Stem 4 inches long, 1 inch thick, pale brownish-white above ground but mostly buried, the lower 24 inches rooting and attenu- ated with a slightly bulbous hollow base, the rest solid, soil ageregated round the root. Spores elongated, oblique, 10°4 to 12x52 p. 144. Lentinus ursinus, Fr.—Our specimens, kindly iden- tified by C. G. Lloyd, are 1 inch or more laterally and about * inch from behind forwards, the pileus fan-shaped, convex, densely pilose, dark brown. The gills are close, with the edges denticulate, pallid whitish. Laterally attached by a contracted base, sometimes developing into a short stem which — is coloured and pilose hike the pileus. On fallen trunks, often overlapping. Spores subspherical, 4:2x3°4, 3°8 p, etc., no eystidia. Mount Wilson, June; Lisarow, December. PANUS. 145. Panus stypticus, Fr. Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 502 (Vict.).—Specimens have been kindly identified for us by C. G. Lloyd. All the Australian specimens we have tasted lack entirely any hot or pungent taste. Spores 4°2 to 9O9xI18 to 25 pp. Mount Wilson, June; Leura, June; Lisarow, June; between Bowral and Robertson, August; Macquarie Pass, August. 146. Panus. viscidulus, B. and Br.: Linn. Trans., i1., 55; Sacc.: Syll., 2568; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 504 (Q’land, N.S. Wales, Vict.)—Though our specimens revive perfectly on moistening, from their general appearance we feel inclined to consider them rather as a Pleurotus than as a Panus. Pileus rather small, fan-shaped, glutinous, bright tanny-brown to chestnut, edge paler and _ slightly striate. Gills white or pale brownish-white, decurrent, con- nected by veins, moderately close, edge rather thick. Stem ‘lateral or nearly so, very short (up to + inch long), villous to hairy at the base, pallid or pale brownish. Spores colour- less, 6 to 72x 3'4 to4 p. On fallen trunks amongst moisture, Mount Wilson, June, 1915. The weak formalin in which a K2 Hii 292 specimen was preserved has become dark grey and clouded, as does a solution of silver nitrate when exposed to light. XEROTUS. 147. Xerotus fuliginosus, Lloyd: Letter 60, Note 338.— This species has been identified for us by C..G. Lloyd, who in his letter states that it is probably also X. tener, of B. and Br.; X. Berterui; of Mont.; X:. lateriteus, of “Bo and Crees papyraceus, of Berk.; and X. Drummondu, of Berk., men- tioned in Cooke’s Handb. of Austr. Fungi. The pileus is thin, fan-shaped, up to 4 inch from side to side and + to 4 inch from before backwards, rugosely folded, reddish-tan when moist. The gills are distant, dark purplish-brown when moist. The stem is lateral, very short, dark brown, and finely villous. Young plants are bright rufous with hymenium a deep reddish-brown. Shed spores 10°4 to 12x7 p: On fallen twigs and sticks in brush forests, etc. Helensburgh (A. A. Hamilton), October, 1913; Bull Pass, May, 1914, and November, 1917; Blue Mountains, Novem- ber, 1914 (spores 85x 4°'2 w); National Park, July, 1916; Mosman, December, 1916. LENZITES. 148. Lenztes abietina, Fr.: Epicr., p. 407; Cooke: Tllustrs., pl. 11464; Massee: Brit. Fung. Flora, u., p. 306; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 529 (Q’land, 8S. Austr.).— The gills of one of our specimens, identified by Lloyd, when moist were pale brown and pruinose with spores, slightly toothed and folded; the spores were colourless, elongated, 85 to 105x5 p (slightly larger than the measurements, 7 to 8x4 yp, given by Massee for European specimens), no: cystidia; extending longitudinally many inches; on a fallen log near Hill Top, N.S. Wales, October, 1913. We also have the following :—Narromine, May, 1914; on fallen log, ~ Milson Island, Hawkesbury River (sometimes effused, some- times reflexed ; pileus dark brown, growing edge yellow-brown to pallid; gills chocolate-brown; spores 8°5 to 10°4x4 pp), February, 1915, identified by Lloyd (No. 325). This species(?), on fallen Callitris log, Piliga Scrub, November, 1916, identified by Lloyd (No. 328), who says, ‘‘Compared to the European plant, it is much thinner, more rigid, and has distinct pubescent zones, not seen on the European plant; it should have a name.”’ 149. Lenzites ungulaformis, Berk. Lloyd: Mycol. Notes, No. 56, October, 1918, page 811.—Lloyd has published the above note on our specimens, which were obtained at Malan- ganee, near Casino, in August, 1917. He thinks that this 293 ““species,’’ described by Berkeley from the Southern United States, 1s not a true species, but an aberrant form of L. betulina. He says, “‘The context is white, the gills typically those of the common Lenzites betulina, but the upper surface is different. It is white, not pubescent, ‘nor zoned, but glabrous and rugulose.” We have also collected a specimen at Lorne, near Kendall, September, 1918. PaQe Heneires striata, Swartz he 2) mer), 1. p. 206; mace.: Syll., 2653; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 531 (Q’land, Vict.).—On fallen Callitris log, Narrabri, Novem- ber, 1916 (identified by Lloyd, No. 266). Lloyd says of these specimens that they are not exactly the common plant of the American tropics, but close to it. “The colour, gills, and general shape are the same, but the surface is harder and more zonate.’’ - 151. Lenztes saemaria, Fr.: Hym, Eur., 494; Cooke: Tilustrs., pl. 11464; Sacc.: Syll., 2636; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 528 (Vict.).—Specimens identified by Lloyd (No. 219) from Manildra, October, 1916, on old Callitris stump. | teZeeLenctes Beckler, Berk. = linn, Journ., xim:, 161; Sacc.: Syll., 2664; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 536 (N.S. Wales, Q’land).—Wingham, Nov., 1916, identified by Lloyd (No. 331) as doubtfully this species. He adds that this specimen has the surface and context of ZL. Bechler: with the pores of L. repanda. ‘‘The gills of LZ. Beckleri are more lamellate, like those of L. betulina, but I put more stress on the context nature and surface of this group of plants than on the hymenial configuration. In nature of context and surface it approaches Trametes lactinea.” | 153. Lenzites repanda, Mont. Fr.: Epicr., 404; Sacc. : Syll., 2688; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 542 (Q’land, N.S. Wales).—Humundi, Q’land, January, 1911 (J. Stair; identified by Lloyd, No. 329); Murwillumbah, April, 1916 (spores 7x 2°5 to 3 »; Lloyd, No. 330); Malanganee, August, 1917; Kendall, May, 1917; Comboyne, September, 1918. We have also specimens from Mango Island, Suva, Fiji, 1918 and 1919 (Mrs. Lucas). 154. Lenzites Muelleri, Berk. Daedalea Muelleri, Berk. : Grev., xix., 93; Cooke: loc. cit., No. 868, Vict. (aberrant L. repanda, Lloyd in letter)—Comboyne, September, 1918; identified by Lloyd (No. 512). Lloyd in a note says that L. repanda, unlike L. flavida, is remarkably uniform in hymenial form, but that our specimen is so different from the usual appearance that Berkeley might be excused for naming it a - new species as Daedalea Muellem. He adds that it must not 294 be confused with Trametes Muelleri, which may also be a variant, but has small round pores and is more frequent and constant. 155. Lenztes bicolor.—On a dead stump of Cailitris robusta, R. Br., Piliga Scrub, October, 1918; identified by C. G. Lloyd (No. 509). In a note on these specimens Lloyd says that they are the same as regards context-colour and gills as Lenzites abietina, but the surface is pale (almost white) and of a different colour to the context, and there are dark zones on the surface, where this pale surface layer is undeveloped. The upper surface view is the same as that of Polystictus Friesu. Lloyd mentions that this is the only Lenztes he has seen where the context-colour and surface layer are not uniform. POLY PORACEAE. BoLeEtTvs. 156. Boletus romanus, Ottav.—The following species, of which we have had prepared a coloured drawing, resembles so closely the figure of ‘“‘Boletus Romanus, Ottav.,’’ given on pl. xv. of Badham’s work ‘“‘On the Esculent Funguses of Eng- land,’’ that we consider, for the present at least, that we are justified in calling it by this name. Unfortunately all that Badham says of the species is as follows: —‘‘The B. Romanus was first described by Ottaviani, who obligingly sent a coloured drawing of it (from which the present figure has been taken), and a minute description, which I have unfortunately mislaid. The site of this Boletus is on ground where wood has been burnt, and it is brought by the ‘Carbonari’ in autumn when they come with their charcoal to Rome.” We do not find the name in Fries. Our plants were described when gathered as follows:—Puileus convex, splashed with madder-brown in fibrils, yellowish between. Pores rounded near the stem, very | fine, rich sulphur-yellow. Stem stout, 24 inches high, 1 inch broad below, sulphur-yellow with slightly darker raised flecks. Flesh showing a tinge of blue in places. Spores ‘‘mummy- shape,’’ greenish, 104x3°4 p. Under Casuarina, North Bridge, Sydney, April, 1916. 157. Boletus scarlatinus, n. sp.—Pileus usually i} to 2 inches in diameter, but after heavy rains occasionally reach- ing 33 inches across, convex to nearly plane, irregular, smooth, somewhat viscid when moist (leaves may adhere to the separable cuticle), brilliantly but often irregularly coloured with tints of madder red, deep-orange cadmium, scarlet, crimson or yellowish buff. Pores adnate, rarely with a slight sulcus round the stem or slightly decurrent, in large specimens 295 the tubes 3/16ths to 5/16ths inch deep, rather large and irregular, rarely somewhat sinuous or gill-like near the stem, pale yellowish flesh or dingy yellow, becoming browner when old. Stem usually about 14 to 14 inch high, in large speci- mens 3 inches high, slender or stout (4 to ? inch thick), conical or even a little bulbous below, often excentric, some- times slightly striate, whitish, yellowish or with tints of the pileus in places. Flesh white. Sometimes subcaespitose. Spores elliptical (not ‘‘mummy-shaped’’), pale yellowish, slightly curved, one end a little broader, 5°5 to 8°5 (occasionally to 11) x34 to 42 w. Neutral Bay and Mosman, February to May (Miss Clarke, Watercolour 202); North Bridge, April (Miss Clarke, Watercolour 95); National Park, N.S. Wales, May. Colour tints noted :—Pileus fiery red (pl. 80, Ton 4) when wet, dull and more crimson when dry, to reddish chrome (pl. 51, Ton 4) at edge; orange cadmium (pl. 85, Ton 4); deep- orange cadmium (pl. 50, Ton 1); scarlet (pl. 49, Ton 4); dull madder-red (pl. 97, ‘Ton 4); carrot red (Capuchin lake) (pl. 55, Ton 2); -blood- red brown Gana (ple soi Von lh). cherry red (cerise) (pl. 91, Ton 4); nearly yellowish- -buff (pl. mlOee ston 1) yellowish-white (pl. 13, Ton 4); yolk yellow (pl. 24, Ton 1). Pores, in one specimen,.a little greyer than purplish-white (pl. 6, Ton 3). Stem, sunflower yellow (light cadmium yellow) (pl. 23, Tons 1 and 2) with tinges of red; primrose yellow (pl. 19, Ton 3) in upper part; deep cadmium yellow (saffron yellow) (pl. 48, Ton 1); orange cadmium (pl. 85, Ton 2); yellowish-white (pl. 13, Ton 4) at the top; a little brighter than honey yellow (pl. 35, Ton 1) tinged with faint brown lake (pl. 336, Ton 1). Pileus 3 ad. 5 cm. latus, interdum ad 93 cm. latus, convexus ad subplanus, irregularis, subviscidus, scarlet, coccineus aut airtenninaeo-eea tla vane. Tubi adnati, 5-7 mm., flavido-albidi. Stipes 3 ad 3°75 cm. altus, interdum ad 7°5 cm. altus, subtenuis aut crassus (1°2-1°9 cm. latus), colore flavo, flavo-pallido aut aurantiaco- scarlatino tinctus. Sporae ellipticae, 5°5-8°5 x 34-42 un, interdum 8°5-11 x 3°8-4°2 wp. This species resembles Boletus Ballou, Peck (N. York State Mius., Mus. Bull. 157, 1911,.p. 22, pl. viii., figs. 1-5), but the colour is much more brilliant than in his illustrations. The general description and spore shape and spore measure- ments show that the species are closely allied. The species may perhaps also be related to B. sanguineus, With. (Masse: Brit. Fung. Flora, 1., p. 266), though there is no change in colour in the flesh when cut. (EE sexqanteshigs-a brand 6)) 296 STROBILOMYCES. 158. Strobilomyces pallescens, Cooke and Mass.: Grev., xvill., 5; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No.’ 575, fig. 51 (Q’land).—The base of the stem often bulbous; flesh turning bluish when cut, the blue later disappearing, flesh of stem reddish on section : upper part of stem sometimes tinted with rosy purple; spores 17 to 22°5>x6 to 85 yw, longitudinally rugose; usually at the base of trunks, sometimes with pale fawn-tinted mycelium attached to leaves, etc. Frequent at Neutral Bay, Sydney, May; Chatswood (Miss Clarke, Water- colour No. 148); Narrabeen, March; Milson Island, Hawkes- bury River, March; Kendall, December. 159: Strobilomyces floccopus, Rost. Wahl: Ic. Pl. FI. Dan., t. 1252; Sacc.: Syll., 4835; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 579 (Q’land).—The following, from the only description available to us, that in Cooke’s Handbook, seems to be this species. We have not noticed, however, that the veil is appendiculate as a ring, and the stem in our specimens can hardly be called lacunose above. There is no reference in Cooke’s description as to whether the epispore 1s smooth or rough (as in our specimens). SS. velutipes, Cooke and Massee (Cooke, No. 580), resembles our plants to some extent from the description, but its spores are definitely stated to be “‘even.’’ Pileus up to 3 inches in diameter, almost hemi- spherical, then convex, edge turned in and extending slightly beyond the pores and sometimes showing fragments of the veil, soft to the touch, covered with a cotton-wool-like villosity with fine warts, sometimes presenting the appearance of adpressed dark-brown imbricate cotton-wool-like scales, dark sooty-brown to reddish-black, sometimes paler at the periphery. Pores adnate or slightly rounded near the stem and gradually separating from it or tending to be slightly decurrent, somewhat irregular, medium-sized, up to # inch deep, creamy to pallid white, turning dark brown or blackish. Flesh up to 3 inch thick, a thick cotton-wool-like layer on the surface, the flesh and tubes at once turning red, then blackish, when cut. Stem up to 4 inches high and # inch thick, equal or sometimes attenuated upwards or downwards, with a cotton-wool feeling from shaggy remains of the veil or finely strigosely scaly or villose, in one specimen splitting and the separated part revolute, in the upper part sometimes with a network derived from the pores or breaking into areolate dark portions showing the white flesh between, base sometimes slightly bulbous, pallid to brownish and dark sooty-brown, solid. Spores subspherical to broadly pear-shaped, rough (mulberry-like), 7 to 10°'4, 85x7 yp. At the roots of trees orstumps. Neutral Bay, April, 1915; Bradley Head, Sydney, 297 April, 1919; Lisarow, May, 1918 (Miss Clarke, Water- colour 70; Herb., J. B. C., Form. Sp. 98); Krambach, near Gloucester, January, 1918. Colour tints noted :—Pileus reddish-black (pl. 344, Tons 1 and 2). POLYSTICTUS. 160. Polystictus elongatus, Berk.: Hook. J., 1842, p. 149; Sacc.: Syll., vi., 5640; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 750 (Vict., Q’land).—Mount. Wilson and Katoomba, June; Leura, November; Somersby Falls, near Gosford, May; Hawkesbury River, August and December (spores elongated, 5x2 p)—all in New South Wales. Specimens have been identified by Lloyd. | 161. Polystictus meleagris, Berk. Lloyd: Letter 65, Note 577.—Specimens collected in Mummulgum Brush, near Casino, in December, 1916, have been identified by C. G. Lloyd (No. 257). 162. Polystictus badius, Berk. Lloyd: Letter 67, Note 666.—Specimens, sent to us by Dr. Leighton Jones from Darwin, have been identified by C. G. Lloyd (No. 317). 163. Polystictus ochraceo-stuppeus, Lloyd: Letter 63, 1916, Note 464.—Petersham, Sydney, April, 1912 (T. Steel). Identified by C. G. Lloyd in the above reference, who thus describes it : —‘‘Pileus erect, confluent, somewhat rosette form. Surface ochraceous, soft tomentose, not zoned. Context dry, soft, pinky, ochraceous. Pores minute, adustous. Cystidia none. Spores not known to me. In general colour much like Polystictus ochraceus, but context not of the same nature. The soft, pinky context is similar to species of Trametes, as T. lactinea, rather than to other Polystictus. We would put it in the section with Polystictus occidentalis, though its context relations are entirely different. The specimens, while well developed, grew on an ash floor, and the form, lke the rosette form of Polystictus versicolor, when growing on top of a log, is probably not the normal form.’’ 164. Polystictus occidentalis, Klotzsch. Cooke: Grev., Kiv., 85 (1886), and Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 794; Sacc.: Syll., vi., 5843 (Vict., Q’land, N.S. Wales, S. Austr.).— Darwin, 1917 (Dr. Leighton Jones); identified by C. G. Lloyd (No. 316). 165. Polystictus (Trametes) Persooni, Mont. Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 791 (Vict., Q’land, New Guinea) .— We have two collections, identified by Lloyd (Nos. 140 and 270), one from Mummulgum Brush, near Casino, N.S. Wales, December, and one from Murwillumbah(?) Of the former Lloyd says ‘‘pileus usually of a brighter colour. Pores some- what irpicoid.”’ 298 166. Polystictus subfulvus, Berk.—In identifying speci- mens for us, Lloyd says he thinks they are the same as the Brazilian plant. We have collected it at Kurrajong Heights in August, 1912 (spores(?) 3°5x 17 pw), and at Leura, June, 1916; 167. Polystictus flavus, Klotz. Lloyd: Mycol. Notes, iii., p. 450 (1911-12), and Letter 67, Note 680.—Specimens col- lected on a fallen log near Nattai River, via Hill Top, in October, 1913 (spores 6°2 to 8°5, usually 7, x 3°8 «), were con- sidered by Lloyd as a daedaloid form of P. flavus, having “‘the same context colour and microscopic structure (hyaline cystidia and spores).’’ We have also specimens from Narrabri, March, 1914 (spores 7 to 85 x 35 p). 168. Polystictus versicolor, L.—Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 774 (Vict., N.S. Wales, Q’land, Tas.).—New South Wales: Mount Wilson, June, 1915; The Rock, July, 1917; Narrabeen, April, 1915; Hornsby, July, 1916; Neutral Bay, July, 1917 (confirmed by Lloyd, No. 386, who says “‘a little pale but very close to the usual colour’’); Dorrigo, January, 1918; on decaying trunk of willow (Saliz caprea, L.), Moss Vale, June, 1919; Myall Lakes (Mr. Gross), May; destroying a telegraph post, Mosman, May. Tasmania: Wilmot (A. M. Lea), January, 1918. Victoria: C. Brittlebank (No. 1), 1919. 169. Polystictus sanguineus. L. Cooke, loc. cit., No. 746 ; Clel. and Cheel: Jour. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S. Wales, Iz, 1917, p. 485, No. 30.—Comboyne, August, 1915; Mango Island, Suva, Fiji, 1919 (Mrs. Lucas). 170. Polystictus cinnabarinus, Jacq. Cooke: loc. cit., No. 770; Clel. and Cheel: Joc. cet., p. 486, No. 31.—New South Wales: Barellan, August, 1918; The Rock, July, 1917; Dun- gog, November, 1916; Bellinger River (Mr. Smithers), June, 1919; Narrabri, November, 1916; Myall Lakes (Mr. Gross), May. Victoria: Ararat (EK. J. Semmens, No. 6). Queensland (on Acacia aulalocarpa, A. Cunn.(?), May, 1918 (E. Swain); on scrub-box (Eucalyptus, sp.), Gympie, June, 1918 (E. Swain). South Austraha: Port Elliot, August, 1918 (D. ke Ge Western Australia: Guildford, December, 1918 (E. C.). 171. Polystictus cervino-gilvus, Jungh.; recorded for Australia in Cooke, loc. cit., No. 789, as P. peradenaae, Berk. and Br., which Lloyd states is a synonym.—Malan- ganee, 25 aie west of Casino, August, 1917, identified by Lloyd (Nos. 388 and 418). 299 POLYPORUS. 172. Polyporus (Petaloides) Clemensiae, Murr. Lloyd: Letter 65, Note 574, and Letter 68, Note 734;-place after Polyporus rubidus, No. 12, Sect. 15, in Clel. and Cheel, Jour. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S. Wales, li., p. 481.—Specimens obtained at Barron Falls, Kuranda, Queensland (Mrs. Fraser), in Sep- tember, 1917, have been identified by Lloyd (No. 429), who refers to them in Note 734. He says the species is close to P. rubidus, and is perhaps the basis of the record of the latter species in Cooke’s Handbcok (No. 640). 173. Polyporus (Merismus) anthracophilus, Cooke. Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 622; Clel. and Cheel: loc. cit., p. 488, No. 39.—Pileus pallid to dark smoky-brown, spores (12) conidial) 5 x 3-4, 6 to 7x3 p, at base of a trunk, National Park (S. Austr.), June, 1917. These specimens were identified by Lloyd, who says that this is the plant so named by Cooke, but he thinks that it is better referred to Polyporus giganteus, Pers., as there is no real difference, though the Australian plant is darker and harder. 174. Polyporus (Merismus) sulphureus, Fr. Cooke: loc. cit., No. 624 (Q’land, Tas.); Cleland and Cheel: Joc. cit., p. 488, No. 42.—In large masses at or near the bases of trees, Macquarie Pass, August, 1917; identified by Lloyd (No. 410). 175. Polyporus (Merismus) rosettus, Lloyd: Mycol. Notes, No. 43, 1916, p. 601; Cleland and Cheel: loc. cit., p- 490, No. 47.—At the base of an old stump, National Park (S. Austr.), June, 1917, spores 42x25 pw; identified by Lloyd (No. 350). 176. Polyporus (Spongiosus) rufescens, Pers. Cooke: loc. cit., No. 600; Clel. and Cheel: loc. cit., p. 490, No. 48.— At the base of a cultivated olive, numerous white spores, 5x34, Beaumont, near Adelaide, April, 1917; identified by Lloyd (Nos. 300 and 443). 177. Polyporus (Spongiosus) Albertim, Mueller. Lloyd: Stipit. Polyporoids, p. 160, and Letter 67, Note 662; place after P. tomentosus, p. 491, No. 51, in Clel. and Cheel, Joc. cit.—This species closely resembles P. Schweinitzw in appear- ance, but microscopically has brown spores. Lloyd has iden- tified specimens for us. Taree district (H. Lyne), numerous brown, slightly irregular spores 8°5x5'5 p, January, 1917 (Lloyd, No. 295); Kendall, at base of tree, numerous brown oval spores 8 to 9 x 6 to 68 w, March, 1918 (Llyod, No. 442). 178. Polyporus eucalyptorum, Fr. Cooke: loc. cit., No. 656; Clel. and Cheel: loc. cit., p. 522, No. 120.—On fallen trunks, Kendall, March, 1918, spores broadly pear- shaped, 85 to 104 x 6:8 p.—colour tints noted, pores 300 yellowish-white (Dauthenay, pi. 13, Ton 4), cap tinted with pale otter brown, paler than otter brown (pl. 354, Ton 1); pellicle on pileus, greyish-brown with minute punctate spots, pores bright yellow, 1/16th inch deep, Bradley Head, Syd- ney, May, 1918; on underside of dead fallen trunk, Berrima, July, 1919, spores 8°5 x6 p—colour tint noted, pores near massicot yellow (Ridgway, pl. xvi.). 179. Polyporus gilvus, Schw. Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 641; Clel. and Cheel: Jour. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S. Wales, li., 1917, p. 533, Sect. 91, No. 143.—Near Wauchope, February, 1917, identified by Lloyd; Bulli Pass, November, 1917; Myall Lakes (Mr. Gross), May. 180. Polyporus gilvus, var. scruposus, Fr. Cooke: loc. cit., No. 643; Clel. and Cheel: loc. ctt., p. 534, Sect. 91, No. 143a.—Barron Falls, Kuranda, Queensland, September, 1917 (Mrs. Fraser). 181. Polyporus pertusus, Fr. (as Trametes). Lloyd: Mycol. Notes, No. 58, 1917, p. 827.—Barron Falls, Kuranda, Queensland, September, 1917 (Mrs. Fraser), setae brown, sharp-pointed, 25 to 34x7 yz at base; identified for us by C. G. Lloyd (No. 426). Speaking of,this specimen in the note above cited, Lloyd states that this species belongs to the ‘“‘oilvus’’ group, having the same colour, spores, and setae, but the upper flesh is soft and spongy, as in P. fruticum. He considered it a very rare plant. 182. Polyporus Patowillardiu, Rick. Lloyd: Letter 68, Note 738; Clel. and Cheel: loc. cit., p. 539, Sect. 95, No. 154.—Bribie Island, Moreton Bay, Queensland, spores yellow-brown, 5 x 3°4 w, no setae—Lloyd in determining this (No. 499) adds ‘‘this (determination) does not seem exactly right to me’; Warren, N.S. Wales, on decaying trunk of a large specimen of Acacia salicina, var. varians, Benth., spores 72x6 p—confirmed by Lloyd; Malanganee, near Casino, August, 1917, spores brown, 4°8 x 3°4 p, no setae—identified by Lloyd (No. 415), Lloyd in the above note now thinks ~ that the species grades into ?. dryadeus, Fr., the Australian plants being midway between the two with dark spores but no setae-like hyphae. 183. Polyporus fruticum, Berk. Cooke: loc. cit., No. 649; Clel. and Cheel: foc. cit., Sect. 96, No. 155-=aie shrubs, about 1 foot or so from the ground, Malanganee, near Casino, August, 1917—1identified by Lloyd (No. 397); Barron Falls, Kuranda, Queensland (Mrs. Fraser), September, 1917 —identified by Lloyd (No. 434). 184. Polyporus sessilis, Murr.; in Clel. and Cheel: Joc. cit., under Sect. 988.—Barron Falls, Kuranda, Queensland, September, 1917 (Mrs. Fraser); Lloyd in identfying these 301 (No. 469) adds that this is really a sessile ?. dueidus. We have also specimens from Mango Island, Suva, Fiji (Mrs. Lucas), 1918, spores brown, very slightly rough, 12 x 65 p. FomEs. 185. Fomes robustus, Karsten. Lloyd: Synop. Genus Fomes, p. 242, fig. 589; Clel. and Cheel: Jour: Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S. Wales, li., 1918, p. 509 (No. 101); Clel: and Cheel : Forest Comm. N.S. Wales, Bull. 12, 1918, p. 9, pl. ix.—Syns. Fomes Robinsoniae, Murrill, and F. squarrosus, Wilson ; Clel. and Cheel: Journ. Proc. Roy. Soc. N:S. Wales, l., 1918, p. 514 (No. 106); VF. setulosws, Petch (form with abundant setae), Clel. and Cheel: /oc. cit., p. 511 (No. 102).— Lloyd has now come to the conclusion (Mycol. Notes, 50, p. ‘713) that 7. setwlosus is a setae-bearmg form of F. robustus. Ff. Robinsoniae and I. squarrosus he considers also to be F. robustus. In Australian specimens we note slight differences in the depth of colour of the context in different collections and even in the same individual plant. In some specimens we have not found setae, in others we have met with a few, whilst occasionally they are abundant. It may be convenient to retain the name F. setulosus for the latter. Queensland: Darling Downs, 20 miles from Toowoomba (Miss Butler), December, 1917. £ New South Wales: On a _ smooth-barked eucalypt, probably #. saligna, Sm., near Robertson, August, 1917: at base of Angophora lanceolata, Cav., Cremorne, Sydney, spores colourless, subspherical, 7 p, setae not seen, August and November; on Hucalyptus botryowdes, Sm., Bradley Head, Sydney, spores subspherical, 6°8 p, setae not seen, April, 1918; on Casuarina suberosa, Ott. et Dietr., Manly, November, 1916; on Casuarina sp., between Telegraph Point and Kempsey, January, 1918; on Casuarina, Luehmann, BR. T. Baker, Pilliga Scrub, Narrabri (identified by C. G. Lloyd, No. 303), November, 1916; on dead Banksia, Berrima, July, 1919. | South Australia: On AHucalyptus .viminalis, Lab., National Park (identified by Lloyd, No. 424), spores. colour- less, subspherical, 5 to 7 », a few scattered brown acuminate setae with broad bases. ~ 186. Fomes conchatus, Pers. Lloyd: Syn: Gen, Fomes, p. 244; Clel. and Cheel: loc. cet., p. 512 (No. 103). - Kendall, August, 1918; near Wauchope, February, 1917 (identified by Lloyd, No. 305). te 187. Fomes densus, Oleson. Lloyd: Syn. Gen. Fomes, p-. 245; in Clel. and Cheel, Joc. cit., place after /. conchatus, No. 103, p. 512.—This Lloyd describes as a thick heavy form 302 of F’. conchatus. He has identified specimens for us (No. 448) found destroying telegraph posts at Cremorne, Sydney, in February and June, 1918; small brown setae present, the context suggesting a Fomes form of Polyporus gilvus. 188. Fomes roburneus, Fr. Lloyd: Syn. Gen. Fomes, p. 246; in Clel. and Cheel, Joc. cit., place after /'. igniarius, No. 105, p. 514.—Lloyd considers this species as a form of F. igmarius with abundant setae and a hard, black crust. He has identified a specimen, for us (No. 428) found on a fallen log at Kendall, with very numerous brown setae projecting 17°4 pp, December, 1917. _ 189. Fomes rimosus, Berk. Lloyd: Syn. Gen. Fomes, p.. 248; Clel? and Cheel: loc. ct., p. 515 (Ce Queensland: Well-camp, Toowoomba (Miss I. H. Cameron), identified by Lloyd (No. 489), spores brown, 7x5°5 ug, August, 1918; Bribie Island, Moreton Bay, spores 52 x 34 p, September, 1918; on ironbark (Hucalyptus paniculata, Sm.), Redbank, Brisbane, spores yellow-brown, 6°8x5°5 p, Sep- tember, 1918. 190. Fomes badius, Berk. Lloyd: Syn. Gen. Fomes, p. 249; in Clel. and Cheel, /oc. cit., place after F. rimosus, var. Niaoulti, No. 107s, p. 115.—Lloyd defines this as a large- spored /’. remosus. He has identified two collections for us. No. 310 is from South Australia, spores subspherical, dark yellow-brown, 6°5x5 w, no setae seen; No. 466 on wattle (Acacia aulalocarpa, A. Cunn.[?'], Gympie, Queensland (E. Swain), May, 1918. 191. Fomes pseudosenex, Murr.(?). Lloyd: Syn. Gen. Fomes, p. 255; in Clel. and Cheel, Joc. cit., place after F. pullus, No. 110, p. 516; Lloyd: Letter 65, Note 546.—We have received from Mr. E. Swain two specimens of apparently the same species, one obtained in May, 1918, and one in September, found growing on hoop pine ( Araucaria Cunning- hamn, Ait.) on Bunya Mountains, Queensland. One of these has been identified by Lloyd (No. 493) as probably F. pseudosenex,; the pores were minute and yellowish, and the bracket was 4 inches laterally and high and 24 inches antero- posteriorly. The other specimen was larger, weighing 5 |b. 2 oz., and measuring 10 inches laterally, 7 inches high, and 8 inches antero-posteriorly ; it showed the presence of brown setae and oecasional brown spores, 5°5 to 65x3°8 p, one apparently 85x5 wp. 192. Fomes yucatensis, Murr. Lloyd: Syn. Gen. Fomes, p. 257; Clel. and Cheel: Joc. cit., p. 516 (No. 112).— Dorrigo, identified by Lloyd (No. 446), spores brown, sub- spherical, 4 to 5 », numerous dark-brown setae, acuminate, with dilated bases, 34 to 50x85 yw; on Acacia aulalocarpa, 303 A. Cunn.(?), Gympie, Queensland (E. Swain), spores brown, 6 to 7 p, a few acuminate setae. PoRIA. nds. -Poria) caliosa, Fr:.: Syst. Mye. 1, p..382; .Sacc.’: Syll., 5964; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 820 (Q’land). —Mr. C. White, Government Botanist, Queensland, has kindly given us a portion of the specimen identified as this species for F. M. Bailey, and referred to in Cooke under No. 820. It bears a note, ‘“‘Bailey’s No. 430, on rafters of a verandah, Brisbane.’’ In April and June, 1917, we obtained at Burnside, Adelaide, on the rotting trunk of Pinus, sp., portion of a Poria which had dried a reddish-brown. This colour is a little deeper and redder than that of Bailey’s speci- men, but the plants seem otherwise identical. © Another species apparently, which has dried a dark brown, is like Bailey’s specimen, save that the pores are twice as big. It formed an easily separable crust under the boards of a damp kitchen sink, Neutral Bay, Sydney, October, 1916. 194. Portia vaporaria, Fr.: Syst. Myc., 1., p. 382; Sacc.: Syll., 6035; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 829 (Q’land, Vict., W. Austr., Tas.).—The following agree with an Ameri- can specimen kindly sent to us by C. G. Lloyd. On dying trunk, Neutral Bay, Sydney, August, 1912; Moss Vale, November, 1918; Ararat (A. J. Semmens, No. 10). We have a number of other specimens, probably of several species, resembling but not identical with Lloyd’s specimen. TRAMETES. 195. Trametes lactinea, Berk:: Ann. Nat. Hist., x., 371; Sace.: Syll., 6204; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 849 (Q’land, N.S. Wales, 8S. Austr.).—Specimens have been identified for us by C. G. Lloyd. Miulson Island, Hawkesbury River, July; Tuggerah, October; Kew, March, pores turn reddish on bruising when fresh (Lloyd, No. 343); Malanganee, near Casino, August, pores turn reddish on bruising; on iron- bark, Gympie, Queensland, June, red marks from bruising when fresh (EK. Swain). See also Proc. Linn. Soc. N'S. Wales, xxxul., p. 203 (1907), for previous record. 196. Trametes protea, Berk.—Lloyd has identified speci- mens for us (No. 438), growing on a fence at Kendall, Decem- ber, 1917; he considers the species as better placed under Polystictus. We have also collected specimens on dead wood on Bribie Island, Moreton Bay, September, 1918. 197. Trametes semitosta, Berk. Fomes semitostus, Berk., in Lloyd, Syn. Gen. Fomes, p. 220; Lloyd: Letter 68, Note 304 736.—In identifying specimens (No. 432) for us, found on a fallen trunk at Kendall in December, 1917, Lloyd (Letter 68, Note 736) says as follows:—‘‘In my Fomes Synopsis as a Fomes, but really a Trametes. The type is a thin plant, — hardly $ cm. thick, but this specimen is 2 cm. thick. The surface is not of as dark a colour as the type, but no doubt will be when it gets to be as old as the type. ‘Half-toasted’ is a good name for it now, but not for the type now.” HYDNACEAE. . HypNnvUm. 198. Hydnum rufescens, Pers.: Sym., p. 555; Massee: Brit. Fung. Flora, i., p. 152. A colour form of H. repandum, L. (Lloyd).—Lloyd has identified specimens for us under this - designation. The flesh of the Australian species turns reddish- brown when injured. Neutral Bay, Sydney, June, 1912 and 1916; Newington, Sydney, June, 1914; Miulson Island, Hawkesbury River, July, 1912; National Park, New South Wales, July, 1916, Spores 3°5 to 5°5 p, spherical to oval. 199. Hydnum coralloides, Scop.: Carn., 2, p. 472; Massee: Brit. Fung. Flora, 1., p. 156; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 925 (Q’land).—The identification has been con- _ firmed for us by C. G. Lloyd. Mount Irvine, Blue Moun- tains, January, 1915 (G. P. Darnell Smith), spores sub- spherical, 3°5 w; on side of a trunk, Mount Wilson, Blue Mountains, June, 1915, spores 3°8 x 2°2 yp. 200. Hydnum ochraceum, Pers. Sacc.: Syll., 6725; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 928 (Vict., Q’land).— Specimens, identified by Lloyd (No. 391), were collected at ~ Lismore in August, 1917. 201. Hydnum Muellerr, Berk.: Linn. J.,. xvi, ome Sacc.: Syll., 6727; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 929 (N.S. Wales, Q’land).—Specimens collected at Lisarow in June, 1916, were sent to C. G. Lloyd, who, in referrring to this species, adds:—‘‘I judge from my photograph of the type. . . . The plant is very close to H. rawakense, Pets. I am not sure if it is distinct. It has similar cystidia on the teeth. It is more conchoid and the teeth are not so dark.”’ 202. Hydnum zonatum, Batsch.: F. 224; Massee: Brit. Fung. Flora, 1., p. 154.—Specimens collected on the underside of a fallen trunk at Mount Lofty, South Australia, in June, 1917, have been identified by Lloyd (No. 352). We have also collected specimens at North Bridge, Sydney, in June, 1916, on the ground—pileus 3 cm. broad, gibbous, rugose, slightly upturned, pallid to reddish-brown; flesh dark brown; teeth pallid; stem irregular, more or less central, brownish. . 305 203. Hydnum alutaceum, Fr.: Syst. Myc., 1., 417; Sacc.: Syll., 6761; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 934 (Vict.)—-Narrabeen, New South Wales (E. C.); Craigie, Victoria, June, 1917, on living bark of Lucalyptus melliodora, A. Cunn. CEE di: Semmens, No. 54). TREMELLODON. 204. Tremelloden gelatinosum, Scop.: Fr. Hym. Eur., 618; Sacc.: Syll., 6862; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 942, fig. 68 (Q’land).—Mount Wilson, June, 1915, spores sub- spherical, 7 to 10°4 1; National Park, New South Wales, July, Wolves spores S15 x 7 ju, 7° p. 3 RADULUM. 205. Radulum (Lopharia, Thwaitesiella) Neilgherrense, Berk. (f&. mirabile of Ceylon, &. lrellosa of Africa, H. Emerict of India, and &. javanica of Java are considered by Lloyd as probably this species; also Sistotrema irpicinum, beeeeano) Br. linn. Trans., 11., 63, t &3) t. 23, and Cooke, Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 943 (Q’land), and /rpexr hexa- gonoides, Kalchb., Grev. ix., p. 1, and Cooke, Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 944 (N.S. Wales).—Lioyd has identified specimens for us (Nos. 64, 65, and 113). Miulson Island, Hawkesbury River, June and July, 1912; Narrabeen, December, spores pear-shaped, 5 to 6 x 2°5 ps. IRPEX. 206. Zrpex consors, Berk. Lloyd: Mycol. Notes, 45, 1917, p. 625, fig. 887 (specimens from us). Syn.—Lloyd considers Z. brevis, Berk.; 2. decurrens, Berk.; and probably Hynum meruoides, Berk... Linn. Trans., ii., 3, tex, f. 4, and Cooke, Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 926 (Q’land), as all this _ species. Sydney district, January, April, June, October (spores 5x3°4 »); Narrabeen, April; Hawkesbury River, July (Lloyd, No. 353); Somersby Falls, near Gosford, May; Lisarow, June; National Park, New South Wales, July; Macquarie Pass, August (Lloyd, No. 393); Mount Wilson, June (spores 4 x 2°5 w; Lloyd, No. 354, who says ‘‘the original matches this exactly—largely resupineate, with a few pilei’ ; Victoria, October (C. Brittlebank). 207. Irpex cingulatum, Lloyd: Mycol. Notes, 55, 1918, p. 795, fig. 1197.—Lloyd, in describing our specimens (No. 355), says that they differ from /rpex consors, which is a white plant, in being washed with a dark zone and appear so different that they should be named. He presumes that the Australian record of 7. zonatus (Cooke, No. 945, Vict., N.S. Wales, Q’land) is based on this plant, and that the previous 306 identification by him of a specimen from Australia from J. T. Paul as J. zonatus was probably a mistake. New South Wales, spores oval, white, 5°2 x 3°2 p. 208. lrpex saemaria, Lloyd: Mycol. Notes, 48, 1917, p. 682, fig. 1019.—Lloyd considers that the record of J. tabacinus (Cooke, No. 948) for Australia probably refers to this species. Our New South Wales plants (locality not noted) are described by Lloyd as follows in the above Notes :— ‘‘Resupinate with reflexed pileus. ileus coriaceous, dark brown (Brussels), smooth. Context concolorous. Teeth dense, 2 to 3 mm. long, concolorous, irregular. Hymenium white. Setae densely covering the teeth, projecting 20 to 30 pw. Spores globose, 5 wu, smooth.’’ He points out that this - species belongs to a section of Jrpex corresponding to ‘““Hymenochaete,’ and at one time described generically as ‘“Hydnochaete.”’ THELEPHORACEAE. THELEPHORA. 209. Thelephora terrestris, Ehrenb. Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 981 (Vict.); Clel. and Cheel: Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, xli., p. 860 (N.S. Wales, S. Austr.); Syn. T. laciniata, Pers. (according to Lloyd); Cooke: No. 982.— Always under or near Pinus. Mount Lofty, April, and Ade- laide, June, 1917; Ararat, Victoria, June, 1917 (Hoag. Semmens); Blayney, December, 1917, when young whitish and encrusting, then frondose. Spores nodular, 7, 85, 85x6 p. 210. Thelephora myriomera, Fr.: Pl. Preiss., 137; Sacce.: Syll., 7129; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 978 (W. Austr.).—Neutral Bay, Sydney, April, 1915; identified by C. G. Lloyd from the description of this species, no type existing. STEREUM. 211. Stereum caperatum, Berk. and M. Cooke: loc. cit., ~ No. 992 (Vict., Q’land); Clel. and Cheel: Joc. cit., p. 860.— Lisarow, New South Wales, October, 1916. » 212. Sterewm elegans, Fr. Cooke: loc. cit., No. 994; Clel. and Cheel: loc. cit., p. 861.—Mount Irvine, June, 1915, the upper surface very light brown or damp-looking dark tan; spores 4°2 to 5x3°4 p—identified by C. G. Lloyd; Ararat, Victoria, spores 5x 3°4 wp (E. J. Semmens, No. 11). 213. Stereum semilugens, Kalchb.: Grev., ix., 1; Sacc.: Syll., 7278; Cooke: loc. cit., No. 1010 (Q’land).—Mount Wil- son, June, 1915, spores 12 to 14x4°2 pp. Lloyd in identify- ing these adds:—‘‘The surface is relatively smooth and con- colorous with the context, ferruginous brown. The hymenium a 307 is cinereous, reminding one of Polyporus adustus. Cystidia none. . . . It is a good species, different from anything in Europe or America.”’ 214. Sterewm hirsutum, Willd. Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fumes, No. 1014; Clel. and Cheel:> Prec. Linn. Soc., N.S. Wales, xli., 1916, p. 862.—On Hucalyptus tereticornis, Sm., _Bumberry, September, 1916; on #. Stuartiana, F. v. M., Orange, October, 1916; Taree (H. Lyne), April, 1917; Kew (N.S. Wales), October, 1915; The Rock, July, 1917; Ararat (Vict.), (EK. J. Semmens, No. 7). _ Lloyd has identified specimens for us as being pale forms approaching S. vellerewm, Berk. The following belong to this group:—Mount Lofty, on Hucalyptus trunks, and National Park, South Australia, June, 1917; Hawkesbury River, February, 1916 (Lloyd No. 373). 215. Stereum zonarium, Lloyd: Mycol. Notes, No. 47, iWiee. O64, fie. 9b. —Lloyd has kindly identified New South Wales specimens (locality not noted) for us. His description of these in the above Notes is as follows :—‘‘Pileus sessile to a reduced base, thin, rigid. Surface smooth, reddish-brown (Brussels brown, Ridgway), with narrow, strong, darker zones. Context tissue brown. Hymenial layer white, distinct from the context layer, and often but partially developed over the surface. Basidia clavate, forming a palisade layer. Cystidia none. Spores 3x5 p, hyaline, smooth.” He adds:— “Stereum with smooth pilei are very rare. In fact, we know but one other well authenticated, viz., Sierewm versicolor, in its true sense. ”’ 216. Sterewm vellerewm, Berk.: Fl. N. Zea., 183; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 1004 (Vict.).—At the base of a trunk, Lisarow, June, 1916, spores 4°2 to5x34 py. Lloyd in identifying these specimens says that the surface hairs are not so strong as in those specimens he has heretofore referred to this species, but still he believes our specimens belong to it. 217. Stereum lobatum, Fr.: Epicr., 547; Cooke: Joc. cit., No. 1008 (all the States except 8. Austr. and W. Austr.).—Lloyd has kindly identified specimens for us. When moist, zoned with grey and brown or dark browny-chestnut ‘passing to chestnut, yellowish at the periphery; hymenial surface reddish-orange to yellowish-brown and yellow; spores font 202 7. . Bulli Pass, April, “19127; Natienal’ Park, New South Wales, July, 1916; Lisarow, April, June, and December; Mummulgum, near Casino, December; Malan- ganee, near Casino, August ; Barron Falls, Kuranda, Queens- land (Mrs. Fraser). 218. Sterewm illudens, Berk.: Hook. J., iv., 59; Cooke: loc. cit., No. 1015 (all the States); Clel. and Cheel: Proc. 308 Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, xli., 1916, p. 863.—Lisarow, June, 1915; National Park, New South Wales, July, 1916. 219. Sterewm membranaceum, Fr. Clel. and Cheel: Joc. cit., p. 863 (N.S. Wales, Q’land).—Kurrajong Heights, August, 1912; Sydney, September; Milson Island, August; Lisarow, June; near Wangan, Pilliga Scrub, October, 1918— dark-brown setae, 50 to 70x85 p at the base, acuminate, points acute or blunt. 220. Stereum (Lloydella) cinerascens, Schw.—Both of our collections have been identified by Lloyd. Bull Pass, November, 1917, spores 9 to 10 x 6 to 68 yp, metuloids 87 x 25 p, rough, club-shaped ; on dead leaves of /ieus macro- phylla, Desf., Domain, Sydney, May, 1917. 221. Stereum (Hymenochaete) adustum, Lev. (S. villosum, Lev.)—‘‘The same, I think, as Sterewm villosum, Lev., but weathered specimen, the dark colour due to ex- posure (S. nigricans, Lev.; S. strigosum, Berk.; S. phaeum, Berk.; S. spadiceum, Berk., are all synonyms for me).’’— Lloyd, in identifying specimens for us found on a fallen log at Lisarow in June, 1916 (brown acuminate setae, 42x7 pp). S. (H.) phaeum is recorded in Cooke, No. 1034, for Victoria, New South Wales, and Queensland; and S. (H.) spadiceum under No. 1037. We have recorded 8S. (H.) villosum for New South Wales (Joc. cit., p. 864), and have a further speci- men of this from Kurrajong Heights, August, 1912. CorRTICIUM. 222. Corticium coeruleum, Pers. Massee: Brit. Fung. Flora, 1., p. 127.—Dorrigo, January, 1918, identified by Lloyd (No. 475). GASTEROMYCETES. CHLAMYDOPUS. 223. Chlamydopus Meyemanus, Berk. Lloyd: Lycop. of, Austr., 1905, p. 9, fig. 6; Clel. and Cheel: Jour Pirae Roy. Soc. N.S. Wales, 1., 1916, p. 109; as Tylostoma maxima, Cke. and Mass. in Cooke, Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 1237, fig. 113 (W. Austr.).—We have received specimens of this rare species from Mrs. A. F. Cleland from Kurrawang, near Kalgoorlie, July, 1918. The peridium is # inch broad and 2 inch high, flattened spherical in shape, the apex irregularly torn with an aperture about 4 inchx+ inch; stem 3 inches high, + inch thick above, slightly attenuated downwards, striate, pallid; volva as a definite cup, 4 inch high, widely separated from the stem above; gleba light rusty in colour; spores finely rough, 6°8 p. 309 BATTAREA. 224. Battarea phalloides, var. Steveni, Lloyd: loc. cit., p. 11, pl. 28, figs. 2 and 3; Clel. and Cheel: Joc. cit., p. 111; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 1243 (W. Austr.), and as B. Muellerr, No. 1244 (S. Austr.), and 5B. Tepperiana, No. 1245 (Vict.)—Baan Baa, New South Wales, stem up to 12 inches high, attenuated upwards, very shaggy; volva buried in the ground. GEASTER. 225. Geaster Clelandu, Lloyd: Mycol. Notes, No. 55, 1918, p. 794, fig. 1196.—The type and cotype were found by Mrs. A. F. Cleland at Kalgoorlie in June, 1917. Lloyd describes the species as follows:—‘‘Exoperidium rigid, 1n- curved when dry, cut into eight (in this specimen, also in the cotype) rather narrow lobes. Endoperidium scurfy, with a short, thick pedicel. Mouth protruding, strongly furrowed.’’ He adds :—‘“‘The single specimen of this plant presents a char- acter to separate it from others of the section (Rigida, Cfr. Myc. Notes, p. 317) to which it belongs. It has a pedicellate endoperidium. The colour is decidedly red- dish, but it grew in red soil, which no doubt has something to do with the colour. Geasters are best defined in terms of others. This is Geaster Schmidelii as to size, pedicel, and mouth, but the exoperidium puts it in a different section. It is Geaster striatulus excepting the endoperidium, which is pedicellate. As a matter of fact, it is probably the original of Geaster striatulus, which was from Australia and not authentically known (Cfr. Myc. Notes, p. 312), and which was described as endoperidium ‘subsessile.’ But it is entirely different from (‘easter striatulus in the sense of Holl6s, which we have adopted and illustrated several times (Cfr. Myc. Notes, p. 71, and Lycop. Austr., p. 16).” 226. Geaster floriformis, Vitt. Lloyd: Lycop. of Austr., 1905, p. 16, fig. 10; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 1264 (Vict., Q’land); Clel. and Cheel: Journ. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S. Wales xlix., 1915, p. 221.—Manildra, New South Wales, October, 1916, identified by C. G. Lloyd—spores finely rough, 3°4 to 4 yp. 227. Geaster sumulans, Lloyd: Lycop. of Austr., 1905, peleene Vie Clel.. and Cheel: loc. ct.) p. 220: as (G. hygrometricus, Pers., in Cooke, Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 1268 (W. Austr., Q’land).—Manildra, October, 1916, iden- tified by Lloyd—spores nearly smooth, 5°2 1; Dubbo, October, 1915—spores rough, 5°8 »; Mount Lofty, South Australia, July, 1914—-spores rough, 4 to 6 wp. 310 228. Geaster Berkeleyit, Lloyd: lLycop. of Austr., -p. 19.—Mummulgum, near Casino, December, 1916, spores LOU 5010 ne 229. Geaster minimus, Schwein. Lloyd: Lycop. of Austr., p. 21—Narrabri, November, 1916, spores finely rough, 3°5 to 4°5 w; Baan Baa, January, 1917, spores rough, 5 p—both kindly identified for us by C. G. Lloyd. 230. Geastér saccatus, Fr. Lloyd: Lycop. of Austr., p. 22; Clel. and Cheel: Jour. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S. Wales, xlix., 1915, p. 225.—Bumberry and Manildra, September and October, 1916, identified by Lloyd, who says “‘larger than our (7.e., the American) plant and tending towards rufescens”’ —spores distinctly rough, 5°8 to 6°8 w; Manildra, October, 1916, identified by Lloyd as a small form—spores finely rough, 3:5 ww; Forbes, August, 1915, spores (emoeam 3 »; Murwillumbah, April, 1916, spores rough, -3°8 to d up. MYcENASTRUM. 231. Mycenastrum corium, (Guersent) Desv. Clel. and Cheel: Jour. Proc. Roy. Soc., N.S. Wales, 1., 1916, p. 116.— Dungog, New South Wales, November, 1916, spores 10°5 yp; Beaumont, near Adelaide, June, 1917, spores shaggy, 8°5 to 9 w; Kalgoorlie, June, 1917, spores rough, 10°4 to 12 wp. LYCOPERDON. 232. Lycoperdon gemmatum, Batsch. Clel. and Cheel: Jour. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S. Wales, 1., 1916, p. 122, No. 30.— National Park, New South Wales, on and near rotten wood, July, 1916, spores finely rough, 3°6 to 4 4; New South Wales, spores spherical, very finely warted under oil-immersion lens, 3°5 to 4 p. CALVATIA. 233. Calvatia lilacina, (Berk.). Clel. and Cheel: loc. cit., p. 123, No. 32.—Baan Baa, January, 1917, identification con- firmed by Lloyd (Nos. 287 and 288), spores echinulate, 5 p, capilhtium branching, 3°5 w in diameter—in one of these specimens the substance is bleached to a pale fawny-whitish colour ; Sydney, May, 1918; Krambach, near Taree, January, 1918, spores echinulate, 5°5 w; Craigie, Ararat, May, 1918 (E. J. Semmens, No. 90). | ASCOMYCETALES. Fam. TUBERACEAR. ENDOGONE. 234. Hndogone tuberculosa, Lloyd: Mycol. Notes, No. 56, October, 1918, p. 799.—The type specimens were obtained oll by one of us (J. B. C.) at The Rock, New South Wales, in July, 1917. Mr. Lloyd’s description of the species is as fol- lows :—“‘1-2 cm. thick, globose, pale orange. Surface tuber- culate. Peridium indistinct. Gleba convolute, lacunose, yellow. Vesicle imbedded in the context tissue, globose, 50-60 mic., with thick, hyaline walls and granular, yellow contents.’’ Lloyd adds that, possessing the characteristic vesicles of the genus Hndogone, this is best so referred, but it differs from all other species in the lacunose gleba and tuber- cular surface. Our notes state that the plants were just above the ground, 4 inch in diameter when fresh, pallid orange in colour, and with a tuberculate surface. The vesicles were large, oval, thick-walled bodies, 85 x 60 p in size in some cases, with granular contents. DISCOMYCETIINEAE. Fam. HELVELLIINEAE. MoRCHELLA. 235. Morchella esculenta, L. Pers.: Syn., 618; Sacc.: Syll., viu., 8; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 1353 (no locality).—Victoria, September, 1913 (asci cylindrical, occa- sionally slightly wavy, 243x174 pw, spores oval, 19 to ZOapeclel (2) jx). | 236. Morchella conica, Pers. Cooke: Myco., t. 81, f. 315; Sacc.: Syll., viu., 10; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 1354, f. 139 (Vict., S. Austr., Tas.); Cambage: Proc. Linn. Soc., N.S. Wales, 1901, p. 691 (N.S. Wales); Clel. and Cheel: Jour. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S. Wales, xlvii., 1914, p. 443 (N.S. Wales). — Victoria, September, 1913 (asci 210 x 21 w; spores 24 to 26x16 pp). LEOTIA. 237. Leotaa marcida, Pers. Lloyd: Geoglossaceae, p. 15.—Specimens have been identified for us by Llyod (No. 161), who says that many authors consider this species as merely a colour form of L. /wbrica, Pers. Our collecting notes are as follows:—Pileus # inch wide and $ inch high, irregu- larly nodular or “‘bumpy,’’ greenish-waxy looking, the under- surface slightly concave and paler and more watery in appear ance, on section tremelloid and watery waxy-looking. Stem 14 inch high, } inch thick, yellow-waxy looking, punctate with slightly darker, apparently warty, particles, on section show- ing an outer clear cortex and a thick solid yellow-waxy core, which expands in the pileus as a thin disc. The spore-bearing part of the ascus about 60x 10°5 pw, the whole ascus about 140 p» long. Spores overlapping in the ascus, 175 to 312 21x 6 p, ends rather pointed, usually with four large globules. Under trees, Lane Cove River, Sydney, June, 1916; Dr. Darnell Smith also collected specimens in the same month and year at Somersby Falls, Gosford; Neutral Bay, May, 1917; Mosman, April and May, 1918 (asci 60 to 70 p, spores 17°5 x 4°2 pw, one side of the spore a little flattened). GEOGLOSSUM. 238. Geoglossum Muellert, Cooke: Myco., t. 1, f. 2; Sacc.: Syll., 138; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 1362 (Vict.).—1? inch high. Club slightly viscid when moist, a little shorter than the stem, black. Stem shining. Asci fusiform. Sporidia 3-septate, 58 to 66x5 wu. Under bushes, Parramatta, July, 1912. 239. Geoglossum glabrum, Pers.: Syn., p. 608; Sacc. : Syll., 141; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 1363 (Vict., Q’land).—Club 4 inch high, + inch wide, flattened, slightly suleate, matt, almost black. Stem 1+ inch high, attenuated downwards, dark chocolate, and lighter than the club. Asci 139 to 174x18 p. Sporidia brown, 7-septate, 56x6 p. On the ground, Neutral Bay, June, 1913 (identified by Lloyd, No. 230). We also have the following :—New South Wales, ascl cylindrical club-shaped, 120 to 138x138 p, sporidia brown, 7-septate (one 6-septate), 72x48 p. Sedgwick, Victoria (EK. J. Semmens), amongst mosses, asc1 155 x17 p, sporidia brown, 7-septate, 53 to 61 x7 wp. Fam. PEZIZACEAE. PHILLIPSIA. 240. Phillipsia polyporoides, Berk.: Linn. J., xviii., 386; Sacc.: Syll., 608; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 1399 (Q’land); Lloyd: Letter 62, Note 432, 1916.—Specimens obtained at Kurrajong Heights on a fallen log in August, 1912, are considered by Lloyd, from Berkeley’s description, to be probably this species, though he sees no justification for the specific name. He adds that the genus Phillipsia is close to Urnula, though put in a different section in Saccardo. He describes our specimens as being thick, dark, coriaceous, and cup-shaped, with large, hyaline, arcuate, smooth spores, 12x 36 p, and numerous dark, filiform paraphyses, slightly enlarged at the apices. Our measurements show slightly curved spores, 27 to 29°5 x 10°14 to 12 p. We have also speci- mens collected by Prof. S. J. Johnston at Kendall in June, ~1917, on wood—asci cylindrical, 313 to 340 x12 to 14 np, spores white, slightly curved, 25 to 28x10°5 yp. ———————— 313 URNULA. 241. Urnula campylospora, ( Berk.) Cooke ; Peziza cam pylo- spora, Berk.: Fl. N. Zeal., 200; Geopyxis cinereo-mgra, B. and Br.; Peziza cinereo-nigra, B. and Br.: Linn. Trans., 1., 404, t. 46, f. 16-18; Lloyd also mentions as synonyms Rhizna reticulata and Peziza rhytidia, and quotes Massee for a fisure (Jour. Linn. Soc., xxxi., pl. 16, f..17); as Urniula campylospora in Cooke, Handb. Austr. Fungi,,No. 1453, f. 165 (Q’land), and in Lloyd, Mycol. Notes, No. 49, 1917, p. 695, f. 1037.—Lloyd has identified two collections for us. On wood, Lisarow, August, 1916 (asci 350 x 17 pw, sporidia curved 26x85 yw). On fallen wood, National Park, New South Wales, July, 1916 (under-surface and stalk black, finely rough; cup dark brown, then blackish; sporidia curved, sausage-shaped, 27°5 to 31 x 10°4 to 12 yp). PYRENOMYCETIINEAE. Fam. HYPOCREACEAE. HYPOMYCES. 242. Hypomyces aurantius, Tul.: Carp., 11., 43; Plow.: Grev., ui., 44, t. 150; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 1508 (Q’land).—Lloyd has identified a specimen for us, found on old Polyporus Berkeley: at Lisarow in June, 1916. He thinks this is probably also H. rosellus (Cooke, No. 1506, W. Austr.). Asci about 100 x5; sporidia constricted in-the centre, pointed at the ends, 17°5x3°4 » (Lloyd found them to be 20 to 24x5 to 6 p, hyaline, smooth, septate). Fam. XYLARIACHAH. XYLARIA. 243. Xylaria anisopleura, Mont.: Syll., 688; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 1535 (Q’land) ; as X. tuberiformis, Berk., in Lloyd, Mcyol. Notes, No. 48, 1917, p. 678, fig. 1011 only, later in Xylaria Notes, 1., 1918, p. 24, on the advice of Petch referred to X. anisopleura.—Our specimens, identified by Lloyd (No. 228), and referred to and figured in the above Notes, were gathered on a fallen trunk at Mount Irvine in June, 1915—asci about 100 p» long; spores black, often slightly curved, 12°5x7 wp. 244. Xylaria phosphorea, Berk.(?): Linn. J., xi., 177; Grev.: xi., t. 168, f. 75; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 1537 (Vict.).—Specimens collected by Dr. Darnell Smith at Mount Irvine in January, 1915, were identified by Lloyd (No. 229), with much doubt, as this species—asci about 104 x 8°5 w; spores black, 12 to 13°8 x 6°6 yw, one side slightly flattened. \ 314 245. Xylaria myosurus, Mont.(?)—Lloyd has identified specimens (No. 269), collected on a rotten trunk at Katoomba in December, 1916, as probably immature examples of this species. Conidiospores 7 to 10°4 x 3°5 to 4 », dagger-shaped. 246. Xylarva faveolis.—Lloyd, Xylaria Notes, 1., 1918, p. 9, figs. 1214-1216.—ILloyd has identified specimens for us (No. 440), referred to and figured in the above Notes. The plants were collected at Dorrigo in January, 1918—asci about 70 x6 pw, spores 10°4 x 4 p, blackish, one side a little flattened. 247. Xylaria hypoxylon, Grev.: Fl. Edin., 355; Sacc. : Syll., 1260; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 1547 (Q’land). —Lloyd has identified as probably the conidial form of this species specimens (No. 268) found at the base of a dead tree- fern at Katoomba in December, 1916—conidiospores 8°5 x 2 p, elongated, one end more pointed. SARCOXYLON. 248. Sarcorylon Le Rati (Hennings). Lloyd: Mycol. Notes, 1917, No. 47, p. 668, fig. 960; Xylaria gigas(?), Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 1539 (N.S. Wales), is thought by Lloyd to be possibly this species.—Lloyd places this genus close to NXylaria. He has identified for us as Sarcorylon Le Rati the specimens mentioned in his Myco- logical Notes. The species was previously, he states, only known from New Caledonia. Our specimens were found on the ground under trees at Lisarow, New South Wales, in December, 1916. The plants when fresh were in shape some- what like large examples of one of the forms of Polysaccum pisocarpium, 2.e., broadly club-shaped. They were attached to large irregular white mycelial masses in the ground. The surface was covered with a yellow efflorescence showing numerous conidial spores (8°5 to 12°5 x2 to 3°4 pw). On sec- tion the centre was whitish and surrounded by a broad yellowish layer, whilst outside this was a black line covered with the yellow efflorescence. Smell unpleasant. PoRONTA. 249. Poronia punctata, L. Cooke :Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 1548 (Vict., Tas., W. Austr.).—Specimens collected on dung at Orange in October, 1916, were identified by Lloyd (No. 227)—asci 156 pw long, spores black, 26 to 27 x 15:5 wp. 250. Poroma oedipus, Mont.: Ann. Sci. Nat., 1855; Cooke: Handb. Austr. Fungi, No. 1549 (Vict., N.S. Wales, Q’land).—We have two New South Wales collections, both identified by Lloyd (Nos. 225 and 226)—asci 121 x 17 p, spores oval, surrounded by mucus, 19 x 8°5 p (immature). 315 NUMMULARIA. 251. Nummularia Baleyx, B. and Br. Cooke: Hand. Austr. Fungi, No. 1554 (Q’land).—New South Wales specimens have been identified for us as probably this species by Lloyd (No. 223)—spores blackish, 17x85 to 12 p, ends sometimes pointed. DALDINIA. 252. Daldimia concentrica, Bolt. Cooke: Hand. Austr. Fungi, No. 1561, fig. 202 (all the States except S. Austr.).— Mosman, Sydney, New South Wales (spores shghtly curved, 13°8 to 155x7 pw, asci 85 p» in diameter); Malanganee, New South Wales, August (spores oval, 10°4 to 13°38 x6 to 8°5 p); Kendall, August; Flnders Island, Bass Straits, November (spores black, obliquely elongated, slightly pointed, 13°8 to 155x777 to 72 w). See also Proc, Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, KXxvil., p. 236 (1912), for previous ‘record. DESCRIPTION OF PLATES. Puate XXVIII. Amamtopsis punctata, n. sp., with section, volva, and spores. PuatE XXIX. Fig. 1. Cantharellus lilacinus, n. sp., with spore. ie ea corrugatus, n. sp., with spore. » oo Mycena banksiae, n. sp., with spore. ages ca coccineus, n. sp., with spore. » oO. Boletus scarlatinus, n. sp. , ban 6: i om, als small form with spore. 316 THE PETROLOGY OF THE GRANITIC MASS OF CAPE WILLOUGHBY, KANGAROO ISLAND:—PART lI. By Co. Tr usie ees) ace aeee ‘Demonstrator in Geology and Mineralogy, University of Sydney. Deas-Thomson Scholar in Geology, 1919. (Communicated by Professor Walter Howchin.) [Read September 11, 1919.] Puates XXX. and XXXII. anp 2 Maps. CONTENTS. I. Introduction. _ II. General Description. IIl. Characters of the Rock Types— (a) The Main Granite. — (b) The Minor Intrusions. IV. The Pink Aplite and its Products of Pneumatolysis. V. The Nature and Composition of the White Pegmatite. VI. The Relations of the Rock Types. VII. General Discussion. I. INTRODUCTION. The imposing granite headland of Cape Willoughby forms the easternmost extremity of Kangaroo Island. From the standpoint of petrology this locality has received little attention, and in the previous literature dealing with this area brief reference only is made to the intrusion. This literature is :— : (2.) Howchin, W.: Trans. ‘Roy. Soc. 8S. Austr piaee xxvil., 1903, pp. 80-83. (u.) Wade, A.: Bull. No. 4, Geol. Surv. S. Austr., pp. 20 and 21. In addition the writer has described certain quartz tourmaline nodules from this area. ) Howchin, while investigating the geographical extent of the late Palaeozoic (Permo-carboniferous) glacial deposits on Kangaroo Island visited Cape Willoughby, and in his subsequent paper briefly refers to the granite and its minor intrusions. Wade mentions its intrusive character into the (1) Tilley: Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1919, p. 156. 317 associated quartzites, and both investigators note the remark- able blue opalescence of the quartz. grains present in the granite. CAPE WILLOUGHBY, a zo of : 4 3S 3 YORKES PENINSULA KANGAROO ISLAND, As far as the writer is aware, no further data are avail- able of this intrusion. 318 II. GENERAL DESCRIPTION. The granite mass occupies an area of approximately 2 square miles, and forms a length of coastline of 54 miles. In plan the outcrop is roughly triangular, in shape approaching a right-angled triangle, with the coastline forming the two sides of the right angle. Along the sea coast, the granite ends sharply up against dark-coloured quartzites, which macroscopically suffer little or No change; nor does there appear to be a border or contact zone to the granite, for this retains the mineralogical and textural characteristics of the main mass. The intrusive nature of the mass is well shown by the manner in which the granite cuts across the strike of the quartzites and by the presence of rifted blocks of the quartzite (accidental xenoliths), which are developed near the contact and are obviously derived from the country rock. At the northern sea coast contact with the country rock, small aplitic veins proceed into the micaceous quartzites, which are here striking north-east with a south-easterly dip at 64°. The rifted blocks maintain proximity to the contact surface. At the southern sea coast termination of the granite xenoliths are less numerous and are generally small. The quartzites here have the same north-east and south-west strike, but dip south-east at 74° to 80°. In the granite, near the junction, occur quartz geodes lined and filled with tourmaline. Associated with the granite occur a series of aplitic and pegmatitic dykes, which are clearly younger than the main mass of granite, for they are seen to cut across and intersect it. These intrusions bear a close relationship to the granite, and form a highly interesting series. The main occurrences are listed below :— (2.) A large elliptical (in cross section) mass of grey aplite is developed behind Barn Bluff. ; (w.) A smaller mass occurs on the sea coast, south of Cannon Hill. This is a pink aplite. (aw.) Minor dykes of a white pegmatite occur at the northern side of Barn Bluff at the head of the first gully south of the lighthouse, and veins both north and south of Pink Bay. These latter veins have the trend for the most part of the joint planes of the granite. In the main mass of granite segregations are sporadically distributed. These are generally ovoid and finer-textured 'patches (cognate xenoliths). Some show a slightly darker colour than the general colour of the normal granite. 319 In the accompanying map, the extent of the granite mass is outlined, and its contact with the quartzite-schist country rock shown. The inland junction is only approximate. The LEGEND. N (1) Granite. (2).Grey Aplite. (Porphyritic) . (3).Pink Aplite. (4).Quartz Albitite. Fae (5).Muscovite Albitite. — ee (6). Quartzite. By Dr Ge ee Scale. 2.inckea s 1.mile. more important dykes or intrusive masses are shown in addition. : No detailed petrographic study has been made of the country rocks, which consist of quartzites, quartz-mica 320 schists, and mica schists. The whole region has suffered consid- erable regional metamorphism, in common with the metamor- phism shown by the eastern beds of the Mount Lofty Ranges on the mainland. The differentiation of contact and regional metamorphism for the area under consideration would demand much careful field and petrographic study. III. CHARACTERS OF THE Rock TyYPEs. (a) THE MAIN GRANITE. Throughout the mass, the granite maintains a very con- stant mineralogical and textural character. In hand specimens the rock is more or less even-grained, with the occasional development of phenocrysts of unstriated felspar. The most striking feature of the rock is the presence of subidiomorphie crystals of quartz, showing a remarkable blue opalescence. This quartz is also developed in the minor intrusions associ- ated with the granite. The felspar shows well-developed cleavages, and often contains inclusions of biotite. Occasion- ally a felspar phenocryst may show, with the aid of a lens, an intergrowth with quartz—suggestive of a graphic inter- growth. According to the freshness of the rock the felspars are seen as greyish, pink, or tending to greenish in colour. The dark mineral is biotite. In addition small quantities of iron pyrites can be detected in some specimens. Under the microscope the minerals developed are seen to be quartz, microcline, plagioclase, biotite, and, as accessories, muscovite, apatite, ilmenite, pyrites, and zircon. As secondary minerals there are present epidote, leucoxene, sericite, kaolin, and chlorite. Quartz occurs, firstly, as subidiomorphic grains with well- developed cracks, and showing undulose extinction. These represent the grains seen in hand specimens. Minute inclusions are very numerous, and in many cases appear to be — laid out in strings. Many of these undoubtedly are fluid or gaseous inclusions, whilst others appear to be solid, and probably represent rutile needles. Whilst in reflected lhght this quartz is characterized by a bluish opalescence, in trans- mitted light it has a distinct yellowish to reddish yellow appearance, according to the thickness viewed. Again, some of the quartzes when carefully examined show zones of alternate clear and opalescent layers in reflected light, and, in transmitted light, these show up as colourless and yellowish areas respectively. These zones appear to follow the outlines of the growing cerystal. D*) = 2 G0 ee is not proposed to consider this question in the present paper, as the subject is reserved for a subsequent communication. 321 In some sections it would appear that, as an accompani- ment of cracking, there has been a rotation of sectors of the grain, for the grain is not optically continuous throughout. Along these cracks the quartz may show higher polarization colours. Quartz is also present in the slides in allotrimorphic grains, or as a constituent of a graphic intergrowth with microcline. This intergrowth may develop around the large quartz or microcline crystals, and is obviously of later erystallization. Microcline is present in subidiomorphic crystals, which may show inclusions of biotite, plagioclase, and quartz. The microcline twinning after the albite and pericline laws is very finely developed, and the lamellae are often seen to overlap. In sections parallel to (010) pericline twinning may be absent or submicroscopically developed; where clearly developed, however, it cuts the trace of the (001) cleavage at an angle of 74°-76°. Extinction on (010) sections has a maximum value of 6°-7° from the basal cleavage. Some sections show a very fine perthitic intergrowth with plagioclase. The layers traverse the microcline; and are optically continuous; optically they have the properties of albite. This is the typical microcline microperthite structure. | Plagioclase occurs in more or less tabular crystals of well- developed form, and shows the characteristic albite lamellae. Zoning is characteristic. The refractive index is > C. Balsam, and most sections show R.I. < quartz. In zoned sections showing no multiple twinning the extinction from the (001) cleavage read as maxima :— Outer zone a ae he Piet. O° Intermediate zone .... hk ay 10° ' Central zone ... SY aeaye: OO This corresponds to a range we Oligedlass (Ab, An,) to Andesine (Ab, An,). Such zoned sections (010) in convergent hght show the emergence of a bisectrix to be practically normal to the section. This is the obtuse bisectrix, and the negative birefringence is clear. The felspar is an Oligoclase-Andesine, the average com- position being nearer the oligoclase end. Some sections of the granite show the presence of a more acid plagioclase than the above. This has the pro- perties of oligoclase albite. It represents a later stage of erystallization, but is of minor development. Biotite.—This mineral is developed in clusters of flakes of elongated section showing the strong basal cleavage. The L 322 colour is dark brown to greenish-yellow. The pleochroism is intense, showing practically complete absorption. The biotite encloses such minerals of earlier formation as apatite, zircon, and ilmenite. Chlorite and epidote are developed as secondary pro- ducts. The small amount of muscovite occurs in association with the biotite, and is of later crystallization. It remains clear and unaltered. Apatite occurs in slender needles and small hexagonal prisms. It is most abundant as inclusions in the biotite. Ilmenite is associated with the biotite, and is generally surrounded by a white leucoxenic decomposition product. Zircon, like apatite, is enclosed in biotite, and occurs in short prisms. It is aS surrounded by faint pleochroic haloes. | Epidote is present, associated with biotite and plagio- clase; it probably results from the interaction of biotite and plagioclase, and is obviously of secondary origin. Calcite may be developed in addition. Kaolin occurs as a dust accompanying both felspars. The cores of some sections of the plagioclase show plen- tiful sericite, occurring in small flakes, sometimes to the complete exclusion of the felspar, from which it has developed. It is probably paragonitic 1n composition. | The order of crystallization of the constituent minerals may be subdivided as :— I. Accessories—Apatite, ilmenite, zircon. II. Biotite and accessory muscovite. III. Plagioclase—Quartz and microcline. Overlapping of the crystallization periods of II. and III. occurred, as is evidenced by inclusions. This particularly refers to microcline, which in its occasional porphyritic deve- lopment is then referable to an early stage. The order of cessation of crystallization is more truly represented by the - above arrangement. Nearing the completion of crystallization, the sodic character of the plagioclase had become marked, in some sections oligoclase-albite being developed independently, and the last stages are represented by the graphic intergrowths of quartz and microcline which surround the larger crystals. The relative proportions of plagioclase to microcline felspar show some variation in the different sections ex- amined. As a whole they are present in approximately equal amounts. The granite may therefore be placed in the Adamellite group. Cognate Xenoliths.—These occur as ellipsoidal or ovoid patches in the main granite. In hand specimens they appear 323 as moderately dark-greyish, fine-grained aggregates, with the occasional development as phenocrysts of the characteristic blue opalescent quartz seen in the main granite. Microscopic- ally the segregations are seen to consist of the minerals of the main granite. Biotite is present in ragged flakes and, in parts, is altered to chlorite; epidote 1s also present as a secondary product. In some cases the remains of biotite are now only represented by chlorite and epidote together. Tlmenite is sparingly present with its leucoxenic decomposition product. Phenocrysts of quartz and oligoclase-andesine or andesine are present, and the remaining mass consists of a fine-grained assemblage of allotrimorphic quartz and microcline, mostly untwinned. (2) The microcline is heavily dusted with kaolin. With the plagioclase the secondary development of scaly mica appears more usual. There is a minor amount of graphic intergrowth of quartz and felspar (microcline). The specific gravity of one of these ovoid segregations was determined as 2°655 (16° C). The specific gravity of the main granite is 2668 (16° C). D1 =2°668. The segregations show a variable amount of biotite, the one in question being, if anything, freer from this mineral than the average. In some cases their shghtly darker colour, as an indication necessarily of a greater concentration of biotite than in the main granite, is probably illusory, in that they are finer grained, and the biotite is more evenly distributed than in the main granite. (6) THE MINOR INTRUSIONS. For the purpose of later discussion these minor intrusions can be separated into three distinct groups:—/(a) The grey aplite; (6) the pink aplite; (c) the white pegmatite. These will be treated seriatium. (a) The Grey Aplite.—This occurs as an intrusive mass, elliptical in plan, behind Barn Bluff (vide map). In hand specimens it is a fine-grained light-grey rock with development (2)The absence of microcline twinning in some sections of the potassic felspar is not considered sufficient evidence to interpret- the rock as possessing orthoclase in addition. The presence of microcline is definitely fixed by its characteristic “orating’’? structure, but it is quite possible for microcline to occur with albite twinning alone or no twinning at all. The very general presence of microcline in the older plutonic rocks is suggestive that this mineral is really the stable phase of potassic felspar. On this question cf. C. H. Warren, ‘‘A Quantitative Study of certain Perthitic Felspars’’ (Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts and Sciences, vol. 51, No. 3, 1915, pp. 127-154). L2 324 of occasional phenocrysts of the characteristic opalescent quartz, bunches of biotite, and very sparingly an occasional phenocryst of felspar. A few scattered grains of pyrites are also present. The specific gravity of this rock is 2625. D')=2'625. Under the microscope the quartz phenocrysts have the same characteristics as possessed in the normal granite. Biotite is spread sporadically through the rock with its accompanying chlorite and epidote. Pyrites is also present. Quartz and microcline are developed, showing allotri- morphic boundaries. The microcline shows Carlsbad twin- ning, but the grating structure may be absent or represented only by submicroscopic lines of light and shade. Some plagioclase is present, and has the properties of oligoclase albite. Secondary mica and kaolin are developed as alterations of the felspar. In a phenocryst of microcline the micasation may be well developed. A primary micrographic intergrowth of quartz and microcline is often present round the borders of a large uartz grain. A determination of alkalies in this rock gave KEG pine Na,O —2°63%; The rock is a Biotite Microcline Aplite. In parts it has a distinct granite-porphyry facies, but its relationship to the associated intrusions is better indicated in the name iven. (6) The Pink A plite.—This aplite occurs as a distinctly intrusive mass along the coast immediately south of Cannon Hill. Its junction with the granite is in most places markedly sharp. The mass shows a somewhat variable texture throughout its extent; the greater part is of very fine grain, but this grades into a coarser variety, in which are developed phenocrysts of blue quartz and a ferromagnesian mineral, biotite, also makes its appearance. It is an aplite with development in part of a distinct granite-porphyry facies. — It is in this rock that occur the quartz tourmaline nodules already described in detail in a previous paper.() A number of quartz veins occupy fissures in the aplite, and associated with these veins occurs a zone of altered aplite which appears to be of the nature of a greisen. A further alteration of the aplite is the production along fissures of a white kaolinized product. A number of quartz geodes are also developed. Microscopic description of this aplite is dealt with on page 325. (c) The White Pegmatite (Aplite).—There are a number of occurrences of this type all of which are not noted on the (3) Tilley: loc. cit. e ee ge ee ee EE ee i a ee 2 . # ee ee ee 325 map. Some occur as veins in the main granite. The first occurrence noted is in the first gully south of the Cape ‘ Willoughby Lighthouse. The dyke outcrops at the head of the gully, and has a width of eight yards. Its boundaries are ill-defined and are covered with sand. In hand specimens it 1s a coarse aggregate of blue quartz and white felspar, apparently not graphically intergrown. A second pegmatite with predominant felspar and show- ing strings of quartz is well developed on the northern side of Barn Bluff. Limonite is associated with the felspar in parts as a subsequent alteration; muscovite is also present. The rock has weathered out into honeycombed masses. The remaining occurrences of this rock are in the form of veins, which outcrop on both sides of Pink Bay, along the coast. They vary in width from 2 ft. downwards, and vary in composition from an aggregate of blue quartz and white felspar to veins of pure felspar. For the most part these veins run parallel to the trend of the joint planes in the granite. The three types of, minor intrusion occur as separate and distinct masses. In no case have they been observed in asso- ciation, to enable their order of intrusion to be determined. These, too, were the only types of intrusions seen exposed in the granite mass. Minor intrusions into the neighbouring quartzites were not observed; about seven miles from Cape Willoughby a pegmatite dyke is developed in schist. Gem tourmaline has been derived from this area, and the dyke is most probably an offshoot from the Willoughby mass. The writer had not an opportunity of visiting this locality. Microscopically, the minerals present in the pink aplite are quartz, microcline, plagioclase (albite), and, as accessories, biotite (much chloritized), and muscovite. Kaolin and secondary mica accompany the felspars as alteration products. One slide shows a well-developed phenocryst of plagioclase as a trilling, and, in addition, albite lamellae are present. This is probably an oligoclase albite. It is surrounded by a beautiful micrographic intergrowth of quartz and microcline. The micrographic intergrowths are displayed more especially in the coarser varieties of the intrusion. In these, also, apatite bezins to appear and muscovite is more plenti- fully distributed, often in plumose fashion. Some of the albite shows twinning after both albite and pericline laws. In the finer-grained types the fabric approaches the type ““sranulitic”’ characteristic of some aplites. In an aplite near Pink Bay, related to this series, subidiomorphic grains of magnetite appear, and in addition 4 326 there are present a few scattered grains of blue strongly pleochroic tourmaline. The albite in this rock is more abundant than in the aplite described above. The specific gravities of the rocks of this series are indicated below :— (i.) Fine-grained red aplite, D’§=2'590. (it.) Medium-grained red aplite, D*{;=2°602. (wi.) Coarse-grained red aplite, D'®>=2°605. (iv.) Aplite from near Pink Bay, D'},=2°625. The aplites of this series are characterized by the pre- dominance of microcline felspar; plagioclase is subordinate. This plagioclase is an acid albite, and in the finer-grained aplite may appear as idiomorphic phenocrysts rarely, the main development being in association with the quartz and mircrocline. The listed specific gravities further point to the dominant felspar being potassic. A partial analysis of the fine-grained red aplite yielded K,O=5°48%, Na,O=2°79%. The pink colour of this series is due to the presence of a fine film of haematite dusting the cleavages and cracks of the alkali felspars. IV. Propucts oF PNEUMATOLYSIS OF THE PINK APLITE. These may be hsted as follows:—/(a) The quartz-tour- maline nodules (Pneumatoliths); () the greisen; (c) the kaolin. The quartz-tourmaline nodules have already been described in the paper cited above. They were developed anteriorly to the greisen, which will now be discussed. (6) The Greisen.—Subsequent to the consolidation of the aplite fissures in turn were developed and afforded an avenue of escape for the remaining volatile constituents, now much reduced in temperature. The effects of the volatile constituents are denoted by - the presence of quartz veins and the occurrence of small quan- tities of greisen developed as an alteration of the aplite. The quartz of the vein material has crystallized in the characteristic prismatic crystals capped with pyramid faces. A section across a quartz vein to the original aplite shows in succession-quartz, an alteration prodtct of the aplite which proves to be a greisen, and this grades into an unaltered aplite. In hand specimens the greisen has a porous, fine-grained, light-greenish appearance, and with the aid of a lens quartz and a lightish-green mica are easily recognized. The porous character of the rock is well marked. er ae 327 Under the microscope the minerals seen to be present are quartz and muscovite, the latter being slightly greenish in colour, and so is slightly pleochroic. The muscovite is present in elongated flakes showing good cleavages, and is often present in bunches or tufts, but in all degrees of orientation. In the true greisen replace- ment of felspar has been complete. A oradational alteration of the aplite occurs, however, and some sections show the incipient greisenization of. the felspar. The quartz of the original aplite is unchanged, but some secondary quartz has been introduced. (c) The Kaolin.—At a still later stage in pneumatolysis kaolinization of the aplite has occurred. The kaolin is deve- loped in bands along minute fissures, which may contain thin quartz veins, and may be ascribed essentially to the action of superheated water at a lower temperature than that of greisenization. The evidence of pneumatolysis of the aplite is clearly shown, and the progressive fall in temperature of the pneumatolytic agents is reflected in the change of pneu- matolytic product. The order of development of pneumato- lytic product in these aplites is in accord with that worked out for other fields. The formation of muscovite from microcline is doubtless represented by the well-known equation :— G.) 3 K AISi,0,+ H,O —> H, K Al, (8i0,),+K, Si0,+5 Si0,, and the development of kaolin by — Gey 2 K, Alsi,0O, + 2 BLO — > ALO, 2 S810, 2 H,O+K, S8i0,+3 S10,, or if CO, is regarded as an active agent by (iii.) 2 K AISi,0O,+2 H,O+CO, — > AIO, 2 SiO, 2 EL Once, Co, +4 $10,. The volume changes represented by fet equations are for (1.) the development of muscovite and quartz, a volume decrease of 22 per cent.; for (ii1.) the production of kaolin and quartz, a volume decrease of 13 per cent. During the greisenization kaolin can accompany the production of mica, although in general the former is dis- tinctly formed at a lower temperature. If this is so, the porous nature of the greisen can be explained as due to the weathering out of kaolin from the rock. Even so, it is possible that the porosity may in part represent the volume decrease on greisenization, as shown by the preceding equations. It is difficult to understand, however, if this be correct, why the (4) Cf. Flett, J. S.: Memoir of Geol. Surv. Eng. and Wales, 1909, Geology of Bodmin and St. Austell, p. 118. 328 quartz solutions in the associated vein did not completely infill the cavities. V. Tuer NatTurRE AND CoMPOSITION OF THE WHITE PEGMATITE. The mode of occurrence of these dykes and veins has already been described, including a brief macroscopic descrip- tion of the various types. When these rocks were examined microscopically the pre- dominant felspar was found to be albite, and the rock types can now be classed as albitites. The varieties present are quartz-albitites, muscovite-albitites, and an almost pure albitite consisting practically of albite. This rock occurs in veins associated with a quartz-albitite. (a) Albitite.—D ‘fo =2°622 :—Under the microscope this rock is seen to consist essentially of albite. Accessories are apatite, in hexagonal crystals; zircon, in idiomorphic prisms, showing high polarization colours; and rutile, usually in prismatic forms. Muscovite is present in small tufts and is usually associated with apatite, zircon, and rutile. The albite is usually sub- idiomorphic to allotriomorphic. A curious mottled twinning shows up in some sections. This has been described as ‘““chequer albite.’’ ©) In other sections only well-defined albite lamellae are present. A very small quantity of interstitial quartz is present in the slide. The chequer structure is due to the presence of irregular interpenetrating twin lamellae. No traces of a mottled char- acter, however, are present on sections parallel to (010). This structure was first described by Becke.© Flett and Hughes have noted its development in phenocrysts of volcanic rocks associated with albite of the usual kind. In the albite rocks under consideration, there is no ~ evidence to suggest albitization of original microcline felspar. Some albite sections show a transition from normal albite lamellae to the chequer type. Its occurrence, associated with normal albite, both here and in the example given by Flett, appear to negative any secondary origin as a pressure effect. Its origin is admittedly obscure, but it seems possible that it may be primary, indicating irregular deposition of albite substance during growth. The presence of excess mineralizers may have been effective to this end. (6) Vide Flett, J. S.: Mem. Geol. Surv. Eng. and Wales, Geology of Newton Abbot, 1918, p. 60. E. W. Hughes: Geol. Mag.,' Jan., 1917, p. 18. (@)F. Becke: Denk. Kais. Akad. Wien., vol. Ixxv., p. 28, 1906. 329 The descriptions by Jack “ and Ransome (8) of the albite present in albitite rocks, described by them, strongly suggest the presence of chequer albite in these rocks. (b) Quartz Albitite.—D'$> =2'640. This forms.the most abundant type, and it is with this rock that the albite is associated. Here the quartz is present as blue opalescent grains as in the main granite. Microscopically, the minerals present are quartz, albite, and as accessories apatite, zircon, and rutile. The latter mineral is present in idiomorphic prismatic crystals and, also, as geniculate twins (twinning plane [101]), giving a sagenite network. The albite has a refractive index less than Canada Balsam. In sections perpendicular to the albite lamellae, the symmetrical extinction is 16° and on sections showing as untwinned the maximum extinction is 19° from the (001) cleavage. Further confirmation is provided by the extinction given on (010) for the two parts of a Carlsbad twin. The sign of the birefringence is positive. (c) Muscovite Albitite.—This is developed at Barn Bluff. The rock in hand specimens has an altered appearance. Through the felspar can be seen very small veinlets of quartz, and portions of the felspar show alteration with limonitic material. Muscovite is recognizable. Under the microscope, the minerals present are albite, muscovite, and accessorily, quartz, apatite, zircon, and rutile. The albite possesses the same characteristics as in the other occurrences, and the peculiar chequer twinning is observed. Some of the mica is associated with quartz in little tufts and rosettes. Both mica and quartz are probably secondary. Some muscovite, however, is undoubtedly primary. The rock has apparently suffered some change, due to the presence of mineralizers, but the results are not as clearly demarcated as in other examples. A study of the literature of albite, aplites, or pegmatites indicates that this type of rock is comparatively rare. Rocks of this type were first. described under the name albitite by Turner (9) from Plumas Co., Sierra Nevada. These aplites occur as dykes, and consist essentially of albite in granular aggregates. Quartz is occasionally completely absent, but may occur plentifully in the same dyke. Muscovite may or may not be present. Iron ores and apatite are sparingly distributed, and garnet is an occasional accessory. Duparc (7)R. L. Jack: Geol. Surv. S. Austr., Bull. No. 3, 1914, p. 16. (3) F. L. Ransome: Journ. Wash. Acad. Sci., vol. i., No. 4, 1911, pp. 114-118. (9)H. W. Turner: 17th Ann, Rep. U.S.G.S., pp. 728, et seq. 330 and Pearce 9) describe albitites from the Northern Urals, where they are associated with gabbro. In these rocks the albite is developed intergrown with a little quartz. It is to be noted that both these occurrences are associated with more or less basic rocks, e.g., in the Sierra Nevada with serpentine, and in the Northern Urals with gabbroid masses. In Australia rocks of this nature have been found in Western and South Australia. Maitland“) described a pegmatite from the Pilbarra region. The constituents appear to be albite, quartz, garnet, and cassiterite. From Eyre Peninsula, South Australia, R. L. Jack “2 describes dyke rocks of aplitic habit consisting, essentially, of albite with small amounts of quartz, muscovite, apatite, and magnetite. From the descriptions given, the albite evidently possesses the peculiar chequer structure. In one instance there is a remark- able association of wernerite with the albitite, the scapolite being developed in long prismatic crystals. The association of the Western Australian albitite is with granite, whilst the Eyre Peninsula rock is intrusive into metamorphosed sedimentary beds, but granites are developed at hand. A partial analysis of an albitite from Cape Willoughby has been made. . This is tabulated below, and for comparison the analyses of a number of other aibitite rocks are listed with it :— Voierra 11, N. Urals. LI. Pilbarra. IV. Eyre Pen. Willoueby. SiO, 66°54 66°09 68°36 66°13 §8°39 TiO; n.d. 0°23 0°07 0°31 n.d. Al,O, n.d. 18°85 8°74 19°92 nde Fe,O, n.d. 0°91 — 0°60 n.d. FeO n.d =—_ t5 0°19 n.d MnO n.d — 0°45 _ n.de*oe MeO 0°77 1°53 0°54 012 ad CaO 0°43 1:09 0°39 0°57 0°65 Naso 10°28 LO"84 E22 LO°83 1-23 K,O 0°89 0°48 0°07 1°02 0°21 H,O : eer be iy, 0°03 0°44 0°45 P30: td: = — 0°09 u.d. I. H. W. Turner: 17th Ann. Report U.S.G.S., 1895-6, p: 728. Il. Dupare et Pearce: Compt. Rendu., 140, 1905, 1614. III. A. Gibb Maitland: Bull. 40, Geol. Surv. W. Austr., p. 100. IV. R. L. Jack(13): Bull. 3, Geole Surv. S. Austr., p. 16. V. C. Willoughby albitite. (10) Dupare et Pearce: Compt. Rendu., 140, 1905, 1614. (11) A. Gibb Maitland: Bull. No. 40, Geol. Surv. W. Austr., pp. 100-102. (12) RR. L. Jack: Bull. No. 3, Geol. Surv. S. Austr., pp. 15, 16. (13) The abnormally high content of Na,O (13°48%) reported for the Miltalie albitite casts suspicion on its reliability. 331 VI. Tut RELATIONS oF THE Rock TyYPEs. In the accompanying table the mineral constitution of the rock types is shown. The sign + indicates the presence of the mineral as a constant feature, and often in relative abundance. The sign — indicates that the mineral is sparingly pre- sent, and may be absent. _ The two combined, +, indicate that varieties of the one rock type may show the variation indicated :— aja (eos) e (6 \ea lee | 2 | 3 Granite .... + | +] + eae ee -|-j|- Microcline ae Aplites iy iia, 2 (Calcic)) ~ ‘i Wimiites |. | ea =: anh ee eon Pa The origin of the aplites, both potassic and sodic (albitite), with the granite remains to be discussed. Aplites associated with granite rocks consist essentially of alkali felspars and quartz, and occur as dykes or irregular sheets. In distinction from pegmatites they are characteristi- cally fine grained. This fine-grained texture may be inconstant, and with a transition into a coarser type they grade into pegmatites. Pegmatites appear to differ from aplites only in this, that they are typically coarser grained, and often contain a wider range of accessory minerals, these characteristics being generally assignable to the greater concentration of mineral- izers during their crystallization. These rocks represent the residual magma obtained by fractional crystallization, whether by sinking of crystals, or by a selective filter pressing, or squeezing out of the residual liquid from the crystalline mass of granite composition. Such residual magma, on the contraction resulting from the cooling of the crystalline mass, is injected into cracks or joints so formed. Where differentiation of the granitic magma followed different lines, we have aplites associated with lamprophyric rocks in complementary relationship. A review of the literature on granite aplites indicates that these are dominantly potassic, or sodi-potassic. Of aplites associated with basic rocks our knowledge has increased during the last few years. Such aplites may occur 332 as salic interstitial masses or segregations within the associated rock, and are often characterized by a micrographic fabric, or they may occur as distinct dykes cutting the igneous mass. The composition of such aplites is variable. The pre- dominant felspar is very often albite or oligoclase, with quariz. Orthoclase may be absent. Such aplites are therefore often characteristically sodic. Examples of this type have bebe described by Elsden, (4 Bowen, 5) Collins,“ and others. | To be correlated here also are the albite—rich dyke-rocks described by Turner, Dupare and Pearce, and Ransome.” The former are associated, as has been noted, with serpentine -and gabbro masses respectively. The albite rocks described by Ransome are associated with diorite. In the micropegmatite of the Purcell Sills,“8) orthoclase is associated with the sodic-plagioclase, and the potassic felspar plays the dominant part in the pegmatites of the Duluth gabbro.(@9) In all these examples the dominant process of differentia- tion has probably been one of fractional crystallization. Before discussing the mechanism of the differentiation of the Willoughby aplites and pegmatites, the characteristics of the types will be shortly reviewed. They may be divided into two groups : — (i). Those characterized. by dominant microcline. (11). Those characterized by dominant albite. The microcline aplites consist essentially of fine-grained aggregates of quartz, microcline, and subordinate albite. They may pass locally into a porphyritic type in which phenocrysts of quartz, biotite, and more rarely acid plagioclase are present. _ Granophyric phenocrysts of microcline and quartz also occur. The albite pegmatites (albitites) are composed essentially of albite with quartz (quartz albitite), of dominant albite with accessory muscovite (muscovite albitite), and are comparatively coarse grained, sufficiently so to texturally determine them as pegmatites. Muicrocline appears to be absent. (14) J. V. Elsden: Q.J.G.S:, 1908, vol. 64, p. 278. (15) N. L. Bowen: Journ. Geol., 1910, vol. 18, p. 658. (16)W. H. Collins: Mem. 33, Geol. Surv. Can., 1918, p. 59. (17) F, L. Ransome: Journ. Wash. Acad. Sci., vol. 1., No. 4, 1911, pp. 114-118. (18)S. J. Schofield: Mus. Bull. 2, Geol. Surv. Can., 1914, pp. 1; jet seg: . (19) F, F, Grout: Econ. Geol., vol. 18, No. 3, 1918, p. 185. se ciliata iti ali i a a ee am. a eT 333 The mode of differentiation of these rocks can be con- sidered under the following heads : — A- THE ORIGIN OF THE MICROCLINE—ALBITE APLITES. The microcline-aplites and albite-pegmatites are the only intrusions within the confines of the granite as exposed. No basic dyke-rocks were seen by the writer. In the country rock, some miles from the granite contact, Prof. Howchin@) has reported a basic dyke of diabasic composition. The writer, unfortunately, was unable to visit the locality during his visit. Despite the abundance of aplite associated with the granite, there appears to be a scarcity of other satellitic types of intrusion, such as those of Jamprophyric type, which, if present, might suggest complementary differentiation. The field evidence must be taken as it stands, for we have no warrant to assume that such lamprophyric types are present. but still uncovered. | This evidence is therefore suggestive that the microcline aplites are direct derivatives of the granite magma by a process of fractional crystallization. The aplites as now developed in the granite came into their position during the cooling and contraction of the crystalline granitic mass, viz., by intrusion into contraction cracks and fissures. In this respect, therefore, the aplitic intrusions resemble those characteristic of so many granitic masses. The origin of the albite rich pegmatites which are developed in minor amount within the granite remains to be treated. B. THE ORIGIN OF THE ALBITITES. It has been noted in the previous discussion that aplites associated with basic rocks were often highly sodic, but not invariably so. In the case of the Willoughby pegmatites, the sodic type is associated only with granite. Their sodic nature —in some cases they consist almost wholly of albite—is, how- ever, no reason for genetically connecting them with basic rocks. Here again field evidence warrants no such assertion. Their mode of occurrence is essentially as small dykes cutting the granite. Their possible modes of differentiation can be considered under three heads : — * (a) They represent an immiscible liquid phase separating from the residual magma. (20) W. Howchin: Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1903, vol. PEXVIIeY Posie, Mp. O2. 334 (6) They are of secondary origin, and represent the albitization of original microcline dyke-rocks, this albitization being accomplished by magmatic soda- rich solutions. (c) They represent the ‘‘end product’’ and final differ- entiate of the residual magma, and are therefore directly related to the potassic-aplites. (a) Animmiscible phase of the liquid residual magma.— Daly,@) Grout,(2) and others have resorted to liquid immis- cibility to explain certain types of differentiation. It must be admitted that the evidence for the separation ~ of liquid phases in igneous magmas has not yet been clearly demonstrated, nor has the extensive experimental work on silicate-melts given any indication of such a process. For the Willoughby albitites it is thought that this mechanism is untenable, for homogenous rock masses abound in which all minerals herein concerned, viz., quartz, micro- cline, and albite, are associated in a wide range of mixtures. It is to be noted here, however, that the objection raised by Bowen (25) that the formation of a monomineralic rock is generally impossible by liquid immiscibility, owing to the fact that this would necessitate its crystallization at its true melt- ing point—7.e., far above the temperature of the magma, say for albite, 1100° C.—ignores the possibility, theoretically, of albite and a volatile mineralizer (e.g., water) separating as a liquid phase, in which case the reductio ad absurdum argument fails. (6) Albitization of original potassic rocks.—This view immediately admits the albitites to be of secondary origin and the process of albitization to have been produced by magmatic soda-rich solutions. As far as the writer is aware, there is no evidence of albitization of the surrounding granite with which the albi- tites are in contact. Nor does the texture of these rocks suggest such a replacement. Both occurrence and texture are strongly against their derivation from original potassic-aplites. (c) The albitites represent the final differentiate or end product of the residual magma.—The writer is of the opinion that the albitites represent the final differentiate of the residual magma. The intimate relationship of the potassic-aplites and the albite-pegmatites is indicated by the presence, in each, of the (21)R. A. Daly: Igneous Rocks and their Origin, p. 226. (22)F. F. Grout: Econ. Geol., 1918, p. 185. (23)N. L. Bowen: Journ. Geol., Dec., 1915 (Supplement), p. 80. 3395 blue opalescent quartz so characteristic a feature of the normal granite. They are further related by the. presence of albite, which, while the subordinate felspar in the potassic- aplite, is the dominant felspar in the albitites. The albite-pegmatites are to be distinguished from the potassic-aplites : — (i.) By their relatively minor development—being limited to a few dyke or pipe-like masses. (i.) By their coarse-grained texture—the potassic aplites being predominantly fine grained. (iu). By the presence of accessory minerals as apatite, zircon, and rutile in relative abundance. Such accessory minerals are practically absent from the microcline aplites. (iv.) By the absence of biotite. (v). By the absence of microcline. Varieties of Albitites.—The predominant type is a coarse- grained quartz-albitite, which may pass into veins of pure albite. The quartz occurs in blue opalescent grains and the albite in Carlsbad twins—also twinned on the albite law. The remaining type is a muscovite-albitite, in which mus- covite is associated with albite. The accessory minerals are developed in all types. The Mechansm of Differentiation —tThe residual magma, dominantly potassic in composition, was derived by the funda- mental process of differentiation—fractional crystallization. This liquid, by a process of straining off from the crystalline granite, is regarded as occupying subsidiary pools or cham- bers @) within the granitic mass. Consequent on such fractional crystallization the residual liquid was enriched in mineralizers, chiefly water. In the main granite the crystallization of Bi ipioelass was early initiated, and occurred with marked zoning, the varying composition being from andesine to oligoclase. The residual magma was thus enriched in albite molecules relatively to (24) In granitic masses the evidences of the existence of such magma pools, as stipulated, are principally provided by the occurrence of aplitic or pegmatitic phases with distinetly blended contacts with regard to the granite mass. Crystallization, in situ, is therefore demanded. Where contacts between the aplitic or pegmatitic phase and the granite are sharp and well defined crystallization occurred after intrusion from such a magma pool. Many granitic masses show the evidences of two such types of satellitic phases. 336 anorthite, these latter being selectively locked up in the inner zones of plagioclase. The non-volatile constituents of the residual magma thus consisted essentially of quartz and microcline and subordin- ately slightly calcic albite. With the renewal of crystallization in the residual magma quartz and microcline were early precipitated, the magma being thus constantly depleted in these constituents. That some albite crystallized during this period is also evidenced by the presence of subordinate albite, associated with the micro- cline and quartz. This albite was still slightly calcic and with crystallization its composition approached pure albite. The amount crystallizing, however, was quite subordinate, and the impoverishment of the still liquid residue in microcline molecules especially occurred. : Nearing the completion of crystallization of such a magma pool, the residual liquid would have markedly changed in composition through such selective crystallization. This residual liquid depleted in potassic constituents would there- fore have become highly sodve. By the opening of fissures in the surrounding rock this residual liquid, derived by fractional crystallization from the dominant potassic magma, was strained off from the crystalline mass and solidified in the occupied fissures. Derived by such a process of fractional crystallization this residual liquid would be:—(i.) Predominantly sodic; (i1.) characterized by an increased concentration of mineralizers. This process of differentiation receives considerable sup- port from a study of the albitites. Their coarse-grained texture and the concentration in them of such minerals: as zircon, apatite, and rutile are characteristically to be associated with a concentration of mineralizers during crystallization, or, in other words, they are typical end products of differentiation. It has been noted that some muscovite and quartz in the muscovite-albitites appears to be secondary. This is prin- cipally evidenced by the shattering of albite plates by small quartz stringers. This pneumatolytic process is intimately related to the concentration of mineralizers during the crystallization of the rock. The shattering of albite plates by quartz strings and the production of muscovite can be relegated to a late stage of crystallization, 7.e., at or near the completion of crystallization. The muscovite, indeed, may represent the hydrolysis of potential microcline-felspar. PEE ai iy teat coi is aot The scheme of differentiation can be summarized in the appended chart :— Residual Magma=—Albite Pegmatites. (dominantly sodic). : ee Microcline Albite Aplites Chonolitic (differentiation may cease _, Mass. here). Differentiation mn + situ. Residual Magma (dominantly potassic). Granite [Adamellite]. Salic differentiate . from a bares hattholitic Granitic Magma. Magma. | + The very minor amount of albitite in comparison to the development of potassic-aplite is here again emphasized. If this relation be preserved at depth, it follows that the com- position of the residual magma lies very close to that of the potassic-aplites. In this connection the writer would point out that the differentiation of the residual magma may be controlled by a mechanical factor. Where the residual magma has been forced into fissures and caused to rapidly cool, further differentiation may be inhibited and the magma solidify.as a crystalline aggregate of quartz, microcline, and subordinate albite. On the other hand, the filtering of the residual magma into a subsidiary pool without rapid change of temperature and its slow crystallization undisturbed, then fractional erystallization may take place with the production of a small amount of residual liquid, enriched in mineralizers and of composition markedly different from that of the original residual magma. Movement at this stage would result in the straining off of the small amount of residual liquid, giving rise to intru- sions of highly sodic-pegmatite. In composition, the potassic-aplites so derived would differ but slightly from that representing the composition of the residual magma. 338 We have here in miniature the outlines of a process which, on a grander scale, Smyth (5) has suggested for the differentiation of alkaline from subalkaline magmas. Review of dadifferentiation.—The predominant potassic- aplites with the minor sodic-pegmatites, plus the volatile mineralizers, represent, approximately, the residual magma derived from the fractional crystallization of the granitic magma. This residual magma under favourable conditions under- went further differentiation, yielding predominant potassic- aplites as the fractionally crystallized portion and the minor sodic-pegmatites as the residual hquid highly enriched in mineralizers, now represented by the presence of the accessory minerals. In the main, the mechanism of differentiation appears to have been one of straining off of a residual liquid from a crystalline mass. It may well be that the extent of differentiation in such cases 1s dependent on the magma chamber remaining undis- turbed by external agencies for sufficiently long periods to allow of delicate adjustment of equilibrium in the presence of volatile mineralizers. With the crystallization of the albite-pegmatites differ- entiation appears to have closed. At a late stage in the consolidation of the microcline-aplite, the pneumatolytic action of muneralizers is represented by the quartz-tourmaline pneumatoliths, and at a still later stage greisenization and kaolinization were developed. : Correlation with other Australian Albitites.—These albite-pegmatites, or albitites, are to be correlated with the previously-described albitites from Pilbarra region, Western Australia, and the albitites from Eyre Peninsula. Im all three cases their association appears to be with granitic rocks. In the case of the Pilbarra rock, the pegmatite is tin bearing. The Eyre Peninsula albitites are remarkable for the association in one case of wernerite in long prismatic crystals. VII. GENERAL DISCUSSION. Form of the Intrusion.—It has been noted in the Intro- duction that the granite is distinctly transgressive to the surrounding schists and quartzites. The seaward extension of the granite is not known. Some evidence of the underground extension of the granite, in an horizontal direction, 1s afforded (25)C. H. Smyth, jr.: Amer. Jour. -Sci., 1918, 36, p. 42: 339 by the occurrence of a pegmatite dyke 8 miles from the granite headland. This is genetically related to the Cape Willoughby massif, and carries gem tourmalines. With the crystallization of the granite and associated dyke rocks, the igneous cycle appears to have closed. The foregoing data admittedly are insufficient to deter- mine the form of the intrusion, yet the writer ventures to place it in the class of chonolite, as described by Daly and defined by him as an igneous body:—/a) Injected into dislocated rock of any kind stratified or not; and (4) of shape and relations irregular in the sense that they are not those of a true dyke, vein sheet, laccolite, bysmalite, or neck; and (c) composed of magma, either passively squeezed into a subterranean or orogenic chamber, or actively forcing apart the country rocks. The chonolite type, therefore, covers a wide range of intrusions whose form cannot be considered well characterized. It is thought that, for the Willoughby massif, the evidences of underground extension, horizontally, and the apparent rapid closing of the igneous cycle are not favourable to a batholitic nature. The relation of the Cape Willoughby Massif to other South Australian Intrusions.—Kangaroo Island is separated from the mainland of Jervis Peninsula by the narrow strait of Backstairs Passage. The island really forms a continua- tion of the Mount Lofty Range, cut across by the Backstairs Passage, which is probably a block-faulted area. The exten- sion of the island in a westerly direction is related to the strike of the axis of Palaeozoic folding, and is perhaps emphasized by the fact that the late Tertiary fault scarps are developed parallel to the strike of the Palaeozoic folding. The structure of the Mount Lofty Ranges has been shown to consist of a central geological axis of Pre-Cambrian schists and intrusive rocks with a north-east-south-west strike, (26) and developed, anticlinorially, a series of sediments dipping easterly and westerly from this axis. These sediments on the western side are only slightly altered, whilst their eastern representatives are markedly metamorphosed, being repre- sented by quartzites, schists, and marbles. (26) W. Howchin: Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol. xxviii., 1904, pp. 253-280. W. Howchin: Ibid, vol. xxx., 1906, pp. 227- 262. W. Howchin: Aus. Ass. Adv. Sci., 1907, Sect. ©, pp. 414-442. 340 The easternmost beds have been invaded by igneous intrusions which are comparatively absent from the western side of the axis. (27) These sedimentary beds contain an interstratified glacial tillite. They have been designated as Lower Cambrian by Professor Howchin, but the possibility of their being Proterozoic must not be denied. Age of the Intrusion.—The granitic mass of Cape Wil- loughby is intrusive into the eastern representatives of this series. Howchin has shown that the late Palaeozoic (Permo- Carboniferous) glacial deposits overlie the old metamorphic rocks of eastern Kangaroo Island, and are represented near Cape Willoughby itself. The presence of these glacial beds indicates that already the granite was exposed in Permo- Carboniferous times. If the intruded beds are to be relegated to the Proterozoic, as has been suggested for their western representatives, then the age of the granite can only be rigidly defined as Post Proterozoic and Pre Permo-Carboniferous. On further analysis, however, it would appear that these limits can be somewhat narrowed. It is clear that in Permo- Carboniferous times the granite was exposed at the surface. The vast amount of erosion that would be required for its exposure indicates that it was intruded considerably prior to Permo-Carboniferous times. On the other hand, it is clear that the first great orogenic movements in this area subsequent to deposition of the intruded beds developed only after Cambrian time, for the Proterozoic age of these beds is dependent on a disconformity between their western repre- sentatives and the Cambrian Archaeocyathinae limestones. The absence of Ordovician beds at the edges of the Cam- brian geosyncline points to the folding of this geosyncline at the close of the Cambrian or in Ordovician time. The development of the Mount Lofty Ranges as a huge anticlinorium with a pronounced westerly overthrust and the ~ occurrence of an eastern zone of igneous intrusion is sug- gestive that these igneous intrusions are related to the folding. Since Ordovician times no orogenic movements have dis- turbed this area to the present day. The evidence of inclusions of country rock in the granite indicates that partial (27) This view of the structure of the Mount Lofty Ranges has been denied by some observers, particularly W. G. Woolnough. Remarkably clear evidence of the anticlinorial character of the ranges can be obtained in the Inman Valley, where an easterly succession beginning with the great angular unconformity of the Grey Spur can be traced through to Victor Harbour. More com- plicated but none the less clear is the succession in the Williams- town-Mount Crawford area, Barossa. The possible Proterozoic age of the westernmost beds affects this question not at all. , § 341 metamorphism had already been effected prior to intrusion. This is in harmony with the view that regional metamorphism had been induced in the period of maximum intensity of fold- ing, and that the igneous intrusions, while directly related to the orogenic movements, were developed at the close of the folding period, when movement was of a broad and relatively simple type. The mass of Cape Willoughby is to be correlated—based on the observations of Mr. W. R. Browne, B.Sc., detailed in a forthcoming paper—with the granite masses of Victor Harbour and Port Elliot, both on field and _ petrological evidence. CONCLUSION. In conclusion the writer would suggest that :— (i.) The masses of Cape Willoughby, Victor Harbour, and Port Elliot represent chonolitic masses of limited surface extent, which are connected at depth to a single batholitic chamber. (11.) These chonolites are arranged along a zone parallel to the strike direction of the older Palaeozoic folding. : (ju.) These chonolitic intrusions, whilst related to the orogenic movements, were developed only at the close of the folding epoch, when movements were of a comparatively broad and simple type. The writer is indebted to Mr. W. R. Browne, B.Sc., for much help and advice during the preparation of this paper. DESCRIPTION OF PLATES. PuatE XXX. View of granite outcrop forming part of the Cape Willoughby headland. Pirate XXXII. Fig. 1. Sagenite web of rutile in quartz albitite. Maen., 50 diams. Fig. 2. A typical section of chequer structure in albite of the albitites. Magn., 53 diams.+nicols. 342 AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA —PART 1. By Apert H. Exston, F.E.S. [Read September 11, 1919.] PAUSSIDAE. ARTHROPTERUS ARTICULARIS, n. sp. (fig. 1). Dark castaneous, elytra slightly paler. With very short and sparse setae, except on sides and legs where they are more numerous and longer. Head wide, shight interocular depression, with numerous clearly-defined but somewhat irregular punctures; sides tuberculate behind the eyes. Antennae with more numerous punctures being somwhat subrugose at sides, first joint stout, shghtly longer than second and third combined, second about three times wide as long, fourth to ninth each about twice as wide as long and almost semicircular, the tenth about as long as eighth and ninth combined, almost circular, its apex slightly more rounded than base. Prothorar slightly narrower than head, apex somewhat wider than base; disk flattened, median line clearly defined, margins slightly reflexed, more so at basal angles than elsewhere, with numerous well-defined but some- what irregular and small punctures. Scutellum subtriangular. Elytra about thrice as long as prothorax, with irregular sub- seriate punctures, smaller than those on prothorax and almost disappearing posteriorly; apical membrane about as long as scutellum. Front tvbiae each with a large apical spur over- hanging an apical notch, the middle and hind ones are similarly furnished but much less conspicuously, and all strongly curve inwards on underside near base. Length, 5-54 mm.; width, 3-35 mm. Type, in author’s collection; cotype, I. 10842, in South Australian Museum. Hab.—South Australia: Quorn (A. H. Elston), Lake Callabonna (A. Zeitz). | This species is easily distinguished by the apical joint of the antennae, which is almost circular, and the fourth to ninth which are somewhat semicircular in shape. On some specimens the interocular depression is more pronounced than on others, and those taken at Lake Callabonna are much darker in colour (although this is probably due to age), the prothorax and head> being a dark brown, and in being more hairy, especially on antennae. The elytral pubescence is semi-erect and very short, but is quite distinct when viewed from the sides. On each of the front tibiae the apical spur is much larger than the free spur, but on the others the free spur is the more conspicuous 343 of the two, and the second and third joints of the tarsi are strongly dilated. CLERIDAE. LEMIDIA BASIFLAVA, 0. sp. Glossy black; front of head, antennae, base of elytra, and parts of front and middle legs flavous, hind legs black, the knees all more or less pale. Sparsely clothed with moderately 1, Arthropterus articularis, n. sp. 2, Lemidia variabilis, n. sp. 3, MDiethusa insignita, n. sp. 4, Front leg, D. insignita, n. sp, 9. 5, Front leg, D. mollis, Lea, 9. 6, Hind leg, Edusa pulchra, n. sp., g. 7%, Hind leg, E. pulchra, n. sp., OF long straggling hairs, becoming shorter, more or less erect and seriate on elytra. ; Head wide, almost impunctate with a few subrugose punctures at sides near ocular suture, inter-ocular impressions distinct. Prothorax about as long as wide, sides rather suddenly inflated at the middle, distinctly narrower than 344 head, constricted slightly more towards apex than near base, with a transverse impression near apex and a moderately large depression near middle of base, with a few scattered punctures. Hlytra about as wide as head, sides near base parallel, but becoming gradually dilated behind the middle then rounded at apex, with rows of rather large clearly- defined punctures becoming smaller posteriorly and disappear- ing at apex. Length, 4 mm. Hab.—South Australia: Mount Lofty Ranges (R. J. Burton, 8. H. Curnow, J. G. O. Tepper, Al i Mlemeae Kangaroo Island (A. M. Lea). Type, I. 10833, in South Australian Museum. | At first this was thought to be a variety of exzlis, but it differs from that species in having the prothorax black, the sub-basal depression less transverse, and the elytral punctures in rows and more clearly defined. In some of the specimens the apical joints of the antennae are more or less infuscate; the flavous markings at base extend from near the suture (on two specimens they touch it) to the margin, the pale basal portion is confined to the depth of elytra, and when viewed from behind is barely perceptible. In Lea’s table this species would be associated with elongata from which it differs in being smaller, glossy black, the flavous portion of head more conspicuous, and the post-median fascia absent. L.. BASIFLAVA, var. FASCIATA, nl. var. Differs from above form in having the legs flavous, except that the hind tarsi and apex of tibiae are infuscate, and a somewhat: irregular flavous fascia situated at the middle of the elytra, beginning near the suture and extending a little more than half way across. On one specimen the legs are much the same as on the type form and its fascia is repre- sented by two semi-detached spots, and on two the apical joints of the antennae are infuscate, one specimen has a tinge of red near the apex of the prothorax. Length, 4 mm. Hab.—South Australia: Kangaroo Island (A. M. Lea), Mount Lofty Ranges (A. H. Elston). L. AURICOMA, 0. sp. Piceous-brown, head and prothorax black with a slight metallic gloss ; mandibles, antennae, palpi, and legs flavous,- the hind tarsi more or less infuscate ; elytra with a pale median fascia and pale markings basal and apical. Upper- surface with long, straggling, pale hairs becoming shorter and semi-erect on elytra. a) A. S. E. Belg., 1907, p. 334. 345 Head wide with rather sparse punctures, interocular impressions feeble. Prothorax about as long as wide, narrower than head with sparse punctures more or less concealed, but in places subconfluent, sides dilated near the middle, with transverse impressions subapical and subbasal. /lytra wider than prothorax, sides parallel but becoming slightly dilated towards the apex, with numerous well-defined punctures becoming smaller posteriorly and disappearing at apex. Length, 3 mm. Hab.—Queensland: Cairns district (F. P. Dodd). Type, I. 10832, in South Australian Museum. The pale markings at base differ, on some of the specimens there is a subtriangular patch along the suture of each elytron connected with the shoulders, but on others the basal mark- ings are absent or very ill defined. The median fascia is narrow near the sides and is rather suddenly dilated near the suture, but it does not quite touch the sides or suture. The apical markings appear to be always present but are not co sharply defined as the median fascia, they are sometimes obscure and continued along the suture and sides, but not touching the median fascia. In Lea’s table the typical form would be referred to /// and there associated with flavifrons, from which it differs in being smaller and having the front of head and prothorax black, the legs flavous, and elytral punctures not so clearly defined. The specimens with the basal markings absent would be referred to another section altogether, ////. Elytra with pale markings median and apical, or subapical. ibe AURICOMA, var. FLAVIVENTRIS, Nn. var. Differs from the previous species in having front of head and abdomen flavous. Ii. VARIABILIS, n: sp. (fig. 2). Black with a bluish or purple gloss, the elytra conspicu- ously purple and furnished with two median and two subapical flavous spots; antennae flavous, the basal and several of the apical joints infuscated. Upper-surface sparsely clothed with straggling, semi-erect hairs, becoming shorter and more erect towards apex of elytra. Head rather wide and covered with small clearly-defined punctures becoming subrugose in front, interocular depression distinct. Prothorax transverse, sides strongly dilated in middle, rather narrower than head with a few small punctures and a subapical and subbasal transverse impression. Flytra wider than prothorax, about twice as long as base, sides 346 parallel near base and becoming dilated posteriorly, with moderately large and rather dense punctures becoming smaller posteriorly. Length, 4-5 mm. Hab.—Queensland: Cairns district (F. P. Dodd). Type, I. 10831, in South Australian Museum. This appears to be a rather variable species; there are four specimens in front of me and they all differ as regards the shape and size of the spots. In two the median spots are situated about midway between the suture and the margin, whilst in the others they are entirely absent. The subapical spots are fairly regular, and are placed quite close to the suture but do not touch it. On the head the interocular depression varies, the two shallow foveae being more conspicu- ous on some specimens than on others. In Lea’s table of Lemidia this species would be inserted after flavifrons as Ill. Elytra with pale markings submedian and apical or subapical. L. FLAVICOLLIS, 0. sp. Shining black; prothorax, antennae, palpi, and legs flavous, hind tarsi infuscate. Clothed with rather long, straggling, and mostly black hairs, becoming shorter and more or less erect on elytra. Head wide, base and sides with a few small punctures, interocular foveae feeble. Prothorax slightly transverse, sides inflated at the middle, distinctly narrower than head, surface almost impunctate with a transverse subapical and subbasal impression. Hlytra at base about as wide as head, sides near base parallel becoming dilated towards apex, with irregular rows of shallow punctures becoming smaller and disappearing posteriorly. Length, 3-4 mm. ' Hab.—Queensland: Cairns district (F. P. Dodd). Type, I. 10830, in South Australian Museum. In Lea’s table this species would be associated with L. pictipes, Blackb., from which it differs in being somewhat shorter, antennae entirely pale, elytra with sparser and darker clothing, and with smaller and fewer punctures not extending so far towards apex, the size of the elytral punc- tures appear to vary on the six specimens before me. The hind tarsi appear to be always infuscated, the others some- times have the apical joint infuscate, and on one specimen the middle tarsi are infuscate. CURCULIONIDAE. DIETHUSA INSIGNITA, n. sp. (fig. 3). ¢. Dark brown with apical part’ of rostrum, antennae, and parts of legs paler. Densely clothed with soft scales on 347 the upper-surface, mostly sooty-brown interspersed with white, the under-surface with uniformly white ones. Rostrum fully half as wide as head and about the length of the prothorax, tapering slightly towards apex, with dense punctures more or less concealed behind the antennae but distinct in front, a conspicuous flange on each side about the middle, each flange rendered more conspicuous by a fascicle of long pale clothing; scape thin, slightly thickened towards apex, about as long as funicle, inserted about one-third from apex of rostrum, first joint of funicle nearly as long as second and third combined. Prothorax moderately transverse with dense more or less concealed punctures. Hlytra subcordate, distinctly wider than prothorax, base trisinuate, with regular series of large partially concealed punctures, interstices wide and even. Metasternum with a large deep excavation from its base, and continuing to near the apex of the first segment of the abdomen; between the middle and hind coxae, on each side an obtuse elevation crowned with a conspicuous fascicle. Abdomen with apex of last segment furnished with a small fascicle of pale clothing. /Femora robust, dentate, the tooth on éach of the middle pair considerably dilated ; middle tibiae distorted. Length (¢, 9), 4-5 mm. Q. Differs in being lighter in colour; rostrum longer, thinner, paler, with punctures concealed only near base, and antennae inserted somewhat nearer middle; metasternum and abdomen without the excavation and fascicles, abdomen more convex, metasternum with a slight depression; the middle femora are less robust with the tooth smaller; middle tibiae are less distorted and at the top of the apex a spur is present that slightly diverges from the length of the apex. Hab.—South Australia: Quorn (A. H. Elston). Type, in author’s collection, cotype, I. 10835, in South Australian Museum. i This species is the most distinct in the genus and is easily distingushed by the fasciculate processes on the rostrum and metasternum of the male. The only other species in the allied genera that has fascicles on the metasternum is Welanterius pectoralis, Lea, whose male has only a slight depression, whereas in the present species the depression is deep and the fascicles are bent over at their apices, which are nearly touch- ing, and so forming an arch. The strongly dilated femora and distorted tibiae of the middle legs are also characteristic. The female in general appearance closely resembles the female of D. mollis, Lea, but with the front and middle tibiae different at apices; in the former species the spur is inserted about the middle of the apex and not diverging from it to any great extent, (fig. 5), its clothing on the upper-surface is 348 rather less variegated, and on the under-surface the scales are much the same as on the upper-surface; but on the present species the scales on the under-surface are decidedly smaller than those on the upper, and the spur on the front and middle tibiae is inserted at the top of the apex and continuing to its length, diverging from it at an angle of nearly thirty-five degrees (fig. 4). CHRYSOMELIDAE. EDUSA PULCHRA, 0. sp. d. Metallic-green or greenish-blue with a coppery gloss in parts; labrum, palpi, antennae, and legs castaneous; the apex of palpi, apical joints of antennae, and last two joints of tarsi infuscate; the labrum and sides near eyes furnished with pale depressed setae, and the front angles of prothorax pubescent. Under-surface metallic-green with coppery gloss and lightly clothed with pale pubescence, sparse in middle and somewhat dense at sides. Head with numerous clearly-defined punctures, except at base of antennae, and a slight depression at the occiput. Antennae rather long with second joint about half as long as third. Prothorax with front angles acute, sides subsinuate, punctures as on head but becoming denser at margins. Scutellum transverse and almost impunctate. F/ytra almost parallel-sided to beyond the middle, with dense punctures set in somewhat irregular rows, some of them confluent at the sides. Abdomen with a few scattered punctures, and the apical segment has a shallow transverse depression. The hind tibiae are suddenly dilated near apex (fig. 6). Length Ge ’ 2 ys 5-6 mm. Q. Differs in being more robust, the hind tibiae not suddenly dilated near apex (fig. 7), first joint of front tarsi smaller, the abdomen more convex and without the subapical depression, and more pubescent. Hab.—South Australia: Quorn (A. H. Elston). Type, in author’s collection, cotype, I. 10834, in South Australian Museum. This apparently belongs to the glabrous group of Ldusa and in Lea’s table °2) would be referred to C g, but that the sides of its prothorax are almost straight in the middle, hence it could not be referred to either angustula or heterodoza; in general appearance it is like a rather robust heterodoza, but the abdomen is metallic and its fifth segment is different in the male. (2) Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1915, p. 194. 349 ADDITIONS TO THE FLORA OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA. No. 16. By J. M. Brack. [Read October 9, 1919. |] PuaTE XXXII. GRAMINEAE. Dactyloctenuum aegyptiacum, Willd. (EHleusine aegypt- zaca, Pers.) Mount Deputy, near Mount Eba HS. pct. W; G. Taylor). *Lamarckia aurea, Moench. Nuccaleena Mine, near Moolooloo (EK. H. Ising). The most northerly record for this grass. CYPERACEAE. Scirpus littoralis, Schrad. Billakalina Well, 20 miles west of Coward Springs (Dist. C; Dr. G. Taylor, May, ILS). Cyperus distachyus, All. (Plate xxxii.) Coward Springs (Or G.( Taylor, May, 1919); Nilpena’ (R. Helms, May 2, 1891, in the Tate Herb.). The latter is evidently the same plant as that collected at Coward Springs, but some of the spikelets are twin, whereas they are always solitary in Dr. Taylor's specimen. Helms’ plant was listed by Mueller and Tate (these Trans., xvi., part 2, 379, ann. 1896) as “C.. laevigatus, L., a slender form with some of the spikelets solitary.’’ CO. distachyus, All. (C. junciformis, Cav.), is some- times treated as a variety of C. laevigatus, but it appears to be well distinguished by having fewer spikelets (2-5) in the cluster, the glumes dark-red instead of white and the nut only one-third (instead of one-half) shorter than the glume. Our plant agrees with the description in all particulars except that, so far as our present material goes, the spikelets are either solitary or only 2 in the cluster. The Tate Herbarium contains a specimen labelled C. laevigatus, from Middleton Creek (Miss Hussey, Feb. ,, 1898), with white spike- lets in clusters of 8-16. The same species is recorded in Max Koch’s list of plants from Mount Lyndhurst run (these Trans., xxli., 116, ann. 1898). When Professor Tate’s flora was published, neither species had been recorded for South Australia. C. distachyus is a Mediterranean plant, but it is doubtless native here. 350 CASUARINACEAE. Casuarina stricta, Ait., and C. distyla, Vent. (Plate xxxll). The difference between the male flowers of these 2 species is very marked. In the former the 2 bracteoles are deciduous, coherent at the summit by their cilia, and anterior rather than lateral; in CU. distyla they are persistent, distinct, and lateral. The 2 perianth-segments of C. stricta are connate and have the appearance of a single, flattish bracteole, notched at the summit and pubescent on the 2 midnerves; they are enclosed within the summit of the 2 bracteoles and are posterior in position, 7.¢., they are placed against the inner face of the stamen and next to the axis of the whorl. In C. distyla the perianth-segments are opposite and quite free; one is anterior and the other posterior. In C. stricta the bracteoles and perianth-segments cohere to each other on the summit of the ripening anther and usually fall off in one piece. The bracteoles are evidently the “valvulae calycis exteriores” of Labillardiere (Nov. Holl. pl. spec. u1., 67, t. 218), and the perianth-segments are his ‘‘valvulae binae interiores,’’ from which he named the species C. quadrivalvis (=C. stricta). It is probable than an examination of the male flowers of Casuarina, which has only been attempted in one or two instances, would help materially in the satisfactory determina- tion of species. It is essentially a task for those who can examine living specimens, because the delicacy oi the organs renders the investigation of dried material very difficult, a fact which is noted by Bentham in his great work. PROTEACEAE. Hakea ulicina, R. Br., var. flexilis, F.v. M. Yurgo, near Karoonda (Dist. M; ie W. Andrew). SANTALACEAE. Choretrum glomeratum, R. Br. Yurgo, near Karoonda (Dist. M; H. W. Andrew). POLYGONACEAE. Muehlenbeckia Cunninghami, F. v. M. Muller Creek (Dist. W; G. Taylor). CHENOPODIACEAE. Atriplex rhagodioides, F. v. M. Walebing, near Kin- goonya (Dist. W; G. Taylor). =hooe Bassia longicuspis, F. v. M. Nuccaleena Mine, near Moolooloo (EK. H. Ising). This long-spined species is the “Bindy-eye” of the Far Northern settlers. PoRTULACACEAE. Anacampseros australiana, J. M. Black. Mboolooloo, “orowing in a rocky gully” (EK. H. Ising). CARYOPHYLLACEAE. Polycarpon tetraphyllum, L. Moolooloo (Dist. 8; E. H. Ising). PAPAVERACEAE. Papaver aculeatum, Thumb. Robe (Dist. T or G; C. D. Black) ; Moolooloo (Dist. S; E. H. Ising). Apparently a very rare plant. The Robe specimen is 20 cm. high, that from Moolooloo only 4 cm. CRASSULACEAE. Crassula colorata, (Nees) Ostenf. (Tillaca acuminata, F. M. Reader). Moolooloo (EK. H. Ising). LEGUMINOSAE. Glycyrrhiza acanthocarpa, (Lindl.), combin. nov. Ren- mark, River Murray. Flowers December-April; fruits April- May. A shrub 60-80 cm. high, much branched, with thick rootstock; the solitary seed is compressed-obovoid, shining, . dull green mottled with brown. The anther-cells are confluent at the summit, and the anterior valve is smaller than the posterior one in all the anthers, of which 5 are smaller and on shorter filaments.—IJndigofera acanthocarpa, Lindl., in Mitch. - Three Exped., 11., 17 (1839); Olidanthera psoraleoides, R. - Br., App. Sturt Exped. Centr. Aust., 11., 73 (1849) ; Psoralea acanthocarpa, F. v. M., Fragm., ui., 45 (1862); Glycyrrhiza psoraleoides, Benth., Fl. Aust., i1., 225 (1864). Acacia stenophylla, A. Cunn. Kingoonya (Dist. W; G. Taylor); also Yankee Gunyah, 10 miles west of Coward Springs. A. tarculensis, J. M. Biack. Pera Rockhole (near Lake Labyrinth); Tomato Rocks (red felspar porphyries 15 miles south of Kingoonya; G. Taylor). Aotus villosa, Sm. Karoonda (Dist. M; H. W. Andrew). *Medicago mimma, Grufb., var. brachyodon, Reichb. (M. brachyacantha, A. Kern.). A specimen of this short- spined form which has established itself at Millicent, and which has already been referred to in these Trans., xlii., 174 352 (1918), was submitted to the botanists of the Muséum d'histoire naturelle, Paris, and determined as above. RUTACEAE. Microcybe multiflora, Turez. Yurgo, near Karoonda (H. W. Andrew). EUPHORBIACEAE. Phyllanthus lacunarius, F. v. M. Walebing Swamp, near Kingoonya (Dist. W; G. Taylor). Euphorbia Wheeleri, Baill. Moolooloo (Dist. S; E. H. Ising). DILLENIACEAE. Hibbertia crispula, J. M. Black. Ooldea Soak (May, 1919; G. Taylor). This specimen contains 2 fruiting carpels; pericarp dehiscing down the inner angle; hairlike segments of the arillus extending beyond the seed. FRANKENIACEAE. Frankema serpyllifolia, Lindl. Murrayville, Vict. (H. B. Williamson). The broad-leaved form. This is by far the most southerly locality recorded for this species, and points to the probability of its being found in our trans-Murray country. | F. fruticulosa, DC. Murrayville, Vict. (H. B. William- son). This species has hitherto been collected only along our coastline. MYRTACEAE. Eucalyptus. fasciculosa, F. v. M. Ashbourne (H. W. Andrew). Mr. Andrew says:—“Erect tree about 20 m. high; bark. white on the upper part of the stem, mottled below; called locally Pink Gum or Mountain Gum.” The leaves are ~ dark green on both sides. The height is quite double that which #. fasciculosa usually assumes in the Mount Lofty Range (6-10 m.), where it grows mostly in poor soil and with a more or less crooked stem. The height and straight growth of the tree at Ashbourne bring it near FH. paniculata, Sm. The outer stamens are barren and the anthers open in terminal pores. Also from Coonalpyn (Dist. T; W. J. Spafford). EH. dumosa, A. Cunn. In his Critical Revision of the Genus Eucalyptus, iv., 220 (1919), Mr. J. H. Maiden has restored H. dumosa to specific rank, in accordance with Bentham’s treatment, instead of making it a variety of Z. ancrassata, Labill. Most Australian botanists will probably welcome this decision. The two species, at least in their South 353 Australian forms, are very distinct. 2. aumosa includes var. conglobata, Benth., which is common at Port Lincoln and has clustered, sessile flowers. RUBIACEAE. Galium Gaudichaudiu, DC. Parachilna Gap (Dist §; E. H. Ising). GOODENIACEAE. Goodenia vernicosa, J. M. Black. Parachilna Gap (E. H. Ising). COMPOSITAE. Helichrysum ambiguum, Turez. If all the forms with solitary terminal flowerheads on woolly peduncles, ciliate or fringed involucral bracts, pappus-bristles plumose towards the summit, and female flowers usually devoid of pappus are to be placed in this species, then it becomes one of great varia- bility. In the Tate Herb. is a specimen from Barrow Range, W. Austr. (R. Helms, 19/8/91), with soft, white-woolly appressed leaves only 4-8 mm. long, female flowers 4-toothed, the bisexual ones with 12-14 fragile pappus-bristles, the style swollen and hard at base. This form is probably near the type (which was collected by Drummond in Western Australia), and it bears a remarkable external resemblance to Calocephalus Dittrichu, F. v. M. Specimens from Idracowra, Finke River, N.T. (Horn Expedition), and Depot Sandhills, Finke River (S. A. White), agree with the above in most respects, but the pappus-bristles are 6-9, and much dilated at base. Then there are specimens with stiff greenish leaves, glandular- scabrous above and more or less woolly below, from Tlapilla Gorge, N.T. (Horn Expedition); between Ferdinand River and Mount Watson (Dist. W; R. Helms); Nuccaleena Mine, near Moolooloo (HK. H. Ising); Mount Lyndhurst (H. Koch) ; all these have pappus-bristles 12-18; female flowers 3-toothed, without pappus (in the heads examined). Probably these represent 1. semicalvum, F.v. M. (var. semicalvum, Benth). The Mount Lyndhurst specimen (Tate Herb.) has leaves 10-35 mm. long and simulates H. rutidolems, DC. More complete material may some day furnish characters for dividing these plants into 2 or more species. The achenes are slightly contracted at the summit, but not more so than in some other species of Helichrysum, and it does not seem necessary to transfer the species to Leptorhynchus. Olearia decurrens, (DC.) Benth. Oratunga Creek, near Moolooloo (Dist. S; E. H. Ising). Almost all the leaves toothed in their upper part, those on the barren branchlets linear-cuneate and often 4-5 cm. long, the midrib prominent M 354 below; style-branches with lanceolate papillose tips as long as the stigmatic part; anthers obtuse at base. Siegesbeckia orientalis, Lu. Owienagin Gap, near Moolooloo (E. H. Ising). A remarkable instance of dwarfing, the specimen being only 3 cm. high, with a single terminal flowerhead. *Hrigeron canadensis, L. Port Pirie (H. W. Andrew). Growing in marshy ground. DESCRIPTION OF PLATE XXXII. Cyperus distachyus, All. 1, a spikelet. 2, glume spread open. 3, glume and nut. 4, pistil and stamens. Casuarina stricta, Ait. 5, two whorls of the male spike. 6, whorl of 8 male flowers, the 2 ciliate bracteoles of each flower facing outwards. 7, inner face of the stamen (2.e., that which is turned towards the axis of the whorl), the bracteoles and the 2 connate perianth-segments having been broken away from the base and lifted upwards by the anther, to which they still cling in the form of a hood. 8, side view of the same stamen. 9, outer face of stamen, showing the 2 bracteoles and the back of the anther. 10, the 2 connate perianth-segments. az, axis; anth, anther; br, bracteole; per. s, perianth-segment. Casuarina distyla, Vent. 11, two whorls of the male spike. 12, outer:face of young male flower, still enclosed in the 2 bracteoles. 13, inner face of same, showing the 2 bracteoles and the base of one of the perianth-segments. 14, male flower at a later stage, showing the 2 bracteoles and the 2 perianth-segments partially enclosing the anther. 15, the same in the final stage; the perianth-segments have fallen and only the persistant bracteoles surround the filament. 355 A REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN SALICORNIEAE. By J. M. Brack. [Read October 9, 1919. ] Puates XXXII. ro XXXVI. _ A tribe of Chenopodiaceae, popularly called ‘‘samphire’’ in Australia; low shrubs composed of imbricate articles more or less saucer-shaped at the summit and succulent during the first year. Later on the articles harden and finally lose all sign of the margins at the summit, becoming a continuous woody branch or stem. The flowers are normally arranged in 3’s in hollows on each side of the lower part of the fertile articles, but in Salicornia australis Y or 2 pairs of flowers are added at each side of the triad, so that we have a row of 5 or 7 flowers, instead of 3, or a whorl of 10 or 14 flowers, instead of one of 6. In Tecticornia cinerea, on the other hand, the triad is doubled and there are 6 flowers under each scale, or a whorl of 12 in all. The flowers are more or less protected by _ the margin of the article just below them. The article is usually regarded as consisting of 2 opposite rudimentary leaves, united by a sheath and combined with a succulent base which surrounds the whole internode. In all the genera except Tecticornia the articles are practically of one form and there is so little difference between barren and fertile articles that in Arthrocnemum halocnem- odes and Pachycornia tenuis one sometimes finds new shoots springing from the summit of the flowering spike, or the lower articles of the spike are barren. In Tecticornia the barren articles resemble those of other genera, but the fertile ones are split to the axis into 2 spreading opposite scales, and the stout spike consists of these scales decussately arranged along the axis. The flowers are either bisexual or male only. In most species they are normally bisexual, but in Arthrocnemum arbuscula and in Pachycornia the central flower is bisexual and the 2 lateral are male. There is usually one stamen to each flower, and it is placed in front of the pistil. The only exceptions I have found are Salicornia australis, which has often 2 stamens, one before and one behind the pistil, and Pachycorma robusta, in one central flower of which were 2 stamens. The stamens ripen and protrude while the pistil is still very young, and this fact may easily lead to error in the examination of relaxed specimens, because the stamen is con- spicuous, while the pistil is very difficult: to find, and a flower m2 356 which is really bisexual may be taken for a male. Another difficulty is that the anthers fall early and even the filament sometimes disappears from the open perianth, so that the somewhat similar mistake may be made, at a later stage, of considering a bisexual flower as female only. There is, how- ever, considerable irregularity about the sex of flowers and in some cases there appears to be a tendency for the upper flowers of the spike to be male only. Much further work is required in the examination of living specimens. The lobes or teeth of the perianth have been described by most authors with greater fullness than in some cases they deserve. The examination of living plants shows that in Arthrocnemum halocnemoides and A. arbuscula the young perianth completely encloses the male and female organs without any perforation at the summit. Probably the texture is thinner above the stamens and style, and as these develop they push through the perianth, leaving an irregularly lacerated opening. In Arthrocnemum Lylei, on the other hand, each perianth is divided at the truncate summit into 3 equal deltoid lobes, and in Pachycornia robusta there are 3 or 4 unequal lobes. As regards other species further researches should be made in the living plant. The articles are, in the majority of species, so much alike that they afford an uncertain means of distinguishing between them. The exceptions are T'ecticornia cinerea, Pachycorma robusta, and, to a lesser extent, P. tenwis. The fruiting perianth, pericarp, and seed are a much surer guide, as their characters are strongly differentiated and remain constant within the species or variety. The wrinkling and granulation of the testa in the rough-seeded species seems to be due to a shortening and contraction of the cells towards the back of the seed. The fruiting perianth is various in texture, from thin and membranous to thick and spongy. The pericarp varies still more. It may be a delicate, hyaline membrane, often difficult to find, which breaks away from the base of the perianth and remains attached to the upper part of the latter, or it may become hardened and almost horny, or it may, along with the perianth, become more or less absorbed in the enlarged and hardened rhachis (Pachycorma). In Arthrocnemum and Salicornia both perianth and pericarp usually open’ at the base before they fall from the spike, and the seed escapes in this manner. In Tecticorma the perianth splits into 2 segments or valves and the seed has already escaped from the base of the delicate pericarp. In Pachycorma the spike doubt- less falls to the ground, and sun and moisture in time split open the bony axis and release the seed. 357 Much confusion has been caused in this difficult tribe by the description of specimens which had only reached the flowering stage. To prevent an increase of this confusion in the future it would seem desirable that botanists should refrain from naming new species unless they are in a position to describe the fruiting perianth, the pericarp, and the ripe seed. The first serious work in this tribe was done by Moquin in his Chenopodearum monographica enumeratio, 108-116 (1840), and later on by the same author in DC. Prodromus, Xill., 11., 144-152 (1849). Bentham dealt with the Australian species in Fl. Aust. v., 201-205 (1870), and J. D. Hooker, in Benth. et Hook. Gen. pl. 111., 65 (1883), stablished two new Australian genera:-—Pachycorma and Tecticorma. Dr. Ove Paulsen determined the Chenopodiaceae brought from Western Australia by Dr. Ostenfeld (C. H. Ostenfeld, Contributions to West Australian Botany, part 2, Dansk Botanisk Arkiv, i.., No. 8, 56-66, ann. 1918) with several illustrations. Two monographs by Ungern-Sternberg (Versuch einer Systematik der Tribus Salicornieae, ann. 1866; Salicorniearum Synopsis in Atti del Congresso internaz. botan. in Firenze, 259-343, ann. 1876) are not accessible here. The specimens from the localities named below have all been examined by me. I have to thank the Government Botanists of Victoria (Prof. A. J. Ewart), N. S. Wales (Mr. J. H. Maiden), Queens- land (Mr. C. T. White), and South Australia (Prof. T. G. B. Osborn) for permitting me to examine many valuable specimens from the National Herbaria. Fertile articles slightly lobed at summit or almost entire. Seeds with copious albumen. Fruit free and usually falling off with the perianth ... .. 1. ARTHROCNEMUM Fruit embedded in the enlarged, , bony ... 2. PACHYCORNIA axis : Seeds without allscmaem : ... 3 SALICORNIA Fertile articles divided to she pene nae 2, spreading segments or scales... ... ... 4. TECTICORNIA 1. ARTHROCNEMUM, Mog. Section 1. Trachysperma. Pericarp mem- branous ; seed compressed ; seed-coats 2, distinct, “the cuter crustaceous and bear- ing eranules arranged in more or less conceutric rows, the inner coat mem- branous. Perianth spongy, without distinct lobes; pericarp hyaline, inconspicuous ... 1. A. halocnemoides Perianth herbaceous, with 3 broad lobes; pericarp har dened at summit and con- SPICMOUGM Rh Gel iies., | o-209 eha RR ee ORE Ae Le 358 Section 2. Lewosperma. Pericarp horny; seed compressed, the 2 coats very thin and coherent, so as to present the appearance of 1 membranous, smooth seedcoat. Spikes and branchlets stout; flowers all bisexual . 3. A. lecostachyum Spikes and branchlets slender, the spikes very short; central flower bisexual, the 2 lateral male... ... ... ... .. 4. A. arbuscula 1. A. halocnemoides, Nees in Pl. Preiss., 1., 632, ann. 1844-5. (Pl. xxxiil.) Shrub 20-120 cm. high, branches erect or intricate, barren articles 3-5 mm. long, slender (2 mm. thick), or stouter (4-5 mm. thick), constricted at each end, both forms of article often occurring on the same plant, lobes inconspicuous; spikes terminal and lateral 10-50 mm. long, usually turning red; fertile articles 6-40, short (2 mm. long, 3-4 mm. thick) ; flowers in 3’s, all bisexual, fruiting perianth white, spongy, dilated at summit ; pericarp hyaline, at aoe almost disappearing ; seed compressed ovate-oblong, 1-14 mm. long, placed obliquely in the pericarp; testa crue in the typical form light brown, granular on ‘the back, smooth in front; endopleura membranous; albumen lateral; embryo slightly curved, the cotyledons one-third as long as the radicle. —Salicorma arbuscula, Benth. Fl. Aust., v., 203 (1870), ex parte; S. tenwis, Benth., J.c., 204, ex parte (7.e., quod ad ea specimina pertinet, quae auctor feminea censuit). S. Australia. Salt lands along Port Adelaide River at Ethelton and Birkenhead (J. M. B., Feb.-April, 1919); Port Pirie (H. W. Andrew, July, 1919); Nilpena (R. Helms, May, 1891, “salt soil round spring,” in Tate Herb, as S. tenuis); N.W. interior of 8. Australia (J. McD. Stuart, in Botanical Museum of Melbourne as S. tenwis); Murat Bay (J. M. B., November, 1915); Port Wakefield (J. M. B., November, LESH) HO Geelong (H. B. Williamson). N. Territory. Finke River (in Phytological Museum of Melbourne as Salicornia leiostachya). W. Australia. Fremantle (Preiss., Jan., 1839, No. 1910, “in turfosis aqua marina subinde inundatis prope oppidulum Fremantle’’); Burswood Island, near Perth (F. W. Wakefield, Jan., 1914, per D. A. Herbert); “West Australia” (Drummond, no precise locality or date, in Botanical Museum of Melbourne as Salicornia arbuscula). This species was united by Benthan with Salicorna arbuscula, R. Br., although he gives the number of fertile articles correctly in the latter as 2 to 6, whereas Nees gives them as 8 to 12 for his species. In reality they are much more 359 numerous; the specimen from Burswood Island, W.A. has as many as 20, and in our South Australian coastal specimens the number of articles in the spike runs up to 30 and 40. The fruit, seed, and the number of bisexual flowers in each triad are quite different in the two species. In Nees’ type specimen (Preiss, No. 1910) the seeds, although not quite ripe, show distinctly the characteristic markings of the testa. For an explanation of what I believe is the confusion of two species in Bentham’s Salicornia bers see below under Pachycorma tenuis. Var. pergranulatum, n. var. (Tab. xxxii.) A typo variat semine orbiculari-reniformi circiter 1 mm. diametro, testa brunneo-rubra omnino subconcentrice granulata. S. Australia. Salt lands near the Grange and at Birkenhead (Port Adelaide River, J. M. B., Jan.-May, 1919) ; Noarlunga (J. M. B., Jan., 1905); River Frome, near Marree (J. M. B., October, 1917); between Port Elliot and Victor Harbour (H. W. Andrew, Feb., 1919); Mann Crossing, River Murray (H. W. Andrew, Nov., 1915); Lake Hart (Dr. G Taylor, May, 1919); Cootanoorinna (near Warrina, R. Helms, in Tate Herbarium as Salicornia leiostachya, May, 1891). Queensland. Port Alma, C.Q. (L. Hassell, in Queensland Herbarium as S. levostachya, October, 1917). The variety differs from the type in its seed, which is orbicular-reniform, reddish-brown and granular all over. It is usually a lower shrub, more spreading, and 30-50 cm. high. In the specimens from Frome River and Port Alma the position of the pericarp in the perianth is almost horizontal, instead of oblique, and although some of the seeds are ripe, the perianths have not separated from the article, and the membranous pericarp adheres more or less to the seed. The greater or lesser obliquity of the fruit does not seem to be of much importance, for in the Cootanoorinna specimen the pericarp is horizontal, but the perianths are falling from the spike. The seeds bear considerable resemblance to those of Silene, Calandrima, and Mesembryanthemum. 2. A. Lylei, (Ewart et White) combin. nov. (Tab. xxxiv.) Haec species distat ab A. halocnemoidi pericarpio mamilliformi apice crustaceo horizontaliter prominente atque perianthio distincte et late trilobo herbaceo non spongioso.— Salicornia Lyler, Ewart et White in- Jour. Roy. Soc., N.S. Wales, xlii., 195, t. 34 (1908). A very distinct species by reason of its ovoid pericarp, which is membranous except near the summit, where it becomes crustaceous and is produced in a nipple-like point (the persistant style) beyond the 3 broad lobes of the perianth ; 360 perianth herbaceous and somewhat fleshy, dilated and truncate at the summit, protruding conspicuously beyond the fertile articles and finally adherent to the base of the pericarp; barren articles 3-5 mm. long, 2 mm. thick, the lobes rather acute and keeled; spikes 8-22 mm. long, terminating short, opposite branches; fertile articles 5-15, 2 mm. long, 3 mm. thick ; flowers in 3’s, all bisexual, but (at least in the specimens examined) very few of them ripening fruit; seed compressed, ovate, 14 mm. long; testa reddish-brown, granular on the back, smooth in front; endopleura membranous; albumen lateral; embryo slightly curved, the cotyledons one-third as long as the radicle. W. Australia. Cowcowing, near salt lakes (type collected by Max Koch, Sept., 1904, No. 1051); Lake Lefroy (R. Helms, Nov., 1891, ‘‘1-3 feet high, in sand on margin of lake,” in the Tate Herb. as Salicorma bidens). 3. A. leiostachyum, (Benth.) Paulsen in Dansk Bot. Ark. (1918), 11., No. 8, 61, fig..24 et tab. 5, fig. 2. (Eee Erect shrub, 40-100 cm. high, branchlets and flowering spikes dark green and stouter than in other species; barren articles 5-8 mm. long, 4-7 mm. thick, very shortly 2-lobed and usually ciliolate on the margin, dilated and keeled below the lobes; spikes 10-30 mm. long, terminal and lateral; fertile articles 6-16, very short (2-3 mm. long) 4-7 mm. thick, in fruit brown and overlapping closely, so as to make the spike appear almost continuous; flowers in 3’s, all bisexual; fruiting perianth spongy or fleshy, dilated at summit, adherent to pericarp, which is horny, ovate-oblong and tapering towards summit; seed slightly compressed, obovate, smooth, whitish, 1-14 mm. long ; seedcoats coherent; embryo sometimes almost straight, not reaching the summit of the seed, so that the albumen is terminal as well as lateral; cotyledons one-third, or sometimes nearly as long as rudicle. - Salicornia leiostach: ya, Benth. FI. Aust., v., 203 (1870). A. Benthami, Paulsen, /.c., 62, fig. 24 et tab. ae fig. 2 (judging from the description and the identi- fication of a specimen collected at Port Adelaide by J. G. O. Tepper and seen by Paulsen in the Berlin Herbarium). S. Australia. Port Adelaide River (Prof. T..G. B. Osborn, October, 1912); salt and rather swampy land behind sand dunes at the Grange, near Adelaide (J. M. B., Jan.- April, 1919) ; Mulgundawa, near Lake Alexandrina (J. M. B., October, 1906); Marree (J. M. B., October, 1917); Hider Expedition, May 25 (in Tate Herb. as S. leiostachya; no locality given, but the expedition was, on May 25, 1891, at. Arcoellinna Well, at the head of the Arkaringa Creek). N. Territory. Finke River (H. Kempe, 1881; in National Herb. of Victoria as S. levostachya); 10 miles west-south-west 361 of Stuart Range (G. F. Hill, June, 1911; in National Herb. of Victoria as S. levostachya); between Crown Point and Horseshoe Bend, Finke River (S. A. White, Aug. 1913). W. Australia. No locality (Drummond, in National Herb. of Victoria as S. levostachya). This is one of Drum- mond’s specimens, on the strength of which Bentham included Western Australia (/.c. 204). It strongly resembles the eastern specimens, but it has no fruit. The coastal form is a stouter plant with thicker articles than those of the form found in the interior of the continent. 4. A. arbuscula, (R. Br.) Mog. Chenop. enum., 113, ann. 1840. (Pl. xxxv.) Shrub 30-80 cm high; branches often erect and rather slender; barren articles dark green, 3-4 mm. thick, contracted at summit, lobes obtuse and inconspicuous; spikes terminal and lateral, 6-10 mm. long, often reddish and spreading; fertile articles 2-6, 3-4 mm. thick, almost globular (with the exception of the obconical part concealed in the inferior article); flowers in 3’s, the central one bisexual, the 2 lateral male; perianth at first membranous, afterwards rather fleshy and adherent. to ‘pericarp, contracted towards summit, persistant; fruit rather erect, triangular in outline, the style protruding beyond the perianth ; pericarp horny; seed slightly compressed, obovoid, 15-2 mm. long, smooth, straw coloured ; seedcoats membranous, coherent ; embryo reaching summit of seed; albumen lateral ; cotyledons half as long as the radicle.—Salicorma arbuscula, i Br, Prodr., 411 (1810). S. Austraha. Salt ground: along Port Adelaide River at Hihelton (J. M. B., October, 1918, April, 1919); on mud beside Port River near the Grange (Prof. T. G. B. Osborn, October, 1918) ; Cootanoorinna, a few miles west of Warrina (R. Helms., May, 1891; in Tate Herb. as S. arbuscula); Port Noarunca (J. M:; B., Jan.,-1905)-s Murat Bay, J. M. Bi Now.) LOT5,): Victoria. Point Lonsdale (ann. 1867; in National Herb. of N.S. Wales as S. arbuscula); Wimmera (Dallachy; in National Herb. of Victoria as S. arbuscula). Tasmania. I have seen a specimen from W. H. Archer’s Herb. of Tasmanian plants, in the National Herb. of N.S. Wales, without locality or date. I have here treated the Hast-Australian specimens as the typical S. arbuscula. Brown gives “M D” as his localities, “M” being the south coast from Cape Leeuwin to Wilson Promontory, and “‘D” Van Diemen Land (Tasmania). Of the Western Australian specimens quoted by Bentham I have only examined one of Drummond’s from Swan River, which 362 was seen by Bentham and is now in the National Herb. oi Victoria. This appears to me to be specifically distinct from the eastern specimens and to belong to A. halocnemoides. It was probably from this source that Bentham drew his state- ment that all the flowers are bisexual. This is not true of A. arbuscula, where, if 2 pistils are found in the triad, it is quite an abnormal occurrence. The only specimens mentioned by Bentham as having been collected by Brown are those from Port Dalrymple, Tasmania, and the Tasmanian plant is the one here described and figured as A. arbuscula. A. (1?) pruinosum, Paulsen, J.c. 63, from Carnarvon, W. Aust., is described without fruit. The spike has 8-17 articles, and judging by the photograph, plate vi., fig. 3, it is A. halocnemoides. - A. brachystachyum, Paulsen, l.c. 64, fig. 26; tab. vi., fig. 4, is described as having 4-8 fertile articles, perianth exserted, pericarp brown and hard; seedcoat not mentioned. Also from Carnarvon, W. Aust., and possibly a poor specimen of A. letostachyum. A. bidens, Nees in Pl. Preiss., i., 632 (1844-5). I have not been able to come to any decision with regard to this species. Nees described it from a specimen without fruits collected on the banks of the Swan River. A cotype (Preiss, No. 1261) lent me from the National Herb. of Victoria, is figured on plate xxxiv. of this volume, in the hope that this may be of some assistance to future investigators. It is in such early flower that it is only possible to say that the flowers are arranged in 3’s and apparently all bisexual. I have also seen another of the specimens quoted by Bentham below his description of the plant as Salicornia bidens (Fl. Aust., v., 204)—‘‘margin of salt lakes, north of Stirling Range, F. Mueller, October, 1867.” This specimen has rather stout branches and no unusual lobing of the barren or fertile spikes. It has one imperfect (broken) spike 40 mm. long, with 13 articles, and 2 or 3 shorter lateral spikes. All perianths and fruit have fallen from the spike. There is nothing to prove that it belongs to the same species as the Swan River specimen, or that itis not a A. halocnemoides. Bentham’s description, /.c., of some fruiting specimen which he believed to be S. bidens, agrees very well with A. halocnemordes as regards . perianth and fruit. That species, it may be mentioned, sometimes shows in its lower barren articles (but not in the fertile ones) a close approximation to A. bidens. It seems impossible to make any further progress until some botanist re-discovers this acute-lobed plant on the banks of the Swan River and then traces it to the fruiting stage. 363 2. PacuycorniA, Hook.f. Branches stout; articles long-lobed; embryo almost ERM Aide, este ol vay ee ee Nee LTP FODWSER Branches slender; articles short-lobed; embryo almost straight 2. P. tenms 1. P. robusta, (F. v. M.) Hook. f. in Benth. et Hook, Gen. pl. i1., 65, ann. 1883. (Plate xxxvi.) A low shrub with robust branches; sterile and fertile articles with 2 prominent, acute, spreading lobes, distinctly keeled, about 10 mm. broad at summit, the sterile ones 10-20 mm. long, the fertile ones only about 5 mm. long; spikes short and thick (10-20 mm. long), usually terminating short, opposite branches, with 4-6 articles ; flowers in 3’s, the central bisexual, the 2 lateral male; perianth membranous, irregularly 2-4 lobed at summit, where it is slightly contracted; pericarp soon hardening and becoming adherent to the enlarged bony axis of the spike; seed often solitary in the article, orbicular- reniform, slightly compressed, more or less completely inverted ; seedcoat one, subchartaceous, reticulate; albumen central, because the embryo is almost annular; cotyledons and radicle both curved upwards, the former rather longer than the radicle. S. Australia. Chowilla, River Murray (Jan., 1884, in Tate Herb.); Renmark (J.M. B., October, 1915). Victoria. Mildura (H. B. Williamson). N.S. Wales. Lake Victoria (S. A. White, Sept., 1917). N. Territory. Alice Creek (Horn Expedition, in Tate Herb.) 2. P. tenuis, (Benth.) combin. nov. (Tab. xxxvi.) Fruiticulus erectus, ramis ramulisque tenuibus, sterilibus articulis 5-15 mm. longis 2-3 mm. crassis, lobis late scarioso- marginatis obtusis vel acuminatis, spicis 8-16 mm. longis ramulos oppositos terminantibus, fertilibus articulis 4-6, fructiferis subglobosis 4-5 mm. longis, floribus ternis articulo inferlore occultis, centrali bisexuali, duobus lateralibus masculis, perianthio membranaceo, pericarpio primum corneo deinde cum spicae rhachi aucta et ossea conjuncto, semine subcylindrico 4 mm. longo basin versus attenuato in cavo rhacheos induratae recondito (saepius per quadrantem ambitus cavi ita se circumagente ut unum semen alteri non tergo sed latere adjaceat), integumento uno membranaceo laevi albido, albumine laterali, embryone levissime curvo, cotyle- donibus radiculae aequilongis.—Salicornia tenuis, Benth. F. Aust., v., 204 (1870) ex parte (quantum ad specimina quae auctor mascula existimavit); S. Donaldsom, Ewart et White in Journ. Roy. Soc. N.S. Wales, xlii., 194, t. 33 (1908). 364 S. Australia. Without date or locality but probably near Cooper Creek (Howitt Expedition, 1861-2, in National Herb. of Victoria); Mt. Parry, between Lake Torrens and Leigh Creek (R. Tate, Sept., 1883, in Tate Herb.); Marree (J. M: Be October, 1917): N. Territory. Henbury Station, Finke River (G. F. Hill, March, 1911, in National Herb. of Victoria as Salicornia conerea). Queensland. Georgina River (EK. W. Bick, Sept., 1910, in Queensland Herb. as Tecticornmia cinerea). W. Australia. Lake Cowcowing (Max Koch, No. 1147, Sept., 1904, in National Herb. of Victoria as Salicornia Donaldsonv). The Howitt specimen is one of those on which Bentham founded his Salicorma tenuis, conceiving them to be the male plant of a dioecious species. He says:—‘The specimens are very few and I do not feel certain that the male and the fruiting ones are correctly matched.” He was doubtless misled by the fact that Howitt’s specimens are in early flower, at which stage, owing to the proterandrous character of the tribe, the stamens are much more conspicuous than the pistils. In the type specimen placed at my disposal by Professor Ewart I was able to find pistils with the characteristic hardening of the young pericarp in some of the central flowers. Usually it is possible to distinguish the species, even without flowers, by the conspicuous scarious margins of the barren articles. In the long, almost straight and cylindrical seed, tapering at the base, it differs from any other species in the tribe with which I am acquainted. During the hardening of the pericarp and rhachis of the spike the seed appears to revolve on its own axis to the extent of one-quarter of the circumference of the cavity, so that, where there are two seeds in the article, they lie side by side (as shown in pl. xxxyvl., fig. 11), instead of in the normal position of back to back. To ascertain whether this change is constant.would require the examination of more material than was to hand. Sometimes, through abortion, only one seed remains in the ripe article; this is also true of P. robusta. ) J. McDouall Stuart’s specimens from the ‘north-west interior of South Australia,’’ which Bentham accepted as the female plant of S. tenuis, are in fruit, and certainly belong to the species here described and figured as Arthrocnemum halocnemoides, Nees. As the branches of P. tenwis are the more slender of the two, it seems the proper one to bear Bentham’s specific name. Judging from the localities quoted by Bentham, both species occur in the Darling district of N.S. Wales. lara bias ae 365 3. Saticornia, L. 1. S. australis, Banks et Sol. (MSS. et ic.) ex Hook. f. Fl. N.: Zel., i., 216, ann. 1853 (nomen pro synonymo S. indicae, Willd. perperam citatum, sed cum descriptione S. australis); Sol. ex Forster f. Prodr. 88, ann 1786 Suid nudum fide Benth. Fl. Aust., v., 205, ann. 1870); quinqueflora, Bunge ex Ung.-Sternb. Vers. Syst. Salic., aa ann. 1866. (Pl. xxxvii.) Low shrub with procumbent stems rooting at the nodes; branches usually erect, hght green; barren articles 7-20 mm. long, 3-5 mm. thick, lobes short but acute, keeled; spike 10-45 mm. long, when ripe 4-7 mm. thick and often bright red; fertile ae idle 5-20, subglobular ; flowers in 5’s or 7’s, rarely in 3’s near summit of spike, all bisexual ; stamens | or 2; perianth at first membranous, after- wards thickened and rather hard, dilated and truncate at summit ; pericarp hyaline; seed suborbicular, compressed, 14 mm. dhenttteg testa chartaceous, straw- solomeed, softly villous ; endopleura “membranous, enclosing separately the cotyledons and the radicle, which are of equal length and folded on one another ; Simon absent. At Port’ Victoria the plant grows in low, cushion-hke tufts and has a strong tendency neraels ‘gece the spikes in one tuft having flowers with 2 stamens, and a pistil (perhaps abortive) with very short style-branches; the spikes of another tuft have pistils with long style-branches and no apparent stamens. S. Australia. In salt soil at Patawalonga Creek, near Glenelg; Port Adelaide River at. Ethelton, Birkenhead, and the Grange; Port. Elliot; Port Noarlunga; Lake Ormerod, near Naracoorte; Murat Bay; Mount Nor’ West (between Lake Torrens and Lake Eyre); Port Victoria, Y.P. Queensland. Cabbage- tree Creek, Moreton Bay ; Mooloo- lah River (C. T. White, in Queensland Herb.). This species, easily recognizable by the unusual number of flowers below each fertile article, appears to inhabit all the Australian States and also New Zealand. Banks and Solander’s MSS. and illustration of this species, mentioned by Hooker, as above, have not been re- produced by J. Britten in [Illustrations of the botany of Captain Cook’s voyage (1900-05). Halocnemum australasicum, Moq. Chenop. enum. 110 (1840), from King George Sound, was left undecided by Bentham (FI. Aust.,v., 202 and 205), who had not seen the specimen. In Benth. et Hook. Gen. pl. iii., 65, it is stated to be Salicorma quinqueflora, Bunge (=S. australis). If it is really that species it is strange that Moquin should have placed it in Halocnemum, a genus which he describes as possessing ‘‘albumen basilare et laterale, parcum, carnosum.”’ ved 3506 TectircorniaA, Hook. f. 1. T. cinerea, (F. v. M.) Hook. f. in Benth et Hook, Gen. pl. i11., 65, ann. 1883. (Pl. xxxvil.) A low plant, of which I have only seen one rooted specimen (from Darwin). This has procumbent, woody stems and erect or ascending branches 4-8 cm. long. Bentham says “apparently annual,’’ but it seems rather to be perennial, like other species within the tribe. Barren articles 5-10 mm. long, 3-4 mm. thick at the summit, which is dilated and rather acutely lobed, the scarlous margin prominent; spikes usually terminal and solitary 10 to 25 mm. long, 6 to 8 mm. thick, obtuse; fertile - articles 15-30, each article divided to the axis and thus trans- formed into 2 scarious spreading scales, the outer margin of which is thickened and herbaceous below, scarious above, and flattened vertically (7.e. at right angles to the scale), so that the scarious portion shelters the flowers of the scale next above it; flowers in 6’s (not in 3’s, as stated by Bentham), usually bisexual, horizontal, at first attached to the lower face of the scale, afterwards free; perianth finely membranous, com- pressed, contracted towards summit, usually 2-lobed and separating into 2 segments; pericarp hyaline and quickly seceding from the base of the perianth ; seed compressed-ovate, 14 mm. long, much resembling that of Arthrocnemum halocnemoides, but the granules or papillae along the centre of the back are rather longer, sometimes almost hair-like; testa light-brown, crustaceous; endopleura membranous; albumen lateral; cotyledons nearly as long as radicle.— Halocnemum cinereum, F. v. M. Fragm., 1., 140 (1859); Salicorma cinerea, F. v. M. Fragm., vi., 251 (1868); Benth. Hl. Aust., v., 203 (1870). N. Territory. Sturt Creek (the type; collected by F. v. Mueller, when accompanying A. C. Gregory’s Expedition in 1856). Sturt Creek lies principally in Western Austraha, so that it is very probable the specimen was gathered there, but Mueller does not quote that State for the species in his 2nd Census. Darwin (M. Holtze, 1883, from National Herb. of Victoria). Queensland. Townsville (Rev. N. Michael, June, 1918) ; Archer River (Rev. N. Hay; both in Queensland Herb.). DESCRIPTION OF PLATES. Puatt XX XIII. Arthrocnemum halocnemoides, Nees. The central figure shows fruiting spikes. 6, 3 fruiting perianths, seen from above, 2 containing seeds (Finke River). 7, seed (Drummond’s Western Australian specimen). 8, embryo. 9, perianth with seed pro- truding (J. McDouall Stuart’s specimen). 10, seed (the same). 11, pistil and stamen (Birkenhead). ee 367 Var. pergranulatum, n. var. The central figure shows flowering spikes. l, vertical section of an article in fruit (Grange). 2, fruiting perianth and seed (Lake Hart). 3, the same (Coota- noorinna). 4, transverse section of perianth ‘and fruit (Coota- noorina). 5, seed (Grange). Abbreviations for all plates: a, article; alb, albumen; anth, anther; ax, axis; cot, cotyledons; e, embryo; epl, endopleura; fil, filament; p, perianth; pc, pericarp; ps, pistil; rad, radicle; t, testa. | PruatE XXXIV. Arthrocnemum Lylei, (Ewart et White) comb. nov. Central figure a fruiting spike. 1, 3 perianths seen from the front. 2, central perianth and pericarp. 3, pistil and stamen. 4, seed (all from the type, Cowcowing, except No. 4, which is from Lake Lefroy). A. bidens, Nees. A flowering spike and part of the branch (from the type, Swan River). PuaTte XXXV. Arthrocnemum arbusculla, (R. Br.) Mog. Central figure a flowering branch. 1, transverse section of a flowering article. 2, flowering article from the front. 3, pistils (all from Ethelton). 4, pericarp (fruit). 5, vertical section of seed (both from Noarlunga). 6, fruiting article, from the side (Tasmania). 7, transverse section of fruiting article (Ethelton). A. leiostachyum, (Benth.) Paulsen. Central figure flowering branch (from the Grange). 8, 3 fruiting articles, the lowest one showing the cavity from which 3 fruiting perianths have been taken (estan ge), 9, vertical section of fruiting perianth (Port Adelaide River). 10, seed (Finke River). 11, transverse section of fruiting perianth (Stuart Range). 12, vertical section of seed (Stuart Range). PLATE XXXVI. Pachycornia robusta, (F. v. M.) Hook. f. 1, 3 perianths after the anthers have fallen. 2, vertical section of pistil with ovule somewhat advanced. 3, transverse section of ‘fruiting article. 4, seed. 5, vertical section of seed. P. tenuis, (Benth.) comb. nov. 6, flowering branch (Howitt Expedition). ie fruiting spike (Georgina River). 8, 3 perianths (Mount Parry). 9, pericarp and young seed (Mount Parry and Cowcowing). 10, fruiting article (Marree). 11, transverse sec- tion of fruiting article and axis (Marree and Georgina River). 12, vertical section of fruiting article and axis, showing 2 cavities from which seeds have been removed (same _ localities). exe vertical section of seed (same localities and Mount Parry). Pratt XXXVII. Tecticornia cinerea, (F. v. M.) Hook. f. Central figure represents a flowering and a fruiting spike. 1, transverse section of spike, showing 4 scales, 2 of them supporting flowers in an advanced stage. 2, fruiting perianth spread open and fruit. 3, flowering perianth. 4, seed (all from Townsville and Darwin specimens). Salicorma australis, Banks et Sol. 5, flowering perianth. 6, pistil and 2 stamens. 7, seed. 8, vertical section of seed. St transverse section of seed. 368 NOTES ON. THREE SPECIES OF MELALEUCA By Epwin CuHEEL, Botanical Assistant, Botanic Gardens, Sydney. (Communicated by J. M. Black.) [Read October 9, 1919.] Pirate XXXVITILI. Meluleuca pustulata, Hook. f., in Hook. Lond. Jour. Bot., vi., 476 (1847). The original description is as follows :— “Ramis glabris albo-striatis, ramulis puberulis, foltis glaucis alternis subapproximatis erecto-patentibus subrecurvis crassis glaberrimis lineari-obovatis anguste linearibusve obtusis supra planis subter concavis punctato-tuberculatis, capitulis flavis terminalibus sessilibus plurifloris sphaericis, hypanthio breviter villoso, calycibus glaberrimis, lobis subherbaceis, phalangibus staminum 5. ‘““‘Hab: Campbell Town and Oyster Bay; Gunn. ‘‘Rami graciles, lineis e basi petiolorum continuis albidis striati, ramulis puberulis. Folia 4-4 unc. longa, sub 1 lin. lata, in petiolum brevem angustata. Capitula vix $ une. diam. Flores parvi.’’ Then we have a further description in Hooker’s FI. Tasm., 1., 129 (1860). Bentham (Fl. Aust., 11., 160, ann. 1866) quotes both the above works and gives a lengthy description, with MW. halma- turorum, F. v. M., adduced as a synonym, but as the latter is a South Australian plant, and has distinctly opposite leaves, and not alternate, as in W. pustulata, it would seem to me to belong to subseries i., Oppositifoliae, having affinities with M. cymbifolia and M. cuticularis rather than with M. pustu- lata, which is in subseries v., Paucrflorae, all of which species have apparently alternate leaves. In the National Herbarium, Sydney, we have the type specimen from the east coast of Tasmania, namely, R. C. Gunn’s No. 1069. There is also a specimen from Tasmania without specific locality mentioned, collected by W. H. Archer, which was identical with Gunn’s specimen. A_ specimen labelled ‘‘Darling River, New South Wales,’’ without the collector’s name or date, seems to very closely resemble the Tasmanian specimens, but we require further fresh material or 369 to definitely decide if the New South Wales plants are iden- tical with those from Tasmania. Bentham also quotes Wim- mera, Victoria, as a locality for this species, which he says ‘“‘has much shorter stamens,’’ but as I have not seen the Victorian specimens I cannot say if they belong to J/. pustw- lata, Hook. f., or the next species (Jf. halmaturorum). In M. pustulata the young branchlets are pubescent and the leaves alternate, while in Jf. halmaturorum the branchlets are glabrous and the leaves opposite. Melaleuca halmaturorum, F. v. M., et Miq., in Ned. Kruidk. Arch., iv., 122 (1856). The following is a copy of the original description :— “Welaleuca halmaturorum, Ferd. Mill., MSS. Foltis oppositis densis hinec nunc subquaternis patule erectis sub- imbricatis linearibus antice planis, acutis vel obtusiusculis, non mucronatis, 14-2 lin. longis, }-4 latis enerviis, glaucis, glabris, petiolis adpressis, bracteis spicarum ovatis acutiusculis tubum calycis aequantibus; capsulis calycis tubo ovoideo-truncato connatis trilocularibus. “Ad flumen Three- Wells River insulae Halmaturorum (Hi. Heuzenroeder). In vere. “Habitus J. curvifoliae, differt foliorum situ, usque obtusiusculs, nigro-punctatis, glabritie fere perfecta, fructi- bus apice minus contractis companulato - hemisphaericis, floribusque plerumque magis dissitis solitariis vel spicam paucifloram ramo altius insertam constituentibus. “War. 8 enervis (iM. enervis, KF. Miull., Herb.), folis saepe 1mpunctatis, floribus in capitulum collectis. In Nova Holl. australi passim. Boston-point, arbuscula (F. Miiller). “Nar. y tuberculifera (M. tuberculifera, F. Mill., Herb.), foliis ramorum majoribus fere semipollicaribus, 2 lin. latis, acutiusculis vel obtusis. In Nova Holl. australi ad Gmina-bay Holdfast-bay raro (F. Miill.).” It will be seen from Mueller’s description that he had three forms or varities under review, viz., MJ. halmaturorum, from Three Wells River, on Kangaroo Island; var. enervis, from Boston Point, near Port Lincoln; and var. twbherculifera, from ‘‘Gmina’’ Bay and Holdfast Bay. Through the kindness of Professor Ewart I have examined specimens of the original plant, which are labelled as follows:—‘‘W. halmaturorum, Hoy. M. Exinsula. Halmaturorum ad fl.,3 wells-river. H. Heuzenroeder, November, 1849.’’ [I would suggest that the ‘‘Gmina Bay’’ mentioned above is a misprint for “‘Guichen Bay.’’ The plant in question grows at Robe, and Mueller collected in this district during 370 his residence in South Australia. The description was pub- lished in a Dutch periodical (the ‘“‘Nederlandsch kruidkundig Archief’’), and doubtless Mueller had no opportunity of read- ing a proof.—J. M. B.] More recent records for VM. halmaturorum are :— South Australia.—In salt land on banks of Patawalonga River (J. M. Black, No. 1, March, 1904); numerous in salt swamps along Military Road, north of the Grange (J. M Black, January, 1919)—at both these places the trees often reach a height of 7 or 8 m., and have a whitish bark which peels off in strips; Outer Harbour (J. M. Black, January, 1911), often a small shrub 2-4 m. high; Port Elliston (Dr. R. S. Rogers, September, 1907), recorded in Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., xxxil., 264 (1908), as M@. pustulata; Robe (C. D. Black, No. 2, October, 1910); Mount Barker, J. Staer, March, 1911); Beachport (J. M. Black, No. 3, December, 1917, near brackish water or on it, papery bark, 2-3 m. high); Port Lincoln (H. Griffith, October, 1909); Victor Harbour, at mouth of River Hindmarsh (J. M. Black, Sep- tember, 1907). Victoria.—St. Eloy (D’Alton, 1903); Lake Charm, North-west Victoria (C. Walter, March, 1887); Dimboola (H. B. Williamson, June, 1913). M. halmaturorum is figured on pl. xxxvill., accompany- ing this paper. It is commonly known in South Australia as a ‘‘paper bark tea-tree,”” and varies in size from a small shrub to a tree of moderate height. Melaleuca pauperiflora, F. v. M. The original descrip- tion given by Mueller (Fragm., i1., 116 [1863]) is as follows :— ‘“‘Fruticosa, foliis breviusculis alternis semiteretibus vel teretinsculis acutis muticis petiolatis, capitulis multifloris, — bracteis subovatus trinerviis margine membranaceis, calycis lobis enerviis antice rotundatis tubo glabro, phalangibus albidis 9-12-andris glabris profunde filamentosis, stigmate minuto, fructibus subglobosis.—In montibus Phillips hone Maxwell.” It is also described by Bentham in Fl. Aust., 11., 161 (1866). Diels and Pritzel, in Engl. Bot. Jahrb., xxxv., 425 (1905), refer to this species, and quote as localities in Western Australia: Wyola, Southern Cross, Bullabulling, Coolgardie. They also note its close affinity to M. Sheathiana, W. V. Fitzg. 371 In the National Herbarium, Sydney, there are a large series of specimens which, although somewhat variable as to leaf - characters, seem to be mere forms of the one species. They are as follows :— Western Australiaa—Drummond, fifth collection (No. 154), 1849. This specimen is from the British Museum, and is quoted by Bentham, /.c. Then we have specimens almost identical with Drummond’s No. 154 from Coolgardie, col- lected by Dr. C. Webster in 1900; and from Camp 64, col- lected by R. Helms in September, 1891 (No. 15), during the Elder Expedition. A series of specimens with the leaves not quite so acute at the apex, and slightly shorter than the above, are from the following localities: —Nine miles north of Bullabulling (W. V. Fitzgerald, November, 1903), diffuse, 10 feet high; Camp 66 (R. Helms, Elder Expedition, Sep- tember, 1891); 108 miles east of Kalgoorlie, in a somewhat dry swamp (6-8 feet), collected by H. Deane in July, 1909, on the Transcontinental Railway Survey; Southern Cross (J. H. Maiden, November, 1909); Israelite Bay, J. P. Brooks, September, 1915. South Australia.—Ardrossan (J. G. O. Tepper, October, 1879, labelled “‘“M. ericifolia, var. pustulata’’?); Murat, Denial, and Fowler Bays (Dr. R. 8. Rogers, September, 1907); between Iron Knob and Franklin Harbour, E.P. (J2>sincock, per J. M. Black (No. 5), October, 1912); Minnipa, E.P. (J. M. Black (No. 4), November, 1915); Dublin Scrub (H. Griffith, September, 1907); a few miles north of Murat Bay (J. M. Black, November, 1915); margin of saltlake flats, Ooldea to Port Augusta (H. Deane, July, 1909); Walebing Swamp, near Kingoonya (Dr. G. Taylor, May, 1919, communicated by J. M. Black, No. 2). See also J. M.: Black, in Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Austr., xli., 49 (1918), where the species is figured on plate v. M. Sheathiana, W. V. Fitzg., is desribed in Jour. Proc. Mueller Bot. Soc.,1., (No. 9) p. 16 (1902), with the localities Lakeside and Black Flag, W.A. The type specimens are in the National Herbarium, Sydney, and a note in Mr. Fitz- gerald’s handwriting is as follows:—‘‘After an examination of numerous specimens of I/. pawperiflora, F. v. M., includ- ing the type, I am convinced that 7. Sheathiana cannot be maintained as a distinct species.’’ I have carefully examined the type specimens, and have compared them with Drummond’s No. 154 of W. pauwpertfiora, which is quoted by Bentham, and it seems to me that the extreme forms are so distinct that it may be advisable to regard the Lakeside and Black Flag specimens as a variety ota of pauperiflora, and to add thereto some of the other speci- mens from Western Australia and South Australia, when we are able to make field observations on the various forms. It will be seen from the above that the only specimens which come under Bentham’s notice are the original ones given by Mueller, /.c., and those collected by Drummond. In the series of specimens now brought under review we find that the species has a very wide range, and as a consequence it is only natural that environmental conditions will cause variation. I am indebted to Mr. J. M. Black for several notes and for the drawings on pl. xxxvill. DESCRIPTION OF PLATE XXXVIII. Melaleuca halmaturorum, F. v. M. 1, flower. 2, petal, 3, leaf. 4, cluster of fruits. 5, vertical section of fruit. 6, transverse section of fruit. 7, 3celled capsule. 8, An old tree, between 7 and 8 m. high, growing beside the Patawalonga Creek, near Glenelg. 3190 THE CAMBRIAN TRILOBITES OF AUSTRALIA AND TASMANIA. By R. Erueripce, Jun., Director and Curator cf the Australian Museum, Sydney. [Read October 9, 1919.] PLates XXXIX. anv XL. I. INTRODUCTION. The present communication is an attempt to condense our previous knowledge of the above group of organisms, and to suggest certain changes in nomenclature, as a basis for sounder elaboration by those who may come after and, with access to more complete and extensive material, engage in this interesting study. The great drawback to a satisfactory elucidation of our Cambrian Trilobites lies in the imperfection of their remains as presented to us, seldom more than portion of a cephalon or pygidium, oftener simply fragments. Omitting the minute form A gnostus elkedraensis, | know of only one instance where the all-but complete body is preserved, that later described as Ptychoparna alrovensis. The terms Lower and Upper Cambrian have been used by some in speaking of the rocks containing these old Crusta- ceans. I have not adopted these divisions in pages that follow, believing we know too little as yet of the Cambrian strata throughout Austraha and Tasmania to warrant the use of stratigraphical subdivisions employed either in Europe or America. On the other hand, sufficient facts have already accumulated to justify the use of the term Cambrian simply for a vast thickness of beds, in all probability synchronal with those so termed in other parts of the world; in this sense it is here used. When it becomes possible to stratigraphic- ally synchronize our oldest fossiliferous deposits, it will be more satisfactory to apply local group names, in other words, a sequence based on local facts and conditions. Two opera- tions will accelerate this, detailed field work and energetic collecting. With the view of recording the opinions of others, I have in each instance quoted the horizon assigned to a given species. Il. History. 1877.—So far as my researches have progressed, the first geologist to discover Trilobite remains in Australia, afterwards 374 shown to be of Cambrian age, was Mr. Otto Tepper.) We only know the bare fact that a Trilobite was found by him in the Parara Limestone, south of Parara Station. The exact horizon of this fossil was not made very clear, unless it occurred in the ‘‘variegated and dark-coloured limestone,’’ or ‘white and yellow marbles.”’ 1880.—The next in the field appears to have been our old friend Prof. Ralph Tate,@ who exhibited at a meeting of the Royal Society of South Australia, held on November 1, 1879, ‘‘a well-preserved head of a trilobite, which showed no traces of eyes,’ from the “‘Lower Silurian’’ of Ardrossan, Yorke Peninsula. It would be interesting to know if this was one of the specimens afterwards described by Tate in 1892. 1882.—In this year appeared a reference, probably by Prof. Tate, to the ‘‘head of a Trilobite’’ from Ardrossan, ‘‘apparently of the same species as previously found, but of a very much larger size. . . . The glabella is an inch and a quarter long and three-quarters wide, with three pairs of oblique furrows; its surface is ornamented with numerous close-set granules.’’ It would also be interesting to ascer- tain the whereabouts of this specimen. 1882.—In this year there appeared the announcement of the occurrence of Cambrian Trilobites in Tasmania by myself, through specimens sent to me by Mr. Thomas Stephens, M.A., formerly Chief Inspector of Schools of that State. These were obtained from a decomposed ferruginous sandstone at Caroline Creek, near Latrobe,“ and consisted for the most part of fragments beyond determination. But amongst these was a cephalon described as Conocephalites stephensi, and a pygidium as Dikelocephalus tasmamensis. With these were some interesting glabellae that I was, and still am, quite unable to satisfactorily refer to any genus within my knowledge. This Caroline Creek sandstone was termed by Mr. R. M. Johnston the ‘‘Dikelocephalus Group’’ in his system of classification of Tasmanian rocks. He also stated that the first observer to draw attention to these fossils was Mr. Charles Gould in 1862, the then Government Geologist. By Mr. L. (1) Tepper: ‘‘Introduction to the Cliffs and Rocks at Ardrossan,’”’? Trans. Phil. Soc. Adelaide, 1877-78 (1878), p. 77. (2)Tate: Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., iii., 1880, p. xiv. (3) Anon.: Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., iv., 1882, p. 145. (4) Etheridge: Papers and Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1882-83 (1883), p. 155. (5) Johnston: Syst. Acc. Geol. Tas., 1888, p. 33. 375 K. Ward the Caroline Creek beds are said to ‘‘have been definitely referred to the Upper Cambrian.’’(® 1884.—Dr. Henry Woodward described‘) two imperfect cephalons from the Parara Limestone as Dolichometopus tater and Conocephalites australis; he ascribed to them a Lower Silurian age. A re-examination of these specimens is neces- sary before it is practicable to say what they may be. 1888.—During this year I received from Mr. W. Howchin an Ardrossan cephalon, which I referred to Ptycho- paria as P. howchint.'8) 1890.—The first Cambrian fossils collected in North- western Australia were obtained by Mr. E. T. Hardman,(9) but for many years the exact source of these fossils was in doubt. This uncertainty has now been satisfactorily set at rest by a very careful and painstaken analysis of Hardman’s reports and maps by Mr. L. Glauert,“@° whose determinations are here adopted. Hardman’s fossils from the Ord River were first critically examined by myself at the British Museum in 1885, when [I attached MS. names to several I intended to describe. Cir- cumstances prevented this, but Mr. A. S. Foord() took up the work, and honoured me by adopting my MS. names. One, a Trilobite, was named Olenellus forresti. The Ord River limestones are for the greater part hard and flaggy, rarely massive, usually grey in colour, sometimes sandy or magnesian, and seldom fossiliferous.2). But in places where the rock is fossil-bearing, it 1s crammed with the shells of a small supposed Pteropod (Salterella hardmani) and innumerable pieces and bits of Trilobites. From the pre- valence of the little shells I have been in the habit of referring to this rock as the ‘‘Salterella Limestone.’ 6 Ward: ‘‘The Geology of Tasmania: the Pre-Cambrian,’” Papers and Proc. Roy. Soc. ‘Tas., 1909, p. 128. (7) Woodward: Geol. Mag., i. (8), 1884, p. 342, pl. xi., figs. 2a, 6, and 3. (8) Ktheridge: Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., xxii., 1898, p. 1, plonv., figs. 1-3. (9) Foord: Geol. Mag., vii. (8), 1890. p. 99. (10)Glauert: Rec. W. Austr. Mus. and Art Gallery, i., pt. ii., 1912, p. 66. (1) Foord: Geol., Mag., vii. (3), 1890, p. 99, pl. .iv.,. figs. GO) (12) Hardman: ‘‘2nd Rep. Geol. Kimberley Dist. W. Austr.,’” W. Austr. Parl. Papers, No. 34, 1885, p. 17, par. 124. 376 1892.—Prof. Tate described 45) both Molluscan and Trilo- bite remains from another locality on Yorke Peninsula, Curra- mulka. The latter were called Microdiscus subsagittatus and Olenellus pritchardi. Both at this locality and at the typical one, Ardrossan, Tate regarded the beds as Lower Cambrian or ‘‘Olenellus Zone,’’ formerly termed by him Lower Silurian. 1895.—On the downs, five miles to the northward of Alexandria Cattle Station, Playford Creek, Northern Terri- tory, in sinking a well, soft argillaceous rocks were met with to a depth of 200 feet. In the spoil from this well Mr. H. Y. L. Brown, the Government Geologist, found a Trilobite cephalon.@4 This I described as Olenellus brown.05) The discovery and determination of this fossil, found.in 1894, was the first definite record of the occurrence of Cambian rocks in the Northern Territory.“§ Mr. Brown cites a number of localities at which the lithological characters of this limestone formation are similar, and concludes by saying :—‘‘The oceur- rence of Cambrian fossils near the Daly River and Alexandria Station proves that these widely-separated expanses of lime- stone are identical in age.” (7) He had, however, previously stated his conviction that the limestone seen ‘“‘at the Daly Telegraph Station, the Katherine River, and down the Vic- toria River was a continuation of that struck at the Alexandria Cattle Station bore.’’ 98 In this limestone at the Katherine River, Dr. H. J. Jensen stated Mr. Brown found both Salterella hardmani and Olenellus forrestt, but I am not acquainted with Brown’s reference. 1896.—In 1896 appeared a paper by myself in which I suggested the presence of Cambrian rocks at Mount Ida, near Heathcote, in Victoria, basing my opinion on the presence of some fragmentary but very interesting remains, to which I gave the name of Dinesus ida.) 1902.—Two additional Trilobites from a further Cam- brian locality, about 150 miles south-west of Alexandria Old Cattle Station, were obtained by Mr. Brown, and described (13) Tate: Trans. R: Soc. S: Austr., xv., pt. u., 1892) poise: pl. i1., fes-9) 11-13. (14) Brown: ‘‘Report N. Territory Explorations,’ S. Austr. Parl. Papers; No. 82, 1895, p. 24, chart 8. (15) Etheridge: “Off. Contrib. Pal. S. Austr.,’’ No. 993i Austr. Parl] Papers,.No. 127, 4897, p. 13. pina, oe (16) Brown: ‘‘Northern Territory, etc., Reports Geological and General, 1905,’’ S. Austr. Parl. Papers, No. 55, 1906, p. 14. (17) Northern Territory, Ibid, p. id., p. 14. (18) Brown: ‘‘Report N. Territory Explorations,’ S. Austr. Parl? PaperssyNo. 82; 1895; 4 pa 2o- (19) Etheridge: Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., viii. (n.s.), 1896, p. 56. Ott as Agnostus elkedraensis and Microdiscus significans.(20) The precise locality is the deserted cattle station of Elkedra, in Lat. 21° S., Long. 135°22° E. 1903.—Prof. J. W. Gregory, in a paper entitled ‘“‘The Heathcotian: a Preordovician Series and its Distribution.’’ (2) described a further Trilobite from the Mount Ida beds as Notasaphus fergusont. He expressed the opinion that my Dinesus ida icomprised two forms, one of which he names as above, and further, that the deposit was not of Cambrian, but. of Ordovician age. The first record of organic remains in the Heathcote rocks was, I believe, by Prof. Sir F. McCoy, who recorded “cylindrical, flexuous markings, from one to two or scarcely three inches in length . . . usually attributed to annelid burrows, and are common in Cambrian rocks. . . . There is no reason for supposing from these specimens that the rock is older than Cambrian or Lower Silurian.’’ (22) Mr. E. Lidgey, in a report(25) on the general geology of the Heathcote Parish and others contiguous, refers to “‘mica- ceous mudstones containing casts of Trilobites,’’ members of these Lower Silurian rocks occupying rather less than one- fourth of the area reported on. An important survey was made by Mr. W. H. Ferguson “for the purpose of defining the boundaries of an outcrop of Cambrian strata known to occur in the parish of Knowsley East. The Trilobite beds outcrop along the valley of Lady Creek and consist of ‘‘micaceous mudstones very rich in fos- sils.’’ From Mr. Ferguson’s remarks it is clear that the geology of this district is complicated and obscure.(*) By the late Mr. T. S. Hall these bed rocks were regarded as of Lower Silurian age, ‘‘but low down in the series near the Cambrian horizon.”’ . 1904.—A further discovery of trilobite remains had been made about this time by Mr. Thomas Stephens (25) at the Florentine Valley, Humboldt Divide, West Tasmania. The fossils, casts of small Brachiopods, as well as those previously (20) Htheridge: ‘‘Off. Contributions,’’ etc., Nos. 12 and 13, HS0Z5 pp. 3, pl. 11. a Gregory: Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., xv., (u.s.), pt. ii., 1903, p. (22) McCoy: Vict. Ann. Rep. Secy. Mines, 1891 (1892), p. 30. (23) Lidgey: Geo. Survey Vict., Progress Report, viii., 1894, pp. 44 and 45. (24) Ferguson: Geol. Survey Vict. (n.s.), No. 2, Monthly Progress Report, May, 1899, pp. 23-25. (25) Etheridge: Rec. Austr. Mus., v., pt. 2, 1904, p. 98, pl. x.. 378 mentioned, are preserved in a yellow, slightly micaceous, somewhat fissile mudstone. A well-marked pygidium I termed Dikelocephalus florentinensis, and two others were referred with some doubt to the genus NWiobe. The Florentine River is a tributary of the River Derwent. Mr. L. K. Ward speaks of these fossiliferous beds as the equivalents of the Caroline Creek deposit. 1905.—Not far from Wirrialpa, in the Flinders Range, Mr. Howchin discovered a shelly band in a flesh-coloured oolitic limestone, containing Brachiopoda and remains of Trilobites. One of these latter was described as a species of Olenellus.26) This locality is in the vicinity of the Blinman Mines, about midway between Lake Torrens and the south end of Lake Frome. 1907.—To all interested in the Cambrian geology of South Australia, and possibly that of Australia generally, Mr. W. Howchin’s paper, ‘‘A General Description of the . Cambrian Strata of South Australia,’’(27) will be invaluable. He divided the beds into Upper (‘“‘Purple-slate’) Series and Lower Cambrian Series. With the exception of the Brighton radiolarian beds, the fossiliferous horizons are limited to two limestones high up in the upper division, as at Parara, Curra- mulka, Sellick Hill, Bhnman, and Wirrialpa, etc. Howchin estimates the Archaeocyathinae Limestone, in which the South Australian Trilobites occur, together with Brachiopods, Ptero- pods, and a Calcareous Alga, to have formed “‘coral’’ reefs in the Cambrian sea from one hundred to two hundred feet in thickness. 1908.—A preliminary paper(?8) by Mr. F. Chapman revealed the presence of trilobite remains at the Dolodrook River, Mount Wellington District, Gippsland, in a hard and sub-crystalline limestone. Three forms were recognizable— an Agnostus, a Proetus, and a Cheirurus. The age of this limestone was at this period left an open question. sol 1911.—In a further paper during 1911 Mr. Chapman elucidated these fragmentary remains,(29) and considered the limestone to be of Upper Cambrian age. The occurrence of Agnostus is confirmed; the Proetus represented two species of Ptychoparia, whilst the Cheirurus proved to be a Oremcephalus. (26) Etheridge: Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., xxix., 1905, p. 247. } (27) Howchin: Rep. Austr. Assoc. Ad. Sci., xi., 1907 (1908), p. 414. (28)Chapman: Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., xxi. (n.s.); pty a 1908, p. 268. (29)Chapman: Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., xxiii. (n.s.), pt. i1., 1911, p. 305. 379 According to Mr. E. O. Thiele there are two limestones, a ‘‘pale grey,’’ containing Brachiopods and Girvanella and a “‘dark bluish-grey,’’ with the crustacean fragments in ques- tion, 5°) ‘‘sections cut in all directions,’’ says Mr. Chapman. This fragmentary condition of such remains is not uncommon in our Cambrian rocks, particularly in the Kimberley lhme~- stones and the friable sandstone of Caroline Creek. 1915.—In the “‘Bulletin of the Northern Territory’’ for December, 1915, are photo-prints of a Trilobite cast, found by Mr. Surveyor Merrotsy on the Barkly Tableland, eight miles east of Alroy Downs; ‘‘the rock matrix is a cherty replacement of limestone,’’(!) which accords well with the lithological composition of the Ord River bed. This cast is described in the present communication as Ptychoparia alroiensis, and is the most perfect example of this group of animals.yet found in the Australian Cambrian. Mr. Mer- rotsy’s discovery is one of great importance, indicating a further extension eastwards in all probability of the series yielding Olenellus forresti, O. browni, Agnostus elkedraensis, etc. | 1918.—Some years ago Mr. H. Y. L. Brown forwarded to me pieces of a grey-white limestone from Clinton, on the east side of Yorke Peninsula, at the head of Gulf St. Vincent. Throughout these limestone fragments are the broken-up remains of a Trilobite, which appears to me to be quite dif- ferent from any one yet found in the Yorke Peninsula. III. OBSERVATIONS ON THE SPECIES. Genus Acnostus, Brongniart, 1822 (Hist. Nat. Crust. Foss., 1822, p. 38). AGNOSTUS ELKEDRAENSIS, Eth. fil. A. elkedraensis, Eth., fil.: Off. Contributions Pal. S. Austr., No. 13: (S. Austr: Parl. Papers), 1902; p. 3, pl. 1., figs. 1-4. Obs.—In addition to the comparsions already made in the above communication, attention may be called to another Cambrian species—A. montis, Matthew.©2) TI have examined the specimens of this pretty Australan form, and cannot dis- tinguish more than one thoracic segment. This absence of the second can hardly be a matter of development, as the normal number are acquired at a very early stage in the meta- morphosis of the genus. (30) Thiele: Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., xxi. (n.s.), pt. i., 1908. (3)Anon.: Bull. N. Territory, No. 14, 1915, pls. ii. and iii. aie eile Trans. Roy. Soc. Canada. v. (2), 1899, p. 48, Diets. h. 6: 380 Loc.—Forty miles south-east of Elkedra Cattle Station (deserted), about 150 miles south of Alexandria Cattle Sta- tion, Barkly Tableland. Hor.—Cambrian (Etheridge). AGNOSTUS AUSTRALIENSIS, Chapman. (?) Agnostus, sp., Chapman: Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., xxi. (nvs-)) it... 8908, p. 268: Agnostus australiensis, Chapman,: Ibid, xxiii. (n.s.), pt. 11., 1911 ple ipl. Ivin., fies: So Ad eit Obs.—The pygidium in this species differs from that of A. elkedraensis in the presence of the incipient spines at the posterior angles, and apparently by the absence of tubercles on the two lobes of the glabella. Loc. —Dolodrook River, Mount Wellington District, Gippsland, Victoria. Hor.—Agnostus zone, Upper Cambrian (Chapman). Genus Micropiscus, Salter, 1864 (9) (Quart. Jour. Geol. Soc., xx., 1864, p. 237). Obs.—The name Microdiscus has a strange history as related by Mr. C. D. Walcott, and may have to give way to that of Pemphigasys:—‘‘If Pemphigasms bullatus proves to belong to the same group [as Microdiscus] . . . all the species now referred to Microdiscus would then be replaced by Pemphigasyis, as Emmon’s original name of Microdiscus would not be retained, as it appears to have been founded on a specimen of the genus Trinucleus.” (4) Whilst the name Jficrodiscus is retained it must be ascribed to Salter, as explained by Lake. (9) Only one species of this strange little genus has so far been discovered in Australian rocks. Micropiscus sieniFicans, Eth. fil. M. significans, Eth. fil.: Off. Contrib. Pal. S. Austr., No. 13 - (S. Austr. Parl. Papers), 1902, p. 3, pl. 11., figs. 5-9. Obs.—I am not in possession of any additional inform- ation relating to J/. significans, which appears to be a member of the M. dawsoni-puctatus group, or those forms possessing a well-marked backwardly-directed cervical spine and multi- segmented pygidium. I have re-examined the type specimens in the light of Mr. Walcott’s genus Pagetia, but I failed to find any trace of either ‘‘eye line’’ (pelpebral ridge) or eyes. (33) Emended: Walcott. 1886; non Microdiscus, Emmons. (34) Walcott: Bull. U.S. Geol. Survey, No. 30, 1886, p. 154. (35) Lake: Mon. Brit. Cambrian Trilobites, pt. ii., 1907, p. 30. 381 To the original description may be added that the sur- face of each cheek rises into a low blunt tubercle. Loc.—Associated with A gnostus elhkedraensis. Hor.—Cambrian (Etheridge). Genus Dinesus, Eth. fil., 1896 (Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict.,. viii. (ais.) 1896, p. 56). DineEsus 1pA, Eth. fil. Dr ida, Wth. fil.: bid, p. 56, pl. 4. D. ida, Gregory: Ibid, kv. (u.s.), pt. moe WSO Bia Tae | LSS), pl. xxvi., figs. 8-10. Trilobite, Miro C: D. Walcott Smnacteed ¢ mie genus Dimesus, Etheridge, jr., appears to be more nearly related to Damesella or Dorypygella, Walcott. Its marked charac- teristics are: the elongate oval glabella with the small, dis- tinct. antero-lateral and postero-lateral lobes; the small palpebral lobes; and the large pygidium with a spinose border.” (6. A comparison with Dorypyge and several other genera will be found in the original description. Prof. J. W. Gregory would combine the pygidia described by me as those of JD. ida with his Notasaphus ferguson, but too little of both these forms is at present known to define their respective limits. Loc.—Near Mount Ida, near Heathcote, Victoria. Hor—Cambrian (Etheridge); Ordovician (Gregory) ; Cambrian or Lower Silurian (McCoy); Lower Silurian, ‘‘low down’’ (T. S. Hall). Genus OLENELLUS, J. Hall, 1862 (15th Ann. Rep. N. York State Cab. Nat. Hist., 1862, p. 114). OLENELLUS (?) BRowNI, Hth. fil. O. browni, Eth. fil.: Off. Contributions Pal. S. Austr., No. i 2 oe Aucsteseearl Papers, 1897, Noy I20yets97." ps iiss ply 1; i Obs.—It is impossible to assign this Trilobite to its cor- rect generic position pending the discovery of more complete material, especially the pygidium, the structure of which would at once decide the question. So far as the characters are decipherable they appear to be those of Olenellus, more particularly from the fact that through the absence of facial sutures the ‘‘free cheeks’’ are in one with the other parts of the cephalic shield. Loc.—Alexandria Cattle Station, Playford Creek, Barkly Tableland (110 miles north-west of Camoweal). Hor.—Cambrian (Etheridge). (56) Walcott: Proc. U.S.A. Nat. Mus., xxix., 1905, p. 35. 382 OLENELLUS(?), sp. Pl) xxx. die) 1S Olenellus, sp., Etheridge: Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., xxix., 1905, -p. 2247p pli oxxv., figs Uh. Obs.—At present I am unable to refer this imperfect portion of a cephalon to any definite genus. ‘The published figure does not convey a correct idea of the anterior outline, but represents the specimen terminating at the anterior margin of the glabella, whereas there is, in reality, portion of a wide concave area, anterior to the glabella, as in many other Trilobites; this alters the whole aspect of the specimen. There are but two pairs of furrows, instead of three, as I said in my former description, the basal pair complete and ex- tending across the glabella, and an anterior pair very faintly marked, mere ‘‘nicks,” in the axial furrows. This imperfect glabella may be, as suggested by Mr. F. Chapman, an example of his Ptychoparia thielei, but before adopting this suggestion I prefer to await additional and more perfect material. Loc.—Neighbourhood of Wirrialpa, Flinders Range, South Australia (Howchin). Hor.—Cambrian (Etheridge). Genus PrycHopariaA, Corda, 1847 (Prod. Mon. bohm. Trilobiten, 1847, p. 25). PrycHopaRia (?) TaTEI, H. Woodward. . Ply xxxix), fies .2 andes: Dolichometopus tater, H. Woodward Geol. Mag., 1. (3), 1884, p. 344, pl. x1.,.fig. 3. Oienelis Cpintchonaa Tate: Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., xv., pt. 2, 1892, p. 187, pl. ii., fig. 12. Redlichia tatei, Walcott: Smithsonian Miscel. Collns., 64, Noga OG, ip.’ “539. Sp. Chars.—Cephalon very minute, in all probability semicircular; glabella oblong and narrow, very slightly conical, arched, and apparently unfurrowed; axial furrows deeply impressed laterally, but interrupted at the distal end of the glabella by a low bridge, which crosses the anterior area to the cephalon-limb border, the area concave, and both it and the border wide. Fixed cheeks somewhat cornute in out- line; ocular ridges, or ‘‘eye-lines’’ describing a wide obtuse curve, broad and prominent; neck ring lobate, deep; free cheeks unknown. Obs.—The two first records of the above synonymy are founded on the study of four specimens: firstly, a replica of Dr. H. Woodward’s Dolichometopus tatei, very kindly sup- pled by Dr. Smith Woodward; and secondly, Tate’s three 383 type specimens of O. pritchardi, lent to me with great cordiality by Prof. W. Howchin. I am quite unable to separate the above cephalons; I believe them to represent one and the same species. I do not quite follow Mr. Walcott in his reference of ‘‘Dolichometopus ' tater’ to the genus Fedlichia. The fixed cheeks are so differ- ently shaped, the direction of the ocular ridges so dissimilar, that the courses of the facial sutures must have been quite unlike those of the Indian genus. At the same time I am by no means satisfied by merely placing these partial cephalons in Ptychoparia. On looking round for a similar structure to that I have here termed a ‘‘bridge,’’ uniting the anterior end of the glabella to the limb border, the genera A /lokistocare(S) and A crocephalites 8) obtrude themselves. In the former, ‘‘a low rounded boss occurs in front of the glabella, that usually ex- tends across the frontal limb (area) on to the frontal rim so as to interrupt the furrow delimiting the two’’; the boss appears to be variable in development according to species. In the latter of the two foregoing genera this bridge is referred to as ‘“‘a knob-shaped elevation,’’ but in a cephalon placed in this genus with reservation by Mr. Walcott, the glabella is connected with the limb by a well-defined narrow median ridge. . Loc.—Curramulka (or Parara[?]), Yorke Peninsula, South Australia (Tate). Hor.—Parara Limestone, Lower Cambrian (Tate); Upper Cambrian (Howchin); Cambrian (Etheridge). PTYCHOPARIA(?) SUBSAGITTATUS, Tate. Pl. xxxix., figs. 4 and 5. Microdiscus subsagittatus, Tate: Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., mieten L892. p. 187, pl. ar fie 2: Obs.—Tate’s “Muicrodiscus subsagittatus’ has no con- nection with the genus of that name. I have before me Tate’s two specimens and two others lent to me by Prof. Howchin. The resemblance between Tate’s examples of his ‘‘Olen- ellus pritchardy”’ and “Microdiscus subsagittatus”’ is remark- able. In neither of the two type specimens of the latter is the true outline of the cephalon shown, but the fixed cheeks are slightly more cornute that in ‘‘O. pritchardi,’’ the ocular ridges somewhat more sigmoidal. What, however, is of more ool Walcott: Smithsonian Miscel. Collns., 64, No. 3, 1916, p. ; (38) Walcott: Ibid, p. 174. 384 importance is the occurrence of traces of three pairs of very minute, ill-defined, and perhaps continuous glabella furrows. In the latter characters the replica of ‘‘Dolichometopus tatev’’ and the three examples of ‘‘Olenellus pritchardv’’ are in- decisive; the neck ring of the most perfect of the Jf. sub- sagittatus specimens displays a well-marked central tubercle. For some time I regarded these three—‘‘Dolichometopus tater,’ ““Olenellus pritchardi,’’? and ‘‘Microdiscus subsagit- tatus’’—as one and the same, and I am not even now sure that I have done right in separating the last named from the other two; however, this course will probably please those who deal in microscopic specific differences. Of Tate’s illustrations that of ‘‘O. pritchardi”’ is sub- stantially correct, but that of “VW. subsagittatus’’ ‘is imaginary. Loc. and Hor.—Similar to last. There is evidence of yet another Trilobite in these Yorke Peninsula Cambrian beds, as previously stated. Some years ago Mr. H. Y. L. Brown, late Government Geologist, pre- sented to the Australian Museum examples of a whitish-grey limestone from Clinton, near the north-west corner of Gulf St. Vincent. Scattered throughout these hand specimens are portions of cephalons, thoracic segments, etc., but all frag- mentary. The glabella was of the same elongately-oblong type, shghtly narrowing forwards as in the two last described forms. Ther are three pairs of furrows, the basal pair circumscribed, the two anterior pairs short, deep, and apparently not com- plete. The anterior area was very wide, concave, and with upturned limb, and, so far as I can see, an absence of the bridge uniting the anterior end of the glabella with the limb. The fixed cheeks are deltoid more or less; neck-ring wide with a central backwardly directed spine; the whole surface is minutely granular. ; I do not think this can possibly be identical with any of the previously described cephalons, allowing for our limited knowledge of their complete structure, unless it be with P. subsagittatus. The very wide and concave area anterior to the glabella and upturned anterior limb seems to point to this. Prycuoparta(?) austRALIS, H. Woodward. Pl) xxmix,, “fie. 6: F Conocephalites australis, H. Woodward: Geol. Mag., i. (3), 1884, p. 344, pl. xi., fig. 2a, b Sp. Chars.—Glabella oblong, almost parallel-sided pos- teriorly, the lateral margins barely tapering until near the 385 front, which is broadly rounded; glabella furrows in two pairs, the first pair all but circumscribing the basal lobes;_ axial furrows deep and well marked. Neck lobe in comparison to the size of the glabella broad and large, its furrow par- ticularly deep. Fixed cheeks only partially preserved, but apparently wide. Surface minutely granular. Obs.—The replicas do not display any traces of the facial sutures, ocular ridges, or eyes, nor is there any trace of the oblique striae ‘‘seen on the cheek in advance of the eye which spread from it to the anterior border of the glabella.’’ The space occupied by an eye ‘‘on the anterior half of the head,’’ as well as that by the oblique striae, appear to me merely. as fractured matrix surfaces. Loc.—Yorke Peninsula, South Australia (Woodward). Hor.—Parara Limestone, Lower Silurian (Woodward) ; Lower Cambrian (Tate); Upper Cambrian eg Cam- brian Pethendge). PTycHOPARIA (?) HOWCHINI, Eth. fil. PI xi hea P. howchini, Eth. fil. : Trane Roy. Soc. S. Austr., xxii., 1888, Duper pl. av: Obs.—At the time I described this imperfect cephalon I compared it with Woodward’s ‘‘Conocephalites australis,” but relying on the supposed accuracy of the figures given, believed them to be distinct. I now find the general aspect of the glabella of P. howchini to so closely resemble that of the replicas of Woodward’s species that suspicion is raised of the identity of the two; but like so many other. questions con- nected with these Cambrian Trilobites, this possibility must remain in that sense only for the present. Loc.—Ardrossan, North-east Yorke Peninsula (Howchin). Hor.—Lower Cambrian, or ‘‘Olenellus Group’’ (Tate) ; Upper Cambrian (Howchin) ; Cambrian (Etheridge). PTYCHOPARIA ALROIENSIS, nN. sp. Ped Shek Trilobite cast., Anon.: Bull. N. Territory, No. 14, 1910, pls. ii. and iii. Sp. Chars.— Cephalon semicircular (when perfect). Glabella obtusely conical, rounded in front, separated from the fixed cheeks and anterior limb by well- marked deep axial grooves ; two pairs of furrows, the basal pair circumscribing prominent basal lobes; fixed cheeks comparatively large, but. less convex than the elabella.; palpebral lobes small, the con- necting eye-lines, or ocular ridges, situated just in advance of the anterior pair of glabella furrows, anterior limb like the N 386 fixed cheeks gently convex, in the same plane as the glabella, separated from the anterior margin or fillet, which is cord- lke and prominent, by a shallow groove; neck-ring in its median portion comparatively thick, its groove well defined. Facial sutures in front of the palpebral lobes almost longti- tudinally straight, really very slightly convex, posterior to them curving downwards with a concave sweep and sharply outwards in the direction of the genal angles. Thoracic somites fourteen©; axis elongately and nar- rowly obconical, gently convex; axial grooves wide and open. Pleurae arched, angular in the middle line, each strongly ‘grooved or furrowed, the proximal half horizontally so, the distal obliquely bent. Pygidium small, of two (or perhaps three) coalesced segments, and a small terminal appendage; those of the pleurae deflected backwards to a slight degree; posterior margin truncate and nearly straight. Obs.—I am indebted to both the Federal Director of Mines at Darwin and Corporal A. L. Merrotsy, 13th Field Company, Australian Engineers, for replicas of this Trilo- bite, from which the foregoing description was drawn up. I believe this to be the most complete Cambrian form yet found in Australia, and a very compact little body it 1s. There appears to be, judging by Mr. C. D. Walcott’s numerous figures, considerable latitude in the number of glabella furrows and tail segments in Ptychoparia; in the former from none to three (the last predominating), and in the latter from four to seven (again the last typical). In the present instance the facial sutures and number of thoracic segments are in order, but in the possession of only two pairs of glabella furrows, and a decreased series of pygidical seg-- ments, it is not in accord with strict precedent. Loc.—KHight miles east of Alroy Downs, Barkly Table- land, Northern Territory (Merrotsy). Hor.—Cambrian (Etheridge). Genus Repiicuia, Cossmann, 1902. Hoeferia, Redlich: Cam. Fauna E. Salt Range (Pal. India, 48.2 see OOD) By mee a ee Cossmann: Revue Crit. Pal., 6th Ann., No. 1, 1902, p. 52. Redlichia, Walcott: Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., xxix., 1905, p. 24. Obs.—Described by Dr. Redlich as a Trilobite with a semicircular cephalon, and free cheeks armed with genal spines; a cylindrical glabella provided with four pairs of fur- rows, and palpebral lobes which surround the glabella in (39) The first thoracic segment is not shown in the figure; it is more or less tucked under the neck ring. © ee ee a ee a 387 continuous curves independent of the latter, and not con- fluent as in Olenellus. The fixed cheeks are very narrow, whilst the facial sutures are much: pinched-in at the anterior ends of the palpebral lobes, giving to the antero-central por- tion of the cephalic shield a very characteristic ‘‘halbert’’- shaped appearance. To this genus I now refer Olenellus (?) forrestt, Eth. fil., and Foord, from Kimberley. A glance at Mr. A. H. Foord’s figure (40) will at once reveal the very close resemblance exist- ing between O.(?) forresti and Redlich’s Hoeferia noetlingt, the type species of Redlichia, and following Mr. Walcott’s suggestion (4) T now transfer it to that genus. REDLICHIA FORRESTI, Eth. fi/. and Foord. Olenellus(?) forresti, (Eth. fil., ms.) Foord: Geol. Mag., Mita) to90. p. 99, pl. iv., figs. 2a, 0 led forresti, Matthew: Canadian Rec. Sci., v., 1892, pi: : Obs.—Mr. G. F. Matthew suggested the reference of this Trilobite to his genus Protolenus on account of its continuous eye lobes. He remarked that these continuous eye lobes “‘are close to the glabella, leaving a very narrow fixed cheek. The eye lobes and the middle piece of this head-shield are well defined, and give no reason for supposing that the outer cheek was fixed, without which the reference to Olemeitas is in- admissible.” In opposition to Mr. Matthew’s suggestion I would observe : — 1. The general appearance of the glabella, fixed cheeks, and eye lobes respectively in Olenellus(?) forresti is very dif- ferent from that of Matthew’s type, Protolenus elegans. 2. The glabella in Protolenus bears three pairs of lateral furrows, but in the Australian Trilobite these furrows are continuous, and said to be four in number. _ 3. In Matthew’s type a pygidial telson is unknown, but he informs us that ‘‘such an appendage exists in a Sardinian species, and is like that of Paradoxides (or Olenus).’’ Mr. Foord remarked :—‘‘From the same locality as the head just described there is a short spine (fig. 2a), probably belonging to the present species; if so, 1t would be the telson.’ (#) I, however, suggest 1t may be one of the genal spines and therefore quite in keeping with the structure of Medlichia. (40) Foord: Geol. Mag., vil. (8), pl. a fies, 202d: (41) Walcott: Smithsonian Miscel. Collns., 64, No. 1, 191 eon 62. (42) Foord: Geol. Mag., vii. (3), 1890, p. 99. n2 388 Again, Mr. Foord figured the half of a thoracic segment pre- cisely like those ascribed to the same genus, grooved pleurae terminating distally in a short backwardly directed spine. Loc.—(1) Elvira River bed, south of base line Z, 27 (H. B. 27); (2) Ord River bed, five miles below the Elvire Junction, opposite Hill J., 38 (H. B. 84). Hor.—Salterella Limestone, Cambrian (Etheridge). I have before me a single poorly preserved specimen, like and yet unlike #. forresti. The glabella and fixed cheeks are the only portions of the cephalic shield clearly distinguishable. The former is narrow and _ cylindrical, decreasing in width forwards, with three continuous grooves. The fixed cheeks are wider than in Rf. forrest:, and the pal- bebral lobes describe wider semicircles. The neck lobe is prominent and large, with a small central granule just above the posterior margin. There are five thoracic segments attached, each apparently bearing a central granule, or per- haps even a spine base, as that on the fifth axis is larger than the others, and projects exactly as the broken base of a spine would. The pleurae are short and, so far as the condi- tion of preservation permits one to judge, of the Redlichia type. The fifth is distally terminated (seen on right-hand side) by a much longer, backwardly-directed acuter spine, longer than in the corresponding part of either Redlichia noetling: or R. forrestr. The precise relation of this fossil to the lastnamed Trilobite is not at present clear; it may be distinct, or, on the other hand, notwithstanding the trivial differences pointed out above, possibly an advance in the known structure of &. forrestz. Loc.—Kelley Creek, Ord River Station (Miss E. Helms). Hor.—Salterella Limestone, Cambrian (Etheridge). REDLICHIA: THIELEI, Chapman. Ptycopana thielei, Chapman: Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., xxiii., pt: *u., 1911» p» Si6, pl: Iwai, fies. 2h. S.eonem 0): Redlichia threlei, Walcott: Smithsonian Miscel. Collns., 64, No. 1, 1914, p. 62. Obs.—By Mr. Walcott this species is referred to Red- lichia,4) and is remarkable in the possession of four pairs of glabella furrows. The presence of the long narrow glabella reminds us of that of those termed Ptycoparia subsagittatus and P. tatev. (43) Glauert: Rec. W. Austr. Mus. and Art Gallery, i., pt. 2, 1912. Wee. (44) Walcott: Smithsonian Miscel. Collns., 64, No. 1, 1914, — p32; 389 Loc.—Dolodrook River, Mount Wellington District, Gippsland, Victoria (Chapman). Hor.—‘‘Agnostus zone,’’ Upper Cambrian (Chapman). REDLIcHIA(?) minrma, Chapman. Ptychoparia minima, Chapman: Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., xxiii. ees pee OM OLS. pl. “lvaiieeenoc mmlamaiciG Ce), olen ln. Ree ortuel So. Nov...) Chapimlamemocemcntey XXi. oe (des.). imi LOOS. p. “Cae sane this form will be more appropriately placed in Redlichia than in Ptychoparia. The distinguishing features are the peculiarly dwarfed and semicircular palpebral lobes, which lend to this cephalon a somewhat remarkable appear- ance, and the ‘‘neck-ring showing traces of a slight ridge bearing three small blunt spines directed posteriorly.” Loc.—Dolodrook River, Mount Wellington District, Gippsland, Victoria. Hor.—‘‘Agnostus zone,’’ Upper Cambrian (Chapman). Genus DIKELOCcEPHALUS, D. D. Owen, 1852 (Rep. Geol. Sur. Wisconsin, Iowa, and Minnesota, 1852, p. 573). DIKELOCEPHALUS FLORENTINENSIS, Eth. fil. D. florentinensis, Hth. fil.: Rec. Austr. Mus., v., No. 2, 1904, People xX... fig. -4: Os Venere only as a pygidium, presenting the typical features of that of the genus. The axis consists of seven seg- ments and a terminal appendage. The flattened side lobes consist of seven or eight pleurae, and there is a wide striated limb. From the ventral margin, opposite to the last but one pleura on each side, projects a short pygidial spine. Loc.—Florentine Valley, Western Tasmania (T. Stephens). Hor.—Cambrian (Etheridge). Genus CREPICEPHALUS, D. D. Owen, 1852 (49) (Rep. Geol. Sur. Wisconsin, Lowa, and Minnesota, 1852,.p. 576). CREPICEPHALUS ETHERIDGEI, Chapman. (?)Cheirurus, Chapman: Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., xxi. (n.s.), iPelO0Ss p.. 269. Crepicephalus etheridgei, Chapman: Ibid, xxiii. (n.s.), pt. i1., TOES pee SO sole lvaia.5.” fie. 8. Crepicephalus etheridgei, Walcott: Smithsonian Miscel. Wollns:, 64, No. 3) 1916, p> 203. Obs.— The hitherto existing confusion between the genera Dikelocephalus and Crepicephalus has been dispelled (45) Redefined, Walcott, 1916. 390 by the labours of Mr. C. D. Walcott. So far as the pygidia are concerned, those with broad flattened borders, or limbs, and the posterior spines when present short and thorn- like are Dzikelocephali, whilst, on the other hand, similar pygidia with the spines extending backwards from a broad base long, narrow, and sharp; or the spines in question attached to the sides of the pleural lobes, appertain to Cremcephalus. Loc.—Dolodrook River, Mount Wellington District, Gippsland, Victoria (Chapman). |, Hor.—‘‘Agnostus zone,’’ Upper Cambrian (Chapman). CREPICEPHALUS TASMANICUS, Eth. fil. Dikelocephalus tasmanicus, Eth. fil.: Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1882 (1883), p. 155, pl. i., fig. 4. (?) Conocephalites stephensi, Eth. fil.: Loc. cit., p. 153, pl. i., figs. 1-3. Obs.—Misled formerly by the descriptions of the late Prof. James Hall, of Albany, I referred this pygidium to Dikelocephalus, but it appears to be that of a Crepicephalus, although not a highly typical one, owing to the narrowness of the posterior portion of the limb. I am now of opinion that this pygidium, and the part cephalon I described at the same time as Conocephalites stephensi, will prove to be portions of one and the same species. Since my paper was written, now many years ago, I have examined a quantity of the Caroline Creek deposit. One result of this is an inability to find any pygidia likely to associate themselves with the “Conocephalites’’ cephalon other than the “Dikelocephalus”’ tail, or vice-versa. I can, therefore, only conclude they are one and the same. . The cephalon called C. stephens: was, I believe, one of the first, if not the first, Cambrian Trilobite portion to be described in detail from Australasia. Loc.—Caroline Creek, near Latrobe, Tasmania (T. Stephens). Hor.—Potsdam Sandstone or Lingula Flags (Etheridge) ; “Dikelocephalus Group’? (R. M. Johnston); Upper Cam- brian (L. K. Ward); Cambrian (Etheridge). Genus Norasapuus, Gregory, 1903 (Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., xv. (n.s.), pt. ii., 1903, p. 155). NOTASAPHUS FERGUSONI, Gregory. N. ferguson. Gregory: Loc. cit., p. 155, pl. xxvi., figs. 11-18. Obs.—The cephalon of Notasaphus, so far as known to us, is certainly distinct from that of Dinesus, but if the figures are a correct representation of the fossil, it is very difficult i 391 to say to what genus the remains really belong ;» amongst other genera UVorynexochus, or perhaps Blountia, may put in a claim. Loc.—Neighbourhood of Mount Ida, Heathcote, Vic- toria (Gregory). Hor.—Ordovician (Gregory); Cambrian (Etheridge). CAROLINE CREEK TRILOBITE REMAINS. , In my early account of these casts I figured, but left unnamed, portions of four cephalons. In each instance a glabella was preserved, parts of the neck-rings and anterior limbs, and traces of the fixed cheeks. All four types have certain features in common, such as the broad, short glabellae, deeply excavate anterior areas with thick and prominent limbs, and deep neck furrows; they differ only in proportional measurements and numbers of pairs of glabella furrows. Since 1882. I have had opportunities to examine other examples of the Caroline Creek grit in which these remains eccur plentifully, but always found the latter in the same tantalizing imperfect condition. In the absence of complete fixed and free cheeks it is most difficult to suggest a generic reference with any degree of certainty, but in my original remarks I compared one to Loganellus, Devine, and another to Bathyurus, Billings.(46) In a later communication I sug- gested Ptychoparia,“) and for merely descriptive purposes perhaps here these cephala had better remain tentatively. At the same time other genera than those mentioned put in a claim, such as Bathyurellus, Billings; Chuanma, Wa eeu, or even Pagodia, Walcott. PTYCHOPARIA(?) CAROLINENSIS, 0, sp. Head shield, (?)Conocephalites, Wtheridge: Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1882 (1883), pp. 156 and 162, pl. i., figs. 8 and 9, (?)fig. 11. Loganellus(?) or Conocephalites(?), Johnston: Syst. Acc. Geol. Tas., 1888, p. 37. Chars.—Glabella broad-oval or oblong, rounded an- teriorly, and all but in contact with the fillet of the anterior limb, broad posteriorly; fillet and neck-ring prominent, the neck furrow deep; two pairs of glabella turrows, basal and middle. Obs.—The outline of the glabella (figs. 8 and 9) and that of fig. 11 are remarkably alike, and it is possible they may be identical as to species. (46) Etheridge: Papers and Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1882-3 (1883). (47) Etheridge: Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., xxxii., 1882, p. 3. 392 ‘ PTYCHOPARIA(?) JOHNSTONI, Nn. sp. : Second species, Etheridge: Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1882 (1883), pp. 157 and 162; pl. 1., fig. 10. Loganellus(?) or Conkeephalicneo: sp., Johnston: Syst. Acc. Geol. Tas., 1888, p. 37. Cars.—Glabella slightly pyriform, narrowing posteriorly, its anterior margin separated from the limb-fillet by a wide and deep frontal groove; limb-fillet thick and prominent; axial grooves deep and well marked; two pairs of pit-like furrows, basal and middle. Obs.—Name suggested in memory of ihe late Mr. R. M. Johnston, Government Statist of Tasmania, etc. This is, in all probability, quite distinct from the original figs. 8, 9; anid, tte PTYCHOPARIA (?) TASMANIENSIS, 0. sp. Fragmentary head shield, allied to Bathyurus, Etheridge: Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1882 (1883), p. 157, pl. 1., fig. 12. OER UUs 3) sp., Johnston: Syst. Acc. Geol. Tas., 1888, Sp. Chars.—Glabella nearly quadrate, short, blunt anteriorly, but with the margin slightly rounded, expanding very little forwards; fillet of the limb narrow but prominent ; fixed cheeks probably broad; neck furrow deep. Obs.—Furrows are not visible on this glabella; it is shorter than either of the other forms, and blunter anteriorly. In addition to the cephalic portions already described, there occur both in the Caroline Creek beds and those of the Florentine Valley certain pygidia of a very marked character. Those from the first locality I tentatively referred to two forms of Asaphus.(48) They are nearly semicircular, differing rather in outline, but both with pronounced seg- mented axes, one with ten, the other eight segments. Both have well-marked striated limbs, but in one (fig. 6), the axis enlarges forwards much more rapidly than that of fig. 5. The imperfection of the record renders accurate recog- nition of these pygidia difficult. A reference to Bathyurus even is, to some extent, possibly permissible, for although in most species of Bathyurus the pygidial pleurae are seg- mented, in /. saffordi, Billings,(49) only the axis is so, precisely as in the fossils under review. Furthermore, the glabellae, fixed cheeks, etc., are remarkably similar to those of that genus. In the same category stands Asaphiscus, Meek, but (48) Etheridge: Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1882 (1883), p. 156, pl. 1., figs. 5 and 6. (49) Billings: Canadian Pal. Foss., i., 1865, p. 259, fig. 241. 8 —eeEeEeEEeeeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeEerereee ee Oe eee eee ee amie Pte ant a —_ - 2) ee 393 here we are faced by the negative fact that no Asaphiscus- like cephalons have so far been discovered at Caroline Creek, that is to my knowledge. In the Florentine Valley extension there also occur very similar isolated pygidia that I referred to Viobe.(5°) In these tails, varying from semicircular (correct outline) to deltoid- triangular (distorted outline), are long, narrow, segmented axes, with indistinct traces of pleural subdivision on the lateral lobes. The limbs, as in those of the Caroline Creek specimens, are broad and continuous. In all probability, to whatever genus these latter pygidia may in the future be relegated, those occurring in the Florentine Valley will follow suit. DESCRIPTION OF PLATES. Pratt XXXIX. Olenellus (?), sp., or Ptychopar ta (?), sp. Fig. 1. Fragmentary cephalon (figured in Trans. Roy. Soc. Seach axoix., pli xxv., fic. l)oy x2) diam: Eerchapania(?) tater, H. Woodward, sp. Fig. 2. Imperfect cephaion, from a replica of Woodward’s original specimen of Dolichometopus tater (figured in the Geol. Magazine, 1., 1884, pl. x1., fig. 3). x8 diam. ‘Big. 3. Imperfect eephallen. from _ one of Tate’s original specimens of Olenellus pritchardi (figured in Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Asn pt. 2. L892) pl. ii.; fic. Mee x4edrame Pigcnoparia(? ) cubsaod tatne. Tate, sp. Fig. 4. Imperfect cephalon, from one of Tate’s original specimens of Microdiscus subsagittatus (figured in Trans. Roy. SocemoneAustr i xv., pb. '2, 1892 .pligmy tewel2)= x6 diam. Fig. 5., Another similar example of Tate’s, but not pre- viously ficured. The glabella furrows are distinctly visible in this specimen. x6 diam. Ptychoparia (?) australis, H. Woodward, sp. Fig. 6. Imperfect cephalon, fom a replica of Woodward’s original specimen of Conocephalites australis (figured in the Geol- Magazine, i., 1884, pl. x1., figs. 2a, b). Nat, PruatE XL. Ptychoparia(?) howchim, Eth. fil. Fig. 7. Greater portion of a cephalic shield, from the original specimen (figured in Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., xxi1., 1888, pl. iv.). x2 diam. Ptychoparia alroiensis, Eth. fil. Fig. 8. Nearly complete Trilobite, from_a replica of the original specimen (ficured in the Northern Territory Bulletin, 1910; pls. ii. and ii.). x4 diam. The illustrations were obligingly prepared for the writer by Mr. J. R. Kinghorn, of the Australian Museum, Sydney. (50) Htheridge: Rec. Austr. Mus., v., No. 2, 1904, p. 26, pl. x., figs. 1-3. 394 ~ DESCRIPTIONS OF SIX NEW SPECIES OF AUSTRALIAN POLYPLACOPHORA (FOUR ACANTHOCHITONS AND TWO CALLISTOCHITONS), WITH OTHER NOTES. By Epwin Asupy, F.L.S., M.B.O.U. [Read October 9, 1919.] Puates XLI. anp XLII. ACANTHOCHITON PILSBRYI, Sykes. Pl oxi.) fees Pte os: A. pilsbryi, Sykes: Proc. Mal. Soc., vol. ii., pt. 2, July, 1896. A. maughani, Torr and Ashby: Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol. xx1i., 1898. I am indebted to Mr. James A. Kershaw, of the National Museum, Melbourne, for the opportunity of examining Sykes’ type of the above shell. Sykes states that he had only the single specimen and did not disarticulate the anterior valve. An examination of the type at once gives the reason, for that valve, in common with several of the others, is badly broken. Further, the marked character of the sculpture of this shell is much obscured in the type owing to erosion and fracturing, but still more to the extensive limy encrustations, the deep inter- spaces between the pustules being in most cases entirely filled in with the accretions. The very faulty drawings and description in Sykes’ paper are undoubtedly due to this feature. Both Mr. Sykes and Dr. Pilsbry, to whom he submitted the type, emphasize the character of the dorsal area, narrow and well defined, but both ignore the characteristic feature of the shape and arrangement of the general sculpture so striking in good specimens of this shell. Description of sculpture referred to:—In the pleural area the pustules are about twice as long as broad, are square-ended and set in rows on the diagonal, so that one corner only reaches the upper line, the interspaces between the rows being a series of almost square hollows, the direction of the row of pustules is parallel with the dorsal area. A limited amount of bridging connects the pustules of one row with those of the next row. In the lateral area the row A. pilsbryi, method of sculpture in pleural area. 395 becomes curved and the pustules larger, more raised, and _ rounded. Hab.—Victoria and South Australia. ACANTHOCHITON PILSBRYI MAUGHANEANUS, 01. sp. Bly xii.) fee | | Differs from A. pilsbryi, Sykes, in having pustules less raised and rounded. The pustules are even more rectangular than is the case in the dominant form; in the anterior valve they are about twice as long as wide, straight-sided and square- ended, narrower as well as being less raised. While probably the number of pustules is about the same, owing to their being more slender the interspaces are proportionally wider. In the median valves the pleural area is markedly different from 4. pusbry: in that the pustules are very slightly raised, are long and slender, with greater space between the rows. Also the bridging in the species under description is more complete, a raised ridge joining the posterior portion of one pustule to the anterior portion of the corresponding one in the row above, thereby increasing the honeycomb appearance so characteristic of the southern and dominant species. The pustules in the lateral area are more raised and larger than in the pleural, but this feature is less pronounced than in A. pilsbry7. Hab.—Sydney Harbour, New South Wales. Remarks.—Owing to the recognition of Dr. Torr’s and my A. maughani as Sykes’ shell, that name becomes a synonym of A. pilsbry:. I am therefore preserving the name of Mr. M. M. Maughan, the ex-Director of Education in this State, by naming the subspecies after him. The type I am presenting to the South Australian Museum; it was collected by myself at Middle Harbour, Sydney, New South Wales. Genus ACANTHOCHITON, Gray, 1821. ° Subgen. NoTorpLax PORCINA, Nn. sp. PE xl. oS: oles CO MeNO! General appearance.—Shell elongated, glossy, carinated, side slope straight, all valves more or less covered with fine longitudinal ribbing. | Colour and markings.—Light vinaceous-cinnamon, mot- tled with congo pink in the dorsal areas (Ridgway’s Colour Standards, pl. xxviii. and xxix.). Anterior valve.—Has five shallow undulations or ray ribs, is fairly evenly covered with wavy, concentric ribbing; in character these resemble “ripple marks’ on the sea sand. These marks turn inwards towards the apex of valve along the central rib. Near the apex the “‘ripple marks’’ are crowded 396 and broken into incipient, flattened pustules. Insertion plates, porcelain white, slits five, broad. Posterior valve.—Mucro very distinct, posterior, the anterior portion of valve is similar in sculpture to the pleural and lateral areas in other valves. A diagonal depression separates this from the posterior portion, the ribbing being deflected downwards and its character somewhat altered, the ribs here showing a tendency to become granulose, still further changing when the posterior part of valve is reached, the shell there being covered with closely-packed granules without any system of arrangement. Insertion plates white, one broad slit on each side and four, and suggestion of a fifth, immediately behind the mucro. Median valves.—The dorsal area is longitudinally lined with whitish lines separated from one another by darker lines which look hke grooves, but under a stereoscopic microscope the surface is found to be practically ungrooved longitudinally, but crossed by shallow transverse sulci. Strictly speaking there is some evidence of shallow longitudinal grooving exist- ing in places; this feature may be more marked in other specimens. The pleural area is covered with close, wavy, longitudinal ribbing, the ribs are more abrupt on the lower side, and the trough between them is broad and shallow; both ribs and trough are diagonally scratched or minutely grooved. The lateral area is sculptured in a similar manner to the pleural, but the ridges are deflected upwards on reaching the diagonal undulation, it can barely be called a rib, which separates the two areas; the lateral area is very small compared with the pleural. Inside of shell white, median valve one slit, sutural laminae produced very little forward, sinus broad and sinuate. Measurements.—35 mm x 11 mm. in dried specimen. I am indebted to Dr. W. G. Torr for the opportunity of _ describing this very fine Acanthochiton; it was dredged in Gulf St. Vincent, South Australia. Up to the present only one specimen has been met with. The type will remain for the present in Dr. Torr’s collection, but ultimately it will be placed in the South Australian Museum. Remarks.—This species can easily be distinguished from Notoplax matthewsi, Bed. and Pils., by the ribbing being continuous and not broken into granules, the ridges are less strong, and the pinnatifid character of the dorsal area, so marked in V. matthewsi, 1s almost absent in this species. It is more nearly allied to that species than to any other A cantho- chiton known to me. The specific name is derived from the Latin porca, meaning a ridge between furrows. 397 ACANTHOCHITON MAXILLARIS, N. 6p. Pl. xh., figs. 5 and 6; pl. xln., fig. 1. General appearance.—Shell long, rather flat, sides shghtly rounded, dorsal area much rounded, width of shell less than: half its total length, dorsal area broadly wedge-shaped, all the valves are covered with longitudinal rows of rather large, rounded, mostly porcelain-white pustules, the outer row or rows being irregular in arrangement, all pustules in these being much larger than those in the upper rows and some being twice as long as their neighbours and mammiliform ; here and there there is a tendency for these large pustules to coalesce. Colour.—Shrimp-pink varying in places to geranium-pink (Ridgway’s Colour Standards, pl. 1.), the girdle is Brussels brown, this colour occurring also in places in the ground-colour of the shell mottled in with the pink. The milk-white or porcelain-white pustules contrast strikingly with the general ground-colour of the shell. Anterior valve.—This valve is too broken to disarticulate, is clothed with white pustules smaller towards the apex, and larger and more rounded towards the girdle; there are evi- dences of ray ribs, probably five, this feature berng so common. to Acanthochitons. Posterior valve.—Mucro posterior, dorsal area similar to median valves, broadly wedge-shaped and flat and transversely finely ridged. Balance of valve covered with closely-packed granules, greyish or transparent white, but the granules of the outer row forming the edge of the tegmentum are twice as large as the rest, broad and round, packed closely together, and porcelain-white in appearance. This outer row of pustules gives a scalloped look to the margin of the tegmentum. Inside white, tinged in places with pink, slits two, the sutural laminae form almost three sides of a square with rounded corners. Median valve.—Dorsal area very broad, subcutaneously lined with olive lines, transverse and longitudinal striae, the latter very indistinct. Apex is formed into a broad, rounded, flat beak, which overhangs and is distinctly rugose. The pleural and lateral areas are hardly separable, and there is a considerable margin of variance between the different valves but all show three or four longitudinal rows of rounded or oval, distinctly separated, milk-white pustules, those next the dorsal area are rather smaller than the lower row, then follows a row of milk-white pustules, fully three times the size of the upper row, and more or less placed alternately, short and long, looking like a row of irregular, rounded teeth set in a jaw, between this row, which rather follows the lines of growth 398 than being strictly longitudinal, and the outer margin, are a few irregularly-placed elliptical or rounded pustules, some milk-white, others dark. Inside white, slits one, ill defined, and placed far back on the insertion plate, suture broad. Hab.—Marino, South Australia. Collected by myself ; only one specimen on rocks at low tide. Girdle.—Spongy, but in places scattered minute spicules can be detected, towards the outer margin there are evidences of minute scales; it is possible that the scales have broken away from the older parts of the girdle. A fairly conspicuous -hair-tuft is placed at each suture, but the spicules are short. Measurement.—-7 mm. x 3 mm. Kemarks.—This beautiful and striking Acanthochiton is easily distinguished from any known species by the row of exceptionally large milk-white pustules suggesting a row of rounded teeth set in a jaw, present in the median valve. The name is derived from the Latin mazilla, a jaw. The type I am for the present keeping in my own collection, but ultimately I hope to place it in the South Australian Museum. ACANTHOCHITON GATLIFFI, 0. sp. Pl) xh fies. 2 itoyor General appearance.—Shell twice as long as broad (dried specimen), side slope very slightly curved, dorsal area broadly wedge-shaped, much raised, rounded transversely and longi- tudinally, valves covered with curved longitudinal rows of rather large, raised, flat pustules. Colour.—The dorsal areas are deep Hellebore red, and the girdle and most of the ground-colour of the rest of the shell Dresden brown, the red merging into the brown ; the pustules are a lighter shade than the portion of shell on which they are placed. (Ridgway’s Colour Standards, pls. x., xxvill., and xv.) Anterior valve.—¥Five rays or undulations, the whole valve uniformly clothed with whitish, elliptical, raised pustules, well separated from one another but not placed in defined rows; these pustules are smaller and less flat than are those on the median valves. Inside and insertion plates deep pink, five slits, teeth sharp. Posterior valve.—Very small, mucro slightly posterior, dorsal area wedge-shaped but smaller in proportion than the other valves. The portion of shell to the front of the mucro is ornamented with a few large flat pustules in two rows, the posterior portion of valve decorated towards its margin with two rows of small granules. Inside pink, slits three, the insertion plates are produced posteriorly for a width almost equal to half of the exposed portion of valve, sutural laminae are produced sideways to an unusual degree almost forming a point, sinus broad. 399 Median valves.—The dorsal area broadly wedge-shaped, highly arched, longitudinally convex, beaked, pinnatifid. The markings and sculpture are a little difficult of definition, there is present a series of whitish spots arranged longitudinally on a dark-pink ground, the wavy longitudinal and transverse striae together with the colour markings give a granulose appearance to the whole of this area, which may be described as looking like strings of very small granules separated by dark-pink lines. The pleural and lateral areas are inseparable, are tra- versed by widely spaced, rather coarse, raised but flat pustules, - under microscope they look like whitish, flat topped flagstones laid on the crown of raised portions of the tegmentum. Inside pink, insertion plates pink, slit one. Girdle.—Spongy, a few scattered short spicules and an incipient fringe. Hair tufts well defined, spicules short. Measurement.—The type (dry) measures 5 mm. x 24 mm., being a little curved, probably 6 mm. would be nearer correct. Mr. Gatliff’s shell 6 mm. x 3 mm. and Mr. Gabriel’s shell 8 mm. x 4 mm. The type remains for the present An my collection but I shall hope ultimately to place it in the South Australian Museum. Hab.—I collected the type myself at Port Lincoln, South Australia, and sent two others, collected at the same place and time, to Mr. Iredale as being the same; but until these are returned to me and I can examine them under a microscope I cannot absolutely determine their identity. Messrs. Gatliff and Gabriel have both loaned me single specimens obtained off Point Cook, Port Phillip, Victoria, in 8 fathoms. Remarks.—I am indebted to the two gentlemen above named for the oppportunity of examining their specimens ; they exhibit a few minor differences. Neither show the pink colouration which is such a marked feature in the type; it 1s possible that their specimens may at one time have been in spirit which would remove the colour. Mr. Gabriel’s shell, which is the largest of the trio, has a distinctly rugose dorsal area, becoming granulose toward the beak; the pinnatifid character of this area is more distinct, and there are evidences of very minute scales on the girdle and of a girdle fringe. This interesting little Acanthochiton has been in their collection for some years, but was wrongly identified by them ~~ as Sykes’ shell A. pilsbryi, a species dealt with in the earlier portion of this paper. I am naming this shell after Mr. Gatliff, who with his colleagues has done much good work on the Victorian fauna. 400 CALLISTOCHITON ANTIQUUS MERIDIONALIS, DN. sp. Pl. xlii., fig. 7. Introduction.-—In setting out to describe a new form of Callistochiton I collected on the North-west coast of Tasmania I have been compelled to examine specimens from the type locality, New South Wales, which was described under the name CU. antiquus (pl. xli., fig. 6) by Reeve in 1847, and compare them with the Tasmanian shells and South Aus- tralian shells, with the result that I find that our South Australian shell must receive a distinguishing name before the new Tasmanian shell can be put in its right niche in our classification. Description of differences.—In the South Australian shell the longitudinal ribbing in the pleural area is broader, less elevated, more wavy and granulose than in the shell from New South Wales, also instead of running parallel to the midline they are deflected somewhat towards it. The bridging of the South Australian shell is only slightly lower than the ribs, whereas in the northern shell the bridging is deep, not stand- ing up nearly as high as the longitudinal ribs; also the trans- verse ridges on the two lateral ribs are less elevated, further apart, and more numerous in the South Australian form. A still more striking difference is revealed when the valves are disarticulated. The anterior margin of the tegmentum is almost straight in the Sydney shell, but in the South Aus- tralian one it is produced forward almost to a point. The sutural laminae are broad and straight-edged in the northern shell, but are narrow and more produced forward in the South Australian shell. Another marked feature is that while in both the articulamentum is continued in front of the tegmentum across the sinus, in the South Australian shell it is divided into minute teeth—I counted 10 slits—the edge of each of the minute teeth is curved, giving a scalloped margin to this portion of the articulamentum, whereas in the Sydney shell it is straight-edged, the slits being suggested by slight grooves. I am suggesting the subspecific name of meritdionalis for the South Australian shell. I have found this shell where- ever I have collected in this State. Type is from Marino. I am presenting it to the South ' Australian Museum. CALLISTOCHITON ANTIQUUS MAWLEI, Iredale and May. This species was described from Port Arthur, South-east- ern Tasmania by Messrs. Iredale and May. It differs again from either of the foregoing in that the longitudinal ribbing is persistent right over the dorsal area, the irregular network present in the two former being absent. The longitudinal 401 ribbing corresponds with the South Australian shell in the width of the ribs, but they are almost straight, nearer together, the bridging greatly thickened and proportionately shorter. \ The transverse ridges in the two lateral ribs are present as mere nodules, irregularly spaced and not as sharp strongly elevated ridges as in the two preceeding. This form easily takes its place as a subspecies of Reeves’ Callistochiton antiquus. CALLISTOCHITON ANTIQUUS MAYI, 0. gp. Pibexlit, toss Smanced: The only opportunity I have-had of collecting Chitons in North-western Tasmania was limited to one afternoon on October 11, 1916, when I had an hour or so on the rocks at a place called Penguin. Amongst the shells then collected was a small Callistochiton quite new to me, which I concluded and put aside as being Iredale and May’s new Callistochiton CU. mawler, which I had not then seen. Since then my friend Mr. May has given me a specimen of that shell, and I find that the Penguin shell is quite distinct. I sent it over to Mr. May for his opinion, and he concurs with my view. I propose naming if after Mr. May as an acknowledgement of the help he has been in the elucidation of Tasmanian Chiton fauna. Description of differences.—This species differs from any of the preceeding in the entire absence of longitudinal ribbing. The whole pleural area is reduced to a network of which the strands are so thick that the holes between are nearly filled in, in the dorsal area this is absolutely the case, nothing but fine granulose sculpture remaining. Under a pocket lens the pleural and dorsal areas appear simply granulose, the network origin of the sculpture is quite lost. Under a higher power, however, the network sculpture survives in the form of numerous pits scattered towards the anterior margin. The transverse ridges in the lateral ribs are almost as defined as in the South Australian shell, but these ridges are more numerous and closer together. Measurement, 8 mm. x 5mm. I consider this species diverges most from the dom- inant form of all the subspecies here dealt with. Remarks.—In the absence of the examination of the Vic- torian Callistochiton fauna, our knowledge of the effect or otherwise of the Bassian Isthmus (Hedley: Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, xxvii., 1904) on the distribution of this genus is very incomplete. In some respects the South-eastern Tas- manian shell shows affinities with the Sydney shell; but the North-western Tasmanian shell is certainly more closely allied to the South Australian than either of the other two. This is certainly suggestive but inconclusive, until more Victorian material is examined. I hardly think any additional word is 402 needed to justify the placing of the four very distinct forms herein dealt with under the specific name of (. antiquus, Reeve, as subspecies thereof. I take it that true science is better served in showing their affinities, rather than magnify- ing their differences. We may conclude that all four species have a common ancestry, but that each of the widely separated localities has developed a fixed type of its own. In conclusion.—In my list of Australian Polyplacophora (Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Austr., vol. xli., 1918) under the heading Callistochiton, two species and one subspecies were given, v?z., C. antiquus, Rve., 1847; C. recons, Thiele, 1911; and C. mawler, Ire. and May, 1916, the lastnamed being recorded as from both South Australia and Victoria. As regards the first it certainly was incorrect, and as far as I am aware it has not yet been found in Victoria, Two more must be added to the list now, bringing the total to five, and it is very probable that the very beautiful shell described by Dr. Torr as Ischnochiton bednalli, may have ultimately to be referred to this genus; I have not yet seen a disarticulated specimen, so cannot express a definite opinion. Undoubtedly the network sculpture is suggestive of this genus, but in some other respects it does not show any very close affinity with any of our known Australian forms. Since finally typing the foregoing paper I have turned. up Iredale and May’s description of C. mawle: (Proc. Roy. Soc., vol. xil., pts. 1. and 11., Nov. 1916) and cannot refrain from quoting their concluding remarks on the differences: “in the formation of the sutural laminae, these are continuous, whereas they are widely separated in the species (. antiquus, Reeve, and even more so in the South Australian species.” Mr. S. Stillman Berry, of California, writes me on July 1, 1919:—“Your alcoholic specimens of Callistochiton (from South Australia) do not look lke the dry antiquus from Sydney.” I think it probable that when the Victorian fauna is fully investigated we shall recognize two distinct species, C. antiquus, extending from Queensland down the East Coast, finding its extreme southern limit in Port Arthur, in Tas- mania, where the subspecies (. mawlez, I. and M., is its representative, and a western species, extending from the sub- merged Bassian Isthmus through South Australia and Western Tasmania to Western Australia, of which the dominant form will be C. meridionalis, herein described, with C. mayz, also described herein, as its subspecies. Addenda.—After completing the draft of the foregoing paper I received from Mr. C. J. Gabriel, of Melbourne, an Acanthochiton which he had compared and identified with Sykes’ type of A. pilsbry: in the Melbourne Museum. Mr. ee 403 Gathff had previously sent me a smaller shell of same species that he had also identified with Sykes’ type. I felt that to go counter to two such able conchologists needed assurance made doubly sure, and therefore wrote Mr. Kershaw asking that he would be good enough to loan me Sykes’ type again with per- mission to disarticulate another valve and clean same, because in its then encrusted and stained condition an element of almost intuition enters into its determination. Mr. Kershaw has sent me the type with the permission asked for. I was disappointed at finding that every valve was fractured, but have successfully disarticulated the second valve, which although considerably broken has sufficient sculpture remain- ing for the purpose. I can, now it is cleaned, authoritatively state that Acanthochiton maughan, Torr and Ashby, is cospecific with Sykes’ shell A. pilsbryz, and is therefore a synonym; also that Messrs. Gatliff and Gabriel’s shells from Point Cook, Port Phillip, Victoria, are fine specimens of my Port Lincoln shell that Iam naming A. gatliffi. I have photo- graphed under a high magnification the cleaned valve of Sykes’ type with a corresponding valve of A. maugham from the type locality, Port Victor. This photo is reproduced herein, and will, I trust, demonstrate to the satisfaction of all workers my contention. Photography.—I have contended for a long time that for purposes of accurate determination photography should be much safer than the work of an artist however well executed. While good photographs are comparatively easy at low magni- fications, its difficulty is greatly increased under high magni- fication ; this of course is especially the case with the carinated shells of Chitons. Further special methods of hghting have to be made use of. to bring out the sculpture. The species under review has been figured three times—Proc. Mal. Soc., vol. u., pl. u., July, 1896, drawn by J. Green for Sykes ; again in Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Austr., vol. xxii., 1898, figs. 5, a, 6, c, d, and f, pl. vu., under the name of ie ican ROT. drawn by C. Hedley for Torr and myself ; and lastly, the New South Wales form in Rec. Austr. Mus., vol. vii., No. 4, 1909, mes. 24,25, 26, and, 27, pl. Ixxiv., drawn by Miss W. West for Messrs. Hedley and Hull. While the lastnamed figures are beautifully executed and a great advance on earlier attempts, the true character of the remarkable sculpture of the pleural area is not delineated. No further apology is needed for the presentation of the photos of this shell as attached to this paper. It is a satisfaction to have been able to clear up a long standing difficulty, and my thanks are due to Dr. Torr and Messrs. Kershaw, Gatliff, and Gabriel for the examination of material that has helped towards the solution of the problem. Fig. go 9 ee CeCe TL amt SOU CONS 404 DESCRIPTION OF PLATES. Pruate XLl. AUSTRALIAN POLYPLACOPHORA. Acanthochiton pilsbryi, Sykes, x10, from S. Austr. E 9) oe) porcina, Ashby, x1. 53 a x23, type, median valve. ° » 23, from §S. Australia, median valve. sf maughaneanus, Ashby, x28, median valve. maxilaris, Ashby, x28, posterior valve. », Median valve. »» 99 x6, anterior valve. ae 5a . median valve. » 99 », posterior valve. Pratt XLII. AUSTRALIAN . POLYPLACOPHORA. Acanthochiton mazillaris, Ashby, x10. 2) . gatlifi, Ashby, xil. 5s x28, anterior valve. 9 Hi »» posterior valve. ne », Median valve. 2) 3) Callistochiton antiquus, Reeve, x15, median valve, from New South Wales. ee meridionalis, Ashby, x 15,. median valve, from S. Austr. . mayi, Ashby, x15, median valve, from Tasmania. Ashby, x15, anterior valve, from Tasmania. 3) bp) 405 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF SOME SOUTH AUSTRALIAN- GROWN PINES. By Proressor R. W. Cuapman, M.A., B.C.E. [Read October 9. 1919.] The tests about to be discussed were made upon timbers supplied to the Engineering Laboratory at the University by the courtesy of Mr. Walter Gill, Conservator of Forests. They reached the Laboratory in June, 1917, in the form of beams 6 ft. 6 in. long, and either 6 in. x 4 in. or 4 in. x 2 in. in section, all cut from recently-felled tress grown under inside plantation conditions. They were of three species, 1.e., Canary Island Pine (Pinus canariensis), Remarkable Pine (Pinus msignis), and Maritime Pine (Pinus maritima), all of which have been extensively planted in this State. The specimens of Pinus canariensis were from two trees grown in Plantation A, Bundaleer Forest Reserve, and felled on May 21, 1917. One tree was 68 and the other 71 ft. high, and each was 154 in. in diameter at the base, and showed 39 rings. The Pinus imsignis species were from two trees grown on a sandy loam over clay subsoil at Wirrabara Forest Reserve, one being 20 and the other 30 years old at the time of felling, and from a tree 33 years old grown on a loamy flat over a volcanic deposit at Mount Burr Forest Reserve. The species of Pinus maritima come from a tree 30 years old grown at Wirrabara and from another tree 33 years old grown at Mount Burr. All the trees had been freshly felled about a fortnight before the timber reached the Laboratory. When the timber was received each piece was properly branded and weighed, and a remarkable difference was noticed between the weights of timbers of the same species from diff- erent trees. Thus the average weight of the 6 in. x4 in. pieces of Pinus imsignis from the 30-year-old tree from Wirrabara was 38°42 lbs., or 35°46 lbs. per cub. ft., those from the 20-year-old tree in the same locality averaged 56°83 lbs., or 52°46 lbs. per cub. ft.; while those from Mount Burr averaged no less than 72°25 lbs., or 66°69 lbs. per cub: ft., being actually heavier than water. This difference, however, turned out to be almost entirely due to the moisture contents of the wood, and after storing for two years in the Laboratory the average weights per cub. ft. for these three trees were 25°94, 28°90, and 29°69 lbs., respectively, or an average of 27°86 lbs. per cub. ft. for the whole. Similarly the maritima 6 in x 4 in. pieces from Wirrabara in June, 1917, averaged 59°33 lbs. or 54°76 Ibs. per cub. ft.; while those from Mount 406 Burr weighed 65°58 lbs., or 60°53 lbs. per cub. ft. But after seasoning for two years the weights per cub. ft. were 31°29 and 35°69 lbs., respectively, the whole set averaging out at 32°96 lbs. per cub. ft. The 6 im. x 4 in. pieces of Pinus canariensis weighed.on the average 65°42 lbs., or 60°4 lbs. per cub. ft. on receipt at the Laboratory, but reduced finally to 41°83 lbs. per beam, or 38°61 lbs. per cub. ft. Some of the insignis beams from Mount Burr contained as much as 158 per cent. of moisture, calculated on the dry weight of the timber, but the moisture contents of all the timbers had fallen to about 11 or 12 per cent. by March, 1919. Even when dried to approximately the same percentage of moisture contents there was a considerable difference in the weights per cub. ft. of the timber from the three trees from which the insignis beams were cut, and an analysis of the results of the tests on the seasoned wood shows that this difference in weight was accompanied by a corresponding difference in strength. With the notable exception of the beam tests for the 20-year-old tree from Wirrabara the strengths were very nearly proportional to the densities of the timber, as the following table shows : — Ratios oF DENSITIES AND STRENGTHS OF Pinus insignis. Timber from Different Trees. From From Wirrabara. Mount Burr. 30 years 20 years 33 years old. old. old. Ratio of densities... 1 Trey oda. oj) SEE Ratio of strengths in compres- | sion along the grain 1 ise" 708), ayaa Ratio of shearing strengths .. Ll ios 109. , ae Ratio of strengths of beams i 0°91 2 ey Similar results, however, were not found to apply to the maritima tests. Here again the timber from Mount Burr was © considerably heavier than that from Wirrabara, both when green and when seasoned ; but the tests showed that the Mount Burr timber was distinctly the weaker. Tested as beams the ratio of the strength of the Mount Burr timber to that from Wirrabara was 13 : 21, and in all tests except shearing the denser timber was inferior to the other. Density is evidently by no means the only factor in determining the strengths of woods, even of the same species. The tests made upon the timbers comprised measurements for shrinkage with seasoning, transverse tests carried out on beams 6 ft. between supports and either 6 in.x4 in. or 4 in. x 2 in. in section, shearing tests, and determinations of the strength of the timber in compression both longitudinally 407 and across the grain. The tests were made in the same manner as those described in the author’s paper on “The Strength of South Australian Timbers,’ in Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Austr., vol. xxxll1. On the whole over 350 tests were made on the three species, so that fair average determinations could be made. In addition a number of tests were made upon samples of oregon purchased at local timber mills. As this is an imported timber largely used for construction it was thought that the comparison would be useful. With every test a determination was made of the moisture contents of the wood as soon as possible after the test was completed. In the case of beams this was done by boring two large auger holes into the beam near the break. The shavings from these holes were then put into weighing bottles, to protect them from the drying effects of the air, and weighed. The bottles were then put in a drying oven, the tops being removed, and they were kept there at a temperature of about 104° C. for 5 hours. The tops of the bottles were then replaced and, after being allowed to cool the bottles were again. weighed. The moisture determination is very essential, because the strength of many species of wood diminishes very greatly as the moisture contents increase, and a test of its strength is practically valueless unless it is accompanied by a measurement of the moisture contained in it. It makes no difference whether this moisture be in the form of the original sap or whether it be due to water that has soaked into the wood after seasoning. In either case the strength of the wood with a given percentage of moisture will be the same. | In order to examine the question of the variation of strength with moisture contents more thoroughly than could be done by making tests on the timber as it was seasoning, 48 blocks, each 2 in. x 4 in. and 5 in. long, were cut out of a _ seasoned beam of Pinus insignis. The determinations showed that this beam contained 11 per cent. of moisture, as calculated on the dry wood, and as it had been stored in the Laboratory for two years in a dry place, the moisture contents were fairly uniformly distributed. The blocks were each separately marked and weighed, and three of them were tested in com- pression along the grain, the average strength being 4,462 lbs. per sq. inch. The remainder were then kept immersed in water for four days. They were then remoyed and allowed to gradually dry out to their original condition. At first they dried rapidly, and two or three blocks were weighed each day, to determine their moisture contents, and then tested. The first block tested had 50 per cent. moisture, and its strength had fallen to 1,710 lbs. per sq. inch. Afterwards the process of drying was slower and the interval of time between the tests 408 was made greater. After 12 weeks the moisture contents were down to 13 or 14 per cent. The relation between the crushing strength of the wood in pounds per sq. inch and the percentage of moisture in the wood, as determined in this way, is shown in q 5 = UR Ave WG OF i — NA uy 29, Siz (G3 28S tS: 2TH XH Sis Tee Pere PERCENTAGE GF Oa ae /O 20 BO, 40 is, @, GO JO Big, cd. the curve for Pinus imsignus in fig. 1. It was found that the average results of tests made in the ordinary way, as the timber was seasoning, fitted well on the curve thus obtained, 409 showing that the strength of the wood was the same whether the moisture was obtained from soakage in water or whether it consisted of the natural sap. It will be seen from the curve that the strength in compression falls off very rapidly as the moisture increases above the 10 per cent. or thereabouts con- tained in well-seasoned wood in this climate, the diminution in strength being practically proportional to the increase in the percentage of moisture until the strength becomes less than half that of well-seasoned wood when the moisture con- tents amount to 25 per cent. of the dry weight. From this point on the diminution in strength will further increase in moisture is much less marked. With 10 per cent. of moisture the average crushing strength is 4,600 lbs. per sq. inch, at 25 per cent. it has fallen to 2,250, and at 50 per cent. of moisture it.is 1,940 Ibs. per sq. inch. Similar sets of tests were made upon blocks of Pinus maritima, Pinus canariensis, and oregon, with results that are shown upon the curves of fig. 1. The curve for Pinus maritima is very similar to that of Pinus insignis. At 10 per cent. of moisture it indicates a strength of 5,600 lbs. per sq. inch, and at 25 per cent. a strength of 2,750, a little less than half, while with a further increase of moisture up to 70 per cent- the strength is reduced only to 2,450 lbs. Wood when placed in water not only increases in weight by absorption but expands in volume. This is a feature that causes much practical difficulty to engineers when using wood blocks for street paving, but the author is not aware of any attempts having been made to measure the force which the wood can exert in this way when prevented from expanding. With this object in view a rectangular block of Pinus insignus, 3?an. x 3 in. and 4 in. high was placed in a flat dish on the compression table of the Riehlé testing machine. The grain _ was horizontal and the rings as shown in fig. 2. A tightening load of 600 pounds was put upon it, and the block was thus ~ held between two cast iron plates, top and bottom, which could not move, but the upward force on the top plate could be measured at any time by balancing the lever of the machine. Water was then placed in the dish, nearly, but not quite up to the top of the block. This was done at 10 a.m. and gradually throughout the day, as the block absorbed more water, it exerted a greater and greater upward force on the top block. By noon this force was 1,100 lbs., and at 5 p.m. it was 1,520 lbs. It was left all night and next morning it had dropped to 1,360 lbs., and continued to drop slightly through- out the day. Next morning it was down to 1,280 lbs. On removal from the machine it was found that the block ex- hibited a typical compression failure, as though it had actually 410 burst itself in the effort to expand. The character of the failure is shown in the second figure (fig. 2). Another similar block of insignis, 22 in. x 32 in. in area, treated in the same way, gave a maximum load of 1,460 lbs. This also failed in compression. The average maximum pressure exerted by the two blocks was 139 lbs. per sq. in. A _ block of Pinus canariensis was dealt with in the same way, and for three days it was left in the testing machine, and gave a pressure gradu- ally increasing up to 128 lbs. to the sq. in., when it had to be removed to make way for other tests. This block showed no sign of failure. | When the timber was first received small cylinders about 3 in. in diameter and 1 in. long were accurately turned out ~ of the green wood from blocks whose moisture contents had just been determined. These were then weighed and accurately | Z /, Fig. 2. measured along marked diameters in directions parallel and perpendicular to the rings. The average measurements in August, 1917, at the end of March, 1918, and in October, 1919, are shown in Table I. It will be seen that. by the end of March, 1918, these small pieces had lost all the moisture they were free to lose and at that time of the year showed a percentage of only 7 to 9 per cent. The contraction in the direction parallel to the rings was in all cases greater than that in the perpendicular direction, and was most for Pinus maritima and least for insignis. For Pinus maritima it amounted to 4°8 per cent., which is less than half the contrac- tion that might be expected from a Eucalypt with the same initial quality of moisture: It will be noticed that when meas- ured again in October, this year, the blocks all showed an 411 LL 40-6 E1-2 60-4 L0-€ GE-€ &L-& 88-P ssury 03 | ‘sdury 09 || "81/¢/9g uo Os8Co100(| “4U90 Jog L OOT L OvI 8 gg £6 08 "S1/€/9Z)—“LI/L/€1 ‘QINJSIOP “4U90 10g Lb6-G LE6.G 066-4 GS6-G SPE6-G 966.2 GLF6.G LE6-2 100-€ 146-4 CIE6-% [966-6 “6I/OI/L = “8T/8/9G “LIL /E1 ‘SSUIY] 04 T s1ojoulvigG oseI0AYy €16-G L06-G €06-% TL8-G 61 /01/L “SSULY 09 || SINJOUIVIG, OSVIOAW 68-3 L86-6 068-2 466-2 068-2 00-€ 9F8-% 66-2 8i/8/9G —“LI/L/€1 (vareqvtdl AA ) siubisur snutq (aang 4yunoj,) “* srubisua snuig “SESWaLUwUDnD SNULT "" pUljImuU snurq “‘OqUILT, ‘SSULL 944 09 Je[noIpuedied puv jojjered suorjoe11p ut ‘sulAap UO poom jo saopul[Ao [Tes Jo eseyulsyS T ATAVL 412 expansion due to the absorption of moisture from the atmo- sphere during damp weather. In order to further investigate the relation between the expansion of the wood and its moisture contents two small cylinders about 3 im. in diameter and 1 in. long were cut from beams of each species. These were measured along marked diameters, parallel and perpendicular to the rings, and weighed. They were then kept immersed in water for two Z INICIR ISIE UKE JENGA PERCENTAGE % MOISTURE ON DRY WOOD. O 20 40 60 80 100°" "29 140 Fig. 3. Showing contraction of wood on drying after immersion in water. P.M. refers to Pinus maritima. P.Il. refers to Pinus insignis. P.C. refers to Pinus canariensis. The suffix 1 indicates the curves showing contraction parallel to the rings. The suffix 2 indicates the curves showing contraction perpendicular to the rings. days, after which they were removed and again weighed and measured. It was found that the moisture contents of the imsignis blocks now amounted to over 150 per cent. of the dry weight of the wood. The maritima blocks did not absorb 160 413 much more than half as much, their moisture contents being now 78 per cent. The canariensits blocks carried only 55 per cent. The blocks were now allowed to dry gradually over a period of about eight weeks and were weighed and measured at intervals. Finally, when they had dried down to less than their original weights when freshly cut out of the beams, they were put in a drying oven and kept at a temperature of a little over 100° C. for seven hours. They were then taken out one by one and rapidly weighed and measured. From this series of measurements the curves shown 1n fig. 3 have been plotted, showing the relation between the moisture contents, as expressed in percentage of the dry weights, and the diameters expressed as percentages of the diameter of the dry block. As soon as the blocks were taken out of the water they at once started to dry out and decrease in weight, but, curi- ously enough, continued to still further expand for a day or two, although they were losing moisture. After that the wnsignis blocks, which had absorbed the greatest quantity of water, remained practically of the same diameter until the moisture contents were reduced to about 50 per cent., as measured on the dry wood, when contraction began to ‘take place. Contraction then took place at an accelerating rate as the wood further dried, and in all cases the greatest amount of contraction for 1 per cent. loss of moisture took place as the wood finally dried down to the 10 or 12 per cent. of moisture that is permanently contained in seasoned timber. This ex- plains why the doors of our houses sometimes stick in the winter. The alteration of the moisture contents of seasoned wood with the humidity of the air only ranges over 2 or 3 per cent., but it occurs just at the point where the rate of contraction or expansion is greatest. The somewhat remarkable behaviour of the wood under the conditions of the tests seems to be capable of explanation when the fact is taken into consideration that the water in the wood exists partly as free water within the cells and partly as absorbed water in the cell walls. The contraction or expansion of the wood is due to a change in the moisture contents of the cell walls. An alteration of the amount of free water within the cells will of itself produce no effect on the dimensions of the block. The complete saturation of the cell walls evidently takes time and when the instgnis blocks were first removed from the water, although the cells were full the walls had not yet absorbed quite as much as they were capable of absorbing. The process of saturation of the walls would then still go on, as long as there was free water within the cells, and the blocks in consequence still expanded. After Oo 6) o~ NJ INCREASE DIAMETER, W 4 PERCENTAGE No O 414 that the water gradually dried out from within the cells, but, so long as there was any free water at all within the cells, the walls remained saturated and no change consequently took place in the dimensions of the block. The stage shown by the curves of fig. 3 where the insignis blocks show no contraction at all as they dry out from about 140 to about 50 per cent. of moisture represents the phase therefore when the free water is drying out from within the cells, but the cell walls are still S A G PERCENTAGE OF MOISTURE ON DRY WOOD. 20. 40 60 80. 100. 1205 (40> [ae Fig. 4. Showing expansion with moisture of Pinus maritima. A, sapwood parallel to-rings. B, sapwood perpendicular to rings. C, heartwood. saturated. Beyond that, when the cells have lost all their free water, moisture is then given out by the cell walls and contraction begins to take place, this contraction being much more marked in the direction parallel to the rings than in the radial direction. : The blocks from which the curves of fig. 3 were drawn were cut from near the centre of the tree and contained a 415 ST 69 FI LI 08 Il Il él Il ae ‘4810 (6) Sarl (1) PEIS (g) 08zE (¢) LOFSY = SLOT (g) £8ES (3) PEIZ (OT) SI9T (T) 6201 (g) Z8EI (1) % SI (01) PPZI (1) ZOPT (g) 09FZ (9) OOLT (1) PPL (F) R681 (Z) F9ZI (OT) 6921 (1) 621 (g) S16 (1) h& OrI /9 ISIOW | T9StAA49 "HIVIN, 949 ssoIDy ‘uoIssoud u0K “ULBIQ) OO} STOLY qoopeq |,09peq (PF) (F) GI = LO¥| 18% (Z) (T) (1) ZI | SShIl | SISI | ZEs (e1)| (2) (g) at GI8| ¢8L| Z09 (9) (1) (1) II 106| OF8| L99 (6) (1) (3) Il 8G; O&L| OLS (¢z) | (6) (g) Il 906| 889| 699 (9) (3) (3) Il GZ6| 006 | ¢-L89 (L) ($) (2) at C9L| 9FS| 1zF (O1)| (%) | (@) iat 6£8| 889 | ¢.P8! fe 3 3 3 - a) uly ‘S$. uly i) uly STON 1 $F 1 aE “‘sulresys OF1 ‘qSIOJ( (§T) SEP ‘LZ8‘T (Z) 00S ‘8FS‘T (OT) 066‘SZ6‘I (23) LLO“66E‘T (1) 000‘98S (1) 000‘0z8 (01) OFF ILI (31) $96 ‘€9S‘T (F§)- T1Z‘9L8‘T 000‘ZEL (01) 029‘S1F‘1 (ZT) L9B‘EFP‘T (1) 000'8¢9 (11) Z8S ‘£06'T a ($1) 28 ‘L, PSL 1 1|941989y 4Se1o Jeo] epung (ZZ) 082‘¢ (T) OOL ‘t (1) ELP'F (01) #O6'E (31) GoE9 (¢g) 9¢8°9 OSh F (OT) 610‘8 (31) O18‘9 (1) FGF (ZI) PIS 9 f ‘s{so,,, Weed VL VL—_—_—_—— eS eee ES "8]89} JO Joquinu 943 MoYs sosoyjuored UI suoquInU 9tJ, I ATAVL WBVIOAY (pjo savoX ¢¢) {So10,7 Jing yunop (pjo saa og) 4So10 i BLCGPIIT AA Sool], JO osvI0AY (savek eg ‘asy) qsolO Jang JUNOT (savok og ‘asy) ASOIO BIVGCIIT AA (savok QZ ‘osy) qsolOy BIeqelITM WIO1} 991], “* soubisua snurg euIg u0se1¢9 SISUIINOUD SNULT DULIVMOUL SHUT “IOQUITT, 416 little heartwood. It became evident that there was a marked difference in the behaviour of the heartwood and sapwood with regard to their powers of absorption, and so tests were made in which blocks were cut out of heartwood and sapwood separately. The result of such tests on Pinus maritima are shown in fig. 4. In this case the sapwood blocks absorbed water up to 170 per cent., but under the same conditions the heartwood blocks only absorbed 45 per cent., and the curves indicate that the heartwood cells could hold very little free water. The combined average results of all the strength tests is given in Table II. The outstanding feature of these is the very great superiority, so far as strength is concerned, of Pius canariensis. In every respect this timber exhibited quite remarkable strength for a soft wood, and although most of the tests upon it were made while it contained 12 per cent. of moisture, as against 11 per cent. for Pinus insignis and Pinus maritima, it was far stronger in every respect. Both as a beam and in direct compression along the grain its strength is comparable with that of our hardwoods. Thus the average of all the beam tests indicates that a beam 12 in. x “12 in. and 12 ft. long will carry a central load of about 42 tons, if the wood is canariensis, before it breaks down. If the wood is insignis it will carry 24 tons, if maritima 19 tons, and beams of the same size of oregon, of the quality of those tested, would carry 26 tons. The superiority of the canariensis both in resistance to shear and in compression is equally well marked. A short column of canariensis, 12 in. sq., will carry a load of 533 tons before it actually fails. While a column of the same size of insignis will carry only 297 tons, and a column of marv- tima 336 tons. The value of Pinus canariensis for all struc- tural purposes is so very great, and so much greater than that of the other pines, that it.is eminently desirable in the State interests that it should be extensively planted in our forests. The following notes on Pinus canariensis have been kindly suppled to me by Mr. H. H. Corbin, B.Sc., Lecturer on Forestry at the Adelaide University: —‘“This pine has been planted in a very diffuse way since the days of the earliest settlement in Australia. The tree, notwithstanding this, has not been appreciated at its correct value by our foresters. The area of Canary pine woods in the whole of Australia is certainly not more than a hundred or two acres. In South Africa it is very extensively planted. It has an erect habit even when growing in the open. It will grow in 20 years about 50 ft., at 35 years it is, under favourable conditions, a tree about 24 ft. in diameter and 90 ft. high. It will grow in any soil which is not too wet or sandy. It flourishes in the 417 18-20 in. rainfall areas, but does best in the 20-25 in. rainfall areas on the heavier soils. It develops a tap root as a little one-year-old nursery tree, and if transplanted ‘open root’ needs shelter from hot winds till established. In pots the tap root invariably coils round in the bottom of the pot and it is very unsatisfactory to plant; many die when treated in this way. The tree is certainly well adapted to planting in proper woods in the drier areas of this State. At Bundaleer it is seen withstanding the long dry summer on rough quart- zite rock. Itis free from disease. It yields an extraordinary amount of resin and turpentine. The younger trees up to 40 years old if felled coppice, but this is of little economic value. The tree has all the virtues of the insignis, but is 15 per cent. slower in its growth. When the drought is killing insgnis trees the Canary Island pines are thriving. Further, pests do not attack it and fire will not wipe it out, as it sprouts again and continues its growth.”’ Pinus insignis has been commonly regarded as a rather poor timber, but the results show that its strength compares quite well with that of oregon. It is not quite so good as a beam, though the difference is not very great, but it has a greater resistance to splitting and shearing along the grain, and it is less easily compressed across the grain. It is quite a useful timber for structural purposes. Pinus maritima is not so good as Pinus insignis as a beam, nor has it so great a resistance to shearing, but its strength in compression is greater than that of ensigns. A large amount of work is involved in carrying out such a series of tests, both in the actual experiments and in the numerical reduction. For very considerable help in all this I wish to acknowledge my indebtedness to Mr. H. H. Cartledge, who was till recently my assistant, and also to Messrs. Altmann, Francis, James, and Robin, students in the Engineering School at the University. 418 MISCELLANEA. Notes on Occurrences during Summer Recess, 1918-19. Fellow Members—I was very pleased when the printers forwarded to me, just before the end of 1918, vol. xli1. of the Transactions and Proceedings of the Royal Society of South Australia (Incorporated). It is not so large a volume as we have been compiling during the past four or five years. That we knew would be the case because the Adelaide Museum, the Curators of the different departments of which have sup- pled us with abundant material in bygone years, now publishes its own Records. This is an event which was bound to arise, which is quite in order, and which we welcome. It is satisfactory to find that, notwithstanding this, our volume appears with 340 pages of letterpress and 32 plates, and its contents embrace quite an interesting variety of subjects and are very well illustrated. If we can maintain a yearly output | of this quantity and quality—and it should improve as the years go by—we shall justify our existence, retain our present exchange with other societies, and be contributing our quota to the accumulating scientific knowledge of the world. May I be allowed now to offer a sheaf of congratulations ? First, we have to congratulate Proressor Howcu#In on his very valuable work, “The Geology of South Australia,” published towards the end of last year. It supplies what has been a recognized want in Australia, a text book for Aus- tralian students providing, where possible, local examples and illustrations. Huis own extensive discoveries in the geology and palaeontology of our State first published in our Transactions, and of world-wide notoriety, have furnished no little part of the material for his text book. We congratulate him further on one result of his effort, namely, the recognition of its merit by the Council of the University of Adelaide, which has conferred on him, in addition to his previous title of Lecturer on Geology and Palaeontology, that of Honorary Professor. We shall have the pleasure for the future of addressing him as Professor Howchin. We have also to congratulate Dr. PULLEINE upon ths issue, 1n collaboration with Mr. Rainbow, of their fine Mono- graph, “The Australian Trapdoor Spiders.’”’ As we well know, he has been working at this subject for several years, and their paper in the Records of the Australian Museum, covering more than 80 quarto pages and illustrated by 13 plates of beautifully executed photographs, is a valuable 419 addition to the literature of the group, and a result in which they may feel a proper pride and satisfaction. We are pleased to know we may expect the publication by these authors in the same style of excellence of further contributions to the natural history of other groups of Australian Spiders. We are also glad to offer our felicitations to Mr. W. B.. Poo.z, who has completed 50 years of service with the Savings Bank of South Australia, in which he rose to the highest office, and who has been now released to pass his remaining days at leisure. It has been our good fortune for nine or ten years to have had him as our Honorary Treasurer after being, as we may say, specially trained for us as an expert in finance. We trust he will enjoy for many years this responsible, but happily not very onerous post, and so free the Society from all anxiety about its accounts, and we wish him full enjoyment not only of this useful service, but of his freedom from the ties and worries of the large State business concern, the present pro- portions of which must in measure be credited to him. We will also take this opportunity of referring with pleasure to the safe voyage of Mr. Epwin Asupy across some- what perilous seas to and from America, and to the title which has been conferred upon him of C.F.A.O.U. (Corres- ponding Fellow of the American Ornithological Union) in recognition of the work he has done in connection with Australian birds. But we have also the sad duty of referring to the decease of two of our Fellows. Miss Eiten MILNE Bunpey, the daughter of Sir W. H. Bundey, formerly one of our Judges, was elected a Fellow of our Society in 1906. She had the unique distinction of being our only lady Fellow. Her tastes were literary and musical rather than scientific, and as Lyell Dunne she occasionally contributed verses to the daily Press, and under the stress of an intense patriotism strove to assist various organizations in the same way. She was a Bachelor of Music of our University since 1900. Through ill-health she has been debarred from attendance at our meetings, but has always taken a keen interest in the work of the Society, and appre- ciated its records in our Transactions. Her interest is practically shown by a gift to our Library of sixteen volumes of Lloyd’s Natural History. Jos. C. Verco, President. Evening Meeting, April 10, 1919. (1) An obituary notice of the late Sir Edward C. Stirling will be found on page 1 of this volume.—Epb. 02 420 The Amethystine Colouration produced in Glass by Ultra-violet and X-Ray Radiation. The amethystine colouration of bottles from the Far North of South Australia, where they have been exposed to sunlight, has upon several occasions been brought to the notice of the Society. In these cases, the colouration was presumably caused by solar ultra-violet radiation. The tabled exhibit showed a similar colouration produced in glass owing to bombardment by X-rays produced by the “Coolidge” Electron type of X-ray tube. , In the walls of the ‘“‘Coolidge” tube itself, the colouration is very beautifully shown, unless masked by a deposit of tungsten, caused by volatilization at the focal spot, due to excessive energy imputs. In the old gas tubes, it was similarly masked, where present, owing to the deposit of tiny particles of platinum torn from the target by the bombardment of cathode rays. Reference was made to various work relative to the subject, including that of Dr. M. Luckiesh, of the Nela Research Laboratory, who possessed samples of glass showing a bluish tinge in the case of potash and a yellowish-green tint in the case of sodium glass, produced by exposure to solar radiation. A sample of lead glass exhibited a muddy yellow colour after exposure to X-rays. The purplish colour is assumed to be due to a change in the chemical or physical state of the manganese contained in the glass. The colouration is quite unstable, and disappears upon the application of heat. There appears to be no agree- ment as to whether the manganese is present as in solution, or in the colloidal form. The effect when brought about by solar radiation is supposedly due entirely to the ultra-violet rays. In manganese glass used in connection with electric lighting, the colour has only been observed where the electric source of light is very rich in ultra-violet rays, such as in a powerful arc. The big variation in wave lengths of the ultra-violet and the X-rays, which are roughly of the order of 105 cms, and 108 cms., respectively, is an interesting consideration, in view of the similarity of effects on the manganese constituents of the glass. Why the effect apparently ceases so abruptly when the wave lengths pass from the ultra-violet to the visible radiation is a point also worthy of investigation. A. R. RIDDLE. Evening Meeting, August 14, 1919. 421 MBolLRACT (OF “EROCEE DINGS OF THE Royal Society of South Australia (Incorporated) FoR 1918-19. ORDINARY MereETING, NoveMBeR 14, 1918. fies resipant (J. °C. “Vercows MAD PR? ©.S35) | im the chair. -Nomrnation.—The Rev. D. T. Whalley as a Fellow. THE PRESIDENT made the following appreciative remarks about the late Dr. W. L. Cleland.:— “Tt is only fitting that we should make more than a passing reference to the death during the past month of Dr. W. L. Cleland, who for thirty-seven years was a Fellow of our Society. He was elected a member in 1879, just at the time the Adelaide Philosophical Association was con- verted into the Royal Society of South Australia. In 1882 he accepted the very onerous position of Hon. Secretary, which he retained for fifteen years. When we recall that during six of those years he was also Hon. Secretary to the South Australian Branch of the British Medical Association and also to the Medical Benevolent Association of South Australia, one begins to realize what a mass of work he carried out in his quiet, unostentatious way. He only received his deserts when on transferring the Secretariat of the Royal Society to Mr. G. G. Mayo he was granted the highest honour we could confer and was elected President, in which office he served for two years. He fulfilled it with the same assiduity and reliability as in his more humble post, for the Minutes show that on only two occasions during the Presidency was he absent from his official chair. When he retired from this he was for two years in succession chosen Vice-President, and after that a member of the Council, a sure sign of his reliability and worth. “In 1887 he read a short paper describing the geological features of the country about the head of Lake Gilles, where were some polished rock surfaces. _ “Tn 1899 his Presidential address dealt with the aboriginals of Australia, while that of 1900 was in extension 422 of the same subject, on ‘Factors producing Uniformity of | Type amongst Australian Aboriginals,’ illustrated by photo- graphs of the natives from various districts in our continent. ‘““‘When we review his association with our Society we cannot but pay very cordial and eulogistic tribute to his memory as one of our most helpful and efficient Fellows.”’ ExHIBIts.— Mr. Water Howcain exhibited a large cylinder of flint obtained by Mrs. Pascoe of Port MacDonnell from the. flint-pebbles deposit, situated on the beach about five miles to the westward of Port MacDonnell. The speci- men measures 26 inches in height and 55 inches in circum- ference. It has a certain superficial resemblance to a fossil tree, but as it was formed by segregation in a marine bed and consists of small marine organisms that have become silicified by infiltration, the idea of a fossil tree cannot be entertained. The flint that occurs in the MacDonnell Bay is interbedded with the lower marine Tertiary beds, and is often of abnormal size and shape, some further examples of which were exhibited by Mr. Howchin at the same time. Mr. Epear R. Waite exhibited a snake obtained by Messrs. Edgar Savage and F. Angel, at Moolooloo, on the Great Northern railway line. It proved to be an example of Demsonia suta, Peters, and is, perhaps, only the third specimen recorded under this name, the type being in Berlin, and a second example in the British Museum. All are from South Australia. He also drew attention to the general similarity of D. frontalis, Ogilby, and D. forrestz, Boulenger, to the snake exhibited. He also showed photographs of the large blue whale, 87 ft. 10 in. long, stranded at Corvisart Bay, and later towed to Streaky Bay, where the skeleton was obtained for transmission to the South Australian Museum. Samples of the raw oil were likewise exhibited. Capt. S. A. WuitE exhibited eggs of the wedge-tailed eagle (Uroaetus audax), showing great variations in markings and colour- ation; also eggs of the letter-winged kite (Hlanus seriptus), taken on the Diamantina River, Western Queensland, by Mr. S. W. Jackson, for Mr. H. L. White, of Scone, New South Wales. In Gould’s Handbook of Australian Birds, vol. 1., p. 55, the author stated:—‘‘Capt. Sturt obtained it at the Depot, and Mr. White, of the Reedbeds, South Australia [Capt. White’s father], informs me that he found this species in great numbers on Cooper Creek, between latitudes 27° and 28° in 1863. They were always in companies of ten to twenty or thirty.”’ Mr. A. M. Lea exhibited some gall insects of the genus Brachyscelis; the female insect is wing- less and is enclosed within a gall with three long horns; the male insect on maturity is winged, but in its earlier stages 423 is enclosed within a much smaller gall than that of the female. He also exhibited some Canadian wonder beans that had been destroyed by a root-eating mite (Rhizoglyphus echinopus). Beans and peas are often prevented from growing by these mites, which occur in the soil in countless thousands. Mr. S. Drxon stated that the grass shown by him on September 12 proved to be an importation from South Africa, Hhrharta villosa, var. maxima. Mr. W. J. Kimper showed several fossils and fossil casts from Port Willunga. Mr. F. R. Zietz, on behalf of the South Australian Museum, exhibited a specimen of the Wilson or yellow-webbed storm petrel (Oceanites oceanicus exasperatus), picked up dead on the beach at Port Elliot. Although this bird is said to be numerous out at sea, it is rarely seen close inshore. Mr. A. R. Ripprte showed electrical apparatus recently imported for the Keswick Military Hospital for enabling radiographs to be taken with very short exposures, thus eliminating any indistinctness from motion due to the action of the heart or lungs. get cates Cuase.—Capt. 8. A. WHITE reported that a strong effort had been made to secure the passage of a Bill for the reservation of Flinders Chase, and that although it could not be carried through this session, he had no doubt of its becoming law in the next. PaprEer.—‘‘Vitality of Seeds,” by ALF. G. Epquist. OrpinaRyY MeetTinc, Aprit 10, 1919. Pee RisipENT (J. ) Co Vienco, MDs Wik: CS) im the chair. Nominations.—Edward Charles Grigson and O. A. _ Glastonbury as Fellows. EvLection.—Rev. D. T. Whalley as Fellow. THe Apvisory Councrzi of Science and Industry wrote that their publication, ‘‘The Australian Environment,’ by Dr. Griffith Taylor, could be purchased for 5s., or the set of contour and rainfall maps of Australia separately for ls. 6d. THE PRESIDENT referred to the death of Sir Edward C. Stirling and other events which had occurred during the recess. (Vide page 1 and MISCELLANEA.) FLINDERS Ciase.—Capt. S. A. WHITE reported as follows :—‘‘Years ago the Fauna and Flora Protection Com- mittee of our Field Naturalists’ Section wisely decided that a reserve was necessary to enable the perpetuation of the country’s fast diminishing fauna and flora, especially the former, and steps were taken to have set aside for the pur- pose a portion of Kangaroo Island. The late Hon. T. Price, 424 when Premier, approved of the proposal, and the western end of the island was reserved, but it was never legally constituted. In due course, however, a Bill was prepared with that end in view, but, for one reason or another, it was not developed, although Government after Government promised to carry it through. Last year a committee of three—Messrs. S. Dixon and J. M. Black and myself—was appointed by the Royal Society, and an application was made for the reservation of 1,000 square miles of country, toward the preparation of which two prominent citizens had promised to contribute £4,000. Death, unhappily, removed those two public-spirited gentlemen before their offer could be accepted, but the Hon. John Lewis, M.L.C., said he would fence the area. Owing mainly, it is understood, to the great extent of the area specified, strong opposition was offered to the scheme by some of the residents on the island, and eventually a special meeting of the District Council was held at Kingscote, and was attended by Mr. Laffer, M.P., one of the Parliamentary members for the district, and myself. The subject was thor- oughly discussed in all its aspects, and finally the Council agreed not to offer any further opposition, a fact which was subsequently conveyed to the Premier (Hon. A. H. Peake), together with an intimation favouring the carrying out of the project. All that remains to make the long-desired Flinders Chase a reality is for the Bill already prepared to be brought up to date and to receive the sanction of Parlia- ment, which, no doubt, will provide for the appointment of a Board of Governors to control the property. The area involved is approximately 200 square miles, west of a line from Cape Forbin on the north, to the Rocky River, round the Rocky River freehold, and thence south-west to the sea.”’ ExHisits.—Prof. Ossorn exhibited specimens of dis- | eased cabbages from a market garden at Piccadilly affected by ‘“‘black leg.’’ This disease is caused by a fungus, Phoma Lingam (Tode), Desmaz. The symptoms commonly observed are a wilt of the tops of certain plants representing from a few to 50 per cent. or more of the crop. The wilted plants are found to have their tap-roots destroyed and somewhat blackened. The fructifications of the fungus are observed as minute black spots around the diseased portions. The fungus also attacks the leaves and stems, flower stalks, and fruit pods. It has recently been shown by Henderson, working at Wis- consin, U.S.A. (Phytopathology, viil., pp. 379-431, 1918), that seed in the pod below such diseased areas is also in- fected, and will produce infected seedlings. Ample evidence of seed-bed infection was found at Piccadilly. An account of preventive measures was given. He also exhibited shells of 425 the common cockle (Chiones scalarina) on which Cladophora, sp., was growing. The shells were collected near the mouth of the American River, Kangaroo Island, from a large area of clean tide-scoured sand. The alga was only found on living shells or those of recently-dead fish, and only growing healthily in the former case. Live cockles are the only objects to which the Cladophora can fix itself in this area. The alga was always fixed at the posterior end near to the dorsal hinge. This is the portion of the shell nearest the surface of the sand, but it is also near the exhalent syphon. The suggestion was offered that the alga might benefit by such proximity to the current of water leaving the animal, which would be richer in carbon-dioxide from its passage over the gills of the animal and in nitrogenous material voided into the cloacal cavity. Mr. Epwin Asusy showed some Jonathan apples, which were clean when gathered, but had after a time become spotted with ‘‘bitter pit’’; also the fol- lowing birds:—Phaps chalcoptera, Lath. (Bronzewing Pigeon); Cosmopelia elegans neglecta, Mat. (Brush Bronze- wing), from Karoonda; Hypotaenidia philippensis australis, Pel. (Hastern Buff-banded Rail); Porzanoidea plumbea -immaculata, Swain. (Hastern Spotless Crake); Porzana fluminea whiter, Mat. (Southern Spotted Crake), from near Paradise, 19/12/18, where the two preceding species and Zaporma pusilla palustris, Gld. (Kastern Little Crake), have this season been very numerous, also from a waterhole in the mallee, near Karoonda; Myzantha melanotis, Wilson (Black-eared Minah); Gliciphila albifrons wncerta, Mat. (Eastern White-fronted Honey-eater) ; C. melanops chandleri, Mat. (Tawny-crowned Honey-eater)—the latter for the last few weeks has been singing or whistling freely at Blackwood. Mr. A. M. Lea exhibited a so-called hermaphrodite butterfly, Delias mysis, from North Queensland, its right side having the typical markings of a male, and its left side those of a female; normal specimens were shown for comparison. Mr. A. G. Epquist showed a beetle, the abdomen of which was merely an empty skin. It had refused to feed, and had soon died. Mr. F. R. Zietz exhibited a complete set of Aus- tralian Falcons, wiz., Malco longipennis (Little Falcon), /. hypoleucus (Grey Falcon), Rhynochodon peregrinus (Black- cheeked Falcon), and WNotofalco submger (Black Falcon). Mr. E. R. Waite showed a plate of baleen (whalebone) from the blue whale in the South Australian Museum; also the jaw of a small-toothed whale. Mr. W. J. Kimper showed a fish (Pegasus) from Port Lincoln, and various fossil shell: from Port Willunga and Troubridge for identification. Tur PRESIDENT showed a volume of newspaper cuttings (one of a 426 set of 120) containing one referring to the boyhood of John Gould, the ornithologist. Paper. — Prof. Ossporn laid on the table and briefly described a paper, ‘‘Australian Fungi: Notes and Descrip- tions, No. 2,’’ by J. B. CLtetanp, M.D., and Epwin CHEEL. OrpDINARY MEETING, May 8, 1919. THE, PRESIDENT (J. C: Verco, M.D., 2 RAGS the chair. Evections.—O. A. Glastonbury and Edward Charles Grigson as Fellows. THe PRESIDENT referred with congratulations to the distinction which had been conferred upon our Fellow, Dr. Chas. Fenner, F.G.S., namely, the Sachse Gold Medal, as a recognition of the merit of his paper, read last year before the Royal Society of Victoria, on the “‘Geology and Physio- graphy of the Werribee River Basin.’’ He also expressed regret at the decease of Mr. E. H. Wainwright, B.Sc. (Lond.), who had been a Fellow of the Society for thirty-six years. He was: in former days a teacher of chemistry at the Col- legiate School of St. Peters. Exuisits.—Prof. Howcuin exhibited a whale barnacle that was picked up by Professor Rennie at Encounter Bay. The barnacles are an abnormal group of the crustacea classed as the Cirripedia. The best-known families in this group are the Lepadidae, or ‘‘goose barnacles,”’ and the Balanidae, or ‘‘acorn barnacles.’’ The former are attached by a fleshy stalk, and obtained their popular name from the old-world notion that they turned into geese. The Balanidae, or ‘‘acorn barnacles,’’ have a cup-like shell, and are sessile, and the typical genus, Balanus, is the common form that covers ship bottoms and almost all objects in shallow water. The specimen shown belonged to the Balanidae, and could be referred to the genus Coronula, and was probably C. diadema. It differs from Balanus in that while the latter has a simple turreted shell, in the Coronula the inner wall of the shell is deeply infolded, by which the lower part of the shell is divided up into radial chambers. It has the habit of attach- ing itself to whales, and on that account is known as the whale barnacle. Mr. Epwin Asupy exhibited Humming Birds from America, and gave notice of motion for the July meeting as follows:—‘‘That this Society supports the endeavours of the Ornithological Association of South Aus- tralia to secure the introduction into Australia of the Hum- ming Birds of America.’ Capt. Wuite showed two speci- mens of Sparrow-Hawk (Accipiter cirrocephalus), showing the great change in colouration and colour pattern which 427 takes place in the mature bird; also two specimens of Aus- tralian Goshawk (Urosjza fascoata) showing the same change. Mr. A. M. Lea exhibited a drawer containing some insects whose sexes are strikingly different in general appearance; in some cases the males are provided with large wings, whilst the females are wingless, or almost so; in others the males are considerably smaller and differently coloured from their females, or are provided with processes on the head that are absent from the females. FLINDERS CHase.—Capt. 8S. A. WuiTE reported on the progress made towards the reservation of Flinders Chase. Papers.—‘‘Additions to the Flora of South Australia, No. 15,” by J. M. Buackx; and “A Review of the Genus Loricella (Order Polyplacophora) with Notes on Features previously unnoted and Description of a New Species,” by Epwin Asusy, F.L.S., M.B.0O.U. OrpiINARY MEETING, JuNE 12, 1919. THE PreEsIpENT (Sir Joseph Verco, M.D., F.R.C.S.) in the chair. roth). Hl. RENNIE, MiAeee DSels iF .C.S:; Vice- President, referred to the honour of knighthood recently con- ferred upon the President, and to the fact that he had been a Fellow of the Society for forty-one years and President con- tinuously for seventeen years, during which time he had rendered the Society valuable service, both personal and financial. He moved—‘‘That this Society offers to Dr. Verco its heartiest congratulations upon the receipt by him of the honour of knighthood.” Lieut.-Col. R. 8. Rogers, M.A., M.D., Vice-President, seconded the motion, which was carried by acclamation. Sir JosepH VeERco suitably responded. Prof. WauteR Howcain, F.G.S., laid on the table a progress report of the Australasian Association for the Advancement of Science. The biennial meetings, suspended during the war, would now be resumed, the next being held in January at Hobart. Nomination.—Miss Helen M. Mayo, M.B., B.Sc., was nominated as Fellow. THE PRESIDENT laid on the table correspondence referring to the suggested establishment in Australia of a National Research Council in affiliation with the International Research Council recently inaugurated. In this connection the Royal Society of New South Wales proposed a conference in Sydney in July. Resolved—‘‘That the Hon. Secretary reply that the Society saw objections in the way of fixing an early date for the Conference, owing to the dislocation of travelling facilities through the coal strike and the influenza 428 epidemic, especially as it would be too late in any case to send representatives from such Conference to the General Conference at Brussels. If, however, an early meeting is considered advisable, it would be well to fix a date when all or most of the Universities would be in recess. So soon as the exact date is fixed, the Council would appoint delegates.”’ Exuisits.—Dr. PULLEINE exhibited a new species of trap-door spider, genus dganippe, and nests of same, from the banks of the American River, Kangaroo Island, just above high water; also portions of the bird-catching plant Pisoma Brunoneana. Mr. A. M. Lea showed a drawer of British beetles, including many which occur in nests of ants. PapPeR.—‘‘Geological Memoranda’’ (first contribution), by Prof. WatteR Howcuin, F.G.S. OrpinaRY MEETING, Juty 11, 1919. Prof, E. H. Renniz,. M.A., DSe., 2 CS President), in the chair. EvLectTion.—Helen M. Mayo, M.B., B.Sc., was elected a Fellow. INTERNATIONAL RESEARCH CounciL.—The conference at Sydney having been fixed for August 20, the appointment of two delegates was left to the Council. Exuisits.—Prof. Coapman showed results of experiments upon the pressure exerted by wood blocks by expansion when soaked in water. Mr. A. M. Lea exhibited some olives thickly covered with black scale insects (Aspidiotus rossi) which cause a serious diminution in the yield of oil, besides injuring the tree by attacking the leaves and twigs; also a rust fungus, received from Mr. Henry Greenfield, of Bugle Ranges, from Purple Downs Station, near Port Augusta. This was afterwards identified by Mr. J. M. Black as Salsola _ kali (Family Chenopodiaceae). Mr. Epgar R. WAITE ex- hibited photograph of a native of Lihir Island which he had taken during the Museum Expedition last year; also the skull of a native from the island, presented to the Museum by Captain G. W. Mostyn. Both the photograph and the skull were shown to illustrate a practice of the natives of this island which lies off New Ireland in about 3° S. latitude. Shortly after a baby is born the bone of the forehead is either broken with a sharp stone or cut with an obsidian knife, the result being the production of permanent deep vertical grooves; the photograph of the living girl shows two, and the skull four such grooves. He likewise exhibited the skull of a native of New Britain obtained by the late Dr. A. C. Magarey. In this specimen the third molar, or wisdom tooth, instead of appearing in normal position, had erupted towards the angle 429 of the jaw. Another skull from the same source, showing remarkable sutural development, was also exhibited. Atten- tion was also directed to two artificially distorted skulls from Southern New Britain—a tight wrapping around an infant’s head induces an elongated skull. In one of the exhibits the supraorbital region had been included in the wrapping and the ridges had not developed in consequence; in the second head the eyebrows had not been included in the wrapping, and the supraorbital bones had therefore grown to more normal condition. Capt. S. A. Wuite showed ten specimens of Platycercus. 'Two were from the type locality of P. elegans. fleuriensis, Ashby, one being the typical dark red of the old birds, the other a light phase. Two from Myponga, a few miles north of the above locality, have been classed as P. elegans adelaidensis, one being in the green immature plumage. Two from the Adelaide plains are very bright birds. One from Mount Pleasant is also a very bright bird. One from South Para is much lighter. Two from Mount Remarkable are of a decided pale form, and have been looked upon by some ornithologists as being more closely allied to Platycercus flaveolus than to P. elegans adelaidensis; with this he did not agree, for to his mind this form partakes more of adelaidensis than flaveolus. He also showed a stone from slate outcrops at Mount Remarkable, ripple marked, showing that it had been deposited in shallow water. Mr. F. R. ZietTzZ showed a -pink-eared duck (Jalacorhyncus membra- naceus) from the Lower Murray. Mr. E. Asnusy showed a pyrites concretion from the Tapley Hill slate. Papers.—‘‘Notes on the Occurrence of Aboriginal Remains below Marine Deposits at the Reedbeds, Fulham, mear Adelaide, by S. A. Wuite, C.M.B.0.U.; “Supple- mentary Notes on the same, with Remarks on _ the Geological Section,” by Pror. WattrEeR Howcuin, F.G.S8.; “A New Species of Aganippe from Kangaroo Island, with Notes on the Distribution of the Genus in Aus- tralia,’ by R. H. Putierne, M.B.; ’’Notes on Australian Polyplacophora, including descriptions of two new genera, a new variety, and the description and proposed recognition of W. T. Bednall’s Stenochiton pilsbryanus,’’ by Epwin Asupy, F.L.S., M.B.O.U., etc.; and ‘“‘The Occurrence and Origin of certain Quartz-Tourmaline Nodules in the Granite of Cape Willoughby,” by C. E. Tituey, B.Sc. (communicated by Prof. Howchin). OrpinarRy Meretine, AuGcust 15, 1919. THE PRESIDENT (Sir Joseph Verco, M.D., F.R.C.S.) in the chair. 430 Letter received from the INTERNATIONAL RESEARCH CounciL, enclosing Agenda of the Conferenec to be held in Brussels on July 18, 1919; also letter from the Royal Society of New South Wales re Conference to be held in Sydney on 21st inst. Resolved—‘‘That our Hon. Fellows, Professor David and R. Etheridge, jun., be asked to represent this Society at the Sydney Conference, or, in case of their not being able to do so, then our Hon. Fellows Charles Hedley and Professor Wilson.’’ Papers.—“A Contribution to the Study of Habron- emiasis,” by Lionen B. Buui, D.V.Sc. A paper on “The Phaestos Disk: its Cypriote Origin,’ by ALan Rowe (com- municated through the President), was laid on the table, and its reading was postponed until the next meeting. OrDINARY MEETING, SEPTEMBER 12, 1919. THE PRESIDENT (Sir Joseph Verco, M.D., F.R.C.S.) in the chair. Nomrnations.—Prof. T. Braileford: Robertson and Alan Rowe were nominated as Fellows. Exuisits.—Prof. Wa.LtER Howcuin exhibited a tym- panic (ear) bone of a whale obtained from the Abattoirs bore, near Dry Creek, about 400 feet from the surface. The specimen probably belongs to the genus Balaena, or the Right Whales, as they are known by whalers, and most likely formed part of an immature individual of Balaena australis, one of the chief specific representatives of the Balaenidae in the Southern Hemisphere. The bed from which it was obtained is of Upper Pliocene Age. Remains of the Balaenidae are very common in beds of similar age in England and on the Continent of Europe. Fragments of another example were also obtained from the same bore. Capt. S. A. WHITE showed remains of oranges from Fulham, near Adelaide, from which the whole of the pulp and pith had been extracted by black rats, leaving only the rind. Mr. A. M. Lea ex- hibited a gigantic longicorn beetle (Batocera wallacei) from New Guinea, measuring 18 inches across the extended antennae. Mr. A. R. Rippie showed a glass-headed pin in which the glass had assumed an amethystine tint from exposure to X-rays. (Vide MISCELLANEA.) Paprers.—‘‘The Phaestos Disk: its Cypriote Origin,’’ by ALAN ROWE (communicated by the President); ‘‘Australian Coleoptera, Part I.,” by ALBert H. Eston, F.E.S.; “The Petrology of the Granitic Mass of Cape Willoughby, Kangaroo Island, Part I.,” by C. E. Tittry, B.Sc. (communicated by Prof. Walter Howchin); “Notes on some Miscellaneous Coleoptera, with Descriptions of New Species, Part V.,” by 431 ArtHuR M. Lea, F.E.S., and ‘‘Austrahan Fungi: Notes and Descriptions, No. 3,” by J. B. Crsnanp, M.D., and EDWIN CHEEL. ANNUAL MEETING, OcToBER 9, 1919. THe PRESIDENT (Sir Joseph Verco, M.D., F.R.C.S.) in the chair. Evection.—Professor T. Brailsford Robertson and Alan Rowe were elected Fellows. The Annual Report and Balance-sheet were read and adopted. ELEcTION oF Orricers.—The following were elected for the year 1919-20:—President, Sir Joseph Verco, M.D., F.R.C.S.; Vice-Presidents, Major R. H. Pulleine, M.B., and Edwin Ashby, F.L.S., M.B.O.U.; Hon. Treasurer, W. B. Poole; Members of Council, Professor E. H. Rennie, M.A., D.Sc., F.C.S., Lieut.-Colonel R. 8S. Rogers, M.A., M.D., Professor Walter Howchin, F.G.S., Professor R. W. Chap- man, M.A., B.C.E., F.R.A.S., and Captam 8S. A. White, C.M.B.0.U.; and the resignation of Samuel Dixon was accepted; Auditors, W. L. Ware and Howard Whitbread ; Representative Governor on Board of Public Library, etc., Professor Walter Howchin, F.G.S. Resolutions were passed recording the Society’s appre- ciation of the service renderd by Capt. 8. A. White in obtain- ing the passage through Parliament of the Fhnders Chase Bill, and also of the long service of Mr. Samuel Dixon as a member of the Council, with special reference to his exer- tions in connection with the reservation of Flinders Chase. Exuisirs.—Mr. E. Asusy exhibited three plants from Kangaroo Island—an Aster, an Eriostemon, and Prostanthera speciosa; also a fungus, commonly known as ‘‘native bread,’’ from Gippsland, which, after being brought to Balaklava had grown mushroom-shaped protuberances which would apparently become spore-bearing. Mr. A. M. Lea showed some night-feeding caterpillars (cut-worms) from Border- town, where on one farm similar caterpillars had completely destroyed 12 acres of wheat; other parts of South Australia had also been badly affected. He also showed some predaceous water bugs (Dyplonychus), the females of which lay their eggs on the backs of the males; they were obtained at Murray Bridge by Mr. H. Hale. Mr. W. H. Setway showed a granite erratic from Inman River, showing signs of glaciation; also a chalcedonous nodule from north of Marree. Mr. B. S. Roacu, on behalf of Mr. Lipson Hancock, showed and pre- sented to the Society three enlarged photographs of aborigines taken at Ooldea, on the Port Augusta-Kalgoorlie railway. 432 Papers.—‘‘Notes on Three Species of Melaleuca,’’ by Epwin CHEEL (communicated by J. M. Black); ‘‘A Revision of the Australian Salicornieae,” by J. M. Buacxr; ‘Description of Six New Species of Australian Polyplacophora,” by Epwin Asusy, F.L.S., M.B.O.U.; ‘‘Additions to the Flora of South Australia, No. 16,’’ by J. M. Buiacx; ‘‘The Physical Proper- ties of Some South Australian- -grown ‘Pines, ” by Prof Baws Cuapman, M.A., B.C.E., F.R.A.S.; and ‘‘The Cambrian Trilobites of Australia and Tasmania, ” by R. Evueripes, jun. ANNUAL REPORT, 1918-19. The Annual Volume of the Society’s Transactions will this year comprise papers dealing with a more varied selection of subjects than usual. While Australian Fungi are further dealt with by Dr. J. B. Cleland and Mr. Cheel, and various other branches of natural history and geology by Professors Howchin and Chapman, Dr. Pulleine, and Messrs. Ashby, Black, Cheel, Elston, Etheridge, Lea, and Tilley, Dr. Bull contributes an interesting paper on a veterinary pathological subject, Mr. Rowe a discussion of a matter of great archaeo- logical interest, and Captain White and Professor Howchin a description of the discovery near Adelaide of aboriginal remains of considerable antiquity. The interest of the evening meetings has been maintained by the varied exhibits shown by members. Steps are being taken to reorganize the regular exchange of our publications with those of other scientific bodies, many of which have fallen into arrear owing to the difficulty of transit during the war. In October, 1918, an International Conference of Scientific Associations was held in the rooms of the Royal Society of London, and attended by delegates from all the allied countries, with a view to establishing an International Research Council for the promotion of scientific research and the dissemination of the results throughout the affiliated organizations. A further meeting was held in Paris in Novy- ember, 1918, when the movement was definitely launched. This and other scientific societies of Australia have been invited to form an Australian branch, and a conference to consider the proposal was held in Sydney last August, and was attended by representatives from this Society. It is hoped that the result will be our affiliation with what will eventually 433 become a. world-wide organization for the extension and dissemination of science. The long sought dedication of the western portion of Kangaroo Island as a reserve for the conservation of our fauna and flora will soon be an accomplished fact, the Flinders Chase Bill having passed both houses of Parliament, and now only awaiting the vice-regal assent.) As this Society and the University of Adelaide are each to be represented upon the board of control, there is every reason to hope that, although © the area reserved is smaller than was desired, the best use will be made of the land for the fulfilment of the objects aimed at. The success of the thirteen years’ campaign by this Society is very largely due to the continued work of three of our Fellows: Mr. Ashby, Mr. Dixon, and Captain White, the last especially having been untiring in his efforts to ensure the passage of the Bill through Parliament. The President of the Society having been created a Knight Bachelor, the Fellows took the first opportunity to offer to Sir Joseph Verco their hearty congratulations upon the honour conferred upon him by His Majesty. The Endowment Fund has been augmented by a donation of £100 from Mrs. Ellen Peterswald. The claims of this fund are urged upon those who are able by their contributions to enlarge the usefulness of the Society. There have been several losses from our Fellowship by deaths, including that of Sir Edward C. Stirling, a notice of whose valuable work in the service of science will appear in our annual volume. The present membership of the Society is 10 Honorary Fellows, 5 Corresponding Members, 75 Fellows, and 1 Associate. Jos. C. Verco, President. WattTeR Rutt, Hon. Secretary. (1)The Bill has since received the endorsement of His Excel- lency the Governor and become law.—Ep. ‘6BI6L ‘§ 10404909 ‘eptefopy ‘s1opIpn Pp ‘uoH ec Sa — 001100 eq 0} punoy pue poyIpny ‘LaINSvDILT “Uo “ATOOg ‘Gg "M IL 9L GP8F IL 9L 368F GAG. GV GRE -= ata eee Gare mks “a PEE Meee (0) tt See Py eee “" viseerysny jo yurg Ct as BS) ie “ “W'g jo yueg sdurarg ; —6I6I ‘OE toqueqydeg soureg ‘* ar eee a i L 9¢ cae ey ese nies nn ung queur : ee O43. Bo me, ooUvINSUT -Mopuyy WO.ry Sonrefedeat qsorequy ** Oo. 8 Zz ne SUISTJIIAP YW le -0=9 Po _""" gSelequy yuvg ssutavg ‘‘ To 8k freuen eng ‘sosuqsog ‘Suulig Ilé eS Se ey SuOTPVOTTGN fo seg ‘* Ol ener sulyysry pue SuruveoO as 9 8LG as “* SerqzelI0g 1etq40 —solipung Aq wooy jo asn Joy sqydroeoey ‘‘ i oon 6 9 ¥0Z Veen OL jones pue Burateo % 3 sy BuIsEHeQ UREN 10 Oe ee ee Seal 6 9. FS2—"" suotdiiosqng uC 0 0 & be — WoTOe§ sae = —USWIUIOAON WOIJ syuBAy ‘ ‘ oO 00s => aa OGG ee eet re scan ce, ah ao 9 6 & U0TJIEG ,S}ST[RINZe al IL L412 2 ss = suryst[qnd 0 8l92 °° coe i faammek noe G8 0s 2 Boysaaent ~suonduosng © —suomovsuriy, Sq |9 IL 166 — ST6L ‘T 1040990 sourleg og, ‘PON ge S2P Seas 5 re Cie sO “6L-816L HOX AUNLIGNAdXWY GNV FZONDATY (CHLVUOdHOONT) VITVULSAVY HLOOS dO ALHIOOS TVAOU "6I6L “G 1090700 ‘opleTopy ¢ siopIpN YP ‘UoTT { CVAUGLIH\ GUVMOTT ‘HOVOY, “S “G “LOLNSVILT, “UO “A1I00gd ‘G “M | —00L109 Puno} pue peyIpny G ClO ta: @ &L OSs S - Cher qUNOdDW eNUsASY 04 petsioejsuesy ysoroquy ‘ c16L5-¢. = | BAS Pee (cee aoe ““*" qunoody yueg ssutarg ‘‘ 0) COE YPOYS Peqtsosuy %G YUoMUIEAO “WS OOTF “ 6 8 G6G ~" 4800 48 901g %E pozyep Hosueg JueuuTeAOy “VS 00s «|°8 ST O&T 8 OL 8SZ 4809 48 YO049 eeqiresay Gane) pepe es peoreTuy yueg ssutaeg ‘ : eG JUSMUIOACH “W'S CORE “ QE Ch OGk se "42098 Ome Ue Gay. ae 4809 48 YO0IG poqt4osuT . JUSWUUIOAOK) UO peAtedal qsor0jUT ‘ _ bes. JUsUUIEACH “WS OGPF “ | 9 LI 6L9°E——— ; OO sZ6G6ules - 4809 48 Yo04G ech eset( 0-0. 001 2 Bee =e "* WOTZVUOg eG JUOUUTEACH “W'S 000'CF Ag 9 LT 6LV'S a a es ee ee COE Oy ‘0g Toquteydag—6T6T "T 19997908161 ps F ps F ps F p's F (pg ° ‘SUT 61985 “Iwatavg) ‘GNOd LNAWMOGNG 436 DONATIONS TO THE LIBRARY FOR THE YEAR ENDED SEPTEMBER 39, 1919. TRANSACTIONS, JOURNALS, REPORTS, ETC., presented by the respective governments, societies, and editors. AUSTRALIA. _AUSTRALASIAN INSTITUTE OF MINING ENGINEERS. Proc., n.s., no. 31-34. Melb. 1918-19. Australia. Advisory Council of Science and Industry. Bull. 8-13. Melb. 1918-19. Mem., no. 1. Melb. 1918. Report, 1918. Melb. Institute of Science and Industry. Science and industry, v. 1, no. 1-4. Melb. 1919. Bureau of Census and Statistics. Yearbook, 1918. Bureau of Meterology. Monthly report, v.,4, no. 8-9. Orographical maps. Rainfall observations in S.A. and the N.T., 1917-18. Fisheries. Zoological results of fishing experiments carried out by F.1.S. ‘‘Endeavour,’’ v. 4, pt. 6; Iq Ue e Northern Territory. Bull., no. 18. 1918. Report of administrator, 1918. NEW SOUTH WALES. AUSTRALIAN Museum. Records, v. 12, no. 6-10. Report of the trustees to June, 1918. Syd. LINNEAN Society oF N.S.W. Proc., v. 43, pt. 3-4; 44, pt. 1. Marpen, J. H. Critical revision of the genus Eucalyptus, pt. 36-38. Syd. 1918-19. New SourH Wates. Botanic Gardens. Report, 1917. Board of Fisheries. Report, 1917. Syd. Dept. of Agriculture. Agricultural gazette of N.S.W., v. 29, pt. 10-12; 30,-pt. 1-9:5 Syd: 1918-0 Dept. of Mines. Annual report, 1918. Syd. Mineral resources, no. 25. Syd. 1919. Dept. of Public Health. Report, 1917. Syd. 1919. Geological Survey. Mem., ethnological ser., No. 3. Roya Society oF N.S.W. Proc., v.51. Syd. 1917. SypDNEY UNIVERSITY. Calendar, 1919. 437 QUEENSLAND. QUEENSLAND. Dept. of Agriculture. Botany bull., no. 21. Jour, v. 10-11; 2 pteia3 F91e-19- Geological Survey. Publications 262-264. 1918. QUEENSLAND Musreum. Mem., v. 6. Brisb. 1918. RoyaL Society OF QUEENSLAND. Proc., v. 30. 1918. SOUTH AUSTRALIA. Pustic Lisprary, Museum, anp ART GALLERY oF S.A. Report, 1917-18. Adel. 1918. Records of the S.A. Museum, v. 1, no. 2. 1919. Soutn Austratia. Dept. of Mines. Review of mining operations in §.A., no. 28-29. Adel. 1918. Government Geologist’s report, 1917. Woods and Forests Dept. Report, 1917-18. S.A. Scnoot or Mines anp InpustRizEs. Report, 1918. TASMANIA. Roya Society oF Tasmania. Proc., 1918. Hobart. 1919. Tasmania. Geological Survey. Bull. 29. Hobart. 1919. TASMANIA, UNIVERSITY OF. Calendar, 1918-19. VICTORIA. Om SOCIHIY OF VICTORIA. Proc), msi, v. 3d), pt. 1-2. Victoria. Dept. of .Agriculture. Jour., v. 16, pt. 10-12; iiempy: 1-9: Melb. 1918-19: Geological Survey. Bull. 39, 41. Melb. 1918. VicToRIAN NATURALIST, v. 35, no. 6-12; 36, no. 1-5. WESTERN AUSTRALIA. ROvAL SOCIETY OF W.A. Jour., v: 2-4. Perth. 1917-19. WESTERN AvsTRALIA. Geological Survey. Bull. 77, 82. ENGLAND. CaMBRIDGE PHILOSOPHICAL SociETY. Proc., v., 19, pt. 5. ramse va 22, no. 2-4 Canby Losey CaMBRIDGE University. Solar Physics Observatory. Report, 1916-19. SCONCHOLGGICAL Society. Journ., v.15, no. 10; 16, no. 1. 1918-19. ENTOMOLOGICAL Society. Trans., 1914-18. Lond. *ForBES, Hy. O. Handbook to the Primates, v. 1-2. Lond. GEOLOGICAL SociETY OF LONDON. Quarterly journal, v. 73, pt. 2-4; 74, pt. 1-2. 1918-19. *Miss Bundey bequest. 438 ImperiaL Bureau oF Entomotocy. Review of applied entomology, ser. A and B, v. 6; 7, pt. 1-7. 1918-19. Imperial Insritore. Bull. vy. 16. (uond,, 199i *Kirpy,-W. F. Handbook to the lepidoptera, v. 1-5. LinnEAN Society oF Lonpon. Trans.: botany, v. 9, pt. 1. imans.: zoology. v. Lip apt ovo mae *LYDEKKER, R. Handbook to the British mammalia. *———— Handbook to the carnivora, pt. 1. Lond. 1896. 5 The marsupialia and monotremata. 1896. MANCHESTER LITERARY AND PHILOSOPHICAL Society. Mem. and proc., v. 62. 1918-19. NaTIoNAL PuysicaL LaBporatTory. Collected researches, v. 13. Report, 1916-18. Lond. *OcriLvie-Grant, W. R. Handbook to the game-birds, View ed). OxFoRD UNIVERSITY PREss. Periodical, no. 97-100. 1918. Roya Botanic GaRpDENS, Kew. Bull., 1916. Hooker’s icones plantarum, index to v. 1-30. Royaut CortonraLt Institute. United Empire, v. 9, no. 7-9, Ze a0, Sao. le 7 a) Tomer Ome ao RoyvaL GEOGRAPHICAL Society. Journ., v. 52, no. 2-6; 53, 54, ne. 1-2: Diond. 1918-19: Royat Microscopicat Society. Jour., 1918, pt. 2-4; 1919, pels ond. Rovau Society. Proc., ser. A, no. 663-673; B, no. 628-634. Yearbook, 1919. Lond. *SHARPE, R. B. Handbook to British birds, v. 1-4. 1896. West Henpon House OsseERvaToRy, SUNDERLAND. Public- ation, No. 4. SCOTLAND. GEOLOGICAL SociETy oF Giascow. Trans., v. 15, pt. 3; 16, pt. 1-2. Roya Society oF EpinspureGH. Proc., v. 38, pt. 2-3; 39, | pu. Ll. . Trans., v.52,’ pt. 4-2.). 1916-19: ARGENTINE. ACADEMIA NACIONAL DE CIENCIAS EN CorpoBa. Boletin, t. 23, entr. 1-2. Buenos Aires. 1918. BELGIUM. SociETE RoyvALE DE BOTANIQUE DE BELGIQUE. Bull tives no. 1. Bruxelles. 1914. SocriTE RoyALE DES SCIENCES DE LigGE: Mém., t. 10. *Miss Bundey bequest. 439 BRAZIL. Braziu. Servico Geologico. Monog., v. 1. 1913. Instituto OswaLpo Cruz. Mem., t. 10, fasc. 1. 1918. Museu Pavuista. Revista, v. 10. S. Paulo. 1918. OBSERVATORIO NAcIONAL DO RIO DE JANEIRO. Annuario 35. CANADA. Canapa. Geological Survey. Mem. 82, 95, 96, 103. Museum bull., no. 27-28. Ottawa. 1918. Publications, 1718-21, 1727, 1734, 1738. Mines. Bull. 20, 22-24, 26, 28. : Publications, 452, 468, 474, 493, 504. Canapian INsTITUTE. Trans., v. 12, pt. 1. Ottawa. 1919. Nova Scotian INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE. Proc., v. 14, pt. 3. Orrawa NaTuRALIST, v. 32, no. 1, 3-6. 1918. Royau Society oF CanaDA. Proc., v. 12. 1918-19. CEYLON. Cotomso Museum. Spolia Zeylanica, pt. 40. 1918. CHINA. Royat Asiatic Society, NortH-CH1ina BrancH. Journ., v. 49. Shanghai. 1918. DENMARK. KoBENHAVN UNIVERSITETS ZOOLOGISKE MusrEum. Bull. 1-5. K. Danske VIDENSKABERNES SELSKAB. Biologiska med., I, et ed Cong. 1917-19. ae tye: med. 50, 1-6) dab Qe onoieng: Oversigt, 1917-19. Cpng. Skrifter: hist. og fil., ser. 7, t. 3, no. 3. 1918. Slermiter:, mat. og math)sen. 75 ty01,) mow 2 ser, 3, Geer Non 6 tend,) non L-dity oO monly FRANCE. Bonaparte, Prince. Notes ptéridologiques, 5, 7. 1918. Soctkitk ENTOMOLOGIQUE DE FRANcE. Annales, v. 86, pt. Ae 8. Bille tos. now W145 17-21 1909) me. t= 0k Ban: HOLLAND. Risx’s Herpartum. Med., no. 28-39. Leiden. 1916-18. 440 INDIA. Inpia. Board of Scientific Advice Report. 1917-18. Dept. of Agriculture. Mem., botanical ser., v. 9° no. 4-5; 10, no, LIP @ales P9ilsahoeae Chemical ser., v. 5, no. 2-4. 1918. Report, 1917-18. Cale. 1919. Geological Survey. Bibliography of Indian geology and physical geography, pt. 1-2. Cale. 1917-18. ——_— ———— Records, v. 49; 50, pt. 1. 1918. Pusa Agricultural Institute. Report, 1917-18. Zoological Survey. Report, 1916-17, Cale. Inp1an Museum, Mem., v. 5, no. 4-6; 6, no. 2-4; 7, no. 1. Records, v. 8, pt. 9-12; 12, pt. 4-8; 13-15; 16, pt. 1-4. Report, 1915-16. Cale. Mapras. Fisheries Bureau. Bull., no. 10. 1918. Royvat Asiatic Society, Bompay Brancu. Jour., v. 25, no, lL TEAL YY. Mapieuia, anno. 28, fasc. 7-8. Catania. 1918. SocieTA EntTomoioeica ItTauiana. Bull., anno. 49. SociETA ITALIANA DI ScIENZE Naturaui. Atti, v. 56, fase. 1-25 of. 58) -dasc-l i) ohawvia..” SuSavenS: SociETA ToOSCANA DI SCIENZE NatTuRALI. Processi verbali, wv. 26; no. 42 27%, no. 1-2.) Pisa setae ZOoLoGiA GENERALE E AGRARIA. Boletino del laboratorio, tye td =P orien LOlias: JAPAN. Formosa. Bureau of Productive Industries. Icones of the plants of Formosa, v. 8. Taihoku. 1919. ImMpERIAL'AcaDEMy. Proc.,.v. 1, No. 5. \“Wokyo: igi Japan. Imperial Larthquake Investigation Committee. Bull S6v.97, not Sr etekyo:y) 10188 Kyoro ImprertaL University. College of Engineering. Mem., v. 2, no. 1-3: 1918. College of Science. Mem., v. 3, no. 5-10. 1918-19. Tonéxu ImpeRr1aAL UNIVERSITY. Science reports: Ist ser., v. ¢, no. 2-3; 8, no. 1; 2nd ser., v. 4, mo. 3; 5, meee ToHoku MATHEMATICAL JOURNAL, v. 14, no. 3-4; 15; 16, no. 1-2. Sendai. 1917-19. Tokyo ImperiaL University. Calendar, 1917-18. College of Science. Jour., v. 39, art. 9; 40, arte: 42, art. 1:. 1918-19. | 441 | JAVA. NEDERLANDSCH Oost Inpié. Hoofd-Bureau Muijnwezen. Jaarboek, 1916, pt. 1, and atlas. Batavia. 1918. MEXICO. Instituto GrEoLocico DE Mexico. Anales, no. 5. 1918. Boletin, no. 35-36. Mexico. 1918. SocreDAD CIENTIFICA ‘“‘ANTONIO ALZATE.’’ Mem. 37, no. 1-2; Zo no, 1-8. ) Mexico. 1918=19: NEW ZEALAND. AUCKLAND INSTITUTE AND MusEum. Report, 1918-19. New Zeratanp. Board of Science and Art. N.Z. journal of science and technology, v. 1, no. 5-6; 2, no. 1-5. Dept. of Internal Affairs. Report of Dominion laboratory, no. 51. Well. 1918. Dept. of Mines. Palaeontological bull., no. 7. 1918. NORWAY. BERGENS Museum. Aarbog, 1916-17, pt. 2; 1917-18, pt, 1, 3. Aarsberetning, 1917-18. K. Norske VIDENSKABERS SELSKABS. Skrifter, 1915. Johann Ernst Gunnerus. Trondhjem. 1918. STAVANGER Musrum. Aarshefte, 1917. | PERU. | CUERPO DE INGENIEROS DE Minas. Bull. 87, 89-95. Lima. PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. Bureau of Gov’t Laboratories. Pub- ltcations, mo. 29, 35. Manila, 1905: Bureau of Science. Ethnological survey publications, ieopnou 6. Manila. 1917. Journal of science, sect. A, v. 1-13; B, v. Bel 3 (Oo ay, ale IDPS, Wileimnie. USO Mey. Mineral resources of the P.I., 1913-16. SPAIN. JUNTA DE CIENCIES NATURALS DE BARCELONA. Ser. zool, 4, 8. Anvari 2, pt. 1-2. Barcelona. 1917. SWEDEN. ENTOMOLOGISKA FORENINGEN I STOocKHOLM. Entomologisk ndskritt, aces 39, 198. sWpsalam ey LS) GEOLOGISKA FORENINGEN 1 StocKHoitm. Forhandlingar, 40. K. ViTteERHETS HiIsToRIE ocH ANTIKVITETS AKADEMIEN. Fornvannen, 1916. Stockholm. 442 SWITZERLAND. GEOGRAPHISCH-ETHNOGRAPHISCHE GESELLSCHAFT IN ZURICH. Jahr 1917-18. NATURFORSCHENDE GESELLSCHAFT IN ZuRicH, Vierteljahrs- schrift, 1916, pt. 3-4; 1917; 1918, pt. 1-2. SOCIETE DE PHYSIQUE ET D’HisToIRE NATURELLE. Compte rendu des séances, v. 36, no. 1. Geneva. Soct&TtTE NEUCHATELOISE DES SCIENCES NATURELLES. Bull., tom. 43. Neuchatel. 1919. UNION OF SOUTH AFRICA. Durgsan Museum. Annals, v. 2, pt..2-3. 1918. GEOoLoGIcAL Society oF SourH Arrica. Trans., 1918. RoyaL Society oF Soutn Arrica.. Trans., v. 7, pt. 1-3. South AFRICAN ASSOCIATION FOR THE ADVANCEMENT OF Science. Jour. of Science, v. 15, no. 1-7. SoutaH Arrican Museum. Annals, v. 12, pt. 6.7 toe UNITED STATES OF AMERICA. ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. Jour., ser. 2,. Vv. 16, pt.4.) Philad. vio ke: Proc., v. 69; pt..2-3; (0, pt. 1-2.” Votes AMERICAN CHEMICAL Society. Journ., v. 40, no. 11-12; 41, n.l-f. Haston, Pact t918-19: AMERICAN GEOGRAPHICAL Society. Geographical review, v. 6-4. N.Y. 19t8-19: AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF Mininc ENGINEERS. Trans., Vv. 5-590 IN Ye) 1988-19: AMERICAN MicroscopicaL Society. Trans., v. 36, no. 3-4; 37, no. 1-2, 4; 38, no. 1. Menasha, Wis. 19tieee American Museum oF Naturat History. Anthropological papers, v. 10, pt. 5-6; 16, pt. 3; .18, pt. 4; 20 pee 22, pt. 25°23, pt. daag 24; pty) Pe: : Bulls svi S65) MON cS Guide leaflets, No. 46, 48. N.Y. 1917-18. + Handbook ser, m0. 7a,-7- 5 Noe oe ——— Natural history, v. 18, no. 7-8; 19, no. 1-3. Repart,, 1917., WN. Ya eos: AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL Society. Proc., v. 56, no. 7; 57. ARCHAEOLOGICAL INSTITUTE OF AMERICA. Journal of archaeology, v. 22, no. 3-4; 23, no. 2. 1918. . Bernice Pavani BisHop Museum. Mem., v. 5, pt. 1-2. Polynesian ethnology, v. 6, no. 5. Honolulu. 1918. Brookityn INsTITUTE OF ARTS AND ScIENCES. Museum quarterly, v. 4, no: ’33°5, ne. ¥,°3. | 1917-7e. 443 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. Proc., ser. 4, v. 2, pt. 1, nom liand.pt. 2, no. 12" Ono. 8-047, no. 1-13; 3, mo. 1-4. 1917-18. CaLIFORNIA. Mining Bureau. Bull. 76, 78, 83. 1918. Preliminary report, no. 4-5. Sacramento. CALIFORNIA UNIVERSITY. Agricultural Experiment Station. Bull, 292, 301. Berkeley. 1978: Dept. of Geology. Bull., v.10; no! 11-22, 25; 11, no. 2-4. Publications in American archaeology and ethnology, em 2 enos-o-1 1) 13, nov 1... choi Publications in botany, v. 6, no. 13-14. Berkeley. Publications in zoology, v. 14, no. 2; 16, no. 20-24; Mentos &, VOL: 18, no. 17 709s mons) 20, no. 1-4: = 21, no. 1-2. Berkeley. 1918-19. CINCINNATI SocrETY oF NaturaL History. Jour., v. 22, WO 2. CorNnELL University. Agricultural Experement Station. Balls 39 . Meme. Ithaca; INE eS Fioripa. Geological Survey. Report 12. 1919. BeANenin INSTITUTE. Jour., v. 186; no. 2-6; 187; 188, noe Phnilad. 1918-19. HARVARD CoLLEGE. Juseum of Comparative Zoology. Bull., weeooenio Ooh 14:63, no. Jed. wel9lS V9) Report, 1917-18. Camb., Mass. Hawattan Enromouocicau Sociery. Proc., v. 4, no. 1. Iuuinois. State Laboratory of Natural History. Bull., v. iMewarh, o-10; V3. art. 1-4, 7-8 (Urbana) 1918: INDIANA ACADEMY OF SCIENCE. Proc., 1916-17. LELAND STANFORD JR. UNIversity. Bull. 95. 1917. Trustees’ ser., No. 31. 1916. University ser., no. 24-29. 1916-17. ' Minnesota. Geological and Natural History Survey. Botanical studies, v. 4, pt. 4. 1916. Bull., no. 13. Minneapolis. 1917. Minnesota UNIVERSITY. Studies in social sciences, no. 9. Agricultural Experiment Station. Bull. 165-168. NationaL ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. Proc., v. 4, no. 7-12; 5, Heet-on we Wwash. 19 L8=19: 4 New York ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. Annals, v. 27, pp. 215-243. New York Pusiic Lisrary. Bull., v. 22, no. 6-12; 23, NO wl ahs New York Strate Museum. Report 69. 1915. Albany. N. Carouina. Geological and Economic Survey. Biennial report, 1891-1914. 444 N. Caroutna. Geological and Economic Survey. Bull. 2-3, Dy eo OS. Wp, ite Dor Economic papers, 1-20, 23-25, 28-42. [Publication] v. 1, 3. 1905-12. OBERLIN CoLLEGE. Laboratory bull., no. 20-21. 1918. Wilson bull., v. 30, no. 3-4; 31)-no) faa On1o State University. Bull.,«v. 23, no. 22. “2909: Ohio journal of science, v. 18, no. 7-8; 19, no. 1-7. SHEPARD, Cuas. U. Report on the geological survey of Con- necticut. New Haven. 1837. SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION. Report, 1916. Wash. 1917. Bureau of American Ethnology. Bull. 61, 63. Unitep States. Dept. of Agriculture. 18 bull. of dept. Farmers’ bull., 915, 921, 9327 (Washes a journal of agricultural research, v. 10, no. 13; 12, no. 12;.14, m0, 15-125 15-165 17) momo a — N. American fauna, no. 41-43. 1917-18. —— Library of Congress. Report, 1917. Wash. National Museum. Annual report, 1917-18. — Bull..97; 99; 100, v. 2, pt. 1-2, 4555 noe pt. 1, 4-7; 103, pp. 1-188, 525-612; 104; 105. Contributions from the National Herbarium, Ww AQ, Foie es Sls). Proc., vi 51-53). Washe ) 1Oas7-iies Vireinia. Geological Survey. Bull. 14-10, 12-15. WaGNnerR FREE INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE. Trans., v. 8. Annual announcement, 1917-19. Philad. WasuHineton University, St. Louis. Studies, v. 4, pt. 1, mo. 2: 5, no. 122-36. noe la 1oiieter 445 mish OF FELLOWS, MEMBERS, ETc, AS EXISTING ON SEPTEMBER 30, 1919. Those marked with an asterisk have contributed papers pub- lished in the Society’s Transactions. Any change in address should be notified to the Secretary. Nore.—The publications of the Society will not be. sent to those whose subscriptions are in arrears. Date of Election. 1910. 1893. 1897. 1890. 1905. 1905. 1892. 1898. 1894. 1912. 19138. Lo09: 1893. 1905. 1908. 1918. 1895. HOV: 1902. 1907. 1912. 1911. 1883. 1893. 1916. Honorary FELLOWS. *Brace, W. H., C.B.E., M.A., F.R.S., Professor of Physics, University College, London (Fellow 1886). *CossmMaAnn, M., 110, Faubourg Poissonniére, Paris. *Davip, T. W. EpvcewortuH, C.M.G., B.A., D.Sc., F.R.S., F.G.S., Professor of Geology, University of Sydney. *ETHERIDGE, RospEeRrtT, jun., Director and Curator of the Australian Museum of New South Wales, Sydney. Gitt, Tuomas, C.M.G., I.S.0., Under-Treasurer, Adelaide. *Hepity, Cuas., Assistant Curator, Australian Museum, Sydney. *Maipen, J. H., 1.8.0., F.R.S., F.L.S., Director Botanic Gardens, Sydney, New South Wales. *Meyrick, HE. T., B-A., F.R.S., F.Z.S., Tohrnhanger, Marl- borough, Wilts, England. *Witson, J. T., M.D., Ch.M., Professor of Anatomy, University of Sydney, New South Wales. *Trrrer, J. G. O., F.L.S., Elizabeth Street, Norwood (Corresponding Member 1878, Fellow 1886). CoRRESPONDING MEMBERS. *Carter, H. J., B.A., Wahroonga, New South Wales. *Jonneock, C. F., Clare. *Stretron, W. G., Darwin, Northern Territory. Tuomson, G. M., F.L.S., Dunedin, New Zealand. *“WooLnouGH, WaurEeR GrorGE, D.Sc., F.G.S., Professor in Geology, University of Perth (Fellow 1902). FELLOWS. AnpREW, H. W., North Street, Collinswood. *AsuBy, Epwin, F.L.S., M.B.O.U., Blackwood. Batutey, J. F., Director Botanic Garden, Adelaide. *Baxer, W. H., F.L.S., King’s Park. *Brack, J. McConnett, 1, Brougham Place, North Adelaide. *Broucuton, A. C., Young Street, Parkside. Brown, Enear J., M.B., D.Ph., 3, North Terrace. *Brown, H. Y. L., 286, Ward Street, North Adelaide. Brummitt, Ropert, M.R.C.S., Northcote Ter., Medindie. *Buii, Lionet B., D.V.Sc., Laboratory, Adelaide Hospital. 1907. 1904. 1895. 1907. 1912. 1914. 1916. 1887. NOMS: VOU: 1902. 1918. - 1917. 1914. 1919. 1904. 1880. 1910. 1904. 1919. Ie 1916. 1896. 1883. 1918. 1912. 1893. 1918. 1910. 1918. 1915. 1897, 1884. 1888. 1914. 1905. 1874. 1919. 1907. 1897. 446 *CHapman, R. W., M.A., B.C.E., F.R.A.S., Professor of Mathematics and Mechanics, University of Adelaide. CuristiE, W., 49, Rundle Street, Adelaide. : *CLELAND, Joun B., MED. Government Bureau of Micro- biology, Sydney, New South Wales. *Cooxre, W. T., D.Sc., Lecturer, University of Adelaide. Corsin, lole Be B. Se. : University of Adelaide. CorntsH, K. M., on Active Service. DARLING, Ee G., Franklin Street, Adelaide. *Dixon, SAMUEL, Bath Street, New Glenelg. Dopp, Atan P., Kuranda, Queensland. Durron, FEES cae (Oxon. ), Anlaby, Epavist, A. Ge 20, King Street, Mile End. *Euston, A. H., E.ELS., Childers Street, North Adelaide. FENNER, A. E., D. Sec., F.G.S., Education Department, Adelaide. Frreuson, E. W., M.B., Ch.M., Gordon Road, Roseville, Sydney. GuastonBuRY, O. A., Adelaide Cement Co., Brookman Buildings. Gorpon, Davin, c/o D. & W. Murray, Gawler Place, Adelaide. *GoyprR, GrorezE, A.M., F.C.S., Gawler Place, Adelaide. *GRANT, "Kerr, M. Sc., Professor of Physics, University of Adelaide. GrirFitH, H., Brighton. Grieson, E. C., 99, Grant Avenue, Rose Park. Hacxert, W. C., Rundle Street, Adelaide. Hancock, H. Lipson, A.M.I.C.E., M.I.M.M., M.Am.I.M.E., Kennedya, Wallaroo Mines. Hawker, E. W., F.C.S., East Bungaree, Clare. *“Howcuin, Water, F.G.S8., Professor of Geology and Palaeontology, University of Adelaide. Ising, Ernest H., Loco. Department, Islington. Jack, R. L., B.E., Assistant Government Geologist, Adelaide. JameES, THomas, M.R.C.S., Tranmere, Magill. JENISON, Rev. J. C., Mount Barker. * JOHNSON, BAG, M.D., M.R.C.S., 295, Pirie Street, Adelaide. Kimper, W. J., Gaza. *Lavrigz, D. F., Agricultural Department, Victoria Square. *Lea, A. M., F.E.S., South Australian Museum, Adelaide. Lenpon, A. A., M.D. (Lond.),, M.R.C.S., Lecturer in Obstetrics, University of Adelaide, and Hon. Physician, Children’s Hospital, North Adelaide. *LoweErR, OswaLp B., F.Z.S., F.E.S., 18, Bartley Crescent, Wayville. Matuews, G. M., F.R.S.E., F.L.S., F.Z.S., Foulis Court, Fair Oak, Hants, England. *Mawson, Sir Doveras, D.Sc., B.E., Lecturer in Mineralogy and Petrology, University of Adelaide. Mayo, Gro. G., C.E., 90, Hill Street, North Adelaide. Mayo, Herren M., M. B., B.Se., 47, Melbourne Street, North Adelaide. Metrosez, Rosert Tuomson, Mount Pleasant. *Morean, A. M., M.B., Ch.B., 46, North Terrace, Adelaide, 447 *Osporn, T. G. B., M.Sc., Professor of Botany, University of Adelaide. Poor, W. B., 6, Rose Street, Prospect. Poots, His Honor Justion Ta swwk.C., (B.A.; UL. B:,; Register Chambers, Grenfell Street. . Porr, Wit114aM, Eagle Chambers, Pirie Street. *PULLEINE, Mayor R. H., M.B. , 3, North Terrace, Adelaide. Ray, Wirt1aM, M.B., B. Se., Victoria Square, Adelaide. “RENNIE, Ep warp hele M.A., D.Sc. (Lond.), it -C:S..." Pro- fessor of Chemistry, University of Adelaide. *RippieF, A. R., 127, Park Terrace, Wayville West. Roacu, B. Ss Education Department, Flinders. Street, Adelaide. *Rogers, Lizut.-Con. R. S., M.A., M.D., Flinders Street, Adelaide. *Rutr, Water, C.E., College Park, Adelaide. Seuway, W. H., Treasury, Adelaide. Snow, Francis H., National Mutual Buildings, King William Street. *Srantey, E. R., Government Geologist, Port Moresby, Papua. SweEeETaPeLE, H. A., M.D., Park Terrace, Parkside. *Torr, W. G., LL.D., M.A., B.C.L., Brighton, South Aus- tralia. *Turner, A. JErFeris, M.D., F.E.S., Wickham Terrace, Brisbane, Queensland. *Verco, Sir JosepH C., M.D. (Lond.), F.R.C.S. *Warre, Epaar R., F.L. S., Director Teak Australian Museum. Warp, Leonarp Keritu, B.A., B.E., Government Geologist, Adelaide. Wares, W. L., King William Street. Wess, Noeu A., Barrister, Westall Street, Hyde Park. WHALLEY, Rev. D. T. . Prince’s Street, Alberton. WuiTBREAD, Howarp, c/o A. M. Bickford & Sons, Currie Street, Adelaide. “Ware, Caprarn S. A., C.M.B.0O.U., ‘‘Wetunga,’’ Fulham, South Australia. *Z1ETz, F. R., South Australian Museum. ASSOCIATE. Rosinson, Mrs. H. R., ‘‘Las Conchas,’’ Largs Bay, South Australia. 448 APPENDICES: FIELD NATURALISTS’ SECTION OF THE Bonal Society of South Australia (Incorporated) THIRTY-SIXTH ANNUAL REPORT OF THE COMMITTEE. For THE YEAR ENDED SEPTEMBER 30, 1919. The following Officers were elected at the last Annual Meeting : —Chairman, Mr. W. J. Kimber; Vice-Chairmen, Dr. C. Fenner, F.G.S., and Mr. J. F. Bailey ; Hon Treasurer, Mr. B. B. Beck; Hon. Librarian, Miss I. Roberts; Hon. Secretary, Mr. E.‘H. Ising; Hon. Assistant Secretary, Miss E. Ireland; Press Correspondent, Mr. D. J. McNamara; Committee, Prof. T. G. B. Osborn, M.Sc., Mr. EH. H- Boek F:.R.H.S.,.Mr. P. Runge, Mr. W. H. Selway,, ire ae Elston, Mr. W. Ham, Mr. E. 8. Hughes, Mrs. F. J. Mellor, and the Chairman and Secretary of the Fauna and Flora Protection Committee (ex officio); Hon. Auditors, Messrs. Walter D. Reed, F.C.P.A., and W. A. Drummond. The Fauna and Flora Protection Committee was elected as follows:—Capt. S. A. White, Mr. E. Ashby, Dr. W~- Ramsay Smith, Messrs. W. H. Selway, A. M. Lea, S. Angel, J. M. Black, and A. H. Elston, Dr. Fenner, Messraeaa Bailey, P. Runge, H. W. Andrew, and A. R. Riddle, and Chairman and Secretary of the Section (ex officio). The membership of the Section is now 125. The following Evening Meetings were held : — September 17, 1918—Annual Meeting. October 1, 1918—Address:* “The Attractions of Port Willunga to the Nature Study Student.”’ October 15, 1918—Exhibits by Members. November 19, 1918—Description by Members of Excur- sion to Moolooloo, in the Flinders Range. 449 April 15, 1919—Lecture: “Palms and Cycads.’”’ Mr. J. F. Bailey. May 20, 1919—Lecture: “Climatic Control of Civiliza- non. Dr. C. Penner. June 17, 1919—Lecture: ‘Travel Chat.’ Sir William Sowden. July 15, 1919—Lecture: “The earth as an abode of Life.” Mr. G. F. Dodwell, B.A. August 22, 1919—Lecture: ‘American Birds at Home.” Mr. E. Ashby. September 22, 1919—Lecture: ‘‘The Old Dutch Houses at the Cape.” Capt. 8S. A. White. The following Excursions were held : — September 21, 1918—Tea Tree Gully: Ornithology. Capt. 8. A. White. September 28, 1918—Blackwood to Eden: Physiography. Mr. A. G. Edquist. October 5, 1918—Aldgate to Bridgewater: Native Flora, Mr. W. H. Selway. October 9, 1918—Cherry Gardens: Botany. Mr. W. Ham. October 19, 1918—Paradise: Introduced Plants. Mr. H. W. Andrew. October 26, 1918—Gilles Plains: Fruit Culture. Mr. W. J. Kimber. November 30, 1918—Marino: Shells and Marine Life. Mr. W. J. Kimber. | January 18, 1919—Port River: Dredging Excursion. Mr. W. J. Kimber. February 8, 1919—-Blackwood : Hxperimental Orchard. Mr. G. Quinn. March 15, 1919—Port River: Dredging Excursion. Mr. E. R. Waite. Easter, April 18-21, 1919—New Era: The Murray River. Mr. E. H. Lock. April 26, 1919—Bridgewater: Native Flora. Mr. E. H. Lock. May 12, 1919—Sturt River: Geology. Professor W. Howchin, F.G.S8. May 24, 1919—Morialta Gorge: Physiography, etc. Dr. C. Fenner, F.G.S. June 3, 1919—Port Noarlunga: Fossils and Shell Life. Dr. C. Fenner and Mr. W. J. Kimber. June 13, 1919—Mount Pleasant: Geology, etc. Mr. W. Ham. July 12, 1919—National Museum: Mr. E. R. Waite, , Director. 450 July 26, 1919—Botanic Gardens: Trees and Shrubs. Mr. J. F. Bailey. August 9, 1919—Slape Gully: Plant Life. Mr. W. H. Selway. August 23, 1919--Henley Beach South: Dune Flora. Mr. GE sising. September 6, 1919—Blackwood: Native Flora. Mr. A. G. Edquist. Detailed accounts of the various Lectures and Excursions are published in The South Australian Naturalist. THIRTIETH ANNUAL REPORT OF THE NATIVE FAUNA AND FLORA PROTECTION COMMITTEE. Four committee meetings were held during the year, and the attendance, on the whole, was good. Many important matters have received the attention of committee during the year. One event took place which is one of the most important occurrences since the committee was formed, viz., the constituting of Flinders Chase. FLINDERS CHass (Kancaroo IstanD RESERVE). Karly in the year the Chairman, accompanied by Mr. G. R. Laffer, M.P., a representative for the district (the Hon. A. H. Peake was prevented from going at the last moment), visited Kangaroo Island. The whole question was personally put forward at a meeting of the Kingscote District Council. After a protracted discussion it was agreed that local opposi- tion to the proposal should cease, and that the Council was willing to have the boundaries of the reserve fixed from Cape — ‘Forbin, on the North Coast, running south to the Rocky River Freehold, thence following the freehold south, and then west to the coast. On returning to the city this action was followed up by the chairman having repeated interviews with the Hons. the Premier and the Attorney-General to ensure having the reserve properly constituted under Act of Parhament. Sub- sequently a promise was given by members of the Ministry that the Flinders Chase Reservation Bill would be introduced early in the middle session. This promise has been carried out and the Bill has now passed both Houses, practically without alteration. Thus after twelve years’ hard struggle the Chase has been constituted. The area-—about 200 square miles --is not large enough, but the Act provides for extension. 451 THE GAME BILL. The Game Bill, drafted with a view to securing better protection of wild animals and birds, which lapsed in the first session of Parliament, was restored early in the second session, as promised, and after being much mutilated has become law ; although several strong measures were lost, still it is a vast improvement on the old Act, and we must hope for amend- ments in the future. SEALS. As a result of persistent representations made to the Honorable the Attorney-General, the chairman reported that both Gulfs had been closed against the slaughter of these animals. All waters and islands within a line drawn from Cape Borda to Cape Catastrophe, and from Cape Willoughby to Victor Harbour, including The Pages, now forms a sanctuary for seals. INFRINGEMENTS OF ANIMAL PROTECTION LAWS. The wrongful capture of seagulls near Glenelg and slaughter of kangaroos were discussed, and action deemed appropriate by the committee was taken. The Coorong Islands were visited by the Chairman, in company with Mr. G. R. Laffer, M.P., Chairman of Committees, and the Chief Inspector of Fisheries, and a number of notice boards, re absolute protection of birds, placed thereon. DESTRUCTION OF NATIVE FLORA. The Local Government Department was communicated with respecting the indiscriminate destruction of native flora on. public highways in certain districts. ConcLUSION. Personal efforts put forth by the Chairman towards final- izing the reservation of Flinders Chase and the gazetting of both gulfs as sanctuaries for seals were endorsed by the committee, and congratulations unanimously extended to him. A letter of thanks was sent to the Press expressing appreciation for prominence given to Flora and Fauna Protection questions. S. A. Waite, Chairman. | H. W. Anprew, Hon Secretary. ‘6L6L “GT toquraydag ‘$4071pn-p { ‘dNOW WAU ‘WioéY E “Wag ‘Ta9yY ‘GC waALIVA ‘yoo1109 Punoy pue pezyIpny GUET Go, eae ee ama eT & GL 9VF 6 GL 9S Ep ea |b Lo) eouRleg 4ipaig ‘ ’ &LO espotg fo odvqarg ‘ TOR 0) SIO[IVG 0} Soryingvay < oy 0) a ?: SyuoUTYserjoyy 0. *eonc Ouy, Weo4g jo orrpy “ Of7- (6a: a “~ ons Solv yf UOIsInoxny ‘ 0 0 O08 : S1OJOJ, JO OALFT OF, Sr a pie ire pIvaM1of JYSnoIq souvleg Ag Hp 'a-e Sr ees. icp UNOIDW worswnowny r Sh a a a i a ) g oF eee wee tee e0uRleg Ag 8 VI &9F 8 PL &SF ) Pea Sa) p4VMLOF pollo soured .y 9 950 saqoog ATeIqUy ourlpurg ‘‘ 0 8L 0 ae SUISIZLOApy *‘ 0 #16 SUMmMnn yr OLG UloJUBTT pUB [[VFZ fo oarpy [Il OL O ysoloquy yurg ‘‘ OL PL O jaa ie eee ATOUOTZVIS iy Oe 7 sO meee Site eee suOoTydLiosqng sioquoyy ‘ iL. 8 sosvysog “‘ OoOesOge Fs es: “* AJeL00g [eAoy woody Juery ‘ 9 G6 §Z AJeL00g [vAOY 07 pred suoizdtiosqug .s SLOG WOT OT, Ge iG. re HE PIVMIOJ JYSNOIG soURTeE” ca ‘ps ¢F ‘AUNALIGNGAI Ka Pp “8; “=F ‘SLd1g0au “QUNOIIP [DLaWI‘Y) "GLOT ee Laquiagdag papwa dpaX of oingrpuaodxgm pun sydraoaay fo puawa n7zg ‘ALHIOOG IVAOY AHL AO NOILOAG ,SLSIIVUALVYNY aTalg 453 Galo Ean Asean by i Xs, [Generic and specific names printed in italics indicate that the forms described are new to science. | Aboriginal Remains, 77, 81. Acacia brachybotrya, 33; brachy- stachya, $2; microcarpa, 33; Oswaldii, 33; pycnantha, 33; riva- lis, 83; spinescens, 32; stenophylla, 651; sublunata, 452; tarculensis, $a, ool, Acanthochiton gatliffi, 398; mazsil- fogs coi: pilsbry1, $94; . p. maughaneanus, 595; porcina (Noto- plax), 395. Adenanthos terminalis, 29. Adonis autumnalis, 32. Adoretus, 246; A. melvillensis, 246. Aganippe rainbow, 74. Agnostus australiensis, 380; elkedra- ensis, 379. Agropyrum scabrum, 25.: Alopecurus pratensis, 25. Alphitophagus bifasciatus, 257. Amanita grossa, 204. Amanitopsis punctata, 265. Anacampseros australiana, 351. Anacyclus radiatus, 44. Aneurystypus carinaticeps, 237. Anisoradsia mawlei saundersi, .73. Annual meeting, 431; Report, 432; Balance-sheets, 433. Anodontonyx insular’s, 217; niger, 219; opalescens, 218. Anoplognathus multiseriatus, 241; prasinus, 240; smaragdinus, 241. Aotus villosa, 351. Armillaria mellea, 266; mucida exannulata, 206. Arthrocnemum, table of — species, 557; arbuscula, 361; halocnemoides, 558 ; h. pergranulatum, 359; leiostachyum, 360; lylei, 359. Arthropterus articu/aris, 342. Articerus, table -of species, 173; constrictiventris, 172; curvicornis, 172: duboulayi, 171; foveicollis, 172; mesosternalis, 170; nitidicollis, 173; pascoeus, 172; subcylindri- cornis, 168; wilsoni, 169. Ashby, E., Review of Genus Lori- cella, 59; Notes on Australian Polyplacophora, 66; Descriptions of Six New Species of Australian Polyplacophora, 394; Exhibits: apples, 425; birds, 425, 426; fungus, 431; plants, 431; pyrites, 429. Asphaltum (bitumen). as Sea drift, 52. Astroloma humifusum, 40. Atriplex rhagodioides, 350. Australian Coleoptera, 342; Fungi, 11, 262; Polyplacophora, 66; Sali- cornieae, 555. | Balance-sheets, 454. Barytes, 565. Bassia longicuspis, 351. Battarea phalloides Steven, 509. Beyeria opaca linearis, 36. Black, J. M., Additions to the Flora of South Australia, No. 15, 25; No. 16, 349; Revision of the Australian Salicornieae, 355. Boerhaavia repanda, 30. Bolboceras bispinicolle, 182; quadri- foveatum, 181; triunum, 183. Boletus romanus, 294; scarlatinus, 294. Boronia coerulescens, 35. Brachycome calocarpa, 42; exilis, 42, Bull, Dr. L. B., Contribution to the Study of Habronemiasis, 85. Bupleurum semicompositum, 40. Byeria opaca, 35. Byrrhomorpha basicollis, 224; rudis. 223. Calamagrostis, table of species, 26; densa, 27; minor, 27; quadriseta, 26; q. montana, 26. Callistochiton antiquus mawlei, 400; a. mayl, 401; a. meridionalis, 400. Callitris propinqua, 23; robusta, 23; verrucosa, 26. Calloodes nitidissimus, 242. Calotis scapigera, 42. Calvatia lilacina, 3510. Cambrian Trilobites of Australia and Tasmania, $73. Cantharellus corrugatus, 272; folio- lum, 273; imperatae, 271; lilacinus, 271; .tgripedes, 272. Cape Willoughby, Quartz-tourma- line Nodules in Granite, 156; Petrology of, 316. Carex Bichenoviana, 27; tereticaulis, 28. Carphurus myrmecophilus, 258. Cassinia laevis, 43. Cassytha melantha, 32. Casuarina distyla, 350; lepidophloia, 28; Luehmannii, 28; stricta, 350; suberosa, 29. Central Australia, Nodular Barytes from, 55. Centrolepis polygyna, 28. Chapman, R. W., Physical Proper- ties of Some ‘South Australian- Grown Pines, 405. Exhibit: wood, 428. Cheel, E., Notes on Three Species of Melaleuca, 368. Cheel, E., and) Dr, J. Bi’ Cleland, Australian Fungi, No. 2, 11; No. Sa02: Cheiragra, 206; C. atra, 209; pusilla, 207; ruficollis, 208; sericerpennis, 213; variabilis, 210; vittata, 210. Cheirrhamphica, 203; C. coxalis, 204; insularis, 203; pubescens, 203; tuberculata, 205. : Chenopodium microphyllum, 30; Vulvaria, 30. . Chlamydopsis agilis, 175; carini- Collis, S115 “commata, © LS conte pressipes, VIS excavate, “for inqguilina, 175; latipes, 176; striati- pennis, 177; tuberculata, 175. Chlamydopus Meyenianus, 308. Chlorobapta frontalis, 240. Choretrum glomeratum, 350. Cleland, Drie By and i... Cheel, Australian Fungi, No. 2, 11; No. Gy sce: Clitocybe cyathiformis cinerascens, 269; dealbata minor, 269; media, 2608; paraditopa, 270; pinophila, 269. Codonocarpus pyrmidalis, 30. Coleoptera, Australian, 342; Miscel- laneous, 166. Collybia confluens, 280; ingrata, 280; radicata, 279; stipitaria, 281; velu- tipes, 280, Colymbomorpha splendida, 193. Coronopus didymus, 32; procumbens, 62. Corticeum coeruleum, 5308. Corynophyllus curvicornis, 238. Crassula bonariensis, 82; colorata, 651; Sieberiana, 32. Crepicephalus etheridgei, 389; tas- manicus, 890. Cryptodus, 252; C. angustus, 255; antennalis, 254; creberrimus, 253; foveatus, 234; fraternus, 254; grossipes, 235; incornutus, 233; paradoxus, 233; passaloides, 234; variolosus, 254. Cyperus distachyus, 549; tenellus, 27. Dactyloctenium aegyptiacum, 349. Daldinia concentrica, 515. Danthonia penicillata, 25. Diaphonia euclensis, 240. Diethusa insignita, 346. 454 Dikelocephalus florentinensis, 389. Dillwynia uncinata, 34. Dinesus ida, 381. Diphobia longicornis, 206. Diplocotes foveicollis, 257. Dixon, §S., Exhibit: grass, 423. Dodonaea attenuata linearis, 36; cuneata, 56; hexandra, 36. Donations to Library, 436. Drosera Menziesii, 32. Ectrephes formicarum, 256. Edquist, A. G., Vitality of Seeds, 5 Exhibit: beetle, 425. Edusa pulchra, 348. Khrharta longiflora, 25: villosa, 26. Elston, A. H., Australian Coleoptera, 342. Enasiba tristis, 254. Endogone tuberculosa, 310. Engyops flavus, 227. Kragrostis Dielsii, 24; major, 24. Krechthites prenanthoides, 43. Eremophila neglecta, 41. Krigeron canadensis, 354. EriochJoa punctata, 24. Eriostemon difformis, 35. Erodium Botrys, 34. Etheridge, R., jun., Cambrian Trilo- bites of Australia and Tasmania, 373. Eucalyptus calycogona, $89; -diversi- folia, 58; fascieulosa, ~So2-e0an- crassata dumosa, 38, 352; Morrisii, 59; oleosa, 58; viminalis, 39. Euclarkia, 180: E. costata, 180. Euphorbia Wheeleri, 352. Kuphrasia collina, 41. Exocarpus spartea, 29. Fenner, C., and Sachse Gold Medal, 426. Field Naturalists’ Section, 448. Flinders Chase, 423, 427, 431, 433, 450. Flora of South Australia, 23, 3549. Fomes badius, 502; conchatus, 301; densus, 3501; pseudosenex, 3802; rimosus, 502; roburneus, 402; robustus, 301; yucatensis, 302. Fossil-resin as Sea-drift, 53. Frankenia fruticulosa, 352; serpylli- folia, $52. Frenchella cribriceps, 226; fimbriata, 226; gaguatina, 225. Fungi, Australian, 11, 262. oP faleata, 24; Galium Gaudichaudii, 353. Gastridium lendigerum, 25. Geaster Berkieyi, 310; Clelandii, 509; floriformis, 309; minimus, $10; saccatus, 510; simulans, 309. Geoglossum glabrum, 312; Muelleri, aa Geological Memoranda, 45. ee a e 455 Glass, Amethystine Colouration of, 420. Glossocheilifer addendus, 192; bzden- tatus, 191. Glycyrrhiza acanthocarpa, 451. Gomphocarpus fruticosus, 40. Goodenia albiflora, 41; humilis, 41; Nicholsonii, Al: pusilliflora, 41; vernicosa, 41, 353. Granitic Mass, Kangaroo Island, Petrology of, 316. Grevillea aspera, 29. Habronema megastoma, 99; micro- stoma, 100; muscae, 96. Habronemiasis, Study of, 85. Hakea Ednieana, 29; ulicina flexilis, 29, 350. Halorrhagis elata, 39; heterophylla glaucifolia, 40. Haplonycha marginipennis, 188; nigra, 190; suwavis, 189. Haplopsis serricollis, 228. Helichrysum ambiguum, 553; leucop- sidium, 42; obtusifolium, 42; semipapposum, 42. Helipterum corymbiflorum, 42; di- morpholepis, 42; Jessenii, 42. »Hibbertia crispula, 352; — stricta canescens, 56; virgata incana, 30. Howehin, Prof. W., Geological Memoranda, 45; Occurrence of Aboriginal Remains, 81; Exhibits: whale-barnacle, 426; flint, 422; fossils, 430. Humea pholidota, 43. Hydnum alutaceum, 305; coralloides, 504; Muelleri, 504; ochraceum, 504- rufescens, 304; zonatum, 304. Hygrophorus conicus, 281; miniatus, 281; psittacinus, 282. Hymenochaete, 308. Hypomyces aurantius, $13. International Research Council, 427, 428, 429. Irpex cingulatum, 3505 ; saepiaria, 506. Ixodia achilleoides, 42. consors, 505; Juncus holoschoenus, 28; pallidus, 28. Kangaroo Island, Petrolgoy of, 316. Kimber, W. J., Exhibits: fish, 425; fossils, 426, .425. Kochia Cannoni, 29; planifolia, 50. Kopionella, 71; matthewsi, 71. eriantha, 80; Lactarius serifluus, 274; stenophyllus, 273; subtomentosus, 274. Lamarckia aurea, 549. Lasiopetalum Behri, 36. Latheticus oryzae, 257. Lea, A. M., Notes on Coleoptera, 166; Exhibits: fungus, 428; insects, 422, 425, 427, 428, 450, 431. Leanymus mirus, 167. Lemidia auricoma, 344; a. flavi- ventris, 545: basiflava, $45; 0. fasciata, 344; flavicollis, 546; variabilis, 345. Lentinus dealbatus, 290; . fasciatus, 290; radicatus, 291; strigosus, 290; tuber-regium, 289; ursinus, 291. Lenzites abietina, 292; Beckleri, 293; bicolor, 294; Muelleri, 295; re- panda, 293; saepiaria, 295; striata, 293; ungulaformis, 292. Leontodon hispidus, 44. Leotia marcida, $11. Lepidiota froggatti, 187; stradbrok- ensis, 187. Toesandlinnran hyssopifolium, 82. Leucopogon virgatus, 40. Library, Donations to, 436. Linum marginale, 34. List of members, 445. Litargus balteatus, 181. Lloydella, 508. Lopharia, 305. Loranthus miraculosus, 29. Loricella, Review of Genus, 59; L. angasi, 60; torrz, 62. Lychnis alba, 31. Lycoperdon gemmatum, 310. Macrohelodes, 248; M. crassus, 249; lucidus, 248; montanus, 250; prin- ceps, 249. Maechidinus, 251; M. 251; marginalis, 282. Maechidius hackeri, 229; hopeanus, 230; stradbrokensis, 280. Marasmius alliatus, 282; calopus, 283; equi-crinis, 283; porreus, 282. Marsilia hirsuta, 23. Medicago minima brachyodon, 351. Melaleuca halmaturorum, 869; pau- periflora, 570; pustulata, 568. Members, List of, 445. Merismus, 299. Metanastes bicornis, 239. Microcybe multiflora, 35, 352; pauci- flora, 54. Microdiscus, 880; M. significaus, 380. Micromyrtus ciliata, 39. Microseris scapigera, 43. Millotia Kempei, 43. Mimadoretus leucothyreus, 245; niveo- squamosus, 244. Miscellanea, 418. Moenchia erecta, 31. Morchella conica, 311; esculenta, 511. Muehlenbeckia Cunninghamii, 550; stenophylla, 29. latericollis, Mycena banksiae; 284: 284; sanguinoleuta, 285. Mycenastrum corium, 310. Myriophyllum verrucosum, 40. coccineus, National Research Council, 427. Native Fauna and Flora Protection Committee, Report of, 450. Nodular Barytes from Central Aus- tralia, 55. Notasaphus fergusoni, Notoplax porcina, 395. Sprate obscurus, 236; rugosicollis, Nummularia Baileyi, 390. 315. Obituary: Bundey, Miss E. M., 419; Cleland, Dr. W. iG, 421; Stirling, Sire ©... 4, 423 ; Wainwricht. ot, A426: Odontotonyx ruficeps, 216. Olearia ciliata, 42; decurrens, 353; floribunda, 42 ; lepidophylla, 42; Muelleri, 42 ; pimeleoides minor, 42. Olenellus browni, 381. Osborn, T. G. B.. Exhibits: phora on cockle, 425 ; Clado- fungus, 424. Pachycornia, table of species, 363: robusta, 363; tenuis, 363. Panicum leucophaeum, 25. Panus stypticus, 291: viscidulus, 291. Papaver aculeatum, 351. Pappophorum avenaceum, 24. Paralepidiota cavifrons, 186. Parandra frenchi. 260. Petaloides, 299. Petrology of Cape W illoughby. 316. Phaestos Disk, 142. Phalaris paradoxa, 25. Phebalium bullatum, 35. Phillipsia polyporoides, 312. Phyllanthus lacunarius, 352. Phyllotocus antenna/is, 202- apicalis, 198: apicifuscus, 197; assimilis, 196; australis, 197; basalis, 195: basicollis, 199; bimaculatus, 195; cribriceps, 201; decipiens, 200; erythroderes, 198: insularis, 196: laterofuscus, 198; luridus, 196: macleayi, 196; marginatus, 197; navicularis, 198: nigripennis, 195: occidentalis, 196; pallidus, 196: rufibasis, 198: ruficollis, 195; ustu- latus, 197; variicollis, 195. Pimelea flava diosmifolia, 38; micro- cephala, 38; petrophila, 37; Wil- liamsonii, 37. Pines, South Australian, 405. Pinus canariensis, 405: insignis, 405; maritima, 405. Piperites, 273. Platydesmus castaneus, 216. 456 | 70. lampas, 286; 289; sub- Plaxiphora matthewsi, Pleurotus Cheelii, 289; ostreatus, 288; striatulus, ostreatus, 289. Polycarpon tetraphyllum, 351. Polyplacophora, 59, 66, 394. Polyplocotes carinaticeps, 254; ricollis, 255. Polyporus Albertini, 299; anthra- cophilus, 299; basilapiloides, 18; Clemensiae, 299; eucalyptorum, 299; fruticum, 300; gilvus, 3500; g. scruposus, 300; minor-mylittae, 14: mylittae, 12; Patouillardii, 300; pertusus, 300; rosettus, 299; rufescens, 299; sessilis, 300; sul- phureus, 299; tumulosus, 16. Polystictus badius, 297; cervino- gilvus, 298; cinnabarinus, 298; elongatus, 297; flavus, 298: melea- scab- gris, 297; ochraceo-stuppeus, 297; occidentalis, 297: Persoonii, 297; sanguineus, 298; subfulvus, 298; versicolor, 298. Pomaderris racemosa, 36. Poria callosa, 303; vaporaria, 303. Poronia oedipus, 314; punctata, 314. Proceedings, Abstract of. 421. : Pseudoheteronyx Obasicollis, 221; puncticollis, 222; seticollis, 220. Pseudohydrobius flavus, 167. Ptychoparia alroiensis, 385 ; australis, 384; carolinensis, 391; howchini, 385 : johnstoni, 392 ; subsagittatus, 383; tasmaniensis, 392; tatei, 382. Puileine, Dr. R. H., A New Species of Aganippe from Kangaroo Island, 74; Exhibits: plant, 428: spider, 428. Pultenaea ‘tenuifolia, 34. Pumice as Sea-drift, 48. Quartz - tourmaline Nodules in Granite, 156. Radulum. Neilgherrense, 305. Ranunculus trachycarpus, 31. Redlichia, 386; R. forresti, minima, 389; thielei, 388. Repsimus manicatus, 243; 243. Rhopaea, 184; decipiens, 185; collis, 184. Rhyssoplax torrianus Alem, 72. Riddle, A. R., Amethystine Colour- ation produced in Glass by Ultra- violet and X-Ray Radiation, 420; Exhibits: electrical apparatus, 423; glass-headed pin, 430. 387; montanus, nigri- Roach, B. S8., Exhibits: photographs, 431. Rodwayia intercoralis, 174; minuta, 174: orientalis, 174. 457 Rottboellia compressa, 24. Rowe, A., The Phaestos Disk, 142. Russula adusta, 274; azurea, 276; emetica, 278; erumpens, 279; Flocktonae, 274; fragilis, 278; eranulosa, 277; Mariae, 275; pectinatoides, 277; xerampelina, 6. Russularia, 274. Sachse Gold Medal, 4206. Salicornia australis, 365. Salicornieae, 355; table of genera, S57. Salt, a cause of disintegration in arid regions, 54. Sarcoxylon Le Rati, 314. Sarsen Stones of South Australia, 45. Saulostomus mimicus, 247. Schizognathus burmeisteri, 244; viri- diaeneus, 243. Scirpus littoralis, 349. Scleranthus minusculus, $1; pungens, Sil. Sclerocyphon aquaticus, 252; collis, 252; maculatus, 251. Sclerotia-forming Polypores, 11. Scoriaceous Lava as Sea-drift, 52. Seeds, Vitality of, 5. Selway, .W. H., Exhibit: erratic, 431. Sericesthis suturalis, 194. Siegesbeckia orientalis, 354. Silene venosa, 31. Solanum simile, 40. South Australia, Flora of, 23, 349; Pines, 405; Sarsen Stones, 45. Spongiosus, 299. Spyridium phlebophyllum, 36. Stackhousia monogyna, 35. Stereum adustum. 308; caperatum, 306; cinerascens, 308; elegans, 506; hirsutum, 307; illudens, 507; loba- tum, 307; membranaceum, 308; semilugens, 306; vellereum, 307; zonarium, S07. . Stethaspis sqguamosus, 192. Stipa arachnopus, 25; scelerata, 25. Stirling, Sir E. C., Obituary Notice Ole Strobilomyces floccopus, 296; palles- cens, 296. Summer Recess, Occurrences during, 418. Systellopus ater, 187. basi- granite Tecticornia cinerea, 366. Telura, 214; clypealis, collis, 215. Templetonia Battii, 33. , Tetratheca pilosa, 35. Thelephora myriomera, 306; terres- tris, 506. Thorictosoma, 257; T. 258; tebiale, 259. Thwaitesiella, 305. Thysanotus Patersonii, 28. PANS eth thei ectatommae, Tilley, C. E., Quartz-tourmaline Nodules in Granite, 156; Petrology of Cape Willoughby, Kangaroo Island, 516. Torbanite (kerosene-shale) as Sea- drift, 54. Trametes, 297: TP: lactinea, 305; protea, 303; semitosta, 303. Tremellodon gelatinosum, 305. Tricholoma colossa, 267; muculenta, 267. Trifolium resupinatum, 34. Trilobites, Cambrian, 373. Urnula campylospora, 313. Verco, Sir J. C., Obituary Notice of Sir E. C. Stirling, 1; Notes on Occurrences during Summer Recess, 1918-19, 418; Reference to Knighthood of, 427; Exhibits: newspaper cuttings, 425. Veronica Tournefortii, 41. Vitality of Seeds, 5. Wainwright, E. H., Obituary Notice Notice of, 4206. Waite, E. R., Exhibits: parts of whales, 425; photographs, 422, 428; skulls, 428; snake, 422. Westringia Dampieri, 40. White, Capt. S. A., Notes on the Occurrence of Aboriginal Remains, 77; Reports on Flinders Chase, 423, 427; Exhibits: birds, 426, 429; eggs, 422; oranges, 430; stone, 429. Xerotus fuliginosus, 292. Xylaria anisopleura, 3513; 314; hypoxylon, 314; 314; phosphorea, 313. faveolis, myosurus, Zietz, F. R., Exhibits: birds, 423, 425, 429. Zostericola, 66; Z. pilsbryanus, 66. PeAteS 1. NO eet: Se] Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. Vol. XLIII., Plate I. Phyllis F. Clarke. EUSSEY & GILLINGHAM LIMITED, PRINTERS & PUBLISHERS ADELAIDE, SO. AUS. Rion 2: Fig. 1. Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. Voly XEIIT Plate Tl. HUSSEY & GILLINGHAM LIMITED, PRINTERS & PUBLISHERS ADELAIDE, SO. AUS. ye Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. Vol. XLITI., Plate III. Mito Di ae HUSSEY & GILLINGHAM LIMITED, PRINTERS & PUBLISHERS ADELAIDE, SO. AUS. ; - . 4 ‘ , . ; 1 i. ; ? My 1 \ 4 hay Zt iad aig 9 . i r 72 . b ‘ ‘ + : on Eth eee ee ie 4 74 nt Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. Vol XcEii,, Plate: LV. ~ HUSSEY & GILLINSHAM LIMITED, PRINTERS & PUBLISHERS ADELA:DE, SO AUS. . ‘ : Tee te, ae ; ts Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Moncine. Vol. XLIII., Plate V. ne, Ib HUSSEY & GILLINGHAM LIMITED, PRINTERS & PUBLISHERS ADELAIDE, SO. AUS. Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. Vol. XLITI., Plate VI. Cannonii nouwsp C ay 11 rom e | ea Williamsonii asp HUSSEY & GILL!NGHAM LIMITED, PRINTERS & PUBLISHERS ADELAICE, SO. AUS. = . - ws wv .* ‘ ¢ * 5 ’ | 7 Da = é — «& = = - ar ee y o“~ ; ry _ % ~S I > J me » ° ‘ E . if i ~ A . — - Fs ’ ns - zs - * ¥ ! * > Se * - ' = py ¥ rr ay — “ F 7s f « . A, : % 2 a ’ » ‘ é : . = = - : - : = ~ 4 ¢ * ; _ : * ¥ - A ~ Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. Vol. XLIIL,, Plate VIL. Goodenia vernicosa xzo.| M.multiflora 7irex, HUSSEY & GILLINGHAM LIMITED, PRINTERS & PUBLISHERS ADELAIDE, SO. AUS Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. Vol. XLIII., Plate VIII. Toy \ a ra 4 i A it WY ' ApS if l Yi, Y YO \\ Ch \\ \ TOY bo Ys Erechthites prenanthoides pe. HUSSEY & GILLINGHAM LIMITED, PRINTERS & PUBLISHERS ADELAIDE, SO. AUS. 4 ' © ie a ae se Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. Vol? XEIM., Plate LX: HUSSEY & GILLINGHAM LIMITED, PR NTERS & PUBLISHERS ADELAIDE, SO. AUS. Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. Moly XG, . Plate: xX. HUSSEY & GILLINGHAM LIMITED, PRINTERS & PUBLISHERS ADELAIDE, SO, AUS. eee © ay Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. Vol iii Plate XT. HUSSEY & GILLINGHAM LIMITED, PRINTERS & PUBLISHERS ADELAIDE, SO. AUS 2 aT. a ~ a @ : Wi” on Oe eS rn an Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. Vol. XLIITI., Plate XII. HUSSEY & GILLINGHAM LIMITED, PRINTERS & PUBLISHERS ADELAIDE, SO.AUS Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. Vol. XLIII., Plate XIII. HUSSEY & GILLINGHAM LIMITED, PRINTERS & PUBLISHERS ADELAIDE, SO. AUS. ne eee ” Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. Vol. XLII., Plate XIV. HUSSEY & GILLINGHAM LIMITED, PRINTERS & PUBLISHERS ADELAIDE, SO. AUS Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. Vol. XLITI., Plate XV. HUSSEY & GILL!NGHAM LIMITED, PRINTERS & PUBLISHERS ADELAIDE, SO. AUS. Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. Jol. XLIII., Plate XVI. 06S Y ° So key (= 23 ) = zh D IE HUSSEY & GILLINGHAM LIMITED, PR'NTERS & PUBLISHTSKS ALELAIDE, SO 4u%. a > + ae ; i = ] . , ‘> 7 ina y im = i } Orr, : ; Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. Vol. XLITI., Plate XVII. HUSSEY & GILLINGHAM LIMITED PRINTERS & PUBLISHERS ADELAIDE, $0. AUB. az . ; 4 ¢ - — co] ‘ ’ eo ina So a Aug andl 6a rae a yy Ci - - res Vol. XLII., Plate XVII. Trans. and Proc. Roy. DISK SIGNS Soc. S. Austr. PORTRAITS OF “Treasury,” or “Lake Dwelling” Sign is ““Voke ”4 reverse way up on the disk “Crested Head” Head of “ Votary,” or “Captive” “Woman,” or “ Goddess” ” “Man walking “Child” “ Rosette ” “Boat” Vol. XLIUT., Plate XVIII. LATER CYPRIOTE SIGNS simitar To DISK SIGNS pane g /T\ DI CESNOLA De | PETRIE wpe aoe ENCYC. BRIT. | EVANS MARKIDES l€ |H> MI MI Soa = FO vO E (Graffito) x “Bird flying away ” “Bird settling down’) == HUSSEY & GILLINGHAM LIMITE® PRINTERS & A.R. del. PUBLISHERS ADELAIDE, $0, AUS. . a $4 i. y . ¥ > i > é - 7. F = s 7 . < . -* : - sn a ; ‘ ‘ , a. * i > ue \ . 5a 5 2 cs 1 2 a i - ‘ - r ' ee c ] e ‘ = - ’ A a t , et , ’ . , . : a % q ‘ : ’ = r . é (he r : ‘ , ASS / , : ‘ ’ +" : be ee eee nee = - * le genie ad AE a a iat I., Plate XIX. SIGNS _——— a MARKIDES alg ————_—_—_— _____ oe \\ § NE Ee —_———. . ———— A. R. del. & PUBLISHERS ADEI.AIDE, SO. AJ&. Vol. XLII, Plate XIX, Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr, ; Vol. XLIII., Plate XIX. DISK LATER CYPRIOTE SIGNS simitar To Disk _SIGNs SIGNS wok es on | Se | DIcESNOLA| PETRIE | ENCYC.BRIT.| | EVANS MARKIDES vy 12 “Hide of some (Gra ffito) Animal ” NN A 1 W Cy pro- * 13 |“Archer’s Glove” 24 Minoan x ~ KE uy Later KE Cree | 14 |“ Water” {| fi \\\ ZO (Graffito) O U NE NE 15 | ‘Fortress ” Fre E iDO FE 16 |“Cat’s Head” [) SI 17 |“Bow” | EK B ZO ae | L TA DA TA TA TA 19 Head of Wild CLES =. 20 | Uncertain Sheep, or Goat”’ — 51 é ae Sag ape O FESS 2M enillawe™ ] ] | NA NA NA A. R. del. HUSSEY & GILUINGHAW LIMITED PRINTERS & PUBLISHERS ADELAIDE, SO, AJB. Vou LM Plate XX. (Evidently Moon and Star) A. R. del. HERS ADELAIDE, SO. AUS. Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. DISK SIGNS PORTRAITS OF “Plant,” or “ Tree” “Pig’s Head” (Hemp!) “Teather Cutter ” (Macalister) fs 24 |“Bee,” or “ Moth” {} 25 |“Fish” “Totus,” or 26 ju Lily ” (Hempl) 27 |“ Phallic Organ ” 28 |“ Mason’s Square” 29 |“Cypress Tree” 30 |“ Horn” “Tunar Sign (?)” Vol. XLIII., Plate XX. LATER CYPRIOTE SIGNS simitar To Disk SIGNS MYRES ¥ (Graffito) i (Graffito) (Graffito) < DI CESNOLA A PETRIE ENCYC. BRIT. EVANS MARKIDES Yo (Evidently Moon and Star) A.R. del. HUSSEY & GILLINGHAM LIMITED, PRINTERS & PUBLISKERS ADELAIDE, SO. AUS. ee ee Hy ae a Plate XXI. Supposed irama-mark :— a A. R. del. SBLISHERS ADELAIDE, SO. AUS. Vole Xi Plate XX). Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. DISK LATE] SIGNS PORTRAITS OF MYRES 39 || Wind Instru- X ? ” = + ment (?) Pipes ' (Graffiti) dees Wanstead oe iy 33 | “Cap (?)” a ¥ 34 | Hoof” ( 35 |“ Dagger in Case” | 36 |“ Pipes (?)” Vol. XULIII., Plate XX. CYPRIOTE SIGNS simitar To DISK SIGNS § as S) , i) \ oe (ESNOLA | PETRIE ENCYC. BRIT. MARKIDES EVANS DISK SIGNS POSSESSING NO SATISFACTORY RESEMBLANCE TO THE LATER CYPRIOTE SIGNS. SIGNS portraits oF SIGNS portraits oF SIGNS portraits oF “Cypriote Cap of pees » :, r 37 | period of Assyrian 40 Thistle 43 Tree influence ”’ } Supposed “Ring” ( Bri Virama-mark :— 79 “ Shield (?) of ing” (see Brit. ? : ote 38 | period of Assyrian 41 | Mus.,”“ Evcavations 44 | “Bone influence ” in Cyprus”) \ Z |“ Arrow.” Perhaps “Oar.” See “ Anc. Ale Gaptives 45 Hist. Near East (Hall), Pl. XXVII., (Phoenician war- ship) A. R. del. HUSSEY & GILLINGHAM LIMITED PRINTERS & PUALISHERS ADELAIDE, SO, AUS. “- ; ‘b\w fe Pista XXIT. Vol. XLITI., Plate XXII. i on | —________ | | | | | | | aes del. } | NTERS & PUBLISHER® ADELAIDE, 80. AUS. trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. Vol. XUIU., Plate XXTI. Wh EIS) CO I a, AN shy toh (0) WW EQUATIONS. From Phaestos Disk. if From ‘‘Catalogue of Cyprus Museum'' J. L. Myres. SIGN NO. 6 (MAN): my On Cypriote scarab of Late Iron Age (Plate VII1.). SS SSS —- (0) SIGN NO. 38 (SHIELD): (a) ee On lenticular bead of Late Iron Age (p.136). © e (b) ee* Dotted ornament on figure of Hellenistic Age (p.92). e@ (c) ah Painted shield held by warrior (p.151). WORDS 14, 20, 53, & 60: Compare the Cypriote graffiti (reading from left to right) on ee ll Vases Nos. 1952 & 1954 (p.90):- || ay Tf VAN NA-O-TE: (2) Vi vy NA-O-TE: A TYPICAL INSCRIPTION IN LATER CYPRIOT# CHARACTERS, WITH TRANSLITERATION, ETC. (From ‘‘Handbook of Cesnola Collection,'' Myres, p.392). ye AX: Tne VAveE DO RO! TO: PA. PO: BA. SI. LE.VO. SH: = "E t eavdpov TOV Ta dow Ba ot LEWS, 1.e., **Of Eteandros the king of Paphos.'' LIMITED, PRINTERS & PUBLISHEAG ADELAIDE, 60, AUS. 4 eg re > SS oa 7 Z ’ § a 5 ‘ts as re ¢ Bisa es: xy ' sy « | eh . 1 ' | wlan ' . i : a ’ | f e . sie a ; ‘ i in ; ‘+ Wo. <*,. = ’ . - | j ; : | ; ; ‘ , ’ i j ‘ . - * | ‘ | i , ee ) | > . ; Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. Vol. XLITI., Plate XXIII. EUSSEY & GILLINGHAM LIMITED, PRINTERS & PUBLISHERS ADELAIDE, SO. AUS, Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. Vol] XLII... Plate XXive Fig. 2. HUSSEY & GILLINGHAM LIMITED, PRINTERS & PUBLISHERS ADELAIDE, SO. ALS, a oe 4 “ y t i i Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. Vol. XIU, Plate XXV: oy Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. Vol. XLIT., Plate XXVI. HUSSEY & GILLINGHAM LIMITED PRINTERS & PUBLISHERS ADELAIDE, SO. AUS. ‘ ‘ 7 ‘. = e 5 A ¢ ’ sj i ; i P} = te ar : B ’ . ‘ - ‘ . ° é ? ; SS na v M i ; poe. . : j 2 . rt ‘ / i tad ; “4 , - t : z ’ ‘ ‘- ‘u / i . 4 ; ball ie > el ? rei ee Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. Vol. XLITI., Plate XXVIT. HUSSEY & GiLLINGHAM LIMITED, PRINTERS & PUBLISHERS ADELAIDE, SO. AUS. ‘ ; ‘ o ’ i . ‘ te 4 . r Me - ‘ . é . 1 i 4 ‘ . ed : ig = f a ms ‘a m Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. Vole NULL “late sxcxovelile HUSSEY & GILLINGHAM LIMITED, PRINTERS & PUBLISHERS ADELAIDE, SO. AUS. Akers Aa Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. Vol. XLIII., Plate XXIX. L. [ Phyllis F. Clarke. HUSSEY & GILLINGHAM LIMITED, PRINTERS & PUBLISHERS ADELAIDE, SO. AUS. Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. Wolt PxIGIIT. ; (Plaite: XXX HUSSEY & GILLINGHAM LIMITED, PRINTERS & PUBLISHERS ADELAIDE, SO. AUS. Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. : Vol. XLITI., Plate XXXTI. HUSSEY & GILLINGHAM LIMITED, PRINTERS & PUBLISHERS ADELAIDE, SO. ALS. ons. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. Vol. LIT., Plate XX XIf. Casuarina SUPP ILG iL aL Ane Cyperus distachyus uz. Cod i styl veer HUSSEY & GILLINGHAM LIMITED, PRINTERS & PUBLISHERS ADELAIDE, SO. AUS. Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. Vol. XLITI., Plate XXXIII. Arthrocnemum halocnemoides ees HUSSEY & GILLINGHAM LIMITED, PRINTERS & PUBLISHERS ADELAIDE, SO. AJS. Beans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. Vol. XLIII., Plate XXXIV. Arthrocnemum Li l CL (LwetWhite) conb.n. mrt ihkrocnemum ba dens Wvees & HUSSEY & GILLINSHAM LIMITED, PRINTERS & PUBLISHERS ADELAIDE, SO AU6. Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. Vol. XLITI., Plate XXXV. Arthrocnemum arbuscula (2 &r)Mog. Arthrocnemum leitostachyum (24)Paulsen HUSSEY & GILLINGHAM LIMITED, PR'NTERS & PUBLISHEHS ADELAIBE, SO. AUS. antennae sine bem mah 0 Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. ‘Austr. Vol. XLII, Plate XXXVI. I AZ) Ay Pachycornia tenuis (Benth.) comb. nov HUSSEY & GILL!NGHAM LIMITED, PRINTERS & PUBLISHERS ADELAICc, SO. AUS Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. Vol. XLITI., Plate XXXVII. Sali co cn ia australis Banks et Sof, HUSSEY & GILLINGHAM LIMITED, PRINTERS & PUBLISHERS ADELAIDE, SO AUS. Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. Vol eebit Plate XXX VILE Melaleuca halmaturorum F.v. DM. HUSSEY & GILLINGHAM LIMITED, PRINTERS & PUBLISHERS ADELAIDE, SO. AJS. xy ° Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. Vol. XLITI., Plate XXXIX. J. R. Kinghorn, Austr. Mus., del, UE a a a HUSSEY & GILLINGHAM LIMITED, PRINTERS & PUBLISHERS ADELAIDE, SO. AUS. - ‘ , . ' * fe ’ S . 6 \ oy 4 - Pi * ¥ i * ie ioe Be . - «4 ’ «- = Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. Vol. XLIII., Plate XL. 4 4 i LE: © i: J. R, Kinghorn, Austr. Mus., del. HUSSEY & GILLINGHAM LIMITED, PRINTERS & PUSLISHERS ADELA'DE, SO. AUG. Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. Vol! XLIII., Plate XLI. HUSSEY & GILLINGHAM LIMITED, PR NTERS & PUBLISHERS ADELAIDE, SQ. AUS. Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. Vol. XLIII., Plate XLII. MUSSEY & GILLINGHAM LIMITED, PRINTERS & PUBLISHERS ADELAIDE, SO. AUS. VER0o, Sir Jos. ich ahs oy Notice Gi EL C. ‘Stirling) ~Epeuist, Ar. G.: ‘Vitality of Seeds ... 9 CLELAND, Dr. J. Burton, and Epwin Cupet: Australian Fungi: =f Notes and Descriptions, No. 2. The Sclerotia-forming oly- pores of Australia. Plates i. tov. ~~ Brack, J. M.: Additions to the Flora of South Australia, No. 15) Plates vi. to vill. -... = Howocutn, Pror.. WALTER: Geological Memoranda (First Con-. a tribution). Plate ix. - oe ASHBY, Epwin: A Review of the Genus Lor icella ‘(Order Polyplacophora), with Notes on Features Previously Unno’ ed — and Description of a New Species. Plate x. ... : Asupy, Epwin: Notes on Australian Polyplacophora, capes Descriptions of Two New Genera, a New Variety, and the _ Description, and Proposed Recognition of Mr. _Beduall’s oho Stenochiton pilsbryanus. Plate xi, — . ee ~ Puutemne, Dr. R. H.: A New Species of Agunippe frou Kangaroo - pi ; Island. © Plate xi. ~~... Relea Wuitst, Cart. S. A.: Notes on the Occurrence ‘of Aboriginal | ‘! ‘Remains below Marine Deposfts at the os eae ‘Fulham, Pe near Adelaide ... oe -HowcuHin, Pror. Water + Supplementary Notes on. the. Dobe rence of Aboriginal Remains discovered by Capt. S. A. White. at Fulham (described in the preceding EMERY: with Remarks’ on the Geological Section ... f ~ Butt, Dr. Liaonen.B.: A Contribution to ‘ihe Study. ‘of : - se ronemiasis: A ‘Clinical, Pathological, and Experimental Ge “Investigation of a Granulomatous Condition of the. ee Suse Habronemic granuloma. Plates xili. to xv. ...0 0 «4m _. Rows, A.: The Phaestos Disk: its Cypriote Origin. “Plates XVE bo KRM Gee, 2. Siem TILEY, C._E.: The Occurrence and Origin aS: Certain Quartz Bae “Tourmaline Nodules in the Granite of Cape Willoughby. = Plates xxiii. and xxiv. (Communicated by Prof. Howchin) ~ 1 ; Lea, AntHuR M.: Notes on Some Miscellaneous Coleoptera, Se "Deseriptions ‘of New Species, Part v. Plates xxv. to xxvii. | CreLanp, Dr. J. Burton, and. Epwin CHeex: Australian Fungi: ae Notes and Descriptions, No. 3. - Plates xxviii. and xxix. » Trntzy, C, E.: The Petr ology of the Granitic Mass of Cape " loughby, Kangaroo Island, Part 1. Plates xxx. and x: and 2 Maps. (Communicated by Prof. Howchin) ano Eston, Atpert H.: Australian Coleoptera, Part i. ... Buack, J. M.: Additions to the Flora of South Australia, ‘No. Plate ao 4 | tein SET: . Buck, J. M.: A Revision ‘of-the Australian Salicornieae.. ‘Plates XXXiii,” to XXXV1l, wise ne a3) Curet, Epwin: Notes on Three Species of. Melaleuca. Plate Bs X¥XViii. (Communicated | by J. M. Black) -... a Bi IirHeripGe, R., jun.: The Cambrian Trilobites of Australia ana’ ; Tasmania. Piles XxxIx. and xl. : _Asusy, Epwin: Descriptions of Six New Spacies’ ‘of ‘Adsbralica ej Polyplacophora (Four Avanthochitons and Two Callisto- ; chitons), with other Notes. Plates xli. and xlii. ... CuarMAN, Pror. R. W.: Se Pr cg tee “a Some. South Australian- -crown Pines Sar MiIscELLANEA ee ee a ABSTRACT or PROCEEDINGS i. oa By, ANNUAL REPORT -BALANCE-SHEETS © Donations to Liprary - List or Mrmpers ... : Ge iy ee — > 7a Naturalists’ Section : Annual Bépokt, ‘ete. nae Fa: ~ Thirtieth Annual Report of cs Naive: ge 43 and. Protection Committee ... . pre “ INDEX “ ; - ok re@Q (32 May ty heaton, onsay 8 se eiatenta) Tt) bishshishideee! (| L! 4 wap Aan, ,arae ae bole hl ltl Spat 44s saa* a ack PLL) bololaer AAA Aap: peaabte gph OAStsensAA, la | ype ss Anal) T ida eet Bria? A TT wags ' Apoiiaasen tT lait I TT io aa ata) hl ane vA a Pabe nanan naman af ye quae” i{LLVyy Ramel Sl ATT Dis ee neal . Namohtag AE aN ! ) evy e a THT TTT] ine Ae mBRRDRT Sastre oka, PART VL SARRRAWARARRS AAAS: Hy Ai: 7 «™ “pe Maha al 2 ‘a ‘a, % ale nl Adi ae my . ae! Lal delete Shel RELL fab . Haste iia ! anen is | TT AAA Moa all abies AW LD owl! Rat adeas Mail ALT tate Telott oe » PN a . a ~ MAUR GAR Ata name, APRRe on, Aube : merece ERE ph ty Lhe ‘ Pp r } ; a F ie Se anuiaiouas,: NASEE TAL aml FTP EL plnntsaatin +p 1 a Ata 4 at heahe : j Re ae Ltiewcart «pa ae? a) Laaaaaas so oe th » Oare lay LT YYy Dh aastsananeenaalnnn es 4 i Om gy Balak f ry ere FIR 7 >| Tell LLY | ae =, AN neat Ontbteadies | a | le 3 nA? Vat *Mnaseee Pirte@aenar,, aks Mf Vaya) aa In iw ~ ew . ae Lt Lala it raat eal mera: ae xe Z be ; RR eure ee De ee Opa et yn ~ art] LTP. | absAsnma hiss ApQane ) [A he 2 Tabata pe Psi fy bi me w yest ty ow Tees ila Renata naa | i» | A SA a lS » ve . ‘ = \ ~~ S , ~~ 4 AD aa AR N eae | abo were tray Leen TOON nee z ale as ee eee | | hey iam YE a2. ae ~ meh ST pl eden ae UAE (yulanasaa A seme RRisa na Mg, ARAN D 80 ) AAA TTYTT TTA SR pAlarra\ay Rast Lt Aa Aub AAly + vil L an tN Seay, s nal PALA | | ~ LLaneninaa’s) a. jipaaAba el tt ABA ArKBA | Waal fle aeerere TTT Or RMP TTC Ranmane SA PRRBRe wa. Arras Dasaattes. || Wah A, 14'¥ Preith., wan oo vas D . E gana = evened WA Tidy s bife. is A! ea P ae IT ats, aD Pa fate. To Late . Pellets | A ph WA, 4 j ® MALTY & Ann ~ hy Tht YY YTY aeiarnt : Vays RYN Mh prnae Ay) | | ye aay Mianahs AA ' RAN ate »4. he . aan UE TT HEY : aw Ue reels NAAR, ldebh EEL thas. Lebar ude ett tet a sAkas. rn vrae / gi NN A MOR ee = mi PT TTT TH | nee hh ie ee -_=2GahA ll —— WN HI | ~ le olale biel bid fd. unt Te dete Banattic, aaa a is, i adap ear ahaa’ | legal niale 4a- a5 Wiad sorte eae: ltt A tay 1. Wake AALS 11 28) mt lh, naan aaG AAA I 3 9088 01308 615 | | | | ... ae) 2 © ASE TTY ory. A ayy , es | bfeahl | y Tween TTL AL Sab» (oS es “e spate. a a bh Ane Pr ‘i *, na iI aaa SABALI|AH= Sp J¥ a eT OL | Pa Aw _ 9 Pos Ag ee 3 ae att | “SS asate. eRe meen ||| | 5 : nN eet fe 4 A , wen it lal Qoo ie Bais Sie Sr iT PN EE 6 2 S, b. ony oe MWARRARA” iS” Nomen Tye i \ , TTI TI ipatg »S puta lia ph nadoay foe . . x 4 } o ay S30, ; or ee, ee aS ‘AS ‘Syoa? WY wif vn er ald & ee - | 4 hee oa Sod Rope % 4 ME a ae OF ae ’-w on dae’ Me k au Be, Be 5 mt